International Codes V8i

STAAD.
Pro
V8i (SELECTseries 2)
International Design Codes Manual

DAA037810-1/0003
Last updated: 6 March 2011
Copyright Information
TRADEMARK NOTICE
Bentley, the "B" Bentley logo, STAAD.Pro are registered or nonregistered
trademarks of Bentley Sytems, Inc. or Bentley Software, Inc. All other marks are the
property of their respective owners.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
© 2011, Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may only be used
pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and
proprietary information of Bentley Systems, Incorporated and/or third parties
which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not be provided or
otherwise made available without proper authorization.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Windows, Vista, SQL Server, MSDE, .NET, DirectX are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo are registered trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
International Design Codes Manual — i

RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGENDS
If this software is acquired for or on behalf of the United States of America, its
agencies and/or instrumentalities ("U.S. Government"), it is provided with
restricted rights. This software and accompanying documentation are "commercial
computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation,"
respectively, pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 227.7202, and "restricted
computer software" pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 52.227-19(a), as applicable. Use,
modification, reproduction, release, performance, display or disclosure of this
software and accompanying documentation by the U.S. Government are subject to
restrictions as set forth in this Agreement and pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 12.212,
52.227-19, 227.7202, and 1852.227-86, as applicable. Contractor/Manufacturer
is Bentley Systems, Incorporated, 685 Stockton Drive, Exton, PA 19341- 0678.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the Copyright Laws of the United States and
International treaties.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENTS

To view the End User License Agreement for this product, review: eula_en.pdf.
ii — STAAD.Pro
Table of Contents
About STAAD.Pro 2
About the STAAD.Pro Documentation 4
Getting Started and Tutorials 4
Examples Manual 4
Graphical Environment 4
Technical Reference Manual 4
International Design Codes 5
Section 1 Australian Codes 7

Australian Codes - Concrete Design per AS 3600 - 2001 9
Australian Codes - Steel Design per AS 4100 - 1998 19
Section 2 British Codes 57

British Codes - Concrete Design per BS8110 59
British Codes - Steel Design per BS5950:2000 81
British Codes - Design per BS5400 113
British Codes - Design per BS8007 119
British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel Code 123
International Design Codes Manual — iii

Section 3 Canadian Codes 153
Canadian Codes - Concrete Design per CSA Standard A23.3-94

155
Canadian Codes - Steel Design per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-

S16-01 163
Canadian Codes - Design Per Canadian Cold Formed Steel

Code S136-94 207
Canadian Codes - Wood Design Per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-

086-01 215
Section 4 Chinese Codes 247

Chinese Codes - Concrete Design Per GB50010-2002 249
Chinese Codes - Steel Design Per GBJ 50017-2003 261
Section 5 European Codes 273

European Codes - Concrete Design Per Eurocode EC2 275
European Codes - Steel Design Per Eurocode 3 283
5B.5(B).4.1 Basic stress check 313
5B.5(B).4.2 Detailed stress check 316
European Codes - Timber Design Per EC 5: Part 1-1 405
Section 6 Egyptian Codes 431

Egyptian Codes - Concrete Design Per Egyptian Code -
ECCS203 433
Egyptian Codes - Steel Design Per Egyptian Code # 205 441
Section 7 French Codes 451

French Codes - Concrete Design per B.A.E.L 453
French Codes - Steel Design per the French Code 459
Section 8 German Codes 471

German Codes - Concrete Design Per DIN 1045 473
iv — STAAD.Pro
German Codes - Steel Design Per the DIN Code 481
Section 9 Indian Codes 493

Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS456 495
Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS13920 521
Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS800:1984 547
Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS802 569
Indian Codes - Design per Indian Cold Formed Steel Code 593
Section 10 Japanese Codes 601

Japanese Codes - Concrete Design Per 1991 AIJ 603
Japanese Codes - Steel Design Per 2005 AIJ 613
Section 11 Mexican Codes 649

Mexican Codes - Concrete Design Per MEX NTC 1987 651
Mexican Codes - Steel Design Per Mexican Code 669
Section 12 Russian Codes 683

Russian Codes - Concrete Design Per Russian Code (SNiP
2.03.01-84*) 685
Russian Codes - Steel Design Per Russian Code SNiP 2.23-81*

(Edition 1999) 715
Section 13 South African Codes 737

South African Codes - Concrete Design Per SABS-0100-1 739
South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard SAB0162-

1:1993 747
Section 14 American Aluminum Code 773

Section 15 American Transmission Tower Code 791
American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE
10-97 793
International Design Codes Manual — v

American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE
Manuals and Reports 801
Section 16 Steel Design per American Petroleum Insti-

tute Code 807
Section 17 ANSI/AISC N690 Design Codes 823
ANSI/AISC N690-1994 Code 825
ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code 845
Section 18 American Society of Mechanical Engineers

– Nuclear Facility (ASME NF) Codes 869
ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes 871
ASME NF 3000 - 1989 Code 883
ASME NF 3000 - 2004 Code 897
ASME NF 3000 - 2004 Code 910
Section 19 Norwegian Codes 923

Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NS 3472 / NPD 925
Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NORSOK N-004 983
Norwegian Codes - Concrete Design per NS 3473 1008
Section 20 Cypriot Codes 1013

Cypriot Codes - Concrete Design in Cyprus 1013
Section 21 Danish Codes 1019

Danish Codes - Steel Design per DS412 1019
Section 22 Dutch Codes 1023

Dutch Codes - Steel Design per NEN 6770 1023
Section 23 Finnish Codes 1027

Finnish Codes - Concrete Design per B4 1027
Finnish Codes - Steel Design per B7 1030
vi — STAAD.Pro
Section 24 Singaporian Codes 1035
Singaporean Codes - Concrete Design per CP65 1035
Section 25 Spanish Codes 1041

Spanish Codes - Concrete Design per EHE 1041
Section 26 Swedish Codes 1045

Swedish Codes - Concrete Design per BBK 94 1045
Technical Support 1049

Index 1051
International Design Codes Manual — vii

This documentation has been prepared to provide information pertaining to the
various international codes supported by STAAD. These codes are provided as
additional codes by Research Engineers. In other words, they do not come with the
standard package. Hence, information on only some of the codes presented in this
document may be actually pertinent to the individual user's package.
This document is to be used in conjunction with the STAAD Technical Reference

Manual and the STAAD Application Examples Manual. Effort has been made to
provide some basic information about the analysis considerations and the logic
used in the design approach. A brief outline of the factors affecting the design
along with references to the corresponding clauses in the codes is also provided.
Examples are provided at the appropriate places to facilitate ease of understanding
of the usage of the commands and design parameters. Users are urged to refer to
the Examples Manual for solved problems that use the commands and features of
STAAD. Since the STAAD output contains references to the clauses in the code that
govern the design, users are urged to consult the documentation of the code of that
country for additional details on the design criteria.
International Design Codes Manual — 1

About STAAD.Pro
STAAD.Pro is a general purpose structural analysis and design program with
applications primarily in the building industry - commercial buildings, bridges and
highway structures, industrial structures, chemical plant structures, dams,
retaining walls, turbine foundations, culverts and other embedded structures, etc.
The program hence consists of the following facilities to enable this task.
1. Graphical model generation utilities as well as text editor based commands

for creating the mathematical model. Beam and column members are
represented using lines. Walls, slabs and panel type entities are represented
using triangular and quadrilateral finite elements. Solid blocks are
represented using brick elements. These utilities allow the user to create the
geometry, assign properties, orient cross sections as desired, assign
materials like steel, concrete, timber, aluminum, specify supports, apply
loads explicitly as well as have the program generate loads, design
parameters etc.
2. Analysis engines for performing linear elastic and pdelta analysis, finite
element analysis, frequency extraction, and dynamic response (spectrum,
time history, steady state, etc.).
3. Design engines for code checking and optimization of steel, aluminum and
timber members. Reinforcement calculations for concrete beams, columns,
slabs and shear walls. Design of shear and moment connections for steel
members.
4. Result viewing, result verification and report generation tools for examining
displacement diagrams, bending moment and shear force diagrams, beam,
plate and solid stress contours, etc.
5. Peripheral tools for activities like import and export of data from and to other
widely accepted formats, links with other popular softwares for niche areas
like reinforced and prestressed concrete slab design, footing design, steel
connection design, etc.
6. A library of exposed functions called OpenSTAAD which allows users to

access STAAD.Pro’s internal functions and routines as well as its graphical
commands to tap into STAAD’s database and link input and output data to
third-party software written using languages like C, C++, VB, VBA,
2 — STAAD.Pro
FORTRAN, Java, Delphi, etc. Thus, OpenSTAAD allows users to link in-house
or third-party applications with STAAD.Pro.

About the STAAD.Pro Documentation
The documentation for STAAD.Pro consists of a set of manuals as described
below. These manuals are normally provided only in the electronic format.
All the manuals can be accessed from the Help facilities of STAAD.Pro. If you want
to obtain a printed copy of the books, visit the docs.bentley.com site to check
availability and order. Bentley also supplies the manuals in the PDF format at no
cost for those who want to print them on their own. See the back cover of this
book for addresses and phone numbers.
Getting Started and Tutorials

This manual contains information on the contents of the STAAD.Pro package,
computer system requirements, installation process, copy protection issues and a
description on how to run the programs in the package. Tutorials that provide
detailed and step-by-step explanation on using the programs are also provided.
Examples Manual
This book offers examples of various problems that can be solved using the
STAAD engine. The examples represent various structural analyses and design
problems commonly encountered by structural engineers.
Graphical Environment
This document contains a detailed description of the Graphical User Interface
(GUI) of STAAD.Pro. The topics covered include model generation, structural
analysis and design, result verification, and report generation.
Technical Reference Manual

This manual deals with the theory behind the engineering calculations made by the
STAAD engine. It also includes an explanation of the commands available in the
STAAD command file.
4 — STAAD.Pro
International Design Codes
This document contains information on the various Concrete, Steel, and Aluminum
design codes, of several countries, that are implemented in STAAD.
The documentation for the STAAD.Pro Extension component(s) is available

separately.

6 — STAAD.Pro
Section 1
Australian Codes

8 — STAAD.Pro
Australian Codes - Concrete Design per AS
3600 - 2001
1A.1 Design Operations
STAAD has the capabilities for performing concrete design based on the Australian
code AS 3600-2001 Australian Standard-Concrete Structures.
1A.2 Section Types for Concrete Design

The following types of cross sections for concrete members can be designed.
l For Beams: Prismatic (Rectangular & Square)

l For Columns: Prismatic (Rectangular, Square, and Circular)
1A.3 Member Dimensions

Concrete members which will be designed by the program must have certain
section properties input under the MEMBER PROPERTY command. The following
example shows the required input:
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and
250mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width
provided, will be assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. It is absolutely
imperative that the user not provide the cross section area (AX) as an input.
1A.4 Design Parameters

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform the
design. Default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently
used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values may be changed
to suit the particular design being performed. Table 1A.1 of this manual contains a
complete list of the available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to

Australian Codes - Concrete Design per AS 3600 - 2001
declare length and force units as Millimeter and Newton before performing the
concrete design.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number
till it is specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 1A.1 - Australian Concrete Design per AS 3600 Parameters

Parameter Name Default Value Description
CODE - Must be specified as

AUSTRALIAN to invokes
design per AS 3600 -
2001.
Design Code to follow.
See section 5.52.2 of the

Technical Reference
Manual.
CLEAR 25 mm For beam members.
40 mm For column members
DEPTH YD Total depth to be used

for design. This value
defaults to YD as
provided under MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
10 — STAAD.Pro
FMC 40 N/mm2 Concrete Yield Stress.

Applicable values per
Clause 6.1.1.1 of AS
3600-2001:
20
25
32
40
50
65
FYMAIN 450 N/mm2 Yield Stress for main

reinforcing steel.
Applicable values per
Table 6.2.1 of AS 3600-
2001:
250
400
450
500
FYSEC 450 N/mm2 Yield Stress for

secondary reinforcing
steel. Applicable values
per Table 6.2.1 of AS
3600-2001:
250
400
450
500

MAXMAIN 60 mm Maximum main

reinforcement bar size.
MINMAIN 10 mm Minimum main

MAXSEC 12 mm Maximum secondary

MINSEC 8 mm Minimum secondary

RATIO 4.0 Maximum percentage of

longitudinal
reinforcement in
columns.
REINF 0.0 Tied column. A value of

1.0 will mean spiral
reinforcement.
12 — STAAD.Pro
TRACK 0.0 BEAM DESIGN:
For TRACK =
0.0, output
consists of
reinforcement
details at
START,
MIDDLE and
END.
For TRACK =
1.0, critical
moments are
printed in
addition to
TRACK 0.0
output.
For TRACK =
2.0, required
steel for
intermediate
sections
defined by
NSECTION
are printed in
addition to
TRACK 1.0
output.
COLUMN DESIGN:
With TRACK
= 0.0,
reinforcement
details are
printed.

WIDTH ZD Width to be used for

design. This value
defaults to ZD as
PROPERTIES.
1A.5 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Con-

sideration
Slenderness effects are extremely important in designing compression members.
There are two options by which the slenderness effect can be accommodated. One
option is to perform an exact analysis which will take into account the influence of
axial loads and variable moment of inertia on member stiffness and fixed end
moments, the effect of deflections on moment and forces and the effect of the
duration of loads. Another option is to approximately magnify design moments.
STAAD has been written to allow the use of the first option. To perform this type
of analysis, use the command PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS.
The PDELTA ANALYSIS will accommodate the requirements of the second- order
analysis described by AS 3600, except for the effects of the duration of the loads.
It is felt that this effect may be safely ignored because experts believe that the
effects of the duration of loads are negligible in a normal structural configuration.
Although ignoring load duration effects is somewhat of an approximation, it must

be realized that the evaluation of slenderness effects is also by an approximate
method. In this method, additional moments are calculated based on empirical
formula and assumptions on sidesway.
Considering all of the above information, a PDELTA ANALYSIS, as performed by

STAAD may be used for the design of concrete members. However the user must
note that to take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must
be provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the
fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and
moments, whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based
on the deflections. Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load
etc.) should be provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads
automatically.
14 — STAAD.Pro
1A.6 Beam Design
Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these forces, all active
beam loadings are prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different sections
of the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13 (e.g., 0., .1, .2, .25, .3,
.4, .5, .6, .7, .75, .8, .9, and 1). All of these sections are scanned to determine the
design force envelopes.
Design for Flexure
Maximum sagging (creating tensile stress at the bottom face of the beam) and
hogging (creating tensile stress at the top face) moments are calculated for all
active load cases at each of the above mentioned sections. Each of these sections is
designed to resist both of these critical sagging and hogging moments. Currently,
design of singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the section dimensions are
inadequate as a singly reinforced section, such a message will be permitted in the
output. Flexural design of beams is performed in two passes. In the first pass,
effective depths of the sections are determined with the assumption of single layer
of assumed reinforcement and reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the
preliminary design, reinforcing bars are chosen from the internal database in single
or multiple layers. The entire flexure design is performed again in a second pass
taking into account the changed effective depths of sections calculated on the basis
of reinforcement provided after the preliminary design. Final provisions of flexural
reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been made to meet the guideline for
the curtailment of reinforcements as per AS 3600. Although exact curtailment
lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (finally which will be more
or less guided by the detailer taking into account of other practical consideration),
user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at 13 equally
spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can be prepared.
Design for Shear
Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional

moments. Shear design is performed at 13 equally spaced sections (0. to 1.) for the
maximum shear forces amongst the active load cases and the associated torsional
moments. Shear capacity calculation at different sections without the shear
reinforcement is based on the actual tensile reinforcement provided by STAAD.
Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance shear forces acting on
these sections.
Example of Input Data for Beam Design:

UNIT NEWTON MMS

START CONCRETE DESIGN
CODE AUSTRALIAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FYSEC 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLEAR 25 MEM 2 TO 6
MAXMAIN 40 MEMB 2 TO 6
TRACK 1.0 MEMB 2 TO 9
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
1A.7 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial forces and biaxial moments at the ends. All active
load cases are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which yields
maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for
square, rectangular and circular sections. By default, square and rectangular
columns are designed with reinforcement distributed on each side equally. That
means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may
cause slightly conservative results in some cases. All major criteria for selecting
longitudinal and transverse reinforcement as stipulated by AS 3600 have been
taken care of in the column design of STAAD.
Example of Input Data for Column Design:
UNIT NEWTON MMS

CODE AUSTRALIAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLEAR 25 MEMB 2 TO 6
DESIGN COLUMN 2 TO 6
16 — STAAD.Pro
END CONCRETE DESIGN
1A.8 Slab/Wall Design

To design a slab or wall, it must be modeled using finite elements. The command
specifications are in accordance with Chapter 2 and Chapter 6 of the specification.
Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My. These moments are obtained
from the element force output (see Section 3.8 of the Technical Reference Manual).
The reinforcement required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal
reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as
transverse reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, MAXMAIN, MINMAIN, and
CLEAR listed in Table 1A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned
in Table 1A.1 are not applicable to slab design.
Figure 1.1 - Element moments: Longitudinal (L) and Transverse (T)
Example of Input Data for Slab/Wall Design
UNIT NEWTON MMS

CODE AUSTRALIAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 25 ALL
CLEAR 40 ALL
DESIGN ELEMENT 15 TO 20

END CONCRETE DESIGN
18 — STAAD.Pro
Australian Codes - Steel Design per AS 4100 -
1998
1B.1 General
This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of the
specifications recommended by Standards Australia for structural steel design (AS
4100 - 1998 Steel Structures) in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural
logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis and limit state method of
design. Facilities are available for member selection as well as code checking.
The design philosophy embodied in this specification is based on the concept of

limit state design. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into
consideration the limit states at which they would become unfit for their intended
use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate and
serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength
and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and
resistance factors are used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel
structures under various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of
limits being surpassed are acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads
without exceeding the limit states of strength, stability, and serviceability.
Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight
criteria as augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths,
desired section type, or other such parameters. The code checking portion of the
program checks whether code requirements for each selected section are met and
identifies the governing criteria.
The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation
of AS 4100. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying
concepts and assumptions is available in the specification document.
Strength Limit States
Strength design capacities (φRu) are calculated and compared to user-defined

design action effects (S*), so as to ensure that S* ≤ φRu in accordance with AS
4100 3.4. Details for design capacity calculations are outlined in the sections that
follow.

Australian Codes - Steel Design per AS 4100 - 1998
Deflection Limit States
STAAD.Pro’s AS 4100 implementation does not generally check deflections. It is

left to the user to check that both local member and frame deflections are within
acceptable limits.
Note: Local member deflections parallel to the local member y-axis can be
checked against a user-defined maximum “span / deflection” ratio. This can be
performed using the DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 design parameters, however this is
only available for MEMBER Design. Details are provided in the sections that
follow.
Eccentric Beam Reactions
STAAD.Pro does not automatically account for minimum eccentricity distances for
beam reactions being transferred to columns as per AS 4100 4.3.4. However
member offsets can be used to model these eccentricities.
Refer to Section 5.25 for further information on the Member Offset feature.
Limit States Not Considered
The following limit states are not directly considered in STAAD.Pro’s

implementation of AS 4100.
Table 1B.1 - Limit States Not Con-
sidered in STAAD.Pro AS 4100
Design
Limit State Code Ref-
erence
Stability AS 4100
3.3
Serviceability AS 4100
3.5
Brittle Fracture AS 4100

3.7
Fire AS 4100
20 — STAAD.Pro
Limit State Code Ref-
erence
3.9
Other Design AS 4100

Requirements 3.11
Connection Design
STAAD.Pro and Bentley’s RAM Connection program currently do not support

design of connections in accordance with AS 4100. In some cases connection
design may govern the size of members. Such considerations are not considered in
STAAD.Pro’s AS 4100 and should be checked by separately.
Bolts and Welds
Bolt holes and welds are not generally considered in STAAD.Pro’s AS 4100 member
design.
Note: NSC and NSF design parameters are used to manually specify a reduction
in net section area for compression or tension capacity calculations. These can
be used to account for bolt hole area reductions. Further details are provided in
the sections that follow.
1B.2 Analysis Methodology

Either the elastic or dynamic analysis methods may be used to obtain the forces and
moments for design as per AS 4100 section 4.4. Analysis is done for the specified
primary and repeat loading conditions. Therefore, it is your responsibility to enter
all necessary loads and load combination factors for design in accordance with the
AS/NZS 1170 Series or other relevant design codes. You are allowed complete
flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to
create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements,
regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis
may also be performed and the results combined with static analysis results.
Note: Plastic analysis and design in accordance with AS 4100 section 4.5 is not
implemented in STAAD.Pro.

Elastic Analysis
Two types of elastic analysis can be performed using STAAD.Pro in accordance

with AS 4100:
i. First Order Linear, Elastic Analysis - used to perform a regular elastic stiff-
ness analysis as per AS 4100 4.4.2.1. Refer to Section 5.37.1 of the Tech-
nical Reference Manual for additional details on this feature.
ii. Second Order PDelta Linear, Elastic Analysis - Depending on the type of
structure, a PDelta analysis may be required in order to capture second-
order effects as per AS 4100 4.4.1.2. Second-order effects can be captured
in STAAD.Pro by performing a PDelta second-order elastic analysis as per AS
4100 Appendix E. Refer to Section 5.37.2 of the Technical Reference Manual
for additional details on this feature.
Note: Moment amplification as per AS 4100 clause 4.4.2 is not

considered.
Hint: In order to correctly capture second-order effects for combination

load cases using a PDelta Analysis, the Repeat Load feature must be
used. Second-order effects will not be correctly evaluated if the Load
Combination feature is used. Load Combinations are combinations of
results where Repeat Loads instruct the program to perform the analysis
on the combined load actions. Refer to Section 5.32.11 of the Technical
Reference Manual for additional details on using Repeat Loads.
Dynamic Analysis
Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined with static
analysis results. Refer Section 5.32.10 of the Technical Reference Manual for
further information on Dynamic Loading and Analysis features.
1B.3 Member Property Specifications

For specification of member properties, either the steel section library available in
STAAD or the User Table facility may be used. The next section describes the
syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel table. For
22 — STAAD.Pro
more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical
Reference Manual.
1B.4 Built-in Steel Section Library

The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to
be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in a
database file. If called for, the properties are also used for member design. Since
the shear areas are built into these tables, shear deformation is always considered
during the analysis of these members. An example of the member property
specification in an input file is provided at the end of this section.
A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may
be obtained by using the tools of the graphical user interface.
Refer to Section 1.7.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.
Table 1B.2 - Available Australian Sections for STAAD.Pro AS 4100 Design
General Profile Australian Sec- Description
Type tions
I-SECTION WB, WC Welded beams and columns
UB, UC Universal beams and columns
T-SECTION BT, CT Tees cut from universal beams and col-

umns
CHANNEL PFC Parallel flange channels
ANGLE EA, UA Equal and unequal angles
TUBE SHS, RHS Square and rectangular hollow sec-

tions
PIPE CHS Circular hollow sections
Note: STAAD.Pro will not design the following section types to AS 4100:
Double Profiles (D), Composite Sections (C), Top Cover Plates (TC), Bottom
Cover Plates (BC), and Top & Bottom Cover Plates (TB), Double Channels (D,
BA, & FR) and Double Angles (LD & SD). Refer to Section Profile Tables in the
Graphical Environment for these options.

Hint: When adding and assigning sections using the built-in steel section
library through the Graphical Environment, STAAD.Pro’s default tables are
American. To change the default tables to Australian, select File >
Configuration from the STAAD.Pro Start page (no input file open). Set the
Default Profile Table to Australian on the Configure Program dialog Section
Profile Table.
Following are the descriptions of different types of sections.
UB Shapes
These shapes are designated in the following way.
20 TO 30 TA ST UB150X14.0
36 TO 46 TA ST UB180X16.1
UC Shapes
The designation for the UC shapes is similar to that for the UB shapes.
25 TO 35 TA ST UC100X14.8
23 56 TA ST UC310X96.8
Welded Beams
Welded Beams are designated in the following way.
25 TO 35 TA ST WB700X115
23 56 TA ST WB1200X455
Welded Columns
Welded Columns are designated in the following way.
25 TO 35 TA ST WC400X114
23 56 TA ST WC400X303
24 — STAAD.Pro
Parallel Flange Channels
Shown below is the syntax for assigning names of channel sections.
1 TO 5 TA ST PFC75
6 TO 10 TA ST PFC380
Double Channels
Back-to-back double channels, with or without a spacing between them, are

available. The letter D in front of the section name will specify a double channel.
11 TA D PFC230
17 TA D C230X75X25 SP 0.5
In the above set of commands, member 11 is a back-to-back double channel

PFC230 with no spacing in between. Member 17 is a double channel PFC300 with a
spacing of 0.5 length units between the channels.
Angles
Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle
section is specified as follows:
16 20 TA ST A30X30X6
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 30 mm and a leg thickness
of 6 mm. This specification may be used when the local Z axis corresponds to the z-
z axis specified in Chapter 2. If the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type
specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
17 21 TA RA A150X150X16
Note: Single angles must be specified with an “RA” (Single Angle w/Reverse Y-
Z Axis) in order to be designed to AS 4100. This is to ensure that the major and
minor principal axes align with the local member z and y axes respectively,
similar to other section profiles.

Double Angles
Short leg back-to-back or long leg back-to-back double angles can be specified by
means of input of the words SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In
case of an equal angle, either SD or LD will serve the purpose.
33 35 TA SD A65X50X5 SP 0.6
37 39 TA LD A75X50X6
43 TO 47 TA LD A100X75X10 SP 0.75
Tubes (Rectangular or Square Hollow Sections)
Tubes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the designation for the tube
is as shown below. This method is meant for tubes whose property name is
available in the steel table. In these examples, members 1 to 5 consist of a
2X2X0.5 inch size tube section, and members 6 to 10 consist of 10X5X0.1875 inch
size tube section. The name is obtained as 10 times the depth, 10 times the width,
and 16 times the thickness.
1 TO 5 TA ST TUB20202.5
6 TO 10 TA ST TUB100503.0
In the second method, tubes are specified by their dimensions. For example,
6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length units, and a wall
thickness of 0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be
performed for TUBE sections specified in this latter manner.
Pipes (Circular Hollow Sections)
Pipes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the designation for the pipe
is as shown below. This method is meant for pipes whose property name is
available in the steel table.
1 TO 5 TA ST PIP180X5
26 — STAAD.Pro
6 TO 10 TA ST PIP273X6.5
In the second method, pipe sections may be provided by specifying the word PIPE
followed by the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 25 length units and inside diameter of 20
length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed on pipes
specified in this latter manner.
Sample File Containing Australian Shapes
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 11 100 0 0
MEMB INCI
1 1 2 10
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES AUSTRALIAN
* UB SHAPES
1 TA ST UB200X25.4
* UC SHAPES
2 TA ST UC250X89.5
* CHANNELS
3 TA ST PFC125
* DOUBLE CHANNELS
4 TA D PFC200
* ANGLES
5 TA ST A30X30X6
* REVERSE ANGLES

6 TA RA A150X150X16
* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK TO BACK
7 TA SD A65X50X5 SP 0.6
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK TO BACK
8 TA LD A100X75X10 SP 0.75
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE HOLLOW SECTIONS)
* PIPES (CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS)
10 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
PRINT MEMB PROP
FINISH
1B.5 Section Classification

The AS 4100 specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus,
local buckling becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are classified as
compact, noncompact, or slender; depending upon their local buckling
characteristics. This classification is a function of the geometric properties of the
section. The design procedures are different depending on the section class.
STAAD determines the section classification for the standard shapes and user
specified shapes. Design is performed for all three categories of section described
above.
1B.6 Material Properties

For specification of material properties, the user can use either:
a. built-in material constants

b. user-defined materials
Refer Section 5.26.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for further information on
the Built-in Material Constants feature.
Refer Section 2.26.1 of the Technical Reference Manual for further information on
the Define Material feature.
28 — STAAD.Pro
Young’s Modulus of Elasticity (E)
STAAD.Pro’s default steel material’s E value is 205,000 MPa. However AS 4100

section 1.4 states that the modulus of elasticity should be taken as 200,000 MPa.
There are a number of options to change this value:
l change the steel material through the input file or GUI for each file created
l define a new steel material for each file created
l change the default STAAD.Pro metric E value in the file

C:/WINDOWS/STAADPRO20070.INI, going to the “[Material-Metric]” section,
and changing E1=205.0e6 to E1=200.0e6. Restart STAAD.Pro for this to
take effect.
Warning: Virtualization features of Windows Vista and Windows 7 may

require additional files to be modified. Contact Bentley Technical Support
for assistance.
1B.7 Member Resistances

The member resistance is calculated in STAAD according to the procedures outlined
in AS 4100. Calculated design capacities are compared to corresponding axial,
bending moment, and shear forces determined from the STAAD.Pro analysis. These
are used to report the fail or pass status for the members designed.
Two types of design checks are typically performed per AS 4100:
l Nominal section checks

l Nominal member checks
The nominal section capacity refers to the capacity of a cross-section to resists

applied loads, and accounts for cross-section yielding and local buckling effects.
The nominal member capacity on the other hand refers to the capacity of a member
to resist applied loads, and includes checks for global member buckling effects
including Euler buckling, lateral-torsional buckling, etc.
Axial Tension
The criteria governing the capacity of tension members are based on two limit
states per AS 4100 Section 7. The limit state of yielding of the gross section is

intended to prevent excessive elongation of the member.
The second limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective
net area φN section axial tension capacities are calculated (Cl.7.2). Through the
t
use of the NSF parameter (see Table 1B.1), you may specify the net section area.
STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a member based on these two limit states
per Cl.7.1 and Cl.7.2 respectively of AS 4100. Eccentric end connections can be
taken into account using the KT correction factor, perCl.7.3. The f yield stress is
y
based on the minimum plate yield stress. Parameters FYLD, FU, and NSF are
applicable for these calculations.
Axial Compression
The compressive strength of members is based on limit states per AS 4100 Section
6. It is taken as the lesser of nominal section capacity and nominal member
capacity. Nominal section capacity, φN , is a function of form factor (Cl.6.2.2), net
s
area of the cross section, and yield stress of the material. Through the use of the
NSC parameter (see Table 1B.1), you may specify the net section area. Note that
this parameter is different from that corresponding to tension. The program
automatically calculates the form factor. The k form factors are calculated based
f
on effective plate widths per Cl.6.2.4, and the f yield stress is based on the
y
minimum plate yield stress.
Nominal member capacity, φN , is a function of nominal section capacity and

c
member slenderness reduction factor (Cl.6.3.3). This value is calculated about
both principal x and y axes. Here, you are required to supply the value of α
b
(Cl.6.3.3) through the ALB parameter (see Table 1B.1). The effective length for the
calculation of compressive strength may be provided through the use of the
parameters KY, KZ, LY, and LZ (see Table 1B.1).
Bending
Bending capacities are calculated to AS 4100 Section 5. The allowable bending

moment of members is determined as the lesser of nominal section capacity and
nominal member capacity (ref. Cl.5.1).
The nominal section moment capacity, φM , is calculated about both principal x

s
and y axes and is the capacity to resist cross-section yielding or local buckling and
is expressed as the product of the yield stress of the material and the effective
section modulus (ref. Cl.5.2). The effective section modulus is a function of section
type (i.e., compact, noncompact, or slender) and minimum plate yield stress f .
y
30 — STAAD.Pro
The nominal member capacity depends on overall flexural-torsional buckling of the
member (ref.Cl.5.3).
Note: For sections where the web and flange yield stresses (f and f
y,web y.flange
respectively) are different, the lower of the two yield stresses is applied to both
the web and flange to determine the slenderness of these elements.
Member moment capacity, φM , is calculated about the principal x axis only (ref.
b
Cl.5.6). Critical flange effective cross-section restraints and corresponding design
segment and sub-segments are used as the basis for calculating capacities.
Interaction of Axial Force and Bending
Combined section bending and shear capacities are calculated using the shear and
bending interaction method as per Cl.5.12.3.
Note: This check is only carried out where φV section web shear capacities are
v
calculated. Refer Table 1B.6-1 for details.
The member strength for sections subjected to axial compression and uniaxial or
biaxial bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. Here, the
adequacy of a member is also examined against both section (ref. Cl.8.3.4) and
member capacity (ref.Cl.8.4.5). These account for both in-plane and out-of-plane
failures. If the summation of the left hand side of the equations, addressed by the
above clauses, exceeds 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO
parameter (see Table 1B.1), the member is considered to have FAILed under the
loading condition.
Shear
Section web shear capacity, φV , is calculated per Cl.5.11, including both shear
v
yield and shear buckling capacities. Once the capacity is obtained, the ratio of the
shear force acting on the cross section to the shear capacity of the section is
calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z-axes) exceed 1.0 or the
allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 1B.1), the section
is considered to have failed under shear.
Table 1B.6-1 below highlights which shear capacities are calculated for different
profile types.

Table 1B.3 - Section Type Shear Checks

General Profile Type Australian Shear Checks
Section
I-SECTION WB, WC, UB, Calculated for web only

UC
(i.e., parallel to minor
principal y-axis)
T-SECTION BT, CT
CHANNEL PFC
ANGLE EA, UA No checks performed
TUBE SHS, RHS Calculated parallel to both x & y

principal axes
PIPE CHS Per AS 4100 5.11.4
Note: Only unstiffened web capacities are calculated. Stiffened webs are not
considered. Bearing capacities are not considered.
Torsion
STAAD.Pro does not design sections or members for torsion for AS 4100.
1B.8 Design Parameters

The design parameters outlined in Table 1B.1 are used to control the design
procedure. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to
the program and thus allow the engineer to control the design process to suit an
application's specific needs. The design scope indicates whether design
parameters are applicable for MEMBER Design, PMEMBER Design, or both.
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently
used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design
requirements, some or all of these parameter values may be changed to exactly
model the physical structure.
32 — STAAD.Pro
Table 1B.4 - Australian Steel Design Parameters
Parameter Default Value Design Description
Name Scope

AUSTRALIAN to
invoke design per
AS 4100 - 1998.
Design Code to
follow. See section
5.48.1 of the
Technical Reference
Manual.
ALB 0.0 Member section

constant (refer cl.
6.3.3)
If ALB is 0.0, it is
automatically
calculated based on
TABLE 6.3.3(1),
6.3.3(2); otherwise
the input value is
used.
ALM 0.0 Moment

modification factor
(refer cl. 5.6.1.1)
If ALM is 0.0, it is
automatically
calculated based
cl.5.6.1.1; otherwise
the input value is
used.
BEAM 0.0 0.0 = design only

for end moments
and those at
locations specified
by SECTION


Name Scope
command.
1.0 = Perform
design for moments
at twelfth points
along the beam.
DFF None (Mandatory Analytical “Deflection Length”/

for deflection members Maximum Allowable
check) only local deflection.
DJ1 Start Joint of Joint No. denoting

member start point for
calculation of
“deflection length”
DJ2 End Joint of Joint No. denoting

member end point for
calculation of
“deflection length”
DMAX 45.0 [in.] Maximum allowable

depth (Applicable
for member
selection)
DMIN 0.0 [in.] Minimum required

depth (Applicable
for member
selection)
EEC 0.0 Physical Used to specify the

members type of end con-
only nection to account
for eccentric con-
nection effects for
compression and ten-
sion members.
IST 1 Steel type - 1 - SR,

2 - HR, 3 - CF, 4 -
34 — STAAD.Pro
Name Scope
LW, 5 - HW
FU 500.0 [MPa] Ultimate strength of

steel.
FYLD 250.0 [MPa] Yield strength of

steel.
KT 1.0 Correction factor for

distribution of forces
(refer cl. 7.2)
KY 1.0 K value for general

column flexural
buckling about the
local Y-axis. Used to
calculate
slenderness ratio.
KZ 1.0 K value for general

column flexural
buckling about the
local Z-axis. Used to
calculate
slenderness ratio.
LHT 0 Physical Load height position

members as described in Table
only 5.6.3(2) of AS
4100:1998
0 = at
Shear
center
1 = At
top
flange
LY Member Length Length for general

column flexural


Name Scope
buckling about the

local Y-axis. Used to
calculate
slenderness ratio.
LZ Member Length Length for general

column flexural
buckling about the
local Z-axis. Used to
calculate
slenderness ratio.
MAIN 0.0 0.0 = Check

slenderness ratio
against the limits.
l Default limit
for com-
pression =
180.0
l Default limit in
tension =
400.0
1.0 = Suppress the

slenderness ratio
check.
Any value greater

than 1.0 is used as
the limit for
slenderness in
compression.
NSC 1.0 Net section factor for

compression
members = An / Ag
(refer cl. 6.2.1)
36 — STAAD.Pro
Name Scope
NSF 1.0 Net section factor for

tension members.
PBRACE None Physical Refer to section

members 1B.11 for details on
only the PBRACE param-
eter.
PHI 0.9 Capacity reduction

factor
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of

actual load effect to
the design strength.
SGR 0 Steel Grade. Refer to

Note a below.
0=
Normal
grade
1 = High
strength
grade of
steel
SKT 1.0 A twist restraint fac-

tor given in Table
5.6.3(1)
SKL 1.0 A load height factor

given in Table
5.6.3(2)
SKR 1.0 A lateral rotation

restraint factor given
in Table 5.6.3(3)
TEE 0.0 Physical Used to specify

members whether eccentric
only


Name Scope
effects for tension

members are
checked based on
simplified kt cor-
rections factors to
AS 4100 7.3.2, or by
using calculated
eccentric moments
in combination with
axial tension per AS
4100 Section 8.
TMAIN 180.0 Slenderness limit in

tension. Slenderness
limit is checked
based MAIN param-
eter.
TRACK 0.0 Output detail
0.0 =
Report
only
minimum
design
results.
1.0 =
Report
design
strengths
also.
2.0 =
Provide
full
details of
design.
UNB Member Length Unsupported length
38 — STAAD.Pro
Name Scope
in bending
compression of the
bottom flange for
calculating moment
resistance.
UNT Member Length Unsupported length

in bending
compression of the
top flange for
calculating moment
resistance.
Notes
a. Deflection calculations
b. LHT Parameter
If the shear force is constant within the segment, longitudinal position of the
load is assumed to be at the segment end.
If there is any variation of the shear force and the load is acting downward
determined from shear force variation and load height parameter indicates
the load is acting on top flange (flange at the positive local y axis) and
restraints at the end of the segment is not FU (FRU) or PU (PRU) Kl is assumed
to be 1.4.
If there is any variation of the shear force and the load is acting upward
determined from shear force variation and load height parameter indicates
the load is acting on top flange (flange at the positive local y axis) and
restraints at the end of the segment is not FU (FRU) or PU (PRU) Kl is assumed
to be 1.0 as the load acting at the top flange is contributing to stabilize
against local torsional buckling.
c. SGR Parameter

AS 4100 defines the values of steel grades that are used as either normal
steel or high grade steel. The following table explains the material values
used when either option is specified for a particular shape:
Table 1B.5 - Steel Grades used for the SGR Parameter
Section Type SGR Value Steel
Grade
Used
WB, WC, Tee section cut from WB 0 (Normal) 300

and WC WB, WC, Tee section cut
from WB and WC 1 (High) 400
UB, UC, Tee section cut from UB and 0 (Normal) 300

UC, EA, UA and all UPT sections UB,
UC, Tee section cut from UB and UC, 1 (High) 350
EA, UA and all UPT sections
Pipe, Tube, CHS, RHS, SHS Pipe, 0 (Normal) 250

Tube, CHS, RHS, SHS
1 (High) 350
Note: If a value for the FYLD parameter has been specified, then that

value will be used. Otherwise, the SGR value will be used to determine
the yeild strength and tensile strength values for the steel. based on
maximum thickness of the individual elements of the section. Only for
shear capacity calculation web thickness is used. Similarly, Tensile
Strength is determined either from FU parameter or from SGR parameter.
Warning: A check is introduced to see if yield stress is more than 450

MPa or not. If it is, a warning is issued and the yield stress is set to 450
MPa.
The following example uses the Member design facility in STAAD.Pro. However, it
is strongly recommended to use the Physical member design capabilities for
AS 4100:
PARAMETER 1
CODE AUSTRALIAN
ALB 0.0 MEMBER ALL
40 — STAAD.Pro
ALM 1.13 MEMBER ALL
BEAM 1.0 MEMBER ALL
DFF 250.0 MEMBER ALL
DMAX 0.4 MEMBER ALL
DMIN 0.25 MEMBER ALL
FU 400.0 MEMBER ALL
FYLD 310.0 MEMBER ALL
IST 2.0 MEMBER ALL
KT 0.85 MEMBER ALL
KX 0.75 MEMBER ALL
KY 1.0 MEMBER ALL
LX 4.5 MEMBER ALL
LY 6.0 MEMBER ALL
MAIN 1.0 MEMBER ALL
TMAIN 135.0 MEMBER ALL
NSC 0.9 MEMBER ALL
NSF 1.0 MEMBER ALL
PHI 0.9 MEMBER ALL
RATIO 0.9 MEMBER ALL
SGR 1.0 MEMBER ALL
SKT 1.0 MEMBER ALL
SKL 1.0 MEMBER ALL
SKR 1.0 MEMBER ALL
TRACK 2.0 MEMBER ALL
UNB 3.4 MEMBER ALL
UNT 6.8 MEMBER ALL
CHECK CODE MEMBER ALL

1B.9 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to evaluate whether the provided section
properties of the members are adequate for the specified loads as per AS 4100
requirements.
Hint: The member selection facility can be used to instruct the program to
select a different section if the specified section is found to be inadequate.
Code checking for an analytical member is done using forces and moments at
every twelfth point along the beam. The code checking output labels the members
as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case,
location (distance from the start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and
moments are also printed. The extent of detail of the output can be controlled by
using the TRACK parameter.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on
Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for
details the specification of the Code Checking command.
Example of commands for code checking:
UNIT NEWTON METER

PARAMETER
CODE AUSTRALIAN
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 3 4
Note: Code checking cannot be performed on composite and prismatic

sections.
42 — STAAD.Pro
Physical Members
For physical members (PMEMBERs), code checks are performed at section stations
positioned at 1/12th points along each analytical member included in the PMEMBER.
It is up to you to determine if these locations cover critical sections for design, and
adjust as necessary. The number of stations for PMEMBER Design cannot be altered,
however the analytical members can be split so that in effect more stations are
checked for a PMEMBER.
For each section station along a PMEMBER, section capacity checks are carried for
design actions at that station location. Member capacity checks are also carried out
for each station. For these the program searches each side of the station to find
adjacent effective restraints and design forces and moments. This allows the
program to determine the segment / sub-segment that the section station resides
in, and then proceeds to calculate the member capacities. Enough section stations
should be included to capture all segments / sub-segments for checking.
Note: When checking combined actions for the section capacities, the design
actions at the section station are used. However when checking combined
actions for the member capacities, the maximum forces from anywhere along
the segment / sub-segment being considered are used. This is as stipulated in
AS 4100 8.2.
The output reports whether the member has PASSed or FAILed the design checks,
as well as the critical condition, critical load case, magnitudes of design actions for
the most critical cross-section location (distance from the start joint), and complete
calculations for design. The TRACK design parameter can be used to control the
level of detail provided in the output. Color-coded results can also be viewed in the
GUI’s Post Processing Beam | Unity Check page.
In some cases some of the output will report “N/A” values. This occurs where a
calculation does not apply to a member. For example if a member never goes into
tension then no values can be reported in the tension capacity output sections.
Note: As per AS 4100 1.4, the TRACK 2.0 detailed level of output for
PMEMBER Design uses x and y subscripts to refer to major and minor principal
axes respectively. These differ to STAAD.Pro local member axes, where z and y
refer to major and minor principal axes.

1B.10 Member Selection

This process incrementally checks increasing section profile sizes until a size is
found that is AS 4100 compliant, or the largest section has been checked. Only
section profiles of the same type as modeled are incrementally checked, with the
increasing sizes based on a least weight per unit length criteria.
For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected
for it. Selection of members whose properties are originally provided from a user
table will be limited to sections in the user table.
Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for
details the specification of the Member Selection command.
The design calculations for Member Selection are the same as for Code Checking.
Hint: A Fixed Group command is also available, and can be used to force all
members within a user-defined group to take the same section size based on
the most critical governing design criteria for all members within that group.
This is particularly useful when you want to use the Member Selection feature,
but want a group of elements to have the same size. Refer to Section 5.49 of
the Technical Reference Manual for information on using this feature.
Note: Member Selection will change member sizes, and hence will change the
structure’s stiffness matrix. In order to correctly account for this, a subsequent
analysis and Code Check should be performed to ensure that the final structure
is acceptable. This may need to be carried out over several iterations.
Example of commands for member selection:
UNIT NEWTON METER

PARAMETER
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
SELECT MEMB 3 4
44 — STAAD.Pro
Note: Composite and prismatic sections cannot be selected.
1B.11 Tabulated Results of Steel Design

Results of code checking and member selection are presented in a tabular format.
The term CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the AS 4100 specification which
governs the design.
1B.12 Physical Member Design

There are two methods available in STAAD.Pro for checking members against the
requirements of AS 4100:
a. Analytical member method

b. Physical member method
Herein these are referred to as MEMBER Design and PMEMBER Design respectively.
Note: This feature requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build 2007.07 or

higher.
Traditionally STAAD.Pro performed code checks based on single analytical

members (i.e., single members between two nodes). This implementation remains
in place as shown in the example in Section 1B.8. Physical Member (PMEMBER)
Design on the other hand allows you to group single or multiple analytical
members into a single physical design member for the purposes of design to AS
4100.
PMEMBER Design also has additional features, including:
l automated steel grades based on section type;

l automated tensile stress (f ) and yield stress (f ) values based on plate thick-
u y
nesses;
l automated segment / sub-segment design;
l improved detailed design calculation output; and
Thus, it is strongly recommended that PMEMBER Design be used, even for the
design of single analytical members.

Modeling with Physical Members
Physical Members may be grouped by either of the following methods:
l STAAD.Pro Editor - Directly specify physical members in the input file. Refer
to Section 5.16.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional infor-
mation.
l Graphical Environment - Using the tools in the Steel Design toolbar,
members can be manually or automatically formed. Refer to Section 1.4 of
the Graphical Environment manual for additional information.
Note: When creating PMEMBERs for AS 4100, this must be performed in

STAAD.Pro’s Modeling mode. Do not use the Steel Design mode.
Segment and Sub-Segment Layout
For calculation of member bending capacities about the principal x-axis, the
PMEMBER Design uses the concept of segment / sub-segment design. By default
PMEMBERs are automatically broken up into design segments and sub-segments
based on calculated effective restraints. User-defined restraints assigned using the
PBRACE design parameter are checked to see if they are effective (i.e., if they are
placed on the critical flange as per AS 4100 5.5). Restraints not applied to the
critical flange are ineffective and hence are completely ignored.
Refer to Section 1B.7 for further information on how user-defined restraints are
applied using the PBRACE design parameter, including available restraint types,
and restraint layout rules.
Note: Segment and sub-segment layouts for PMEMBERs may change for
different load cases considered for design. Some restraints may be effective for
one particular load case as they are found to apply to the critical flange,
however for another load case may be found not to act on the critical flange,
and found to be ineffective. In other words the critical flange can change for
each load case considered.
Typically the critical flange will be the compression flange, except for segments
with a “U” restraint at one end, in which case it will be the tension flange (as is the
case for a cantilever).
46 — STAAD.Pro
The PMEMBER Design uses the following routine to determine effective cross-
section restraints for each load case considered:
i. first all user-defined restraints are checked to see if they are applied to the
compression flange, with those that aren’t ignored;
ii. next a check is made to see if a “U” type restraint is found at either end of the
PMEMBER. If this is the case then any adjacent “L” restraints up to the next
“F”, “FR”, “P” or “PR” restraint are also ignored, regardless of whether they
are placed on the critical or non-critical flange. Refer AS 4100 5.4.2.4.
The compression flange in step 1 of the routine above is calculated based on the
bending moments at the locations of the restraints being considered. If the bending
moment is zero at the same location as a restraint then the following method is
used to determine which flange is critical at the zero moment location:
a. If the zero moment is at the end of the PMEMBER, then the compression
flange is based on the bending moment at a small increment from then end;
b. If the zero moment is along the PMEMBER and is a peak value, then the com-
pression flange is based on the bending moment at a small increment from
that location;
c. If neither 1 or 2 above is valid, then the stiffer of the restraints at that location
is taken. The stiffness of different restraint types from the most stiff to least
stiff are taken as outlined in Table 1B.9-3.
Table 1B.6 - Assumed Order of
Restraint Stiffness for Zero
Moment Critical Flange
Stiffness Restraint Type
Most Stiff FR
PR
Least Stiff None

Once the effective restraints have been determined, the PMEMBER is divided into
segments bounded by “F”, “P”, “FR”, “PR” or “U” effective restraints. These
segments are then further divided into sub-segments by effective “L” restraints.
Note: Sub-segment lengths are not automatically checked to determine if they

provide full lateral restraint as per AS 4100 5.3.2.4.
For design of cantilevers, the free tip should have user-defined “U” restraints
applied to both top and bottom flanges.
Note: If the effective restraints for any load case consist of “U” or “L” restraints
only, an error will be reported.
Physical Member Restraints Specification
The PBRACE parameter is used to specify the restraint condition along the top and
bottom flange of a PMEMBER.
General Format
PBRACE { TOP | BOTTOM } f1 r1 f2 r2 … f52 r52 (PMEMB pmember-

list)
Where:
f is a fraction of the PMEMBER length where restraint condition is

n
being specified. This value is any ratio between 0.0 and 1.0.
r is one of the possible restraint condition as in the following:

n
Table 1B.7 - Physical Member Restraint Types
Designation, Restraint Description
r Type
1
F Fully
restrained
P Partially
restrained
48 — STAAD.Pro
Designation, Restraint Description
r Type
1
L Laterally Cannot be specified at
restrained the ends of design
members.
U Unrestrained Can only be applied at

the ends of design
members, and must be
applied to both flanges
to be effective.
Warning: Both top

and bottom flanges
can not be
unrestrained at the
same location (as
this is unstable).
FR Fully and
rotationally
restrained
PR Partially and
rotationally
restrained
C Continuously The flange is assumed

restrained to be continuously sup-
ported at that flange up
to next restraint loca-
tion. For continuously
supported flange
unbraced length is
assumed to be zero.
Example
PBRACE TOP 0.85 FR 0.33 PR 0.33 PR 0.25 F 0.75 L 0.5 PR 1.0 U 0.0

U
PBRACE BOTTOM 0.75 L 0.0 U 0.25 P 0.5 L -
1.0 U PMEMB 3 7
Description
Refer to AS 4100 Section 5.5 for a full definition of the critical flange. Typically this
will be the compression flange, except for segments with U restraint at one end,
then it will be the tension flange (as is the case for cantilever portion at the end).
l when gravity loads are dominant (i.e., negative local y-axis direction), the
critical flange of a segment shall be the top flange (i.e., tension).
l when upward wind loads are dominant (i.e., positive local y-axis direction),
the critical flange shall be the bottom flange (i.e., tension).
Design physical members are divided into segments by “F”, “P”, “FR”, “PR” or “U”
effective section restraints. Segments are further broken down into sub-segments
by “L” restraints, but only if the “L” restraints are deemed to be “effective”. “L”
restraints are only considered to be effective when positioned on the “critical”
flange between “F”, “P”, “FR” or “FP” restraints. If an “L” restraint is positioned on
the non-critical flange it shall be completely ignored. Further, if an “L” restraint is
positioned between a “U” and an “F”, “P”, “FR” or “PR” restraint, it shall be ignored
(regardless of whether it is on the critical or non-critical flange).
Design members must have either a F, P, FR, PR, or U restraint specified at both
ends, for both flanges.
l If UNL is not specified, segment length is used as UNL and used as L in effec-
tive length calculation as per 5.6.3.
l If ALM i.e., α_m is not provided, automatic calculation of ALM is done based
on moments within the segment.
l If SKR i.e., Kr is not provided, it is automatically calculated based on table
5.6.3(3) considering restraint conditions are the end of the segment. If FR or
PR is found at only one of the end, Kr is assumed to be 0.85; if FR or PR is
found at both the ends, 0.70 is used as Kr.
l If SKT i.e., Kt is not provided, it is automatically calculated based on Table
5.6.3(1) considering end restraints of the segment and section geometric
information and segment length.
50 — STAAD.Pro
l If SKL i.e., Kl is not provided, it is automatically calculated based on Table
5.6.3(2) considering end restraints of the segment, Load Height Position
parameter, LHT and shear force variation within the segment.
Notes
a. If PMEMBER list is not provided, all the PMEMBERS are restrained by same
configuration.
b. It is not necessary to provide the restraint locations in sequence as the pro-
gram sorts them automatically.
c. Unless specified, PMEMBER ends are assumed to be Fully Restrained (F).
d. While designing any section of the member, effective restraints are searched
on each side of the section along the critical flange.
e. The types of restraints applied to the top and bottom flanges at each location
determines the effective section restraints. These are outlined in the table
below:
Table 1B.8 - Restraint Meanings in Critical and Noncritical
Flanges
Case Flange Restraint Restraint Effective
on a Crit- on a Non- Section
ical Critical Restraint
Flange Flange
I U U U
II 1 L Nothing L
2 Nothing L None
III 1 P or F Nothing or F
U
2 Nothing or P or F P
U

Case Flange Restraint Restraint Effective

on a Crit- on a Non- Section
ical Critical Restraint
Flange Flange
IV 1 PR or FR Nothing or FR
U
2 Nothing or PR or FR PR
U
V 1 L, P or F L, P, F, FR F
or PR
2 FR or PR L, P, F, FR FR
or PR
Note: The critical flange can change for each load case considered.
Automated PMEMBER Design Calculations
The AS 4100 PMEMBER Design automates many design calculations, including

those required for segment / sub-segment design.
Table 1B.9 - Automated PMEMBER AS 4100 Design Parameters
and Calculations
Automated PMEMBER Comments
Design Cal- Design
culations Parameter
α com- ALB
b
pression
member sec-
tion constant
per AS 4100
6.3.3.
α moment ALM Calculated based on moments dis-

m
modification tribution for individual segments
factor per AS and sub-segments.
4100
52 — STAAD.Pro
Design Cal- Design
culations Parameter
5.6.1.1.
f tensile FU Based on nominal steel grade spec-

u
strength per ified using SGR design parameter
AS 4100 and section type.
2.1.2.
f yield stress FYLD Based on nominal steel grade spec-

y
per AS 4100 ified using SGR design parameter
2.1.1. and section type.
residual IST Based on section type.

stress cat-
egory for AS
4100 Table
5.2 and AS
4100 Table
6.2.4.
correction fac- KT Based on section type and eccentric

tor for dis- end connection specified using EEC
tribution of design parameter.
forces in a
tension
member per
AS 4100 7.3.
Load height LHT LHT is used for automating

position for calculation of kl load height factors
automated for segments and sub-segments,
calculation of per AS 4100 Table 5.6.3(2).
the kl load
When LHT is set to 1.0 to specify a
height factor
top flange load height position,
per AS 4100
STAAD.Pro takes the top to be the
Table
positive local y-axis of the member.
5.6.3(2).
Note: This may not literally be


Design Cal- Design
culations Parameter
the top flange for say a column

or beam with a beta angle. The
local member axes can be
viewed in the GUI by selecting
“Beam Orientation” in the
Diagrams Labels dialog (or
Ctrl+O keyboard shortcut).
To automate kl using AS 4100

Table 5.6.3(2), the longitudinal
position of the load also needs to
be considered, i.e., as either “within
segment” or “at segment end”.
To determine which of these

applies, the shear forces at the ends
of each design segment / sub-
segment is considered. If the shear
force is found to have the same
direction and magnitude at both
ends, it is assumed that loads act at
the segment end.
If on the other hand the shear force

at each end is found to have
different directions or magnitudes,
loads are assumed to act within the
segment.
Note: The above method

includes an allowance for the
self-weight of the member to be
considered, as the self-weight
always acts through the shear
center.
54 — STAAD.Pro
Design Cal- Design
culations Parameter
The net sum of the end shears is

also used to determine if the load is
acting in the positive or negative
local member y-axis direction. If
LHT is set to 1.0 for top flange
loading, the net sum is used to
determine whether the top flange
loading is acting to stabilise or
destabilise the member for lateral
torsional buckling. Negative local y-
axis net loads act to destabilise the
segments / sub-segments, whereas
positive local y-axis net loads act to
stabilise segments / sub-segments.
Segment and PBRACE Refer to the Segment and Sub-Seg-

sub-segment ment Layout section above for
layout. details.
Nominal steel SGR Based on section types.

grade.
k twist SKT Based on effective end restraints for

t
restraint fac- each segment / sub-segment.
tor as per AS
4100 Table
5.6.3(1).
k load height SKL Based on effective end restraints for

l
factor as per each segment / sub-segment, and
AS 4100 LHT design parameter (refer
Table above).
5.6.3(2).
k lateral rota- SKR Based on effective end restraints for

r
tion restraint each segment / sub-segment. This
factor as per is where the distinction between “F”
AS 4100 and “FR”, as well as “P” and “PR” is
used.


Design Cal- Design
culations Parameter
Table
5.6.3(3).
Example
PARAMETER 1
CODE AUSTRALIAN
DMAX 0.4 PMEMBER ALL
DMIN 0.25 PMEMBER ALL
KX 0.75 PMEMBER ALL
KY 1.0 PMEMBER ALL
LX 4.5 PMEMBER ALL
LY 6.0 PMEMBER ALL
LHT 0.0 PMEMBER ALL
NSC 0.9 PMEMBER ALL
NSF 1.0 PMEMBER ALL
PBRACE BOTTOM 0.0 F 1.0 F PMEMBER ALL
PBRACE TOP 0.0 P 0.5 L 1.0 P PMEMBER ALL
SGR 0.0 PMEMBER ALL
TRACK 2.0 PMEMBER ALL
CHECK CODE PMEMBER ALL
56 — STAAD.Pro
Section 2
British Codes

58 — STAAD.Pro
British Codes - Concrete Design per BS8110
Warning: It is strongly recommended that you perform new concrete design

using the RC Designer Module. The following is provided to allow old STAAD
files to be run.
STAAD has the capability of performing design of concrete beams, columns and
slabs according to the 1997 revision of BS8110. Given the width and depth (or
diameter for circular columns) of a section, STAAD will calculate the required
reinforcement to resist the forces and moments.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform and
control the design to BS8110. These parameters not only act as a method to input
required data for code calculations but give the Engineer control over the actual
design process. Default values of commonly used parameters for conventional
design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 2A.1 contains a complete list
of available parameters with their default values.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number till
it is specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 2A.1 - British Concrete Design BS 8110 Parameters

Parameter Default Description
Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as BRITISH to invoke

design per BS8110.
Design Code to follow. See section

5.52.2 of the Technical Reference
Manual.
BRACE 0.0 0.0 = Column braced in both

directions.
1.0 = Column unbraced about local Z


Name Value
direction only
2.0 = Column unbraced about local Y

direction only
3.0 = Column unbraced in both Y and

Z directions
CLEAR 20 mm Clearance of reinforcement measured

from concrete surface to closest bar
perimeter, in current units.
DEPTH YD Depth of concrete member, in current

units. This value default is as provided
as YD in MEMBER PROPERTIES.
EFACE 0.0 Face of support location at end of

beam, in current units.
Note: Both SFACE & EFACE must

be positive numbers.
ELY 1.0 Member length factor about local Y

direction for column design.
ELZ 1.0 Member length factor about local Z

FC 30 Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength,

N/mm2 in current units
FYMAIN 460 Yield Stress for main reinforcement, in

N/mm2 current units (For slabs, it is for
reinforcement in both directions)
FYSEC 460 Yield Stress for secondary

N/mm2 reinforcement a, in current units.
Applicable to shear bars in beams
60 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
MAXMAIN 50mm Maximum required reinforcement bar

size Acceptable bars are per MINMAIN
above.
MINMAIN 8mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size

Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10 12 16 20
25 32 40 50
MINSEC 8mm Minimum secondary bar size a.

Applicable to shear reinforcement in
beams
MMAG 1.0 Factor by which column design

moments are magnified
NSECTION 10 Number of equally-spaced sections to

be considered in finding critical
moment for beam design. The upper
limit is 20.
SERV 0.0 Serviceability checks:
0.0 = No serviceability
check performed.
1.0 = Perform
serviceability check for
beams as if they were
continuous.
2.0 = Perform
simply supported.
3.0 = Perform
cantilever beams.
SFACE 0.0 Face of support location at start of


Name Value
beam, in current units. (Only applicable

for shear - use MEMBER OFFSET for
bending )
SRA 0.0 0.0 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout

without considering torsional moment
Mxy -slabs only
-500 = Orthogonal reinforcement

layout with Mxy used to calculate Wood
& Armer moments for design.
A = skew angle considered in Wood &

Armer equations where A is the angle in
degrees.
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Critical Moment will not be

printed with beam design report.
Column design gives no detailed
results.
1.0 = For beam gives min/max steel %

and spacing. For columns gives a
detailed table of output with additional
moments calculated.
2.0 = Output of TRACK 1.0

List of design sag/hog moments and
corresponding required steel area at
each section of member
WIDTH ZD Width of concrete member, in current

as ZD in MEMBER PROPERTIES.

siderations
STAAD provides the user with two methods of accounting for the slenderness
effects in the analysis and design of concrete members. The first method is
62 — STAAD.Pro
equivalent to the procedure presented in BS8110 Part 1 1985 Section 3.8.2.2 In
this section, the code recognizes that additional moments induced by deflection are
present and states that these 'secondary' moments are accounted for by the design
formula in Section 3.8.3. This is the method used in the design for concrete in
STAAD.
Alternatively STAAD houses a PDELTA ANALYSIS facility, which allows the effects
of these second order moments to be considered in the analysis rather than the
design. In a PDELTA analysis, after solving the joint displacements of the structure,
the additional moments induced in the structure are calculated. These can be
compared to those calculated using the formulation of BS8110.

Concrete members that are to be designed by STAAD must have certain section
properties input under the MEMBER PROPERTIES command. The following
example demonstrates the required input:
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
*RECTANGULAR COLUMN 300MM WIDE X 450MM DEEP
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300.
*CIRCULAR COLUMN 300MM DIAMETER
11 13 PR YD 300.
* T-SECTION - FLANGE 1000.X 200.(YD-YB)
* - STEM 250(THICK) X 350.(DEEP)
14 PRISM YD 550. ZD 1000. YB 350. ZB 250.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth x
provided, will be assumed to be circular with 300mm diameter. Note that area (AX)
is not provided for these members. If shear area areas ( AY & AZ ) are to be
considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with YD and ZD. Also note
that if moments of inertias are not provided, the program will calculate them from
YD and ZD. Finally a T section can be considered by using the third definition
above.

2A.5 Beam Design

Beam design includes both flexure and shear. For both types of beam action, all
active beam loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes and
locate the critical sections. The total number of sections considered is ten, unless
that number is redefined with the NSECTION parameter. From the critical moment
values, the required positive and negative bar pattern is developed with cut-off
lengths calculated to include required development length.
Shear design as per BS8110 clause 3.4.5 has been followed and the procedure
includes critical shear values plus torsional moments. From these values, stirrup
sizes are calculated with proper spacing. The program will scan from each end of
the member and provide a total of two shear regions at each, depending on the
change of shear distribution along the beam. If torsion is present, the program will
also consider the provisions of BS8110 - Part 2 -section 2.4. A table of shear
and/or combined torsion is then provided with critical shear.
Stirrups not bent up bars are assumed in the design. The example output below
shows a sample output of an actual reinforcement pattern developed by STAAD.
The following annotations apply:
l LEVEL - Serial number of the bar center which may contain one or more
bar groups.
l HEIGHT - Height of bar level from the soffit of the beam in relation to its
local y axis.
l BAR INFO - Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars and
their size.
l FROM - Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the rein-
forcing bar.
l TO - Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the rein-
forcing bar.
l ANCHOR - States whether anchorage, either a hook or
l (STA,END) continuation, is needed at start (STA) or at the end (END).
The following is an example TRACK 2.0 beam design output:
====================================================================
B E A M N O. 13 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - FLEXURE
LEN - 1500. mm FY - 460. FC - 30. SIZE - 300. X 300. mm
LEVEL HEIGHT BAR INFO FROM TO ANCHOR
64 — STAAD.Pro
mm mm mm STA END
-------------------------------------------------------------------
1 29. 4- 8 MM 467. 1500. NO YES
2 264. 4- 8 MM 0. 1158. YES NO
REQUIRED REINF. STEEL SUMMARY :
-------------------------------
SECTION REINF STEEL(+VE/-VE) MOMENTS(+VE/-VE) LOAD(+VE/-
VE)
( MM ) (SQ. MM ) (KN-METER)
0. 0.0/ 184.4 0.00/ 19.71 0/ 3
125. 0.0/ 157.2 0.00/ 16.80 0/ 3
250. 0.0/ 129.9 0.00/ 13.89 0/ 3
375. 0.0/ 117.0 0.00/ 10.98 0/ 3
500. 0.0/ 117.0 0.00/ 8.07 0/ 3
625. 0.0/ 117.0 0.00/ 5.16 0/ 3
750. 0.0/ 117.0 0.00/ 2.25 0/ 3
875. 117.0/ 0.0 2.15/ 0.00 1/ 0
1000. 117.0/ 0.0 5.25/ 0.00 1/ 0
1125. 117.0/ 0.0 8.36/ 0.00 1/ 0
1250. 117.0/ 0.0 11.46/ 0.00 1/ 0
1375. 136.3/ 0.0 14.57/ 0.00 1/ 0
1500. 165.3/ 0.0 17.67/ 0.00 1/ 0
B E A M N O. 13 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - SHEAR
PROVIDE SHEAR LINKS AS FOLLOWS
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
| FROM - TO | MAX. SHEAR | LOAD | LINKS | NO. | SPACING C/C |
|----------------|------------|------|-------|-----|-------------|
| END 1 749 mm | 24.8 kN | 1 | 8 mm | 5 | 187 mm |
| 749 END 2 | 24.8 kN | 1 | 8 mm | 5 | 187 mm |
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
___ 7J____________________ 1500.X 300.X 300_____________________
8J____
|
|
||=========================================================
|
| 4No8 H 264. 0.TO 1158 | | |
|
| 5*8 c/c187 | | | 5*8
c/c187 |
| 4No8 H |29. 467.TO 1500 |
|
|
====================================================||
|
|
|_____________________________________________________________________
______|
_______________ _______________ _______________ _________
______
| | | | | | |
|

| oooo | | oooo | | oooo | |

|
| 4T8 | | 4T8 | | 4T8 | |
|
| | | | | | |
|
| | | 4T8 | | 4T8 | | 4T8
|
| | | oooo | | oooo | |
oooo |
| | | | | | |
|
|_______________| |_______________| |_______________| |________
_______|
2A.6 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial bending at the ends. All active
loadings are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which produces
maximum reinforcement is called the critical load and is displayed. The
requirements of BS8110 Part 1 - section 3.8 are followed, with the user having
control on the effective length in each direction by using the ELZ and ELY
parameters as described in Table 2A.1. Bracing conditions are controlled by using
the BRACE parameter. The program will then decide whether or not the column is
short or slender and whether it requires additional moment calculations. For
biaxial bending, the recommendations of 3.8.4.5 of the code are considered.
Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. For
rectangular and square sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be
arranged symmetrically. This causes slightly conservative results in certain cases.
Below is a typical column design results.
Using parameter TRACK 1.0, the detailed output below is obtained. TRACK 0.0
would merely give the bar configuration, required steel area and percentage,
column size and critical load case.
====================================================================
C O L U M N N O. 1 D E S I G N R E S U L T S
FY - 460. FC -30. N/MM2 SQRE SIZE - 300. X 300. MM,
AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 940. SQ. MM.
BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATION
----------------------------------------------------
12 10 MM 1.047 1 EACH END
(PROVIDE EQUAL NUMBER OF BARS AT EACH FACE)
----------------------------------------------------
|BRACED /SLENDER in z E.L.z= 4500 mm (3.8.1.3 & 5)|
66 — STAAD.Pro
|BRACED /SLENDER in y E.L.y= 4500 mm (3.8.1.3 & 5)|
|END MOMS. MZ1= -12 MZ2= -24 MY1= -15 MY2= -31|
|SLENDERNESS MOMTS. KNM: MOMZ= 2 MOMY= 2 |
|DESIGN LOADS KN METER: MOM.= 55 AXIAL LOAD= 74|
|DESIGNED CAP. KN METER: MOM.= 55 AXIAL CAP.= 74|
----------------------------------------------------
2A.7 Slab Design

Slabs are designed to BS8110 specifications. To design a slab, it must first be
modeled using finite elements. The command specifications are in accordance with
Section 5.52 of the Technical Reference Manual.
A typical example of element design output is shown in below. The reinforcement

required to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the
reinforcement required to resist the My moment is denoted as transverse
reinforcement ( Fig. 4.1 ). The following parameters are those applicable to slab
design:
l FYMAIN - Yield stress for all reinforcing steel

l FC - Concrete grade
l CLEAR - Distance from the outer surface to the edge of the bar. This is con-
sidered the same on both surfaces.
l SRA - Parameter which denotes the angle of the required transverse rein-
forcement relative to the longitudinal reinforcement for the calculation of
Wood & Armer design moments.
Other parameters, as shown in Table 2A.1 are not applicable.
Wood & Armer equations
Ref: R H WOOD CONCRETE 1968 (FEBRUARY)
If the default value of zero is used for the parameter SRA, the design will be based
on the Mx and My moments which are the direct results of STAAD analysis. The SRA
parameter (Set Reinforcement Angle) can be manipulated to introduce Wood &
Armer moments into the design replacing the pure Mx, My moments. These new
design moments allow the Mxy moment to be considered when designing the
section. Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may be considered. SRA set to -500 will
assume an orthogonal layout. If however a skew is to be considered, an angle is
given in degrees measured anticlockwise (positive) from the element local x-axis to

the reinforcement bar. The resulting Mx* and My* moments are calculated and
shown in the design format.
The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 16 mm in both directions with
the longitudinal bar being the layer closest to the slab exterior face. Typical output
is as follows:
ELEMENT DESIGN SUMMARY-BASED ON 16mm BARS
-----------------------------------------
MINIMUM AREAS ARE ACTUAL CODE MIN % REQUIREMENTS.
PRACTICAL LAYOUTS ARE AS FOLLOWS:
FY=460, 6No.16mm BARS AT 150mm C/C = 1206mm2/metre
FY=250, 4No.16mm BARS AT 250mm C/C = 804mm2/metre
ELEMENT LONG. REINF MOM-X /LOAD TRANS. REINF MOM-Y
/LOAD
(mm2/m) (kN-m/m) (mm2/m) (kN-m/m)
--------------------------------------------------------------------
------
| WOOD & ARMER RESOLVED MOMENTS FOR ELEMENT: 47 UNITS: METRE
kN |
| LOAD MX MY MXY MX* MY*/Ma* ANGLE
|
| 1 -10.441 -13.347 1.270 0.000 0.000 0.000
TOP |
| 1 -10.441 -13.347 1.270 -11.710 -14.617 0.000
BOTT |
| 3 -9.541 -11.995 0.986 0.000 0.000 0.000
TOP |
| 3 -9.541 -11.995 0.986 -10.527 -12.981 0.000
BOTT |
--------------------------------------------------------------------
------
47 TOP : 195. 0.00 / 0 195. 0.00
/ 0
BOTT: 229. -11.71 / 1 329. -14.62
/ 1
2A.8 Shear Wall Design

Design of shear walls in accordance with BS 8110 has been added to the features
of the program.
The program implements the provisions of BS 8110 for the design of shear walls.
It performs in-plane shear, compression, as well as in-plane and out-of-plane
bending design of reinforcing. The shear wall is modeled by a single or a
combination of Surface elements. The use of the Surface element enables the
designer to treat the entire wall as one entity. It greatly simplifies the modeling of
the wall and adds clarity to the analysis and design output. The results are
68 — STAAD.Pro
presented in the context of the entire wall rather than individual finite elements
thereby allowing users to quickly locate required information.
The program reports shear wall design results for each load case/combination for
user specified number of sections given by SURFACE DIVISION (default value is
10) command. The shear wall is designed at these horizontal sections. The output
includes the required horizontal and vertical distributed reinforcing, the
concentrated (in-plane bending) reinforcing and the link required due to out-of-
plane shear.
General Format
START SHEARWALL DESIGN

CODE BRITISH
FYMAIN f1
FC f2
HMIN f3
HMAX f4
VMIN f5
VMAX f6
EMIN f7
EMAX f8
LMIN f9
LMAX f10
CLEAR f11
TWOLAYERED f12
KSLENDER f13
DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST shearwall-list
END

The next table explains parameters used in the shear wall design
command block above.
Table 2A.2 - Shear Wall Design Parameters

Name Value
FYMAIN 460 Mpa Yield strength of steel, in current

units.
FC 30 Mpa Compressive strength of

concrete, in current units.
HMIN 6 Minimum size of horizontal

reinforcing bars (range 6 mm –
36 mm). If input is 6 (integer
number) the program will
assume 6 mm diameter bar.
HMAX 36 Maximum size of horizontal

reinforcing bars (range 6 mm –
36 mm). If input is 6 (integer
VMIN 6 Minimum size of vertical

reinforcing bars (range 6mm –
36mm). If input is 6 (integer
VMAX 36 Maximum size of vertical

reinforcing bars (range 6mm –
36mm). If input is 6 (integer
EMIN 6 Minimum size of vertical

reinforcing bars located in edge
70 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
zones (range 6mm – 36mm). If

input is 6 (integer number) the
program will assume 6 mm
diameter bar.
EMAX 36 Maximum size of vertical

reinforcing bars located in edge
zones (range 6mm – 36mm). If
input is 6 (integer number) the
program will assume 6 mm
diameter bar.
LMIN 6 Minimum size of links (range

6mm – 16mm). If input is 6
(integer number) the program
will assume 6 mm diameter bar.
LMAX 16 Maximum size of links (range

6mm – 16mm). If input is 6
(integer number) the program
will assume 6 mm diameter bar.
CLEAR 25 mm Clear concrete cover, in current

units.
TWOLAYERED 0 Reinforcement placement mode:
0. single layer, each direction

1. two layers, each direction
KSLENDER 1.5 Slenderness factor for finding

effective height.
The following example starts from the definition of shear wall and ends at the shear
wall design.
Example

.
SET DIVISION 12
SURFACE INCIDENCES
2 5 37 34 SUR 1
19 16 65 68 SUR 2
11 15 186 165 SUR 3
10 6 138 159 SUR 4
.
.
.
SURFACE PROPERTY
1 TO 4 THI 18
SUPPORTS
1 7 14 20 PINNED
2 TO 5 GEN PIN
6 TO 10 GEN PIN
11 TO 15 GEN PIN
19 TO 16 GEN PIN
.
.
SURFACE CONSTANTS
E 3150
POISSON 0.17
DENSITY 8.68E-005
ALPHA 5.5E-006
.
.
START SHEARWALL DES
CODE BRITISH
UNIT NEW MMS
72 — STAAD.Pro
FC 25
FYMAIN 460
TWO 1
VMIN 12
HMIN 12
EMIN 12
DESIGN SHEA LIST 1 TO 4
END
Notes
1. Command SET DIVISION 12 indicates that the surface boundary node-to-

node segments will be subdivided into 12 fragments prior to finite element
mesh generation.
2. Four surfaces are defined by the SURFACE INCIDENCES command.
3. The SUPPORTS command includes the new support generation routine. For
instance, the line 2 TO 5GEN PIN assigns pinned supports to all nodes
between nodes 2 and 5. As the node-to-node distances were previously
subdivided by the SET DIVISION 12 command, there will be an additional
11 nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As a result, all 13 nodes will be assigned
pinned supports. Please note that the additional 11 nodes are not individually
accessible to the user. They are created by the program to enable the finite
element mesh generation and to allow application of boundary constraints.
4. Surface thickness and material constants are specified by the SURFACE

PROPERTY and SURFACE CONSTANTS, respectively.
5. The shear wall design commands are listed between lines START
SHEARWALL DES and END. The CODE command selects the design code
that will be the basis for the design. For British code the parameter is
BRTISH. The DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST command is followed by a list
of previously defined Surface elements intended as shear walls and/or shear
wall components.

Technical Overview
The program implements provisions of section 3.9 of BS 8110:Part 1:1997 and

relevant provisions as referenced therein, for all active load cases. The wall is
designed as unbraced reinforced wall. The following steps are performed for each
of the horizontal sections of the wall set using the SURFACE DIVISION command
(see Description above).
Checking of slenderness limit
The slenderness checking is done for out-of-plane direction. For out-of-plane

direction, the wall is assumed to be simply supported. Hence, the provisions of
clause 3.9.3.2.2 and 3.9.4.2 are applicable. The default effective height is 1.5
times the clear height. User can change the effective height. The limit for
slenderness is as per table 3.23 for unbraced wall, which is taken as 30.
Design for in-plane bending (denoted by Mz in the shear wall force output)
Walls are assumed to be cantilever beams fixed at their base and carrying loads to
the foundation.
Extreme compression fibre to centroid of tension (concentrated) reinforcement

distance, d, is taken as 0.8 horizontal length of the wall. Flexural design of the wall
is carried out in accordance with the provisions of clause no. 3.4.4. The flexural
(concentrated vertical ) reinforcing is located at both ends (edges) of the length of
the wall. The edge reinforcement is assumed to be distributed over a length of 0.2
times horizontal length on each side. This length is inclusive of the thickness of the
wall. Minimum reinforcements are according to table 3.25.
Design for in-plane shear (denoted by Fxy in the shear wall force output)
Limit on the nominal shear strength, v is calculated as per clause no. 3.4.5.2.
Nominal shear strength of concrete is computed as per table 3.8.
The design shear stress is computed as per clause no. 3.4.5.12 taking into
consideration the effect of axial load. The area of reinforcement is calculated and
checked against the minimum area as per clause no. 3.12.7.4.
Design for compression and out-of-plane vertical bending (denoted by Fy and My

respectively in the shear wall force output)
74 — STAAD.Pro
The wall panel is designed as simply supported (at top and bottom), axially loaded
with out-of-plane uniform lateral load, with maximum moments and deflections
occurring at mid-height. Design is done as per clause no. 3.8.4 for axially loaded
column with uni-axial bending. The minimum reinforcement percentage is as per
table 3.25. The maximum reinforcement percentage of vertical reinforcement is as
per clause no. 3.12.6.3. Links if necessary are calculated as per the provisions of
clause 3.12.7.5.
Design for out-of-plane shear (denoted by Qy in the shear wall force output)
The out-of-plane shear arises from out-of-plane loading. The design shear stress is
calculated as per 3.4.5.2 and shear strength of concrete section is calculated as per
table 3.8 considering vertical reinforcement as tension reinforcement.
Shear reinforcements in the form of links are computed as per table 3.7 and the
provisions of clause 3.12.7.5.
Design for out-of-plane horizontal bending (denoted by Mx in the shear wall force
output)
The horizontal reinforcement already calculated from in-plane shear is checked

against the whole section subjected to out-of-plane bending and axial load. The
axial load in this case is the in-plane shear. The section is again designed as axially
loaded column under uni-axial bending as per the provisions of clause 3.8.4. Extra
reinforcement in the form of horizontal bars, if necessary, is reported.
Shear Wall Design With Opening
The Surface element has been enhanced to allow design of shear walls with
rectangular openings. The automatic meshing algorithm has been improved to
allow variable divisions along wall and opening(s) edges. Design and output are
available for user selected locations.
Description
Shear walls modeled in STAAD.Pro may include an unlimited number of openings.

Due to the presence of openings, the wall may comprise up with different wall
panels.
1. Shear wall set-up
Definition of a shear wall starts with a specification of the surface element

perimeter nodes, meshing divisions along node-to-node segments,

opening(s) corner coordinates, and meshing divisions of four edges of the

opening(s).
SURFACE INCIDENCE n1, ..., ni SURFACE s DIVISION sd1,
..., sdj -
RECOPENING x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3 x4 y4 z4 DIVISION
od1, ..., odk
Where:
n1, ..., ni - node numbers on the perimeter of the shear wall,
s - surface ordinal number,
sd1, ..., sdj - number of divisions for each of the node-to-node
distance on the surface perimeter,
x1 y1 z1 (...) - coordinates of the corners of the opening,
od1, ..., odk - divisions along edges of the opening.
Note: If the sd1, ..., sdj or the od1, ..., odk list does not
include all node-to-node segments, or if any of the numbers
listed equals zero, then the corresponding division number is
set to the default value (=10, or as previously input by the
SET DIVISION command).
Default locations for stress/force output, design, and design output are set
as follows:
SURFACE DIVISION X xd
SURFACE DIVISION Y yd
where:
xd - number of divisions along X axis,
yd - number of divisions along Y axis.
Note: xd and yd represent default numbers of divisions for each edge of

the surface where output is requested. The output is provided for
sections located between division segments. For example, if the number
76 — STAAD.Pro
of divisions = 2, then the output will be produced for only one section (at
the center of the edge).
2. Stress/force output printing
Values of internal forces may be printed out for any user-defined section of
the wall. The general format of the command is as follows:
PRINT SURFACE FORCE (ALONG ξ) (AT a) (BETWEEN d1, d2)
LIST s1, ...,si
where:
ξ - local axis of the surface element (X or Y),
a - distance along the ξ axis from start of the member to the
full cross-section of the wall,
d1, d2 - coordinates in the direction orthogonal to ξ, delineating a

fragment of the full cross-section for which the output is desired.**
s1, ...,si - list of surfaces for output generation
** The range currently is taken in terms of local axis. If the local axis is
directed away from the surface, the negative range is to be entered.
Note: If command ALONG is omitted, direction Y (default) is

assumed. If command AT is omitted, output is provided for all
sections along the specified (or default) edge. Number of sections
will be determined from the SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE
DIVISION Y input values. If the BETWEEN command is omitted,
the output is generated based on full cross-section width.
3. Definition of wall panels
Input syntax for panel definition is as follows:

START PANEL DEFINITION

SURFACE i PANEL j ptype x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3

z3 x4 y4 z4
ENDPANEL DEFINITION
where:
i - ordinal surface number,
j - ordinal panel number,
ptype - WALL
x1 y1 z1 (...) - coordinates of the corners of the panel
Note: Design of COLUMN and BEAM panels is currently not available.
4. Shear wall design
The program implements different provisions of design of walls as per code

BS 8110. General syntax of the design command is as follows:
(...)
DESIGN SHEARWALL (AT c) LIST s
TRACK tr
ENDSHEARWALL DESIGN
Parameter TRACK specifies how detailed the design output should be:
0 - indicates a basic set of results data (default),
1 - full design output will be generated.
If the command AT is omitted, the design proceeds for all cross sections of the
wall or panels, as applicable, defined by the SURFACE DIVISION X or
SURFACE DIVISION Y input values.
78 — STAAD.Pro
a. No panel definition.
Design is performed for the specified horizontal full cross-section, located at a

distance c from the origin of the local coordinates system. If opening is found
then reinforcement is provided along sides of openings. The area of
horizontal and vertical bars provided along edges of openings is equal to that
of the respective interrupted bars.
b. Panels have been defined.
Design is performed for all panels, for the cross-section located at a distance c
from the start of the panel.

80 — STAAD.Pro
British Codes - Steel Design per BS5950:2000
2B.1 General
The design philosophy embodied in BS5950:2000 is built around the concept of
limit state design, used today in most modern steel design codes. Structures are
designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they
become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit state are
recognized - serviceability and ultimate. The primary considerations in ultimate
limit state design are strength and stability while that in serviceability limit state is
deflection. Appropriate safety factors are used so that the chances of limits being
surpassed are acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation of BS5950:2000, members are proportioned to resist

the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength and stability.
criteria. This procedure is controlled by the designer in specification of allowable
member depths, desired section type or other such parameters. The code checking
portion of the program checks that code requirements for each selected section are
met and identifies the governing criteria.
The complete B.S.C. steel tables for both hot rolled and hollow sections are built
into the program for use in specifying member properties as well as for the actual
design process. See section 2B.4 for information regarding the referencing of these
sections. In addition to universal beams, columns, joists, piles, channels, tees,
composite sections, beams with cover plates, pipes, tubes, and angles, there is a
provision for user provided tables.
STAAD.Pro 2006 and later have the additional option to design tapered I shaped
(wide flange) beams according to Annex G of BS5950. See Section 2B.13 for a
complete description.
Single Angle Sections

Angle sections are un-symmetrical and when using BS 5950:2000 table 25 you
must consider four axes: two principal, u-u and v-v and two geometric, a-a and b-
b. The effective length for the v-v axis, Lvv, is taken as the LVV parameter or LY *
KY, if not specified. The a-a and b-b axes are determined by which leg of the angle
is fixed by the connection and should be specified using the LEG parameter, see

section 5B.6 for more information on the LEG parameter. The effective length in
the a-a axis is taken as LY * KY and the effective length in the b-b axis as LZ * KZ.
The following diagram shows the axes for angles which have been defined with
either an ST or RA specification and is connected by its longer leg (i.e., a-a axis is
parallel to the longer leg).
Figure 2.1 - Single angle sections A) ST angle & USER table angles and B) RA angle

Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design.
Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by
the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading
specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading
situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or
P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and
the results combined with static analysis results.

For specification of member properties, the steel section library available in STAAD
may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign
properties from the built-in steel table. Member properties may also be specified
using the User Table facility. Any user-defined section may be specified, except for
82 — STAAD.Pro
GENERAL or PRISMATIC sections. For more information on these facilities, refer to
Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
2B.4 Built-In Steel Section Library

during the analysis of these members.
Almost all BSI steel sections are available for input. A complete listing of the
sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained by using the
tools of the graphical user interface.
Refer to Section 1.7.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.
Following are the descriptions of different types of sections available:
Universal Beams, Columns, and Piles
All rolled universal beams, columns and pile sections are available. The following
examples illustrate the designation scheme.
20 TO 30 TA ST UB305X165X54
33 36 TA ST UC356X406X287
100 102 106 TA ST UP305X305X186
Rolled Steel Joists
Joist sections may be specified as they are listed in BSI-80 with the weight omitted.
In those cases where two joists have the same specifications but different weights,
the lighter section should be specified with an "A" at the end.
10 TO 20 TA ST JO152X127
1 2 TA ST JO127X114A

Channels
All rolled steel channel sections from the BSI table have been incorporated in
STAAD. The designation is similar to that of the joists. The same designation
scheme as in BSI tables may be used with the weight omitted.
10 TO 15 TA ST CH305X102
55 57 59 61 TA ST CH178X76
Double Channels
Back-to-back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are

available. The letter "D" in front of the section name will specify a double channel
(e.g., D CH102X51, D CH203X89, etc.)
51 52 53 TA D CH152X89
70 TO 80 TA D CH305X102 SP 5.
(specifies a double channel with a spacing of 5 length units)
Note: Face-to-face double channels can not be used in a CHECK CODE

command.
Tee Sections
Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead by referring to
the universal beam shapes from which they are cut. For example,
54 55 56 TA T UB254X102X22
(tee cut from UB254X102X22)
Angles
All equal and unequal angles are available for analysis. Two types of specifications
may be used to describe an angle section, either a standard, ST specification or
reversed angle, RA specification. Note, however, that only angles specified with an
RA specification can be designed.
84 — STAAD.Pro
The standard angle section is specified as follows:
15 20 25 TA ST UA200X150X18
This specification may be used when the local STAAD z-axis corresponds to the V-V
axis specified in the steel tables. If the local STAAD y-axis corresponds to the V-V
axis in the tables, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
35 TO 45 TA RA UA200X150X18
Double Angles
inputting the word SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an
equal angle, either LD or SD will serve the purpose. For example,
14 TO 20 TA LD UA200X200X16 SP 1.5
23 27 TA SD UA80X60X6
"SP" denotes spacing between the individual angle sections.
Note: If the section is defined from a Double Angle User Table, then the section
properties must be defined with an 11th value which defines the radius of
gyration about an individual sections’ principal v-v axis (See Technical
Reference Manual, 5.19 User Steel Table Specification)
To designate circular hollow sections from BSI tables, use PIP followed by the
numerical value of diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the
decimal section of the value provided for diameter. The following example will
illustrate the designation.
10 15 TA ST PIP213.2
(specifies a 21.3 mm dia. pipe with 3.2 mm wall thickness)
Circular hollow sections may also be provided by specifying the outside and inside
diameters of the section. For example,

(specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length
units)
Only code checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of
specification is used.
Rectangular or Square Hollow Sections (Tubes)
Designation of tubes from the BSI steel table is illustrated below:

Figure 2.2 - BSI tube nomenclature
Example:
15 TO 25 TA ST TUB160808.0
Tubes, like pipes, can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and
Thickness) and not by any table designations.

(A TUBE THAT HAS A HEIGHT OF 8, A WIDTH OF 6, AND A WALL
THICKNESS OF 0.5 LENGTH UNITS)
Note: Only code checking and no member selection is performed for TUBE
sections specified this way.
2B.5 Member Capacities

The basic measure of capacity of a beam is taken as the plastic moment of the
section. This is a significant departure from the standard practice followed in
86 — STAAD.Pro
BS449, in which the limiting condition was attainment of yield stress at the extreme
fibres of a given section. With the introduction of the plastic moment as the basic
measure of capacity, careful consideration must be given to the influence of local
buckling on moment capacity. To assist this, sections are classified as either Class
1, plastic, Class 2, compact, Class 3, semi-compact or Class 4, slender, which
governs the decision whether to use the plastic or the elastic moment capacity. The
section classification is a function of the geometric properties of the section. STAAD
is capable of determining the section classification for both hot rolled and built up
sections. In addition, for slender sections, BS5950 recommends the use of a 'stress
reduction factor' to reduce the design strength. This factor is again a function of the
geometry of the section and is automatically determined by STAAD for use in the
design process.
Axial Tension
In members with axial tension, the tensile load must not exceed the tension
capacity of the member. The tension capacity of the member is calculated on the
basis of the effective area as outlined in Section 4.6 of the code. STAAD calculates
the tension capacity of a given member per this procedure, based on a user
supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present but may be altered
by changing the input value - see Table 2B.1), proceeding with member selection
or code check accordingly. BS5950 does not have any slenderness limitations for
tension members.
Compression
Compression members must be designed so that the compression resistance of the

member is greater than the axial compressive load. Compression resistance is
determined according to the compressive strength, which is a function of the
slenderness of the gross section, the appropriate design strength and the relevant
strut characteristics. Strut characteristics take into account the considerable
influence residual rolling and welding stresses have on column behavior. Based on
data collected from extensive research, it has been determined that sections such as
tubes with low residual stresses and Universal Beams and Columns are of
intermediate performance. It has been found that I-shaped sections are less
sensitive to imperfections when constrained to fail about an axis parallel to the
flanges. These research observations are incorporated in BS5950 through the use
of four strut curves together with a selection of tables to indicate which curve to use
for a particular case. Compression strength for a particular section is calculated in

STAAD according to the procedure outlined in Annex C of BS5950 where

compression strength is seen to be a function of the appropriate Robertson
constant ( representing Strut Curve) corresponding Perry factor, limiting
slenderness of the member and appropriate design strength.
A departure from BS5950:1990, generally compression members are no longer

required to be checked for slenderness limitations, however, this option can be
included by specifying a MAIN parameter. Note, a slenderness limit of 50 is still
applied on double angles checked as battened struts as per clause 4.7.9.
Axially Loaded Members With Moments
In the case of axially loaded members with moments, the moment capacity of the
member must be calculated about both principal axes and all axial forces must be
taken into account. If the section is plastic or compact, plastic moment capacities
will constitute the basic moment capacities subject to an elastic limitation. The
purpose of this elastic limitation is to prevent plasticity at working load. For semi-
compact or slender sections, the elastic moment is used. For plastic or compact
sections with high shear loads, the plastic modulus has to be reduced to
accommodate the shear loads. The STAAD implementation of BS5950 incorporates
the procedure outlined in section 4.2.5 and 4.2.6 to calculate the appropriate
moment capacities of the section.
For members with axial tension and moment, the interaction formula as outlined in
section 4.8.2 is applied based on effective tension capacity.
For members with axial compression and moment, two principal interaction
formulae must be satisfied – Cross Section Capacity check (4.8.3.2) and the
Member Buckling Resistance check (4.8.3.3 ). Three types of approach for the
member buckling resistance check have been outlined in BS5950:2000 - the
simplified approach (4.8.3.3.1), the more exact approach (4.8.3.3.2) and Annex
I1 for stocky members. As noted in the code, in cases where neither the major axis
nor the minor axis moment approaches zero, the more exact approach may be
more conservative than the simplified approach. It has been found, however, that
this is not always the case and STAAD therefore performs both checks, comparing
the results in order that the more appropriate criteria can be used.
Additionally the equivalent moment factors, m m and m , can be specified by

x y yx
the user or calculated by the program.
Members subject to biaxial moments in the absence of both tensile and

compressive axial forces are checked using the appropriate method described
88 — STAAD.Pro
above with all axial forces set to zero. STAAD also carries out cross checks for
compression only, which for compact/plastic sections may be more critical. If this is
the case, COMPRESSION will be the critical condition reported despite the presence
of moments.
Shear
A member subjected to shear is considered adequate if the shear capacity of the

section is greater than the shear load on the member. Shear capacity is calculated in
STAAD using the procedure outlined in section 4.2.3, also 4.4.5 and Annex H3 if
appropriate, considering the appropriate shear area for the section specified.
Lateral Torsional Buckling
Since plastic moment capacity is the basic moment capacity used in BS5950,
members are likely to experience relatively large deflections. This effect, coupled
with lateral torsional buckling, may result in severe serviceability limit state. Hence,
lateral torsional buckling must be considered carefully.
The procedure to check for lateral torsional buckling as outlined in section 4.3 has
been incorporated in the STAAD implementation of BS5950. According to this
procedure, for a member subjected to moments about the major axis, the
'equivalent uniform moment' on the section must be less than the lateral torsional
buckling resistance moment. For calculation of the buckling resistance moment, the
procedure outlined in Annex B.2 has been implemented for all sections with the
exception of angles. In Annex B.2., the resistance moment is given as a function of
the elastic critical moment, Perry coefficient, and limiting equivalent slenderness,
which are calculated within the program; and the equivalent moment factor, m ,
LT
which is determined as a function of the loading configuration and the nature of the
load (stabilizing, destabilizing, etc).
RHS Sections - Additional Provisions
Rectangular Hollow sections are treated in accordance with S.C.I.

recommendations in cases when the plastic axis is in the flange. In such cases, the
following expressions are used to calculate the reduced plastic moduli:
For n ≥ 2t(D-2t)/A

For n ≥ 2t(B-2t)/A

Available design parameters to be used in conjunction with BS5950 are listed in
table 2B.1 along with their default values.
Table 2B.1 - British Steel Design BS5950:2000 Parameters

Parameter
Default Value Description
Name
Must be specified as BS5950

CODE -
Technical Reference Manual.
Distance between the

AD Depth at end/2 reference axis and the axis of
restraint. See G.2.3
Beam divisions
0. Design only for end

moments or those loca-
tions specified by the
SECTION command.
1. Calculate forces and
moments at 12th points
BEAM 3.0
along the member.
Establish the location
where Mz is the max-
imum. Use the forces
and moments at that
location. Clause checks
at one location.
90 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
2. Same as BEAM = 1.0

but additional checks
are carried out for each
end.
3. Calculate moments at
12th points along the
member. Clause checks
at each location includ-
ing the ends of the
member.
Deflection check method. See

Note 1 below.
0. Deflection check based

on the principle that
maximum deflection
CAN 0 occurs within the span
between DJ1 and DJ2.
1. Deflection check based
maximum deflection is
of the cantilever type
(see note below)
Moment calculation:
1. BS5950 per clause B.2.5

(continuous) to calculate
CB 1.0 Mb.
2. To calculate Mbs (sim-
ple) as per Clause 4.7.7
as opposed to Mb.
None "Deflection Length" / Maxm.

(Mandatory for allowable local deflection
DFF
deflection check,
TRACK 4.0) See Note 1d below.

Parameter
Name
Joint No. denoting starting

Start Joint point for calculation of
DJ1
of member "Deflection Length" . See Note
1 below.
Joint No. denoting end point

End Joint of
DJ2 for calculation of "Deflection
member
Length". See Note 1 below.
DMAX * 100.0cm Maximum allowable depth
DMIN * 0.0 cm Minimum allowable depth
Clauses 4.8.3.3.1 and

4.8.3.3.2
0.0 = Fail ratio

uses MIN of
4.8.3.3.1,
4.8.3.3.2. and
ESTIFF 0.0
Annex I1 checks.
1.0 = Fail ratio

uses MAX of
4.8.3.3.1,
4.8.3.3.2. and
Annex I1 checks.
K factor value in local y - axis.

KY 1.0
Usually, this is the minor axis.
K factor value in local z - axis.

KZ 1.0
Usually, this is the major axis.
Valid range from 0 – 7 and

10. The values correspond to
LEG 0.0 table 25 of BS5950 for
fastener conditions. See note
2 below.
92 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
Maximum of Lyy
Used in conjunction with LEG
and Lzz
for Lvv as per BS5950 table
LVV * (Lyy is a term
25 for double angles. See
used note 6 below.
by BS5950)
Length in local y - axis

(current units) to calculate
LY * Member Length
(KY)(LY)/Ryy slenderness
ratio.
Length in local z - axis

(current units) to calculate
LZ * Member Length
(KZ)(LZ)/Rzz slenderness
ratio.
Equivalent moment factor for

MLT 1.0 lateral torsional buckling as
defined in clause 4.8.3.3.4

MX 1.0 major axis flexural buckling as

MY 1.0 minor axis flexural buckling as

minor axis lateral flexural
MYX 1.0
buckling as defined in clause
4.8.3.3.4
Net section factor for tension

NSF 1.0
members.

Parameter
Name
Transverse stiffener spacing

(‘a’ in Annex H1)
PNL * 0.0 0.0 = Infinity
Any other value used in the

calculations.
Set according to
PY * Design strength of steel
steel grade (SGR)
Slenderness limit for members

with compression forces,
effective length/ radius of
gyration, for a given axis:
0.0 = Slenderness
not performed.
MAIN 0.0 1.0 = Main

structural member
(180)
2.0 = Secondary
member. (250)
3.0 = Bracing etc

(350)
Permissible ratio of the actual

RATIO 1.0
capacities.
94 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
Controls the sections to try

during a SELECT process.
0.0 = Try every

section of the
same type as
original
1.0 = Try only

those sections
SAME** 0.0
with a similar
name as original,
e.g., if the original
is an HEA 100,
then only HEA
sections will be
selected, even if
there are HEM’s in
the same table.
Identify Section type for

section classification
0.0 = Rolled
Section
SBLT 0.0
1.0 = Built up
Section
2.0 = Cold
formed section
Specifies a load case number

to provide the sway loading
SWAY none
forces in clause 4.8.3.3.4 (See
additional notes)

Parameter
Name
Steel Grade per BS4360
0.0 = Grade S
275
1.0 = Grade S
SGR 0.0 355
2.0 = Grade S
460
3.0 = As per GB

1591 – 16 Mn
0.0 = Elastic stress analysis

TB 0.0
1.0 = Plastic stress analysis
Output details
0.0 = Suppress all

member capacity
info.
1.0 = Print all

member
capacities.
TRACK 0.0
2.0 = Print
detailed design
sheet.
4.0 = Deflection
Check (separate
check to main
select / check
code)
Factor applied to unsupported

length for Lateral Torsional
UNF 1.0
Buckling effective length per
section 4.3.6.7 of BS5950.
96 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter
Name
Unsupported Length for

calculating Lateral Torsional
UNL * Member Length
Buckling resistance moment
section 4.3.6.7 of BS5950.
Weld Type, see AISC steel

design
1.0 = Closed
sections. Welding
on one side only
1.0 closed (except for webs
WELD of wide flange and
2.0 open tee sections)
2.0 = Open
sections. Welding
on both sides
(except pipes and
tubes)
* current units must be considered.
**For angles, if the original section is an equal angle, then the selected section will
be an equal angle and vice versa for unequal angles.
Note: There was an NT parameter in STAAD.Pro 2005 build 1003 which is now
automatically calculated during the design as it is load case dependant.
Notes
1. CAN, DJ1, and DJ2 – Deflection
a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two
methods. The first method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter,
is based on the local displacement. Local displacement is described in

If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever

style deflection. Let (DX1, DY1, DZ1) represent the nodal
displacements (in global axes) at the node defined by DJ1 (or in the
absence of DJ1, the start node of the member). Similarly, (DX2, DY2,
DZ2) represent the deflection values at DJ2 or the end node of the
member.
Compute Delta = SQRT((DX2 - DX1)2 + (DY2 - DY1)2 + (DZ2 - DZ1)2)
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 & DJ2 or, between start
node and end node, as the case may be.
Then, if CAN is specified a value 1, dff = L/Delta
Ratio due to deflection = DFF/dff
b. If CAN = 0, deflection length is defined as the length that is used for

calculation of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that
for most cases the “Deflection Length” will be equal to the length of the
member. However, in some situations, the “Deflection Length” may be
different. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference
line from which local deflections are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been
modeled using four joints and three members. The “Deflection Length”
for all three members will be equal to the total length of the beam in
this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to model this
situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2
should be 4.
D = Maximum local deflection for members 1, 2, and 3.
PARAMETERS
DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL
98 — STAAD.Pro
c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the
member length and local deflections will be measured from original
member line.
d. It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified, STAAD will

not perform a deflection check. This is in accordance with the fact that
there is no default value for DFF.
e. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available

parameters for steel design.
2. LEG – follows the requirements of BS5950 table 28. This table concerns the
fastener restraint conditions for angles, double angles, tee sections and
channels for slenderness. The following values are available:
Table 2B.2 - LEG Parameter values
Bold Con- LEG Param-
Clause Leg
figuration eter
short leg 1.0

(a) - 2 bolts
4.7.10.2 long leg 3.0
Single Angle short leg 0.0

(b) - 1 bolts
long leg 2.0
short leg 3.0

(a) - 2 bolts
long leg 7.0
short leg 2.0

(b) - 1 bolts
4.7.10.3 Double long leg 6.0
Angles long leg 1.0
(c) - 2 bolts
short leg 5.0
long leg 0.0

(d) - 1 bolts
short leg 4.0

Bold Con- LEG Param-

Clause Leg
figuration eter
(a) - 2 or more rows of

4.7.10.4 Chan- 1.0
bolts
nels
(b) - 1 row of bolts 0.0
(a) - 2 or more rows of

4.7.10.5 Tee Sec- bolts 1.0
tions
The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee sections are
specified in BS 5950 table 25 depending on the connection provided at the
end of the member. To define the appropriate connection, a LEG parameter
should be assigned to the member.
The following list indicates the value of the LEG parameter required to match
the BS5950 connection definition:
Clause 4.7.10.2 Single Angle:

a. 2 Bolts: Short leg = 1.0, Long Leg = 3.0
b. 1 Bolt: Short Leg = 0.0, Long Leg = 2.0
For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the geometric axes, a-a
and b-b as well as the weak v-v axis. The effective lengths of the geometric
axes are defined as:
La = KY * KY
Lb = KZ * LZ
The slenderness calculated for the v-v axis is then used to calculate the
compression strength p for the weaker principal axis (z-z for ST angles or y-
c
y for RA specified angles). The maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b
axes is used to calculate the compression strength p for the stronger
c
principal axis.
Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not known or Table
25 is not appropriate, by setting the LEG parameter to 10, slenderness is
calculated for the two principal axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is
not used.
100 — STAAD.Pro
For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 in
table 25. In addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Technical
Reference Manual section 5.19) an eleventh value, r , should be supplied at
vv
the end of the ten existing values corresponding to the radius of gyration of
the single angle making up the pair.
3. PY – Steel Design Strength
The design parameter PY should only be used when a uniform design

strength for an entire structure or a portion thereof is required. Otherwise the
value of PY will be set according to the stipulations of BS5950 table 9 in
which the design strength is seen as a function of cross sectional thickness for
a particular steel grade (SGR parameter) and particular element considered.
Generally speaking this option is not required and the program should be
allowed to ascertain the appropriate value.
4. UNL, LY, and LZ – Relevant Effective Length
The values supplied for UNL, LY and LZ should be real numbers greater than
zero in current units of length. They are supplied along with or instead of
UNF, KY and KZ (which are factors, not lengths) to define lateral torsional
buckling and compression effective lengths respectively. Please note that
both UNL or UNF and LY or KY values are required even though they are often
the same values. The former relates to compression flange restraint for lateral
torsional buckling while the latter is the unrestrained buckling length for
compression checks.
5. TRACK – Control of Output Formats
When the TRACK parameter is set to 0.0, 1.0 or 2.0, member capacities will
be printed in design related output (code check or member selection) in
kilonewtons per square metre.
TRACK 4.0 causes the design to carry out a deflection check, usually with a
different load list to the main code check. The members that are to be
checked must have the parameters, DFF, DJ1 and DJ2 set.
An example of each TRACK setting follows:
Example output for TRACK 0.0

MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================

1 ST UC305X305X118 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.769 3

179.66 C 0.00 334.46 0.00

FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST UC305X305X118 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.769 3
179.66 C 0.00 334.46 0.00
|---------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 1 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 1 |
|MCZ= 519.4 MCY= 234.3 PC= 2455.9 PT= 0.0 MB= 435.0 PV= 600.1|
| BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT = 1.00, mx = 1.00, my = 1.00, myx = 1.00 |
| PZ= 3975.00 FX/PZ = 0.05 MRZ= 516.9 MRY= 234.3 |
|---------------------------------------------------------------------|

FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST UC305X305X118 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.769 3
179.66 C 0.00 334.46 0.00
=======================================================================
MATERIAL DATA
Grade of steel = S 275
Modulus of elasticity = 210 kN/mm2
Design Strength (py) = 265 N/mm2
SECTION PROPERTIES (units - cm)
Member Length = 600.00
Gross Area = 150.00 Net Area = 127.50 Eff. Area = 150.00
z-z axis y-y axis
Moment of inertia : 27700.004 9060.001
Plastic modulus : 1960.000 895.000
Elastic modulus : 1761.526 589.460
Effective modulus : 1960.000 895.000
Shear Area : 103.471 37.740
DESIGN DATA (units - kN,m) BS5950-1/2000
Section Class : PLASTIC
Squash Load : 3975.00
Axial force/Squash load : 0.045
z-z axis y-y axis
Compression Capacity : 3551.7 2455.9
Moment Capacity : 519.4 234.3
Reduced Moment Capacity : 516.9 234.3
Shear Capacity : 1645.2 600.1
BUCKLING CALCULATIONS (units - kN,m)
(axis nomenclature as per design code)
x-x axis y-y axis
Slenderness : 44.153 77.203
Radius of gyration (cm) : 13.589 7.772
102 — STAAD.Pro
Effective Length : 6.000 6.000
LTB Moment Capacity (kNm) and LTB Length (m): 435.00, 6.000
LTB Coefficients & Associated Moments (kNm):
mLT = 1.00 : mx = 1.00 : my = 1.00 : myx = 1.00
Mlt = 334.46 : Mx = 334.46 : My = 0.00 : My = 0.00
CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (units- kN,m):
CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY
BS-4.2.3-(Y) 0.143 3 - 85.6 - - -
BS-4.3.6 0.769 3 - 85.6 - 334.5 -
BS-4.7 (C) 0.098 1 239.7 - - - -
BS-4.8.3.2 0.647 3 179.7 85.6 0.0 334.5 0.0
BS-4.8.3.3.1 0.842 3 179.7 - - 334.5 0.0
BS-4.8.3.3.2 0.842 3 179.7 - - 334.5 0.0
ANNEX I.1 0.714 3 179.7 - - 334.5 0.0
Torsion and deflections have not been considered in the design.
6. MX, MY, MYX, and MLT – Equivalent Moment Factors
The values for the equivalent moment factors can either be specified directly
by the user as a positive value between 0.4 and 1.0 for MX, MY and MYX and
0.44 and 1.0 for MLT.
The program can be used to calculate the values for the equivalent moment
factors by defining the design member with a GROUP command (see the
Technical Reference Manual section 5.16 Listing of Members/Elements/Joints
by Specification of GROUPS). The nodes along the beam can then be defined
as the location of restraint points with J settings.
Additionally for the MLT parameter, the joint can be defined as having the
upper flange restrained (positive local Y) with the a U setting or the lower
flange restrained (negative local Y) with a L setting.
For example, consider a series of 5 beam elements as a single continuous

member as shown below:

To enable the steel design, the beam needs to be defined as a group, called
MainBeam:
START GROUP DEFINITION

MEMBER
_MAINBEAM 11 2 38 12 3
END GROUP DEFINITION
Note: This can be done in the User Interface by selecting Tools >
Create New Group….
Therefore, this 5 beam member has 6 joints such that:
Joint 1 = Node 3
Joint 2 = Node 1
Joint 3 = Node 33
Joint 4 = Node 14
Joint 5 = Node 7
Joint 6 = Node 2
104 — STAAD.Pro
a. Consider MX, MY and MYX
Say that this member has been restrained in its’ major axis (local Y) only
at the ends. In the minor axis (local Z) it has been restrained at the
ends and also at node number 33 (joint 3). For local flexural buckling,
it has only been restrained at its ends. Hence:
For the major axis, local Y axis:
MX _MainBeam J1 J6
For the minor axis, local Z axis:
MY _ MainBeam J1 J3 J6
For the lateral flexural buckling, local X axis:
MYX _ MainBeam J1 J6
b. Consider MLT
Say that this member has been restrained at its’ ends against lateral torsional
buckling and the top flange has been restrained at node number 33 (joint 3)
and only the lower flange at node number 7, (joint 5). Hence:
MLT _MainBeam J1 T3 L5 J6
To split the beam into two buckling lengths for L at joint 14:
y
MY _groupname J1 J4 J6
7. SWAY – Sway Loadcase
This parameter is used to specify a load case that is to be treated as a sway

load case in the context of clause 4.8.3.3.4. This load case would be set up to
represent the k M mentioned in this clause and the steel design module
amp s
would add the forces from this load case to the forces of the other load case it
is designed for.
Note that the load case specified with this parameter will not be designed as a
separate load case. The following is the correct syntax for the parameter:

Parameter Default Value Description

Name
SWAY (load case ALL

number)
MEMBER (member list)
_(group name)
Example
SWAY 5 MEM 1 TO 10
SWAY 6 _MAINBEAMS
2B.7 Design Operations

STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for the design of structural members as
individual components of an analyzed structure. The member design facilities
provide the user with the ability to carry out a number of different design
operations. These facilities may be used selectively in accordance with the
requirements of the design problem.
The operations to perform a design are:
l Specify the load cases to be considered in the design; the default is all load
cases.
l Specify design parameter values, if different from the default values.
l Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection along with

the list of members.
These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending
upon the design requirements.
2B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to ascertain whether the provided section
properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per BS5950.
Code checking is done using the forces and moments at specific sections of the
members. If no sections are specified, the program uses the start and end forces
for code checking.
106 — STAAD.Pro
When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the
members have passed or failed the checks; the critical condition of BS5950 code
(like any of the BS5950 specifications for compression, tension, shear, etc.); the
value of the ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or
any other specified RATIO value); the governing load case, and the location
(distance from the start of the member of forces in the member where the critical
condition occurs).
Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2B.4 or
any of the user defined sections as described in Section 1.7.3 of the Technical
Reference Manual, GENERAL and ISECTION. In BS5950, these will only be
considered for design as I-shape sections.
Note: PRISMATIC sections are also not acceptable steel sections for design per
BS5950 in STAAD.Pro.

STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an
analysis has been performed, the program can select the most economical section,
i.e., the lightest section, which fulfills the code requirements for the specified
member. The section selected will be of the same type section as originally
designated for the member being designed. Member selection can also be
constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN, which limits the maximum and
minimum depth of the members.
Member selection can be performed with all the types of steel sections with the
same limitations as defined in section 2B.8 Code Checking.
Selection of members, whose properties are originally input from a user created
table, will be limited to sections in the user table.
Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are

input as prismatic or as above limitations for code checking.


For code checking or member selection, the program produces the results in a
tabulated fashion. The items in the output table are explained as follows:
a. MEMBER refers to the member number for which the design is performed.
b. TABLE refers to steel section name, which has been checked against the steel
code or has been selected.
c. RESULTS prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILED. If the RESULT
is FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member.
d. CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the BS5950 code which governs the
design.
e. RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the crit-
ical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has
passed.
f. LOADING provides the load case number, which governed the design.
g. FX, MY, and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis and the
moment in local z-axis respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the
member forces and moments (except torsion) to perform design, only FX,
MY and MZ are printed since they are the ones which are of interest, in most
cases.
h. LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the
section where design forces govern.
i. TRACK If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part
of the table and will print the allowable bending capacities in compression
(MCY & MCZ) and reduced moment capacities (MRY & MRZ), allowable axial
capacity in compression (PC) and tension (PT) and shear capacity (PV).
TRACK 2.0 will produce the design results as shown in section 2B.9.
2B.11 Plate Girders

Sections will be considered for the Plate Girder checks (BS 5950 Section 4.4) if d/t
> 70 ε for ‘rolled sections’ or d/t >62 ε for ‘welded sections’. The parameter SBLT
should be used to identify sections as rolled or welded; see the parameter list for
more information.
If the plate girder has intermediate stiffeners, the spacing is set with the PNL
parameter. These are then used to check against the code clauses ‘4.4.3.2 -
108 — STAAD.Pro
Minimum web thickness for serviceability’ and ‘4.4.3.3 - Minimum web thickness to
avoid compression flange buckling’. The following printout is then included if a
TRACK 2.0 output is selected:
Shear Buckling check is required: Vb = 1070 kN : qw = 118 N/mm2
d = 900 mm : t = 10 mm : a = 200 mm : pyf = 275 N/mm2
BS-4.4.3.2 status = PASS : BS-4.4.3.3 status = PASS
The section is then checked for shear buckling resistance using clause ‘4.4.5.2 -
Simplified method’ and the result is included in the ratio checks.
2B.12 Composite Sections

Sections that have been defined as acting compositely with a concrete flange either
from a standard database section using the CM option, or from a modified user
WIDE FLANGE database with the additional composite parameters, cannot be
designed with BS5950:2000.
2B.13 Design of Tapered Beams
Design Procedure
Sections will be checked as tapered members provided that are defined either as a
Tapered I section or from a USER table.
Example using a Tapered I section:
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 TO 5 TAPERED 100 2.5 75 25 4 25 4
Example using a USER table:
START USER TABLE

TABLE 1
UNIT CM
ISECTION
1000MM_TAPER
100 2.5 75 25 4 25 4 0 0 0

750MM_TAPER
75 2.5 50 25 4 25 4 0 0 0
END
You must specify the effective length of unrestrained compression flange using the
parameter UNL.
The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load effects, in
accordance with BS 5950-1:2000. Code checking is carried out for locations
specified by the user via the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter. The
results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a RATIO of load effect
to resistance for each member checked. The user may choose the degree of detail
in the output data by setting the TRACK parameter.
The beam is designed as other wide flange beams apart from the Lateral Torsional
Buckling check which is replaced by the Annex G.2.2. check.
Design Equations
A beam defined with tapered properties as defined above will be checked as a

regular wide flange (e.g., UB or UC), except that the following is used in place of
clause 4.3.6, the lateral torsional buckling check.
Check Moment for Taper Members as per clause G.2.2
The following criterion is checked at each defined check position in the length of
the member defined by the BEAM parameter.
M ≤ M (1 - F /P )
xi bi c c
Where:
F is the longitudinal compression at the check location;

c
M is the buckling resistance moment M from 4.3.6 for an equivalent
bi b
slenderness λ , see G.2.4.2, based on the appropriate modulus S,
TB
S , Z or Z of the cross-section at the point i considered;
eff eff
M is the moment about the major axis acting at the point i
xi
considered;
110 — STAAD.Pro
P is the compression resistance from 4.7.4 for a slenderness λ . , see
c TC y
G.2.3, based on the properties of the minimum depth of cross-section
within the segment length L
G.2.3 Slenderness lTC
λ = yλ
TC
Where:
λ = L /r
y y
Where:
a is the distance between the reference axis and the axis of restraint,
h is the distance between the shear centers of the flanges;

s
L is the length of the segment;
y
r is the radius of gyration for buckling about the minor axis;
y
x is the torsional index
G.2.4.2 Equivalent slenderness lTB for Taper members
λ = cn ν λ
TB t t
Where, for a two-flange haunch:
Where:
C is the taper factor, see G.2.5;

G.2.5 Taper factor
For an I-section with D ≥ 1.2B and x ≥ 20, the taper factor, c, is as follows:
Where:
D is the maximum depth of cross-section within the length Ly, see

max
Figure G.3;
D is the minimum depth of cross-section within the length Ly, see

min
Figure G.3;
x is the torsional index of the minimum depth cross-section, see

4.3.6.8
Otherwise, c is taken as 1.0 (unity).
112 — STAAD.Pro
British Codes - Design per BS5400
2C.1 General Comments
Note: BS5400 is an additional code available from Bentley Systems. It does not
come as standard with British versions.
The British Standard, BS5400 adopts the limit state design philosophy and is
applicable to steel, concrete and composite construction. The code is in ten parts
covering various aspects of bridge design. The implementation of part 3, Code of
practice for design of steel bridges, in STAAD is restricted in its scope to simply
supported spans. It is assumed that the depth remains constant and both
construction and composite stages of steel I-Sections can be checked. The
following sections describe in more detail features of the design process currently
available in STAAD.
2C.2 Shape Limitations

The capacity of sections could be limited by local buckling if the ratio of flange
outstand to thickness is large. In order to prevent this, the code sets limits to the
ratio as per clause 9.3.2. In the event of exceeding these limits, the design process
will terminate with reference to the clause.
2C.3 Section Class

Sections are further defined as compact or noncompact. In the case of compact
sections, the full plastic moment capacity can be attained. In the case of
noncompact sections, local buckling of elements may occur prior to reaching the
full moment capacity and for this reason the extreme fibre stresses are limited to
first yield. In STAAD, section types are determined as per clause 9.3.7 and the
checks that follow will relate to the type of section considered.
2C.4 Moment Capacity

Lateral torsional buckling may occur if a member has unrestrained elements in
compression. The code deals with this effect by limiting the compressive stress to a
value depending on the slenderness parameter which is a modified form of the ratio
Le/Ry. Le is the effective length governed by the provision of lateral restraints
satisfying the requirements of clause 9.12.1. Once the allowable compressive stress

is determined then the moment capacity appropriate to the section type can be
calculated. STAAD takes the effective length as that provided by the user,
defaulting to the length of the member during construction stage and as zero,
assuming full restraint throughout, for the composite stage. The program then
proceeds to calculate the allowable compressive stress based on appendix G7 from
which the moment capacity is then determined.
2C.5 Shear Capacity

The shear capacity, as outlined in clause is a function of the limiting shear
strength, l, which is dependant on the slenderness ratio. STAAD follows the
iterative procedure of appendix G8 to determine the limiting shear strength of the
web panel. The shear capacity is then calculated based on the formula given under
clause 9.9.2.2.
2C.6 Design Parameters

Available design parameters to be used in conjunction with BS5400 are listed in
table 2C.1. Depending on the value assigned to the 'WET' parameter, the users can
determine the stage under consideration. For a composite design check, taking
into consideration the construction stage, two separate analyses are required. In
the first, member properties are non-composite and the WET parameter is set to
1.0 . In the second, member properties should be changed to composite and the
WET parameter set to 2.0. Member properties for composite or non-composite
sections should be specified from user provided tables (refer to section 5.19 of the
manual for specification of user tables). Rolled sections, composite or non-
composite, come under WIDE FLANGE section-type and built-up sections under
ISECTION. When specifying composite properties the first parameter is assigned a
negative value and four additional parameters provided giving details of the
concrete section. See user table examples provided.
Table 2C.1 - BS5400 Design Parameters

Name Value
UNL *Member Unsupported Length for calculating

Length allowable compressive bending stress.
114 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
PY * Set according to Design Strength of

steel SGR
NSF * 1.0 Net section factor for tension

members.
SGR * 0.0 Steel Grade per BS4360
0.0 = Grade 43
1.0 = Grade 50
2.0 = Grade 55
SBLT 0.0 0.0 = Rolled Section
1.0 = Built up Section
MAIN 1.0 1.0 = Grade of concrete 30 N/mm2
2.0 = Grade of concrete 40 N/mm2
3.0 = Grade of concrete 50 N/mm2
WET 0.0 0.0 = Wet stage with no data saved for

composite stage.
1.0 = Wet stage with data saved for

composite stage.
2.0 = Composite and wet stage

combined.
3.0 = Composite stage only.
TRACK 1.0 1.0 = Print all member capacities.
0.0 = suppress all member capacities.
BEAM 0.0 MUST BE CHANGED TO 1.0 FOR ALL

RUNS
LY * Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio

Length for bending about Y-axis.


Name Value
LZ * Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio

Length for bending about Z-axis.
KY 1.0 K value for bending about Y-axis.

Usually this is minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value for bending about Z-axis.

Usually this is major axis.
STIFF 1.0 Factor of length for panel length in the

shear calculation.
* Provided in current unit systems.
2C.7 Composite Sections

The definition of composite sections has been provided for in the standard
sections definition (refer to Section 5.20.1 of the Technical Reference Manual for
details). This is purely for analysis and for obtaining the right section properties. It
uses the American requirement of 18 times depth (CT) as the effective depth. For
more control with British sections two new options are available in user provided
tables.
Wide Flange Composite
Using the standard definition of I sections in WIDE FLANGE, 4 additional values

can now be provided. The first is the width of concrete to the left of center of the
steel web (b1). The second is the concrete width to the right (b2). The third is the
concrete depth (d1) to be considered. The last is the modular ratio. The above
values are accepted in the program by adding a '-' at the first position on the first
line of data. The program now awaits four extra values on line 2 as described
above. If (-) is provided on the second line the program requires another 2
breadths + 1 thickness for the bottom plate.
ISection
The same is true for ISECTION definition in user table.
116 — STAAD.Pro
Example
UNIT CM
WIDE FLANGE
C45752
-66.5 44.98 .76 15.24 1.09 21345 645 21.3 34.185 33.223
150 150 30 10
ISECTION
PG9144
-92.05 2.15 92.05 42.05 3.66 42.05 3.66 197.9 153.9 1730
40 40 12 1
The larger British sections have been coded as USER TABLES under wide flange and
are available on request to any existing user. Please note however that composite
design is not available in this portion of STAAD.

118 — STAAD.Pro
2D.1 General Comments
Note: BS8007 is an additional code available from Bentley Systems. It does not
come as standard with British versions.
STAAD has the capability of performing concrete slab design according to BS8007.
BS8007 provides recommendations for the design of reinforced concrete structures
containing aqueous liquids. It is recommended that the design of the structure is
carried out according to BS8110, unless modified by the recommendations given in
BS8007.
Please use the following in conjunction with Section 2A of this Manual - BS8110.
2D.2 Design Process

The design process is carried out in three stages.
1. Ultimate Limit States
The program is structured so that ultimate design is first carried out in

accordance with recommendations given in BS8110. All active design load
cases are considered in turn and a tabulated output is printed showing
possible reinforcement arrangements. 12, 16, and 20 mm bars are
considered with possible spacings from 100,125,150,175, and 200 mm.
Within these spacings, the layout providing the closest area of steel is printed
under each bar size. Longitudinal and transverse moments together with
critical load cases for both hogging and sagging moments are also printed.
Minimum reinforcement is in any case checked and provided in each
direction. Wood & Armer moments may also be included in the design.
2. Serviceability Limit States
In the second stage, flexural crack widths under serviceability load cases are
calculated. The first and every other occurring design load case is considered
as a serviceability load case and crack widths are calculated based on bar
sizes and spacings proposed at the ultimate limit state check.
Crack widths due to longitudinal and transverse moments are calculated

directly under bars, midway between and at corners. A tabulated output

indicating critical serviceability load cases and moments for top and bottom
of the slab is then produced.
3. Thermal crack widths
Finally thermal, crack width calculations are carried out. Through available
parameters, the user is able to provide information on the type of slab,
temperature range and crack width limits.
Surface zone depths are determined based on the type of slab and critical areas of
reinforcements are calculated and printed in a tabulated form.
Four bar sizes are considered and for each, max crack spacing, Smax and crack
widths are calculated for the critical reinforcements and printed under each bar
size.
Maximum bar spacing to limit crack widths to the user's limit is also printed under
each bar size.
2D.3 Design Parameters

control the design to BS8007.
These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code
calculations but give the Engineer control over the actual design process. Default
values of commonly used values for conventional design practice have been
chosen as the basis. Table 2D.1 contains a complete list of available parameters
with their default values.
Table 2D.1 - BS8007 Design Parameters

FC * 30 N/mm2 Concrete grade.
CLEAR * 20 mm Distance from the outer surface to the edge of the bar.
both surfaces.
SRA 0.0 Orthogonal reinforcement layout without considering t

500.
orthogonal reinforcement layout with Mxy used to calcu
120 — STAAD.Pro
for design.
A* Skew angle considered in Wood & Armer equations.
SCON 1 Parameter which indicates the type of slab ee. ground o

BS8007
1 = Suspended Slab
2 = Ground Slab
TEMP 30°C Temperature range to be considered in thermal crack w
CRACK * * 0.2 mm Limiting thermal crack width
* Provided in current unit systems
2D.4 Structural Model

Structural slabs that are to be designed to BS8007 must be modeled using finite
elements. Refer to Section 1.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for information
on the sign convention used in the program for defining elements
It is recommended to connect elements in such a way that the positive local z axis
points outwards away, from the center of the container. In this manner the "Top" of
elements will consistently fall on the outer surface and internal pressure loads will
act in the positive direction of the local z axis.
An example of a rectangular tank is provided to demonstrate the above procedure.
Element properties are based on the thickness given under ELEMENT PROPERTIES
command. The following example demonstrates the required input for a 300 mm
slab modeled with ten elements.
UNIT MM
ELEMENT PROPERTIES
1 TO 10 THI 300.0
2D.5 Wood & Armer Moments

This is controlled by the SRA parameter. If the default value of zero is used, the
design will be based on the Mx and My moments which are the direct results of

STAAD analysis. The SRA parameter (Set Reinforcement Angle) can be

manipulated to introduce Wood & Armer moments into the design replacing the
pure Mx, My moments. These new design moments allow the Mxy moment to be
considered when designing the section. Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may be
considered. SRA set to -500 will assume an orthogonal layout. If however a skew
is to be considered, an angle is given in degrees, measured between the local
element x axis anti-clockwise (positive). The resulting Mx* and My* moments are
calculated and shown in the design format.
122 — STAAD.Pro
British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed
Steel Code
2E.1 General
Provisions of BS 5950-5:1998, have been implemented. The program allows
design of single (non-composite) members in tension, compression, bending,
shear, as well as their combinations. Cold work of forming strengthening effects
have been included as an option.
2E.2 Cross-Sectional Properties

The user specifies the geometry of the cross-section by selecting one of the section
shape designations from the Gross Section Property Tables published in the “The
Steel Construction Institute”, (Design of Structures using Cold Formed Steel
Sections).
The Tables are currently available for the following shapes:
l Channel with Lips
l Channel without Lips
l Z with Lips
l Pipe
l Tube
Shape assignment may be done using the General | Property page of the graphical
user interface (GUI) or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input
file.
The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties. STAAD.Pro uses
unreduced section properties in the structure analysis stage. Both unreduced and
effective section properties are used in the design stage, as applicable.
2E.3 Design Procedure

The following two design modes are available:

British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel Code
1. Code Checking
The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load
effects, in accordance with BS 5950-5:1998. Code checking is carried out for
locations specified by the user via the SECTION command or the BEAM
parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and
a RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The user may
choose the degree of detail in the output data by setting the TRACK
parameter.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general

information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical
Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking
command.
2. Member Selection
The user may request that the program search the cold formed steel shapes
database (BS standard sections) for alternative members that pass the code
check and meet the least weight criterion. In addition, a minimum and/or
maximum acceptable depth of the member may be specified. The program
will then evaluate all database sections of the type initially specified (i.e.,
channel, angle, etc.) and, if a suitable replacement is found, presents design
results for that section. If no section satisfying the depth restrictions or
lighter than the initial one can be found, the program leaves the member
unchanged, regardless of whether it passes the code check or not.

information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical
Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection
command.
The program calculates effective section properties in accordance with Section 4 of

the subject code. Cross-sectional properties and overall slenderness of members
are checked for compliance with:
l Clause 6.2.2, Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio for members in

Compression
l Clause 4.2, Maximum Flat Width Ratios for Elements in Compression
124 — STAAD.Pro
2E.4 Design Equations
Tensile Strength
The allowable tensile strength, as calculated in STAAD as per BS5950-5, section 7

is described below.
The tensile strength, P of the member should be determined from clause 7.2.1
t
P =Ap
t e y
Where:
A is the net area An determined in accordance with cl.3.5.4

e
p is the design strength
y
Combined bending and tension
As per clause 7.3 of BS 5950-5:1998 members subjected to both axial tension and
bending should be proportioned such that the following relationships are satisfied
at the ultimate limit state
F /P + M /M + M /M ≤1
t t z cz y cy
M /M ≤1
z cz
and
M /M ≤1
y cy
Where
F is the applies tensile strength

t
P is the tensile capacity determined in accordance with clause 7.2.1 of
t
the subject code
M ,M ,M ,M are as defined in clause 6.4.2 of the subject code

z y cz cy
Compressive Strength
The allowable Compressive strength, as calculated in STAAD as per BS5950-5,

section 6 is described below

For sections symmetrical about both principal axes or closed cross-sections which
are not subjected to torsional flexural buckling, the buckling resistance under axial
load, Pc, may be obtained from the following equation as per clause 6.2.3 of the
subject code
For Sections symmetrical about a single axis and which are not subject to torsional
flexural buckling, the buckling resistance under axial load, Pc, may be obtained
from the following equation as per clause 6.2.4 of the subject code
Where the meanings of the symbols used are indicated in the subject clauses.
Torsional flexural buckling
Design of the members which have at least one axis of symmetry, and which are
subject to torsional flexural buckling should be done according to the stipulations
of the clause 6.3.2 using factored slenderness ratio αL /r in place of actual
E
slenderness ratio while reading Table 10 for the value of Compressive
strength(p ).
c
Where:
α = (P /P ) when P > P
E TF E TF
α = 1, otherwise
Where the meanings of the symbols used are indicated in the subject clause.
Combined bending and compression
Members subjected to both axial compression and bending should be checked for
local capacity and overall buckling
Local capacity check as per clause 6.4.2 of the subject code
F /P + M /M + M /M ≤1
c cs z cz y cy
126 — STAAD.Pro
Overall buckling check as per clause 6.4.3 of the subject code
For Beams not subjected to lateral buckling, the following relationship should be
satisfied
For Beams subjected to lateral buckling, the following relationship should be

satisfied
F is the applied axial load

c
P is the short strut capacity as per clause 6.2.3
cs
M is the applied bending moment about z axis
z
M is the applied bending moment about y axis
y
M is the moment capacity in bending about the local Z axis in the
cz
absence of F and M , as per clause 5.2.2 and 5.6
c y
M is the moment capacity in bending about the local Y axis, in the
cy
absence of F and M ,as per clause 5.2.2 and 5.6
c z
M- is the lateral buckling resistance moment as per clause 5.6.2
b
P is the flexural buckling load in compression for bending about the
Ez
local Z axis
P is the flexural buckling load in compression for bending about the

Ey
local Y axis
C ,C are taken as unity unless their values are specified by the user
bz by

The M M and M are calculated from clause numbers 5.2.2 and 5.6 in
cz, cy b
the manner described herein below.
Calculation of moment capacities
For restrained beams, the applied moment based on factored loads should not be
greater then the bending moment resistance of the section, M
c
M =S xp
cz zz o
M =S xp
cy yy o
Where
M is the Moment resistance of the section in z axis

cz
M is the Moment resistance of the section in z axis
cz
p is the limiting stress for bending elements under stress gradient and
o
should not greater then design strength p
y
For unrestrained beams the applied moment based on factored loads should not
be greater than the smaller of the bending moment resistance of the section , M ,
c
and the buckling resistance moment of the beam, M
b
Then buckling resistance moment, M may be calculated as follows
b,
φ = [M + (1 + η)M ]/2

B y E
M is the yield moment of the section , product of design strength p
Y y
and elastic modules of the gross section with respect to the
compression flange Zc
M is the elastic lateral buckling resistance as per clause 5.6.2.2

E
η is the Perry coefficient
128 — STAAD.Pro
Please refer clause numbers 5.2.2 and 5.6 of the subject code for a detailed
discussion regarding the parameters used in the abovementioned equations.
Shear Strength
The maximum shear stress should not be greater then 0.7 ´ p as per clause 5.4.2
y
The average shear stress should not exceed the lesser of the shear yield strength,
p or the shear buckling strength, q as stipulated in clause 5.4.3 of the subject
v cr
code.
The parameters are calculated as follows :
p = 0.6·p
v y
q = (1000·t/D)2 N/mm2
cr
P = A·min(p , q )
v v cr
Where:
P is the shear capacity in N/mm2

v
p is the design strength in N/mm2
y
t is the web thickness in mm
D is the web depth in mm
Combined bending and Shear
For beam webs subjected to both bending and shear stresses the member should
be designed to satisfy the following relationship as per the stipulations of clause
5.5.2 of the subject code
(F /P )2 + (M/M )2 ≤ 1
v v c
Where:
F is the shear force

v
M is the bending moment acting at the same section as F
v
M is the moment capacity determined in accordance with 5.2.2
c

2E.5 Design Parameters

The design parameters outlined in Table 2E.1 are used to control the design
application's specific needs.
Table 2E.1 - British Cold Formed Steel Design Parameters

CODE BS5950 COLD Design Code to follow.

Technical Reference
Manual.
130 — STAAD.Pro
BEAM 1.0 When this parameter is

set to 1.0 (default), the
adequacy of the member
is determined by
checking a total of 13
equally spaced locations
along the length of the
member. If the BEAM
value is 0.0, the 13
location check is not
conducted, and instead,
checking is done only at
the locations specified by
the SECTION command
(See STAAD manual for
details. For TRUSS
members only start and
end locations are
designed.
CMZ 1.0 Coefficient of equivalent

uniform bending C . See
b
BS:5950-5:1998,5.6.
Used for Combined axial
load and bending design.
CMY 1.0 Coefficient of equivalent

uniform bending C . See
b
BS:5950-5:1998,5.6.
Used for Combined axial
load and bending design.

CWY 1.0 Specifies whether the

cold work of forming
strengthening effect
should be included in
resistance computation.
See BS:5950-5:1998,3.4
0 – effect
should not be
included
1 – effect
should be
included
FLX 1 Specifies whether

torsional-flexural
buckling restraint is
provided or is not
necessary for the
member. See BS:5950-
5:1998, 5.6
Values:
0 – Section
subject to
torsional
flexural
buckling
1 – Section
not subject to
torsional
flexural
buckling
FU 430 MPa Ultimate tensile strength

of steel in current units.
132 — STAAD.Pro
FYLD 250 MPa Yield strength of steel in

current units.
KX 1.0 Effective length factor for

torsional buckling. It is a
fraction and is unit-less.
Values can range from
0.01 (for a column
completely prevented
from buckling) to any
user specified large
value. It is used to
compute the KL/R ratio
for twisting for
determining the capacity
in axial compression.
KY 1.0 Effective length factor for

overall buckling about
the local Y-axis. It is a
0.01 (for a column
for determining the
capacity in axial
compression.

KZ 1.0 Effective length factor for

overall buckling in the
local Z-axis. It is a
0.01 (for a member
for determining the
capacity in axial
compression.
LX Member length Unbraced length for

twisting. It is input in the
current units of length.
0.01 (for a member
from torsional buckling)
to any user specified
large value. It is used to
for twisting for
determining the capacity
in axial compression.
134 — STAAD.Pro
LY Member length Effective length for

local Y-axis. It is input in
the current units of
length. Values can range
from 0.01 (for a member
for determining the
capacity in axial
compression.
LZ Member length Effective length for

local Z-axis. It is input in
the current units of
length. Values can range
from 0.01 (for a member
for determining the
capacity in axial
compression.

MAIN 0 Specify the design for

slenderness against the
maximum slenderness as
per Clause 6.2.2:
0 – Do not
check
slenderness
ratio
1 – Check
members
resisting
normal loads
(180)
2 - Check
members
resisting self-
weight and
wind loads
(250)
3 - Check
members
resisting
reversal of
stress (350)

tension members
DMAX 2540.0 Maximum allowable

depth. It is input in the
cm.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of

actual to allowable
stresses
136 — STAAD.Pro
TRACK 0 This parameter is used to

control the level of detail
in which the design
output is reported in the
output file. The allowable
values are:
0 - Prints only
the member
number,
section name,
ratio, and
PASS/FAIL
status.
1 - Prints the
design
summary in
addition to
that printed
by TRACK 1
2 - Prints
member and
material
properties in
addition to
that printed
by TRACK 2.
2E.5 Verification Problem
Shown below is a verification example for reference purposes.
In this problem, we have assigned Channel sections with lips to different members.
Member numbers 28 to 31 have been assigned section 230CLHS66X16,member
numbers 3 TO 6 and 15 TO 19 have been assigned the section 230CLMIL70X30 and
member numbers 1, 2, 7 TO 14 have been assigned the section 170CLHS56X18.
These members have been designed as per BS 5950 Part 5. Other sections have

been assigned from the AISI shapes database (American cold-formed steel) and
designed in accordance with that code.
The excerpts from the design output for member number 1 are as follows:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (BS5950-

5-V1.1)
***********************
UNITS : MM, KN, KNM, MPA
----------------------------------------------------------
---------------------
| MEMBER# 1 SECTION: 170CLHS56X18 LEN: 609.60
LOCATION: 609.60 |
| STATUS: PASS RATIO = 0.278 GOV.MODE: 6.4-BEND + COM-
PRESS GOV.LOAD: 1 |
|---------------------------------------------------------
--------------------|
MATERIAL DATA:
YIELD STRENGTH OF STEEL : 379.21 N/MM2
ULTIMATE TENSILE STRENGTH : 430.00 N/MM2
SECTION PROPERTIES:(UNITS - CM)
SECTION NAME : 170CLHS56X18
MEMBER LENGTH : 60.96
GROSS AREA(AG) : 5.45 NET AREA
(AE): 4.58
Z-Z AXIS Y-Y
AXIS
MOMENT OF INERTIA (I) : 237.27
21.93
MOMENT OF INERTIA (IE) : 235.46
19.42
ELASTIC MODULUS (ZET) : 27.85
5.20
ELASTIC MODULUS (ZEC) : 27.55
10.42
DESIGN DATA:
Z-Z AXIS Y-Y
AXIS
COMPRESSION CAPACITY (PC) : 93.70
MOMENT CAPACITY (MC) : 9.17
3.47
SHEAR CAPACITY (PV) : 21.00
33.50
LTB CAPACITY (MB) : 9.17
EACH CLAUSE CHECK UNDER CRITICAL LOAD :
CLAUSE COMBINATION RATIO
BS-6.3 COMPRESSION RATIO - AXIAL 0.037
BS-6.4 BEND-COMPRESSION RATIO 0.278
BS-5.1 BENDING RATIO - Z 0.236
BS-5.1 BENDING RATIO - Y 0.006
BS-5.1 BIAXIAL BENDING RATIO 0.241
BS-5.4 SHEAR RATIO - Z 0.168
BS-5.4 SHEAR RATIO - Y 0.003
BS-5.5.2 BENDING -Z & SHEAR - Y RATIO 0.084
138 — STAAD.Pro
BS-5.5.2 BENDING -Y & SHEAR - Z RATIO 0.000
TORSION AND DEFLECTIONS HAVE NOT BEEN CONSIDERED IN THE
DESIGN.
1. Bending Check
As per Clause 5.2.2.2 of BS 5950 –Part 5 the limiting compressive
stress(p ) for stiffened webs is given by the minimum of

o
p = Py, where Py = Min ( FYLD, 0.84·FU) = 361.2 N/mm2

0
So that
p = [1.13 - 0.0019·(170/1.8)·(279.212/280)1/2]·361.2 = 332.727 N/mm2

0
The limiting compressive moments in local Y and Z axes will be given by
M = S ·p = 27,632.4(332.727) = 9.19(10) N·mm

cz zz o 6
M = S ·p = 27,632.4(5,427.50) = 3.46(10) N·mm
cy yy o 6
Maximum bending moment about local Z = 2159 N·m at node 7
Maximum bending moment about local Y = 19.755 N·m at node 7
Bending Ratio Z = 2.15 X106 / 9.19 X106 = 0.235 ……hence verified
Bending Ratio Y = 19755.3 / 3.46 X106 = 0.0057 ……hence verified
Buckling resistance moment M

b
As per section 5.6.2,
The buckling resistance moment
Where:

The Yield moment of section is given by
M = S · p = 9.19(10)6 N·mm
Y zz o
The elastic buckling resistance moment as per clause 5.6.2.2 is calculated to
be
M = 4.649(10)6 N·mm
E
And
φ = [M + (1 + η)M ]/2

B y E
So that
φ = [9.19(10)6 + (1 + 0.0)4.649(10)6]/2 = 2.325(10)10

B
Which yields
M = (4.649·106·9.19·106 )/{2.325·1010 + [(2.325·1010)2 -

b
4.649·106·9.19·106 ] 1/2} = 9.98(10)6 N·mm
2. Compression Check
The Axial force induced in member# 1 is 3,436.75 N
The elastic flexural buckling load P = 1.185(10)6 N

E
The short strut capacity (Pcs ) is given by
A ·py = 457.698(344) = 157,448 N

eff
Perry Coefficient (η) = 0.02074
φ = [P + (1 + η)P ]/2 = 683,512.45 N

cs E
Buckling resistance
P = 153,782 N
c
For Channel section (being singly symmetric), Buckling Resistance as per
clause 6.2.4 is
140 — STAAD.Pro
Where:
The limiting compressive moment, M , in the relevant direction is equal to

c
9.19(10)6 N·mm,as calculated above
And the distance, e , of the geometric neutral axis of the gross cross section
s
and that of the effective cross section is equal to 38.24 m
So that,
P' = (9.19·106 ·153,782)/[9.19·106 + 153,782(38.24)] = 93,788.7 N

c
Compression ratio = 3,436.75/93,788.7 = 0.0366 ……hence verified
3. Axial Compression and Bending
Local capacity check as per clause 6.4.2
F /P + M /M + M /M
c cs z cz y cy
= 3,436.75/[457.698(379.212)] + 2.15·106/(9.19·106) + 19,755.3/(1.81·106) =
0.26
Overall buckling check per 6.4.3
= 0.2773 ……hence verified
4. Shear Check as per clause 5.4.2 and 5.4.3
p = 0.6·p = 0.6(379.212) = 227.52 N/mm2

v y
q = (1000·t/D)2 = (1000·1.8/170)2 = 112.11 N/mm2
cr
P = A·min(p , q )
v v cr
Shear resistance Y = 33,579.4 N

Shear resistance Z = 21,148.6 N
Shear Ratio Y = 5,627.72/33,579.4 = 0.1675 ……hence verified
Shear Ratio Z = 5,627.72/21,148.6 = 0.0031 ……hence verified
5. Shear Check with Bending as per clause 5.5.2
Shear with bending on Z
(F /P )2 + (M /M )2 = (5,627.72/33,579.4)2 + [2.15·106 /(9.19·106 )] 2 =

v v z cz
0.08327
……hence verified
Shear with bending on Y
(F /P )2 + (M /M )2 = (67.114/21,148.6)2 + [19,755.3/(3.46·106 )] 2 =
v v y cy
0.0000427
……hence verified
Input File
STAAD SPACE
SET ECHO OFF
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT FEET KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 5 0; 2 0 5 10; 3 10 5 0; 4 10 5 10; 5 5 5 0; 6 5 5 10; 7 0 5 2; 8 0 5
4;
9 0 5 6; 10 0 5 8; 11 10 5 2; 12 10 5 4; 13 10 5 6; 14 10 5 8; 15 5 5
2;
16 5 5 4; 17 5 5 6; 18 5 5 8; 19 10 0 0; 20 10 0 10; 21 0 0 10; 22 0 0
0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 7; 2 3 11; 3 1 5; 4 2 6; 5 5 3; 6 6 4; 7 7 8; 8 8 9; 9 9 10; 10 10 2;
11 11 12; 12 12 13; 13 13 14; 14 14 4; 15 5 15; 16 15 16; 17 16 17;
18 17 18;
142 — STAAD.Pro
19 18 6; 20 7 15; 21 15 11; 22 8 16; 23 16 12; 24 9 17; 25 17 13; 26
10 18;
27 18 14; 28 1 22; 29 2 21; 30 3 19; 31 4 20; 32 1 21; 33 21 4; 34 4
19;
35 19 1; 36 2 20; 37 20 3; 38 3 22; 39 22 2;
MEMBER PROPERTY COLDFORMED AMERICAN
32 TO 39 TABLE ST 3LU3X060
20 TO 27 TABLE ST 3HU3X075
MEMBER PROPERTY COLDFORMED BRITISH
28 TO 31 TABLE ST 230CLHS66X16
3 TO 6 15 TO 19 TABLE ST 230CLMIL70X30
1 2 7 TO 14 TABLE ST 170CLHS56X18
UNIT MMS
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES LIST 32 20 28 3 1
SUPPORTS
19 TO 22 PINNED
UNIT FEET
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 4.176E+006
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 0.489024
ALPHA 6.5E-006
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
CONSTANTS
BETA 90 MEMB 20 TO 27
MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1 TO 39
MEMBER TENSION
32 TO 39
UNIT FEET KIP

LOAD 1 VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL

MEMBER LOAD
3 TO 6 20 TO 27 UNI GY -0.3 0 5
JOINT LOAD
1 2 FX 0.6
2 4 FZ -0.6
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK
UNIT KGS CM
PRINT JOINT DISP LIST 1 4 16
PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS
PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 3 24 28
UNIT KIP INCH
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISI
FYLD 55 ALL
CWY 1 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 20 21
PARAMETER 2
CODE BS5950 COLD
TRACK 2 MEMB 1 TO 19 28 TO 31
CHECK CODE MEMB 1 2
FINISH
Resulting Output File
****************************************************
*
*
144 — STAAD.Pro
* STAAD.PRO V8I SELECTSERIES2
*
* VERSION 20.07.07.27
*
* PROPRIETARY PROGRAM OF
*
* BENTLEY SYSTEMS, INC.
*
* DATE= FEB 9, 2011
*
* TIME= 16: 0:53
*
*
*
* USER ID: BENTLEY SYSTEMS
*
****************************************************
1. STAAD SPACE
INPUT FILE: BRITISH COLD FORMED VERIFICATION.STD
2. SET ECHO OFF
STAAD SPACE
-- PAGE NO. 2
MEMBER PROPERTIES. UNIT - CM
-----------------
MEMB PROFILE AX/ IZ/ IY/
IX/
AY AZ SZ
SY
32 ST 3LU3X060 2.26 21.81
5.17 0.02
1.51 1.51
4.05 1.93
20 ST 3HU3X075 4.91 63.15
40.66 0.06
1.24 2.40
10.63 9.59
28 ST 230CLHS66X16 8.78 663.30
42.82 0.17
5.31 2.76
60.05 9.06
3 ST 230CLMIL70X30
11.40 868.90
66.93 0.35
6.61 3.61
79.03 13.84
1 ST 170CLHS56X18 5.23 224.50
20.49 0.06
2.93 1.75
27.47 5.28
************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE
************
P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S
-----------------------------------
NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 22/
39/ 4

SOLVER USED IS THE IN-CORE ADVANCED SOLVER

TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 1, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREE-
DOM = 120
STAAD SPACE
-- PAGE NO. 3
**START ITERATION NO. 2
**NOTE-TENSION/COMPRESSION CONVERGED AFTER 2 ITERATIONS,
CASE= 1
STATIC LOAD/REACTION/EQUILIBRIUM SUMMARY FOR CASE
NO. 1
VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL
CENTER OF FORCE BASED ON·FORCES ONLY (FEET).
(FORCES IN NON-GLOBAL DIRECTIONS WILL INVALIDATE
RESULTS)
·= 0.000000000E+00
Y = 0.500000015E+01
Z = 0.500000015E+01
CENTER OF FORCE BASED ON Y FORCES ONLY (FEET).
RESULTS)
·= 0.500000015E+01
Y = 0.500000015E+01
Z = 0.500000015E+01
CENTER OF FORCE BASED ON Z FORCES ONLY (FEET).
RESULTS)
·= 0.500000015E+01
Y = 0.500000015E+01
Z = 0.100000003E+02
***TOTAL APPLIED LOAD ( KIP FEET ) SUMMARY (LOADING
1 )
SUMMATION FORCE-X = 1.20
SUMMATION FORCE-Y = -18.00
SUMMATION FORCE-Z = -1.20
SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN-
MX= 84.00 MY= 12.00 MZ= -
96.00
***TOTAL REACTION LOAD( KIP FEET ) SUMMARY (LOADING
1 )
SUMMATION FORCE-X = -1.20
SUMMATION FORCE-Y = 18.00
SUMMATION FORCE-Z = 1.20
SUMMATION OF MOMENTS AROUND THE ORIGIN-
MX= -84.00 MY= -12.00 MZ=
96.00
STAAD SPACE
-- PAGE NO. 4
MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENTS ( INCH /RADIANS) (LOADING 1)
MAXIMUMS AT NODE
·= 1.56273E-02 1
Y = -4.80478E-01 16
Z = -1.74875E-02 4
RX= -8.28315E-03 6
RY= -2.09547E-05 14
146 — STAAD.Pro
RZ= -8.32083E-03 7
************
STAAD SPACE
-- PAGE NO. 5
JOINT DISPLACEMENT (CM RADIANS) STRUCTURE TYPE =
SPACE
------------------
JOINT LOAD X-TRANS Y-TRANS Z-TRANS X-ROTAN Y-
ROTAN Z-ROTAN
1 1 0.0397 -0.0184 -0.0339 0.0074
0.0000 -0.0027
4 1 0.0305 -0.0185 -0.0444 -0.0074
0.0000 0.0025
16 1 0.0352 -1.2204 -0.0392 0.0025
0.0000 0.0000
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT
**************
STAAD SPACE
-- PAGE NO. 6
SUPPORT REACTIONS -UNIT KGS CM STRUCTURE TYPE =
SPACE
-----------------
JOINT LOAD FORCE-X FORCE-Y FORCE-Z MOM-X
MOM-Y MOM Z
19 1 -447.20 2312.64 85.07 0.00
0.00 0.00
20 1 -446.98 2041.85 186.40 0.00
0.00 0.00
21 1 174.14 1768.33 187.80 0.00
0.00 0.00
22 1 175.72 2041.85 85.04 0.00
0.00 0.00
**************
STAAD SPACE
-- PAGE NO. 7
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE
-----------------
ALL UNITS ARE -- KGS CM (LOCAL )
MEMBER LOAD JT AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION
MOM-Y MOM-Z
3 1 1 669.35 1448.01 2.69 -1.67
-214.95 61567.53
5 -669.35 -767.63 -2.69 1.67
-195.56 107264.16
24 1 9 -0.62 -0.06 -285.32 -0.04
-0.08 0.91
17 0.62 0.06 -395.06 0.04 -
8362.12 -9.69
28 1 1 2155.99 -404.01 -85.04 0.00
12959.61 -61571.77
22 -2155.99 404.01 85.04 0.00
0.00 0.00


**************
STAAD SPACE
-- PAGE NO. 8
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (AISI)
***********************
UNITS ARE: IN, KIP, KIP-IN, KSI
|---------------------------------------------------------
--------------------|
| MEMBER# 20 SECTION: 3HU3X075 LEN: 60.00
GOV.LOC: 60.00 |
| STATUS: PASS RATIO = 0.285 GOV.MODE: BEND + COMPRESS
GOV.LOAD: 1 |
|
|
| RESISTANCES: AX.TENS: 0.00 ECC.TENS: 0.00
COMPRESS: 7.51 |
| BEND. Z: 28.21 BEND. Y: 30.98 SHEAR Z: 11.76
SHEAR Y: 5.88 |
|
|
| FYLD: 55.00 COLD WORK FYLD: 55.71 FU: 58.00 A:
0.76 AE: 0.76 |
| IZ: 1.5173E+00 IZE: 1.5173E+00 IY: 9.7684E-01
IYE: 9.7684E-01 |
| SZE_T: 6.4841E-01 SZE_C: 6.4841E-01 SYE_T: 5.8539E-01
SYE_C: 7.3374E-01 |
|---------------------------------------------------------
--------------------|
|---------------------------------------------------------
--------------------|
| MEMBER# 21 SECTION: 3HU3X075 LEN: 60.00
GOV.LOC: 0.00 |
| STATUS: PASS RATIO = 0.284 GOV.MODE: BEND + COMPRESS
GOV.LOAD: 1 |
|
|
| RESISTANCES: AX.TENS: 0.00 ECC.TENS: 0.00
COMPRESS: 7.51 |
| BEND. Z: 28.21 BEND. Y: 30.98 SHEAR Z: 11.76
SHEAR Y: 5.88 |
|
|
| FYLD: 55.00 COLD WORK FYLD: 55.71 FU: 58.00 A:
0.76 AE: 0.76 |
| IZ: 1.5173E+00 IZE: 1.5173E+00 IY: 9.7684E-01
IYE: 9.7684E-01 |
| SZE_T: 1.0115E+00 SZE_C: 1.0115E+00 SYE_T: 7.3374E-01
SYE_C: 5.8539E-01 |
|---------------------------------------------------------
--------------------|
STAAD SPACE
-- PAGE NO. 9
STAAD SPACE
-- PAGE NO. 10
148 — STAAD.Pro
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (BS5950-
5-V1.1)
***********************
UNITS : MM, KN, KNM, MPA
-----------------------------------------------------------
--------------------
LOCATION: 609.60 |
| STATUS: PASS RATIO = 0.278 GOV.MODE: 6.4-BEND + COMPRESS
GOV.LOAD: 1 |
|----------------------------------------------------------
-------------------|
MATERIAL DATA:
(AE): 4.58
Z-Z AXIS Y-Y
AXIS
MOMENT OF INERTIA (I) : 237.27 21.93
MOMENT OF INERTIA (IE) : 235.46 19.42
5.20
10.42
DESIGN DATA:
Z-Z AXIS Y-Y
AXIS
MOMENT CAPACITY (MC) : 9.17 3.47
SHEAR CAPACITY (PV) : 21.00 33.50
BS-5.5.2 BENDING -Z & SHEAR - Y RATIO 0.084
DESIGN.
-----------------------------------------------------------
--------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------
--------------------
LOCATION: 609.60 |

| STATUS: PASS RATIO = 0.283 GOV.MODE: 6.4-BEND + COM-

PRESS GOV.LOAD: 1 |
|---------------------------------------------------------
--------------------|
STAAD SPACE
-- PAGE NO. 11
MATERIAL DATA:
(AE): 4.58
Z-Z AXIS Y-Y
AXIS
MOMENT OF INERTIA (I) : 237.27
21.93
MOMENT OF INERTIA (IE) : 235.46
21.93
14.17
5.41
DESIGN DATA:
Z-Z AXIS Y-Y
AXIS
MOMENT CAPACITY (MC) : 9.17
1.80
SHEAR CAPACITY (PV) : 21.00
33.50
BS-5.5.2 BENDING -Z &L SHEAR - Y RATIO
0.084
DESIGN.
----------------------------------------------------------
---------------------
STAAD SPACE
-- PAGE NO. 12
*********** END OF THE STAAD.PRO RUN
***********
**** DATE= FEB 9,2011 TIME= 16: 0:54 ****
150 — STAAD.Pro
************************************************************
* FOR QUESTIONS ON STAAD.PRO, PLEASE CON-
TACT *
* BENTLEY SYSTEMS OFFICES AT THE FOLLOWING LOCA-
TIONS *
*
*
* TELEPHONE WEB / EMAIL
*
*
*
* USA: +1 (714)974-2500
*
* UK +44(1454)207-000
*
* SINGAPORE +65 6225-6158
*
* EUROPE +31 23 5560560
*
* INDIA +91(033)4006-2021
*
* JAPAN +81(03)5952-6500 HTTP://WWW.CTC-
G.CO.JP *
* CHINA +86 10 5929 7000
*
* THAILAND +66(0)2645-1018/19 PAR-
THA.P@REISOFTWARETH.COM *
*
*
* WORLDWIDE HTTP:/-
/SELECTSERVICES.BENTLEY.COM/EN-US/ *
*
*
***********************************************************

152 — STAAD.Pro
Section 3
Canadian Codes

154 — STAAD.Pro
Canadian Codes - Concrete Design per CSA
Standard A23.3-94
STAAD can perform design of concrete beams, columns and slabs according to CSA
STANDARD A23.3-94. Given the dimensions of a section, STAAD will calculate the
required reinforcement necessary to resist the various input loads.

l For Beams - Prismatic (Rectangular, Square & Tee)

l For Columns - Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular)
l For Slabs - 4-noded Plate Elements

UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300.
11 14 PR YD 300.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth and
provided, will be assumed to be circular with a 300mm diameter

siderations
STAAD provides the user with two methods of accounting for the slenderness effect
in the analysis and design of concrete members. The first method is equivalent to
the procedure presented in CSA STANDARD A23.3-94 Clause 10.13. STAAD

accounts for the secondary moments, due to axial loads and deflections, when the
PDELTA ANALYSIS command is used. After solving for the joint displacements of
the structure, the program calculates the additional moments induced in the
structure due to the P-Delta effect. Therefore, by performing a P-Delta analysis,
member forces are calculated which will require no user modification before
beginning member design. Refer to Section 5.37.2 of the Technical Reference
Manual for additional details on this analysis facility.
The second method by which STAAD allows the user to account for the
slenderness effect is through user supplied moment magnification factors (see the
parameter MMAG in Table 3A.1). Here the user approximates the additional
moment by supplying a factor by which moments will be multiplied before
beginning member design. This second procedure allows slenderness to be
considered in accordance with Clause 10.14 of the code.
It should be noted that STAAD does not factor loads automatically for concrete
design. All the proper factored loads must be provided by the user before the
ANALYSIS specification.
While performing a P-Delta analysis, all load cases must be defined as primary
load cases. If the effects of separate load cases are to be combined, it should be
done either by using the REPEAT LOAD command or by specifying the load
information of these individual loading cases under one single load case. Usage of
the LOAD COMBINATION command will yield incorrect results for P-Delta Analysis
in STAAD.Pro.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform
design per CSA STANDARD A23.3-94. These parameters not only act as a method
to input required data for code calculations but give the engineer control over the
actual design process. Default values, which are commonly used numbers in
conventional design practice, have been used for simplicity. Table 3A.1 contains a
list of available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare
length and force units as Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete
design.
156 — STAAD.Pro
Table 3A.1 - Canadian Concrete Design CSA-A23.3-94 Parameters
Name Value
CLB 40mm Clear cover to reinforcing bar at bottom

of cross section.
CLS 40mm Clear cover to reinforcing bar along the

side of the cross section.
CLT 40mm Clear cover to reinforcing bar at top of

cross section.
DEPTH YD Depth of the concrete member. This

value defaults to YD as provided under
MEMBER PROPERTIES.
EFACE 0.0 Face of Distance of face of support from end

Support node of beam. Used for shear and torsion
calculation.
Note: Both SFACE & EFACE must be

positive numbers.
FC 30 N/mm2 Specified compressive strength of

concrete.
FYMAIN 400N/mm2 Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel.
FYSEC 400 N/mm2 Yield Stress for secondary reinforcing

steel.
MAXMAIN Number 55 Maximum main reinforcement bar size.

bar
MINMAIN Number 10 Minimum main reinforcement bar size

bar
MINSEC Number 10 Minimum secondary (stirrup)

bar reinforcement bar size.
MMAG 1.0 A factor by which the column design

moments will be magnified.
NSECTION 12 Number of equally-spaced sections to be


Name Value
considered in finding critical moments for

beam design.
REINF 0.0 Tied Column. A value of 1.0 will mean

spiral.
SFACE 0.0 Distance of face of support from start

node of beam. Used for shear and torsion
calculation.

positive numbers.
TRACK 0.0 0. Critical Moment will not be printed

out with beam design report.
1. Moments will be printed.
WIDTH ZD Width of the concrete member. This

value defaults to ZD as provided under
MEMBER PROPERTIES.
3A.6 Beam Design

beam loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes, and locate
critical sections. The total number of sections considered is thirteen (start, end,
and 11 intermediate), unless that number is redefined with the NSECTION
parameter.
Design for Flexure
Design for flexure is performed per the rules of Chapter 10 of CSA Standard
A23.3-94. Maximum sagging (creating tensile stress at the bottom face of the
beam) and hogging (creating tensile stress at the top face) moments are calculated
for all active load cases at each of the thirteen sections. Each of these sections are
designed to resist the critical sagging and hogging moments. Currently, design of
singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the section dimensions are
inadequate as a singly reinforced section, such a message will be printed in the
158 — STAAD.Pro
of reinforcement provided after the preliminary design. Final provision of flexural
the curtailment of reinforcements as per CSA Standard A23.3-94. Although exact
curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (which finally
will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account other practical
considerations), the user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by
STAAD at 13 equally spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can be
prepared.
The following annotations apply to the output for Beam Design.
1. LEVEL - Serial number of bar level which may contain one or more
bar group.
2. HEIGHT - Height of bar level from the bottom of beam.
3. BAR INFOrmation - Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars
and size.
4. FROM - Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the
rebar.
5. TO - Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the
rebar.
6. ANCHOR - States whether anchorage, either a hook
(STA,END) or continuation, is needed at start (STA) or at the end

(END) of the bar.
Design for Shear and Torsion
Design for shear and torsion is performed per the rules of Chapter 11 of CSA
Standard A23.3-94. Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces
and torsional moments. Shear design is performed at the start and end sections.
The location along the member span for design is chosen as the effective depth +
SFACE at the start, and effective depth + EFACE at the end. The load case which
gives rise to the highest stirrup area for shear & torsion is chosen as the critical

one. The calculations are performed assuming 2-legged stirrups will be provided.
The additional longitudinal steel area required for torsion is reported.
The stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for beams with no torsion, and closed
hoops for beams subjected to torsion.
Example of Input Data for Beam Design
UNIT NEWTON MMS

CODE CANADA
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FYSEC 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
3A.7 Column Design

Column design is performed per the rules of Chapters 7 & 8 of the CSA Standard
A23.3-94. Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial moments at the ends.
All active loadings are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which
produces maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done
for square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular and square sections,
the reinforcement is always assumed to be equally distributed on each side. That
means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may
cause slightly conservative results in some cases.
Example of Input Data for Column Design
UNIT NEWTON MMS

CODE CANADIAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
160 — STAAD.Pro
FC 35 ALL
END CONCRETE DESIGN

To design a slab or wall, it must be modeled using finite elements. The commands
for specifying elements are in accordance with the relevant sections of the Technical
Reference Manual.
Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My using the same principles as
those for beams in flexure. The width of the beam is assumed to be unity for this
purpose. These moments are obtained from the element force output (see Section
3.8 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement required to resist Mx
moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to
resist My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The effective depth is
calculated assuming #10 bars are provided. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, CLT, and
CLB listed in Table 3A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned in
Table 3A.1 are not applicable to slab design. The output consists only of area of
steel required. Actual bar arrangement is not calculated because an element most
likely represents just a fraction of the total slab area.
Example of Input Data for Slab/Wall Design

UNIT NEWTON MMS

CODE CANADA
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLB 40 ALL
END CONCRETE DESIGN
162 — STAAD.Pro
Canadian Codes - Steel Design per CSA Stand-
ard CAN/CSA-S16-01
3B.1 General Comments
The design of structural steel members in accordance with the specification
CAN/CSA S16-01 Limit States Design of Steel Structures is can be used in
STAAD.Pro. This code supercedes the previous edition of the code CAN/CSA –
S16.1-94.

use. Two major categories of limit-states are recognized - ultimate and
structures under various loading conditions and at the same time the probability of
limits being surpassed is acceptably low.
In the STAAD.Pro implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design

loads without exceeding the limit states of strength, stability and serviceability.
The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD.Pro

implementation of CAN/CSA-S16-01. A detailed description of the design process
along with its underlying concepts and assumptions is available in the specification
document.

The elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design.
Analysis is done for the specified primary and combination loading condition. You
are allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using
appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations. Depending upon
the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis may be

Canadian Codes - Steel Design per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-S16-01
specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined with
static analysis results.

For specification of member properties, the steel section library available in
STAAD.Pro may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used
to assign properties from the built-in steel table. Member properties may also be
specified using the User Table facility. For more information on these facilities,
refer to the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual.

Almost all Canadian steel sections are available for input. A complete listing of the
sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained by using the
tools of the graphical user interface.
Following is the description of the different types of sections available:
Welded Wide Flanges (WW shapes)
Welded wide flange shapes listed in the CSA steel tables can be designated using
the same scheme used by CSA. The following example illustrates the specification
of welded wide flange shapes.
100 TO 150 TA ST WW400X444

34 35 TA ST WW900X347
Wide Flanges (W shapes)
Designation of wide flanges in STAAD is the same as that in CSA tables. For
example,
10 TO 75 95 TO 105 TA ST W460X106
164 — STAAD.Pro
100 TO 200 TA ST W610X101
S, M, HP shapes
In addition to welded wide flanges and regular wide flanges, other I shaped
sections like S, M and HP shapes are also available. The designation scheme is
identical to that listed in the CSA tables. While specifying the sections, it should be
remembered that the portion after the decimal point should be omitted. Thus,
M310X17.6 should be specified as M310X17 and S180X22.8 should be specified as
S180X22. Examples illustrating specifications of these shapes are provided below.
10 TO 20 BY 2 TA ST S510X98
45 TO 55 TA ST M150X6
88 90 96 TA ST HP310X79
Channel Sections (C & MC shapes)
C and MC shapes are designated as shown in the following example. As in S, M and

HP sections, the portion after the decimal point must be omitted in section
designations. Thus, MC250X42.4 should be designated as MC250X42.
55 TO 90 TA ST C250X30
30 TO 45 TA ST MC200X33
Double Channels
Back-to-back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are specified
by preceding the section designation by the letter D. For example, a back-to-back
double channel section C200X28 without any spacing in between should be
specified as:
100 TO 120 TA D C200X28
If a spacing of 2.5 length units is used, the specification should be as follows:
100 TO 120 TA D C200X28 SP 2.5

Note that the specification SP after the section designation is used for providing
the spacing. The spacing should always be provided in the current length unit.
Angles
To specify angles, the angle name is preceded by the letter L. Thus, a 200X200
angle with a 25mm thickness is designated as L200X200X25. The following
examples illustrate angle specifications.
75 TO 95 TA ST L100X100X8
33 34 35 TA ST L200X100X20
Note that the above specification is for “standard” angles. In this specification, the
local z-axis (see Fig. 2.6 in the Technical Reference Manual) corresponds to the Y’-
Y’ axis shown in the CSA table. Another common practice of specifying angles
assumes the local y-axis to correspond to the Y’-Y’ axis. To specify angles in
accordance with this convention, the reverse angle designation facility has been
provided. A reverse angle may be specified by substituting the word ST with the
word RA. Refer to the following example for details.
10 TO 15 TA RA L55X35X4
The local axis systems for STANDARD and REVERSE angles is shown in Fig. 2.6 of
the STAAD Technical Reference manual.
Double Angles
To specify double angles, the specification ST should be substituted with LD (for

long leg back-to-back) or SD (short leg back-to-back). For equal angles, either SD
or LD will serve the purpose. Spacing between angles may be provided by using
the word SP followed by the value of spacing (in current length unit) after section
designation.
25 35 45 TA LD L150X100X16
80 TO 90 TA SD L125X75X6 SP 2.5
The second example above describes a double angle section consisting of

125X75X6 angles with a spacing of 2.5 length units.
166 — STAAD.Pro
Tees
Tee sections obtained by cutting W sections may be specified by using the T

specification instead of ST before the name of the W shape. For example:
100 TO 120 TA T W200X42
will describe a T section cut from a W200X42 section.
Rectangular Hollow Sections
These sections may be specified in two possible ways. Those sections listed in the
CSA tables may be specified as follows.
55 TO 75 TA ST TUB80X60X4
In addition, any tube section may be specified by using the DT(for depth), WT(for
width), and TH(for thickness) specifications.
For example:
100 TO 200 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
will describe a tube with a depth of 8 in., width of 6 in. and a wall thickness of 0.5
inches. Note that the values of depth, width and thickness must be provided in
current length unit.
Circular Hollow Sections
Sections listed in the CSA tables may be provided as follows:

15 TO 25 TA ST PIP33X2.5
In addition to sections listed in the CSA tables, circular hollow sections may be
specified by using the OD (outside diameter) and ID (inside diameter)
specifications. For example:
will describe a pipe with an outside diameter of 10 length units and inside
diameter of 9.0 length units. Note that the values of outside and inside diameters
must be provided in terms of current length unit.
Sample input file to demonstrate usage of Canadian shapes
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KNS
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 17 160 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2 16
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES CANADIAN
* W SHAPES
1 TA ST W250X18
* WW SHAPES
2 TA ST WW700X185
* S SHAPES
168 — STAAD.Pro
3 TA ST S200X27
* M SHAPES
4 TA ST M130X28
* HP SHAPES
5 TA ST HP310X132
* MC CHANNELS
6 TA ST MC150X17
* C CHANNELS
7 TA ST C180X18
* DOUBLE CHANNELS
8 TA D C250X37 SP 1.0
* ANGLES
9 TA ST L55X35X5
* REVERSE ANGLES
10 TA RA L90X75X5
* DOUBLE ANGLES, LONG LEG BACK TO BACK
11 TA LD L100X90X6 SP 2.0
* DOUBLE ANGLES, SHORT LEG BACK TO BACK
12 TA SD L125X75X6 SP 2.5
* TUBES
13 TA ST TUB120807
* TUBES
* PIPES
15 TA ST PIP273X6.3
* PIPES
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES
FINISH


The CSA specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus, local
buckling becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are classified as plastic
(Class 1), compact (Class 2), noncompact (Class 3), or slender element (Class 4)
sections depending upon their local buckling characteristics (See Clause 11.2 and
Table 1 of CAN/CSA-S16-01). This classification is a function of the geometric
properties of the section. The design procedures are different depending on the
section class. STAAD.Pro determines the section classification for the standard
shapes and user specified shapes.
Note: The design of Class 4 sections requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries

2) build 2007.07 or higher. Otherwise, design is performed for sections that
fall into the category of Class 1,2 or 3 sections only.

The member resistances are calculated in STAAD.Pro according to the procedures
outlined in section 13 of the specification. These depend on several factors such as
members unsupported lengths, cross-sectional properties, slenderness factors,
unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on. Note that the program
automatically takes into consideration appropriate resistance factors to calculate
member resistances. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD.Pro for
calculating the member resistances.
Note: The design of Class 4 sections requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries

2) build 2007.07 or higher.
Nomenclature
A = Area.
A = Effective area.
e
A = Area of flange.
f
A = Area of web.
w
b = Effective Flange width.
e
C = Compressive force in a member or component under factored load.
f
170 — STAAD.Pro
C = Factored compressive resistance.
r
C = Warping torsional constant.
w
C = Axial compressive load at yield stress.
y
D = Outside diameter of pipe section.
E = Elastic modulus of steel.
F = Elastic critical buckling stress.

e
F = Yield strength.
y
F = Effective yield stress of section in compression to account for elastic local
ye
buckling.
h = Clear depth of web.
K = Effective length factor.
L = Length or span of member.
M = Bending moment in a member or component under factored load.

f
M = Factored moment resistance of a member.
r
M = Yield moment resistance.
y
S = Elastic section modulus.
S = Effective section modulus.

e
W = Web thickness.
λ = Non-dimensional slenderness parameter in column formula.
λ = Effective non-dimensional slenderness parameter in column formula

ye
considering effective yield stress.
ϕ = Resistance factor
Axial Tension
The criteria governing the capacity of tension members is based on two limit states.
The limit state of yielding in the gross section is intended to prevent excessive
elongation of the member. The second limit state involves fracture at the section
with the minimum effective net area. The net section area may be specified by the

user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 3B.1). STAAD calculates the
tension capacity of a member based on these two limits states per Cl.13.2 of
CAN/CSA-S16-01. Parameters FYLD, FU, and NSF are applicable for these
calculations.
Axial Compression
The compressive resistance of columns is determined based on Clause 13.3 of the

code. The equations presented in this section of the code assume that the
compressive resistance is a function of the compressive strength of the gross
section (Gross section Area times the Yield Strength) as well as the slenderness
factor (KL/r ratios). The effective length for the calculation of compression
resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KT, KY, KZ, LT, LY,
and LZ (see Table 3B.1). Some of the aspects of the axial compression capacity
calculations are :
1. For frame members not subjected to any bending, and for truss members,
the axial compression capacity in general column flexural buckling is
calculated from Cl.13.3.1 using the slenderness ratios for the local Y-Y and
Z-Z axis. The parameters KY, LY, KZ and LZ are applicable for this.
2. For single angles, which are frame members not subjected to any bending or
truss members, the axial compression capacity in general column flexural
buckling and local buckling of thin legs is calculated using the rules of the
AISC - LRFD code, 2nd ed., 1994. The reason for this is that the Canadian
code doesn’t provide any clear guidelines for calculating this value. The
parameters KY, LY, KZ, and LZ are applicable for this.
3. The axial compression capacity is also calculated by taking flexural-torsional

buckling into account. The rules of Appendix D, page 1-109 of CAN/CSA-
S16-01are used for this purpose. Parameters KT and LT may be used to
provide the effective length factor and effective length value for flexural-
torsional buckling. Flexural-torsional buckling capacity is computed for
single channels, single angles, Tees and Double angles.
4. The variable “n” in Cl.13.3.1 is assumed as 2.24 for WWF shapes and 1.34
for all other shapes.
5. While computing the general column flexural buckling capacity of sections

with axial compression + bending, the special provisions of 13.8.1(a),
172 — STAAD.Pro
13.8.1(b) and 13.8.1(c) are applied. For example, Lambda = 0 for 13.8.1(a),
K=1 for 13.8.1(b), etc.)
For Class 4 members subjected to axial compression, factored compressive

resistance should be determined by either of the following equations.
a. C = ϕA F (1+λ2n )-1⁄n
r e y
Where:
n = 1.34
λ = √(F /F )
y e
F =(π2 E)/(KL/r)2
e
Ae is calculated using reduced element widths meeting the maximum width to
thickness ratio specified in Table 1.
Effective width required for the calculation of effective area Ae, for different
section shapes are as follows.
l For flanges of I-section, T-section and channel section and legs of angle
section
b = 200t/√((F )
e y
l For stem of T-section
b = 340t/√((F )
e y
l For flanges of HSS rectangular or Tube sections
b = 670t/√((F )
e y
l For circular HSS or Pipe section
D= 23000t/(F
y
b. C = ϕAF (1+λ 2n )-1⁄n
r ye ye
Where:
n = 1.34
λ = √(F /F_e )
ye ye
F =(π2 E)/(KL/r)2
e

With an effective yield stress, F , determined from the maximum width (or
ye
diameter)-to-thickness ratio meeting the limit specified in Table 1.
Following are the expressions for effective yield stress for different shaped
section.
l For I-section, T-section, channel section and angle section
F = 40000/(b/t)2
ye
l For rectangular HSS section
F = 448900/(b/t)2
ye
l For circular HSS section
F = 23000/(D/t)
ye
Bending
The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange for the purpose of
computing the factored moment resistance is specified in STAAD with the help of
the parameter UNL. If UNL is less than one tenth the member length (member
length is the distance between the joints of the member), the member is treated as
being continuously laterally supported. In this case, the moment resistance is
computed from Clause 13.5 of the code. If UNL is greater than or equal to one
tenth the member length, its value is used as the laterally unsupported length. The
equations of Clause 13.6 of the code are used to arrive at the moment of
resistance of laterally unsupported members. Some of the aspects of the bending
capacity calculations are :
1. The weak axis bending capacity of all sections except single angles is
calculated as
For Class 1 & 2 sections, φ P F

y y
For Class 3 sections, φ S F
y y
where
φ = Resistance factor = 0.9
P = Plastic section modulus about the local Y axis

y
174 — STAAD.Pro
S = Elastic section modulus about the local Y axis
y
F = Yield stress of steel
y
2. For single angles, the bending capacities are calculated for the principal axes.
The specifications of Section 5, page 6-283 of AISC-LRFD 1994, 2nd ed., are
used for this purpose because the Canadian code doesn’t provide any clear
guidelines for calculating this value.
3. For calculating the bending capacity about the Z-Z axis of singly symmetric
shapes such as Tees and Double angles, CAN/CSA-S16-01 stipulates in
Clause 13.6(d), page 1-31, that a rational method, such as that given in
SSRC’s Guide to Stability Design Criteria of Metal Structures, be used.
Instead, STAAD uses the rules of Section 2c, page 6-55 of AISC-LRFD 1994,
2nd ed.
Laterally Supported Class 4 members subjected to bending
i. When both the web and compressive flange exceed the limits for Class 3 sec-
tions, the member should be considered as failed and an error message will
be thrown.
ii. When flanges meet the requirements of Class 3 but web exceeds the limits for
Class 3, resisting moment shall be determined by the following equation.
M_r^'= M_r [1-0.0005 A_w/A_f (h/w-1900/√(M_f⁄ϕS)) ]
Where Mr = factored moment resistance as determined by Clause 13.5 or

13.6 but not to exceed ϕMy = factored moment resistance for Class 3 sections
= ϕMy
If axial compressive force is present in addition to the moment, modified

moment resistance should be as follows.
M_r^'= M_r [1-0.0005 A_w/A_f (h/w-1900(1-0.65 C_f⁄(ϕC_y

))/√(M_f⁄ϕS)) ]
Cy = AFy.
S = Elastic section modulus of steel section.
iii. For sections whose webs meet the requirements of Class 3 and whose flanges
exceed the limit of Class 3, the moment resistance shall be calculated as

Mr = ϕSeFy
Where:
Se = effective section modulus determined using effective flange

width.
l For Rectangular HSS section, effective flange width
b_e= 670t/√(F_y )
l For I-section, T-section, Channel section, effective flange width and for
Angle section, effective length width
b_e= 200t/√(F_y )
But shall not exceed 60t.
Laterally Unsupported Class 4 members subjected to bending
As per clause 13.6(b) the moment resistance for class-4 section shall be calculated
as follows
i. When Mu>0.67My
M_r=1.15ϕM_y (1-(0.28M_y)/M_u )
Mr should not exceed ϕSeFy.
ii. When Mu<=0.67My
M_r=ϕM_u
Where, as per clause 13.6(a),
M_u=(ω_2 π)/L √(EI_y GJ+(πE/L)^2 I_y C_w )
For unbraced length subjected to end moments-
ω =1.75+1.05k+0.3k^2≤2.5
2
When bending moment at any point within the unbraced length is larger than the
larger end moment or when there is no effective lateral support for the
compression flange at one of the ends of unsupported length-
ω = 1.0
2
176 — STAAD.Pro
k = Ratio of the smaller factored moment to the larger moment at opposite ends of
the unbraced length, positive for double curvature and negative for single
curvature.
Se = effective section modulus determined using effective flange width.
l For Rectangular HSS section, effective flange width
b_e= 670t/√(F_y )
l For I-section, T-section, Channel section, effective flange width and for Angle
section, effective length width
b_e= 200t/√(F_y )
But shall not exceed 60t.
This clause is applicable only for I shaped and Channel shaped section as there is
no guide line in the code for other sections.
Axial compression and bending
biaxial bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. In these
equations, the additional bending caused by the action of the axial load is
accounted for by using amplification factors. Clause 13.8 of the code provides the
equations for this purpose. If the summation of the left hand side of these
equations exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter
(see Table 3B.1), the member is considered to have FAILed under the loading
condition.
Axial tension and bending
Members subjected to axial tension and bending are also designed using
interaction equations. Clause 13.9 of the code is used to perform these checks. The
actual RATIO is determined as the value of the left hand side of the critical
equation.
Shear
The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of
Clause 13.4 of the code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on

the cross section to the shear resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the
ratios (for both local Y & Z axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using
the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the section is considered to have failed
under shear. The code also requires that the slenderness ratio of the web be within
a certain limit (See Cl.13.4.1.3, page 1-29 of CAN/CSA-S16-01). Checks for safety
in shear are performed only if this value is within the allowable limit. Users may
by-pass this limitation by specifying a value of 2.0 for the MAIN parameter.

The design parameters outlined in Table 3B.1 may be used to control the design
Table 3B.1 - Canadian Steel Design CSA-S16-01 Parameters

CODE
178 — STAAD.Pro
BEAM 1.0 0.0 = design

only for end
moments and
those at
locations
specified by
SECTION
command.
1.0 = Perform
design for
moments at
twelfth points
along the beam.
CB 1.0 Greater than 0.0

and less than
2.5 : Value of
Omega_2
(Cl.13.6) to be
used for
calculation.
Equal to 0.0 :
Calculate
Omega_2
CMY 1.0 1.0 = Do not

calculate Omega-
1 for local Y axis.
2.0 = Calculate
Omega-1 for
local Y axis.
Used in
Cl.13.8.4 of
code
CMZ 1.0 1.0 = Do not

calculate Omega-

1 for local Z axis.
2.0 = Calculate
Omega-1 for
local Z axis.
Used in
Cl.13.8.4 of
code
DFF None(Mandatory for “Deflection

deflection check) Length”/Maxm.
Allowable local
deflection.
DJ1 Start Joint of member Joint No.

denoting start
point for
calculation of
“deflection
length”
DJ2 End Joint of member Joint No.

denoting end
point for
calculation of
“deflection
length”
DMAX 45.0 in. Maximum

allowable depth
(Applicable for
member
selection)
DMIN 0.0 in. Minimum

required depth
(Applicable for
member
selection)
FYLD 300.0 MPa Yield strength of
180 — STAAD.Pro
steel.
FU 345.0 MPa Ultimate strength

of steel.
KT 1.0 K value for

flexural torsional
buckling.
KY 1.0 K value for

general column
flexural buckling
about the local
Y-axis. Used to
calculate
slenderness
ratio.
KZ 1.0 K value for

general column
flexural buckling
about the local
Z-axis. Used to
calculate
slenderness
ratio.
LT Member Length Length for

flexural torsional
buckling.
LY Member Length Length for

general column
flexural buckling
about the local
Y-axis. Used to
calculate
slenderness
ratio.
LZ Member Length Length for

general column
flexural buckling
about the local
Z-axis. Used to
calculate
slenderness
ratio.
MAIN 0.0 0.0 = Check

slenderness ratio
against the
limits.
1.0= Suppress
the slenderness
ratio check.
2.0 = Check
slenderness ratio
only for column
buckling, not for
web (See Section
3B.6, Shear)
NSF 1.0 Net section

factor for tension
members.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio

of actual load
effect to the
design strength.
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Report

only minimum
design results.
1.0 = Report
design strengths
also.
2.0 = Provide
182 — STAAD.Pro
full details of
design.
UNB Member Length Unsupported

length in
bending
compression of
the bottom
flange for
calculating
moment
resistance.
UNT Member Length Unsupported

length in
bending
compression of
the top flange
for calculating
moment
resistance.
3B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to check whether the provided section properties
of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per the CAN/CSA-S16-
01 requirements.
Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the
members. If the BEAM parameter for a member is set to 1, moments are calculated
at every twelfth point along the beam. When no sections are specified and the
BEAM parameter is set to zero (default), design will be based on member start and
end forces only. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or
FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance
from the start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also
printed. The extent of detail of the output can be controlled by using the TRACK
parameter.
Example of commands for CODE CHECKING:

UNIT NEWTON METER

PARAMETER
CODE CANADIAN
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
UNL 15 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 3 4

The member selection process basically involves determination of the least weight
member that PASSes the code checking procedure based on the forces and
moments of the most recent analysis. The section selected will be of the same type
as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially as a channel
will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose properties are
originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table.
Member selection cannot be performed on TUBES, PIPES or members listed as
PRISMATIC.
Example of commands for MEMBER SELECTION:
UNIT NEWTON METER

PARAMETER
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
UNL 15 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
SELECT MEMB 3 4
184 — STAAD.Pro
The term CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the CAN/CSA-S16-01
specification which governed the design.
If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, factored member resistances will be printed.
Following is a description of some of the items printed.
CR = Factored compressive resistance
TR = Factored tensile resistance
VR = Factored shear resistance
MRZ = Factored moment resistance (about z-axis)
MRY = Factored moment resistance (about y-axis)
Further details can be obtained by setting TRACK to 2.0.
CR1 = CAPACITY (C ) PER 13.8.2(a)

r
CR2 = CAPACITY (C ) PER 13.8.2(b)
r
CRZ = SEE 13.8.2(b) for uniaxial bending (called C in that Clause)
RX
CTORFLX = Capacity in accordance with 13.8.2(c)
3B.11 Verification Problems

In the next few pages are included several verification examples for reference
purposes. Since the S16-01 code is similar in many respects to the previous edition
of the code (CAN/CSA S16.1-94), the solved examples of the 1994 edition of the
CISC Handbook have been used as reference material for these examples.
Verification Problem No. 1
Title
Steel beam with uniform load, wide flange section
Type
Static analysis, 3D beam element.

Reference
CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, National Standard of Canada, Limit States Design of Steel

Structures. The Canadian Standards Association, 1994 with CISC (Canadian
Institute of Steel Construction) handbook. CISC Example 1 page 5_91.
Problem
Find the interaction ratio, beam resistance and beam deflection.
Given
E = 200000 MPa (STEEL)
F = 300 Mpa CSA G40.21-M

y
Simply supported beam has a 8.0 m span; Ky is 1.0, Kz 1.0, unsupported length
1.0 m
Allowable Live Load deflection, L/300 = 8000/300 = 27 mm
Factored Uniform Load IS 7 kN/m DEAD, 15 kN/m LIVE.
Steel section is W410X54
Comparison
Table 3B.2 - CAN/CSA-S16 Verification Problem com-

parison
Source Interaction Beam Beam
Ratio Resistance Deflection
(kN*m) (mm)
Reference 0.88 284 21
STAAD.Pro 0.883 283.20 20.81
****************************************************
*
*
* STAAD.PRO
*
186 — STAAD.Pro
* VERSION BLD
*
*
* RESEARCH ENGINEERS, INTL.
*
* DATE=
*
* TIME=
*
*
*
* USER ID:
*
****************************************************
1. STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE
PAGE 5-91
3. * CISC EXAMPLE 1 PAGE 5-91, LIMIT STATES DESIGN,
CSA-S16.1-94
4. * SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM WITH UNIFORM LOAD
5. * LIVE LOAD DEFLECTION OF L/300
7. UNIT MMS KN
8. JOINT COORDINATES
9. 1 0 0 0; 2 8000 0 0
10. MEMBER INCIDENCES
11. 1 1 2
13. MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN
14. 1 TABLE ST W410X54
16. CONSTANTS
17. E STEEL ALL
18. POISSON 0.3 ALL
20. SUPPORTS
21. 1 PINNED
22. 2 FIXED BUT MY MZ
24. UNIT METER KN
25. LOAD 1 DEAD
26. MEMBER LOAD
27. 1 UNI GY -7
29. LOAD 2 LIVE
30. MEMBER LOAD
31. 1 UNI GY -15
33. LOAD COMB 3 1.25DL + 1.5 LL
34. 1 1.25 2 1.5
36. PERFORM ANALYSIS
-----------------------------------
1/ 2
ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 5 DOF
DOM = 5
SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS
REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 19641.6 MB
37. LOAD LIST 2
38. PRINT SECTION DISPLACEMENTS
MEMBER SECTION DISPLACEMENTS

----------------------------
UNIT =INCHES FOR FPS AND CM FOR METRICS/SI SYSTEM
MEMB LOAD GLOBAL X,Y,Z DISPL FROM START TO END
JOINTS AT 1/12TH PTS
1 2 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
-0.5471 0.0000
0.0000 -1.0528 0.0000 0.0000
-1.4824 0.0000
0.0000 -1.8086 0.0000 0.0000
-2.0120 0.0000
0.0000 -2.0812 0.0000 0.0000
-2.0120 0.0000
0.0000 -1.8086 0.0000 0.0000
-1.4824 0.0000
0.0000 -1.0528 0.0000 0.0000
-0.5471 0.0000
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
MAX LOCAL DISP = 2.08115 AT 400.00 LOAD
2 L/DISP= 384
************ END OF SECT DISPL RESULTS ***********
40. LOAD LIST 3
41. PARAMETER
42. CODE CANADIAN
43. TRACK 2 ALL
44. UNL 1 ALL
45. FYLD 300000 ALL
46. BEAM 1 ALL
47. CHECK CODE ALL
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-
S16-01)
******************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST W410X54 (CANADIAN SECTIONS)
PASS CSA-13.8.2+
0.883 3
0.00 C 0.00 -
250.00 4.00
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM)
-----------------------------
CROSS SECTION AREA = 6.84E+01 MEMBER LENGTH =
8.00E+02
IZ = 1.86E+04 SZ = 9.26E+02 PZ = 1.05E+03
IY = 1.02E+03 SY = 1.15E+02 PY = 1.77E+02
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA)
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M)
---------------------------------
CR1 = 1.846E+03 CR2 = 2.732E+02
CRZ = 1.570E+03 CTORFLX = 2.732E+02
188 — STAAD.Pro
TENSILE CAPACITY = 1.805E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY
= 2.732E+02
FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 4.778E+01 MRZ =
2.832E+02
FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 5.379E+02 VRZ =
4.604E+02
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
--------------------------
NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000
KL/RY = 207.170 KL/RZ = 48.447 ALLOWABLE KL/R =
300.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 1.000
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00
OMEGA-2 = 1.00
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00 Z AXIS =
0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 5.08E+01
48. STEEL TAKE OFF ALL
STEEL TAKE-OFF
--------------
PROFILE LENGTH(METE) WEIGHT(KN )
IN STEEL TAKEOFF THE DENSITY OF STEEL IS ASSUMED FOR
MEMBERS WITH NO DENSITY.
ST W410X54 8.00 4.203
PRISMATIC STEEL 0.00 0.000
----------------
TOTAL = 4.203
************
49. FINISH
Title
Steel beam/column, wide flange section.
Type
Static Analysis, 3D beam element.
Reference

Institute of Steel Construction) handbook. CISC Handbook Example, Page 4_106.

Problem
Find the interaction ratio, beam and column resistance.
Given
E = 200000 MPa (STEEL).
F = 300 MPa CSA G40.21-M

y
Simply supported beam/column has a 3.7 m span, Ky is 1.0, Kz 1.0
factored axial load is 2000 kN and end moments of
200 kN*m and 300 kN*m
Steel section is W310X129
Comparison
CAN/CSA- Interaction Beam Column

S16 Ratio Resistance Resistance
(kN*m) (kN)
REFERENCE 0.96 583 3800
STAAD.Pro 0.98 584 3820
****************************************************
*
*
* STAAD.PRO
*
* VERSION BLD
*
*
*
* DATE=
*
* TIME=
*
*
*
190 — STAAD.Pro
* USER ID:
*
****************************************************
PAGE 4-106
2. *
3. * COMPRESSION + MAJOR AXIS BENDING
4. *
5. UNIT METER KN
7. 1 0 0 0; 2 0 3.7 0
8. *
10. 1 1 2
11. *
13. 1 TABLE ST W310X129
14. *
15. CONSTANTS
16. E STEEL ALL
17. POISSON STEEL ALL
18. *
19. SUPPORTS
20. 1 FIXED BUT MX MZ
21. 2 FIXED BUT FY MY MZ
22. *
23. LOAD 1 FACTORED LOAD
24. JOINT LOAD
25. 2 FY -2000
26. 2 MZ 200
27. 1 MZ 300
28. *
29. PDELTA 3 ANALYSIS
-----------------------------------
1/ 2
DOM = 5
++ ADJUSTING DISPLACEMENTS
8:54:35
8:54:35
8:54:35
31. PRINT MEMBER FORCES
-----------------
ALL UNITS ARE -- KN METE
MOM-Y MOM-Z

1 1 1 2000.00 135.14 0.00 0.00

0.00 300.00
2 -2000.00 -135.14 0.00 0.00
0.00 200.00
**************
33. PARAMETER
34. CODE CANADIAN
35. TRACK 2 ALL
36. FYLD 300000 ALL
37. LY 3.7 ALL
38. LZ 3.7 ALL
39. CHECK CODE ALL
S16-01)
******************************************
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/
RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST W310X129 (CANADIAN SECTIONS)
PASS CSA-13.8.2C
0.980 1
2000.00 C 0.00
300.00 0.00
-----------------------------
3.70E+02
IZ = 3.08E+04 SZ = 1.94E+03 PZ = 2.16E+03
IY = 1.00E+04 SY = 6.51E+02 PY = 9.90E+02
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
---------------------------------
CR1 = 4.459E+03 CR2 = 3.820E+03
CRZ = 4.296E+03 CTORFLX = 3.820E+03
= 3.820E+03
5.840E+02
1.505E+03
--------------------------
200.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) =
3.700
OMEGA-2 = 1.00
192 — STAAD.Pro
0.000E+00
40. STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF ALL
STEEL TAKE-OFF
--------------
ST W310X129 3.70 4.694
----------------
TOTAL = 4.694
MEMBER PROFILE LENGTH WEIGHT
(METE) (KN )
1 ST W310X129 3.70 4.694
************
42. FINISH
Title
Steel beam/column, wide flange section.
Type
Static Analysis, 3D beam element.
Reference

Institute of Steel Construction) handbook. CISC Handbook Example, Page 4_108.
Problem
Find the interaction ratio, beam and column resistance.
Given
E = 200000 MPa (STEEL).

F = 300 MPa CSA G40.21-M

y
Simply supported beam/column has a 3.7 m span, Ky is 1.0, Kz 1.0, Lu = 3.7 m
factored axial load is 2000 kN and end moments of
200 kN*m and 300 kN*m in the strong axis and 100 kN*m at each end in the
weak axis.
Steel section is W310X143.
Comparison
CAN/CSA-S16 Interaction Ratio Beam Resistance Column Resistance
(kN*m) (kN)
Weak Strong
REFERENCE 0.998 300 630 4200
STAAD.Pro 1.00 299 650 4222
****************************************************
*
*
* STAAD.PRO
*
* VERSION BLD
*
*
*
* DATE=
*
* TIME=
*
*
*
* USER ID:
*
****************************************************
PAGE 4-108
194 — STAAD.Pro
2. *
3. * ( COMPRESSION + BIAXIAL BENDING )
4. *
5. UNIT METER KN
7. 1 0 0 0; 2 0 3.7 0
8. *
10. 1 1 2
11. *
13. 1 TABLE ST W310X143
14. *
15. CONSTANTS
16. E STEEL ALL
17. POISSON STEEL ALL
18. *
19. SUPPORTS
20. 1 FIXED BUT MX MZ
21. 2 FIXED BUT FY MX MY MZ
22. *
23. LOAD 1 FACTORED LOAD
24. JOINT LOAD
25. 2 FY -2000
26. 2 MZ 200
27. 2 MX 100
28. 1 MZ 300
29. 1 MX 100
30. *
-----------------------------------
1/ 2
DOM = 6
33. PARAMETER
34. CODE CANADIAN
35. CMY 2 ALL
36. CMZ 2 ALL
37. CB 1 ALL
38. TRACK 2 ALL
39. FYLD 300000 ALL
40. CHECK CODE ALL
S16-01)
******************************************
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/
LOADING/
FX MY MZ
LOCATION

=======================================================================
* 1 ST W310X143 (CANADIAN SECTIONS)
FAIL CSA-13.8.2A
1.000 1
2000.00 C -100.00
300.00 0.00
-----------------------------
3.70E+02
IZ = 3.47E+04 SZ = 2.15E+03 PZ = 2.41E+03
IY = 1.12E+04 SY = 7.28E+02 PY = 1.11E+03
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
---------------------------------
CR1 = 4.912E+03 CR2 = 4.222E+03
CRZ = 4.737E+03 CTORFLX = 4.222E+03
= 4.912E+03
6.504E+02
1.678E+03
--------------------------
200.000
3.700
OMEGA-2 = 1.00
5.405E+01
41. STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF ALL
STEEL TAKE-OFF
--------------
ST W310X143 3.70 5.171
----------------
TOTAL = 5.171
MEMBER PROFILE LENGTH WEIGHT
(METE) (KN )
1 ST W310X143 3.70 5.171
************
42. FINISH
196 — STAAD.Pro
Title
A slender, cantilever beam subjected to a uniform load
Type
Reference
CISC Example 1, page 5-91, Limit State Design, CSA-S16.1-94
Problem
A cantilever beam of length 4 meter is subjected to uniformly distributed load of 3

KN/Meter in both major and minor axis. Axial compression of 8 KN is also applied
to the member. User defined steel section Sect_Class-4 from is assigned to the
member.
Given
Design forces
8.0 KN (Compression)
6.0 KNm (Bending-Y)
6.0 KNm (Bending-Z)
6.0 KN (Shear-Y)
6.0 KN (Shear-Z)
Section Properties(Sect_Class-4):
Area = 2766 mm2
Depth of section, D = 150 mm
Thickness of web Tw = 7 mm

Width of flange Bf = 150 mm
Thickness of flange Tf = 6 mm
Moment of inertia about Z axis, Iz = 1086.96X104 mm4
Moment of inertia about Y axis, Iy = 337.894X104 mm4
Moment of inertia about X axis, Ix = 3.7378X104 mm4
Warping constant, Cw = 1.752X1010 mm6
Member Length L = 2 m, Unbraced length = 100mm.
Material
FYLD = 300 MPa
E = 2.05E+05 MPa
G = E/2.6 MPa
Solution
Slenderness Ratio
Effective Length factor along Local Y-Axis = KY = 1
Effective Length factor along Local Z-Axis = KZ = 1
Slenderness ratio about Z axis, L/Rz = 31.9
Slenderness ratio about Y axis, L/Ry = 57.22
Maximum Slenderness Ratio, L/Rmax = 57.22
Section Classification
Bf/Tf = 150*0.5/6 = 12.5 > 200/sqrt(Fy) = 11.54
Flange is Class 4.
d/Tw = (150-2.0*6)/7 = 19.714
(1100/sqrt(Fy))*(1-0.39*Cf/ϕ*Cy)=(1100/sqrt(300))*(1-
0.39*8000/(0.9*2766*300)) = 63.24
Web is Class 1.
198 — STAAD.Pro
Overall section is Class 4 section.
Check against axial compression (Clause 13.3.3)

Effective width, Beff = 200*Tf/sqrt(300) = 69.24
Effective area, Aeff = 69.24*6*4+(150-2*6)*7 = 2627.76 mm4.
Effective yield stress, FYLDeff =40000/( 0.5*Bf/Tf)4 =256 MPa.
As per Clause 13.3.3(a),
Elastic critical buckling, Fe = π4*E/ L_Rmax4 = 617.956 MPa.
Non-dimensional slenderness ratio, λ = sqrt(FYLD/Fe) =0.697
Axial compressive resistance, Cr = ϕ*Aeff*FYLD*(1+0.697^(2*1.34))^(-1/1.34)

= 557886.104 N.
As per Clause 13.3.3(b),
Elastic critical buckling, Fe = π4*E/ L_Rmax4 = 617.956 MPa.
Effective non-dimensional slenderness ratio, λeff = sqrt(FYLDeff/Fe) = 0.644
Axial compressive resistance, Cr = ϕ*Area*FYLDeff*(1+0.644^(2*1.34))^(-

1/1.34) = 521726.94 N.
Axial compressive resistance Min(557886.104, 521726.94) = 521726.94 N.
Check against bending (Clause 13.5(c))

As the web of the section meets the requirement of Class 3 and flange exceeds
Class 3 limit, flexural resistance should be calculated as per clause 13.5(c).iii.
Effective moment of inertia about Z axis,
Izeff =2*(2*69.24*63)/12 + 2*(2*69.24*6)*(150-6)*(150-6)/4 +

(7*(150-2*6)3)/12 =10152591.12 mm4.
Effective section modulus about Z axis,
Szeff = 10152591.12*2/150 = 135367.88 mm3.
Effective moment of inertia about Y axis,
Iyeff =(2*6*(2*69.24)3)/12 +(0.5*(150-6)*73)/12 =2657648.856

mm4.
Effective section modulus about Y axis,
Syeff = 2657648.856/69.24 = 38383.144 mm3.
Major axis bending resistance if member is laterally supported,
Mrz1 = ϕ*Szeff*FYLD= 0.9*135367.88*300 =36549327.6 N-mm.
Minor axis bending resistance,
Mry = ϕ*Syeff*FYLD = 0.9*38383.144*300 = 10363448.88 N-mm.
If the member is laterally unsupported major axis bending resistance is

determined by clause 13.6(b).
As the value of one of the end moments is 0.0, ω2 = 1.75.
Where, as per clause 13.6(a),
Mu =
(1.75*3.14/2000)*sqrt(205000*337.894X10
4*78846.154*3.7378X104 +
(3.14*205000/2000)4*337.894X104*1.752X10^10) =2.48X108
My = Sz*FYLD = (1086.96X104X2/150) *300 =43478400.
Since Mu > 0.65My,
Moment of resistance Mrz2 = 1.15*0.9*43478400*(1-0.28*43478400/2.48X108)

=42791153.71 N-mm = 42.79 KN-m.
Mrz2 should not be more than Mrz1. Since, Mrz2 > Mrz1 in this example, Mrz2 =
Mrz1.
Mrz2 = 36549327.6 N-mm = 36.549 KN-m
200 — STAAD.Pro
Comparison
Hand Cal- STAAD.Pro Comments

culation Result
Axial compressive 521.73 KN 5.219X102 Negligible dif-

resistance KN ference.
Major axis bending 36.549KN- 36.57 KN-m Negligible dif-

resistance m ference.
Minor axis bending 10.363 KN- 10.38 KN-m Negligible dif-

resistance m ference.
****************************************************
*
*
* STAAD.PRO V8I SELECTSERIES2
*
* VERSION 20.07.07.XX
*
*
* BENTLEY SYSTEMS, INC.
*
* DATE= AUG 17, 2010
*
* TIME= 17: 6:23
*
*
*
* USER ID: BENTLEY
*
****************************************************

PAGE 5-91
INPUT FILE: S-16-01 VERIFICATION EXAMPLE.STD
2. START JOB INFORMATION
3. ENGINEER DATE 16-FEB-10
4. END JOB INFORMATION
5. * CISC EXAMPLE 1 PAGE 5-91, LIMIT STATES DESIGN,
CSA-S16.1-94
6. * SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM WITH UNIFORM LOAD
7. * LIVE LOAD DEFLECTION OF L/300
8. UNIT MMS KN
10. 1 0 0 0; 2 2000 0 0

12. 1 1 2
13. START USER TABLE
14. TABLE 1
15. UNIT METER KN
16. WIDE FLANGE
17. SECT_CLASS-4
18. 0.002766 0.15 0.007 0.15 0.006 1.08696E-005
3.37894E-006 3.7378E-008 -
19. 0.00105 0.0018
20. END
21. UNIT METER KN
22. DEFINE MATERIAL START
23. ISOTROPIC MATERIAL1
24. E 2.05E+008
25. POISSON 0.3
26. ISOTROPIC STEEL
27. E 2.05E+008
28. POISSON 0.3
29. DENSITY 76.8195
30. ALPHA 1.2E-005
31. DAMP 0.03
32. END DEFINE MATERIAL
33. MEMBER PROPERTY
34. 1 UPTABLE 1 SECT_CLASS-4
35. UNIT MMS KN
36. CONSTANTS
37. MATERIAL STEEL ALL
38. SUPPORTS
39. 1 FIXED
40. UNIT METER KN
41. LOAD 1 LC1
42. MEMBER LOAD
43. 1 UNI GY -3
44. 1 UNI GZ -3
45. JOINT LOAD
46. 2 FX -8
-----------------------------------
1/ 1
SOLVER USED IS THE IN-CORE ADVANCED SOLVER

DOM = 6
48. LOAD LIST 1

49. PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 1
VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 5-91
-- PAGE NO. 3
202 — STAAD.Pro
-----------------
ALL UNITS ARE -- KN METE (LOCAL )

MOM-Y MOM-Z
1 1 1 8.00 6.00 6.00 0.00

-6.00 6.00
2 -8.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00

**************
50. PARAMETER 1
51. CODE CANADIAN
52. CB 0 ALL
53. TRACK 2 ALL
54. FYLD 300000 ALL
55. CHECK CODE ALL

S16-01 ) V2.0
********************************************
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/

LOADING/
FX MY MZ
LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST SECT_CLASS-4 (UPT)
PASS CSA-13.8.3B 0.760
1
8.00 C -6.00 6.00
0.00

-----------------------------

2.00E+02
IZ = 1.09E+03 SZ = 1.45E+02 PZ = 1.63E+02
IY = 3.38E+02 SY = 4.51E+01 PY = 6.92E+01

IX = 3.74E+00 CW = 1.75E+04
EFFECTIVE MEMBER PROPERTIES FOR CLASS-4 SECTION(UNIT =

CM)
--------------------------------------------------------
--
EFFECTIVE CROSS SECTION AREA = 2.63E+01

EFFECTIVE IZ = 1.02E+03 EFFECTIVE SZ = 1.35E+02
EFFECTIVE IY = 2.66E+02 EFFECTIVE SY = 3.85E+01
EFFECTIVE YILED STRESS = 256.0 MPA
COMPRESSIVE CAPACITIES FOR CLASS 4 SECTION(UNIT = MPA)

------------------------------------------------------
BASED ON EFFECTIVE AREA

CR1 = 7.098E+02 CR2 = 5.582E+02 CRZ = 6.705E+02
CTORFLX = 5.582E+02
BASED ON EFFECTIVE YIELD STRENGTH

CR1 = 6.373E+02 CR2 = 5.219E+02 CRZ = 6.084E+02
CTORFLX = 5.219E+02

--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0 E = 2.05E+05 G =

7.88E+04

---------------------------------
CR1 = 6.373E+02 CR2 = 5.219E+02 SECTION CLASS 4

CRZ = 6.084E+02 CTORFLX = 5.219E+02
= 5.219E+02
3.657E+01
MU = 2.486E+02
3.208E+02
--------------------------

200.000
2.000
204 — STAAD.Pro
OMEGA-2 = 1.75
6.000E+00
56. FINISH
*********** END OF THE STAAD.PRO RUN

***********
**** DATE= AUG 17,2010 TIME= 17: 6:28 ****
************************************************************
* FOR QUESTIONS ON STAAD.PRO, PLEASE CON-
TACT *
* BENTLEY SYSTEMS OFFICES AT THE FOLLOWING LOCA-
TIONS *
*
*
* TELEPHONE WEB / EMAIL
*
*
*
* USA: +1 (714)974-2500
*
* UK +44(1454)207-000
*
* SINGAPORE +65 6225-6158
*
* EUROPE +31 23 5560560
*
* INDIA +91(033)4006-2021
*
* JAPAN +81(03)5952-6500 HTTP://WWW.CTC-
G.CO.JP *
* CHINA +86 10 5929 7000
*
* THAILAND +66(0)2645-1018/19 PAR-
THA.P@REISOFTWARETH.COM *
*
*
* WORLDWIDE HTTP:/-
/SELECTSERVICES.BENTLEY.COM/EN-US/ *
*
*
************************************************************

206 — STAAD.Pro
Canadian Codes - Design Per Canadian Cold
Formed Steel Code S136-94
3C.1 General
Provisions of CSA S136-94, including revisions dated May, 1995, have been
implemented. The program allows design of single (non-composite) members in
tension, compression, bending, shear, as well as their combinations. For laterally
supported members in bending, the Initiation of Yielding method has been used.
Cold work of forming strengthening effects have been included as an option.
3C.2 Cross-Sectional Properties

shape designations from the Gross Section Property Tables published in the "Cold-
Formed Steel Design Manual", AISI, 1996 Edition.
l Channel with Lips
l Angle with Lips
l Angle without Lips
l Z with Lips
l Z without Lips
l Hat
Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of the graphical
file.
3C.3 Design Procedure


Canadian Codes - Design Per Canadian Cold Formed Steel Code S136-94
a. Code Checking
The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load
effects, in accordance with CSA 136. Code checking is carried out for
locations specified via the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter. The
results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a RATIO of load
effect to resistance for each member checked. You may choose the degree of
detail in the output data by setting the TRACK parameter.

information on Code Checking. Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical
Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code Checking
command.
b. Member Selection
You may request that the program search the cold formed steel shapes
database (AISI standard sections) for alternative members that pass the code
check and meet the least weight criterion. In addition, a minimum and/or
maximum acceptable depth of the member may be specified. The program
will then evaluate all database sections of the type initially specified (i.e.,
channel, angle, etc.) and, if a suitable replacement is found, present design
results for that section. If no section satisfying the depth restrictions or
lighter than the initial one can be found, the program leaves the member
unchanged, regardless of whether it passes the code check or not.

information on Member Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical
Reference Manual for details the specification of the Member Selection
command.
The program calculates effective section properties in accordance with Clauses

5.6.2.1 through 3 and 5.6.2.6 through 8. Cross-sectional properties and overall
slenderness of members are checked for compliance with
l Clause 5.3, Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio for members in

Compression
l Clause 5.4, Maximum Flat Width Ratios for Elements in Compression
l Clause 5.5, Maximum Section Depths.
The program will check member strength in accordance with Clause 6 of the
Standard as follows:
208 — STAAD.Pro
l Resistance factors listed in Clauses 6.2 (a), (b), and (e) are used, as
applicable.
l Members in tension - Resistance is calculated in accordance with Clauses

6.3.1 and 6.3.2.
l Members in bending and shear
Resistance calculations are based on Clauses:
l 6.4.1 General,
l 6.4.2 and 6.4.2.1 Laterally Supported Members, compressive limit stress
based on Initiation of Yielding,
l 6.4.3 Laterally Unsupported Members,
l 6.4.4 Channels and Z-Shaped Members with Unstiffened Flanges - additional
limitations,
l 6.4.5 Shear in Webs,
l 6.4.6 Combined Bending and Shear in Webs.
l Members in compression

o 6.6.1.1, 6.6.1.2 (a) and (d), and 6.6.1.3 General,
o 6.6.2 Sections Not Subject to Torsional-Flexural Buckling,
o 6.6.3 Singly Symmetric Sections,
o 6.6.4 Point-Symmetric Sections,
o 6.6.5 Cylindrical Tubular Sections.
l Members in compression and bending
Resistance calculations are based on Clause 6.7.1, Singly and Doubly

Symmetric Sections. Input for the coefficients of uniform bending must be
provided.

The following table contains the input parameters for specifying values of design
variables and selection of design options.

Table 3C.1 - Canadian Cold Formed Steel Design Parameters

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified S136.
See section 5.48.1 of the Technical

Reference Manual.
BEAM 1.0 When this parameter is set to 1.0

(default), the adequacy of the
member is determined by checking
a total of 13 equally spaced
locations along the length of the
member. If the BEAM value is 0.0,
the 13 location check is not
conducted, and instead, checking
is done only at the locations
specified by the SECTION
command (See STAAD manual for
details). If neither the BEAM
parameter nor any SECTION
command is specified, STAAD will
terminate the run and ask the user
to provide one of those 2
commands. This rule is not
enforced for TRUSS members.
CMZ 1.0 Coefficient of equivalent uniform

bending W . See CSA 136, 6.7.2.
z
Used for Combined axial load and
bending design. Values range from
0.4 to 1.0.
210 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
CMY 0.0 Coefficient of equivalent uniform

bending W . See CSA 136, 6.7.2.
y
0.4 to 1.0.
CWY 0 Specifies whether the cold work of

forming strengthening effect
should be included in resistance
computation. See CSA 136, 5.2.
0. effect should not be included

1. effect should be included
DMAX 1000.0 Maximum depth permissible for the

section during member selection.
This value must be provided in the
current units.
DMIN 0.0 Minimum depth required for the

section during member selection.
This value must be provided in the
current units.
FLX 1 Specifies whether torsional-

flexural buckling restraint is
provided or is not necessary for
the member. See CSA 136, 6.6.2
0. Section subject to torsional

flexural buckling and
restraint not provided
1. restraint provided or unnec-
essary
FU 450 MPa Ultimate tensile strength of steel in

current units.
FYLD 350 MPa Yield strength of steel in current

units.


Name Value
KT 1.0 Effective length factor for torsional

buckling. It is a fraction and is
unit-less. Values can range from
0.01 (for a column completely
prevented from torsional buckling)
to any user specified large value. It
is used to compute the KL/R ratio
for twisting for determining the
capacity in axial compression.
KY 1.0 Effective length factor for overall

column buckling about the local Y-
axis. It is a fraction and is unit-less.
Values can range from 0.01 (for a
column completely prevented from
buckling) to any user specified
large value. It is used to compute
the KL/R ratio for determining the
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor for overall

column buckling in the local Z-axis.
It is a fraction and is unit-less.
LT Member Unbraced length for twisting. It is

length input in the current units of length.
torsional buckling) to any user
specified large value. It is used to
compute the KL/R ratio for twisting
for determining the capacity in
axial compression.
212 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
LY Member Effective length for overall column

length buckling in the local Y-axis. It is
input in the current units of length.
LZ Member Effective length for overall column

length buckling in the local Z-axis. It is
NSF 1.0 Net section factor for tension

members, See CSA 136, 6.3.1.
STIFF Member Spacing in the longitudinal

length direction of shear stiffeners for
stiffened flat webs. It is input in the
current units of length. See section
CSA 136, 6.4.5


Name Value
TRACK 0 This parameter is used to control

the level of detail in which the
design output is reported in the
output file. The allowable values
are:
0. Prints only the member

number, section name, ratio,
and PASS/FAIL status.
1. Prints the design summary in
addition to that printed by
TRACK 1
2. Prints member and material
properties in addition to that
printed by TRACK 2.
TSA 1 Specifies whether bearing and

intermediate transverse stiffeners
satisfy the requirements of CSA
136, 6.5. If true, the program uses
the more liberal set of interaction
equations in 6.4.6.
0. stiffeners do not comply with

6.5
1. stiffeners comply with 6.5
214 — STAAD.Pro
Canadian Codes - Wood Design Per CSA Stand-
ard CAN/CSA-086-01
The Canadian Wood Design facility in STAAD is based on CSA086-01. A timber
section library consisting of Sawn and Glulam timber is available for member
property specification.
The design philosophy of this specification is based on the concept of limit state
design. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the
limit states at which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major
categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate and serviceability. The primary
considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability, while that in
serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that
a uniform reliability is achieved for the entire structure under various loading
conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are
acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation, the code checking portion of the program checks
whether code requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the
governing criteria.
of CSA086-01. A detailed description of the design process along with its
underlying concepts and assumptions is available in the specification document.
3D.2 Analysis Methodology

the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications
and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations.
3D.3 Member Property Specifications

For specification of member properties, for Sawn timber the timber section library
available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of
commands used to assign properties from the built-in timber table.
For Glulam timber, member properties can be specified using the YD (depth) and
ZD (width) specifications and selecting Combination and Species specifications

Canadian Codes - Wood Design Per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-086-01
from the built-in table. The assignment is done with the help of the PRISMATIC
option (Refer to Section 5.20 of the Technical Reference Manual)
3D.4 Built-in Timber Section Library

The following information is provided for use when the built-in timber tables are
to be referenced for member property specification. These properties are stored in
a database file. If called for, the properties are also used for member design.
Following are the description of the different types of species combination

available:
Douglas Fir-Larch
The following example illustrates the specification of Douglas Fir-Larch species

combination.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST DFL_SELSTR_2X2_BM
Hem-Fir
Designation of Hem-Fir species combination in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST HEM-FIR_SELSTR_2X10_BM
Northern Species
Designation of Northern species combination in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST NORTHERN_SELSTR_3X12_BM
216 — STAAD.Pro
Spruce-Pine-Fir
Designation of Spruce-Pine-Fir species combination in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST SPF_SELSTR_3X8_BM
Glu Laminated timber
Designation of Glu-lam timber in STAAD involves defining the material, specifying

the dimensions, and associating the material with the member through the
CONSTANTS command.
UNIT CM KN
ISOTROPIC GLT_D.FIR-L-24F-EX
E 51611.7
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 2.5E-005
ALPHA 1.2E-011
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY TIMBER CANADIAN
1 PRIS YD 12 ZD 6
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL GLT_D.FIR-L-24F-EX MEMB 1
Sample input file to demonstrate usage of Canadian timber
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR DIMENSIONAL LUMBER

UNIT FEET POUND

JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 6 0 0; 3 12 0 0; 4 18 0 0;
5 24 0 0; 6 6 3 0; 7 12 6 0; 8 18 3 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2; 2 2 3; 3 3 4; 4 4 5; 5 1 6; 6 6 7; 7 7 8; 8 8 5;
9 2 6; 10 3 7; 11 4 8; 12 6 3; 13 3 8;
UNIT FEET POUND
ISOTROPIC SPF_SELSTR_4X10_BM
E 1224
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 25
ALPHA 5.5E-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY TIM CAN
1 TO 4 9 TO 11 TABLE ST SPF_SELSTR_4X10_BM
5 TO 8 12 13 TABLE ST SPF_SELSTR_4X10_BM
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL SPF_SELSTR_4X10_BM MEMB 1 TO 4 9 TO 11
MATERIAL SPF_SELSTR_4X10_BM MEMB 5 TO 8 12 13
FINISH
3D.5 Member Resistance

The member resistances are calculated in STAAD according to the procedures
outlined in section 5 (for sawn lumber) and 6 (for Glulam) of CSA086-01.
These depend on several adjustment factors as follows:
218 — STAAD.Pro
a. KD = Load duration factor (Clause 4.3.2.2-CSA086-01, Table 4.3.2.2)
b. KH = System factor (Clause 5.4.4 and 6.4.3 and Table 5.4.4 -CSA086-01)
c. K_T = Treatment factor (Clause 5.4.3 and 6.4.4 -CSA086-01)
d. KSB = Service condition factor applicable to Bending at extreme fibre (Table

5.4.2 and 6.4.2 -CSA086-01)
e. KSV = Service condition factor applicable to longitudinal shear (Table 5.4.2

and 6.4.2 CSA086-01)
f. KSC = Service condition factor applicable to Compression parallel to the grain

(Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01)
g. K_SCP = Service condition factor applicable to Compression perpendicular to

the grain (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01)
h. KSE = Service condition factor applicable to modulus of elasticity (Table 5.4.2

and 6.4.2 CSA086-01)
i. KST = Service condition factor applicable to tension parallel to the grain

(Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01)
j. KZB = Size factor applicable to bending (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -
CSA086-01)
k. KZV = size factor applicable to shear(Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-
01)
l. KZT = size factor applicable to tension parallel to grain (Clause 5.4.5 and
Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01)
m. KZCP = size factor applicable to compression perpendicular to grain (Clause

5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01)
n. K_ZC = size factor applicable to compression parallel to grain (Clause 5.4.5

and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01)
o. CHIX = Curvature factor (Clause 6.5.6.5.2-CSA086-01)
p. CV = shear load coefficient (Table 6.5.7.4A- CSA086-01)
q. KN = Notch factor(Clause 5.5.5.4-CSA086-01)
All of these factors must be specified as input according to the classification of

timber and stress grade.

Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating the member
resistances.
Axial Tension
i. For Sawn timber
The criterion governing the capacity of tension members is based on one

limit state. The limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum
effective net area. The net section area may be specified by the user through
the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 3B.1). STAAD calculates the tension
capacity of a member based on this limit state per Clause 5.5.9 of CSA086-
01.
ii. For Glulam timber
The design of glulam tension members differs from sawn timber since CSA
086-01 assigns different specified strength for gross and net section. The
specified strength at net section is slightly higher than the strength of the
gross section. Therefore, Glulam tension members are designed based on
two limit states. The first one is the limit state of yielding in the gross section.
The second limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum
effective net area. The net-section area may be specified by the user through
the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 3B.1). STAAD calculates the tension
capacity of a member based on these two limits states per Clause.6.5.11 of
CSA086-01.
Axial Compression
The compressive resistance of columns is determined based on Clause.5.5.6 and

Clause.6.5.8.4 of CSA086-01. The equations presented in this section of the code
assume that the compressive resistance is a function of the compressive strength
of the gross section (Gross section Area times the Yield Strength) as well as the
slenderness factor (Kc). The effective length for the calculation of compression
resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KX, KY, KZ, LX, LY
and LZ (see Table 3B.1).
220 — STAAD.Pro
Bending
The bending resistance of Sawn members are determined based on Clause 5.5.4 of
CSA086-01 and for glulam members are determined based on Clause 6.5.6.5 of
CSA086-01. The allowable stress in bending is multiplied by Lateral stability factor,
KL to take in account whether lateral support is provided at points of bearing to
prevent lateral displacement and rotation
The member strength for sections subjected to axial compression and uni-axial or
biaxial bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. Clause 5.5.10
and 6.5.12 of the code provides the equations for this purpose. If the summation of
the left hand side of these equations exceeds 1.0 or the allowable value provided
using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the member is considered to have
FAILed under the loading condition.
The member strength for sections subjected to axial tension and uniaxial or biaxial
bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. Clause 5.5.10 and
6.5.12 of the code provides the equations for this purpose. If the summation of the
left hand side of these equations exceeds 1.0 or the allowable value provided using
the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the member is considered to have FAILed
under the loading condition.
Shear
Clause 5.5.5 and 6.5.7.2 of the code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear
force acting on the cross section to the shear resistance of the section is calculated.
If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value
provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the section is considered to
have failed under shear.

The design parameters outlined in Table below may be used to control the design

the program and thus allows the engineer to control the design process to suit an
Table 3D.1 - Canadian Timber Design Parameters

Name Value

TIMBER CANADIAN.

Manual.
CHIX 1.0 Curvature Factor for Compression

[Clause 6.5.6.5.2]
CV 1.0 Shear Load Coefficient [Table

6.5.7.4A]
KD 1.0 Load Duration Factor

[Clause.4.3.2, Table 4.3.2]
KH 1.0 System Factor [Clause 5.4.4/6.4.3,

Table 5.4.4]
KN 1.0 Notch Factor [Clause 5.4.7.2.2]
KSB 1.0 Service Condition Factor for

Bending at Extreme Fibre
Applicable for bending at extreme

fibre [Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
222 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
KSC 1.0 Service Condition Factor for

Compression,
Applicable for compression parallel

to grain [Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
KSE 1.0 Service Condition Factor for

Modulus of Elasticity,
Applicable for modulus of elasticity

[Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
KST 1.0 Service Condition Factor for

Tension,
Applicable for tension parallel to

grain [Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
KSV 1.0 Service Condition Factor for Shear,
Applicable for longitudinal shear

[Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
KX 1.0 K value for flexural torsional

buckling
KY 1.0 K value in local Y-axis, usually

minor axis
KZ 1.0 K value in local Z-axis, usually

major axis
KZB 1.0 Size Factor for Bending,
Applicable for bending

[Clause.5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5]
KZCP 1.0 Size Factor for Compression,
Applicable for compression

perpendicular to grain [Clause
.5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5]


Name Value
KZT 1.0 Size Factor for Tension,
Applicable for tension parallel to

grain
[Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5]
KZV 1.0 Size Factor for Shear [Clause 5.4.5

and Table 5.4.5]
K_SCP 1.0 Service Condition Factor for

Compression,
Applicable for compression

perpendicular to grain [Clause
5.4.2 and Table 6.4.2]
K_T 1.0 Treatment Factor [Clause

5.4.3/6.4.4]
K_ZC 1.0 Size Factor for Compression,
Applicable for compression parallel

to grain [Clause 5.4.5 and Table
5.4.5]
LX Member Length for flexural torsional

length buckling
LY Member Length in local Y axis for

length slenderness value KL/r
LZ Member Length in local Z axis for

length slenderness value KL/r

members
RATIO 1.0 Permissible Ratio of Actual to

Allowable Value
224 — STAAD.Pro
3D.7 Code Checking
of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per the CSA086-01
requirements.
members. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In
addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the
start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed.
PARAMETER
CODE TIMBER CAN
KD 0.99 ALL
KH 0.99 ALL
K_T 0.99 ALL
KSB 0.99 ALL
KSV 0.99 ALL
KSC 0.99 ALL
KSE 0.99 ALL
KST 0.99 ALL
KZB 0.99 ALL
KZV 0.99 ALL
KZT 0.99 ALL
KZCP 0.99 ALL
K_ZC 0.99 ALL
CV 0.99 ALL
KN 0.99 ALL
K_SCP 0.99 ALL
CHIX 0.99 ALL

RATIO 0.99 ALL

CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
3D.8 Member Selection

Member selection based CSA086-2001 is not available.
3D.9 Tabulated Results of Timber Design

The term CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the CSA086-01 specification,
which governed the design.
Pu = Actual Load in Compression
Tu = Actual Load in Tension
Muy = Ultimate moment in y direction
Muz = Ultimate moment in z direction
V = Ultimate shear force
SLENDERNESS_Y = Actual Slenderness ratio in y direction
SLENDERNESS_Z = Actual Slenderness ratio in z direction
PY = Factored Compressive capacity in y direction
PZ = Factored Compressive capacity in z direction
T = Factored tensile capacity
MY = Factored moment of resistance in y direction
MZ = Factored moment of resistance in z direction
V = Factored shear resistance
SLENDERNESS = Allowable slenderness ratio
3D.10 Verification Problems

In the next few pages are included 6 verification examples for reference purposes.
226 — STAAD.Pro
Reference
Example 4, page 116, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001
Problem
To determine the Canadian Glulam section column in axial compression, with

design per Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01 . Column is effectively pinned
at both ends and braced at mid-height in all direction.
Given
Length = 9000 mm
Comparison
Table 3D.2 - CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Prob-

lem 1
Source Design Strength (kN)
Reference 295
STAAD.Pro 293.793
Difference 0.43% (Negligible)
Input File
This file is included in as …\STAAD\EXAMP\CAN\CANADA_GLULAMCOLUMN.STD.
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR GLULAM DESIGN INPUT FILE:

GLULAMCOLUMN.STD
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 10-JUN-05
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79

UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 9 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
UNIT INCHES KIP
ISOTROPIC GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-12C-E
E 9.7
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 1.44676E-005
ALPHA 5.5E-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT FEET POUND
1 PRIS YD 0.748031 ZD 0.574147
UNIT INCHES KIP
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-12C-E MEMB 1
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
UNIT METER KN
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FY -214
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE TIMBER CANADIAN
KY 0.5 ALL
KZ 0.5 ALL
228 — STAAD.Pro
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output for Member Design
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (S086)

***********************
ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOAD-
ING/
FX MY MZ LOCA-
TION
=======================================================================
1 175.00X228.00 CANADIAN GLULAM GRADE:GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-12C-E
PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5 0.728 1
214.00 C 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------
------|
| LEZ = 4500.000 LEY = 4500.000 LUZ = 9000.000 LUY =
9000.000mm |
|
|
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV =
1.000 |
| KSC = 1.000 K_SCP = 1.000 KSE = 1.000 KST = 1.000 KZB =
1.000 |
| KZV = 1.000 KZT = 1.000 KZCP = 1.000 K_ZC = 1.000 CHIX =
1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000
|
|
|
| ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m)
|
| Pu = 214.000
|
| Tu = 0.000
|
| Muy = 0.000
|
| Muz = 0.000
|
| V = 0.000
|
| SLENDERNESS_Y = 19.737
|
| SLENDERNESS_Z = 25.714
|

| ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m)

|
| PY = 413.943
|
| PZ = 293.793
|
| T = 0.000
|
| MY = 0.000
|
| MZ = 0.000
|
| V = 0.000
|
| SLENDERNESS = 50.000
|
|-------------------------------------------------------------------
-------|
Verification Problem: 2
Objective:- To determine the bending capacity of a Canadian Glulam section

single span floor beam. The compression edge assumed fully supported.
Design Code:- Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01)
Reference: - Example 2, page 59, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001
Given:- Length =7500mm, Beam Spacing = 5000mm, Standard load condition,

Dry service condition, Untreated
Comparison: -
Solution Design Strength Design

in bending (kN- Strength in
m) shear (kN)
Theory 208 101
STAAD 208.323 100.776
Difference 0.155% -0.221 %
Input: -

GLULAMBEAM.STD
230 — STAAD.Pro
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 7.5 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
112
UNIT INCHES KIP
ISOTROPIC GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-12C-E
E 9.7
POISSON 0.15
ALPHA 5.5E-006
ISOTROPIC GLT_D.FIR-L-20F-E
E 12.4
POISSON 0.15
ALPHA 5.5E-006
ISOTROPIC CONCRETE
E 3150
POISSON 0.17
DENSITY 8.68E-005
ALPHA 5.5E-006
DAMP 0.05
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT FEET POUND
1 PRIS YD 2.11942 ZD 0.426508
UNIT INCHES KIP

CONSTANTS
MATERIAL GLT_D.FIR-L-20F-E MEMB 1
SUPPORTS
1 2 PINNED
UNIT METER KN
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -27.1
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Relevant portion of Output:
***********************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
========================================================
1 130.00X646.00 CANADIAN GLULAM GRADE:GLT_D.FIR-L-20F-E
FAIL CL.5.5.5/6.5. 1.008 1
0.00 T 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ = 7500.000 LEY = 7500.000 LUZ = 7500.000 LUY = 7500.000mm |
| |
232 — STAAD.Pro
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 |
| KSC = 1.000 K_SCP = 1.000 KSE = 1.000 KST = 1.000 KZB = 1.000 |
| KZV = 1.000 KZT = 1.000 KZCP = 1.000 K_ZC = 1.000 CHIX = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 |
| |
| ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m) |
| Pu = 0.000 |
| Tu = 0.000 |
| Muy = 0.000 |
| Muz = 0.000 |
| V = 101.625 |
| SLENDERNESS_Y = 16.932 |
| SLENDERNESS_Z = 1.529 |
| ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m) |
| PY = 0.000 |
| PZ = 0.000 |
| T = 0.000 |
| MY = 41.923 |
| MZ = 208.323 |
| V = 100.776 |
| SLENDERNESS = 50.000 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
46. FINISH

Objective:- To determine the capacity of a Canadian Glulam section in axial

tension.
Design Code: - Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01)
Reference:- Example 3, page 158, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001
Given:- Dry service condition, Untreated
Comparison: -
Solution Design
Strength
in Tension
(kN)
Theory 257
STAAD 256.636
Difference -0.141 %
Input: -

GLULAMTENSION.STD
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 9 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
112
UNIT INCHES KIP
ISOTROPIC GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-14T-E
234 — STAAD.Pro
E 10.7
POISSON 0.15
ALPHA 5.5E-006
ISOTROPIC CONCRETE
E 3150
POISSON 0.17
DENSITY 8.68E-005
ALPHA 5.5E-006
DAMP 0.05
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT FEET POUND
1 PRIS YD 0.872702 ZD 0.262467
UNIT INCHES KIP
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-14T-E MEMB 1
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
UNIT METER KN
JOINT LOAD
2 FY 250
PARAMETER
KY 0.5 ALL
KZ 0.5 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

***********************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
========================================================
1 80.00X266.00 CANADIAN GLULAM GRADE:GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-14T-E
PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5 0.974 1
250.00 T 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ = 4500.000 LEY = 4500.000 LUZ = 9000.000 LUY = 9000.000mm |
| |
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 |
| |
| Pu = 0.000 |
| Tu = -250.000 |
| Muy = 0.000 |
| Muz = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
| PY = 0.000 |
236 — STAAD.Pro
| PZ = 0.000 |
| T = 256.636 |
| MY = 0.000 |
| MZ = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Objective:- To determine the Canadian Sawn section column in axial

compression. Column is effectively pinned at both ends.
Given: - Unbraced Length = 5000mm
Comparison: -
Solution Design
Strength
(kN)
Theory 130
STAAD 129.223
Difference -0.597 %
Input: -
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR DIMENSIONAL LUMBER INPUT FILE:

SAWN_ LUMBER_ COLUMN.STD
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT FEET POUND
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 16.4042 0

MEMBER INCIDENCES
112
ISOTROPIC DFL_NO2_8X8_POST
E 1.368E+006
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 25
ALPHA 5.5E-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT METER KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL DFL_NO2_8X8_POST MEMB 1
UNIT FEET POUND
1 TABLE ST DFL_NO2_8X8_POST
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
UNIT METER KN
LOAD 1 DEAD+LIVE LOAD
JOINT LOAD
2 FY -114
PARAMETER
KSC 0.91 ALL
K_ZC 1.05 ALL
CHECK CODE
FINISH
238 — STAAD.Pro
***********************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=========================================================
1 ST DFL_NO2_8X8_POST
PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5.12 0.882 1
114.00 C 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ = 5000.000 LEY = 5000.000 LUZ = 5000.000 LUY = 5000.000mm |
| |
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 |
| |
| Pu = 114.000 |
| Tu = 0.000 |
| Muy = 0.000 |
| Muz = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
| PY = 129.223 |

| PZ = 129.223 |
| T = 0.000 |
| MY = 0.000 |
| MZ = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Objective: - To determine the bending capacity of a Canadian sawn section

single span floor beam.
Given:- Length =6000mm, Beam Spacing = 3000mm, Standard load condition,

Dry service condition, Untreated
Comparison: -
Solution Design Strength Design

in bending (kN- Strength in
m) shear (kN)
Theory 79.8 46.1
STAAD 79.732 46.170
Difference -0.085% No
Input: -
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR DIMENSIONAL LUMBER: SAWN_

LUMBER_BEAM.STD
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
240 — STAAD.Pro
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 6 0 0; 3 3 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 3; 2 3 2;
UNIT FEET POUND
ISOTROPIC DFL_NO1_10X16_BM
E 1.728E+006
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 25
ALPHA 5.5E-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT METER KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL DFL_NO1_10X16_BM MEMB 1 2
UNIT FEET POUND
1 2 TABLE ST DFL_NO1_10X16_BM
SUPPORTS
1 2 FIXED
UNIT METER KN
MEMBER LOAD
1 2 UNI GY -16.4
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
KD 1.0 ALL
K_T 1.0 ALL
KSB 1.0 ALL

KZB 0.90 ALL

KZV 0.90 ALL
K_ZC 1.05 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
FX MY MZ LOCATION
========================================================
2 ST DFL_NO1_10X16_BM
FAIL CL.5.5.5/6.5.6 1.066 1
0.00 T 0.00 49.20 3.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ = 3000.000 LEY = 3000.000 LUZ = 3000.000 LUY = 3000.000mm |
| |
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 |
| |
| Pu = 0.000 |
| Tu = 0.000 |
| Muy = 0.000 |
242 — STAAD.Pro
| Muz = 49.200 |
| V = -49.200 |
| PY = 0.000 |
| PZ = 0.000 |
| T = 0.000 |
| MY = 79.800 |
| MZ = 79.732 |
| V = 46.170 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
Objective:- To determine the capacity of a Canadian Sawn section in axial tension.
Given:- Dry service condition, Untreated
Comparison: -
Solution Design
Strength in
Tension
(kN)
Theory 185
STAAD 184.338
Difference -0.357 %
Input: -

STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR DIMENSIONAL LUMBER SAWN_

LUMBER_TENSION.STD
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT FEET POUND
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 16.4042 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC DFL_NO1_6X8_BM
E 1.728E+006
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 25
ALPHA 5.5E-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT METER KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL DFL_NO1_6X8_BM MEMB 1
UNIT FEET POUND
1 TABLE ST DFL_NO1_6X8_BM
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
UNIT METER KN
JOINT LOAD
2 FY 144
244 — STAAD.Pro
PARAMETER
KH 1.1 ALL
KSC 0.91 ALL
K_ZC 1.05 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
***********************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=========================================================
1 ST DFL_NO1_6X8_BM
PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5.12 0.781 1
144.00 T 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ = 5000.000 LEY = 5000.000 LUZ = 5000.000 LUY = 5000.000mm |
| |
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.100 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 |
| |

| Pu = 0.000 |
| Tu = -144.000 |
| Muy = 0.000 |
| Muz = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
| PY = 0.000 |
| PZ = 0.000 |
| T = 184.338 |
| MY = 0.000 |
| MZ = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
246 — STAAD.Pro
Section 4
Chinese Codes

248 — STAAD.Pro
Chinese Codes - Concrete Design Per GB50010-
2002
STAAD has the capabilities for performing concrete design per GB50010-2002. It
can calculate the reinforcement needed for sections assigned through the
PRISMATIC attribute. The concrete design calculations are based on the limit state
method of GB50010-2002.

l For Beams — Prismatic (Rectangular, Square, Tee, and Trapezoidal)

l For Columns — Prismatic (Rectangular, Square, and Circular)

UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
14 TO 16 PRIS YD 400. ZD 750. YB 300. ZB 200.
will be done accordingly. In the above input, the first set of members are
rectangular (450 mm depth and 250mm width) and the second set of members,
with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with 350 mm
diameter. The third set numbers in the above example represents a T-shape with
750 mm flange width, 200 width, 400 mm overall depth and 100 mm flange depth
(See section 6.20.2). The program will determine whether the section is
rectangular, flanged or circular and the beam or column design.

Chinese Codes - Concrete Design Per GB50010-2002

design as per GB50010-2002. Default parameter values have been selected such
that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements.
These values may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table
9A.1 of this manual contains a complete list of the available parameters and their
default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and
Newton before performing the concrete design. Please note as per GB50010-
2002, STAAD supports Characteristic Values of Concrete Strength and Design
Value of Strength of Steel Bar only as per Table 4.1.4 and Table 4.2.3-1
respectively.
Table 4A.1 - Chinese Concrete Design GB50010-2002 Parameters

Name Value
CODE CHINESE Design Code to follow.

Reference Manual.
250 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
BRACING 0.0 BEAM DESIGN
A value of 1.0 means the

effect of axial force will be
taken into account for
beam design.
COLUMN DESIGN

column is unbraced about
major axis.

minor axis.

both axis.
DEPTH YD Total depth to be used for design. This

value defaults to YD as provided
under MEMBER PROPERTIES.
ELZ 1.0 Ratio of effective length to actual

length of column about major axis.
ELY 1.0 Ratio of effective length to actual

length of column about minor axis.


Name Value
FC 15 Concrete Yield Stress.

N/mm2
FYMAIN 210 Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel.

N/mm2
FYSEC 210 Yield Stress for secondary reinforcing

N/mm2 steel.
MAXMAIN 60 mm Maximum main reinforcement bar

size.
MAXSEC 12 mm Maximum secondary reinforcement

bar size.
MINMAIN 10 mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size.
MINSEC 8 mm Minimum secondary reinforcement bar

size.
RATIO 4.0 Maximum percentage of longitudinal

reinforcement in columns.
REINF 0.0 Tied column. A value of 1.0 will mean

spiral reinforcement.
RFACE 4.0 A value of 4.0 means longitudinal

reinforcement in column is arranged
equally along 4 faces.
A value of 2.0 invokes 2 faced

distribution about major axis.
A value of 3.0 invokes 2 faced

distribution about minor axis.
252 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
TRACK 0.0 BEAM DESIGN:
0.0 = , output consists of

reinforcement details at
START, MIDDLE and END.
1.0 = critical moments are

printed in addition to
TRACK 0.0 output.
2.0 = required steel for

intermediate sections
defined by NSECTION are
printed in addition to
TRACK 1.0 output.
COLUMN DESIGN:
0.0 = reinforcement
details are printed.
1.0 = column interaction

analysis results are printed
in addition to TRACK 0.0
output.
2.0 = a schematic
interaction diagram and
intermediate interaction
values are printed in
addition to TRACK 1.0
output
9.0 = details of section

capacity calculations.


Name Value
WIDTH ZD Width to be used for design. This

value defaults to ZD as provided
4A.5 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. If required the effect the axial
force may be taken into consideration. For all these forces, all active beam
loadings are prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different sections of
the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13 (e.g., 0., .1, .2, .25, .3,
Design for Flexure
active load cases at each of the above mentioned sections. Each of these sections
are designed to resist both of these critical sagging and hogging moments. Where
ever the rectangular section is inadequate as singly reinforced section, doubly
reinforced section is tried. However, presently the flanged section is designed only
as singly reinforced section under sagging moment. It may also be noted all
flanged sections are automatically designed as rectangular section under hogging
moment as the flange of the beam is ineffective under hogging moment. Flexural
design of beams are performed in two passes. In the first pass, effective depths of
the sections are determined with the assumption of single layer of assumed
reinforcement and reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the
preliminary design, reinforcing bars are chosen from the internal database in
single or multiple layers. The entire flexure design is performed again in a second
pass taking into account of the changed effective depths of sections calculated on
the basis of reinforcement provide after the preliminary design. Final provision of
flexural reinforcements is made then. Efforts have been made to meet the
guideline for the reinforcement detailing as per GB50010-2002 Although exact
curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (finally which
will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account of other practical
254 — STAAD.Pro
consideration), user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD
at 11 equally spaced sections from which the final detail drawing can be prepared.
Design for Shear

moments. Shear design are performed at 11 equally spaced sections (0. to 1.) for
the maximum shear forces amongst the active load cases and the associated
torsional moments. Shear capacity calculation at different sections without the
shear reinforcement is based on the actual tensile reinforcement provided by
STAAD program. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance
shear forces acting on these sections.
Beam Design Output
The default design output of the beam contains flexural and shear reinforcement
provided at 5 equally spaced (0, .25, .5, .75, and 1.) sections along the length of
the beam. User has option to get a more detail output. All beam design outputs are
given in IS units. An example of rectangular beam design output with the default
output option (TRACK 0.0) is presented below:
==========================================-
==================================
B E A M N O. 12 D E S I G N R E S U L T S
C20 HRB400 (Main) HRB400 (Sec.)
LENGTH: 4000.0 mm SIZE: 250.0 mm X 350.0 mm COVER:

30.0 mm
DESIGN LOAD SUMMARY (KN MET)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION |FLEXTURE (Maxm. Sagging/Hogging moments)|

SHEAR
(in mm) | P MZ MX Load Case | VY MX Load Case
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | 29.64 1.23 4

| 0.00 -25.68 1.23 4 |
400.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | 27.97 1.23 4
| 0.00 -16.05 1.23 4 |
800.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | 25.12 1.23 4
| 0.00 -7.17 1.23 4 |
1200.0 | 0.00 0.97 0.49 5 | 21.11 1.23 4
| 0.00 -0.14 1.32 6 |
1600.0 | 0.00 6.77 1.23 4 | 15.93 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2000.0 | 0.00 11.06 1.23 4 | 9.59 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2400.0 | 0.00 13.04 1.23 4 | 2.08 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
2800.0 | 0.00 12.45 1.23 4 | -5.43 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
3200.0 | 0.00 9.55 1.23 4 | -11.77 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
3600.0 | 0.00 4.73 1.23 4 | -16.95 1.23 4
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 |
4000.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 4 | -25.48 1.23 4
| 0.00 -17.36 1.23 4 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY OF REINF. AREA (Sq.mm)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
256 — STAAD.Pro
SECTION 0.0 mm 1000.0 mm 2000.0 mm 3000.0 mm
4000.0 mm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP 259.04 161.29 0.00 0.00 176.31
REINF. (Sq. mm) (Sq. mm) (Sq. mm) (Sq. mm) (Sq.
mm)
BOTTOM 0.00 160.78 160.78 160.78 0.00
REINF. (Sq. mm) (Sq. mm) (Sq. mm) (Sq. mm) (Sq.
mm)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY OF PROVIDED REINF. AREA
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION 0.0 mm 1000.0 mm 2000.0 mm 3000.0 mm

4000.0 mm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP 4-10Ø 3-10Ø 2-10Ø 2-10Ø 3-10Ø
REINF. 1 layer(s) 1 layer(s) 1 layer(s) 1 layer(s) 1 layer(s)
BOTTOM 2-12Ø 2-12Ø 2-12Ø 2-12Ø 2-12Ø
REINF. 1 layer(s) 1 layer(s) 1 layer(s) 1 layer(s) 1 layer(s)
SHEAR 2 legged 8Ø 2 legged 8Ø 2 legged 8Ø 2 legged 8Ø 2

legged 8Ø
REINF. @ 100 mm c/c @ 100 mm c/c @ 100 mm c/c @ 100 mm c/c

@ 100 mm c/c
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
=====================================================

4A.6 Column Design

load cases are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which yield maximum
reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for square,
rectangular and circular sections. By default, square and rectangular columns and
designed with reinforcement distributed on each side equally for the sections
under biaxial moments and with reinforcement distributed equally in two faces for
sections under uniaxial moment. User may change the default arrangement of the
reinforcement with the help of the parameter RFACE (see Table 4A.1). Depending
upon the member lengths, section dimensions and effective length coefficients
specified by the user STAAD automatically determine the criterion (short or long)
of the column design. All major criteria for selecting longitudinal and transverse
reinforcement as stipulated by GB50010-2002 have been taken care of in the
column design of STAAD.
Column Design Output
Default column design output (TRACK 0.0) contains the reinforcement provided by
STAAD and the capacity of the section. With the option TRACK 1.0, the output
contains intermediate results such as the design forces, effective length
coefficients, additional moments etc. A special output TRACK 9.0 is introduced to
obtain the details of section capacity calculations. All design output is given in SI
units. An example of a long column design output (with option TRACK 1.0) is
given below.
=========================================-
===================================
C O L U M N No. 1 D E S I G N R E S U L T S
C20 HRB400 (Main) HRB400 (Sec.)
LENGTH: 3000.0 mm CROSS SECTION: 250.0 mm dia. COVER:

40.0 mm
** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 5 BRACED LONG COLUMN
DESIGN FORCES (KNS-MET)
-----------------------
258 — STAAD.Pro
DESIGN AXIAL FORCE (Pu) : 62.0
About Z About Y
INITIAL MOMENTS : 2.21 32.29
MOMENTS DUE TO MINIMUM ECC. : 1.24 1.24
SLENDERNESS RATIOS : 12.00 12.00
MOMENTS DUE TO SLENDERNESS EFFECT : 1.12 1.12
MOMENT REDUCTION FACTORS : 1.00 1.00
ADDITION MOMENTS (Maz and May) : 1.12 1.12
TOTAL DESIGN MOMENTS : 3.32 33.40
REQD. STEEL AREA : 1822.71 Sq.mm.
MAIN REINFORCEMENT : Provide 17 - 12 dia. (3.92%, 1922.65

Sq.mm.)
(Equally distributed)
TIE REINFORCEMENT : Provide 8 mm dia. rectangular ties @ 190

mm c/c
SECTION CAPACITY (KNS-MET)
--------------------------
Puz : 992.70 Muz1 : 36.87 Muy1 : 36.87
INTERACTION RATIO: 1.00
=====================================================

260 — STAAD.Pro
Chinese Codes - Steel Design Per GBJ 50017-
2003
4B.1 General
his section presents some general statements regarding the implementation in
STAAD of the National Standard of the People’s Republic of China specifications for
Design of Steel Structures (GB50017-2003). The design philosophy and procedural
logistics are based on the principles of limit state design method. Facilities are
available for member selection as well as code checking. The following sections
describe the salient features of the design approach.
Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceedance of the
capacities. The most economical section is selected on the basis of the least weight
criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness
requirements and the stability criteria. It is generally assumed that the user will take
care of the detailing requirements like flange buckling, web crippling etc. Users are
recommended to adopt the following steps in performing the steel design:
1. Specify the geometry and factored loads. Perform the analysis.
2. Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.
3. Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection.

Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis, P-Delta
analysis or Non-linear analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be
performed and the results combined with static analysis results.


Chinese Codes - Steel Design Per GBJ 50017-2003
using the User Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to the
STAAD Program Technical Reference manual.
4B.4 Built-in Chinese Steel Section Library

for these members. An example of the member property specification in an input
file is provided at the end of this section.
I Shapes
I shaped sections are designated in the following way.
1 TO 5 15 16 TABLE ST I22B
H Shapes
H shaped sections are designated in the following way.
6 TO 8 TABLE ST HW250X250
T Shapes
T shaped sections are designated in the following way.
24 25 33 TO 36 TABLE ST TM244X300
Channels
Channels are specified in the following way.
262 — STAAD.Pro
29 30 TABLE ST CH25A
Double Channels
Back to back double channels, with or without a spacing between them, are
11 TABLE D CH22B
17 TABLE D CH40C SP 0.15

CH22B with no spacing in between. Member 17 is a double channel CH40C with a
spacing of 0.15 length units between the channels.
Angles
Two types of specifications may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle
19 TABLE ST L100X100X7
27 TABLE RA L40X25X3
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 40mm and 25mm and a leg
thickness of 3 mm. This specification may be used when the local Z axis
corresponds to the z-z axis specified in Chapter 2. If the local Y axis corresponds to
the z-z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
Double Angles
22 TABLE LD L56X36X3

32 TABLE SD L45X28X4
20 TABLE LD L56X36X3 SP 0.15
28 TABLE SD L56X36X4 SP 0.15
Tubes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the designation for the tube
is as shown below. This method is meant for tubes whose property name is
available in the steel table. In these examples, member 12 consist of a 10X6X0.3
cm size tube section,
12 TABLE ST TUB100603.0
In the second method, tubes are specified by their dimensions. For example,
13 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.15 WT 0.8 DT 0.6
is a tube that has a height of 0.6 length units, width of 0.6 length units, and a wall
thickness of 0.15 length units.
Pipes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the designation for the pipe
is as shown below. This method is meant for pipes whose property name is
available in the steel table.
21 31 TABLE ST PIP203X6.5
In the second method, pipe sections may be provided by specifying the word PIPE
followed by the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
9 10 14 18 23 26 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.6 ID 0.55
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 0.6 length units and inside diameter of
.55 length units.
Sample File Containing Chinese Shapes
264 — STAAD.Pro
STAAD SPACE
ENGINEER DATE 04-AUG-05
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 4 0 0; 3 9 0 0; 4 0 0 4; 5 4 0 4; 6 0 0 8; 7 4 0 8; 8 9 0 8;
9 0 3.5 0; 10 4 3.5 0; 11 9 3.5 0; 12 0 3.5 4; 13 4 3.5 4; 14 0 3.5 8;
15 4 3.5 8; 16 9 3.5 8; 17 0 7 0; 18 4 7 0; 19 9 7 0; 20 0 7 4;
21 4 7 4; 22 0 7 8; 23 4 7 8; 24 9 7 8;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 9; 2 2 10; 3 3 11; 4 4 12; 5 5 13; 6 6 14; 7 7 15; 8 8 16; 9 9 17;
10 10 18; 11 11 19; 12 12 20; 13 13 21; 14 14 22; 15 15 23; 16 16 24;
17 9 10; 18 10 11; 19 12 13; 20 14 15; 21 15 16; 22 17 18; 23 18 19;
24 20 21; 25 22 23; 26 23 24; 27 9 12; 28 12 14; 29 10 13; 30 13 15;
31 11 16; 32 17 20; 33 20 22; 34 18 21; 35 21 23; 36 19 24;
MEMBER PROPERTY CHINESE
*I SHAPES
1 TO 5 15 16 TABLE ST I22B
*H SHAPES
6 TO 8 TABLE ST HW250X250
*T SHAPES
24 25 33 TO 36 TABLE ST TM244X300
*CHANNELS
29 30 TABLE ST CH25A
*DOUBLE CHANNELS
11 TABLE D CH22B
17 TABLE D CH40C SP 0.15
*ANGLES
19 TABLE ST L100X100X7

*DOUBLE ANGLES
27 TABLE RA L40X25X3
22 TABLE LD L56X36X3
32 TABLE SD L45X28X4
20 TABLE LD L56X36X3 SP 0.15
28 TABLE SD L56X36X4 SP 0.15
*TUBES
12 TABLE ST TUB100603.0
13 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.15 WT 0.8 DT 0.6
*PIPES
21 31 TABLE ST PIP203X6.5
9 10 14 18 23 26 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.6 ID 0.55
FINISH

The basic measure of member capacities are the allowable stresses on the member
under various conditions of applied loading such as allowable tensile stress,
allowable compressive stress etc. These depend on several factors such as cross
sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios
and so on. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such
capacities.
Allowable stress for Axial Tension
basis of allowable tensile stresses provided in Table 3.4.1-1 of the code. STAAD
calculates the tension capacity of a given member per this allowable stress value
and a user supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present but
may be altered by changing the input value, see Table 1) and proceeds with
member selection or code checking.
Allowable stress for Axial Compression
266 — STAAD.Pro
The allowable stress for members in compression is determined according to Table
3.4.1-1. Compressive resistance is a function of the slenderness of the cross-
section (Kl/r ratio) and the user may control the slenderness value by modifying
parameters such as KY, LY, KZ and LZ. The provisions of Section 5 are used to
check the adequacy of sections in compression.
Allowable stress for Bending and Shear
Sections subjected to bending moments and shear forces are to be designed

according to the provisions of section 4. The permissible bending compressive and
tensile stresses are dependent on such factors as outstanding legs and thickness of
flanges, unsupported length of the compression flange (UNL, defaults to member
length) etc. Shear capacities are calculated according to Table 3.4.1-1 and Section
4 and are a function of web depth, web thickness etc. Users may use a value of 1.0
or 2.0 for the TRACK parameter to obtain a listing of the bending and shear
capacities.
Allowable stress for Combined Loading
For members experiencing combined loading (axial force, bending and shear),
applicable interaction formulas are checked at different locations of the member for
all modeled loading situations. The procedure of Section 5 is implemented for
combined axial load and bending.
4B.6 Combined Loading

all modeled loading situations. The procedure of Section 5 is implemented for
combined axial load and bending.

The user is allowed complete control over the design process through the use of
parameters mentioned in Table 4B.1. These parameters communicate design
decisions from the engineer to the program.
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used
numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements
of an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to
exactly model the physical structure.

Table 4B.1 - Chinese Steel Design GBJ 50017-2003 Parameters

Parameter Default Definition Code Ref- Notes
Name Value erence
Design Code to
follow.
See section
CODE CHINESE 5.48.1 of the - -
Technical
Reference
Manual.
0 = Perform
design at ends
and those
locations
specified in the
section
BEAM 1 Beam parameter - command.
1 = Perform
design at ends
and 1/12th
section locations
along member
length.
Allowable KL/r
COM
150 value in - -
PRESSION
compression
Maximum
DMAX 100 cm - -
allowable depth
Minimum
DMIN 0 cm - -
required depth
268 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value erence
The Following
values represent
the various
grades of steel.
Q235
-1
Clause
GRADE 1 Grade of steel
3.4.1 Q345
-2
Q390
-3
Q420
-4
K value in local Y-
KY 1 axis, usually - -
minor axis
K value in local Z-
KZ 1 axis, usually - -
major axis
Length in local Y
Default is
axis for
LY 0 - selected beam's
slenderness value
length
KL/r
Length in local Z
Default is
axis for
LZ 0 - selected beam's
slenderness value
length
KL/r
Flag for 0 = Check for

controlling slenderness.
MAIN - -
slenderness 1 = Do not check
check for slenderness


Name Value erence
Net section factor

NSF 1 for tension - -
members
Permissible ratio
RATIO 1 of actual to - -
allowable stress
Plasticity
Table -
PFY 1.2 adaptation factor -
5.2.1
Y direction
Plasticity
Table -
PFZ 1.05 adaptation factor -
5.2.1
Z direction
Overall Stability
Appendix-
SBY 1 factor for Y -
B
direction
Overall Stability
Appendix-
SBZ 0 factor for Z -
B
direction
Stability factor
for axial
compression
members shall be
selected from
appendix –C
based on its
Stability factor Appendix-
SFY 1 slenderness
for Y direction C
ratio, yield
strength,
classification of
the section in
Table 5.1.2-1
and Table 5.1.2-
2
270 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value erence
Stability factor
for axial
compression
members shall be
selected from
appendix –C
based on its
Stability factor Appendix-
SFZ 1 slenderness
for Z direction C
ratio, yield
strength,
classification of
the section in
Table 5.1.2-1
and Table 5.1.2-
2
Allowable KL/r
TENSION 300 - -
value in tension
0 = Suppress
critical member
stress.
1 = Print all
TRACK 0 Track parameter - critical member
stress.
2 = Print
expanded
output.
4B.8 Code Checking

of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked per the GB50017-2003
requirements.

at every twelfth point along the beam, and the maximum moment about the major
axis is used. When no sections are specified and the BEAM parameter is set to zero
(default), design will be based on member start and end forces. The code checking
output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition,
governing load case, location (distance from start joint) and magnitudes of the
governing forces and moments are also printed.
Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for further information
on this feature.
Example
Sample Input data for Chinese Code Steel Design
UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE CHINESE
NSF 0.85 ALL
GRADE 3.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE AL

as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially as a channel
will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose properties are
originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table.
Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for further information
on this feature.
272 — STAAD.Pro
Section 5
European Codes

274 — STAAD.Pro
European Codes - Concrete Design Per Euro-
code EC2
STAAD provides a comprehensive set of national codes for the design of concrete
structures. In general, all the available codes, including EC2, follow the same
procedure for the design of the concrete members.
The main steps in performing a design operation are:
1. Selecting the applicable load cases to be considered in the design process.
2. Providing appropriate parameter values if different from the default values.
3. Perform the design for the member as appropriate.
These operations can be repeated by the user any number of times depending on
the design requirements. The parameters referred to above provide the user with
the ability to allocate specific design properties to individual members considered in
the design operation.
5A.2 Eurocode 2 (EC2)

Eurocode 2, Design of concrete structures, Part 1, General rules and rules for
buildings, provides design rules applicable to plain, reinforced or prestressed
concrete used in buildings and civil engineering works. It is based on the limit state
philosophy common to modern standards.
The objective of this method of design is to ensure that possibility of failure is

reduced to a negligible level. This is achieved through application of factors to both
the applied loads and the material properties. The code also provides guidelines on
the global method of analysis to be used for calculating internal member forces and
moments. STAAD provides a number of methods for analysis, allowing Geometric
Nonlinearity as well as P-Delta effects to be considered.
5A.3 National Application Documents

Various authorities of the CEN member countries have prepared National
Application Documents to be used with EC2. These documents provide alternative
factors for loads and may also provide supplements to the rules in EC2.

European Codes - Concrete Design Per Eurocode EC2
The current version of EC2 implemented in STAAD adheres to the factors and rules
provided in EC2 and has not been modified by any National Application
Documents.
5A.4 Material Properties and Load Factors

Design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic yield strengths, as
given in table 2.3 of EC2, by the material partial safety factors γ for concrete and
c
γ for reinforcements. The magnitude in STAAD is 1.5 for concrete and 1.15 for
s
reinforcements.
Material coefficients in STAAD take the following default values unless replaced by
numerical values provided in the input file.
Modulus of Elasticity, E = 21.71 KN/mm2
Shear Modulus, G = E / 2 (1 + v)
Poisson's Ratio, v = 0.25
Unit weight, ρ = 23.56 KN/m3
The magnitude of design loads is dependent on γ , the partial safety factor for the
F
action under consideration. In STAAD the user is allowed total control in providing
applicable values for the factors and their use in various load combinations.
5A.5 Columns
Columns are designed for axial compressive loads and possible moments at the
ends of the member. If a particular load case causes tension in the column being
designed that load case is ignored, the design proceeds with a warning message
given to that affect.
All active load cases will be considered in the design and reinforcements are
assumed symmetrically arranged in the cross section.
The maximum reinforcement calculated after all design load cases have been
considered is then reported as the critical required area of reinforcement.
Slender columns are also covered in the design process, the program will make
due allowance for the additional moment that has to be considered in the design.
276 — STAAD.Pro
Note: Sway type structures are not directly covered in the current
implementation of EC2. This effect, however, can be accounted for by the P-
DELTA analysis option.
5A.6 Beams
Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these actions active load
cases are scanned to create appropriate envelopes for the design process.
Maximum torsional moment is also identified and incorporated in the design.
Design for flexure
Reinforcement for both positive and negative moments is calculated on the basis of
the section properties provided by the user. If the required reinforcement exceeds
the maximum allowable then the section size is inadequate and a massage to that
effect is given in the output. Parabolic-rectangular stress distribution for the
concrete section is adopted and as moment redistribution is not available in STAAD
analysis, the limit for N.A to depth ratio is set according to clause 2.5.3.4.2 (5) of
the code.
If required, compression reinforcement will be provided in order to satisfy the

above limits. It is important to know that beams are designed for the flexural
moment MZ only. The moment MY is not considered in the design at all.
Design for Shear
Shear reinforcement design is based on the standard method mentioned in clause

4.3.2.4.3 where it is assumed the notional strut inclination is constant. Depending
on the shear distribution within the member it may be possible that nominal shear
reinforcement will be sufficient to cater for the design shear forces. If this is not the
case an attempt is made to identify regions where nominal reinforcement is
insufficient and appropriate reinforcement is then calculated to cover the excess
design shear force.
The maximum shear force that can be carried without crushing the concrete is also
checked and if exceeded, a message to revise the section size is given in the output
file.

Design for Torsion
Torsional moments arising as a result of equilibrium requirements need to be

designed for at the ultimate limit state. Reinforcement for torsional moments
consists of stirrups combined with longitudinal bars. The combined magnitude of
shear stress arising from shear forces and torsional moments are checked in order
to establish whether the section size is adequate. If section size is inadequate a
massage is given in the output file, otherwise, full design is carried out and both
shear links and longitudinal bars required are calculated and, where necessary,
links are combined with the shear force links and printed in a tabulated manner in
the output file.
5A.7 Slabs
Slabs can only be designed for if finite elements are used to represent them in the
model of the structure. In the main the design follows the same procedure as for
flexure except that shear forces are assumed to be resisted without the provision
of shear reinforcements. In cases where this may not be the case users must
ensure that necessary checks are carried out. The output for the slab design refers
to longitudinal reinforcements, which coincides with the local x direction of the
element, and, transverse reinforcement, which coincides with the local y direction
of the element.
Also, reference is made to 'TOP' and BOTT' reinforcement which relates to the
element's 'TOP' and 'BOTTOM' as determined from the connectivity of the element.
This may not coincide with the slab's actual top and bottom and, if desired, you
must ensure this through the numbering scheme of the elements. The design of
the slab considers a fixed bar size of 16mm in both directions with the longitudinal
bar being the layer closest to the slab exterior faces. Refer to Figure 1.21 in
Section 1.61. of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.

Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the program. They
are set to default values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular
structure. Depending on the model being designed, the user may have to change
some or all of the parameter default values. Some parameters are unit dependent
and when altered, the new setting must be compatible with the active "unit"
specification. Table 5A.1 lists all the relevant EC2 parameters together with
description and default values.
278 — STAAD.Pro
Table 5A.1 - Concrete Design EC2 Parameters

Name
FYMAIN *460 N/mm2 Yield Stress for main

reinforcement (For slabs, it is for
FYSEC *460N/mm2 Yield Stress for secondary

reinforcement. Applicable to
shear bars in beams
FC * 30N/mm2 Concrete Yield Stress / cube

strength
MINMAIN 8mm Minimum main reinforcement bar

size Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10
12 16 20 25 32 40 50

Applicable to shear
reinforcement in beams
CLEAR * 20mm Clearance of reinforcement

measured from concrete surface
to closest bar perimeter.
MAXMAIN 50mm Maximum required

reinforcement bar size
Acceptable bars are per
MINMAIN above.
SFACE *0.0 Face of support location at start

of beam. (Only applicable for
shear - use MEMBER OFFSET for
bending )
EFACE *0.0 Face of support location at end

of beam.


Name
Note: Both SFACE & EFACE

must be positive numbers.
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Critical Moment will not

be printed with beam design
report. Column design gives no
detailed results.
1.0 = For beam gives min/max

steel % and spacing. For
columns gives a detailed table of
output with additional moments
calculated.
2.0 = Output of TRACK 1.0

List of design sag/hog moments
and corresponding required steel
area at each section of member

NSECTION 10 Number of equally-spaced

sections to be considered in
finding critical moment for beam
design. The upper limit is 20.
WIDTH *ZD Width of concrete member. This

value default is as provided as
ZD in MEMBER PROPERTIES.
DEPTH *YD Depth of concrete member. This

value default is as provided as
YD in MEMBER PROPERTIES.
BRACE 0.0 0.0 = Column braced in both

directions.
1.0 = Column unbraced about

local Z direction only
280 — STAAD.Pro
Name
2.0 = Column unbraced about

local Y direction only
3.0 = Column unbraced in both

Y and Z directions
ELY 1.0 Member length factor about local

Y direction for column design.
ELZ 1.0 Member length factor about local

Z direction for column design.
SRA 0.0 0.0 = Orthogonal rein-

forcement layout without con-
sidering torsional moment Mxy -
slabs only
-500 = Orthogonal

reinforcement layout with Mxy
used to calculate Wood & Armer
moments for design.
A = Skew angle considered

in Wood & Armer equations
where A is the angle in degrees.
SERV 0.0 0.0 = No serviceability check

performed.
1.0 = Perform serviceability

check for beams as if they were
continuous.

simply supported.

cantilever beams.
* Provided in current unit system

282 — STAAD.Pro
European Codes - Steel Design Per Eurocode 3
The design of structural steel members in accordance with the specification
Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures - part 1-1: General Rules and rules for
buildings has been implemented.
Two versions of the code are currently implemented, the EC3_94/1 and BS EN
1993-1-1:2005. Additionally, STAAD.Pro has implemented several countries'
National Annex documents.
To access the EC3_94/1 edition, specify the commands.
PARAMETERS
CODE
EC3
Or
PARAMETERS
CODE
EURO
To access the BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 edition, specify the commands:
PARAMETERS
CODE
EC3 EN 1993-1-1:2005
5B.(A) European Codes - Steel Design to

Eurocode 3 [DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992]
5B.1(A) General Description
Introduction
STAAD provides a comprehensive set of national codes for the design of steel

procedure to either code-check or select suitable members of an analyzed

structure.

2. Providing appropriate ‘Parameter’ values if different from the default values.
3. Specify whether to perform code-checking and/or member selection.
the design requirements. The ‘Parameters’ referred to above provide the user with
the ability to allocate specific design properties to individual members or member
groups considered in the design operation.
Eurocode 3 DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 (EC3 DD)
The DD ENV version of Eurocode 3, Design of steel structures, Part 1.1 General
rules and rules for buildings (EC3 DD) provides design rules applicable to
structural steel used in buildings and civil engineering works. It is based on the
ultimate limit states philosophy that is common to modern standards. The
objective of this method of design is to ensure that possibility of failure is reduced
to a negligible level. This is achieved through application of safety factors to both
the applied loads and the material properties.
The code also provides guidelines on the global methods of analysis to be used for
calculating internal member forces and moments. STAAD uses the elastic method
of analysis which may be used in all cases. Also there are three types of framing
referred to in EC3. These are “Simple”, “Continuous”, and “Semi-continuous”
which reflect the ability of the joints to developing moments under a specific
loading condition. In STAAD only “Simple” and “Continuous” joint types can be
assumed when carrying out global analysis.
National Application Documents
Various authorities of the CEN member countries have prepared National

Application Documents to be used with EC3. These documents provide alternative
factors for loads and may also provide supplements to the rules in EC3.
The current version of EC3 DD implemented in STAAD adheres to the factors and
rules provided in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 and has not been modified by any
National Application Document.
284 — STAAD.Pro
Axes convention in STAAD and EC3
By default, STAAD defines the major axis of the cross-section as Z-Z and the minor
axis as Y-Y. A special case where Z-Z is the minor axis and Y-Y is the major axis is
available if the SET Z UP command is used and is discussed in Section 5.5 of the
Technical Reference Manual. The longitudinal axis of the member is defined as X
and joins the start joint of the member to the end with the same positive direction.
EC3, however, defines the principal cross-section axes in reverse to that of STAAD,
but the longitudinal axis is defined in the same way. Both of these axes definitions
follow the orthogonal right hand rule. See figure below.
Bear this difference in mind when examining the code-check output from STAAD.
Figure 5.1 - Axis convention in STAAD and EC3
5B.2(A) Analysis Methodology
5B.3(A) Material Properties and Load Factors
The characteristic yield strength of steel used in EC3 DD design is based on table
3.1 of the code. Design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic yield
strength by the material partial safety factor Γm. The magnitude of Γm in STAAD is
1.1 which is applicable to all section types. A separate safety factor parameter
named GB1 is used to check the resistance of a member to buckling and also has a
default value of 1.1.

Material coefficients for steel in STAAD take the following default values unless
replaced by user’s numerical values provided in the input file.
Modulus of Elasticity, E = 205000 N/mm2
Shear Modulus, G = E/2(1+ ν)
Poisson’s Ratio, ν = 0.3
Unit weight, Γ = 76.8 KN/m3
The magnitude of design loads is dependent on Γ , the partial safety factor for the
f
5B.4(A) Section Classification
The occurrence of local buckling of the compression elements of a cross-section

prevents the development of full section capacity. It is therefore imperative to
establish this possibility prior to determining the section capacities. Cross sections
are classified in accordance with their geometrical properties and the stress pattern
on the compression elements. For each load case considered in the design
process, STAAD determines the section class and calculates the capacities
accordingly.
The EC3 DD design module in STAAD can design members with all section profiles
that are of Class 1 2 or 3 as defined in section 5.3.2 of the code. However, the
design of members that have a ‘Class 4’ section profile are limited to WIDE
FLANGE, TEE, SINGLE CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE, and RECTANGULAR HOLLOW
SECTIONS. Also built-up user sections that are class 4 sections are not dealt with
in the current version of EC3 design in STAAD.Pro.
Laced and battened members are not considered in the current version of EC3 DD
design module in STAAD.Pro.
5B.5(A) Member Design
5B.5(A).1 Design of Beams as per DD ENV

1993-1-1:1992
EC3 DD design in STAAD.Pro considers members that are primarily in bending
and/or shear as beams and performs cross section and member capacity checks in
286 — STAAD.Pro
accordance with the code. The main requirement for a beam is to have sufficient
cross-section resistance to the applied bending moment and shear force. The
possibility of lateral-torsional buckling is also taken into consideration when the full
length of the member has not been laterally restrained.
The bending capacity is primarily a function of the section type and the material
yield strength and is determined according to Cl. 5.4.5 of the code. The shear
capacity and the corresponding shear checks are done as per section 5.4.6 of the
code.
There are four classes of cross-sections defined in EC3. Class 1 and 2 sections can
both attain full capacity with the exception that the class 2 sections cannot sustain
sufficient rotation required for plastic analysis of the model. Hence the full plastic
section modulus is used in the design calculations. Class 3 sections, due to local
buckling, cannot develop plastic moment capacity and the yield stress is limited to
the extreme compression fibre of the section. The elastic section modulus is used to
determine the moment capacity for class 3 sections. Class 4 sections do suffer from
local buckling and explicit allowance must be made for the reduction in section
properties before the moment capacity can be determined. Further, because of
interaction between shear force and bending moment, the moment resistance of
the cross-section may be reduced. This, however, does not occur unless the value
of applied shear forces exceeds 50% of the plastic shear capacity of the section. In
such cases the web is assumed to resist the applied shear force as well as
contributing towards the moment resistance of the cross-section.
As mentioned in the previous section, the design of class 4 sections is limited to

WIDE FLANGE, TEE, SINGLE CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE, and RECTANGULAR
HOLLOW SECTIONS. The effective section properties are worked out as described
in Cl. 5.3.5 of the code.
Beams are also checked for lateral-torsional buckling according to section 5.5.2 of
the code. The buckling capacity is dependent on the section type as well as the
unrestrained length, restraint conditions and type of applied loading. The lateral
torsional buckling checks involves the calculation of the ‘Elastic critical moment’,
Mcr, which is calculated in STAAD as per the method given in Annex F of the code.
In the presence of a shear force, beams are also checked for shear as per section
5.4.6 of the code. In cases where the members are subject to combined bending
and shear, the combined bending and shear checks are done in STAAD as per
clause 5.4.7 of the code.

5B.5(A).2 Design of Axially Loaded

Members
The design of members subject to tension loads alone are performed as per Cl
5.4.3 of the code. The tension capacity is calculated based on yield strength,
material factor Γm and cross-sectional area of the member with possible reduction
due to bolt holes. When bolt holes need to be considered in the capacity
calculations the value used for Γm is 1.2 and the yield strength is replaced with the
ultimate tensile strength of the material. The tension capacity is then taken as the
smaller of the full section capacity and the reduced section capacity as stated
above.
The design of members subject to axial compression loads alone are performed as
per Cl 5.4.4 of the code. For members with class 1 2 or 3 section profiles, the full
section area is considered in calculating the section capacity. However in case of
class 4 sections, the ‘effective cross-section’ is considered to calculate the
compressive strength. Also any additional moments induced in the section due to
the shift of the centroidal axis of the effective section will also be taken into
account as per clause 5.4.8.3 of the code. The effective section properties for class
4 sections will be worked out as given in Cl.5.3.5 of the code.
In addition to the cross section checks, buckling resistance will also be checked for
such members. This is often the critical case as the buckling strength of the
member is influenced by a number of factors including the section type and the
unbraced length of the member. The buckling capacity is calculated as per Cl. 5.5
of the code.
DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 does not specifically deal with single angle, double
angles, double channels or Tee sections and does give a method to work out the
slenderness of such members. In these cases, the EC3 DD design module of
STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate the
slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 and table 25 of BS 5950-1:2000 are
used in the current version of the EC3 DD design module

Angle sections are un-symmetrical and when using BS 5950:2000 table 25 you
must consider four axes: two principal, u-u and v-v and two geometric, a-a and b-
b. The effective length for the v-v axis, Lvv, is taken as the LVV parameter or LY *
288 — STAAD.Pro
section 5B.6 for more information on the LEG parameter. The effective length in
the a-a axis is taken as LY * KY and the effective length in the b-b axis as LZ * KZ.
Figure 5.2 - Single angle sections A) ST angle & USER table angles and B) RA angle
5B.5(A).3 Design of members with com-

bined axial load and bending
The bending resistance of members could be reduced by the presence of a co-
existent axial load. This is then checked against the lateral-torsional buckling
resistance of the section. The EC3 DD design module in STAAD takes such a
scenario into account and performs the necessary checks as per Cl. 5.4.8 of the
code. Class 1 and class 2 sections are checked as per cl. 5.4.8.1 and Class 3 and
Class 4 sections are checked as per clauses 5.4.8.2 and 5.4.8.3 respectively. The
effective section properties for class 4 sections are worked out as given in Cl. 5.3.5
of the code.
Generally, EC3 requires checking cross-section resistance for local capacity and
also checking the overall buckling capacity of the member. In the case of members
subject to axial tension and bending, there is provision to take the stabilizing effect
of the tension load into consideration. This is achieved by modifying the extreme

compression fibre stress and calculating an effective applied moment for the
section. The checks are done as per Cl. 5.5.3 of the code. In case of a combined
axial compressive load and bending moment, the member will be checked as per
the rules in section 5.5.4 of the code.
The presence of large shear force can also reduce the bending resistance of the
section under consideration. If the shear load is large enough to cause a reduction
in bending resistance, then the reduction due to shear has to be taken into account
before calculating the effect of the axial load on the bending resistance of the
section. If the member is subject to a combined shear, axial load and bending
moment then the section capacity checks will be done as per Cl. 5.4.9 of the code.
As stated in the previous section, DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 does not specifically

deal with single angle, double angles, double channels or Tee sections and does
give a method to work out the slenderness of such members. In these cases, the
EC3 DD design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in BS 5950-
1:2000 to calculate the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 of BS 5950-
1:2000 is used in the current version of the EC3 DD design module. Please refer to
the note in section 5B.5.2 for St and RA angle specifications.
Please note that laced or battened compression members are not dealt within the
current version of EC3 DD design module in STAAD.Pro.
5B.6(A) Design Parameters

structure.
Depending on the model being designed, the user may have to change some or all
of the parameter default values. Some parameters are unit dependent and when
altered, the new setting must be compatible with the active “unit” specification.
Table 5B.1(A) lists all the relevant EC3 parameters together with description and
default values.
Table 5B.1 - Steel Design Parameters EC3 DD
Name
CODE Undefined You must specify EC3 or

EUROPE.
290 — STAAD.Pro
Name

BEAM 3 Parameter to control the

number of sections to checked
along the length of a beam:
0. Check sections with end

forces only
1. Check at location of max-
imum Mz along beam
forces and forces at loca-
tion of BEAM 1.0 check.
3. Check at every 1/13th

point along the beam and
report the maximum
Refer to Note 2 below.
CAN 0 Member will be considered as a

cantilever type member for
deflection checks.
0 indicates that member will

not be treated as a cantilever
member
1 indicates that the member

will be treated as a cantilever
member


Name
CMM 1.0 Indicates type of loading on

member. Valid values range
from 1 to 6.
Refer to Table 5B.2 for more

information on its use.
CMN 1.0 Indicates the level of End-

Restraint.
1.0 = No fixity
0.5 = Full fixity
0.7 = One end free

and other end fixed
DMAX 100.0 cm Maximum allowable depth for

the member.
DMIN 0 Minimum required depth for

the member.
DFF None Deflection limit

(Mandatory for
deflection
check)
DJ1 Start Joint of Joint No. denoting starting

member point for calculation of
"Deflection Length".
DJ2 End Joint of Joint No. denoting end point

member for calculation of "Deflection
Length".
FU Ultimate tensile strength of
292 — STAAD.Pro
Name
steel
GB1 1.1 Partial safety factor used in

buckling checks for
compression members
GM0 1.1 Corresponds to the Γ factor

m0
in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992

m1
in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992

m2
in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992
KY 1.0 K factor in local y axis.
KZ 1.0 K factor in local z axis.
LEG 0.0 Connection type
Refer to Note 1 below.
LVV Maximum of Buckling length for angle about

Lyy and Lzz its principle axis
(Lyy is a term
used by
BS5950)
LY Member Length Compression length in local y

axis, Slenderness ratio =
(KY)*(LY)/(Ryy)
LZ Member Length Compression length in local z

axis, Slenderness ratio =
(KZ)*(LZ)/(Rzz)


Name
PY Yield Strength The yield strength default

value is set based on the
default value of the "SGR"
parameter.
NSF 1.0 Net tension factor for tension

capacity calculation.
RATIO 1 Permissible ratio of loading to

capacity.
SBLT 0.0 Indicates if the section is rolled

or built-up.
0.0 = Rolled
1.0 = Built-up
SGR 0.0 Steel grade as per table 3.1 in

EC3.
0.0 = Fe 360
1.0 = Fe 430
2.0 = Fe 510
TRACK 0 Controls the level of detail of

output.
0 = minimum
1 = intermediate
2 = maximum
4 = perform a
deflection check
294 — STAAD.Pro
Name
See note 3 below.
UNF 1.0 Unsupported buckling length

as a factor of the beam length
UNL Member Length Unrestraint length of member

used in calculating the lateral-
torsional resistance moment of
the member.
ZIV 0.8 Specifies a reduction factor for

vectoral effects to be used in
axial tension checks [Cl
5.5.3(2)]
Notes:
1. LEG – (Ref: Table 25 BS5950)
The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee sections are
specified in BS 5950 table 25 depending on the connection provided at the
end of the member (Refer to section 5B.5(A).2). To define the appropriate
connection, a LEG parameter should be assigned to the member.
The following table indicates the value of the LEG parameter required to
match the BS5950 connection definition:

Table 5B.2 - LEG Parameter values

Clause Bold Con- Leg LEG
figuration Parameter
4.7.10.2 (a) - 2 bolts short 1.0

leg
Single
Angle long 3.0
leg
(b) - 1 bolts short 0.0

leg
long 2.0
leg
4.7.10.3 (a) - 2 bolts short 3.0

Double leg
Angles
long 7.0
leg
(b) - 1 bolts short 2.0

leg
long 6.0
leg
(c) - 2 bolts long 1.0

leg
short 5.0
leg
(d) - 1 bolts long 0.0

leg
short 4.0
leg
4.7.10.4 (a) - 2 or more rows of 1.0

Channels bolts
296 — STAAD.Pro
Clause Bold Con- Leg LEG
figuration Parameter
4.7.10.5 (a) - 2 or more rows of 1.0

Tee Sec- bolts
tions
For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the geometric axes, a-a
and b-b as well as the weak v-v axis. The effective lengths of the geometric
axes are defined as:
La = KY * KY
Lb = KZ * LZ
The slenderness calculated for the v-v axis is then used to calculate the
compression strength pc for the weaker principal axis (z-z for ST angles or y-
y for RA specified angles). The maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b axes
is used to calculate the compression strength pc for the stronger principal
axis.
Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not known or Table 25
is not appropriate, by setting the LEG parameter to 10, slenderness is
calculated for the two principal axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is
not used.
For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 in
table 25. In addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Refer to
Section 1.7.3 of the Technical Reference Manual) an eleventh value, rvv,
should be supplied at the end of the ten existing values corresponding to the
radius of gyration of the single angle making up the pair.
2. BEAM
Ensure that this parameter is set to either 1 or 2 while performing code

checking for members susceptible to Lateral - Torsional Buckling.

Table 5B.3 - Values for the CMM Parameter

CMM Loading and Support Conditions
Value
3. Checking beam deflection
With the TRACK parameter set to 4, the members included in a CHECK CODE
command will be checked for the local axis deflection rather than for the
stress capacity using the current LOAD LIST.
If both stress capacity and deflection checks are required, then 2 parameter
blocks with code checks are required, one with a TRACK 4 command and one
with a TRACK 0, 1, or 2, thus:
LOAD LIST 1 TO 10
PARAMETER 1
CODE EN 1993
TRACK 2 ALL
298 — STAAD.Pro
CHECK CODE MEMBER 1
***************************
LOAD LIST 100 TO 110
PARAMETER 2
TRACK 4 ALL
DFF 300 MEMB 1
DJ1 1 MEMB 1
DJ2 4 MEMB 1
CODE MEMB 1
Note: While both sets of code checks will be reported in the output file,
only the last code check results are reported in the GUI.
5B.7(A) Code Checking

properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per DD ENV
1993-1-1:1992. Code checking is done using the forces and moments at specific
sections of the members.
members have passed or failed the checks; the critical condition ; the value of the
ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other
specified RATIO value); the governing load case, and the location (distance from
the start of the member of forces in the member where the critical condition
occurs).
Reference Manual, with two exceptions; GENERAL and ISECTION. The EC3 DD
design module does not consider these sections or PRISMATIC sections in its
design process.

5B.8(A) Member Selection

same limitations as defined in section 5B.7(A) Code Checking.

input as prismatic or as the limitations specified in section 5.B.7(A).
5B.9(A) Tabulated Results of Steel Design
a. MEMBER refers to the member number for which the design is

performed.
b. TABLE refers to steel section name, which has been checked against
the steel code or has been selected.
c. RESULTS prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILED. If the
RESULT is FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member.
d. CRITICAL COND refers to the clause in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code
which governs the design.
e. RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for
the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member
has passed.
300 — STAAD.Pro
member forces and moments (except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY
and MZ are printed since they are the ones which are of interest, in most
cases.
Note: For a TRACK 2 output, the module will also report all the relevant clause
checks that have been performed and will also indicate the critical ratio and the
load case that caused the critical ratio as well as the corresponding forces that
were used for the respective checks. A TRACK 2 output will also include the
various design data used for the calculations such as the section modulii,
section class, section capacity etc.
5B.(B) European Codes - Steel Design to

Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]
5B.1(B) General Description
STAAD provides a comprehensive set of national codes for the design of steel
procedure to either code-check or select suitable members of an analyzed structure.

2. Providing appropriate ‘Parameter’ values if different from the default values.
3. Specify whether to perform code-checking and/or member selection.
the design requirements. The ‘Parameters’ referred to above provide the user with
the ability to allocate specific design properties to individual members or member
groups considered in the design operation.
Eurocode 3 - EN 1993-1-1:2005 (EN 1993)
The EN 1993 version of Eurocode 3, Design of steel structures, Part 1.1 General
rules and rules for buildings (EN 1993) provides design rules applicable to
structural steel used in buildings and civil engineering works. It is based on the

ultimate limit states philosophy that is common to modern standards. The

objective of this method of design is to ensure that possibility of failure is reduced
to a negligible level. This is achieved through application of safety factors to both
the applied loads and the material properties.
The code also provides guidelines on the global methods of analysis to be used for
calculating internal member forces and moments. STAAD uses the elastic method
of analysis which may be used in all cases. Also there are three types of framing
referred to in EC3. These are “Simple”, “Continuous”, and “Semi-continuous”
which reflect the ability of the joints to developing moments under a specific
loading condition. In STAAD only “Simple” and “Continuous” joint types can be
assumed when carrying out global analysis.
National Annex Documents
Various authorities of the CEN member countries have prepared National Annex
Documents to be used with EC3. These documents provide alternative factors for
loads and may also provide supplements to the rules in EC3.
The current version of EC3 (EN 1993)implemented in STAAD adheres to the

factors and rules provided in EN 1993-1-1:2005. The current version of
STAAD.Pro includes the following National Annexes viz.
a. British National Annex [NA to BS EN 1993-1-1:2005]
b. The Dutch National Annex [NEN-EN 1993-1-1/NB] and
c. Norwegian National Annex [NS-EN 1993-1-1:2005/NA2008]
d. French National Annex [Annexe Nationale a la NF EN 1993-1-1:2005]

e. Finnish National Annex [SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005]
f. Polish National Annex [PN EN 1993-1-1:2005]
g. Singaporean National Annex [SS EN 1993-1-1:2005]
h. Belgian National Annex [NBN EN 1993-1-1:2005]
The choice of a particular National Annex is based on the value of a new NA

parameter that is set by the user when specifying the EN 1993 version of Eurocode
3. Please refer to section 5B.6 (B) for a description of the NA parameter.
302 — STAAD.Pro
By default, STAAD defines the major axis of the cross-section as Z-Z and the minor
axis as Y-Y. A special case where Z-Z is the minor axis and Y-Y is the major axis is
available if the SET Z UP command is used and is discussed in Section 5.5 of the
Technical Reference Manual. The longitudinal axis of the member is defined as X
and joins the start joint of the member to the end with the same positive direction.
EC3, however, defines the principal cross-section axes in reverse to that of STAAD,
but the longitudinal axis is defined in the same way. Both of these axes definitions
follow the orthogonal right hand rule. See figure below.
Bear this difference in mind when examining the code-check output from STAAD.
Figure 5.3 - Axis convention in STAAD and EC3
5B.2 (B) Analysis Methodology
5B.3 (B) Material Properties and Load Factors
The characteristic yield strength of steel used in EC3 (EN 1993) design is based on
table 3.1 of the code. Design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic
value of a particular resistance by the global partial safety factor for the resistance,
Γm. The magnitude of Γm is based on Cl. 6.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005 and can change
depending on the selected National Annex.

Material coefficients for steel in STAAD take the following default values unless
replaced by user’s numerical values provided in the input file.
Modulus of Elasticity, E = 205000 N/mm2
Shear Modulus, G = E/2(1+ ν)
Poisson’s Ratio, ν = 0.3
Unit weight, Γ = 76.8 KN/m3
The magnitude of design loads is dependent on Γ , the partial safety factor for the
f
5B.4 (B) Section Classification
The occurrence of local buckling of the compression elements of a cross-section

prevents the development of full section capacity. It is therefore imperative to
establish this possibility prior to determining the section capacities. Cross sections
are classified in accordance with their geometrical properties and the stress pattern
on the compression elements. For each load case considered in the design
process, STAAD determines the section class and calculates the capacities
accordingly.
The EC3 (EN 1993) design module in STAAD can design members with all section
profiles that are of Class 1, 2, or 3 as defined in section 5.5 of the code. However,
the design of members that have a Class 4 section profile are limited to:
l wide flange
l tee
l single channel
l single angle
l rectangular hollow sections
l circular hollow sections
Also built-up user sections that are class 4 sections are not dealt with in the current
version of EC3 design in STAAD.Pro.
The design of laced and battened members is not considered in the current version
of EC3 (EN 1993) design module in STAAD.Pro.
304 — STAAD.Pro
5B.5 (B) Member Design
EN 1993-1-1:2005, together with any specified National Annex, is used for code
check or selection of all cross sections and shapes listed in Section 5B.4 (B).
However, where EN 1993 or the National Annex has not specified a method or
values for a specific clause or parameter, STAAD.Pro uses Non-Contradictory
Complimentary Information (NCCI) documents as explained in the following
corresponding sections.
The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of
elastic analysis and ultimate limit state design. Two major failure modes are
recognized:
l failure by overstressing
l failure by stability considerations
The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach.
Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the
characteristic stresses or capacities. Member selection is done on the basis of
selecting the most economic section on the basis of the least weight criteria. It is
generally assumed that you (the engineer) will take care of the detailing
requirements, such as the provision of stiffeners, and check the local effects like
flange buckling, web crippling, etc.
Note: The design of class 4 (slender) sections is limited to WIDE FLANGE, TEE,
SINGLE CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE, and RECTANGULAR & CIRCULAR HOLLOW
SECTIONS. The effective section properties are evaluated as described in Cl.
6.2.2.5 of the code.
You are allowed complete control over the design process through the use of the
parameters listed in Table 5B.3. Default values of parameters will yield reasonable
results in most circumstances. However, you should control the design and verify
results through the use of the design parameters.
5B.5(B).1 Members Subject to Axial Loads
The cross section capacity of tension only members is checked for ultimate limit
state as given in Cl. 6.2.3 of the code.

Compression members will be checked for axial capacity of the cross section in
addition to lateral buckling/stability. The cross section capacity will be checked as
given in section 6.2.4 of the code.
Lateral stability of a pure compression member will be checked as per the method
given in Cl. 6.3 of the code. The compression member stability will be verified as:
Where N is the design buckling resistance given by:

b,Rd
for Class 1, 2, or 3 cross-sections
for Class 4 cross-sections
Where:
χ is the reduction factor as given in section 6.3.12 of the code. The buckling curves
used to evaluate the reduction factor are selected from Table 6.2 of the code based
on the cross section type and the steel grade.
Note: Only the five grades of steel given in table 6.2 will be used when
selecting the buckling curve. The steel grade used for this selection is based on
the SGR design input parameter (See Section 5B.(6)B). Even if you have
specified a custom yield strength (using the PY parameter), the choice of a
buckling curve will be based on the value of SGR parameter.
Compression members that are susceptible to torsional or torsional flexural

buckling are checked for these modes of failure as well. The non-dimensional
slenderness ¯λ for these members is evaluated per Cl. 6.3.1.4 of the EN 1993
T
code. The maximum slenderness among the flexural buckling slenderness,
torsional slenderness, and torsional-flexural slenderness is used to evaluate the
reduction factor, χ, for such members. The elastic torsional buckling load, N ,
cr,T
and the elastic torsional-flexural buckling load, N , are evaluated based on the
cr,TF
method given in the NCCI “SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and
flexural torsional buckling modes” (unless otherwise specified by a particular
National Annex).
EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not specifically deal with single angle, double angles,
double channels, or Tee sections and does not provide a method to work out the
306 — STAAD.Pro
slenderness of such members. In these cases, the EC3 (EN 1993) design module of
STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate the
slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 and Table 25 of BS 5950-1:2000 are
used in the current version of the Eurocode 3 design module.

Angle sections are un-symmetrical and when using BS 5950:2000 table 25, four
axes must be considered; two principal ( u-u and v-v) and two geometric (a-a and
b-b). The effective length for the v-v axis, Lvv, is taken as the LVV parameter or LY ·
section 5B.6 (B) for more information on the LEG parameter. The effective length in
the a-a axis is taken as LY · KY and the effective length in the b-b axis as LZ · KZ.
Figure 5.4 - Axis orientation for single angles
ST angle and USER table angles RA angle
5B.5(B).2 Members Subject to Bending Moments
The cross section capacity of a member subject to bending is checked as per Cl

.6.2.5 of the code. The condition to be satisfied is:

Where M is the is the design resistance given by:

c,Rd
for class 1 and 2 cross-sections
for class 3 cross-sections
for class 4 cross-sections
Cross sectional bending capacity checks will be done for both major and minor
axis bending moments.
Members subject to major axis bending will also be checked for Lateral Torsional
Buckling resistance as per Section 6.3.2 of the code. The design buckling
resistance moment M will be calculated as:
b,Rd
Where:
χ is the reduction factor for lateral torsional buckling. This reduction

LT
factor is evaluated per Cl. 6.3.2.2 or Cl 6.3.2.3 of the EN 1993 code
depending on the section type. For I sections, the program will by
default use Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evalute χ and for all other sections the
LT
program will resort to Cl 6.3.2.2. However, if a particular National
Annex has been specified, the program will check if the National Annex
expands on Cl.6.3.2.3 (Table 6.5) to include sections other than I
sections. If so, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 for the cross-section(s)
included in Cl. 6.2.2.3 (or Table 6.5). For all other cases the program
will use Cl. 6.3.2.2.
Note: You have the option to choose the clause to be used to

calculate χ through the MTH design parameter. Setting MTH to 0
LT
(default value) will cause the program to choose Cl.6.3.2.3 for I
Sections and Cl 6.2.3.2 for all other section types. As mentioned
above, if the National Annex expands on Cl. 6.3.2.3 to include
308 — STAAD.Pro
sections other than I Sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 by
default.
The non-dimensional slenderness λ (used to evaluate χ ) for both the above

LT LT
cases is evaluated as:
Where:
M is the elastic critical moment for lateral torsional buckling. EN 1993-

cr
1-1 does not however specify a method to work out M . Hence, the
cr
program will make use of the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV
1993-1-1 to work out M by default.
cr
Note: The method specified in Annex F will be used only when the
raw EN 1993-1-1:2005 code is used without any National Annex. If
a National Annex has been specified, the calculation of M (and λ )
cr LT
will be done based on the specific National Annex. (See "5B.(C)
European Codes - National Annexes to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-
1:2005]" on page 343 for specific details). If the National Annex
does not specify a particular method or specify a reference
document, the program will use the NCCI document SN-003a-EN-
EU for doubly symmetric sections and SN030a-EN-EU for mono-
symmetric sections that are symmetric about their weak axis. For all
other sections types the program will use Annex F of DD ENV 1993-
1-1 to calculate Mcr.
5B.5(B).3 Members Subject to Shear
The cross section capacity of a member subject to shear is checked as per Cl. 6.2.6
of the code. The condition to be satisfied is:
Where:
V is the is the shear design resistance given by:

c,Rd

Av is the shear area and is worked out for the various section types as
given in Cl. 6.2.6(3) of the code.
5B.5(B).4 Members Subject to Torsion

later.
General
Eurocode 3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005) gives very limited guidance for the analysis and
design of torsion members. While both elastic and plastic analyses are permitted
generally, the design analysis methods for torsion discussed within EC3 are
primarily based on elastic methods. Also, only the first yield design resistance is
specifically discussed for torsion members. Furthermore, there is no guidance on
section classification nor on how to allow for the effects of local buckling on the
design resistance for combined torsional effects. EC3 also does not specifically
deal with members subject to combined bending and torsion and loosely states
that the yield criteria (Eqn 6.1 in the code) can be used for elastic verification.
The method used by STAAD.Pro is therefore based on the SCI publication “P057:
Design of members subject to combined bending and torsion”. Though this
publication is based on the British standard BS 5950-1, the principles from this
document are applied in the context of Eurocode 3.
Note: At the time this feature has been implemented in STAAD.Pro, SCI are in
the process of updating document P057 to be in accordance with Eurocode 3.
Hence this method might be subject to modifications subject to the publication
of a newer version of P057. The NCCI document “SN007b-EN-EU: Torsion”
will also be referenced where appropriate.
Code Basis
Torsion design in EC3 is given in Cl. 6.2.7 of EN 1993-1-1:2005. Therefore, this
clause is used primarily for this implementation.
310 — STAAD.Pro
EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not deal with members subject to the combined effects of
torsion and lateral torsional buckling. However, EN 1993-1-6 considers such a
condition in Appendix A. Therefore, STAAD.pro uses Appendix A of EN 1993-1-6
to check for members subject to combined torsion and LTB.
The following clauses from EC3 are then considered:
l Cl. 6.2.7(1)
l Cl. 6.2.7(9)
l Cl. 6.2.7(5)
l EC-3 -6 App A
Note: STAAD.Pro does, however, use this clause (6.2.7) to report the output
for all torsion checks. Also any distortional deformations and any amplification
in the torsional or shear stresses due to distortions will be neglected by the
program.
l Clause 6.2.7(1)
States that for members subject to torsion, the design torsional moment T
Ed
at each cross section should satisfy:
T /R ≤ 1.0
Ed Rd
Where:
T is the design torsional resistance of the cross section.

Rd
This is the primary condition that will need to be satisfied for members
subject to torsion. The method for working out the torsional resistance T ,
Rd
for the various cases is dealt in the following sections.
l Cl. 6.2.7(9)
States that:
For combined shear force and torsional moment, the plastic shear
resistance accounting for torsional effects should be reduced from

V to V and the design shear force should satisfy:

pl,Rd pl,T,Rd
V /V ≤ 1.0
Ed pl,T,Rd
The code also gives means to evaluate V in equations 6.26 to 6.28.
pl,T,Rd
These equations, however, only deal with I/H sections, Channel sections,
and structural hollow sections (RHS, SHS, CHS). Therefore, the application
of Cl. 6.2.7(9) is only performed for these section profiles.
l Cl 6.2.7(5)
States that the yield criteria given in Cl. 6.2.1(5) of EN 1993-1-1:2005 may
be used for elastic verification. STAAD.Pro evaluates the stresses due to the
various actions on the cross section and applies this yield criterion.
The program allows for two types of checks for members subject to torsion for
EC3 design:
I. Basic Stress Check: This method is intended to be a simplified stress check

for torsional effects. This method will produce the output corresponding to
Cl. 6.2.7(5) of EN 1993-1-1.
II. Detailed Checks: This method will perform a full torsional analysis of the
member. All four of the clause checks mentioned earlier will be performed.
The details of these checks are as described below.
You have the option to choose the method to be used for a specific member or
group of members. This will be facilitated by setting the value of the TORSION
design parameter to one of the following values:
TORSION Description
value
0 (Default) Include basic stress

checks, only if member is subject to
torsion.
1 Include torsion (Basic stress check

excluding warping effects).
2 Include torsion (Detailed checks

including warping effects).
3 Ignore all torsion checks
312 — STAAD.Pro
The TORSION parameter will have a value of zero (0) by default. This will cause the
program to trigger the torsion checks only if the member is subject to torsional
moments. For this default setting, the program will ignore torsion checks if there is
no torsional moment in the member. Setting the value of the TORSION parameter to
three (3) will cause the program to ignore all torsional moments. The detailed
output (i.e., TRACK 2) will indicate that torsion has been ignored for that particular
member. The details of setting the values to one (1) or two (2) and the
corresponding checks performed are as described below.
Note: If the TORSION parameter is set to 1 or 2, the program will perform the
appropriate checks even if the member is not subject to torsional moments. In
such cases, the program will perform the checks with a value of zero for the
torsional moment.
5B.5(B).4.1 Basic stress check

This method is used when the TORSION parameter is specified as one (1).
This method is intended to be a simplified stress check for torsional effects per Cl.
6.2.7(5). Any warping stresses that may develop due to the end conditions will be
ignored for this option. The program will consider the forces (including torsion) at
various sections along the length of the member and for each section, will calculate
the resultant stress (Von Mieses) at various points on the cross section. The
location and number of points checked for a cross section will depend on the cross
section type and will be as described below.
The stress check will be performed using equation 6.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005 as

given below:
Where:
σ is the longitudinal stress

x,Ed
σ is the transverse stress and
z,Ed
τ is the resultant shear stress.
Ed

5B.5(B).4.1 Basic stress check
Note: Since transverse stresses are very small under normal loading
conditions (excluding hydrostatic forces), the term will be negligible and hence
is taken as zero.
σ =σ +σ +σ = F /A + M /Z + M /Z
x,Ed x bz by x x z z y y
τ = T/J · t + V ·Q/(I ·t) + V ·Q/(I *t)
Ed y z z y
Where:
T is the torsion at the particular section along the length of the member
J is the torsion constant
t is the thickness of the web/flange
V is the shear force
Q is the statical moment about the relevant axis
I is the second moment of area about the relevant axis
The stress check as per equation 6.1 is performed at various stress points of a
cross section as shown in figures below:
Shape Section Sketch
Doubly sym-
metric wide
flange profile
314 — STAAD.Pro
Pipe profiles
Tube profiles
α = tan-
1(M /M )
z y

5B.5(B).4.2 Detailed stress check
Channel profiles
The resultant ratio will be reported under Cl. 6.2.7(5) in the detailed design
output.

This method is used when the TORSION parameter is specified as two (2).
This method performs a detailed torsional analysis of a member depending on the

torsion loading conditions and the support conditions at the member ends. This
method is based on the SCI publication P057 and includes any warping stresses
(direct warping stresses and warping shear stresses) depending on the end
conditions of the member. This implementation considers seven different cases of
loading and end conditions as given in publication P057 – Section 6. The
loading/end conditions for a member are specified by the use of the CMT design
parameter (refer to Table 5B1.5(B) for parameter values and descriptions).
All the equations used to evaluate the torsional moments and associated stresses
are as given in Appendix B of P057. The resultant stresses are evaluated at various
sections along the length of the member and the following checks will be
performed:
316 — STAAD.Pro
Clause 6.2.7(1) – Torsional resistance of the sec-
tion.
In general, the torsion at any section T is resolved into two components, viz.
Ed
The pure torsional (St. Venant’s) moment (T ) and
t,Ed
The warping torsional moment(T )
w,Ed
Therefore,
T =T + T = GJφ’ = EHφ’’’

Ed t,Ed w,Ed
[Ref SCI pub. P057]
Where:
φ’ and φ’’’ are the first and third derivates of twist (φ ), respectively, and
depend on the end conditions and loading. These are evaluated from
the equations in Annex B of P057 and are based the specified CMT
parameter.
Note: Although the equation given the NCCI document SN007b-EN-EU can be
used to evaluate T , the NCCI does not give the eqn. to evaluate φ’’’.
wrd
Therefore, Annex B of P057 is used.
The torsional resistance of the section is also considered as the sum of the pure
torsion resistance and the warping torsion resistance. The pure torsion resistance
(T ) and the warping torsional resistance (T ) are evaluated as:
t,Rd w,Rd
For closed sections:
T =2·A ·t·τ
t,Rd c max
Where:
A is the area enclosed by the mean perimeter

c
t is the max thickness
τ is the max. allowable shear stress = (fy/√3)/ Γm0

max
For open sections (I & channel):
T =τ ·J/t
t,Rd max
Where:

J is the torsion const
t is the max thickness.
T = (f / Γ )· t · b2 / 6
w,Rd y m0
Where:
b is the width of the section
t is the thickness of the flange for I- sections; minimum of flange or

web thickness channel sections
The check according to Cl 6.2.7(1) will then be performed to ensure that the
following conditions are satisfied:
T /T ≤1
t,Ed t,Rd
T /T ≤1
w,Ed w,Rd
T /T ≤1
Ed Rd
Clause 6.2.7(9) – Plastic shear resistance due to

torsion.
STAAD.Pro checks for shear resistance of a section based on Cl. 6.2.6 for EC3 and
the plastic shear resistance (in the absence of torsion) is evaluated as:
Where:
A is as pre Cl.6.2.6 (3) for the various sections

v
When torsion is present, along with the shear force, the design shear resistance
will be reduced to V , where V is evaluated as follows:
pl,T,Rd pl,T,Rd
i. For I or H Sections:
ii. For Channel Sections:
318 — STAAD.Pro
iii. For Structural Hollow Sections:
Where
τ is the shear stress due to direct (St. Venant’s) torsion and

t,Ed
τ is the shear stress due to warping torsion.
w,Ed
The various shear stresses due to torsion τ and τ are evaluated as follows:
t,Ed w,Ed
i. For Closed sections:
The shear stresses due to warping can be ignored as they will be insignificant
and hence:
τ =T /(2·A ·t)
t,Ed Ed c
[Ref NCCI Sn007b-EN-EU]
Where:
T is the applied torsion,

Ed
A is the area delimited by the mean perimeter and
c
t is the thickness of the cross section
τ = 0, since warping is ignored

w,Ed
ii. For Open sections [I, H, Channel] sections:
For I and H sections, the web will not be subject to warping stresses and
therefore warping shear can be ignored (τ =0).
w,Ed
The stress due to pure torsion is evaluated as:
τ = G·t·φ’
t,Ed
[Ref SCI pub. P057]
Where:

G is the shear modulus
φ’ is a function depending on the end condition and loading(T).

This will be taken from section 6 and Annex B of P057.
Note: Although the maximum stress is at the thickest section of the

profile, the program uses the web thickness for this clause (since the
shear capacity is based on the web area) unless the load is parallel to the
flanges, in which case the flange thickness is used.
For channel sections that are free to warp at the supports and, thus, are not
subject to warping stresses:
The warping shear stress is evaluated as:
τ = E·S ·φ’’’ / t
w,Ed w
[Ref SCI pub. P057]
Where:
E is the elastic modulus,
S is the warping statistical moment and

w
φ’ is a function depending on the end condition and loading(T).
This will be taken from section 6 and Annex B of P057.
t is the thickness of the element.
Clause 6.2.7(5) – Check for elastic verification of

yield
Eurocode 3 gives yield criterion as per eqn. 6.1 and STAAD.Pro uses the yield
criterion given in EC-3. When a member is subject to combined bending and
torsion, some degree of interaction occurs between the two effects. The angle of
twist caused by torsion is amplified by the bending moments and will induce
additional warping moments and torsional shears. Account must also be taken of
the additional minor axis moments produced by the major axis moments acting
through the torsional deformations, including the amplifications mentioned
earlier.
320 — STAAD.Pro
For members subject to bending and torsion, the stresses are evaluated as follows:
Direct bending stress (major axis): σ =M /Z

bz z z
Direct bending stress (minor axis): σ =M /Z
by y y
Direct stress due to warping: σw = E·W · φ’’
ns
Direct stress due to twist (min. axis): σ =M /Z
byt yt y
Direct stress due to axial load (if any): σ = P/ A
c
Where:
M is the major axis moment & My is the minor axis moment.

z
φ’’ is the differential function based on twist (ref P057 Annex B. & Table
6)
W is the normalized warping function.

ns
M = φ·M (see Appendix B of P057 to evaluate φ)
yt z
Shear stresses due to torsion and/or warping is evaluated as described above for
Clause 6.2.7(9).
Check for yield (capacity checks) is then done according to Eqn 6.1 of EN 1993-1-
1:2005, as described for the Basic Stress Check (TORSION = 1):
Clause EC-3:6 App A – Check for combined Torsion

and Lateral Torsional buckling
The interaction check due to the combined effects of bending (including lateral
torsional buckling) and torsion will be checked using Annex A of EN 1993-1-6:
2007. Note that this interaction equation does not include the effects of any axial
load.
Warning: At present, SCI advises that no significant work has been published
for this case and work is still ongoing. So at present is advisable not to allow for
torsion in a member with large axial load.
Members subject to combined bending and torsion will be checked to satisfy:

Where:
C is the equivalent uniform moment factor for bending about the z-z
mz
axis, according to EN 1993-1-1 Table B.3.
M and M are the design values of the maximum moment about

y,Ed z,Ed
the y-y and z-z axis, respectively.
M and M are the characteristic values of the resistance moment

y,Rk z,Rk
of the cross-section about it y-y and z-z axis, respectively, from EN
1993-1-1, Table 6.7.
M is the elastic critical lateral-torsional buckling moment about the

y,cr
y-y axis.
T is the design value of the warping torsional moment.

w,Ed
T is the characteristic value of the warping torsional resistance
w,Rk
moment.
χ is the reduction factor for lateral torsional buckling according to

LT
6.3.2 of EN 1993-1-1.
Note: For all of the above checks the effective length of the member to be
used for torsion can be set by using the EFT design parameter.
322 — STAAD.Pro
5B.5(B).5 Members Subject to Combined Forces
Members subject to Bending and Axial

Force
When a member is subject to a combined axial load and a bending moment, the
program evaluates a reduced moment capacity based on Cl. 6.2.9 of the code. For
Class 1, 2, and 3 sections, the program evaluates the reduced moment from the
equations given in Cl. 6.2.9.1 of the code. For class 4 sections, the interaction
equation given by equation 6.44 are checked.
In the case of members subject to axial load and biaxial bending, the program will
consider the interaction equation 6.41 of the code.
Note: By default, the program will use the values of the constants ‘α’ and ‘β’ as
given in the code for the different sections types. However, you can override
these values using the ALPHA and BETA design parameters (See Section
5B.6(B)).
Note: The program uses the parameter ELB (See Section 5B.6(B)) to override
the Cl.6.2.9 checks for combined axial load and bending case. When specfied as
1, the program uses the more general equation 6.2 of EN 1993-1-1, instead.
Members subject to Bending, Shear, and

Axial Force
When a member is subject to a combined axial load, shear force, and a bending
moment, the program evaluates the reduced yield strength as given in Cl 6.2.10 (3)
of the code. The reduction in the yield strength is done only when the applied shear
force exceeds 50% of the design shear resistance V . This reduced yield
pl,Rd
strength is then used to evaluate the reduced moment capacity of the section.
Members subject to Bending and Axial

Compression
The bending resistance of members could be reduced by the presence of a co-
existent axial load. This is then checked against the lateral-torsional buckling

resistance of the section. The EN 1993 design module in STAAD takes such a
scenario into account and performs the necessary checks as per Cl. 6.3.3 of the
code.
Generally, EC3 requires checking cross-section resistance for local capacity and
also checking the overall buckling capacity of the member. In the case of members
subject to axial tension and bending, there is provision to take the stabilizing effect
of the tension load into consideration. This is achieved by modifying the extreme
compression fibre stress and calculating an effective applied moment for the
section. The checks are done as per Cl. 6.2.9 of the code. In case of a combined
axial compressive load and bending moment, the member is checked per the rules
in section 6.3.3 of the code. The program checks to ensure that both the
interaction equations 6.61 and 6.62 of the code are satisfied. The interaction
factors kzz, kyy, kzy & kyz will be evaluated using Annex B of EN 1993-1-1 by
default. Hence for the EN 1993-1-1 code in STAAD.Pro (without National
Annexes), uses Annex B. The choice between using Annex A and Annex B will be
based on the choice specified by a particular National Annex, if used. If the
National Annex itself gives a choice between Annex A and Annex B, the program
uses Annex B to evaluate the interaction factors.
Note: EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not specifically deal with single angle, double
angles, double channels or Tee sections and does give a method to work out
the slenderness of such members. In these cases, the Eurocode 3 (EN 1993-1-
1) design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in BS 5950-1:2000
to calculate the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 of BS 5950-1:2000 is
used in the current version of the EC3 design module. Please refer to Section
5B.5.2 for ST and RA angle specifications.
Note: Laced or battened compression members are not dealt within the
current version of EC3 (EN 1993) design module in STAAD.Pro.
5B.6(B) Design Parameters

structure.
324 — STAAD.Pro
Depending on the model being designed, you may have to change some or all of
the parameter default values. Some parameters are unit dependent and when
altered, the n setting must be compatible with the active “unit” specification.
Table 5B.1 (B) lists all the relevant EC3 parameters together with description and
default values.
Table 5B.4 - Steel Design Parameters EC3 EN
Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as EN 1993-1-

1:2005 to invoke design per
Eurocode 3:2005 (EN 1993).

Reference Manual.
ALH 0.5 The ratio of the distance of the

point torque (from the start of the
member) to the length of the
member. The default value of 0.5
represents torque acting at the
mid-span of a symmetrically
loaded member. Values can range
from 0 to 1.
ALPHA 1.0 Used to input a user defined value

for the α factor in equation 6.41
for combined bending and axial
force checks.
BEAM 3 Parameter to control the number

of sections to checked along the
length of a beam:


Name Value
forces only
imum Mz along beam
forces and forces at location
of BEAM 1.0 check.
3. Check at every 1/13th point
along the beam and report
the maximum
BETA 1.0 Used to input a user defined value

for the β factor in equation 6.41
for combined bending and axial
force checks.
C1 1.132 Corresponds to the C1 factor to be

used to calculate Elastic critical
moment M as per Clause 6.3.2.2
cr
C2 0.459 Corresponds to the C2 factor to be

cr
C3 0 Corresponds to the C3 factor to be

cr
CAN 0 Member will be considered as a

cantilever type member for
deflection checks.
0 indicates that
member will not be
326 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
treated as a cantilever
member
1 indicates that the

member will be treated
as a cantilever member
CMM 1.0 Indicates type of loading and

support conditions on member.
Can take a value from 1 to 8.
Refer to Table 5B1.4(B) for more

information on its use.
CMN 1.0 Indicates the level of End-

Restraint.
1.0 = No fixity
0.5 = Full fixity
0.7 = One end free and

other end fixed
CMT 1 Used to indicate the loading and

support condition for torsion.
Can take a value of 1-7.
Refer to table 5B1.5(B) for more

information
DFF None "Deflection Length" / Maxm.

(Mandatory allowable local deflection
for
See Note 1d below.
deflection


Name Value
check,
TRACK
4.0)
DJ1 Start Joint Joint No. denoting starting point

of member for calculation of "Deflection
Length" . See Note 1 below.
DJ2 End Joint Joint No. denoting end point for

of member calculation of "Deflection Length".
See Note 1 below.
DMAX 100.0 cm Maximum allowable depth for the

member.
DMIN 0 Minimum required depth for the

member.
EFT Member Effective length for torsion. A

Length value of 0 defaults to the member
length.
ELB 0 Used to specify the method for

combined axial load + bending
checks
0. Uses Cl. 6.2.9 of EN 1993-1-

1:2005
1. Uses Cl. 6.2.1(7) - Eqn. 6.2
of EN 1993-1-1:2005
ESTIFF 0 (For use with the Dutch NA only)

Method for checking columns
forming part of (non)/buttressed
framework:
328 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
0. Checks per Cl 12.3.1.2.3 of

NEN 6770: Section 1
1. Checks per Cl 12.3.1.2.3 of
NEN 6770: Section 2
FU 0 Ultimate tensile strength of steel.
GM0 1.1 Corresponds to the Γ factor in

m0
EN 1993-1-1:2005

m1
EN 1993-1-1:2005

m2
EN 1993-1-1:2005
GST 0 Used to specify the section type to

be used for designing a “General
Section” from the user table. The
member will be considered as the
specified type with the user
defined properties. The available
options and corresponding values
are as below:
0. I-Section
1. Single Channel
2. Rectangular Hollow Section
3. Circular Hollow Section
4. Angle Section
5. Tee Section


Name Value
Note: This parameter will be

ignored if it has been assigned
to any section other than a
General Section.
KC 1.0 Corresponds to the correction fac-

tor as per Table 6.6 of EN 1993-1-
1:2005. Program will calculate kc
automatically if this parameter is
set to 0.
KY 1.0 K factor in local y axis.
KZ 1.0 K factor in local z axis.
LEG 0 Slenderness values for angles as

determined from BS 5950-2000
Table 25.
See "2B.6 Design Parameters" on

page 90
LVV Max. value Leg length for Lvv (length about v-

of Lyy v- aces of single angle section), as
per Lyy. Used for slenderness cal-
culations.
LY Member Compression length in local y axis,

Length Slenderness ratio =
(KY)*(LY)/(Ryy)
LZ Member Compression length in local z axis,

Length Slenderness ratio =
(KZ)*(LZ)/(Rzz)
330 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
MU 0 To be used with CMM values of 7

and 8. See Table 5B1.4(B).
Currently valid only with the

French NA.
MTH 0 Used to select the clause to be

used to calculate the LTB reduction
factor, χ . The available options
LT
and corresponding values are as
below:
0. Use default method based on

section type (default)
1. Use Cl.6.3.2.2
2. Use Cl.6.3.2.3
By default, the program will use Cl

6.3.2.3 for rolled & built-up I-
sections and Cl. 6.3.2.2 for all
other sections. If, however, the
specified National Annex expands
on Cl. 6.3.2.3 to include other
section types (e.g., the UK NA),
the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 by
default for that particular section
type.
See "5B.(C) European Codes -

National Annexes to Eurocode 3
[EN 1993-1-1:2005]" on page 343
for additional details on
NA documents.


Name Value
NA 0 Choice of National Annex to be

used for EC3 design.
(see 5B1.2(B) for more

information)
NSF 1.0 Net tension factor for tension

capacity calculation.
PLG 0 To be used to determine whether

to include the additional
interaction checks as per CL.
NA.20(2) and NA.20(3) of the
Polish National Annex.
Note: This parameter will be

applicable only to the Polish
NA
PY Yield The yield strength default value is

Strength set based on the default value of
the SGR parameter.
RATIO 1 Permissible ratio of loading to

capacity.
SBLT 0.0 Indicates if the section is rolled or

built-up.
0.0 = Rolled
1.0 = Built-up
SGR 0 Steel grade as in table 3.1 of EN

1993-1-1:2005
332 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
0.0 - indicates S 235

grade steel

grade steel

grade steel

grade steel

grade steel
Note: As EN 1993-1-1:2005
does not provide a buckling
curve in table 6.2 for grade S
450 steel (in Table 3.1 of EN
1993-1-1:2005), the program
will use the same buckling
curves as for grade S 460 when
calculating the buckling
resistance as per clause 6.3.
STIFF Member Distance between transverse stiff-

Length or ener plates, used to prevent web
depth of shear buckling. If not specified or
beam, if a value of 0 is provided, the pro-
whichever gram will assume the web is unstiff-
is greater ened.


Name Value
TOM 0 Total torsion for design used for

torsion checks.
TORSION 0 Method to be used for a specific

member or group of members:
0. Perform basic torsion checks

if member is subject to
torsion.
1. Perform basic stress check
(Ignore warping effects).
2. Perform detailed checks
(including warping effects).
3. Ignore all torsion checks
Note: For options 1 or 2, the

program will perform the
torsion related checked even if
torsional moment is absent and
will use a value of zero for the
torsional moment.
TRACK 0 Specify level of detail in output.
0. Summary of results only.

1. Summary with member
capacities.
2. Detailed results.
3. Deflection check results.
334 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
UNF 1 Unsupported length as a fraction

of the actual member length.
UNL Member Unrestraint length of member used

Length in calculating the lateral-torsional
resistance moment of the member.
ZG +Section Distance of transverse load from

Depth/2 shear center. Used to calculate M .
cr
Note: For Tee sections, ZG

will have a default value of
(+Flange thickness/2)
Notes:
1. CAN, DJ1, and DJ2 – Deflection
a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two
methods. The first method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter,
is based on the local displacement. Local displacement is described in
If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever

style deflection. Let (DX1, DY1, DZ1) represent the nodal displacements
(in global axes) at the node defined by DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1,
the start node of the member). Similarly, (DX2, DY2, DZ2) represent the
deflection values at DJ2 or the end node of the member.
Compute Delta = SQRT((DX2 - DX1)2 + (DY2 - DY1)2 + (DZ2 - DZ1)2)
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 & DJ2 or, between start node
and end node, as the case may be.
Then, if CAN is specified a value 1, dff = L/Delta
Ratio due to deflection = DFF/dff

b. If CAN = 0, deflection length is defined as the length that is used for

calculation of local deflections within a member. It may be noted that
for most cases the “Deflection Length” will be equal to the length of the
member. However, in some situations, the “Deflection Length” may be
different. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference
line from which local deflections are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been
modeled using four joints and three members. The “Deflection Length”
for all three members will be equal to the total length of the beam in
this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to model this
situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2
should be 4.
PARAMETERS
DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL
c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the
member length and local deflections will be measured from original
member line.
d. It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified, STAAD will

not perform a deflection check. This is in accordance with the fact that
there is no default value for DFF (see Table 2B.1).
e. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available

parameters for steel design.
2. NA Parameter
The values for NA parameter are as follows:
336 — STAAD.Pro
Table 5B.5 - Table 5B1.2(B) - Numerical Code for Eurocode
National Annex
NA Value Country
0 Uses the base EN 1993-1-1:2005 code. The

default values specified in En 1993-1-1:2005
will be used for the partial safety factors and
various parameter values where applicable
(default).
1 United Kingdom (British NA) — Uses the BS

EN 1993-1-1:2005 version of Eurocode 3
along with the UK National Annex.
2 Netherlands (Dutch NA) — Uses the NEN EN

1993-1-1:2005 version of the code.
The Dutch National Annex [NEN-EN 1993-1-

1/NB] has been added in this module. Please
note that the Dutch National requires
additional checks as per NEN 6770 and NEN
6771 which will also be performed during
design checks with this parameter value
3 Norway (Norwegian NA) — Uses the NS-EN

1993-1-1:2005 version of the code. The Nor-
wegian National Annexe [ NS-EN 1993-1-
1:2005/Na 2008] has been added to this
implementation.
4 France (French NA) — Uses the Annexe

Nationale a la NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 version
of the code along with the French National
Annex..
5 Finland (Finnish NA) - Uses the SFS EN

1993-1-1:2005 version of Eurocode 3 along
with the Finnish National Annex.
6 Poland (Polish NA) - Uses the PN EN 1993-1-

1:2005 version of Eurocode 3 along with the
Polish National Annex.

3. CMM Parameter
The values of CMM for various loading and support conditions are as given
below:
Table 5B.6 - Values for the CMM Parameter
CMM Loading and Support Conditions
Value
varying end moments and uniform loading
varying end moments and central point load
4. Checking beam deflection
338 — STAAD.Pro
With the TRACK parameter set to 4, the members included in a BEAM CHECK
command will be checked for the local axis deflection rather than for the
stress capacity using the current LOAD LIST.
If both stress capacity and deflection checks are required, then 2 parameter
blocks with code checks are required, one with a TRACK 4 command and one
with a TRACK 0, 1 or 2, thus:
LOAD LIST 1 TO 10
PARAMETER 1
CODE EN 1993
TRACK 2 ALL
CODE CHECK MEMBER 1
***************************
LOAD LIST 100 TO 110
PARAMETER 2
TRACK 4 ALL
DFF 300 MEMB 1
DJ1 1 MEMB 1
DJ2 4 MEMB 1
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
Note: While both sets of code checks will be reported in the output file,
only the last code check results are reported in the STAAD.Pro graphical
interface.
5. CMT Parameter
The values of CMM for various loading and support conditions are as given
below:

Table 5B.7 - Loading and Support Conditions represented by

CMT Parameter Values
CMT Description Diagram
Value
1 (Default) : Concentrated Torque

at Ends. Ends Torsion fixed and
Warping fixed
2 Concentrated Torque along

length of member. Ends Torsion
fixed and Warping free
3 Concentrated Torque along

length of member. Ends Torsion
fixed and Warping fixed
4 Uniform Torque in member.

Ends Torsion fixed and Warping
free
5 Uniform Torque in member.

Ends Torsion fixed and Warping
fixed
6 Concentrated Torque in can-

tilever. End Torsion fixed and
Warping fixed
7 Uniform Torque in cantilever.

End Torsion fixed and Warping
fixed
Note: For CMT = 2 and CMT = 3, you have the option of specifying the
distance at which the concentrated torque acts, measured from the start
of the member. This can be done by using the ALH design parameter. The
ALH parameter indicates the ratio of the distance of the point torque
340 — STAAD.Pro
(from the start of the member) to the length of the member. This
parameter will have a default value of 0.5 (i.e., the torque acts at the
center of the span) and will accept values ranging from 0 to 1.
5B.7(B) Code Checking

properties of the members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per EN 1993-
1-1:2005 and a corresponding National Annex (if specified). Code checking is done
using the forces and moments at specific sections of the members.
members have passed or failed the checks; the critical condition; the value of the
ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other
specified RATIO value); the governing load case, and the location (distance from
the start of the member of forces in the member where the critical condition
occurs).
Reference Manual, with the exception of ISECTION. ISECTION has been currently
excluded since the option of Tapered section design is currently not supported in
the EC3 module. The EC3 (EN 1993) design module does not consider these
sections or PRISMATIC sections in its design process.
Note: Checks for slender sections to EN 1993-1-1 are limited to I-SECTIONS,

TEE, SINGLE CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE and CIRCULAR & RECTANGULAR
HOLLOW SECTIONS.
Code checking for GENERAL sections can be also done using the EN1993 module.
The program will design GENERAL sections as I sections by default. However, you
are given the option to choose a ‘section type’ to be considered while designing the
member. Refer to the description of the GST design parameter in Section 5B.6 (B)
for details.
5B.8 (B) Member Selection


same limitations as defined in Section 5B.7(B) - Code Checking.

input as prismatic or as the limitations specified in Section 5.B.7(B)
5B.9 (B) Tabulated Results of Steel Design
a. MEMBER refers to the member number for which the design is

performed.
b. TABLE refers to steel section name, which has been checked against
the steel code or has been selected.
c. RESULTS prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILED. If the
RESULT is FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member.
d. CRITICAL COND refers to the clause in EN 1993-1-1:2005 code which gov-
erns the design.
e. RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for
the critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member
has passed.
cases.
h. LOCATION specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to
the section where design forces govern.
342 — STAAD.Pro
Note: For a TRACK 2 output, the module will also report all the relevant clause
checks that have been performed and will also indicate the critical ratio and the
load case that caused the critical ratio as well as the corresponding forces that
were used for the respective checks. A TRACK 2 output will also include the
various design data used for the calculations such as the section modulii,
section class, section capacity etc.
If an NA parameter (other than 0) has been specified and if the particular National
Annex requires additional checks outside those specified in EN 1993-1-1:2005
(e.g., The Dutch National Annex), the respective NA clauses and any associated
code clauses will be listed along with the critical ratios and the forces that were
used for these clause checks.
5B.(C) European Codes - National Annexes

to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]
A number of countries that have signed up to the replace their current steel design
standards with the Eurocode, EN 1993-1-1:2005, known commonly as Eurocode 3,
have published their National Annex documents. These documents make small
changes to the base document and STAAD.Pro has been updated to incorporate
some of these National Annex documents.
Description
The parameter NA sets the default material gamma factors and any
additional changes outlined in the country specific National Annex such as specific
equations or methods.
The output file printout has been updated to indicate which National Annex (if any)
has been used in a code check / select process. (For all TRACK settings)
Note: This Eurocode 3 design code is secured using the 'Eurocode Design'
code pack.
General Format
The format of the EN 1993-1-1:2005 National Annex is as follows:

CODE EN 1993

NA f1
{Code parameters: See Eurocode 3 parameters}
Where: f1 represents the number designation for a specific country's National

Annex:
Table 5B.8 - Numerical Code for Eurocode National Annex
NA Value Country
0 None. This value represents using the base code

only, with no national annex changes or additions
(default).
1 United Kingdom (British NA)
2 Netherlands (Dutch NA)
3 Norway (Norwegian NA)
4 France (French NA)
5 Finland (Finnish NA)
6 Poland (Polish NA)
Specifying the design engine to use a National Annex with EC 3
Use the following procedure to include additional check specified by a National

Annex:
1. In the Modeling mode, select the Design | Steel tab.
The Steel Design - Whole Structure dialog box opens.

2. In the Current Code drop-down menu, select EN 1993-1-1:2005.
3. Click Define Parameters….
The Design Parameters dialog box opens.
344 — STAAD.Pro
4. Select the NA parameter in the list box.
5. Select the option corresponding to the National Annex document you want to
use .
6. Click Add.
This will insert the following commands into the STAAD input file:
CODE EN 1993-1-1:2005
NA 8
Refer to EC3 steel design for additional information on steel design per EC3.
A design performed to the new Eurocode 3 National Annex is displayed in the

output file (*.ANL) with the following header, in addition to the base EC3 output.
5B.1(C) EC3 NA Dutch National Annex
Purpose
Adds values from the Dutch National Annex - titled NEN-EN 1993-1-1/NB - for use
with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small changes to
the base document.

Description
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that

require additional clauses from the Dutch National Annex (hereafter referred to as
D-NA) are:
l 6.1 General
l 6.2.8 Bending and shear
l 6.2.10 Bending shear and axial force
l 6.3 Buckling resistance of members
l 6.3.1.3 Slenderness for flexural buckling
l 6.3.1.4 Slenderness for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling
l 6.3.2.2 Lateral torsional buckling curves – General case
l 6.3.2.3 Lateral torsional buckling curves for rolled sections or equivalent
welded sections
l 6.3.2.4 Simplified assessment methods for beams
l 6.3.3 Members in bending and axial compression
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The
sections below refer to the corresponding clauses in the UK-NA.
Note: The local axis convention in the Dutch codes is: Y – major axis & Z –
minor axis (as opposed to the convention followed in STAAD.Pro).
346 — STAAD.Pro
Clause 6.1 – General
The partial safety factors will use the following values:
Resistance of cross-sections- ΓM0 = 1.0
Resistance of members to instability- ΓM1 = 1.0
Resistance of cross sections to tension- ΓM2 = 1.25
The design function in STAAD.Pro will set these values as the default values for the
D-NA. The user is still however allowed to modify these factors using the Γ
parameters in the design input.
Clause 6.2.8 – Bending and shear
The D-NA requires the implementation of causes 11.3.1.1 and 11.3.1.3 of NEN
6770.
Clause 11.3.1.1 (NEN 6770): Class 1 and Class 2 I-

section profiles
Class 1 and class 2 I section profiles must satisfy the interaction formulae given in
tables 10 & 11 of NEN 6770.

Table 10: Provides interaction checks for bending about the major axis (All
necessary terms and formulae are described below):
l Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a1 x Npl;d check equa-
tion 11.3.1
l Check #2 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a1 x Npl;d check equa-
tion 11.3.2
l Check #3 – If Vz;s;d > 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a2 x Nv;u;d check equa-
tion 11.3-3
l Check #4 – If Vz;s;d > 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a2 x Nv;u;d check equa-
tion 11.3-4
Where:
Vz;s;d= Actual Shear force in the section along Z- axis
Vz;pl;d= Shear capacity of section along Z - axis
= Aw x fy;d / √3 - See fig below for Aw ; fy;d = yield stress

Figure 5.5 - Definition of A
w
Aw = A - 2 (bf - tw - 2r) tf
Ns;d= Axial force in the section
Npl;d= Axial capacity of section = A x fy;d
My;s;d= Bending moment about major axis
348 — STAAD.Pro
My;pl;d= Plastic moment capacity of section = fy;d x Wy;pl
Wy;pl = Plastic section modulus
a1 = = min( A-2bfx tf)/A , 0.5)- used in tables 10 & 11
a2 = = see eqn 11.3-10- used in tables 10 & 11
Mv;y;ud= see eqn 11.3.12
N;v;u;d= see eqn 11.3-13
Table 11: Provides interaction formulae for bending about the minor axis
l Check #1 – If Vy;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 1.0 x a1 x Npl;d check equa-
tion 11.3-5
l Check #2 – If Vy;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 x a1 x Npl;d check equa-
tion 11.3-6
l Check #3 – If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 1.0 x a1 x Nv;u;d check
equation 11.3-7
l Check #4 – If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 x a1 x Nv;u;d check
equation 11.3-8
Where:
Vy;s;d= Actual Shear force in the section along Y- axis
Vy;pl;d= Shear capacity of section along Y - axis
= Aw x fy;d / √3 - See fig below for Aw ; fy;d = yield stress
Mv;z;u;d = q x Mz;pld = q x fy;d x Wpl;z;d (Wpl;z;d = plastic section

modulus about minor axis) & q as per eqn 11.3-14
Nv;u;d = N;pl;d – 2(1-q)bf x tf x fy;d
Clause 11.3.1.3 ( NEN 6770) : Class 1 and Class 2

Square and rectangular hollow sections
This clause requires class 1 and class 2 square and rectangular tube profiles to
satisfy the interaction equations in Table 13.

l Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a3 x Npl;d check equa-
tion 11.3.22
l Check #2 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a3 x Npl;d check equa-
tion 11.3.23
l Check #3 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a4 x Nv;u;d check
equation 11.3-24
l Check #4 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a4 x Nv;u;d check
equation 11.3-25
Where
Vz;s;d= Actual Shear force in the section along Z- axis
Vz;pl;d= Shear capacity of section along Z – axis
[ b – breadth and h = height of section ; A= area of section]
a3 = min( (A-2xbxt)/A , 0.5)
a4 = from equation 11.3.27
Clause 6.2.10 – Bending shear and axial force
Requires the implementation of clauses 11.3.1.1 to 11.3.1.3 and 11.3.2.1 to

11.3.2.3 of NEN 6770 and clause 11.3 of NEN 6771
Clause 11.3.1.1 (NEN 6770) and Clause 11.3.1.3 (

NEN 6770)
See "5B.1(C) EC3 NA Dutch National Annex" on page 345 of this document
described above.
Clause 11.3.1.2 (NEN 6770): Class 1 and class 2

circular hollow (CHS) profiles
Class 1 and class 2 sections with circular hollow profiles should satisfy the
interaction equations given in table 12.
350 — STAAD.Pro
l Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d check equation 11.3.17
l Check #2 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d check equation 11.3.18.
See "5B.1(C) EC3 NA Dutch National Annex" on page 345 of this document for
equations to derive Vz;s;d
Vz;pl;d = Shear capacity of CHS sections
See equations 11.3-19 and 11.3-20 to evaluate Mv;y;u;d and N;v;u;d.
To check for these conditions about the y axis, substitute the index ‘z’ in the above
equations with ‘y’ (should be the same of CHS sections).
Clause 11.3.2 ( NEN 6770)

Section 11.3.2 in general deals with Biaxial bending with axial force and shear. The
general condition to be satisfied in this case is given by equation 11.3-31 of NEN
6770
Clause 11.3.2.1 : Class 1 and class2 I-sections with

biaxial bending + shear + axial force
The formula to evaluate M;N;v;y;u;d and M;N;v;z;u;d are to be taken from tables
14 and 15 of NEN 6770 respectively.
Checks for table 14:
l Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a1 x Npl;d use equation
11.3.32
l Check #2 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a1 x Npl;d use equation
11.3.33
l Check #3 – If Vz;s;d > 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a2 x Nv;u;d use equa-
tion 11.3-34
l Check #4 – If Vz;s;d > 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a2 x Nv;u;d use equa-
tion 11.3-35

equations to evaluate Vz;s;d, My;pl;d, Npl;d, Mv;y;ud, N;v;u;d, a1 ,a2 and
Vz;pl;d.
Checks for table 15:
l Check #1 – If Vy;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 1.0 x a1 x Npl;d use equa-
tion 11.3.36
l Check #2 – If Vy;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 x a1 x Npl;d use equa-
tion 11.3.37
l Check #3 – If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 1.0 x a1 x Nv;u;d check
equation 11.3-38
l Check #4 – If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 x a1 x Nv;u;d check
equation 11.3-39
equations to evaluate Vy;s;d, Mz;pl;d, Npl;d, Mv;z;ud, N;v;u;d, a1 ,a2 and
Vy;pl;d.
See table 16 for α1, α1, β0 and β1 use in tables 14 and 15.
Clause 11.3.2.2 : Class 1 and Class 2 Circular hol-

low tubes
The formula to evaluate M;N;v;y;u;d and M;N;v;z;u;d (to be used in equation 11-
3-31, see description of clause 11.3.2 above) are to be taken from table 17 of
NEN 6770.
l Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d use equation 11.3.44

l Check #2 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d use equation 11.3.45.
equations to evaluate Vz;pl;d, My;pl;d, and Npl;d use in equations 11.3.44 &
11.3.45.
For values to be used for α1, α2, β1 and β2 in this case refer to table 18 of NEN
6770.
352 — STAAD.Pro
Clause 11.3.2.3 : Class 1 and class2 Rectangular
and square hollow tubes
The formula to evaluate M;N;v;y;u;d and M;N;v;z;u;d (to be used in equation 11-
3-31, see description of clause 11.3.2 above) are to be taken from table 19 of NEN
6770.
l Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a3 x Npl;d use equa-
tion 11.3-48
l Check #2 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a3 x Npl;d use equa-
tion 11.3.49
l Check #3 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a4 x Nv;u;d use equa-
tion 11.3-50
l Check #4 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a4 x Nv;u;d check
equation 11.3-51
equations to evaluate Vz;pl;d, My;pl;d, Npl;d, Mv;y;ud, N;v;u;d, a3, a4 and
Vz;pl;d to be used in the above equations. For values to be used for α1, α2, β1 and
β2 in this case refer to table 20 of NEN 6770.
To check for these conditions about the y axis, substitute the index ‘z’ in the above
equations with ‘y’.
Clause 11.3 ( NEN 6771)

In general, this section deals with Biaxial bending with axial force and shear for
class 3 and class 4 sections.
Check for class 3 sections: For class 3 sections use the method in section 11.3 NEN
6770. For class 3 sections the methods and equations discussed above can be used
with the ‘plastic section modulus’ being substituted with the ‘elastic modulus’.
Check for class 4 sections: Class 4 sections can be treated as class 3 sections if the
effective section properties are used as given in clause 10.2.4.2.3 of NEN 6771.
Working out the effective section properties for slender sections has already been
done in STAAD.Pro.
For I- section profiles and tubular sections the following procedure should be
adopted:

1. Case 1: -If M;y;s;d / MN;y;f;u;d ≤ 1 check equation 11.2-7 ( given below)
V /V ≤1
z;s;d z;u;d
Where
V is the shear for in the Z direction

z;s;d
V is the shear capacity in the Z direction for ultimate limit
z;u;d
state.
For an I section,
Where
Aw,ef = effective web area as given in section 10.2.4.2.3 .
MN;y;f;u;d is the moment capacity about the Y axis for the

effective section. = ( fy·W,eff)
2. Case 2: If M;y;s;d / MN;y;f;u;d > 1 and M;y;s;d / M;y;f;u;d ≤1 check

equation 11.2-13 (given below):
Clause 6.3 – Buckling resistance of members
The D-NA introduces a new clause 6.3.0, which in turns requires the checks as per
clauses 12.1.2.2, 12.13.2 and 12.1.4.2 of NEN 6771 to be applied.
Clause 12.1.2.2 (NEN 6771)

This clause in NEN 6771 determines the relative torsional slenderness and is given
as:
Where:
N = A·f
c;u;d y;d
354 — STAAD.Pro
A = area of section
f = the yield stress

y;d
F is the Euler-torsion formula
E;θ
This value of slenderness is to be used to calculate the modification factors used in
section 6.3 of EC-3.
Clause 12.1.3.2 (NEN 6771)

This clause works out the relative torsional-flexural buckling slenderness for
compression members. The relative torsional-flexural buckling slenderness is given
as:
Where
N = A·f
c;u;d y;d
A = area of section
f = yield stress
y;d
F is the Euler torsional buckling strength
E;tk
Clause 12.1.4.2 (NEN 6771)

Buckling lengths of rotationally restrained bars with intermediate spring supports.
Note: STAAD.Pro does not allow for these end conditions, specifically. The
effective length factors may be used to accommodate this requirement.
Clause 6.3.1.3 – Slenderness for flexural buckling
The Dutch NA requires the implementation of clause 12.1.1.3 and 12.1.5.3.2 of

NEN 6770 and clause 12.1.1.3 of NEN 6771.

Clause 12.1.1.3 (NEN 6770)

This clause gives the equations to evaluate the effective lengths for various
support conditions. STAAD.Pro uses the effective length factor ‘K’ which allows the
user to set/modify the effective lengths for a member.
Clause 12.1.5.3.2 (NEN 6770)

This clause gives methods to evaluate the buckling length of lattice sections. We
do not deal with latticed section in the current version of STAAD.Pro. In any case
the buckling length can be adjusted using the ‘K’ factor.
Clause 12.1.1.3 (NEN 6771)

This clause again deals with working out the effective lengths of prismatic and
non-prismatic rods. Again, the ‘K’ factor in the current implementation of
STAAD.Pro is adequate to cater for adjusting the effective lengths as necessary.
Clause 6.3.1.4 – Slenderness for torsional and torsional-flexural

buckling
The D-NA requires the implementation of clauses 12.1.2 and 12.1.3 of NEN 6770
Clause 12.1.2 (NEN 6770): Torsional stability

IPE, HEA, HEB & HEM sections and pipe sections do not need to be checked for
torsional instability.
If torsional checks need to be performed they should be done according to 12.1.2

of NEN 6771.
Clause 12.1.2 (NEN 6771)

This clause gives the condition to check for torsion instability. The condition
being:
Where:
N = the applied axial load

c;s;d
356 — STAAD.Pro
N = the axial capacity = A x fy.
C;u;d
Clause 12.1.3 (NEN 6770): Torsional flexural sta-

bility
Doubly symmetric sections need not be checked for torsional flexural instability.
However for I sections that have rigid supports that is not along the axis of the
section and any other sections will need to be checked as per clause 12.1.3 of NEN
6771.
Clause 12.1.3 (NEN 6771)

This clause gives the condition to check for torsional flexural instability. The
condition being:
Where
N;c;s;d and N;c;u;d as in clause 12.1.2 above.
Clause 6.3.2.2 – Lateral torsional buckling curves - general
The D-NA states that the values for the imperfection factor αLT to be used in
equation 6.56 of EC-3 are to be obtained from table 6.3 of EC-3. This is what
STAAD.Pro currently implements.
Clause 6.3.2.3 – Lateral torsional buckling curves for rolled sections

or equivalent welded sections
The D-NA states that:
1. The values for the
#. Imperfection factor αLT0 = 0.4 (to be used in equation 6.57 of EC-3)
#. Β = 0.75(to be used in equation 6.57 of EC-3)

These are the default values used in the current implementation in

STAAD.Pro.
2. The buckling curves shall be selected as per table 6.5.
Again this is what is being used in the current implementation of EC3 (BS) in
STAAD.Pro.
3. The reduction factor, f, is given by
F = 1 – 0.5(1-kc)[1-2x (λLT -0.8)^2]. And Kc to be determined from table 6.6.
The current implementation of STAAD.Pro conservatively uses a value of f =

1.0. This implementation use a new parameter KC to identify the moment
distribution as given in table 6.6, thus determining the value of the
correction factor ‘kc’.
Clause 6.3.2.4 – Simplified assessment method for restrained beams

in buildings
The current implementation only uses the more accurate method (6.3.2.2 and
6.3.2.3 in EC-3). Hence STAAD will ignore this clause for this implementation.
Clause 6.33 – Uniform members in bending and axial compression
The D-NA recommends the use of the method in Annex B of EC-3 to determine the
values of kyy, kyz, kzy and kzz to be used in 6.3.3 ( EC-3) checks.
The current implementation in STAAD.Pro uses the method in Annex B.
The Dutch NA also requires additional checks as per clause 12.3.1.2.3 of NEN
6770
Clause 12.3.1.2.3 (NEN 6770): Rotation/bending

capacity
The checks given in this clause deals with additional checks for columns that form
part of a buttressed or non-butressed framework. The program uses the ESTIFF
parameter with two different values to identify the framework type:
l ESTIFF = 0 (default) – Column part of a buttressed framework – Selecting

this value will internally perform the checks as per section 1 of clause
358 — STAAD.Pro
12.3.1.2.3
l ESTIFF = 1 (default) – Column is not part of a buttressed framework – Select-
ing this value will internally perform the checks as per section 2 of clause
12.3.1.2.3
These checks are described below:
1. For columns in buttressed frameworks the buckling length is to be taken

based on either
l the system length or
l the distance between adjacent lateral supports
The following conditions should also be satisfied:
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d < 0.15, no additional checks are required
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d ≥ 0.15 and the steel grade is S235 or S 275 then
Where
N is the axial load in the section

c;s;d
N = Axial capacity of section = A·f
pl;d y;d
λ = Slenderness of the section about the major axis ( Y-axis)
y
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d ≥ 0.15 and the steel grade is S355 then
Where
N = the axial load in the section

c;s;d
pl;d y;d
y
2. For columns that are not part of buttressed frameworks the following
additional checks need to be done:
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d < 0.15, no additional checks are required

If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d ≥ 0.15 and the steel grade is S235 or S 275 then
Where
N = the axial load in the section and

c;s;d
pl;d y;d
y
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d ≥ 0.15 and the steel grade is S355 then
5B.2 (C) EC3 NA Norwegian National Annex
Purpose
Adds values from the Norwegian National Annex - titled NA to BS EN 1993-1-

1:2005 - for use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes
small changes to the base document.
Description

require additional clauses from the Norwegian National Annex are:
Section 6.1(1)
Resistance of cross-sections - ΓM0 = 1.05
Resistance of members to instability - ΓM1 = 1.05
Resistance of cross sections to tension - ΓM2 = 1.25
This implementation will set the default values of the GM0, GM1 and GM2
parameters in the design module to the values as:
GM0 = 1.05, GM1 = 1.05 and GM2 = 1.25. (Note: When NA 3 has been specified)
360 — STAAD.Pro
The user will be allowed to override these default values and set custom values to
these parameters. If any of these parameters have been specified by the user as ‘0’,
this implementation will ignore the user specified value (i.e., 0) and use the default
values as given above.
The design functions in STAAD.Pro will set these values as the default values for
the French-NA. The user is still however allowed to modify these factors using the Γ
parameters in the design input. These values will also need to be reported in the
design output.
Note: The ‘GB1’ parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds
preceding this release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this
parameter is no longer required in EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence any legacy files
that use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message and the user will need to
substitute GB1 with GM1 in line with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
sections below refer to the corresponding clauses in the Norwegian -NA.
5B.3 (C) EC3 NA UK National Annex
Purpose
Adds values from the UK National Annex - titled NA to BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 - for

use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small
changes to the base document.
Description
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 that have been dealt with in the UK

National Annex (hereafter referred to as the UK-NA) are:
l 6.1(1) General
l 6.3.2.2 Lateral Torsional Buckling curves – General case
l 6.3.2.3(1) Lateral Torsional buckling curves for rolled or equivalent welded
sections
l 6.3.2.3(2) Modification factor calculations
l 6.3.2.4(1)B Slenderness limit λc0

l 6.3.2.4(2)B Modification factor ‘kfl’

l 6.3.3 Method for calculation interaction factors for members in combined
bending and compression
l Annex B Members in bending and axial compression
l 6.3.1.4 Slenderness for torsional and torsional- flexural buckling
sections below refer to the corresponding clauses in the UK-NA.
Clause 6.1(1) – General: Partial Safety Factors for buildings
EN 1993-1-1:2005 specifies the use of the partial safety factors to be used in for
design as given in Cl. 6.1 of the code. These factors are ΓM0, ΓM1 & ΓM2. EN 1993
provides default values for these factors. However any National Annex is allowed
to override these default values.
The partial safety factors will use the following values for the UK National Annex:
Resistance of cross-sections- ΓM0 = 1.0
Resistance of members to instability- ΓM1 = 1.0
Resistance of cross sections to tension- ΓM2 = 1.1
This implementation will hence set the default values of the design parameters
GM0, GM1 and GM2 in the design module to the values as:
GM0 = 1.0, GM1 = 1.0 and GM2 = 1.10. (Note: When NA 1 has been specified)
The design function in STAAD.Pro will set these values as the default values for the
UK-NA. You may override these default values and set custom values to these
parameters. These values will also be reported in the design output.
Note: If any of these parameters have been specified by the user as ‘0’,
STAAD.Pro will ignore the user specified value (i.e., 0) and use the default
values as given above.
Warning: The ‘GB1’ parameter that is being used for compression checks in
builds preceding this release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as
362 — STAAD.Pro
this parameter is no longer required in EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence any legacy
files that use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message and the user will
need to substitute GB1 with GM1 in line with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Clause 6.3.2.2 –Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for

LTB checks
The UK-NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to
calculate the imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor X , requires the calculation of the
LT
‘Elastic Critical Buckling Moment’, Mcr. The UK National Annex does not specify a
particular method to calculate Mcr. Hence the calculation of Mcr has been based on
the following NCCI documents:
1. SN003a-EN-EU – Elastic critical moment for Lateral torsional Buckling:
This document provides a method to calculate ‘Mcr’ specifically for doubly

symmetric sections only. Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be
considered for this method in the proposed implementation.
The equation to evaluate Mcr is given in the NCCI as
C1 and C2 are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading
conditions of the member. The NCCI provides values for C1 and C2 for the
different cases as given in the tables below:

This NCCI considers three separate loading conditions:

l Members with end moments
l Members with transverse loading
364 — STAAD.Pro
l Members with end moments and transverse loading.
The implementation of EC3 in STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition

and the bending moment diagram through the CMM parameter. The first two
loading conditions mentioned above and its variants can be dealt with by
using the existing values of the CMM parameter (i.e., 1 to 6). Hence the
appropriate values from this NCCI will be used for ‘C1’ and ‘C2’ coefficients
depending on the value of CMM specified. The default value of CMM is 1,
which considers the member as a pin ended member with UDL along its span.
The user will also have the option to specify specific values for C1 & C2 using
the new ‘C1’ and ‘C2’ parameters in the design input mode.
However for cases with end moments and transverse loading, the NCCI
provides graphs to evaluate the C1 and C2 coefficients. It does not however,
provide a set of equations for these graphs. However the “end moments and
transverse loading” condition cannot be currently specified in the design
input. Hence this implementation will introduce two new values for the CMM
parameter viz.
CMM 7:Member with varying end moments and uniform loading.
CMM 8: Member with varying end moments and central point load.
For these two conditions, the UK National Annex (nor the NCCI) does not
provide equations to evaluate C1 and C2. Hence in STAAD.Pro the user will
have to use the new ‘C1’ & ‘C2’ parameters to input the required values for C1
& C2 to be used in calculating Mcr. For values of 7 or 8 for the CMM
parameter, the program will issue a warning if C1 and C2 have not been
specified.
Note: If the NA parameter has not been specified, the program obtains
the values of C1 and C2 from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-
1:1992.
2. SN030a-EN-EU – Mono-symmetrical uniform members under bending and

axial compression:
This document provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment

(Mcr) for uniform mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the
weak axis. Hence for this implementation the elastic critical moment for ‘Tee-
Sections’ will be worked out using the method in this NCCI.

Note: Though this method could also be applicable to mono-symmetric built-

up sections, STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify
a mono-symmetric built-up section. Hence this implementation will use this
method only for Tee-Sections. In any case, the actual LTB capacity will still
be worked out as per BS 5950-1 as in the current EC3 implementation.
The equation to evaluate Mcr for mono symmetric sections is given as :
The factors C1, C2 and C3 are dependent on the end conditions and loading
criteria. This implementation will consider C1, C2 and C3 as given in the
tables below:
The CMM parameter (see section (i) above) specified during design input will
determine the values of C1, C2 and C3. The default value of CMM is 1, which
366 — STAAD.Pro
considers the member as a pin ended member with UDL along its span. This
NCCI does not however consider the “end moments and transverse loading”
condition. The user however can use the new C1, C2 and C3 parameters to
input the required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr. As
described in section (i) above, the user must use C1, C2 and C3 parameters
along with CMM values of 7 and 8.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under
consideration is free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints
for the member ( k = kw = 1.0). The current implementation of EC3 in
STAAD takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter. A
value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input.
Hence the above methods will be used only for members which are free to
rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints, i.e., CMN = 1.0. For
members with partial or end fixities (ie, CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), the
proposed implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in
DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 – Annex F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI
documents) the proposed implementation will use the method as per the DD
ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term ‘zg’ in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between
the point of application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear
center of the cross section. The value of ‘zg’ is considered positive if the load
acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts away from the shear
center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the
shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center.
The user will be allowed to modify this value by using the new ‘ZG’
parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate
that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the term ‘zg’
in the equation will have a value of zero.
Clause 6.3.2.3(1) – LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded sec-

tion
The UK-NA specifies different values for the λLT,0 and β factors to be used in
equation 6.57 of BS EN 1993-1-1 for rolled and equivalent welded sections. The
current implementation in STAAD.pro does not differentiate between rolled and
welded sections and uses the default values in BS EN 1993-1-1 for λLT,0 and β.

The values specified in the UK-NA are:
For rolled sections and hot-rolled & cold formed hollow sections:
λLT,0 = 0.4
β = 0.75
For welded sections:
λLT,0 = 0.2
β = 1.00
The current implementation of STAAD.Pro uses the buckling curves based on

Table 6.5 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. The UK-NA specifies different limits and
buckling curves to be used in this clause as given below:
This table again does not specify which buckling curve is to be used in case of
welded doubly symmetric sections with h/b ≥ 3.1 and welded non-doubly
symmetric sections. Hence for these cases the new implementation will still use the
method specified in the base code as per clause 6.3.2.2(2).
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 — Calculation of LTB Reduction factor,

χ as per UK NA
LT
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005), both give equations to evaluate
the LTB reduction factor χ to be used in eqn. 6.55 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the
imperfection factors to be used for calculating χ . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of
LT
buckling curves for “Rolled I Sections”, “Welded I Sections” and “Any other
368 — STAAD.Pro
sections”. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses tables 6.5 and 6.3 to choose the
buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however only deals with
“Rolled I Sections” and “Welded I Sections”.
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states “Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of
constant cross section the value of χ should be determined from...”. Hence in the
LT
implementation of EC3 (and the UK Annex) in STAAD.Pro, by default the program
will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evaluate χ . For any case that is not dealt with
LT
by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate χ .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the UK National Annex states that Table 6.5 in BS EN 1993-1-1:2005
should be replaced with the table given in the NA (See section 4.3 of this
document). Hence for all cases dealt with by the table in the UK NA, this
implementation will choose the buckling curves from the UK National Annex. For
any case that is not dealt with by the table in the UK NA, the program will use the
method given in Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Hence for the following cross sections the program will use the Table in the UK NA
for choosing a buckling curve for LTB checks (when the UK NA has been specified):
l Rolled doubly symmetric I & H Sections

l Rolled doubly symmetric hollow sections (SHS, RHS, CHS)
l Angle Sections
l Any other rolled section
l Welded doubly symmetric sections with h/b < 3.1
For the following cross sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 of BS EN 1993-1-
1:2005 to evaluate χLT
l Welded I & H Sections with h/b ≥ 3.1.
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or
Cl.6.3.2.3, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate χLT .
In any case the Elastic critical moment “Mcr” (used to evaluate the non dimensional
slenderness) will be worked out as given in section 4.2 of this document. Since the
UK National Annex uses the NCCIs mentioned in the sections above, this
implementation will only consider end restraint conditions corresponding to the
CMN parameter=1.0 (See section 4.2 above). For all other cases of the CMN
parameter values, this implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of
DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.

Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the
design input = 0), the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or
welded I & H Sections. For all other cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of
BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be treated as built-up
sections only if the section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section
(i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design input).
Clause 6.3.2.3(2) – Modification factor, ‘f’ for LTB checks
The UK NA specifies the use of eqn. 6.58 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to evaluate the

modification factor ‘f’ for the LTB reduction factor χLT. To evaluate the
modification factor BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 uses a correction factor ‘kc’ given by
Table 6.6 in the code.
The UK-NA however, specifies that the correction factor ‘kc’ is to be obtained as
below:
Kc = 1 / √C1, where C1 is to be obtained from the NCCI documents given in

section 4.2 of this document. The NCCI document SN003a-EN-EU specifies the
values of C1 to be used in table 3.1 as shown below. This proposed
implementation will allow for the reduction factor based on the UK-NA.
370 — STAAD.Pro
These values are for an end restraint factor of k=1 (ie CMN=1.0). Hence for all
other values of CMN (ie 0.7 or 0.5) this implementation will use the values of C1
from DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F.

The program will use a default value of 1.0 for ‘kc’. However the user can also
input a custom value of ‘kc’ by setting the design parameter ‘KC’ to the desired
value. The user can also get the program to calculate the value of ‘kc’ automatically
by setting the value of the ‘KC’ parameter in the design input to 0. This will cause
the program to evaluate a value of C1 corresponding to the end conditions and the
Bending moment of the member and in turn calculate ‘kc’ as given in the NA. To
evaluate C1, the program will use the NCCI documents mentioned in section 4.2 of
this document.
Clause 6.3.2.4(1) B – Slenderness for flexural buckling
The UK NA specifies the value of λc0 for I, H channel or box section to be used in
equation 6.59 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 as 0.4.
Note: STAAD.Pro does not use this clause in the current implementation of
EC-3. Hence this clause will be ignored for the UK National Annex.
Clause 6.3.2.4(2)BModification factor ‘kfl’
The value of the modification factor kfl to be used in equation 6.60 of BS EN 1993-
1-1 to be as follows:
= 1.0 for hot rolled I sections
= 1.0 for welded I section with h/b ≤ 2
= 0.9 for other sections
Note: STAAD.Pro does not use this clause in the current implementation of
EC-3. Hence this clause will be ignored for the UK National Annex.
Clause 6.3.3(5) – Interaction factors kyy, kyz, kzy and kzz
The UK-NA recommends that the method in Annex A or Annex B of BS EN 1993-1-

1:2005 can be used to calculate the interaction factors for Cl. 6.3.3 checks in the
case of doubly symmetric sections. The proposed implementation will hence use
equations in Annex B of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate these interaction
factors for doubly symmetric sections. The current implementation of EC3 BS in
372 — STAAD.Pro
STAAD.pro uses the method in Annex B.
However for non-doubly symmetric sections, the UK NA gives the option of using
Annex B with some modifications as given in the NA. (Cl. NA-3.2 of the UK NA).
The UK NA requires additional checks to be done to check for the maximum
allowable values of λ and X to be used in equations 6.61 and 6.62 of BS EN 1993-
1-1:2005.
As per the UK NA, for non-doubly symmetric sections, the slenderness about the
weak axis (λy in STAAD) and the corresponding reduction factor χy should be taken
as the values from the highest values of slenderness (λ) among the flexural
buckling slenderness (λy), torsional slenderness (λ ) and torsional-flexural
T
slenderness (λ ) as given in Clauses 6.3.1.3 and 6.3.1.4 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
TF
Hence for non-doubly symmetric sections the program will calculate the critical
non-dimensional slenderness as:
λy = max
λ is calculated as λ = Ncr = min (N ,N ).

T T CrT crTF
The UK NA or EC3 does not however specify a method to evaluate NCrT or NcrTF.
Hence this implementation will use the method specified in the NCCI document
“SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling
modes” to calculate these. See section 4.9 below for details.
Note: The UK National Annex or EC3 does not deal with angle sections in specific
and hence this implementation will use the method used in the current EC3
implementation to deal with slenderness of angle sections. In the current
implementation this is done as per cl 4.7.10 of BS 5950. This proposed
implementation will still use the same method for single and double angle sections
to evaluate the slenderness.
Clause NA 3.2 of the UK NA also requires that “Where the section is not an I Section
or a hollow section and is a class1 or class 2 section, it will be treated as a class 3
section for the purposes of this clause”. Hence for all Class 1 or Class 2 cross
sections that are NOT I, H, SHS, RHS or CHS sections, the elastic properties will be
used for the purposes of 6.3.3 checks.

Clause 6.3.1.4 - Slenderness for torsional and torsional- flexural

buckling
Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the

non-dimensional slenderness λ , to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural
T
buckling checks. The current implementation of EC3 in STAAD.pro does not allow
for this clause as BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not provide equations to calculate
the elastic critical loads Ncr,T,F and Ncr,T (refer 6.3.14 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005).
The NCCI document “SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural
torsional buckling modes” provides methods to calculate the Ncr,TF and NcrT
factors and hence will to be included in the proposed implementation of the UK
NA.
The critical axial load for Torsional buckling is worked out as:
where, iy and iz are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z
(strong axis) respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is worked out as:
For details on these equations refer to the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU.
374 — STAAD.Pro
5B.4 (C) EC3 NA French National Annex
Purpose
Adds values from the French National Annex - titled Annexe Nationale a la NF EN
1993-1-1:2005 - for use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA
document makes small changes to the base document.
Description
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have

been dealt with in the French National Annex (hereafter referred to as FR-NA) and
that are relevant to the proposed implementation are:
l 3.2.1(1) Material properties

l 6.1(1) General
sections
l 6.3.2.4(1)B Slenderness limit λc0
l 6.3.2.4(2)B Modification factor ‘kfl’
l Annex A Members in bending and axial compression
l 6.3.1.4 Slenderness for torsional and torsional- flexural buckling
sections below refer to the corresponding clauses in the French-NA.
Clause 3.2.1(1) - Material Properties
The material strengths (i.e., - steel grade strengths) to be used with NF EN 1993-1-
1 is given in Table 3.1 of the code. The French National Annex however, specifies a
separate table (Table 3.1 NF) for the yield and tensile strengths of steel grades.

This new table replaces Table 3.1 in NF EN 1993-1-1:2005. Table 3.1 NF excludes
steel grades from standards EN 10210-1 and EN 10219-1 that are given in EC-3.
STAAD.Pro uses the steel grades and values from the table given in the National
Annex (i.e., - Table 3.1 NF). Table 3.1 NF is similar to table 3.1 in EC3, apart from
the ‘fu’ values for S 355 and S355 W grade steel.
If you specify a steel grade that is not given in the Annex Table 3.1 (NF) but is
present in Table 3.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005, this implementation will use the values
from Table 3.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005. The appropriate yield strength used (fy) will
be shown in the design output file.
376 — STAAD.Pro
Clause 6.1(1) – General
l Resistance of cross-sections - ΓM0 = 1.0

l Resistance of members to instability - ΓM1 = 1.0
l Resistance of cross sections to tension - ΓM2 = 1.25
STAAD.Pro sets the default values of the GM0, GM1 and GM2 parameters in the
design module to the values as:
GM0 = 1.0
GM1 = 1.0
GM2 = 1.25
Note: When NA 4 has been specified.
You may override these default values and set custom values to these parameters.
STAAD.Pro will ignore the specified value and use the default values as given
above.
Warning: The GB1 parameter (which, in fact was common to the base EC-3
and was a reminiscent of the previous DD ENV implementation of EC-3) has
been removed. Hence any legacy STAAD files that have the GB1 Parameter
defined will need to be revised to take out this parameter as it is no longer valid
as per the latest EN1993.

LTB checks
The French NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005
to calculate the imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks.

The calculation of the LTB reduction factor χLT, requires the calculation of the
“Elastic Critical Buckling Moment”, Mcr. The French NA gives a method to evaluate
Mcr in its “Annex MCR”. This implementation will make use of this method to
evaluate Mcr. Annex MCR however deals with the calculation of Mcr for doubly
symmetric sections. Hence this implementation will use this method only for
doubly symmetric sections. For mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about
the minor axis (i.e Tee sections) this implementation will use the method from the
NCCI document SN030a-EN-EU as given in the section below. For any other type
of section that is not dealt with by the Annex, this implementation will use the
method and tables given in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
1. Annex MCR

considered for this method in this implementation.
The equation to evaluate Mcr is given as :
conditions. The NCCI provides values for C1 and C2 for the different cases
as given in Table1 and Table 2 of the Annex. Table 1 deals with the condition
of a simply supported member with end moments and the value of C1 is
determined by the end moment ratio (Refer to the NA for details). Clause 3.2
of the National Annex however gives a formula to evaluate C1 as :
This formula however does not match the values given in Table 1 of the NA.
Hence this implementation will use the values of C1 from Table 1 if the end
moment ration (ψ) is exactly equal to the values of ψ in the table. For all
other cases this implementation will calculate the value of C1 from equation
(6) in the Annex.
378 — STAAD.Pro
The value of C2 will be determined from Table 2 of the Annex based on the
loading and end conditions (i.e the CMM parameter in STAAD).
The user will also have the option to specify specific values for C1 & C2 using
the new ‘C1’ and ‘C2’ parameters in the design input mode.
The French NA considers three separate loading conditions:

The first two cases and its variants can be defined using with the existing
CMM parameter values in STAAD.Pro. However the third condition cannot be
currently specified in the design input. Hence this implementation will
introduce two new values for CMM viz.
CMM 7:Member with varying end moments and uniform loading.
CMM 8: Member with varying end moments and central point load.
The load to moment ratio (μ) will then be used in the calculations will then be
used to calculate C1 and C2 as given in section 3.5 of Annex MCR (See Annex
MCR in the NA for details).
This implementation will also introduce a new parameter ‘MU’ to be specified

when using CMM = 7 or 8. The load to moment ratio (μ) to be used in the
calculations is to be input using the new ‘MU’ parameter. This implementation
will require that for the French National Annex if CMM = 7 or 8 has been
specified, the user should also either specify a value for ‘MU’ or input the
values for C1 and C2 using the ‘C1’ and/or ‘C2’ parameters directly.
Note: The new parameter MU will currently be applicable only in the

context of the French NA.

axial compression:

weak axis. Hence for this implementation the elastic critical moment for ‘Tee-
Sections’ will be worked out using the method in this NCCI.

Note: Though this method could also be applicable to mono-symmetric

built-up sections, STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to
specify/identify a mono-symmetric built-up section. Hence this
implementation will use this method only for Tee-Sections.
tables below:
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values
of C1, C2 and C3. The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the
member as a pin ended member with UDL along its span. This NCCI does not
380 — STAAD.Pro
however consider the “end moments and transverse loading” condition. The
user however can use the new ‘C1’, ‘C2’ and ‘C3’ parameters to input the
required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr.
Note: If ‘MU’ as well as C1, C2 and C3 have been specified, the program
will ignore MU and use the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. The
current implementation of EC3 in STAAD.Pro obtains these values from
Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Also, the NCCI document and Annex MCR of the FR-NA assume that the member
under consideration is free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping
restraints for the member( k = kw=1 .i.e., CMN parameter =1.0). Hence the above
methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which
have no warping restraints. For members with partial or end fixities (ie, CMN = 0.5
or CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients
in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents)
this implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term ‘zg’ in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the
point of application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the
cross section. The value of ‘zg’ is considered positive, if the load acts towards the
shear center and is negative if it acts away from the shear center. By default, the
program will assume that the load acts towards the shear center at a distance equal
to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The use will be allowed to modify
this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design
input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so
that the term ‘zg’ in the equation will have a value of zero.
Note: There is a separate method specified in the NCCI document “SN006a-

EN-EU” to calculate Mcr for cantilever beams. Again this document does not give
any specific formulae to evaluate the coefficients. Hence, this has not been

tion
The FR-NA provides equations to evaluate the λ and α factors given in clause
LT0 LT

6.3.2.3
For rolled doubly symmetric sections use:
Since EN 1993-1-1:2005 limits the value of λLT0 to 0.4, this implementation will
only allow a maximum value of 0.4 for λ .
LT0
For welded doubly symmetric sections use:
For other sections
And for all sections use β = 1.0
These equations and factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of NF EN 1993-1-1
to evaluate the Lateral Torsional Buckling reduction factor χ .
LT
The French NA specifies that the modification factor is to be obtained as per the
default method given in EC-3. Hence this implementation will use the existing
functionality to evaluate the correction factor ‘kc’ to be used in the modification
factor f.
The program uses a default value of 1.0 for ‘kc’. However the user can also input a
custom value of ‘kc’ by setting the design parameter ‘KC’ to the desired value. The
user can also get the program to calculate the value of ‘kc’ automatically by setting
the value of the ‘KC’ parameter in the design input to 0. This will cause the
program to evaluate ‘kc’ from table 6.6 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005. This will
correspond to the end conditions and the bending moment of the member (i.e the
value of CMM parameter specified). For CMM = 7 the program will choose the
value of ‘kc’ to be either 0.90 or 0.91 based on the end moment ratio. For CMM =
8 the program will choose the value of ‘kc’ to be either 0.77 or 0.82 based on the
end moment ratio.
An additional check will also be performed as given below:
382 — STAAD.Pro
The French Annex specifies that the modification factor is applicable only to
members that are free to rotate on plan (i.e., CMN =1.0). Hence for all other values
of CMN, this implementation will ignore ‘f’ and hence will use χ = χ .
LT,mod LT
Note: STAAD does not use this clause in the current implementation of EC-3.
Hence this clause will be ignored for the French National Annex.
Clause 6.3.2.4(2) BModification factor ‘kfl’
Hence this clause will be ignored for the French National Annex.
The French NA recommends the use of equations in Annex A of NF EN 1993-1-

1:2005 to calculate these interaction factors. The current implementation of EC3 BS
in STAAD.pro uses the method in Annex B. Hence the method in Annex A will be
added into this implementation.
The NA mentions that this method can be extended to singly symmetric I-Sections
(symmetric about the minor axis) if the elastic properties are used instead of the
plastic properties. However since STAAD does not have a provision to specify such
sections, this case will not be considered for this implementation.
The NA also mentions that torsional flexural buckling needs to be taken into
account in case of mono symmetric sections. Torsional flexural buckling will need
to be taken into account based on the method given in the NCCI document
“SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling
modes”. See section below for details.
The NA also recommends a lower limit as given below for the term Cmi,0 in table
A.2 of Annex A:

Clause 6.3.1.4 - Slenderness for torsional and torsional- flexural

buckling
Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the

non-dimensional slenderness λT, to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural
for this clause as NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not provide equations to calculate
the elastic critical loads Ncr,T,F and Ncr,T (refer 6.3.14 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005).
factors and hence will to be included in this implementation of the French NA.
For details on these equations refer to the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU.
384 — STAAD.Pro
5B.5 (C) EC3 NA Finnish National Annex
Purpose
Adds values from the Finnish National Annex - titled National Annex to Standard
SFS-EN 1993-1-1 - for use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA
Description
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have

been dealt with in the Finnish National Annex (hereafter referred to as SFS-NA) and
that are relevant to the proposed implementation are:

l 6.1(1) General
sections
l 6.3.2.4(1) B Slenderness limit λc0
l 6.3.2.4(2) B Modification factor ‘kfl’
sections below refer to the corresponding clauses in the Finnish-NA.
The material strengths (i.e., steel grade strengths) to be used with SFS-EN 1993-1-
1 are given in Table 3.1 of the code. These steel grade values are specified using
the SGR parameter (refer to table 5B.1(B) ).

The Finnish National Annex states in Cl. 3.1(2) that, apart from the steel grades
specified in Table 3.1 of SFS EN 1993-1-1, the following steel grades can also be
used:
l Steel grades S315MC, S355MC, S420MC and S460MC according to SFS-EN

10149-2
l Steel grades S260NC, S315NC, S355NC and S420NC according to SFS-EN
10149-3
These grades of steel can be specified by using the PY (Yield Strength) and FU
(Ultimate Strength) parameters in STAAD.Pro. Set these parameters to the
respective values as given in SFS-EN 10149-2/3 for the steel grades specified
above. The choice of the buckling curve to be used is based on the value of the
SGR parameter specified. The output will include the appropriate yield strength
used for design.

l Resistance of cross sections to tension - ΓM2 = 1.25
GM0 = 1.0
GM1 = 1.0
GM2 = 1.25
These parameters are reported in the design output.
386 — STAAD.Pro
above.

LTB checks
The Finnish NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of SFS EN 1993-1-
1:2005 to calculate the imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB)
checks.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor XLT, requires the calculation of the
‘Elastic Critical Buckling Moment’, Mcr. The Finnish National Annex does not specify
a particular method to calculate Mcr. Hence the calculation of Mcr has been based
on the following NCCI documents:

considered for this method. The equation to evaluate Mcr is given in the NCCI
as:

Table 5B.9 - Values of C for

1
end moment loading (for k=1)
ψ C
1
+1,00 1,00
+0,75 1,14
+0,50 1,31
+0,25 1,52
0,00 1,77
-0,25 2,05
-0,50 2,33
-0,75 2,57

STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment
diagram through the CMM parameter.

axial compression:

weak axis. Hence, the elastic critical moment for ‘Tee-Sections’ will be
worked out using the method in this NCCI.

388 — STAAD.Pro
tables below:
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of
C1, C2 and C3. The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as
a pin ended member with UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however
consider the “end moments and transverse loading” condition. The user
however can use the new ‘C1’, ‘C2’ and ‘C3’ parameters to input the required
values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr.
will ignore MU and use the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. STAAD.Pro
obtains these values from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.

consideration is free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for
the member ( k = kw = 1.0). STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions
using the CMN parameter for EC3. A value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of
CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above methods will be used only for
members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints
(i.e., CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or CMN
= 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD
ENV 1993-1-1:1992 – Annex F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI
documents) this implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-
1:1992 code.
point of application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of
the cross section. The value of ‘zg’ is considered positive, if the load acts towards
the shear center and is negative if it acts away from the shear center. By default,
the program will assume that the load acts towards the shear center at a distance
equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The use will be allowed to
modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the
design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the
section so that the term ‘zg’ in the equation will have a value of zero.

EN-EU” to calculate Mcr for cantilever beams. Again this document does not
give any specific formulae to evaluate the coefficients. Hence, this has not been

tion
The Finnish-NA provides the values for the terms λ and β factors given in clause
LT0
6.3.2.3(1) as follows:
For rolled doubly symmetric sections and hollow sections, use:
λ =0.4 and β = 0.75

LT0
For welded doubly symmetric sections and hollow sections use:
390 — STAAD.Pro
λ = 0.2 and β = 1.0
LT0
The Finnish NA specifies the following limits for choosing the buckling curves:
Table 5B.10 - Selection of lateral torsional buckling curve for cross sec-
tiosn using equation (6.57)
Cross-section Limits Buckling
Curve
(constant cross-section)
Rolled double symmetric I- and H- sections and h/b ≤ b

hot finished hollow sections. 2
c
2<
h/b
<3.1
Welded double symmetric I- section and H- sec- h/b ≤ c

tions and cold-formed hollow sections 2
d
2<
h/b <
3.1
The NA says that for all other cases the rules given in Cl 6.3.2.2 should be used.
Hence even for rolled or welded doubly symmetric sections with h/b ratio ≥ 3.1,
this implementation will resort to checks as per clause 6.3.2.2.
These equations and factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of SFS-EN 1993-1-1
LT
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 — Calculation of LTB Reduction factor, χ

LT
as per Finnish NA
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005), both give equations to evaluate
the LTB reduction factor χ to be used in eqn. 6.55 of SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
LT

Cl. 6.3.2.2 states “Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members
of constant cross section the value of χ should be determined from...”. Hence in
LT
the implementation of EC3 (and the Finnish Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the
program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evaluate χ . For any case that is not
LT
dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate χ .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Finnish National Annex gives equations to evaluate the
imperfection factors to be used for various section types. (See above). Hence for
all cases dealt with by the equations in the Finnish NA, this implementation will use
Cl 6.3.2.3 to evaluate χ .
LT
Cl.6.3.2.3, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate χ .
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment,Mcr, (used to evaluate the non dimensional
slenderness) will be worked out as given above. Since this implementation uses
the NCCIs mentioned in the sections above, only end restraint conditions
corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See section above) will be considered.
For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the
method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
STAAD.Pro uses the value of the modification factor f = 1.0 as given in the Finnish
NA.
392 — STAAD.Pro
Hence this clause will be ignored for the Finnish National Annex.
Clause 6.3.2.4(2) B Modification factor ‘kfl’
Hence this clause will be ignored for the Finnish National Annex.
The Finnish NA recommends the use of equations in Annex A or Annex B of SFS-EN

1993-1-1 to calculate these interaction factors. STAAD.Pro uses the method in
Annex B by default. This implementation of the Finnish NA will also use Annex B for
Cl.6.3.3 checks.
Clause 6.3.1.4 - Slenderness for torsional and torsional- flexural buck-

ling
Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the
for this clause as SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not provide equations to calculate
the elastic critical loads Ncr,T,F and Ncr,T (refer 6.3.14 of SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005).
factors and hence will to be included in this implementation of the Finnish NA.

The program will only consider Channel Sections and Tee- sections while working
out the critical torsional and Flexural Torsional buckling loads as per Cl 6.3.1.4.
For details on these equations, refer to the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU.
5B.6 (C) EC3 NA Polish National Annex
Purpose
Adds values from the Polish National Annex - titled National Annex to Standard
PN-EN 1993-1-1 - for use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA
Description

have been dealt with in the Polish National Annex (hereafter referred to as PN-NA)
and that are relevant to the proposed implementation are:

l 6.1(1) General
sections
394 — STAAD.Pro
sections below refer to the corresponding clauses in the Polish-NA.
The material strengths (i.e., steel grade strengths) to be used with PN-EN 1993-1-1
are given in Table 3.1 of the code. The Polish National Annex states in Cl. 3.1(2)
that the steel grades to be used will be based on Table 3.1 of PN EN 1993-1-1.
These steel grade values are specified using the SGR parameter (refer to table
5B.1(B) ).

l Resistance of cross sections to tension - ΓM2 = minimum of 1.1 or 0.9 x fu/fy
GM0 = 1.0
GM1 = 1.0
STAAD.Pro determines the value for GM2 based on the value of the SGR design
parameter or the fy and/or fu values specified using the PY and FU design
parameters. If any of these parameters have not been specified, the program will
use the SGR parameter to determine fy or fu and use them to evaluate GM2. Thus,
GM2 is taken as the minimum of:
l 1.1, or
l 0.9 x (fu/fy)
Where:

fu is the ultimate steel strength
fy is the yield strength of steel
These parameters are reported in the design output.
above.

LTB checks
The Polish NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of PN EN 1993-1-1:2005
to calculate the imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor XLT, requires the calculation of the
‘Elastic Critical Buckling Moment’, Mcr. The Polish National Annex does not specify
a particular method to calculate Mcr. Hence the calculation of Mcr has been based
on the following NCCI documents:

considered for this method. The equation to evaluate Mcr is given in the
NCCI as:
396 — STAAD.Pro
Table 5B.11 - Values of C for
1
end moment loading (for k=1)
ψ C
1
+1,00 1,00
+0,75 1,14
+0,50 1,31
+0,25 1,52
0,00 1,77
-0,25 2,05
-0,50 2,33
-0,75 2,57

STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment
diagram through the CMM parameter.

axial compression:

weak axis. Hence, the elastic critical moment for ‘Tee-Sections’ will be
evaluated using the method in this NCCI.


tables below:
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values
of C1, C2 and C3. The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the
member as a pin ended member with UDL along its span. This NCCI does not
however consider the “end moments and transverse loading” condition. The
user however can use the new ‘C1’, ‘C2’ and ‘C3’ parameters to input the
required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr.
will ignore MU and use the user input values of C1, C2 and C3.
398 — STAAD.Pro
STAAD.Pro obtains these values from Annex F of DD ENV version of
1993-1-1:1992.
consideration is free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for
the member ( k = kw = 1.0). STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions
using the CMN parameter for EC3. A value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of
CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above methods will be used only for
members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints
(i.e., CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or CMN
= 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD
ENV 1993-1-1:1992 – Annex F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents)
this implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
point of application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the
cross section. The value of ‘zg’ is considered positive, if the load acts towards the
shear center and is negative if it acts away from the shear center. By default, the
program will assume that the load acts towards the shear center at a distance equal
to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The use will be allowed to modify
this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design
input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so
that the term ‘zg’ in the equation will have a value of zero.

EN-EU” to calculate Mcr for cantilever beams. Again this document does not give
any specific formulae to evaluate the coefficients. Hence, this has not been

tion
The Polish-NA provides the values for the terms λ and β factors given in clause
LT0
6.3.2.3(1) as follows:
For all sections, use:

λ =0.4 and β = 0.75

LT0
The Polish NA specifies the use of uses table 6.5 to work out the buckling curves
for use in Cl. 6.3.2.3. Hence table 6.5 in PN-EN 1993-1-1 will be used for this.
These equations and factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of PN-EN 1993-1-1
LT
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 — Calculation of LTB Reduction factor,

χ as per Polish NA
LT
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005) both give equations to evaluate
the LTB reduction factor χ to be used in eqn. 6.55 of PN EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states “Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members
of constant cross section the value of χ should be determined from...”. Hence in
LT
the implementation of EC3 (and the Polish Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the
program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evaluate χ . For any case that is not
LT
dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate χ .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Polish National Annex gives equations to evaluate the
imperfection factors to be used for various section types. (See above). Hence for
all cases dealt with by the equations in the Polish NA, this implementation will use
Cl 6.3.2.3 to evaluate χ .
LT
Cl.6.3.2.3, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate χ .
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment,Mcr, (used to evaluate the non dimensional
slenderness) will be evaluated as given above. Since this implementation uses the
NCCIs mentioned in the sections above, only end restraint conditions
corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See section above) will be considered.
For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the
method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
400 — STAAD.Pro
STAAD.Pro uses the value of the modification factor f as per eqn 6.58 of PN-EN
1993-1-1. The correction factor ‘kc’ will be evaluated as:
Kc = √(CmLT)
Where:
CmLT is the equivalent uniform moment factor from table B.3 of PN-EN
1993-1-1. CmLT will be evaluated based on the end conditions of the
member and the shape of the bending moment diagram. However, if
the KC parameter has been used, then the program will use the
specified value.
The Polish NA recommends the equations in Annex B of PN-EN 1993-1-1 to

calculate these interaction factors. The current implementation of EC3 BS in
STAAD.pro uses the method in Annex B by default. The proposed implementation
of the Polish NA will also use Annex B for Cl.6.3.3 checks.
The Polish NA also gives two additional simplified checks. This implementation will
provide for these additional checks as well. However as they are intended as
optional checks, by default, the program will not perform these checks. However,
the user can invoke these checks by using the PLG parameter. This parameter can
have the following values:
l PLG = 0 (default) : Ignore additional Cl. 6.3.3 checks

l PLG = 1 : Include additional Cl. 6.3.3 checks.
If the value of the PLG parameter is set to 1, the following two checks will be
performed as per Cl. NA.20.(2) and NA.20(3) respectively:

l Cl. NA.20.(2): The following condition will be checked
n/ χ and + C m /χ + C mz m with ≤ 1- Δ (I = y or z)
my y LT 0
where:
n = N /N
Ed Rd
m = max M (+ Δ M )/M ; m = max M (+ Δ M
y y,Ed y, Ed y, Rd z ,Z Ed ,
)/M
Ed Z Rd,
χ and –buckling factor,
χ - LTB factor
LT
C - moment factor from table B 3 of PN EN 1993-1-1,
m
Δ -correction factor (estimation of maximum reduction) and will
0
be worked out as:
Δ = 0,1 + 0,2 (w – 1), przy czym w = W /W ,

0 i i pl,i el,i
or
Δ = 0,1 – in case of class 3 and 4 sections.

0
l Cl. NA.20.(3): This condition will only be checked for circular hollow
sections.
n/χ + [(k m )2 + (C m )2] 1/2 ≤ 1 (i,j =y,z)

i ii i mj j
where:
k - the interaction factor from table B.1 of PN-EN 1993-1-1
and n, m, Cmj are as above.
If the PLG parameter has been set to 1, the maximum among the following ratios
will be taken as being critical for Cl 6.3.3:
6.3.3: Eqn6.61
6.3.3: Eqn6.62
NA.20(2) and
NA.20(3)
If however PLG has been set to 0 or not specified at all, the program will ignore
the last two checks in the list above.
402 — STAAD.Pro
Clause 6.3.1.4 - Slenderness for torsional and torsional- flexural buck-
ling
Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of PN EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the

for this clause as PN EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not provide equations to calculate the
elastic critical loads Ncr,T,F and Ncr,T (refer 6.3.14 of PN EN 1993-1-1:2005).
factors and hence will to be included in this implementation of the Polish NA.
The critical axial load for Torsional buckling is evaluated as:
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
The program will only consider Channel Sections and Tee- sections while working
out the critical torsional and Flexural Torsional buckling loads as per Cl 6.3.1.4. For
details on these equations, refer to the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU.

404 — STAAD.Pro
European Codes - Timber Design Per EC 5: Part
1-1
The Timber Design facility as per EC5 in STAAD is based on the European Standard
Eurocode 5: Design of Timber Structures - Part 1-1 - General - Common rules and
rules for buildings. Principles of Limit States Design of Timber Structures are
adopted as specified in the code.
The application is limited to the PRISMATIC rectangular shapes only. There is no

Eurocode-specific timber section database / library consisting of pre-defined
shapes for analysis or for design. The feature of member selection is thus not
applicable to this code.
The design philosophy of this specification is based on the concept of limit state
design. Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the
limit states at which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major
categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate and serviceability. The primary
considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability, while that in
a uniform reliability is achieved for all timber structures under various loading
acceptably remote.
without exceeding the limit states of strength, stability and serviceability.
of EC 5. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying
concepts and assumptions is available in the specification document.

European Codes - Timber Design Per EC 5: Part 1-1
STAAD defines the major axis of the cross-section as zz and the minor axis as yy.
The longitudinal axis of the member is defined as x and joins the start joint of the
member to the end with the same positive direction.
EC5, however, defines the principal cross-section axes in reverse to that of

STAAD, but the longitudinal axis is defined in the same way. Both of these axes
definitions follow the orthogonal right hand rule.
Figure 5.6 - STAAD and EC5 axis conventions
Determination of Factors
A. Kmod – Modification factor taking into account of Load-duration (LDC) and

Moisture-content (Service Class - SCL). Reference Table 3.1 of EC-5-2004.
For “Solid Timber”, the values are incorporated in the program.
B. γ – Partial factor for Material Property values. Reference Table 2.3 of EC-5-
m
2004.
For “Solid Timber”, the value of γ = 1.3 is incorporated in the program.

m
C. Kh – Size Factor.
For members, subjected to tension, whose maximum c/s dimension is less

than the reference width in tension the characteristic strength in tension
(ft0k) is to be increased by the factor Kh.
406 — STAAD.Pro
For members, subjected to bending, whose depth is less than reference depth
in bending, the characteristic strength in bending (fmk) is to be increased by
the factor Kh.
As per clause 3.2(3) of EC 5- 2004, for rectangular solid timber with a

characteristic timber density ρ ≤ 700 kg/m3 the reference depth in bending
k
or the reference width (maximum cross-sectional dimension) is 150 mm.
The value of Kh = Minimum of {(150/h) 0.2 and 1.3) for such solid timber is
incorporated in the software. Please refer clause numbers 3.3 and 3.4 for the
value of Kh for Glued laminated timber and Laminated veener lumber
respectively.
D. KC90 – Factor taking into account the load configuration, possibility of

splitting and degree of compressive deformation.
For members, subjected to compression, perpendicular to the direction of

grain alignment, this factor should be taken into account. Default value of 1 is
used in STAAD.Pro. User may override the value. Please refer clause 6.1.5 of
EC-5-2004 in this regard.
E. Km – Factor considering re-distribution of bending stress in cross section.
For members, subjected to bending, this factor is taken into account for stress
checking. For rectangular section the value of Km is 0.7, and this value is
incorporated in STAAD.Pro. User may override the value. Please refer clause
6.1.6 of EC-5-2004 in this regard.
F. Kshape – Factor depending on shape of cross section.
For members, subjected to torsional force, design torsional stress should be

less than equal design shear strength multiplied by the factor Kshape. This
factor is determined by STAAD.Pro internally using the guidelines of clause
6.1.8 of EC-5-2004.

5C.2 Analysis Methodology

Table 5C.1 - EC5 Nomenclature
Symbol Description
S Design tensile stress parallel (at zero degree) to grain alignment.
t0d
S Design tensile stress perpendicular (at 90 degrees) to grain
t90d
alignment.
S Design compressive stress parallel to grain alignment.
c0d
S Design compressive stress perpendicular to grain alignment.
c90d
S Design bending stress about zz axis.
mzd
S Design bending stress about yy axis.
myd
S Design shear stress.
vd
S Design torsional stress.
tor_d
F Design tensile strength - parallel to the grain alignment.
t0d
F Design tensile strength - perpendicular to the grain alignment.
t90d
F Design compressive strength - parallel to the grain alignment.
c0d
F Design compressive strength - perpendicular to the grain alignment.
c90d
F Design bending strength - about zz-axis.
mzd
F Design bending strength - about yy-axis.
myd
F Design shear strength about yy axis.
vd
RATIO Permissible ratio of stresses as input using the RATIO parameter.
The default value is 1.

l ,l Slenderness ratios corresponding to bending about zz axis.
z rel,z
l ,l Slenderness ratios corresponding to bending about yy axis.
y rel,y
E Fifth percentile value of modulus of elasticity parallel to grain.
0,05
G Fifth percentile value of shear modulus parallel to grain.
0,05
I Second moment of area about the strong z-axis.
z
I Second moment of area about the weak y-axis.
y
I Torsional moment of inertia.
tor
f Characteristic bending strength.
mk
b, h Width and depth of beam.
408 — STAAD.Pro
Equations for Characteristic Values of Timber Species as per Annex-A of EN
338:2003
The following equations were used to determine the characteristic values:
For a particular Timber Strength Class (TSC), the following characteristic strength
values are required to compute the other related characteristic values.
i. Bending Strength – f
m,k
ii. Mean Modulus of Elasticity in bending – E
0, mean
iii. Density - ρ
k
SI Property Symbol Wood Type

No.
Softwood Hardwood
(C) (D)
1. Tensile Strength parallel to f 0.6 * f
t,0,k m,k
grain
2. Tensile Strength f Minimum of {0.6 and
t,90,k
perpendicular to grain (0.0015*r )}
k
3. Compressive Strength f 5 * (f ) 0.45
c,0,k m,k
parallel to grain
4. Compressive Strength f 0.007*r 0.0015*r
c,90,k k k
perpendicular to grain
5. Shear Strength f Minimum of {3.8 and
v,k
(0.2*f 0.8)}
m,k
6. Modulus of Elasticity E 0.67* 0.84*
0,05
parallel to grain E E
0,mean 0,mean
7. Mean Modulus of Elasticity E E /30 E /15
90,mean 0,mean 0,mean
perpendicular to grain
8. Mean Shear Modulus G E /16
mean 0,mean
9. Shear Modulus G E /16
0,05 0,05
The values of the characteristic strengths computed using the above equations,
may differ with the tabulated values in Table-1 of EN 338:2003. However, in all
such cases, the values obtained from the provided equations are treated as actual
and is used by the program, as the values of Table-1 are based on these equations.

Design values of Characteristic Strength
As per clause 2.4.1, Design values of a strength property shall be calculated as:
X = K mod·(X /γ )
d k m
Where:
X is design value of strength property

d
X characteristic value of strength property
k
γ is partial factor for material properties.
m
The member resistance in timber structure is calculated in STAAD according to the
procedures outlined in EC5. This depends on several factors such as cross
sectional properties, different load and material factors, timber strength class, load
duration class, service class and so on. The methodology adopted in STAAD for
calculating the member resistance is explained here.
Check for Tension stresses
If the direction of applied axial tension is parallel to the direction of timber grain
alignment, the following formula should be checked per Equation 6.1 of EC-5
2004:
S /F ≤ RATIO
t0d t0d
If the direction of applied axial tension is perpendicular to the direction of timber
grain alignment, the following formula should be checked:
S /F ≤ RATIO
t90d t90d
Check for Compression stresses
If the direction of applied axial compression is parallel to the direction of timber

grain alignment, the following formula should be checked per Equation 6.2 of EC-
5 2004:
S /F ≤ RATIO
c0d c0d
410 — STAAD.Pro
If the direction of applied axial compression is perpendicular to the direction of
timber grain alignment, the following formula should be checked per Equation 6.3
of EC-5 2004:
S /(F ·Kc90) ≤ RATIO

t0d t0d
Check for Bending stresses
If members are under bending stresses, the following conditions should be

satisfied per Equations 6.11 and 6.12 of EC-5 2004.
Note: In STAAD z-z axis is the strong axis.
(S /F ) + Km·(S /F ) ≤ RATIO
mzd mzd myd myd
Km·(S /F ) + (S /F ) ≤ RATIO
mzd mzd myd myd
Check for Shear stresses
Horizontal stresses are calculated and checked against allowable values per
Equation 6.13 of EC-5 2004:
S /F ≤ RATIO
vd vd
Check for Torsional stresses
Members subjected to torsional stress should satisfy Equation 6.14 of EC-5 2004:
S /(Kshape·F ) ≤ RATIO
tor_d tor_d
Check for combined Bending and Axial tension
Members subjected to combined action of bending and axial tension stress should
satisfy Equations 6.17 and 6.18 of EC-5 2004:
(S /F ) + (S /F ) + Km·(S /F ) ≤ RATIO

t0d t0d mzd mzd myd myd
(S /F ) + Km·(S /F ) + (S /F ) ≤ RATIO
t0d t0d mzd mzd myd myd

Check for combined Bending and axial Compression
If members are subjected to bending and axial compression stress, Equations 6.19
and 6.20 of EC-5 2004 should be satisfied:
(S /F )2 + (S /F ) + Km·(S /F ) ≤ RATIO

c0d c0d mzd mzd myd myd
(S /F )2 + Km·(S /F ) + (S /F ) ≤ RATIO
Stability check
A. Column Stability check
The relative slenderness ratios should be calculated per Equations 6.21 and
6.22 of EC-5 2004.
λ = λ /π·(S /E )1/2
rel,z z c0k 0,05
λ = λ /π·(S /E )1/2
rel,y y c0k 0,05
If both λ and λ are less than or equal to 0.3 the following conditions
rel,z rel,y
should be satisfied:
(S /F )2 + (S /F ) + Km·(S /F ) ≤ RATIO

(S /F )2 + Km·(S /F ) + (S /F ) ≤ RATIO
In other cases, the conditions in Equations 6.23 and 6.24 of EC-5 2004
should be satisfied.
S /(Kcz·F ) + (S /F ) + Km·(S /F ) ≤ RATIO

S /(Kcy·F ) + Km·(S /F ) + (S /F ) ≤ RATIO
Where (Equations 6.25 through 6.28 of EC-5 2004):
412 — STAAD.Pro
Kcz = 1/{K + [(K )2 - (λ )2]1/2}
z z rel,z
Kcy = 1/{K + [(K )2 - (λ )2]1/2}
y zy rel,y
Kz = 0.5·[1 + β ·(λ - 0.3) + (λ )2]
c rel,z rel,z
Ky = 0.5·[1 + β ·(λ - 0.3) + (λ )2]
c rel,y rel,y
The value of β incorporated in the software is the one for solid timber (i.e.,
c
0.2).
B. Beam Stability check
If members are subjected to only a moment about the strong axis z, the
stresses should satisfy Equation 6.33 of EC-5 2004:
S /(Kcrit·F ) ≤ RATIO
mzd mzd
Where a combination of moment about the strong z-axis and compressive
force exists, the stresses should satisfy Equation 6.35 of EC-5 2004 (ref. to
Equations 6.32 and 6.34 of the same):
[S /(Kcrit·F )] 2 + S /(Kcz·F ) ≤ RATIO

mzd mzd c0d c0d
Where:
Kcrit = 1.0 when λ ≤ 0.75

rel,m
Kcrit = 1.56 - 0.75·λ when 0.75 < λ ≤ 1.4
rel,m rel,m
Kcrit = 1/( λ )2 when 1.4 < λ
rel,m rel,m
λ = (f /S )1/2
rel,m mk m,crit
For hardwood, use Equation 6.30 of EC-5 2004:
S = π·(E ·I ·G ·I )1/2/(l ·W )
m,crit 0,05 y 0,05 tor ef z
For softwood, use Equation 6.31 of EC-5 2004:
S = 0.78·b2·E /(h·l )
m,crit 0,05 ef

Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the program. They are
set to default values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular
structure.

Depending on the model being designed, the user may have to change some or all
of the parameter default values. Some parameters are unit dependent and when
altered, the new setting must be compatible with the active “unit” specification.
Table 5C.2 - Timber Design EC 5: Part 1-1 Parameters

Name Value

TIMBER EC5

Technical Reference
Manual.
ALPHA 0.0 Angle of inclination of load

to the grain alignment. (Ref.
Cl.6.1.1, Cl.6.1.2, Cl.6.1.3,
Cl.6.1.4)
l 0.0 = Load parallel to

grain,
l 90.0 = Load Per-
pendicular to grain
414 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
DFF None “Deflection Length” / Max.
Allowable Net Final Local
Deflection.
In this case, deflection check

will be performed, if both
the parameters SERV and
DFF are present with specific
values. For appropriate
range of values, please refer
Cl.7.2 (Table 7.2)
DJ1 Start node number for a
physical member under
consideration for Deflection
Check.
DJ2 End node number for a
physical member under
consideration for Deflection
Check.


Name Value
KC90 1.0 Factor taking into account
the load configuration,
possibility of splitting and
degree of compressive
deformation. (Ref. Cl.6.1.5-
(2))
l Range: 1.0 ≤ KC90 ≤

4.0
l Other than the default
value, user may spec-
ify any value within
the range, depending
on load-position,
load-dispersion, con-
tact length at support
locations etc.
KLEF 1.0 Effective Length Factor to
check Lateral Torsional
(Member
Buckling. (Ref. Table 6.1)
Length)
Span of the beam
depending on the support
conditions and load
configurations. The user will
put the appropriate value
from the Table 6.1.
Required only for MTYP has

a value of 1 (Beam).
416 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
KLY 1.0 Effective Length Factor for
Local-y-axis. (Ref. Cl.6.3.2),
(Member
for the computation of the
Length)
relative slenderness ratios.
KLZ 1.0 Effective Length Factor for
Local-z-axis. (Ref. Cl.6.3.2),
(Member
for the computation of the
Length)
relative slenderness ratios.
LDC 1 Load Duration Class (Ref.
Cl.2.3.1.2), required to get
the K-MOD value from Table
– 3.1.
1. Permanent action
2. Long term action
3. Medium term action

4. Short term action
5. Instantaneous action


Name Value
MTYP 0 Member Type:
Beam/Column. (Ref.
Cl.6.3.2, Cl.6.3.3)
0. Not defined by the

user – checks both
clauses (Default).
1. Beam Member
2. Column Member
This information is required

to find which stability check
will be performed as per the
Cl 6.3 according to the
Member Type.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual to
allowable value.
SCL 3 Service Class (Ref.
Cl.2.3.1.3)
1. = Class 1, Moisture
content <= 12%
content <= 20%
content > 20%
418 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
SERV None Defines the load case
numbers – those are to be
considered for serviceability
(deflection) check.
l The list of this param-

eter must contain only
the valid load-case
numbers.
l Deflection checks will
be performed only on
those load-case
results.
l If this parameter is not
provided, then in-spite
of the presence of the
parameter DFF –the
deflection check will
NOT be performed.
TRACK 0 Degree/Level of Details of
design output results.
1. Print the design out-

put at the minimal
detail level
put at the intermediate
detail level
put that the maximum
detail level


Name Value
TSC 6 (C24) Timber Strength Class (Ref.
Reference EN338 – 2003)
Softwood: 1 = C14, 2 =
C16, 3 = C18, 4 = C20, 5 =
C22, 6 = C24, 7 = C27, 8
= C30, 9 = C35, 10 = C40,
11 = C45, 12 = C50.
Hardwood: 13 = D30, 14
= D35, 15 = D40, 16 =
D50, 17 = D60, 18 = D70.
This TSC definition will

calculate the
corresponding characteristic
strength values using the
equations as given in BS-
EN-338, Annex - A.
5C.4 Verification Problems
Verification Problem No. 1 - Timber Column
Problem
A Timber Column of length 1.0 meter, having c/s dimension of 73 mm X 198 mm,
is subjected to an axial compressive force of 50.0 kN. Design the member for the
ultimate limit state.
Material properties:
Timber class: C24
Service classes: Class 2, moisture content ≤ 20%
Load duration classes: Medium-term
420 — STAAD.Pro
Cross section properties:
Length of the member is 1 m.
Rectangular cross section, b = 73 mm, h = 198 mm,
Effective cross sectional area A = 14,454 mm²,
Radius of gyration of cross section about y-axis r = 21 mm,

y
Radius of gyration of cross section about z-axis r = 57 mm,
z
Section modulus of cross section about z-axis: W = 4.770x105 mm³
z
Section modulus of cross section about y-axis: W = 1.759x105 mm³
y
Solution
Characteristic material properties for timber:
Modification factor Kmod = 0.80 …from table 3.1
Material factors γ = 1.30 … from table 2.3

m
f = 21.00 N/mm²
c0k
F = (Kmod·f )/γ = (0.80·21.00)/1.30 = 12.92 N/mm² [Cl 2.4.1(1)P]
c0d c0k m
Cross section loads:
F = 50.000 kN
x
Compression parallel to the grain:
S = (1000xF )/A = (1000x50.000)/14454 = 3.46N/mm² < 12.92N/mm²

c0d x
(F )
c0d
The ratio of actual compressive stress to allowable compressive strength:
S /F = 3.46 / 12.92 = 0.268 < 1.0 [Cl. 6.1.4.(1)P]

c0d c0d
Check for Slenderness:
Slenderness ratios:
λ = (1000/57) = 17.54
z
λ = (1000/21) = 47.62
y
E 1.1031 kN/m2
0,mean =

As timber grade is C24 (i.e., Soft Wood)
E = 0.67·E = 0.739 kN/m2

0,05 0,mean
[Annex A,EN 338:2003]
λ = λ /π·(f /E )1/2 = 17.54/π(21.00/0.739)1/2 = 0.298

rel,z z c0k 0,05
λ = λ /π·(f /E )1/2 = 47.62/π(21.00/0.739)1/2 = 0.809
rel,y y c0k 0,05
Since, λ is greater than 0.3, following conditions should be satisfied:
rel,y
Where:
Kz = 0.5·[1 + β ·(λ - 0.3) + (λ )2] = 0.50·[1 + 0.2(0.298 - 0.3)

c rel,z rel,z
+ (0.298)2] = 0.541
Ky = 0.5·[1 + β ·(λ - 0.3) + (λ )2] = 0.50·[1 + 0.2(0.809 - 0.3)

c rel,y rel,y
+ (0.809)2] = 0.878
Kcz = 1/{K + [(K )2 - (λ )2]1/2} = 1/{0.541 + [(0.541)2 - (0.298)2]1/2}=

z z rel,z
1.008
Kcy = 1/{K + [(K )2 - (λ )2]1/2} = 1/{0.878 + [(0.878)2 - (0.809)2]1/2}

y zy rel,y
= 0.820
For Rectangular cross section Km = 0.70. The member is subjected to

Compression only, so actual bending stress is zero.
S /(Kcz·F ) + (S /F ) + Km·(S /F ) = 3.46/(1.008·12.92)

+ 0.0 + 0.0 = 0.268 + 0.0 + 0.0 = 0.266
S /(Kcy·F ) + Km·(S /F ) + (S /F ) = 3.46 /(0.820·12.92)

+ 0.0 + 0.0 = 0.326 + + 0.0 + 0.0 = 0.326
Hence the critical ratio is 0.326 < 1.0 and the section is safe.
422 — STAAD.Pro
Comparison
Table 5C.3 - EC 5: Part 1-1 Verification Problem 1
Source Critical Ratio (Cl. 6.3.2)
Reference 0.326
STAAD.Pro 0.327
Difference Negligible
Input File
The following file is included AS C:\SPROV8I\STAAD\EXAMP\EUR\EC5 VER
1.STD.
STAAD SPACE
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 1.0 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC WOOD
E 1.10316E+007
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 0.00231749
ALPHA 5.5E-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL WOOD MEMB 1
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 PRIS YD 0.198 ZD 0.073
SUPPORTS

1 FIXED
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -50
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE TIMBER EC5
ALPHA 0 ALL
LDC 3 ALL
SCL 2 ALL
TSC 6 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The member checking part of the output file:
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (EC5 )
***********************
ING/
FX MY MZ LOCA-
TION
=======================================================================
1 PRIS ZD = 0.073 YD = 0.198
PASS CL.6.3.2 0.327 1
50.00 C 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|-------------------------------------------------------------------
-------|
| AX = 0.01 IY = 0.00 IZ = 0.00
|
| LEZ = 1.00 LEY = 1.00
|
|
|
424 — STAAD.Pro
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (NEW MMS)
|
| FBY = 14.769 FBZ = 14.769
|
| FC = 12.859
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES : (NEW MMS)
|
| fby = 0.000 fbz = 0.000
|
| fc = 3.459
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------
------|
Problem
A Timber Column of length 1.0 meter, having c/s dimension of 73 mm X 198 mm, is
subjected to an axial compressive force of 5.0 kN and moments of 2.0 kN.m and
1.0 kN.m about its major and minor axes respectively. Design the member for the
ultimate limit state.
Material properties:
Timber Strength Class: C24
Service classes: Class 2, moisture content <=20%
Load duration: Medium-term
Cross section properties:
Length of the member is 1 m.
Rectangular cross section, b = 73 mm, h = 198 mm,
Effective cross sectional area A = 14454 mm²,
Radius of gyration of cross section about y-axis r = 21 mm,

y
Radius of gyration of cross section about z-axis r = 57 mm,
z
Section modulus of cross section about z-axis: W = 4.770x105 mm³
z
Section modulus of cross section about y-axis: W = 1.759x105 mm³
y

Solution
Characteristic material properties for timber:
Modification factor Kmod = 0.80 …from table 3.1
Material factors γ = 1.30 … from table 2.3

m
f = 21.00 N/mm²
c0k
E = 7370 N/mm2
0,05
F = (Kmod·f )/γ = (0.80·21.00)/1.30 = 12.92 N/mm² [Cl 2.4.1(1)P]
c0d c0k m
f = 24.00 N/mm²
myk
F = Kmod·f /γ = (0.80x24.00)/1.30 = 14.77N/mm²
myd myk m
f = 24.00 N/mm²
mzk
F = Kmod·f /γ = (0.80x24.00)/1.30 = 14.77N/mm²
mzd mzk m
Cross section loads:
F = 5.000 kN
x
M = 2.000 kN·m
z
M = 1.000 kN·m
y
Check for Slenderness:
Slenderness ratios:
λ = (1000/57) = 17.54
z
λ = (1000/21) = 47.62
y
λ = λ /π·(f /E )1/2 = 17.54/π(21.00/7370)1/2 = 0.298
rel,z z c0k 0,05
λ = λ /π·(f /E )1/2 = 47.62/π(21.00/7370)1/2 = 0.809
rel,y y c0k 0,05
Since, λ is greater than 0.3, following conditions should be satisfied [Cl
rel,y
6.3.2.3]:

Where:
426 — STAAD.Pro
Kz = 0.5·[1 + β ·(λ - 0.3) + (λ )2] = 0.50·[1 + 0.2(0.298 - 0.3)
c rel,z rel,z
+ (0.298)2] = 0.541
Ky = 0.5·[1 + β ·(λ - 0.3) + (λ )2] = 0.50·[1 + 0.2(0.809 - 0.3)

c rel,y rel,y
+ (0.809)2] = 0.878
Kcz = 1/{K + [(K )2 - (λ )2]1/2} = 1/{0.541 + [(0.541)2 - (0.298)2]1/2}=

z z rel,z
1.008
Kcy = 1/{K + [(K )2 - (λ )2]1/2} = 1/{0.878 + [(0.878)2 - (0.809)2]1/2}

y zy rel,y
= 0.820
For Rectangular cross section Km = 0.70.
S = (1000·F /A) = (1000·5.000)/14454 = 0.35 N/mm²

c0d x
S = (106·M )/W = (106·2.000)/(4.770x105) = 4.19 N/mm²
mzd z z
S = (106·M )/W = (106·1.000)/(1.759x105) = 5.69 N/mm²
myd y y
Combined stress ratio:
S /(Kcz·F ) + (S /F ) + Km·(S /F ) = 0.35/(1.008·12.92)

+ 4.19/14.77 + 0.70(5.69/14.77) = 0.027 + 0.283 + 0.269 = 0.266
S /(Kcy·F ) + Km·(S /F ) + (S /F ) = 0.35 /(0.820·12.92)

+ 0.70(4.19/14.77) + 5.69/14.77 = 0.033 + 0.385 + 0.198 = 0.616
Hence the critical ratio is 0.616 < 1.0 and the section is safe.
Comparison
Table 5C.4 - EC 5: Part 1-1 Verification Problem 2
Source Critical Ratio (Cl. 6.3.2)
Reference 0.616
STAAD.Pro 0.616
Difference None
Input File
The following file is included AS C:\SPROV8I\STAAD\EXAMP\EUR\EC5 VER
2.STD.

STAAD SPACE
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 1 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC WOOD
E 1.10316E+007
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 0.00231749
ALPHA 5.5E-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL WOOD MEMB 1
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 PRIS YD 0.198 ZD 0.073
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
JOINT LOAD
2 FY -5.0 MX 1.0 MZ 2.0
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE TIMBER EC5
ALPHA 0 ALL
LDC 3 ALL
SCL 2 ALL
TSC 6 ALL
428 — STAAD.Pro
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The member checking part of the output file:
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (EC5 )
***********************
ING/
FX MY MZ LOCA-
TION
=======================================================================
1 PRIS ZD = 0.073 YD = 0.198
PASS CL.6.3.2 0.616 1
5.00 C 1.00 -2.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------
------|
| AX = 0.01 IY = 0.00 IZ = 0.00
|
| LEZ = 1.00 LEY = 1.00
|
|
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (NEW MMS)
|
| FBY = 14.769 FBZ = 14.769
|
| FC = 12.859
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES : (NEW MMS)
|
| fby = 5.686 fbz = 4.193
|
| fc = 0.346
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------
------|

430 — STAAD.Pro
Section 6
Egyptian Codes

432 — STAAD.Pro
Egyptian Codes - Concrete Design Per Egyptian
Code - ECCS203
STAAD has the capability of performing design of concrete beams, columns, and
slabs according to 2004 revision of ECCS 203. Given the width and depth of a
section, STAAD will calculate the required reinforcement to resist the forces and
moments.
Note: Design per ECCS203 is performed using the RC Designer Module. Select
ECCS203 as the Design Code for a Design Brief.

UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.

to suit the particular design being performed. The following Beam Design Brief
contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default values.

Egyptian Codes - Concrete Design Per Egyptian Code - ECCS203

siderations
STAAD provides the user with two methods of accounting for the slenderness
effects in the analysis and design of concrete members. The first method is
equivalent to the procedure presented in ECCS203-2004 equation 4-11. In this
section, the code recognizes that additional moments induced by deflection are
present and states that these 'secondary' moments are accounted for by the design
formula in equation 6-38, 6-37 etc. This is the method used in the design for
concrete in STAAD.
Alternatively STAAD houses a PDELTA ANALYSIS facility, which allows the effects
of these second order moments to be considered in the analysis rather than the
design. In a PDELTA analysis, after solving the joint displacements of the
structure, the additional moments induced in the structure are calculated. These
can be compared to those calculated using the formulation of ECCS203-2004.
434 — STAAD.Pro
6A.5 Beam Design
beam loadings are pre scanned to identify the critical load cases at different
sections of the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13(e.g., 0., .1,
.2, .25, .3, .4, .5, .6, .7, .75, .8, .9 and 1). All of these sections are scanned to
determine the design force envelopes.
Design for Flexure
designed to resist both of these critical sagging and hogging moments. Currently,
design of singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the section dimensions are
inadequate as a singly reinforced section, such a message will be permitted in the
the curtailment of reinforcements as per ECCS203-2004. Although exact
curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (finally which
will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account of other practical
consideration), user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD
at 13 equally spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can be
prepared.
Design for Shear

moments. Shear design is performed at 13 equally spaced sections (0.to 1.) for the
maximum shear forces amongst the active load cases and the associated torsional
moments. Shear capacity calculation at different sections without the shear
reinforcement is based on the actual tensile reinforcement provided by STAAD

program. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance shear
forces acting on these sections.
The following represents a sample Beam Design Output:
6A.6 Column Design

requirements of ECCS203-2004 equation 6-37,6-38,6-41 etc are followed, with
the user having control on the effective length parameters. Bracing conditions are
controlled by using the BRACE parameter. The program will then decide whether
or not the column is short or slender and whether it requires additional moment
calculations.
436 — STAAD.Pro
The following represents a sample Column Design output:

The following represents a sample Shear Design Output:
438 — STAAD.Pro
440 — STAAD.Pro
Egyptian Codes - Steel Design Per Egyptian
Code # 205
2001 revision of the Egyptian code of practice for structural steel construction and
bridges Code No. 205 (Min Dec #279/2001) design in STAAD. The design
philosophy and procedural logistics for member selection and code checking are
based upon the principles of allowable stress design. Two major failure modes are
recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability considerations.
The flowing sections describe the salient features of the allowable stresses being
calculated and the stability criteria being used. Members are proportioned to resist
the design loads without exceeding the allowable stresses and the most economic
section is selected on the basis of least weight criteria. The code checking part of
the program checks stability and strength requirements and reports the critical
loading condition and the governing code criteria. It is generally assumed that the
user will take care of the detailing requirements like provision of stiffeners and
check the local effects such as flange buckling and web crippling.
Note: Design per Code No. 205 is performed using the User Interface Steel
Design mode. Select EGPT205-2001 as the Design Code in the Brief Details
dialog.
6B.2 Allowable Stresses

The member design and code checking in STAAD are based upon the allowable
stress design method as per Egyptian Code No. 205, It is a method for
proportioning structural members using design loads and forces, allowable
stresses, and design limitations for the appropriate material under service
conditions. It would not be possible to describe every aspect of Egyptian Code: 205
in this manual. This section, however, will discuss the salient features of the
allowable stresses specified by Egyptian Code: 205 and implemented in STAAD.
Appropriate sections of Egyptian Code: 205 will be referenced during the
discussion of various types of allowable stresses.

Egyptian Codes - Steel Design Per Egyptian Code # 205
6B.2.1 Axial Stress
Tensile Stress
The allowable tensile stress, as calculated in STAAD as per Egyptian Code: 205 is
described below.
The estimated stress on the net effective sectional area in various members,
multiplied by the appropriate factor of safety shall not exceed minimum
guaranteed yield stress of the material.
The permissible stress in axial tension, σ in MPa on the net effective area of the
at
sections shall not exceed: Clause: 2.6.2
F = 0.58·f
t y
Where:
f = minimum yield stress of steel in Mpa

y
Compressive Stress
Allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially loaded compression

members shall not exceed the permissible stress calculated based on the following
formula: (Clause: 2.6.4)
For all grade of steel:
For λ = kl/r ≤ 100
F = 7500/λ2
c
Where:
F = Permissible stress in axial compression, in Mpa

c
f = Yield stress of steel, in Mpa
y
442 — STAAD.Pro
λ = l/r = Slenderness ratio of the member, ratio of the effective length
to appropriate radius of gyration
6B.2.2 Bending Stress
The allowable bending stress in a member subjected to bending is calculated based

on the following formula: (Clause: 2.6.5)
The laterally unsupported length (Lu) of the compression flange is limited by
L = 20·b /f
u f y
F or F = 0.64·f
bt bc y
Clause 2.6.5.5 Tension F
bt
F = 0.58·F
bt y
Clause 2.6.5.5 Compression F
bc
I. Compression flange is braced laterally at intervals exceeding L , the allowable
u
bending stress in compression F will be taken as follows.
bc
i. For shallow thick flanged sections, where approximately t ·L /(b ·d) > 4
f u f
the lateral tensional buckling stress is governed by the torsion strength
given by:
F = [800/(L /A )]·C ≤ 0.58·F

ltb1 ud f b y
ii. For Deep flanged sections, where approximately t ·L /(b ·d) > 4 the
f u f
lateral torsional buckling stress governed by the buckling strength
given by:
a. When L /r ≤ 84(C /F )1/2, then

u T b y
F = 0.58·F
1tb2 y
b. When 84(C /F )1/2 < L /r ≤ 188(C /F )1/2, then
b y u T b y
c. When L /r > 188(C /F )1/2, then

u T b y
F = [1200/(L /r )2]C ≤ 0.58·F
1tb2 u T b y
Where:

L = Effective laterally unsupported length of compression

u
flange.
k = Effective length factor
r = radius of gyration about minor axis of a section

T
compressing the compression web area (in cms)
b = Compression flange width

f
d = Total depth
C = Coefficient depending on the type of load and support

b
conditions as given in table 2.2
I. Compression on extreme fibers of channels bent about their major axis
F = [800/(L d/A )]·C ≤ 0.58·F

ltb u f b y
Where:
F = Bending stress in tension

bt
F = Bending stress in compression
bc
f = Yield stress of steel, in MPa
y
6B.2.3 Shear Stress
Allowable shear stress calculations are based on Section 2.6.3 of Egyptian code
205. For shear on the web, the gross section taken into consideration consists of
the product of the total depth and the web thickness.
q = 0.35F
all y
Where:
q = Allowable shear stress

all
6B.2.4 Combined Stress
Members subjected to both axial and bending stresses are proportioned

accordingly to following
444 — STAAD.Pro
Axial Compression and Bending
All the members subjected to bending and axial compression are required to satisfy
the equation of section 2.6.7.1
Where:
f = Actual compression stress

ca
F = Allowable compressive stress, clause 2.6.4
c
f ,f = Actual Bending stress about x and y-axes respectively.
bcx bcy
F ,F = Allowable compressive bending stress, clause 2.6.5
bcx bcy
F ,F = Euler stress in t/cm2
Ex Ey
C = Moment modification factor
m
Axial Tension and Bending
All the members subject to bending and axial tension are required to satisfy the
equation of section 2.6.7.2
6B.3 Stability Requirements

Slenderness ratios are calculated for all members and checked against the
appropriate maximum values. Table 5.1 of Egyptian code #205: summarizes the
maximum slenderness ratios for different types of members. In STAAD
implementation of Egyptian code #205, appropriate maximum slenderness ratio
can be provided for each member. If no maximum slenderness ratio is provided,

compression members will be checked against a maximum value of 180 and

tension members will be checked against a maximum value of 300
6B.4 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to verify whether the specified section is capable
of satisfying applicable design code requirements. The code checking is based on
the Egyptian code #205 requirements. Forces and moments at specified sections
of the members are utilized for the code checking calculations. Sections may be
specified using the BEAM parameter or the SECTION command. If no sections are
specified, the code checking is based on forces and moments at the member ends.
The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition,
the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start) and
magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed out.

that is, the lightest section, which satisfies the applicable code requirements. The
section selected will be of the same type (I-Section, Channel etc.) as originally
specified by the user. Member selection may be performed with all types of steel
sections and user provided tables. Selection of members, whose properties are
originally provided from user specified table, will be limited to sections in the user
provided table. Member selection can not be performed on members whose cross
sectional properties are specified as PRISMATIC.
The process of MEMBER SELECTION may be controlled using the parameters listed
in Table 6B.1. It may be noted that the parameters DMAX and DMIN may be used to
specify member depth constraints for selection. If PROFILE parameter is provided,
the search for the lightest section is restricted to that profile. Up to three (3)
profiles may be provided for any member with a section being selected from each
one.
446 — STAAD.Pro
For code checking or member selection, the program produces the result in a
tabulated fashion as well as step by step procedure.
Design of Member No. 1 As Per Egyptian Steel Code 205

Table 6B.1 - Egyptian Steel Design Code #205 Parameters

CB Member length Coefficient depending

on the type of load and
conditions as g.
BEAM 3.0 Location of section

force calculations:
0.0 =
design only
for end
moments
and those at
locations
specified by
the
SECTION
command.
1.0 =
calculate
section
forces at
twelfth
points along
the beam,
design at
each
intermediate
location and
report the
critical
location
where ratio
is
maximum.
CMY 0.85 for sidesway and Cm value in local y & z

calculated for no axes
CMZ
sidesway
448 — STAAD.Pro
DFF None "Deflection Length" /

(Mandatory for Maxm. allowable local
deflection check) deflection
DMAX 100.0 cm. Maximum allowable

depth.
DMIN 0.0 cm. Minimum allowable

depth.
FYLD 250 MPA Yield strength of steel.
(36.25 KSI)
MAIN 180 (Comp. Memb.) Allowable Kl/r for

slenderness calculations
for compression
members.

tension members.
PROFILE - Used to search for the

lightest section for the
profile(s) specified for
member selection. See
Section 5.48.1 of the
Technical Reference
Manual for details.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the

actual to allowable
stresses.
SSY 0.0 Sidesway
0.0 =
Sidesway in
local y-axis.
1.0 = No
sidesway

SSZ 0.0 Same as above except

in local z-axis.
TMAIN 300 (Tension Memb) Allowable Kl/r for

slenderness calculations
for tension members.
WELD 2 Design for weld:
1 = Weld
for Closed
sections
2 = Weld
for Open
sections
WMIN Minimum welding thick-

ness.
WSTR 0.4 Fyld Absolute welding

stress.
450 — STAAD.Pro
Section 7
French Codes

452 — STAAD.Pro
French Codes - Concrete Design per B.A.E.L
STAAD has the capabilities for performing design of concrete beams, columns, and
slabs according to the 1991 edition of Béton Armé aux États Limites (hereafter
referred to as BAEL). Given the width and depth (or diameter for circular columns)
of a section, STAAD will calculate the required reinforcing to resist the various input
loads.
Design per B.A.E.L. is invoked by using the CODE BAEL command.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform design
per B.A.E.L. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for
code calculations but give the engineer control over the actual design process.
Default values, of commonly used numbers in conventional design practice, have
been used for simplicity. Table 7A.1 contains a complete list of available parameters
and their default values.
Table 7A.1 - French Concrete Design B.A.E.L. Parameters

Name Value
CODE BAEL Design Code to follow.

Reference Manual.
CLEAR * 20 Clearance of reinforcing bar. Value is

mm automatically set to 20 mm for C35 and
higher.
DEPTH YD Depth of concrete member. This value

defaults to YD as provided under
MEMBER PROPERTIES.


Name Value
EFACE *0.0 Face of Support Location at end of beam.
Note: Both SFACE and EFACE are

input as positive numbers.
FC * 30 N/ Concrete Yield Stress.

mm2
FYMAIN * 300 Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel.

N/mm2
FYSEC * 300 Yield Stress for secondary reinforcing

N/mm2 steel.
MAXMAIN 50 mm Maximum main reinforcement bar size.

(8mm - 60mm).
MINMAIN 8 mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size.

(8mm - 60mm).
MINSEC 8 mm Minimum secondary reinforcement bar

size. (8mm - 60mm).
MMAG 1.0 A factor by which the design moments

will be magnified.
SFACE *0.0 Face of support location at start of beam.

Only considers shear - use MEMBER
OFFSET for bending.

considered in finding critical moments for
beam design.
TRACK 0.0 Critical Moment will not be printed out

with beam design report. A value of 1.0
will mean a print out.
WIDTH ZD Width of the concrete member. This value

defaults to ZD as provided under
MEMBER PROPERTIES.
454 — STAAD.Pro
* These values must be provided in the units currently being used for input.

sideration
STAAD provides the user two methods of accounting for the slenderness effect in
the analysis and design of concrete members. The first method is a procedure
which takes into account second order effects. Here, STAAD accounts for the
secondary moments, due to axial loads and deflections, when the PDELTA
ANALYSIS command is used. STAAD, after solving for the joint displacements of
the structure, calculates the additional moments induced in the structure.
Therefore, by using PDELTA ANALYSIS, member forces are calculated which will
require no user modification before beginning member design.
The second method by which STAAD allows the user to account for the slenderness
effect is through user supplied moment magnification factors. Here the user
approximates the additional moment by supplying a factor by which moments will
be multiplied before beginning member design.

UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450 ZD 300.
11 13 PR YD 300.
300 mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width
provided, will be assumed to be circular with a 300 mm diameter. Note that area
(AX) is not provided for these members. If shear areas (AY & AZ) are to be
considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with YD and ZD. Also note
that moments of inertia may be provided, but if not provided, the program will
calculate values from YD and ZD.

7A.5 Beam Design

Beam design includes both flexure and shear. For both types of beam action, all
active beam loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes, and
locate critical sections. The total number of sections considered is twelve, unless
that number is redefined with the NSECTION parameter. From the critical moment
values, the required positive and negative bar pattern is developed, with cut-off
lengths calculated to include required development length.
Shear design includes critical shear values plus torsional moments. From these
values, stirrup sizes are calculated with proper spacing. The stirrups are assumed
to be U-shaped for beams with no torsion, and closed hoops for beams subject to
torsion.
Example of Input Data for Beam Design:
UNIT NEWTON MMS

CODE BAEL
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FYSEC 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLEAR 25 MEM 2 TO 6
SFACE 100 MEMB 7 TO 9
EFACE 100 MEMB 7 TO 9
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
7A.6 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial moments at the ends. All active
maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for
456 — STAAD.Pro
square, rectangular, and circular sections. For rectangular and square sections, the
reinforcement is always assumed to be equally distributed on each side. That
means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may cause
slightly conservative results in some cases.
Example of Input Data for Column Design:
UNIT NEWTON MMS

CODE BAEL
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
MMAG 1.5 MEMB 4 5
END CONCRETE DESIGN

Slab and walls are designed per BAEL 1983 specifications. To design a slab or wall,
it must be modeled using finite elements. The command specifications are in
accordance with Chapter II, section 6.40.
from the element force output (see Section 3.8 of the Technical Reference Manual).
The reinforcement required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal
reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as
transverse reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, and CLEAR listed in Table
7A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned in Table 7A.1 are not
applicable to slab design.

Example of Input Data for Slab/Wall Design:
UNIT NEWTON MMS

CODE BAEL
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 25 ALL
CLEAR 40 ALL
END CONCRETE DESIGN
458 — STAAD.Pro
French Codes - Steel Design per the French
Code
The STAAD implementation of French Steel Design is based the 1977 edition of
Centre Technique Industriel de la Construction Metallique (hereafter referred to as
CM66) publication entitled "Design Rules for Structural Steelwork."

limit state design. Structures are designed and proportioned according to the limit
states of which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major
categories of limit-states are recognized: ultimate and serviceability. The primary
considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability; that in
uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under various loading
acceptably remote.
criteria, as augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths,
desired section type, or other related parameters. The code checking portion of the
program verifies that code requirements for each selected section are met and also
The next few sections describe the salient features of STAAD implementation of
"Design Rules for Structural Steelwork." A detailed description of the design
process, along with its underlying concepts and assumptions, is available in the
specification document.
7B.2 Basis of Methodology

The "Design Rules for Structural Steelwork (Revision 80)" permits the usage of
elastic analysis. Thus, in STAAD, linear elastic analysis method is used to obtain the
forces and moments in the members. However, strength and stability
considerations are based on the principles of plastic behavior. Axial compression
buckling and lateral torsional buckling are taken into consideration for calculation

French Codes - Steel Design per the French Code
of axial compression resistance and flexural resistance of members. Slenderness

calculations are made and overall geometric stability is checked for all members.

The member strengths are calculated in STAAD according to the procedures
outlined in section 4 of this specification. Note that the program automatically
considers co-existence of axial force, shear and bending in calculating section
capacities.
For axial tension capacity, procedures of section 4.2 are followed. For axial
compression capacity, formulas of section 5.3 are used.
Moment capacities about both axes are calculated using the procedures of sections
4.5 and 4.6. Lateral torsional buckling is considered in calculating ultimate
twisting moment per section 5.22 of the specification. The parameter UNL (see
Table 7B.1) must be used to specify the unsupported length of the compression
flange for a laterally unsupported member. Note that this length is also referred to
as twisting length.
7B.4 Combined Axial Force and Bending

The procedures of sections 4.55 and 5.32 are implemented for interaction of axial
forces and bending. Appropriate interaction equations are used and the governing
criterion is determined.

The design parameters outlined in Table 7B.1 may be used to control the design
the program, thus allowing the engineer to control the design process to suit an
The default parameter values have been selected as frequently used numbers for
conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or
all of these parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical
structure.
460 — STAAD.Pro
Table 7B.1 - French Steel Design Parameters
Name Value
CODE FRENCH Design Code to follow.

Reference Manual.
BEAM 0.0 0.0 = design only for end

moments and those at locations
specified by SECTION command.
1.0 = calculate moments at tenth

points long the beam, and use
maximum Mz for design.
C1 1.0 Parameter used in clause 5.21 in

the calculation of M(D), the critical
twisting moment and as shown in
CM 66 Addendum 80, table 5,
usual range from 0.71 to 4.10
C2 1.0 Parameter used in clause 5.21 in

the calculation of M(D), the critical
twisting moment and as shown in
CM 66 Addendum 80, table 5,
usual range from 0.0 to 1.56
DFF None "Deflection Length" divided by the

(Mandatory Maximum allowable local deflection
for
deflection
check)

Length" (See Note 1)
DJ2 End Joint of Joint No. denoting end point for cal-
member culation of "Deflection Length" (See
Note 1)


Name Value
DMAX 100.0 cm. Maximum allowable depth (used in

member selection).
DMIN 0.0 cm. Minimum allowable depth (used in

member selection).
FYLD 250.0 MPa Yield strength of steel.
KY 1.0 K value for axial compression

buckling about local Y-axis.
KZ 1.0 K value for axial compression

buckling about local Z-axis.
LY Member Length to calculate slenderness

Length ratio about Y-axis for axial
compression.
LZ Member Length to calculate slenderness

Length ratio about Z-axis for axial
compression.

members.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual load

effect and design strength.
462 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
SAME* 0.0 Controls the sections to try during

a SELECT process.
0.0 = Try every

section of the same type
as original
1.0 = Try only those

sections with a similar
name as original, e.g.,
if the original is an HEA
100, then only HEA
sections will be
selected, even if there
are HEM’s in the same
table.
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppress printing of all

design strengths.
1.0 = Print all design strengths.
UNF 1.0 Same as above provided as a

fraction of member length.
UNL Member Unsupported length of

Length compression flange for calculating
moment resistance.
*For angles, if the original section is an equal angle, then the selected section will
be an equal angle and vice versa for unequal angles.
7B.6 Code Checking and Member Selection

Both code checking and member selection options are available in the STAAD.Pro
implementation of CM 66 (Revn. 80).


Results of code checking and member selection are presented in the output file in a
tabular format.
Note: COND CRITIQUE refers to the section of the CM 66 (Revn. 80)

specification which governed the design.
If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, calculated member capacities will be printed.
The following is a detailed description of printed items:
PC = Member Compression Capacity
TR = Member Tension Capacity
MUZ = Member Moment Capacity (about z-axis)
MUY = Member Moment Capacity (about y-axis)
VPZ = Member Shear Capacity (z-axis)
VPY = Member Shear Capacity (y-axis)
STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for designing structural members as

requirements of the design problem. The operations to perform a design are:
l Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design.
l Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection.
upon the design requirements.
Currently STAAD supports steel design of wide flange, S, M, HP shapes, angle,

double angle, channel, double channel, beams with cover plate, composite beams
and code checking of prismatic properties.
464 — STAAD.Pro
Sample Input data for Steel Design:
UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE FRENCH
NSF 0.85 ALL
UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
7B.8 Built-in French Steel Section Library

for these members.
An example of the member property specification in an input file is provided at the

end of this section.
IPE Shapes
These shapes are designated in the following way.
10 15 TA ST IPE140
20 TO 30 TA ST IPEA120
33 36 TO 46 BY 2 TA ST IPER180

HE shapes
HE shapes are specified as follows.
3 5 TA ST HEA120A
7 10 TA ST HEM140
13 14 TA ST HEB100
IPN Shapes
The designation for the IPN shapes is similar to that for the IPE shapes.
25 TO 35 TA ST IPN200
23 56 TA ST IPN380
T Shapes
the I beam shapes from which they are cut. For example,
1 5 TA T IPE140
2 8 TA T HEM120
U Channels
Shown below is the syntax for assigning 4 different names of channel sections.
1 TO 5 TA ST UAP100
6 TO 10 TA ST UPN220
11 TO 15 TA ST UPN240A
16 TO 20 TA ST UAP250A
466 — STAAD.Pro
Double U Channels
Back to back double channels, with or without a spacing between them, are
11 TA D UAP150
17 TA D UAP250A SP 0.5

UAP150 with no spacing in between. Member 17 is a double channel UAP250A with
a spacing of 0.5 length units between the channels.
Angles
16 20 TA ST L30X30X2.7
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 30mm and a leg thickness
of 2.7mm. This specification may be used when the local Z axis corresponds to the
z-z axis specified in Chapter 2. If the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type
specification "RA" (reverse angle) should be used instead of ST.
17 21 TA RA L25X25X4
22 24 TA RA L100X100X6.5
Note that if the leg thickness is a round number such as 4.0, only the number 4
appears in the section name, the decimal part is not part of the section name.
Double Angles
33 35 TA SD L30X20X4 SP 0.6
37 39 TA LD L80X40X6

43 TO 47 TA LD L80X80X6.5 SP 0.75
Section names of tubes, just like angles, consist of the depth, width and wall
thickness as shown below.
64 78 TA ST TUB50252.7
66 73 TA ST TUB2001008.0
Members 64 and 78 are tubes with a depth of 50mm, width of 25mm and a wall
thickness of 2.7mm. Members 66 and 73 are tubes with a depth of 200mm, width
of 100mm and a wall thickness of 8.0mm. Unlike angles, the ".0" in the thickness is
part of the section name.
Tubes can also be input by their dimensions instead of by their table designations.
For example,
is a tube that has a depth of 8 length units, width of 6 length units, and a wall
thickness of 0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be
performed for TUBE sections specified in this way.
To designate circular hollow sections, use PIP followed by numerical value of the
diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the decimal portion of the
value provided for the diameter. The following example illustrates the designation.
8 TO 28 TA ST PIP422.6
3 64 78 TA ST PIP21912.5
Members 8 to 28 are pipes 42.4mm in dia, having a wall thickness of 2.6mm.

Members 3, 64 and 78 are pipes 219.1mm in dia, having a wall thickness of
12.5mm.
468 — STAAD.Pro
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 length units and inside dia. of 20 length
units. Only code checking, no member selection will be performed if this type of
SAMPLE FILE CONTAINING FRENCH SHAPES

STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 15 140 0 0
MEMB INCI
1 1 2 14
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES FRENCH
* IPE SHAPES
1 TA ST IPEA120
* IPN SHAPES
2 TA ST IPN380
*HE SHAPES
3 TA ST HEA200
* T SHAPES
4 TA T HEM120
* U CHANNELS
5 TA ST UAP100
* DOUBLE U CHANNELS
6 TA D UAP150 SP 0.5
* ANGLES
7 TA ST L30X30X2.7
* REVERSE ANGLES
8 TA RA L25X25X4

* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK

* TO BACK
9 TA SD L30X20X4 SP 0.25
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK
* TO BACK
10 TA LD L80X40X6 SP 0.75
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE
* HOLLOW SECTIONS)
11 TA ST TUB50252.7
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE
* HOLLOW SECTIONS)
13 TA ST PIP422.6
PRINT MEMB PROP
FINI
470 — STAAD.Pro
Section 8
German Codes

472 — STAAD.Pro
German Codes - Concrete Design Per DIN 1045
STAAD has the capabilities of performing concrete design based on the DIN 1045 -
November 1989. Slab design is also available but this follows the requirements of
Baumann, Munich, which is the basis for Eurocode 2. Design for a member involves
calculation of the amount of reinforcement required for the member. Calculations
are based on the user specified properties and the member forces obtained from
the analysis. In addition, the details regarding placement of the reinforcement on
the cross section are also reported in the output.

l For Beams — Prismatic (Rectangular & Square)


UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
provided, will be assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. It is absolutely
imperative that the user not provide the cross section area (AX) as an input.


siderations
There are two options by which the slenderness effect can be accommodated.
The first method is equivalent to the procedure presented in DIN 1045

17.4.3/17.4.4 which is used as the basis for commonly used design charts
considering e/d and sk/d for conditions where the slenderness moment exceeds
70. This method has been adopted in the column design in STAAD per the DIN
code.
The second option is to compute the secondary moments through an analysis.

Secondary moments are caused by the interaction of the axial loads and the
relative end displacements of a member. The axial loads and joint displacements
are first determined from an elastic stiffness analysis and the secondary moments
are then evaluated. To perform this type of analysis, use the command PDELTA
ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS in the input file. The user must note
that to take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be
provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the
fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and
moments, whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based
on the deflections. Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load
etc.) should be provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads
automatically. The column is designed for the total moment which is the sum of
the primary and secondary forces. The secondary moments can be compared to
those calculated using the charts of DIN 1045.
8A.5 Beam Design

beam loadings are prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different
sections of the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13 (e.g., 0., .1,
.2, .25, .3, .4, .5, .6, .7, .75, .8, .9 and 1). All of these sections are scanned to
determine the design force envelopes.
Design for Flexure
474 — STAAD.Pro
designed to resist these critical sagging and hogging moments. Currently, design of
singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the section dimensions are
inadequate as a singly reinforced section, such a message will be printed in the
or multiple layers. The entire flexural design is performed again in a second pass
the curtailment of reinforcements as per the DIN code. Although exact curtailment
lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (finally which will be more
or less guided by the detailer taking into account of other practical considerations),
the user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at 13 equally
spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can be prepared.
Design for Shear and Torsion
Shear design in STAAD conforms to the specifications of section 17.5 of DIN 1045.
moments. Shear and torsional design is performed at the start and end sections of
the member at a distance "d" away from the node of the member where "d" is the
effective depth calculated from flexural design. The maximum shear forces from
amongst the active load cases and the associated torsional moments are used in the
design. The capacity of the concrete in shear and torsion is determined at the
location of design and the balance, if any, is carried by reinforcement. It is assumed
that no bent-up bars are available from the flexural reinforcement to carry and
"balance" shear. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance shear
forces acting on these sections. Stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for beams
with no torsion, and closed hoops for beams subject to torsion.
Example of Input Data for Beam Design
UNIT NEWTON MMS

CODE GERMAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL

FYSEC 415 ALL

FC 35 ALL
CLEAR 25 MEM 2 TO 6
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
8A.6 Column Design

load cases are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which yields
maximum reinforcement is called the critical load. The requirements of DIN 1045-
figure 13, for calculating the equilibrium equations for rectangular and circular
sections from first principles, is implemented in the design. The user has control of
the effective length (sk) in each direction by using the ELZ and ELY parameters as
described on Table 8A.1. This means that the slenderness will be evaluated along
with e/d to meet the requirements of DIN 1045 section 17.4.3 and 17.4.4.
Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. Square and
rectangular columns are designed with reinforcement distributed on all four sides
equally. That means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4).
This may cause slightly conservative results in some cases. The TRACK parameter
may be used to obtain the design details in various levels of detail.
Example of Input Data for Column Design
UNIT NEWTON MMS

CODE GERMAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
476 — STAAD.Pro
END CONCRETE DESIGN
8A.7 Slab Design

To design a slab, it must first be modeled using finite elements and analyzed. The
command specifications are in accordance with Section 5.52 of the Technical
Reference Manual. Slabs are designed to specifications as described by BAUMANN
of MUNICH which is the basis for Eurocode 2.
from the element force output (see Chapter 2 of the Technical Reference Manual).
The reinforcement required to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal
reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist the My moment is denoted
as transverse reinforcement. The following parameters are those applicable to slab
design:
l FYMAIN — Yield stress for all reinforcing steel

l FC — Concrete grade
l CLEAR — Distance from the outer surface of the element to the edge of the
bar. This is considered the same on both top and bottom surfaces of the ele-
ment.
l SRA — Parameter which denotes the angle of direction of the required trans-
verse reinforcement relative to the direction of the longitudinal reinforcement
for the calculation of BAUMANN design forces.
The other parameters shown in Table 8A.1 are not applicable to slab design.
BAUMANN equations
If the default value of zero is used, the design will be based on Mx and My forces
which are obtained from the STAAD analysis. The SRA parameter (Set
Reinforcement Angle) can be manipulated to introduce resolved BAUMANN forces
into the design replacing the pure Mx and My moments. These new design
moments allow the Mxy moment to be considered when designing the section,
resolved as an axial force. Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may be considered. If
SRA is set to -500, an orthogonal layout will be assumed. If however a skew is to
be considered, an angle is given in degrees measured from the local element X axis
anticlockwise (positive). The resulting Mx* and My* moments are calculated and
shown in the design format.

The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 10 mm in the longitudinal
direction and 8 mm in the transverse. The longitudinal bar is the layer closest to
the slab exterior face.

used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values may be
changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table 8A.1 of this manual
contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default values. It is
necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and Newton before
performing the concrete design.
Table 8A.1 - German Concrete Design Parameters

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as DIN1045.

Reference Manual.
CLEAR 25 mm Clear cover for reinforcement

measured from concrete surface to
closest bar perimeter.
DEPTH YD Depth of concrete member. The

default value is provided as YD in
MEMBER PROPERTIES.
478 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value

beam, measured from the end
joint.
Note: Both SFACE & EFACE

must be positive numbers.


FC 25 N/mm2 Concrete Yield Stress / cube

strength
FYMAIN 420 N/mm2 Yield Stress for main reinforcement

(For slabs, it is 500 N/mm2 for
both directions)
FYSEC 420 N/mm2 Yield Stress for secondary

reinforcement a. Applicable to
shear and torsion reinforcement in
beams
MAXMAIN 50 mm Maximum required reinforcement

bar size. Acceptable bars are per
MINMAIN above.
MINMAIN 16 mm Minimum main reinforcement bar

size Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10
12 14 16 20 25 32 40 50
MINSEC 8 mm Minimum secondary reinforcement

bar size. Applicable to shear and
torsion reinforcement in beams.

moments are magnified for column
design


Name Value
NSECTION 10 Number of equally-spaced sections

to be considered in finding critical
moment for beam design. The
upper limit is 20.

beam, measured from the start
joint. (Only applicable for shear -
use MEMBER OFFSET for bending)
SRA 0.0 0.0 = Orthogonal reinforcement

layout without considering
torsional moment Mxy -slabs only
-500 = Orthogonal reinforcement

layout considering Mxy
A = Skew angle considered in

BAUMANN equations. A is the
angle in degrees.
TRACK 0.0 Level of detail in output
0. Critical Moment will not be

printed with beam design
report.
1. For beam gives min/max
steel % and spacing. For col-
umns gives a detailed table
of output with additional
moments calculated.
2. For beams gives area of steel
required at intermediate sec-
tions. (see NSECTION)
WIDTH ZD Width of concrete member. This

value default is as provided as ZD
in MEMBER PROPERTIES.
480 — STAAD.Pro
German Codes - Steel Design Per the DIN Code
8B.1 General
DIN code of practice for structural steel design (DIN 18800 – Parts 1 & 2) in
STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles
of elastic analysis and allowable stress design. Facilities are available for member
selection as well as code checking. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure
by overstressing and failure by stability considerations. The following sections
describe the salient features of the design approach.
allowable stresses or capacities and the most economical section is selected on the
basis of the least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks
the slenderness requirements and the stability criteria. It is recommended that you
use the following steps in performing the steel design:
1. Specify the geometry and loads and perform the analysis.

2. Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.
3. Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection.
8B.2 AnalysisMethodology
and in using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations.
Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta
analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results
combined with static analysis results.

For specification of member properties of standard German steel sections, the steel
section library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the
syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel table. Member

properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more
information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference
Manual.
8B.4 Built-in German Steel Section Library

database file. If called for, these properties are also used for member design. Since
for these members during the analysis. An example of member property
be obtained using the tools of the graphical user interface.
Refer to Section 1.7.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional

information.
IPE Shapes
These shapes are designated in the following way:
20 TO 30 TA ST IPEA120
33 36 TO 46 BY 2 TA ST IPER140
HE Shapes
The designation for HE shapes is similar to that for IPE shapes.
25 TO 35 TA ST HEB300
23 56 TA ST HEA160
I Shapes
I shapes are identified by the depth of the section. The following example
illustrates the designation.
482 — STAAD.Pro
14 15 TA ST I200 (INDICATES AN I-SECTION WITH 200MM
DEPTH)
T Shapes
the I beam shapes from which they are cut. For example,
1 5 TA T HEA220
2 8 TA T IPE120
U Channels
The example below provides the command for identifying two channel sections.
The former (U70X40) has a depth of 70mm and a flange width of 40mm. The latter
(U260) has a depth of 260mm.
11 TA D U70X40
27 TA D U260
Double Channels
Back-to-back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are

available. The letter “D” in front of the section name will specify a double channel,
e.g., D U180. The spacing between the double channels is provided following the
expression “SP”.
11 TA D U180
27 TA D U280 SP 0.5 (INDICATES 2 CHANNELS BACK-TO-BACK
SPACED AT 0.5 LENGTH UNITS)
Angles
16 20 TA ST L20X20X2.5

The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 20mm and a leg thickness
of 2.5mm. The above specification may be used when the local z-axis corresponds
to the Z-Z axis specified in Chapter 2. If the local y-axis corresponds to the Z-Z
axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
17 21 TA RA L40X20X5
Double Angles
using the word SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an
equal angle, either SD or LD will serve the purpose. Spacing between the angles is
provided by using the word SP and the spacing value following the section name.
14 TO 20 TA SD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
21 TO 27 TA LD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
To designate circular hollow sections, use PIP followed by numerical value of the
diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the decimal section of the
value provided for diameter. The following example will illustrate the designation.
8 TO 28 TA ST PIP602.9 (60.3MM DIA, 2.9MM WALL

THICKNESS)
3 64 67 TA ST PIP40612.5 (406.4MM DIA, 12.5MM WALL
THICKNESS)
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units.
484 — STAAD.Pro
Tube names are input by their dimensions. For example,
15 TO 25 TA ST TUB100603.6
is the specification for a tube having sides of 100mm x 60mm and the wall
thickness of 3.6mm.
Tubes, like pipes can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and
Thickness) instead of by their table designations.
is a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness of 0.5 in current
length units. Only code checking and no member selection will be performed for
TUBE sections specified this way.
SAMPLE INPUT FILE CONTAINING GERMAN SHAPES

STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0 15 140 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2 14
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES GERMAN
* IPE SHAPES
1 TA ST IPEA120
* HE SHAPES
2 TA ST HEB300
* I SHAPES
3 TA ST I200
* T SHAPES

4 TA T HEA220
* U CHANNELS
5 TA ST U70X40
* DOUBLE U CHANNELS
6 TA D U260
* ANGLES
7 TA ST L20X20X2.5
* REVERSE ANGLES
8 TA RA L40X20X5
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK TO BACK
9 TA LD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK TO BACK
10 TA SD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
* PIPES
11 TA ST PIP602.9
* PIPES
* TUBES
13 TA ST TUB100603.6
* TUBES
14 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 WT 0.5
*
FINISH

The allowable stresses used in the implementation are based on DIN 18800 (Part
1) - Section 7. The procedures of DIN 18800 Part 2 are used for stability analysis.
The basic measure of member capacities are the allowable stresses on the member
under various conditions of applied loading such as allowable tensile stress,
allowable compressive stress etc. These depend on several factors such as cross
486 — STAAD.Pro
sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and
so on. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such
capacities.
Checks for Axial Tension
basis of the member area. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member
based on a user supplied net section factor (NSF -a default value of 1.0 is present
but may be altered by changing the input value, see Table 8B.1) and proceeds with
Checks for Axial Compression
The compression capacity for members in compression is determined according to

the procedure of DIN 18800- Part 2. Compressive resistance is a function of the
slenderness of the cross-section (Kl/r ratio) and the user may control the
slenderness value by modifying parameters such as KY, LY, KZ and LZ.
Checks for Bending and Shear
The bending compressive and tensile capacities are dependent on such factors as
length of outstanding legs, thickness of flanges, unsupported length of the
compression flange (UNL, defaults to member length) etc. Shear capacities are a
function of web depth, web thickness etc. Users may use a value of 1.0 or 2.0 for
the TRACK parameter to obtain a listing of the bending and shear capacities.
8B.6 Combined Loading
For members experiencing combined loading (axial force, bending, and shear),
all modeled loading situations. Members subjected to axial force and bending are
checked using the criteria of DIN 18800 (Part 1) - Section 6.1.6. In addition, for
members with axial loads and bending, the criteria of DIN 18800(Part 2) - Sections
3.4 and 3.5 are used.


You are allowed complete control over the design process through the use of
parameters described in the following table. These parameters communicate
design decisions from the engineer to the program. The default parameter values
have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional
design. Depending on the particular design requirements of the situation, some or
all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the
physical structure.
Table 8B.1 - German Steel Design Parameters

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as DIN18800.

Reference Manual.
BEAM 0.0 Number of sections to be checked

per member:
0. Design only for end sections.

imum MZ along member.
2. Check ends plus location of
beam 1.0 check.
3. Check at every 1/13th of the
member length and report
the maximum.
CB 0 Beam coefficient n, defined in

Table 9: If Cb = 0, program will
use n = 2.5 for rolled sections and
2.0 for welded sections.
488 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
CMM 1.0 Moment factor, Zeta, defined in

Table 10:
1. fixed ended member with

constant moment, Zeta = 1.0
2. pin ended member with UDL,
Zeta = 1.12
3. pin ended member with cen-
tral point load, Zeta = 1.35
4. fixed ended member, Zeta cal-
culated from end moments.
DMAX 1.0 m Maximum allowable depth during

member selection
DMIN 0.0 m Minimum required depth during

member selection
KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis. Usually, this

is the minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis. Usually, this

is the major axis.
LY Member Length in local y-axis to calculate

Length slenderness ratio.
LZ Member Length in local z-axis to calculate

PY 240 Strength of steel.

N/sq.mm

members.

allowable stresses
SAME 0.0 Control of sections to try during a

SELECT process:


Name Value
0. Try every section of the same

type as the original.
1. Try only those with a similar
name.
SBLT 0 Specify section as either rolled or

built-up:
0. Rolled
1. Built-up
SGR 0.0 Grade of steel:
0. St 37-2
1. St 52-3
2. St E 355
TRACK 0.0 Level of detail in output file:
0. Output summary of results

plus member capacities
2. Output detailed results
UNF 1.0 Same as above provided as a factor

of actual member length.
UNL Member Unrestrained member length in

Length lateral torsional buckling checks.
8B.8 Code Checking

of the members are adequate to carry the forces transmitted to it by the loads on
the structure. The adequacy is checked per the DIN requirements.
490 — STAAD.Pro
(default), design will be based on member start and end forces. The code checking
output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition,
governing load case, location (distance from start joint) and magnitudes of the
governing forces and moments are also printed.

as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially as a channel will
have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose properties are originally
provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table. Member
selection cannot be performed on TUBES, PIPES, or members listed as PRISMATIC.
Sample Input data for Steel Design
UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE GERMAN
NSF 0.85 ALL
UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL

492 — STAAD.Pro
Section 9
Indian Codes

494 — STAAD.Pro
Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS456
STAAD has the capabilities of performing concrete design based on the limit state
method of IS: 456 (2000).

l For Beams — Prismatic (Rectangular & Square), T-Beams, and L-shapes


UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
14 TO 16 PRIS YD 400. ZD 750. YB 300. ZB 200.
will be done accordingly. In the above input, the first set of members are
rectangular (450 mm depth and 250mm width) and the second set of members,
with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular with 350 mm
diameter. The third set numbers in the above example represents a T-shape with
750 mm flange width, 200 width, 400 mm overall depth and 100 mm flange depth
(See section 6.20.2). The program will determine whether the section is
rectangular, flanged or circular and the beam or column design.

as per IS:456(2000). Default parameter values have been selected such that they
are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements. These values

may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table 9A.1 of this
manual contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default
values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and Newton
before performing the concrete design.
Table 9A.1 - Indian Concrete Design IS456 Parameters

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as INDIAN.

Reference Manual.
BRACING 0.0 Beam Design:
A value of 1.0 means

the effect of axial force
will be taken into
account for beam
design.
Column Design:
correspond to the terms

"Braced" and
"Unbraced" described in
Notes 1, 2, and 3 of
Clause 39.7.1 of
IS456:2000.
1. The column is unbraced

about major axis.
about minor axis.
about both axis.
496 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
DEPTH YD Total depth to be used for design.

This value defaults to YD as
PROPERTIES.

beam. The parameter can also be
used to check against shear at any
point from the end of the member.
Note: Both SFACE and EFACE

are input as positive numbers.

See Note b below.

See Note b below.
ENSH 0.0 Perform shear check against

enhanced shear strength as per Cl.
40.5 of IS456:2000.
l ENSH = 1.0 means ordinary

shear check to be performed
( no enhancement of shear
strength at sections close to
support)
l For ENSH = a positive
value(say x ), shear strength
will be enhanced up to a dis-
tance x from the start of the
member. This is used only


Name Value
when a span of a beam is sub-

divided into two or more
parts. (Refer note )
l For ENSH = a negative
value(say –y), shear strength
will be enhanced up to a dis-
tance y from the end of the
member. This is used only
when a span of a beam is sub-
divided into two or more
parts.(Refer note)
If default value (0.0) is used the

program will calculate Length to
Overall Depth ratio. If this ratio is
greater than 2.5, shear strength
will be enhanced at sections (<2d)
close to support otherwise ordinary
shear check will be performed.
FC 30 N/mm2 Concrete Yield Stress.
FYMAIN 415 N/mm2 Yield Stress for main reinforcing

steel.

reinforcing steel.

size.

size.

bar size.

bar size.
498 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
longitudinal reinforcement in
columns.
REINF 0.0 Tied column. A value of 1.0 will

mean spiral reinforcement.
RENSH 0.0 Distance of the start or end point of

the member from its nearest
support. This parameter is used
only when a span of a beam is
subdivided into two or more parts.
(Refer note)
RFACE 4.0 2. Two faced distribution about

major axis.
3. Two faced distribution about
minor axis.
4. Longitudinal reinforcement in
column is arranged equally
along 4 faces.

beam. It is used to check against
shear at the face of the support in
beam design. The parameter can
also be used to check against shear
at any point from the start of the
member.
SPSMAIN 25 mm Minimum clear distance between

main reinforcing bars in beam and
column. For column center to
center distance between main bars
cannot exceed 300 mm.


Name Value
TORSION 0.0 0. torsion to be considered in

beam design.
1. torsion to be neglected in
beam design.
TRACK 0.0 Beam Design:
0. output consists of rein-

forcement details at START,
MIDDLE, and END.
1. critical moments are printed
in addition to TRACK 0.0 out-
put.
2. required steel for inter-
mediate sections defined by
NSECTION are printed in
addition to TRACK 1.0 out-
put.
Column Design:
0. reinforcement details are

printed.
1. column interaction analysis
results are printed in addition
to TRACK 0.0 output.
2. a schematic interaction dia-
gram and intermediate inter-
action values are printed in
addition to TRACK 1.0 out-
put.
9. the details of section capacity

calculations are printed.
ULY 1.0 Ratio of unsupported length to

actual length of column about
minor axis. See Note c below.
500 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
ULZ 1.0 Ratio of unsupported length to

major axis. See Note c below.

Notes
a. You may specify reinforcing bar combinations through the

BAR COMBINATION command. Refer to Section 9A.8 for details.
b. ELY and ELZ parameters are used to calculate effective length of column to
find whether it is a short or long column. Please refer CL 25.1.2 of
IS456:2000.
In CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, you will find two term, l and l , which STAAD
ex ey
calculates as:
l l = ELZ multiplied by the member length (distance between the two
ex
nodes of the member)
l l = ELY multiplied by the member length (distance between the two
ey
nodes of the member)
For the term "D" in CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, STAAD uses the YD dimension
of the column.
For the term "b" in CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, STAAD uses the ZD dimension
of the column.
c. ULY and ULZ parameters are used to calculate unsupported length of column
to find minimum eccentricity. Please refer CL 25.4 of IS456:2000.
In CL 25.4 of IS456:2000, you will find an expression "unsupported length of

column". This term is calculated as
l ULZ multiplied by the member length for the Z axis
l ULY multiplied by the member length for the Y axis
d. The value of the ENSH parameter (other than 0.0 and 1.0) is used only when

the span of a beam is subdivided into two or more parts. When this condition
occurs, the RENSH parameter is also to be used.
The span of the beam is subdivided four parts, each of length L meter. The
shear strength will be enhanced up to X meter from both supports. The input
should be the following:
Steps:
1. ENSH L MEMB 1 => Shear strength will be enhanced throughout
the length of the member 1, positive sign indicates length measured
from start of the member
2. ENSH (X-L) MEMB 2 => Shear strength will be enhanced up to a
length (X-L) of the member 2, length measured from the start of the
member
3. ENSH –L MEMB 4 => Shear strength will be enhanced throughout
the length of the member 4, negative sign indicates length measured
from end of the member
4. ENSH –(X-L) MEMB 3 => Shear strength will be enhanced up to a
length (X-L) of the member 3, length measured from the end of the
member
5. RENSH L MEMB 2 3 => Nearest support lies at a distance L from
both the members 2 and 3.
6. DESIGN BEAM 1 TO 4=> This will enhance the shear strength up to
length X from both ends of the beam consisting of members 1 to 4 and
gives spacing accordingly.
At section = y1 from start of member 1 av = y1
At section = y2 from the start of member 2 av = y2+L
At section = y3 from the end of member 3 av = y3+L
At section = y4 from end of member 4 av = y4
502 — STAAD.Pro
where tc, enhanced = 2dtc/av
At section 0.0, av becomes zero. Thus enhanced shear strength will become
infinity. However for any section shear stress cannot exceed tc, max. Hence
enhanced shear strength is limited to a maximum value of tc, max.

sideration
The IS:456 code specifies two options by which the slenderness effect can be
accommodated (Clause 39.7). One option is to perform an exact analysis which will
take into account the influence of axial loads and variable moment of inertia on
member stiffness and fixed end moments, the effect of deflections on moment and
forces and the effect of the duration of loads. Another option is to approximately
magnify design moments.
STAAD has been written to allow the use of the first option. To perform this type of
analysis, use the command PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS.
The P-Delta analysis will accommodate all requirements of the second- order
analysis described by IS:456, except for the effects of the duration of the loads. It
is felt that this effect may be safely ignored because experts believe that the effects
of the duration of loads are negligible in a normal structural configuration.
Although ignoring load duration effects is somewhat of an approximation, it must

be realized that the approximate evaluation of slenderness effects is also an
approximate method. In this method, additional moments are calculated based on
empirical formula and assumptions on sidesway (Clause 39.7.1 and 39.7.1.1,IS:
456 - 2000). The rules of Clause 39.7.1 have been implemented in STAAD.Pro.
They will be checked if the ELY and ELZ parameters are specified.
Considering all these information, a P-Delta analysis, as performed by STAAD may

be used for the design of concrete members.
Note: To take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must
be provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to
the fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and
moments (i.e., analysis results), whereas a primary load case is revised during

the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Loads can be combined prior to
analysis using the REPEAT LOAD command.
Note: You must specify the appropriate load factors (e.g., 1.5 for dead load,
etc.) as STAAD does not factor the loads automatically.
9A.6 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. If required the effect the axial
force may be taken into consideration. For all these forces, all active beam
the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13 (e.g., 0., .1, .2, .25, .3,
Design for Flexure
designed to resist both of these critical sagging and hogging moments. Where
ever the rectangular section is inadequate as singly reinforced section, doubly
reinforced section is tried. However, presently the flanged section is designed only
as singly reinforced section under sagging moment. It may also be noted all
flanged sections are automatically designed as rectangular section under hogging
moment as the flange of the beam is ineffective under hogging moment. Flexural
design of beams is performed in two passes. In the first pass, effective depths of
the sections are determined with the assumption of single layer of assumed
reinforcement and reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the
preliminary design, reinforcing bars are chosen from the internal database in
single or multiple layers. The entire flexure design is performed again in a second
pass taking into account of the changed effective depths of sections calculated on
the basis of reinforcement provide after the preliminary design. Final provisions of
flexural reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been made to meet the
guideline for the curtailment of reinforcements as per IS:456-2000 (Clause
26.2.3). Although exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the
design output (finally which will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into
account of other practical consideration), user has the choice of printing
504 — STAAD.Pro
reinforcements provided by STAAD at 11 equally spaced sections from which the
final detail drawing can be prepared.
Design for Shear

moments. Shear design are performed at 11 equally spaced sections (0.0 to 1.0)
for the maximum shear forces amongst the active load cases and the associated
torsional moments. Shear capacity calculation at different sections without the
shear reinforcement is based on the actual tensile reinforcement provided by
STAAD program. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance
shear forces acting on these sections.
As per Clause 40.5 of IS:456-2000 shear strength of sections (< 2d where d is the
effective depth) close to support has been enhanced, subjected to a maximum
value of τ .
cmax
Beam Design Output
provided at 5 equally spaced (0, .25, .5, .75 and 1.) sections along the length of
the beam. User has option to get a more detail output. All beam design outputs are
given in IS units. An example of rectangular beam design output with TRACK 2.0
output is presented below:
M20 Fe415 (Main) Fe250 (Sec.)
25.0 mm
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
SECTION |FLEXURE (Maxm. Sagging/Hogging moments)| SHEAR
(in mm) | P MZ MX Load Case | VY MX
Load Case
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
0.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 60.61 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
533.3 | 0.00 29.63 0.00 1 | 50.51 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
1066.7 | 0.00 53.88 0.00 1 | 40.41 0.00
1

| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |

1600.0 | 0.00 72.73 0.00 1 | 30.31 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
2133.3 | 0.00 86.20 0.00 1 | 20.20 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
2666.7 | 0.00 94.28 0.00 1 | 10.10 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
3200.0 | 0.00 96.98 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
3733.3 | 0.00 94.28 0.00 1 | -10.10 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
4266.7 | 0.00 86.20 0.00 1 | -20.20 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
4800.0 | 0.00 72.73 0.00 1 | -30.31 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
5333.3 | 0.00 53.88 0.00 1 | -40.41 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
5866.7 | 0.00 29.63 0.00 1 | -50.51 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
6400.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | -60.61 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
-------------------------------------------------------------------
---------
SUMMARY OF REINF. AREA (Sq.mm)
-------------------------------------------------------------------
---------
SECTION | TOP | BOTTOM |
STIRRUPS
(in mm) | Reqd./Provided reinf. | Reqd./Provided reinf. | (2
legged)
-------------------------------------------------------------------
---------
0.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 0.00/ 981.75( 2-25í )| 8í
@ 180 mm
533.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 237.32/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í
@ 180 mm
1066.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í
@ 180 mm
1600.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í
@ 180 mm
2133.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í
@ 180 mm
506 — STAAD.Pro
2666.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @
180 mm
3200.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 894.99/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @
180 mm
3733.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @
180 mm
4266.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @
180 mm
4800.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @
180 mm
5333.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @
180 mm
5866.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 237.32/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @
180 mm
6400.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 0.00/ 981.75( 2-25í )| 8í @
180 mm
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
9A.7 Column Design

load cases are tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which yield maximum
reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for square,
rectangular and circular sections. By default, square and rectangular columns and
designed with reinforcement distributed on each side equally for the sections under
biaxial moments and with reinforcement distributed equally in two faces for
sections under uniaxial moment. User may change the default arrangement of the
reinforcement with the help of the parameter RFACE (see Table 8A.1). Depending
upon the member lengths, section dimensions and effective length coefficients
specified by the user STAAD automatically determine the criterion (short or long) of
the column design. All major criteria for selecting longitudinal and transverse
reinforcement as stipulated by IS:456 have been taken care of in the column design
of STAAD. Default clear spacing between main reinforcing bars is taken to be 25
mm while arrangement of longitudinal bars.
contains intermediate results such as the design forces, effective length coefficients,
additional moments etc. All design output is given in SI units. An example of a
TRACK 2.0 output follows:

M20 Fe415 (Main) Fe250

(Sec.)
LENGTH: 3000.0 mm CROSS SECTION: 400.0 mm X 600.0 mm COVER:
40.0 mm
** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 1 END JOINT: 1 SHORT COLUMN
-----------------------
About Z About Y
SLENDERNESS RATIOS : - -
MOMENTS DUE TO SLENDERNESS EFFECT : - -
MOMENT REDUCTION FACTORS : - -
ADDITION MOMENTS (Maz and May) : - -
REQD. CONCRETE AREA: 236412.56 Sq.mm.
MAIN REINFORCEMENT : Provide 32 - 12 dia. (1.51%, 3619.11
Sq.mm.)
TIE REINFORCEMENT : Provide 8 mm dia. rectangular ties @ 190 mm
c/c
SECTION CAPACITY BASED ON REINFORCEMENT REQUIRED (KNS-MET)
----------------------------------------------------------
Puz : 3244.31 Muz1 : 269.59 Muy1 : 168.42
INTERACTION RATIO: 0.98 (as per Cl. 39.6, IS456:2000)
SECTION CAPACITY BASED ON REINFORCEMENT PROVIDED (KNS-MET)
----------------------------------------------------------
WORST LOAD CASE: 1
END JOINT: 1 Puz : 3253.88 Muz : 271.48 Muy :
170.09 IR: 0.96
============================================================================
9A.8 Bar Combination

Initially the program selects only one bar to calculate the number of bars required
and area of steel provided at each section along the length of the beam. You may
use the BAR COMBINATION command to specify two bar diameters to calculate a
combination of each bar to be provided at each section. The syntax for bar
combination is given below.
START BAR COMBINATION
MD1 <bar diameter> MEMB <member list>
END BAR COMBINATION
508 — STAAD.Pro
Note: The bar sizes should be specified in the order of increasing size (i.e., MD2
bar diameter should be greater than MD1 bar diameter).
The beam length is divided into three parts, two at its ends and one at span. Ld
gives the development length to be provided at the two ends of each section.
The typical output for bar combination is shown below:

OUTPUT FOR BAR COMBINATION
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
| M A I N R E I N F O R C E M E N T
|
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
SECTION | 0.0- 1600.0 | 1600.0- 4800.0 | 4800.0-
6400.0 |
| mm | mm | mm
|
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
TOP | 2-16í | 2-16í | 2-16í
|
| in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | in 1
layer(s) |
Ast Reqd| 0.00 | 0.00 | 0.00
|
Prov| 402.29 | 402.29 | 402.29
|
Ld (mm) | 752.2 | 1175.3 | 752.2
|
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
BOTTOM | 4-16í | 2-16í + 2-25í | 4-16í
|
layer(s) |
Ast Reqd| 632.82 | 894.99 | 632.82
|
Prov| 804.57 | 1384.43 | 804.57
|
Ld (mm) | 752.2 | 1175.3 | 752.2
|
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
============================================================================
9A.9 Wall Design in accordance with IS 456-2000

The design of walls in accordance with IS 456-2000 is available in STAAD.Pro.

The design is performed for in-plane shear, in-plane & out-of-plane bending, and
out-of-plane shear. The wall has to be modeled using STAAD’s Surface elements
(Refer to Section 5.13.3 of the Technical Reference Manual). The use of the
Surface element enables the designer to treat the entire wall as one entity. It
greatly simplifies the modeling of the wall and adds clarity to the analysis and
design output. The results are presented in the context of the entire wall rather
than individual finite elements thereby allowing users to quickly locate required
information.
The program reports shear wall design results for each load case/combination for
the specified number of sections given in the SURFACE DIVISION command
(default value is 10) command. The shear wall is designed at these horizontal
sections. The output includes the required horizontal and vertical distributed
reinforcing, the concentrated (in-plane bending) edge reinforcing and the link
required for out-of-plane shear.
Refer to Section 5.54 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details on
shear wall design.
General Format

CODE INDIAN
FYMAIN f1
FC f2
HMIN f3
HMAX f4
VMIN f5
VMAX f6
EMIN f7
EMAX f8
LMIN f9
LMAX f10
CLEAR f11
510 — STAAD.Pro
TWOLAYERED f12
KSLENDER f13
DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST shearwall-list
END
The following table explains the parameters used in the shear wall design.
Table 9A.2 - Shear Wall Design Parameters

Name Value
CLEAR 25 mm Clear concrete cover, in

current units.
EMAX 36 Maximum size of vertical

reinforcing bars located
in edge zones (range
6mm – 36mm). If input
is 6 (integer number) the
program will assume 6
mm diameter bar.
EMIN 8 Minimum size of vertical

reinforcing bars located
in edge zones (range
mm diameter bar.
FYMAIN 415 Mpa Yield strength of steel, in

current units.
FC 30 Mpa Compressive strength of

concrete, in current
units.
HMIN 8 Minimum size of


Name Value
horizontal reinforcing
bars (range 6 mm – 36
mm). If input is 6
(integer number) the
mm diameter bar.
HMAX 36 Maximum size of

horizontal reinforcing
bars (range 6 mm – 36
mm). If input is 6
(integer number) the
mm diameter bar.
KSLENDER 1.0 Slenderness factor for

finding effective height.
LMAX 16 Maximum size of links

(range 6mm – 16mm). If
input is 6 (integer
number) the program
will assume 6 mm
diameter bar.
LMIN 6 Minimum size of links

(range 6mm – 16mm). If
input is 6 (integer
number) the program
will assume 6 mm
diameter bar.
TWOLAYERED 0 Reinforcement
placement mode:
0. single layer, each

direction
1. two layers, each
direction
512 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
VMAX 36 Maximum size of vertical

reinforcing bars (range
mm diameter bar.
VMIN 8 Minimum size of vertical

reinforcing bars (range
mm diameter bar.
The following example illustrates the input for the definition of shear wall and
design of the wall.
Example
.
.
SET DIVISION 12
SURFACE INCIDENCES
2 5 37 34 SUR 1
19 16 65 68 SUR 2
11 15 186 165 SUR 3
10 6 138 159 SUR 4
.
.
.
SURFACE PROPERTY
1 TO 4 THI 18
SUPPORTS

1 7 14 20 PINNED
2 TO 5 GEN PIN
6 TO 10 GEN PIN
11 TO 15 GEN PIN
19 TO 16 GEN PIN
.
.
.
SURFACE CONSTANTS
E 2.17185E+007
POISSON 0.17
DENSITY 23.5616
ALPHA 1E-005
.
.
START SHEARWALL DES
CODE INDIAN
UNIT NEW MMS
FC 25
FYMAIN 415
TWO 1
VMIN 12
HMIN 12
EMIN 12
DESIGN SHEA LIST 1 TO 4
END
514 — STAAD.Pro
Notes
1. Command SET DIVISION 12 indicates that the surface boundary node-to-

node segments will be subdivided into 12 fragments prior to finite element
mesh generation.
2. Four surfaces are defined by the SURFACE INCIDENCES command.
3. The SUPPORTS command includes the new support generation routine. For
instance, the line 2 to 5 gen pin assigns pinned supports to all nodes
between nodes 2 and 5. As the node-to-node distances were previously
subdivided by the SET DIVISION 12 command, there will be an additional
11 nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As a result, all 13 nodes will be assigned
pinned supports. Please note that the additional 11 nodes are not individually
accessible to the user. They are created by the program to enable the finite
element mesh generation and to allow application of boundary constraints.
4. Surface thickness and material constants are specified by the SURFACE

PROPERTY and SURFACE CONSTANTS, respectively.
5. The shear wall design commands are listed between lines START SHEARWALL
DES and END. The CODE command selects the design code that will be the
basis for the design. For Indian code the parameter is INDIAN. The DESIGN
SHEARWALL LIST command is followed by a list of previously defined
Surface elements intended as shear walls and/or shear wall components.
Technical Overview
The program implements provisions of section 32 of IS 456-2000 and relevant

provisions as referenced therein, for all active load cases. The following steps are
performed for each of the horizontal sections of the wall.
Checking of slenderness limit
The slenderness checking is done as per clause no. 32.2.3. The default effective
height is the height of the wall. User can change the effective height. The limit for
slenderness is taken as 30.

Design for in-plane bending and vertical load (denoted by Mz & Fy

in the shear wall force output)
Walls when subjected to combined in-plane horizontal and vertical forces produce
in-plane bending in conjunction with vertical load. According to clause no. 32.3.1,
in-plane bending may be neglected in case a horizontal cross section of the wall is
always under compression due combined effect of horizontal and vertical loads.
Otherwise, the section is checked for combined vertical load and in-plane moment
as column with axial load and uni-axial bending. For this purpose, the depth is
taken as 0.8 x horizontal length of wall and breadth is the thickness of the wall.
The reinforcement is concentrated at both ends (edges) of the wall. The edge
reinforcement is assumed to be distributed over a length of 0.2 times horizontal
length on each side. Minimum reinforcements are according to clause no. 32.5.(a).
Maximum 4% reinforcement is allowed.
Design for in-plane shear (denoted by Fxy in the shear wall force
output)
By default, the program does not design only at the critical section but at all the
horizontal sections. By suitable use of the surface division command, design at
critical section as per clause no. 32.4.1 can be performed.
The design for in-plane shear is done as per clause no. 32.4. The nominal shear
stress is calculated as per clause no. 32.4.2 and it is checked with the maximum
allowable shear stress as per clause no. 32.4.2.1. The design shear strength of
concrete is calculated as per clause no. 32.4.3. Design of shear reinforcement is
done as per clause no. 32.4.4. Minimum reinforcements are as per clause no.
32.5.
Design for vertical load and out-of-plane vertical bending (denoted

by Fy and My respectively in the shear wall force output)
Apart from the in-plane bending and horizontal shear force, the wall is also
subjected to out-of-plane bending in the vertical and horizontal directions. The
part of the wall which is not having edge reinforcements (i.e., a zone of depth 0.6
x Length of the wall), is designed again as column under axial load (i.e., vertical
load) and out-of-plane vertical bending. The minimum reinforcements and
maximum allowable spacings of reinforcements are as per clause no. 32.5
516 — STAAD.Pro
Design for out-of-plane horizontal bending (denoted by Mx in the
shear wall force output)
The horizontal reinforcement which is already provided for in-plane shear is

checked against out-of-plane horizontal bending. The wall is assumed as a slab for
this purpose.
Design for out-of-plane shears (denoted by Qx and Qy in the shear

wall force output)
The out-of-plane shear arises from out-of-plane loading. The nominal shear
stresses are calculated as per clause no. 40.1. Maximum allowable shear stresses
are as per table 20. For shear force in the vertical direction, shear strength of
concrete section is calculated as per section 4.1 of SP 16 : 1980 considering vertical
reinforcement as tension reinforcement. Similarly, for shear force in the horizontal
direction, shear strength of concrete section is calculated considering horizontal
reinforcement as tension reinforcement. Shear reinforcements in the form of links
are computed as per the provisions of clause no. 40.4.
Shear Wall Design With Opening
The Surface element has been enhanced to allow design of shear walls with
rectangular openings. The automatic meshing algorithm has been improved to
allow variable divisions along wall and opening(s) edges. Design and output are
available for user selected locations.
Description
Shear walls modeled in STAAD.Pro may include an unlimited number of openings.

Due to the presence of openings, the wall may be comprise of different wall panels
of varying types.
1. Shear wall set-up
Definition of a shear wall starts with a specification of the surface element

perimeter nodes, meshing divisions along node-to-node segments,
opening(s) corner coordinates, and meshing divisions of four edges of the
opening(s).

SURFACE INCIDENCE n1, ..., ni SURFACE s DIVISION sd1,

..., sdj -
RECOPENING x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3 x4 y4 z4 DIVISION
od1, ..., odk
Where:
n1, … , ni — node numbers on the perimeter of the shear wall,
s — surface ordinal number,
sd1, … , sdj — number of divisions for each of the node-to-node

distance on the surface perimeter,
x1 y1 z1 (…) — coordinates of the corners of the opening,
od1, … , odk — divisions along edges of the opening.
Note: If the sd1, … , sdj or the od1, … , odk list does not include all
node-to-node segments, or if any of the numbers listed equals zero, then
the corresponding division number is set to the default value (=10, or as
previously input by the SET DIVISION command).
Default locations for stress/force output, design, and design output are set
as follows:
SURFACE DIVISION X xd
SURFACE DIVISION Y yd
Where:
xd — number of divisions along X axis,
yd — number of divisions along Y axis.
Note: xd and yd represent default numbers of divisions for each edge of

the surface where output is requested. The output is provided for
sections located between division segments. For example, if the number
of divisions = 2, then the output will be produced for only one section (at
the center of the edge).
2. Stress/force output printing
518 — STAAD.Pro
Values of internal forces may be printed out for any user-defined section of
the wall. The general format of the command is as follows:
PRINT SURFACE FORCE (ALONG ξ) (AT a) (BETWEEN d1, d2)
LIST s1, … ,si
Where:
ξ — local axis of the surface element (X or Y),
a — distance along the ξ axis from start of the member to the
full cross-section of the wall,
d1, d2 — coordinates in the direction orthogonal to ξ , delineating

a fragment of the full cross-section for which the output is
desired. **
s1, … ,si — list of surfaces for output generation
** The range currently is taken in terms of local axis. If the local axis is
directed away from the surface, the negative range is to be entered.
Note: If command ALONG is omitted, direction Y (default) is assumed. If

command AT is omitted, output is provided for all sections along the
specified (or default) edge. Number of sections will be determined from
the SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE DIVISION Y input values. If the
BETWEEN command is omitted, the output is generated based on full
cross-section width.
3. Definition of wall panels
Input syntax for panel definition is as follows:

START PANEL DEFINITION
SURFACE i PANEL j ptype x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3 x4 y4
z4
END PANEL DEFINITION
Where:
i = ordinal surface number,
j = ordinal panel number,

ptype = panel type, one of: WALL, COLUMN, BEAM
x1 y1 z1 (…) = coordinates of the corners of the panel,
4. Shear wall design
The program implements different provisions of design of walls as per code

BS 8110. General syntax of the design command is as follows:
(…)
DESIGN SHEARWALL (AT f2) LIST s
ENDSHEARWALL DESIGN
Note: If the command AT is omitted, the design proceeds for all cross
sections of the wall or panels, as applicable, defined by the SURFACE
DIVISION X or SURFACE DIVISION Y input values.
a. No panel definition.
Design is performed for the specified horizontal full cross-section,

located at a distance c from the origin of the local coordinates system.
If opening is found then reinforcement is provided along sides of
openings. The area of horizontal and vertical bars provided along
edges of openings is equal to that of the respective interrupted bars.
b. Panels have been defined.
Only wall panel design is supported in Indian code.
520 — STAAD.Pro
9A1.1 Design Operations
Earthquake motion often induces force large enough to cause inelastic
deformations in the structure. If the structure is brittle, sudden failure could occur.
But if the structure is made to behave ductile, it will be able to sustain the
earthquake effects better with some deflection larger than the yield deflection by
absorption of energy. Therefore ductility is also required as an essential element for
safety from sudden collapse during severe shocks.
STAAD has the capabilities of performing concrete design as per IS 13920. While
designing it satisfies all provisions of IS 456 – 2000 and IS 13920 for beams and
columns.
9A1.2 Section Types for Concrete Design

l For Beams: Prismatic (Rectangular & Square) and T-shape

l For Columns : Prismatic (Rectangular, Square, and Circular)
9A1.3 Design Parameters

The program contains a number of parameters that are needed to perform design
as per IS 13920. It accepts all parameters that are needed to perform design as per
IS:456. Over and above it has some other parameters that are required only when
designed is performed as per IS:13920. Default parameter values have been
selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design
requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular design being
performed. Table 8A1.1 of this manual contains a complete list of the available
parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units
as Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete design.

Table 9A1.1 - Indian Concrete Design IS 13920 Parameters

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as IS13920

Reference Manual.
BRACING 0.0 Beam Design
1.0 = the effect of axial

force will be taken into
account for beam
design.
Column Design
Correspond to the
terms "Braced" and
"Unbraced" described
in Notes 1, 2, and 3 of
Clause 39.7.1 of
IS456:2000.
1.0 = the column is

unbraced about major
axis.
2.0 = the column is

unbraced about minor
axis.
3.0 = the column is

unbraced about both
axis.
DEPTH YD Total depth to be used for design.

This value defaults to YD (depth of
section in Y direction) as provided
522 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
COMBINE 0.0 Default value means there will be

no member combination.
1.0 = no printout of
sectional force and
critical load for
combined member in
the output.
2.0 = printout of
sectional force for
combined member in
the output.
3.0 = printout of both

sectional force and
critical load for
combined member in
the output. ***

beam. The parameter can also be
used to check against shear at any
point from the end of the member.

are input as positive numbers.*


ENSH 0.0 Perform shear check against

enhanced shear strength as per Cl.
40.5 of IS456:2000.


Name Value
1.0 = ordinary shear

check to be performed (
no enhancement of
shear strength at
sections close to
support)
a positive value(say x )
= shear strength will be
enhanced up to a
distance x from the
start of the member.
This is used only when
a span of a beam is
subdivided into two or
more parts. (Refer note
after Table 8A.1 )
a negative value(say –
y) = shear strength will
be enhanced up to a
distance y from the end
of the member. This is
used only when a span
of a beam is subdivided
into two or more
parts.(Refer note after
Table 8A.1)
0.0 = the program will

calculate Length to
Overall Depth ratio. If
this ratio is greater than
2.5, shear strength will
be enhanced at sections
(<2d) close to support
otherwise ordinary
shear check will be
performed.
524 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
EUDL None Equivalent u.d.l on span of the

beam. This load value must be the
unfactored load on span. During
design the load value is multiplied
by a factor 1.2. If no u.d.l is
defined factored shear force due to
gravity load on span will be taken
as zero. No elastic or plastic
moment will be calculated. Shear
design will be performed based on
analysis result.(Refer note)
FYMAIN 415 N/mm2 Yield Stress for main reinforcing

steel.

reinforcing steel.
FC 30 N/mm2 Concrete Yield Stress.
GLD None Gravity load number to be

considered for calculating
equivalent u.d.l on span of the
beam, in case no EUDL is
mentioned in the input. This
loadcase can be any static loadcase
containing MEMBER LOAD on the
beam which includes UNI, CON,
LIN and TRAP member loading.
CMOM member loading is
considered only when it is specified
in local direction. FLOOR LOAD is
also considered.
The load can be primary or

combination load. For combination
load only load numbers included in
load combination is considered.
The load factors are ignored.


Name Value
Internally the unfactored load is

multiplied by a factor 1.2 during
design.
If both EUDL and GLD parameters

are mentioned in the input
mentioned EUDL will be considered
in design
Note: No dynamic (Response

spectrum, 1893, Time History)
and moving load cases are
considered.
CMOM member loading in global

direction is not considered.
UMOM member loading is not

considered.
HLINK Spacing of Longer dimension of the

longitudinal rectangular confining hoop
bars measured to its outer face. It shall
measured to not exceed 300 mm as per Cl.
the outer 7.4.8. If the HLINK value as
face provided in the input file does not
satisfy the clause the value will be
internally assumed as the default
one. This parameter is valid for
rectangular column.
IPLM 0.0 Default value calculates

elastic/plastic hogging and sagging
moments of resistance of beam at
its ends.
1.0 = calculation of
elastic/plastic hogging
and sagging moments
526 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
of resistance of beam to
be ignored at start
node of beam. This
implies no support
exists at start node.
-1.0 = calculation of
and sagging moments
be considered at start
node of beam. . This
implies support exists
at start node.
and sagging moments
be ignored at end node
of beam. This implies
no support exists at
end node.
and sagging moments
be considered at end
node of beam. . This
implies support exists
at end node. **
IMB 0.0 Default value calculates

elastic/plastic hogging and sagging
moments of resistance of beam at
its ends.


Name Value
and sagging moments
be ignored at both ends
of beam. This implies
no support exist at
either end of the
member.
and sagging moments
be considered at both
ends of beam. This
implies support exist at
both ends of the
member.**

size.

size.

bar size.

bar size.
PLASTIC 0.0 Default value calculates elastic

hogging and sagging moments of
resistance of beam at its ends.
1.0 = plastic hogging

and sagging moments
be calculated at its
ends.
528 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value

longitudinal reinforcement in
columns.
REINF 0.0 0.0 = Tied column (default)
1.0 = spiral reinforcement
RENSH 0.0 Distance of the start or end point of

the member from its nearest
support. This parameter is used
only when a span of a beam is
subdivided into two or more parts.
Refer note after Table 9A.1
RFACE 4.0 4.0 = longitudinal reinforcement in

column is arranged equally along
four faces.
2.0 invokes two faced distribution

about major axis.
3.0 invokes two faced distribution

about minor axis.

beam. It is used to check against
shear at the face of the support in
beam design. The parameter can
also be used to check against shear
at any point from the start of the
member.*

are input as positive numbers.*
SPSMAIN 25 mm Minimum clear distance between

main reinforcing bars in beam and
column. For column center to


Name Value
center distance between main bars

cannot exceed 300 mm.
TORISION 0.0 0.0 = torsion to be considered in

beam design.
1.0 = torsion to be neglected in

beam design.
0.0 = output consists

of reinforcement details
at START, MIDDLE and
END.
1.0 = critical moments

are printed in addition
2.0 = required steel for

intermediate sections
defined by NSECTION
are printed in addition
Column Design:
0.0 = reinforcement
details are printed.
1.0 = column
interaction analysis
results are printed in
output.
2.0 = a schematic
interaction diagram and
intermediate interaction
values are printed in
530 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value

output.
ULY 1.0 Ratio of unsupported length to

minor axis.
ULZ 1.0 Ratio of unsupported length to

major axis.

Bar combination has been introduced for detailing. Please refer section 9A1.6 for
details.
* EFACE and SFACE command is not valid for member combination.
** IPLM and IMB commands are not valid for member combination. These
commands are ignored for members forming physical member.
*** The purpose of COMBINE command is the following:
1. If a beam spanning between two supports is subdivided into many sub-

beams this parameter will combine them into one member. It can also be
used to combine members to form one continuous beam spanning over more
than two supports.
2. When two or more members are combined during design plastic or elastic
moments will be calculated at the column supports. At all the intermediate
nodes (if any) this calculation will be ignored.
Note: Please note that the program only recognizes column at right angle
to the beam. Inclined column support is ignored.
3. It will calculate sectional forces at 13 sections along the length of the

combined member.
4. It will calculate critical loads (similar to that of Design Load Summary) for all

active load cases during design.
Beams will be combined only when DESIGN BEAM command is issued.
The following lines should be satisfied during combination of members:
1. Members to be combined should have same sectional properties if any single

span between two column supports of a continuous beam is subdivided into
several members.
2. Members to be combined should have same constants (E, Poi ratio, alpha,
density, and beta angle)
3. Members to be combined should lie in one straight line.
4. Members to be combined should be continuous.
5. Vertical members (i.e., columns) cannot be combined.
6. Same member cannot be used more than once to form two different
combined members.
7. The maximum number of members that can be combined into one member is
299.
Note: Sectional forces and critical load for combined member output will only
be available when all the members combined are successfully designed in both
flexure and shear.
ENSH and RENSH parameters will have to be provided (as and when necessary)
even if physical member has been formed.
Example
The following lines show a standard example for design to be performed in IS

13920.
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER MTON
JOINT COORDINATES
…………………………………..
532 — STAAD.Pro
MEMBER INCIDENCES
…………………………………..
MEMBER PROPERTY INDIAN
…………………………………..
CONSTANTS
…………………….
SUPPORTS
…………………….
DEFINE 1893 LOAD
ZONE 0.05 I 1 K 1 B 1
SELFWEIGHT
JOINT WEIGHT
……………………….
LOAD 1 SEISMIC LOAD IN X DIR
1893 LOAD X 1
LOAD 2 SEISMIC LOAD IN Z DIR
1893 LOAD Z 1
LOAD 3 DL
MEMBER LOAD
…… UNI GY -5
LOAD 4 LL
MEMBER LOAD
……. UNI GY -3
LOAD COMB 5 1.5(DL+LL)
3 1.5 4 1.5
LOAD COMB 6 1.2(DL+LL+SLX)
1 1.2 3 1.2 4 1.2
LOAD COMB 7 1.2(DL+LL-SLX)
1 1.2 3 1.2 4 -1.2
LOAD COMB 8 1.2(DL+LL+SLZ)

2 1.2 3 1.2 4 1.2

LOAD COMB 9 1.2(DL+LL-SLZ)
2 1.2 3 1.2 4 -1.2
PDELTA ANALYSIS
LOAD LIST 5 TO 9
CODE IS13920
UNIT MMS NEWTON
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 20 ALL
MINMAIN 12 ALL
MAXMAIN 25 ALL
TRACK 2.0 ALL
*** UNFACTORED GRAVITY LOAD ON MEMBERS 110 TO 112 IS 8
T/M (DL+LL) I.E., 78.46 NEW/MM
EUDL 78.46 MEMB 110 TO 112
** MEMBERS TO BE COMBINED INTO ONE PHYSICAL MEMBER
COMBINE 3.0 MEMB 110 TO 112
*** PLASTIC MOMENT CONSIDERED
PLASTIC 1.0 MEMB 110 TO 112
DESIGN BEAM 110 TO 112
DESIGN COLUMN ………
END CONCRETE DESIGN
FINISH
9A1.4 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. If required the effect of the
axial force may be taken into consideration. For all these forces, all active beam
the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13. All of these sections are
scanned to determine the design force envelopes.
534 — STAAD.Pro
For design to be performed as per IS:13920 the width of the member shall not be
less than 200mm(Clause 6.1.3). Also the member shall preferably have a width-to
depth ratio of more than 0.3 (Clause 6.1.2).
The factored axial stress on the member should not exceed 0.1fck (Clause 6.1.1)
for all active load cases. If it exceeds allowable axial stress no design will be
performed.
Design for Flexure
Design procedure is same as that for IS 456. However while designing following
criteria are satisfied as per IS-13920:
1. The minimum grade of concrete shall preferably be M20. (Clause 5.2)
2. Steel reinforcements of grade Fe415 or less only shall be used. (Clause 5.3)
3. The minimum tension steel ratio on any face, at any section, is given by
(Clause 6.2.1b)
ρ = 0.24Öfck/fy
min
The maximum steel ratio on any face, at any section, is given by (Clause
6.2.2)
ρ = 0.025
max
4. The positive steel ratio at a joint face must be at least equal to half the
negative steel at that face. (Clause 6.2.3)
5. The steel provided at each of the top and bottom face, at any section, shall at
least be equal to one-fourth of the maximum negative moment steel provided
at the face of either joint. (Clause 6.2.4)
Design for Shear
The shear force to be resisted by vertical hoops is guided by the Clause 6.3.3 of IS
13920:1993 revision. Elastic sagging and hogging moments of resistance of the
beam section at ends are considered while calculating shear force. Plastic sagging
and hogging moments of resistance can also be considered for shear design if
PLASTIC parameter is mentioned in the input file. (Refer Table 8A1.1)

moments. Procedure is same as that of IS 456.

The following criteria are satisfied while performing design for shear as per Cl.
6.3.5 of IS-13920:
The spacing of vertical hoops over a length of 2d at either end of the beam shall
not exceed
a. d/4
b. 8 times the diameter of the longitudinal bars
In no case this spacing is less than 100 mm.
The spacing calculated from above, if less than that calculated from IS 456
consideration is provided.
Beam Design Output
provided at 5 equally spaced sections along the length of the beam. User has
option to get a more detail output. All beam design outputs are given in IS units.
An example of rectangular beam design output with the TRACK 2.0 is presented
below:
M20 Fe415 (Main) Fe250
(Sec.)
25.0 mm
-------------------------------------------------------------------
---------
(in mm) | P MZ MX Load Case | VY MX
Load Case
-------------------------------------------------------------------
---------
0.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 60.61 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
533.3 | 0.00 29.63 0.00 1 | 50.51 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
1066.7 | 0.00 53.88 0.00 1 | 40.41 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
1600.0 | 0.00 72.73 0.00 1 | 30.31 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
536 — STAAD.Pro
2133.3 | 0.00 86.20 0.00 1 | 20.20 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
2666.7 | 0.00 94.28 0.00 1 | 10.10 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
3200.0 | 0.00 96.98 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
3733.3 | 0.00 94.28 0.00 1 | -10.10 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
4266.7 | 0.00 86.20 0.00 1 | -20.20 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
4800.0 | 0.00 72.73 0.00 1 | -30.31 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
5333.3 | 0.00 53.88 0.00 1 | -40.41 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
5866.7 | 0.00 29.63 0.00 1 | -50.51 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
6400.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | -60.61 0.00
1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
*** DESIGN SHEAR FORCE AT SECTION 0.0 IS 60.61 KN.
- CLAUSE 6.3.3 OF IS-
13920
*** DESIGN SHEAR FORCE AT SECTION 6400.0 IS 60.61 KN.
- CLAUSE 6.3.3 OF IS-
13920
NOTE :
MOMENT OF RESISTANCE IS CALCULATED BASED ON THE AREA OF STEEL PRO-
VIDED.
IF AREA OF STEEL PROVIDED IS MUCH HIGHER COMPARED TO AREA OF STEEL
REQUIRED MOMENT OF RESISTANCE WILL INCREASE WHICH MAY INCREASE
DESIGN
SHEAR FORCE.
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
STAAD SPACE -- PAGE
NO. 7
0.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 0.00/ 981.75( 2-25í )| 8í @
100 mm
533.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 281.26/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @
180 mm
1066.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @
180 mm
1600.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @
180 mm

2133.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í

@ 180 mm
2666.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í
@ 180 mm
3200.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 894.99/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í
@ 180 mm
3733.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í
@ 180 mm
4266.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í
@ 180 mm
4800.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í
@ 180 mm
5333.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í
@ 180 mm
5866.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 281.26/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í
@ 180 mm
6400.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 0.00/ 981.75( 2-25í )| 8í
@ 100 mm
-------------------------------------------------------------------
---------
9A1.5 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial forces and biaxial moments per IS 456:2000.
Columns are also designed for shear forces as per Clause 7.3.4. All major criteria
for selecting longitudinal and transverse reinforcement as stipulated by IS:456
have been taken care of in the column design of STAAD. However following
clauses have been satisfied to incorporate provisions of IS 13920:
l The minimum grade of concrete shall preferably be M20. (Clause 5.2)
l Steel reinforcements of grade Fe415 or less only shall be used. (Clause 5.3)
l The minimum dimension of column member shall not be less than 200 mm.
For columns having unsupported length exceeding 4m, the shortest
dimension of column shall not be less than 300 mm. (Clause 7.1.2)
l The ratio of the shortest cross-sectional dimension to the perpendicular

dimension shall preferably be not less than 0.4. (Clause 7.1.3)
l The spacing of hoops shall not exceed half the least lateral dimension of the
column, except where special confining reinforcement is provided. (Clause
7.3.3)
l Special confining reinforcement shall be provided over a length l from each

o
joint face, towards mid span, and on either side of any section, where
538 — STAAD.Pro
flexural yielding may occur. The length l shall not be less than a) larger
o
lateral dimension of the member at the section where yielding occurs, b) 1/6
of clear span of the member, and c) 450 mm. (Clause 7.4.1)
l The spacing of hoops used as special confining reinforcement shall not

exceed ¼ of minimum member dimension but need not be less than 75 mm
nor more than 100 mm. (Clause 7.4.6)
l The area of cross-section of hoops provided are checked against the

provisions for minimum area of cross-section of the bar forming rectangular,
circular or spiral hoops, to be used as special confining reinforcement.
(Clause 7.4.7 and 7.4.8)
contains intermediate results such as the design forces, effective length coefficients,
additional moments etc. A special output TRACK 9.0 is introduced to obtain the
details of section capacity calculations. All design output is given in SI units. An
example of a column design output (with option TRACK 1.0) is given below.
========================================================================-
====
M20
Fe415 (Main)
Fe415 (Sec.)
LENGTH: 3000.0 mm CROSS SECTION:
350.0 mm X 400.0 mm COVER: 40.0 mm
** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 5 END JOINT:
2 SHORT COLUMN
-----------------------
DESIGN AXIAL FORCE (Pu)
: 226.7
About Z
About Y
INITIAL MOMENTS
: 0.64
146.28
MOMENTS DUE TO MINIMUM ECC.
: 4.53 4.53
SLENDERNESS RATIOS
: -
-

MOMENTS DUE TO SLENDERNESS EFFECT :

-
-
MOMENT REDUCTION FACTORS
: -
-
ADDITION MOMENTS (Maz and May)
: -
-
TOTAL DESIGN MOMENTS
: 4.53
146.28
** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 5
Along Z Along Y

DESIGN SHEAR FORCES
: 43.31
76.08
MAIN REINFORCEMENT : Provide 12 - 20 dia.
(2.69%, 3769.91 Sq.mm.)
CONFINING REINFORCEMENT : Provide 10 mm dia.
rectangular ties @ 85 mm c/c
over a length 500.0 mm from each joint face towards
midspan as per Cl. 7.4.6 of IS-13920.
TIE REINFORCEMENT
: Provide 10 mm dia. rectangular ties @ 175 mm c/c
SECTION CAPACITY (KNS-MET)
--------------------------
Puz : 2261.52 Muz1 :
178.71 Muy1 : 150.75
INTERACTION RATIO: 1.00 (as per Cl. 39.6, IS456:2000)
=======================================================================-
=====
********************END OF COLUMN DESIGN RESULTS********************
9A1.6 Bar Combination

Initially the program selects only one bar to calculate the number of bars required
and area of steel provided at each section along the length of the beam. You may
use the BAR COMBINATION command to specify two bar diameters to calculate a
combination of each bar to be provided at each section. The syntax for bar
combination is given below.
START BAR COMBINATION
540 — STAAD.Pro
ENDBAR COMBINATION
Note: The bar sizes should be specified in the order of increasing size (i.e., MD2
bar diameter should be greater than MD1 bar diameter).
The beam length is divided into three parts, two at its ends and one at span. Ld
gives the development length to be provided at the two ends of each section.
The typical output for bar combination is shown below:

OUTPUT FOR BAR COMBINATION
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
| M A I N R E I N F O R C E M E N T
|
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
SECTION | 0.0- 1600.0 | 1600.0- 4800.0 | 4800.0-
6400.0 |
| mm | mm | mm
|
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
TOP | 2-16í | 2-16í | 2-16í
|
layer(s) |
Ast Reqd| 0.00 | 0.00 | 0.00
|
Prov| 402.29 | 402.29 | 402.29
|
Ld (mm) | 752.2 | 1175.3 | 752.2
|
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
BOTTOM | 4-16í | 2-16í + 2-25í | 4-16í
|
layer(s) |
Ast Reqd| 632.82 | 894.99 | 632.82
|
Prov| 804.57 | 1384.43 | 804.57
|
Ld (mm) | 752.2 | 1175.3 | 752.2
|
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------
============================================================================

Verification Example
Sample example showing calculation of design shear force as per Clause 6.3.3
Figure 9.1 - Example problem
For Beam No. 1 and 2
Section width, b = 250 mm and depth, D = 500 mm
Characteristic strength of steel, fy = 415 N/mm2
Characteristic strength of concrete, fck = 20 N/mm2
Clear cover = 25 mm
Bar diameter = 12 mm
Effective depth, d = 469 mm
Eudl, w = 6.5 N/mm2
Length, L = 4,000 mm
A = 339.29 mm2
st_Top_A
A = 226.19 mm2
st_Bot_A
A = 226.19 mm2
st_Top_B
A = 339.29 mm2
st_Bot_B
Steps
Calculation of Simple Shear

Simple shear from Va = Vb = 1.2 * w * L / 2 = 15600N
gravity load on span =
542 — STAAD.Pro
Calculation of Moment Of Resistances Based On Area Of Steel Provided
Sagging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_A * d * = 36768130.05
Resistance of End A N
( 1 - Ast_Bot_A * fy / b * d * fck)
Mu, as =
Hogging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_A * d * = 54003057.45
( 1 - Ast_Top_A * fy / b * d * fck)
Micah =
Sagging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_B * d * = 54003057.45
( 1 - Ast_Bot_B * fy / b * d * fck)
Mu, bs =
Hogging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_B * d * ( 1 - Ast_ = 36768130.05
Resistance of End A Top_B* fy / b * d * fck) N
Mob =
Calculation of shear force due to the formation of a plastic hinge at both ends of the
beam plus the factored gravity load on the span.
Figure 9.2 - Sway to right
FIG1: SWAY TO RIGHT
Vur,a = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = -10137.69104

N
Vur,b = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = 41337.69104
N
Figure 9.3 - Sway to left
Vul,a = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L 53402.14022 N

] =
Vul,b = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] - 22202.14022 N

=
Design Shear Force
Shear Force From Analysis At End A , Va,anl = 11.56 N

Design Shear Force At End A, Vu,a = Max ( Va,anl, Vur,a, Vul,a) 53402.14022
= N
Shear Force From Analysis At End B , Vb,anl = -6.44 N
Design Shear Force At End B, Vu,b = Max ( Vb,anl, Vur,b, Vul,b) 41337.69104
= N
For Beam No. 3
Section Width b 300 mm

Depth D 450 mm
Characteristic Strength of Steel fy 415 N/sq. mm
Characteristic Strength of Concrete fck 20 N/sq. mm
Clear Cover 25 mm
Bar Diameter 12 mm
Effective Depth d 419 mm
Eudl w 6.5 N/sq. mm
Length L 3000 mm
Ast_Top_A 226.19 sq. mm
Ast_Bot_A 339.29 sq. mm
Ast_Top_B 452.39 sq. mm
Ast_Bot_B 226.19 sq. mm
Calculation of Simple Shear

Simple shear from Va = Vb = 1.2 * w * L / 2 = 11700N
gravity load on span
=
544 — STAAD.Pro
Calculation of Moment Of Resistances Based On Area Of Steel Provided
Sagging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_A * d * = 48452983
( 1 - Ast_Bot_A * fy / b * d * fck)
Mu,as =
Hogging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_A * d * =
Resistance of End A 32940364.5
( 1 - Ast_Top_A * fy / b * d * fck)
Mu,ah = N
Sagging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_B * d * =
Resistance of End A 32940364.5
( 1 - Ast_Bot_B * fy / b * d * fck)
Mu,bs = N
Hogging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_B * d * ( 1 - Ast_Top_ =
Resistance of End A B* fy / b * d * fck) 63326721.3
Mu,bh = N
Calculation of shear force due to the formation of a plastic hinge at both ends of the
beam plus the factored gravity load on the span.
Figure 9.4 - Sway to right
Vur,a = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = -40463.862

N
Vur,b = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = 63863.862 N
Sway to left
Vul,a = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] = 42444.3402

N
Vul,b = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] = -15144.34 N

Design Shear Force
Shear Force From Analysis At End A , Va,anl = -10.31 N

Design Shear Force At End A, Vu,a = Max ( 42444.3402 N
Va,anl, Vur,a, Vul,a) =
Shear Force From Analysis At End B , Vb,anl = -23.81 N
Design Shear Force At End B, Vu,b = Max ( 63863.862 N
Vb,anl, Vur,b, Vul,b) =
546 — STAAD.Pro
Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS800:1984
9B.1 Design Operations
STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for designing structural members as
l Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design.
l Specify whether to perform member selection by optimization.
upon the design requirements. The entire ISI steel section table is supported.
Section 9B.13 describes the specification of steel sections.

This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of
Indian Standard code of practice (IS:800-1984) for structural steel design in
STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics for member selection and
code checking are based upon the principles of allowable stress design. Two major
failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing, and failure by stability
considerations. The flowing sections describe the salient features of the allowable
stresses being calculated and the stability criteria being used. Members are
proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the allowable stresses
and the most economic section is selected on the basis of least weight criteria. The
code checking part of the program checks stability and strength requirements and
reports the critical loading condition and the governing code criteria. It is generally
assumed that the user will take care of the detailing requirements like provision of
stiffeners and check the local effects such as flange buckling and web crippling.
9B.3 Allowable Stresses

stress design method as per IS:800 (1984). It is a method for proportioning

structural members using design loads and forces, allowable stresses, and design
limitations for the appropriate material under service conditions. It would not be
possible to describe every aspect of IS:800 in this manual. This section, however,
will discuss the salient features of the allowable stresses specified by IS:800 and
implemented in STAAD. Appropriate sections of IS:800 will be referenced during
the discussion of various types of allowable stresses.
l Axial Stress
l Bending Stress
l Shear Stress
l Combined Stress
9B.3.1 Axial Stress
Tensile Stress
The allowable tensile stress, as calculated in STAAD as per IS:800 is described
below.
The permissible stress in axial tension, σ in MPa on the net effective area of the
at
sections shall not exceed
σ = 0.6·f
at y
Where:
f = minimum yield stress of steel in Mpa

y
Compressive Stress
Allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially loaded compression
members shall not exceed 0.6·f nor the permissible stress s calculated based on
y ac
the following equation (per Clause: 5.1.1):
σ = 0.6{( f · f )/[( f )n + (f )n] 1/n}

ac cc y cc y
Where:
σ = Permissible stress in axial compression, in Mpa

ac
y
f = Elastic critical stress in compression = π2 E/λ2
cc
548 — STAAD.Pro
E = Modulus of elasticity of steel, 2 X 105 Mpa
λ=l/r = Slenderness ratio of the member, ratio of the effective length to

appropriate radius of gyration
n = A factor assumed as 1.4.
The allowable bending stress in a member subjected to bending is calculated based

on the following formula: (Clause: 6.2.1)
σ or σ = 0.66 f
bt bc y
Where:
σ = Bending stress in tension

bt
σ = Bending stress in compression
bc
f = Yield stress of steel, in MPa
y
For an I-beam or channel with equal flanges bent about the axis of maximum
strength (z-z axis), the maximum bending compressive stress on the extreme fibre
calculated on the effective section shall not exceed the values of maximum
permissible bending compressive stress. The maximum permissible bending
compressive stress shall be obtained by the following formula: (Clause: 6.2.2)
Clause 6.2.3
Where:

y
n = A factor assumed as 1.4.
f = Elastic critical stress in bending, calculated by the following

cb
formula:
Where:

in MPa
k = a coefficient to allow for reduction in thickness or breadth of

1
flanges between points of effective lateral restraint and depends on y,
the ratio of the total area of both flanges at the point of least bending
moment to the corresponding area at the point of greatest bending
moment between such points of restraint.
k = a coefficient to allow for the inequality of flanges, and

2
depends on w, the ratio of the moment of inertia of the compression
flange alone to that of the sum of the moment of the flanges each
calculated about its own axis parallel to the y-yaxis of the girder, at the
point of maximum bending moment.
1 = effective length of compression flange
r = radius of gyration of the section about its axis of

y
minimum strength (y-y axis)
T = mean thickness of the compression flange, is equal to the

area of horizontal portion of flange divided by width.
D = overall depth of beam
c ,c = respectively the lesser and greater distances from the section

1 2
neutral axis to the extreme fibres.
9B.3.3 Shear Stress
Allowable shear stress calculations are based on Section 6.4 of IS:800. For shear
on the web, the gross section taken into consideration consist of the product of the
total depth and the web thickness. For shear parallel to the flanges, the gross
section is taken as 2/3 times the total flange area.
9B.3.4 Combined Stress
Members subjected to both axial and bending stresses are proportioned

accordingly to section 7 of IS:800. All members subject to bending and axial
550 — STAAD.Pro
compression are required to satisfy the equation of Section 7.1.1.(a) for
intermediate points, and equation of Section 7.1.1.(b) for support points.
For combined axial tension and bending the equation of Section 7.1.2. is required
to be satisfied.
Cm coefficients are calculated according to the specifications of Section 7.1.3.

information regarding occurrence of sidesway can be provided through the use of
parameters SSY and SSZ. In the absence of any user provided information,
sidesway will be assumed.

In STAAD implementation of IS:800, the user is allowed complete control of the
design process through the use of design parameters. Available design parameters
to be used in conjunction with IS:800 are listed in Table 7B.1 of this section along
with their default values and applicable restrictions. Users should note that when
the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0 and use in conjunction with this code, allowable
bending stresses in compression (FCY & FCZ), tension (FTY & FTZ), and allowable
shear stress (FV) will be printed out in Member Selection and Code Check output in
Mpa. When TRACK is set to 2.0, detailed design output will be provided.
Table 9B.1 - Indian Steel Design IS 800:1984 Parameters

Name

INDIAN

Technical Reference
Manual.

moments and those at
locations specified by the
SECTION command.


Name
1.0 = calculate section

forces at twelfth points
along the beam, design at
each intermediate location
and report the critical
location where ratio is
maximum.
CMY 0.85 for Cm value in local y & z

sidesway and axes
CMZ
calculated for no
sidesway

(Mandatory for Maxm. allowable local
DJ1 Start Joint Joint No. denoting

of member starting point for
calculation of "Deflection
Length" (See Note 1)
DJ2 End Joint of Joint No. denoting end

member point for calculation of
"Deflection Length" (See
Note 1)
DMAX 100.0 cm. Maximum allowable

depth.
DMIN 0.0 cm. Minimum allowable depth.
FYLD 250 MPA Yield strength of steel.
(36.25 KSI)
KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis.

Usually, this is minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis.

Usually, this is major axis.
552 — STAAD.Pro
Name
LY Member Length Length in local y-axis to

calculate slenderness
ratio.
LZ Member Length Same as above except in

local z-axis (major).
MAIN 180 (Comp. Allowable Kl/r for

Memb.) slenderness calculations
for compression
members.

tension members.
PROFILE - Used to search for the

lightest section for the
profile(s) specified for
member selection. See
Section 5.48.1 of the
Technical Reference
Manual for details.

actual to allowable
stresses.
SSY 0.0 0.0 = Sidesway in local

y-axis.
1.0 = No sidesway
SSZ 0.0 Same as above except in

local z-axis.
TMAIN 400 (Tension Allowable Kl/r for

Memb) slenderness calculations
for tension members.
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppress critical

member stresses


Name
1.0 = Print all critical

member stresses
2.0 = Print expanded

output. If there is
deflection check it will also
print the governing load
case number for deflection
check whenever critical
condition for design is not
DEFLECTION.
(see fig.8B.1)
UNF 1.0 Same as above provided

as a fraction of actual
member length.
UNL Member Length Unsupported length for

calculating allowable
bending stress.
Notes
a. "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of

local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the
"Deflection Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in
some situations, the "Deflection Length" may be different. A straight line
joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local
deflections are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled
using four joints and three members. The “Deflection Length” for all three
members will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The
parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Thus, for all
three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should be 4.
554 — STAAD.Pro
PARAMETERS
DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL
b. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member
length and local deflections will be measured from original member line.
c. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available param-
eters for steel design.
9B.5 Stability Requirements

appropriate maximum values. Section 3.7 of IS:800 summarizes the maximum
slenderness ratios for different types of members. In STAAD implementation of
IS:800, appropriate maximum slenderness ratio can be provided for each member.
If no maximum slenderness ratio is provided, compression members will be
checked against a maximum value of 180 and tension members will be checked
against a maximum value of 400.
9B.6 Truss Members

As mentioned earlier, a truss member is capable of carrying only axial forces. So in
design no time is wasted in calculating bending or shear stresses, thus reducing
design time considerably. Therefore, if there is any truss member in an analysis

(like bracing or strut, etc.), it is wise to declare it as a truss member rather than as
a regular frame member with both ends pinned.
9B.7 Deflection Check

This facility allows the user to consider deflection as a criteria in the CODE CHECK
and MEMBER SELECTION processes. The deflection check may be controlled using
three parameters which are described in Table 9B.1. Note that deflection is used in
addition to other strength and stability related criteria. The local deflection
calculation is based on the latest analysis results.
9B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to verify whether the specified section is capable
of satisfying applicable design code requirements. The code checking is based on
the IS:800 (1984) requirements. Forces and moments at specified sections of the
members are utilized for the code checking calculations. Sections may be specified
using the BEAM parameter or the SECTION command. If no sections are specified,
the code checking is based on forces and moments at the member ends.
the critical condition (applicable IS:800 clause no.), governing load case, location
(distance from the start) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are
also printed out.

section selected will be of the same type (I-Section, Channel etc.) as originally
specified by the user. Member selection may be performed with all types of steel
sections listed in Section 9B.12 and user provided tables. Selection of members,
whose properties are originally provided from user specified table, will be limited
to sections in the user provided table. Member selection can not be performed on
members whose cross sectional properties are specified as PRISMATIC.
556 — STAAD.Pro
in Table 9B.1. It may be noted that the parameters DMAX and DMIN may be used to
the search for the lightest section is restricted to that profile. Up to three (3) profiles
may be provided for any member with a section being selected from each one.
9B.10 Member Selection By Optimization

Steel section selection of the entire structure may be optimized. The optimization
method utilizes a state-of-the -art numerical technique which requires automatic
multiple analysis. The user may start without a specifically designated section.
However, the section profile type (BEAM, COLUMN, CHANNEL, ANGLE etc.) must
be specified using the ASSIGN command (see Chapter 6). The optimization is based
on member stiffness contributions and corresponding force distributions. An
optimum member size is determined through successive analysis/design iterations.
This method requires substantial computer time and hence should be used with
caution.
Refer to Section 5.48.4 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details.

For code checking or member selection, the program produces the result in a
a. MEMBER refers to the member number for which the design is performed
b. TABLE refers to the INDIAN steel section name which has been checked
against the steel code or has been selected.
c. RESULT prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILed. If the RESULT is
FAIL, there will be an asterisk (*) mark in front of the member number.
d. CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the IS:800 code which governs the
design.
e. RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the crit-
ical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has
passed.
f. LOADING provides the load case number which governs the design.

g. FX, MY and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local y-axis and moment in
local z-axis respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member
forces and moments (except torsion) to perform design, only FX,MY and MZ
are printed since they are the ones which are of interest, in most cases.
i. If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the
table and will print allowable bending stresses in compression (FCY & FCZ)
and tension (FTY & FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and
allowable shear stress (FV). When the parameter TRACK is set to 2.0 for all
members parameter code values are as shown in the following example.
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( IS-800)
v1.0
********************************************
|-------------------------------------------------------------------
-------|
| Y PROP-
ERTIES |
|************* | IN CM
UNIT |
| * |=============================| ===|=== ------
------ |
|MEMBER 7 * | INDIAN SECTIONS | | AX =
85.0 |
| * | ST ISWB400 | | --Z AY =
34.4 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ =
34.7 |
| IS-800 * =============================== ===|=== SY =
138.8 |
| * SZ =
1171.3 |
| * |<---LENGTH (ME= 3.00 --->| RY =
4.0 |
|************* RZ =
16.6 |
|
|
| 112.1( KN-METR)
|
|PARAMETER |L1
STRESSES |
|IN NEWT MM | IN
NEWT MM|
|--------------- + ------
-------|
| KL/R-Y= 74.2 | FA =
150.0 |
558 — STAAD.Pro
| KL/R-Z= 18.1 + fa =
1.0 |
| UNL = 3000.0 | FCZ =
139.9 |
| C = 400.0 + FTZ =
165.0 |
| CMY = 0.60 | FCY =
165.0 |
| CMZ = 0.40 + FTY =
165.0 |
| FYLD = 249.9 | L3 fbz =
95.7 |
| NSF = 0.9 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby =
0.0 |
| DFF = 0.0 90.5 FV =
100.0 |
| dff = 0.0 ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE fv =
17.1 |
| (WITH LOAD NO.)
|
|
|
| MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY ( KN-METR)
|
| -------------------------
|
|
|
| AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z MOMENT-Y MOMENT-
Z |
|
|
| VALUE -23.9 60.6 0.0 0.0 112.1
|
| LOCATION 0.0 3.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
|
| LOADING 3 1 0 0 1
|
|
|
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
|* DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR)
*|
|* --------------
*|
|*
*|
|* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
*|
| FX MY MZ LOCATION
|

| ======================================================
|
| PASS 7.1.2 BEND C 0.684 1
|
| 7.39 T 0.0 -112.1 0.00
|
|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
9B.12 Indian Steel Table

This is an important feature of the program since the program will read section
properties of a steel member directly from the latest ISI steel tables (as published
in ISI-800). These properties are stored in memory corresponding to the section
designation (e.g., ISMB250, etc.). If called for, the properties are also used for
member design. Since the shear areas are built in to these tables, shear
deformation is always considered for these members.
Almost all ISI steel tables are available for input. A complete listing of the sections
available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained using the tools of the
graphical user interface.
Following are the descriptions of all the types of sections available:
Rolled Steel Beams (ISJB, ISLB, ISMB and ISHB)
All rolled steel beam sections are available the way they are designated in the ISI
handbook (e.g., ISJB225, ISWB400, etc.)
20 TO 30 TA ST ISLB325
Note: In case of two identical beams, the heavier beam is designated with an
‘A” on the end (e.g., ISHB400 A, etc.).
1 TO 5 TA ST ISHB400A
Rolled Steel Channels (ISJC, ISLC and ISMC)
All these shapes are available as listed in ISI section handbook. Designation of the
channels are per the scheme used by ISI.
560 — STAAD.Pro
10 TO 20 BY 2 TA ST ISMC125
12 TA ST ISLC300
Double Channels
Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are available.
The letter D in front of the section name will specify a double channel (e.g., D
ISJC125, D ISMC75, etc.).
21 22 24 TA D ISLC225
Rolled Steel Angles
Both rolled steel equal angles and unequal angles are available for use in the
STAAD implementation of ISI steel tables. The following example with explanations
will be helpful in understanding the input procedure:
At present there is no standard way to define the local y and z axes for an angle
section. The standard section has local axis system as illustrated in Fig.2.4 of this
manual. The standard angle is specified as:
51 52 53 TA ST ISA60X60X6
This specification has the local z-axis (i.e., the minor axis corresponding to the V-V
axis specified in the steel tables. Many engineers are familiar with a convention
used by some other programs in which the local y-axis is the minor axis. STAAD
provides for this convention by accepting the command:
54 55 56 TA RA ISA50X30X6
Hint: RA denotes reverse angle

Double Angles
inputting the word SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an
equal angle either LD or SD will serve the purpose. For example,
14 TO 20 TA LD ISA50X30X5 SP 1.5
23 27 TA SD ISA75X50X6
Rolled Tees (ISHT, ISST, ISLT and ISJT)
All the rolled tee sections are available for input as they are specified in the ISI
handbook. The following example illustrates the designated method.
1 2 5 8 TA ST ISNT100
67 68 TA ST ISST250
To designate circular hollow sections from ISI tables, use PIP followed by the
numerical value of diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the
decimal section of the value provided for diameter. The following example will
illustrate the designation.
10 15 TA ST PIP 213.2
specifies a 213 mm dia. pipe with 3.2 mm wall thickness
Circular pipe sections can also be specified by providing the outside and inside
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0ID 20.0
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units
562 — STAAD.Pro
Designation of tubes from the ISI steel table is illustrated below.
For example,
15 TO 25 TA ST TUB 160808
Tubes, like pipes, can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and
Thickness) and not by any table designations.
is a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness of 0.5.
Note: Only code checking and no member selection is performed for TUBE
sections specified this way.
Plate And Angle Girders (With Flange Plates)
All plate and angle grinders (with flange plates) are available as listed in ISI section
handbook. The following example with explanations will be helpful in
understanding the input procedure.

A. Plate and angle girder symbol.

B. Web plate width in mm.
C. Web plate thickness in mm.
D. Flange angle, A X B X t, all in mm.

Table 9B.2 - Flange angle key
Symbol Angle
A 150X150X18
B 200X100X15
C 200X150X18
E 200X200X18
E. Flange plate width in mm.

F. Flange plate thickness in mm.
Single Joist with Channels and Plates on the Flanges to be Used as

Girders
All single joist with channel and plates on the flanges to be used as girders are
available as listed in ISI section handbook. The following example with
explanations will be helpful in understanding the input procedure.
A. Joist Designation
IW450 = ISWB450
B. Top flange channel designation:
350 = ISMC350
C. Constant (always X).
564 — STAAD.Pro
D. Top flange plate thickness in mm.
Note: D = 0 for no plate.
E. Bottom flange plate thickness in mm.
Note: The heavier ISWB600 has been omitted, since the lighter ISWB600 is
more efficient.
9B.13 Column With Lacings And Battens

For columns with large loads it is desirable to build rolled sections at a distance and
inter-connect them. The joining of element sections is done by two ways:
a. Lacing
b. Batten
Double channel sections (back-to-back and face-to-face) can be joined either by

lacing or by batten plates having riveted or welded connection.
Table 9B.3 gives the parameters that are required for Lacing or batten design.
These parameters will have to be provided in unit NEW MMS along with parameters
defined in Table 9B.1.
Table 9B.3 - Parameters used in Indian Lacing or Batten steel

member design.
Name Value
CTYPE 1 Type of joining
1. implies single lacing with riv-

eted connection
2. implies double lacing with riv-
eted connection


Name Value
3. implies single lacing with

welded connection
4. implies double lacing with
welded connection
5. implies batten with riveted
connection
6. implies batten with welded
connection
COG 0.0 mm Center of gravity of the channel.

This parameter is used when
member properties are defined
through user provided table using
GENERAL option.
DBL 20 mm Nominal diameter of rivet
DCFR 0.0 Used when member properties are

defined through user provided
table using GENERAL option.
0. double channel back-to-back.

1. double channel face-to-face.
EDIST 32 mm Edge Distance.

(Rivetted
Connection)
25 mm
(Welded
Connection)
FVB 100 N/mm2 Allowable shear stress in rivet
FYB 300 N/mm2 Allowable bearing stress in rivet
SPA 0.0 mm Spacing between double channels.

This parameter is used when
member properties are defined
through user provided table using
566 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
GENERAL option.
THETA 50 degree Angle of inclination of lacing bars.

It should lie between 40 degree
and 70 degree.
WMIN 6 mm Minimum thickness of weld
WSTR 108 N/mm2 Allowable welding stress

568 — STAAD.Pro
Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS802
Indian Standard code of practice (IS:802-1995 – Part 1) for structural steel design
for overhead transmission line towers in STAAD. The design philosophy and
procedural logistics for member selection and code checking are based upon the
principles of allowable stress design. Two major failure modes are recognized:
failure by overstressing, and failure by stability considerations. The flowing
sections describe the salient features of the allowable stresses being calculated and
the stability criteria being used. Members are proportioned to resist the design
loads without exceeding the allowable stresses and the most economic section is
selected on the basis of least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program
checks stability and strength requirements and reports the critical loading condition
and the governing code criteria.
9C.2 Allowable Stresses

stress design method as per IS:802 (1995). It is a method for proportioning
structural members using design loads and forces, allowable stresses, and design
limitations for the appropriate material under service conditions.
This section discusses the salient features of the allowable stresses specified by
IS:802 and implemented in STAAD.
9C.2.1 Axial Stress
Tensile Stress
The allowable tensile stress, as calculated in STAAD as per IS:802 is described
below.
The estimated tensile stresses on the net effective sectional area in various
members, multiplied by the appropriate factor of safety shall not exceed minimum
guaranteed yield stress of the material.

Thus, the permissible stress in axial tension, σ in MPa on the net effective area of
at
the sections shall not exceed
σ =F
at y
Where:
F = minimum yield stress of steel in Mpa

y
Compressive Stress
The estimated compressive stresses in various members multiplied by the
appropriate factor of safety shall not exceed the value given by the formulae
described below.
I. Condition: when (b/t) ≤ [ (b/t) = 210/√F ]:

lim y
i. When KL/r ≤ C , the allowable compressive stress is (in N/mm2)
c
F = F {1 - 0.5[(KL/r)/C ] 2}
a y c
ii. When KL/r > C , the allowable compressive stress is (in N/mm2)
c
F = π E/(KL/r)2
2
a
II. Condition: when (b/t) < (b/t) ≤ 378/√F :
lim y
The equations in condition 1 shall be used, substituting for F the value F
y cr
given by:
F = F [1.677 - 0.677·(b/t)/(b/t) ]
cr y lim
III. Condition: when (b/t) > 378/√F
y
The equations in condition 1 shall be used, substituting for F the value F
y cr
given by:
F = 65,550/(b/t)
cr
Where:
F = allowable unit stress in compression, Mpa

a
F = minimum guaranteed yield stress of the material, Mpa
y
K = restraint factor,
L = unbraced length of the compression member in cm, and
570 — STAAD.Pro
R = appropriate radius of gyration in cm.
E = modulus of elasticity of steel in N/mm2
KL/r = largest effective slenderness ratio of any unbraced segment of

the member,
b = distance from edge of the fillet to the extreme fibre in mm, and
t = thickness of flange in mm.
Note: The maximum permissible value of b/t for any type of steel shall not
exceed 25.
9C.3 Stability Requirements

appropriate maximum values. Following are the default values used in STAAD:
Compression Member
Table 9C.1 - Slenderness ratio limits of com-

pression members
Type of Member Slenderness
Limit
Leg Members, ground wire peak 120

member and lower members of
cross arms in compression
Other members carrying 200

computed stress
Redundant members and those 250

carrying nominal stresses
Slenderness ratios of compression members are determined as follows:

Table 9C.2 - Compression slenderness ratio calculation depending

on ELA parameter
ELA Type of Member Calculation
Value of KL/r
1 Leg sections or joint members bolted at L/r

connections in both faces
2 Members with concentric loading at both L/r

ends of the unsupported panel with values
of L/r up to and including 120
3 Member with concentric loading at one 30 +

end and normal eccentricities at the other 0.75L/r
end of the unsupported panel for value of
L/r up to and including 120
4 Members with normal framing 60 + 0.5L/r

eccentricities at both ends of the
unsupported panel for values of L/r up to
and including 120
5 Member unrestrained against rotation at L/r

both ends of the unsupported panel for
value of L/r from 120 to 200
6 Members partially restrained against 28.6 +

rotation at one end of the unsupported 0.762L/r
panel for values of L/r over 120 and up to
and including 225
7 Members partially restrained against 46.2 +

rotation at both ends of the unsupported 0.615L/r
panel for values of L/r over 120 and up to
and including 250
If the value for ELA is given in the input for any particular member is such that
condition for L/r ratio to fall within the specified range is not satisfied, STAAD goes
on by the usual way of finding slenderness ratio using KL/r formula.
572 — STAAD.Pro
Tension Members
Slenderness ratio KL/r of a member carrying axial tension only, shall not exceed
400.
9C.4 Minimum Thickness Requirement

As per Clause7.1 of IS: 802-1995 minimum thickness of different tower members
shall be as follows:
Members Minimum Thickness

(mm)
Galvanized Painted
Leg Members, ground wire peak member and 5 6

lower members of cross arms in compression
Other members 4 5
9C.5 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to verify whether the specified section is capable of
satisfying applicable design code requirements. The code checking is based on the
IS:802 (1995) requirements. Axial forces at two ends of the members are utilized
for the code checking calculations.
the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start) and
magnitudes of the governing forces are also printed out. Using TRACK 9 option
calculation steps are also printed.
9C.5.1 Design Steps
The following are the steps used by the program in member design:

1. Thickness of the member (maximum of web and flange thicknesses) is

checked against minimum allowable thickness, depending upon whether the
member is painted or galvanised.
2. If the minimum thickness criterion is fulfilled, the program determines
whether the member is under compression or tension for the loadcase under
consideration. Depending upon whether the member is under tension or
compression the slenderness ratio of the member is calculated. This cal-
culated ratio is checked against allowable slenderness ratio.
3. If the slenderness criterion is fulfilled check against allowable stress is per-
formed. Allowable axial and tensile stresses are calculated. If the member is
under tension and there is no user defined net section factor (NSF), the net
section factor is calculated by the program itself (Refer Section 8C.10).
Actual axial stress in the member is calculated. The ratio for actual stress to
allowable stress, if less than 1.0 or user defined value, the member has
passed the check.
4. Number of bolts required for the critical loadcase is calculated.
9C.6 Member Selection

section selected will be of the same type (either angle or channel) as originally
specified by the user. Member selection may be performed with all angle or
channel sections and user provided tables. Selection of members, whose
properties are originally provided from user specified table, will be limited to
sections in the user provided table.
in Table 9C.3. It may be noted that the parameters DMAX and DMIN may be used to
the search for the lightest section is restricted to that profile. Up to three (3)
profiles may be provided for any member with a section being selected from each
one.
574 — STAAD.Pro
9C.7 Member Selection by Optimization
Steel section selection of the entire structure may be optimized. The optimization
method utilizes a state-of-the -art numerical technique which requires automatic
multiple analysis. The optimization is based on member stiffness contributions and
corresponding force distributions.
An optimum member size is determined through successive analysis/design

iterations. This method requires substantial computer time and hence should be
used with caution.
Refer to Section 5.48.4 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details.
9C.8 Tabulated Results of Steel Design

An example of a TRACK 2.0 output for a compression member is shown here:
v1.0
********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------
------|
| Y PROP-
ERTIES |
|************* | IN CM
UNIT |
| * |=============================| ==| |== -------
----- |
|MEMBER 8 * | INDIAN SECTIONS | | | AX =
17.0 |
| * | ST ISA125x95x8 | | | --Z AY =
6.7 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | | AZ =
5.1 |
| IS-802 * =============================== ==| |== SY =
38.8 |
| * SZ =
16.6 |
| * |<---LENGTH (ME= 1.80 --->| RY =
4.4 |
|************* RZ =
2.0 |
|
|
|
|
|PARAMETER BOLTING
STRESSES |
|IN NEWT MM IN
NEWT MM|

|--------------- ------------- ------

-------|
| L/R-Y = 40.5 BOLT DIA = 12 MM FA =
188.4 |
| L/R-Z = 87.9 BOLT CAP = 24.66 KN fa =
80.7 |
| KL/R = 87.9 # BOLT = 6 FYB =
436.0 |
| FYLD = 250.0 FVB =
218.0 |
| GALVA = 0.0
|
| C = 1.0
|
| LEG = 1.0
|
| ELA = 1.0
|
| NSF = 1.0
|
|
|
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
*|
|* --------------
*|
|*
*|
*|
| FX MY MZ LOCATION
|
| ======================================================
|
| PASS COMPRESSION 0.428 1
|
| 137.13 C 0.0 0.0 0.00
|
|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
|
|
|-------------------------------------------------------------------
-------|
Using TRACK 9.0 also adds the following set of calculation details:
DETAILS OF CALCULATION
576 — STAAD.Pro
----------------------
CHECK FOR MINIMUM THICKNESS
---------------------------
TYPE : PAINTED
MIN. ALLOWABLE THICKNESS : 6.0 MM
ACTUAL THICKNESS : 8.0 MM
RESULT : PASS
CHECK FOR SLENDERNESS RATIO
---------------------------
VALUE OF L/r : 87.94
EQN. USED TO FIND KL/r : L/r
ACTUAL VALUE OF KL/r : 87.94
ALLOWABLE KL/r : 120.00
RESULT : PASS
CALCULATION OF ALLOWABLE STRESS
---------------------------------
CRITICAL CONDITION : COMPRESSION
Cc : sqrt(2*3.14159265*3.14159265*E : 127.53
b : LENGTH OF LEG - WEB THICKNESS - ROOT RADIUS
: 125.0 - 8.0 - 9.0 : 108.0 MM
(b/t)lim : 210/sqrt(fy) : 13.28
(b/t)cal : 13.50
(b/t)cal > (b/t)lim
(b/t)lim (modified) : 378/sqrt(fy) : 23.91
(b/t)cal <= (b/t)lim (modified) AND KL/r <= Cc
Fcr : (1.677 - (0.677*(b/t)cal/(b/t)lim))*fy : 247.18 MPA
ALLOWABLE AXIAL COMP. STRESS : (1-0.5*(KL/r/Cc)*(KL/r/Cc))*Fcr :
188.41 MPA
CHECK AGAINST PERMISSIBLE STRESS
--------------------------------
LOAD NO. : 1
DESIGN AXIAL FORCE : 137131.16 N
ACTUAL AXIAL COMP. STRESS : 137131.16 / 1700.0 : 80.67 MPA
RESULT : PASS
EXAMPLE PROBLEM NO.1 -- PAGE
NO. 24
BOLTING
-------
BOLT DIA : 12 MM
SHEARING CAP : 24.66 KN
BEARING CAP : 41.86 KN
BOLT CAP : 24.66 KN
NO. OF BOLTS REQD. : 6
************** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN **************

Table 9C.3 - Indian Steel Design IS 802 Parameters

Name Value
CNSF 0.0 This parameter indicates whether

user has defined the net section
factor or the program will calculate
it.
0. Use specified NSF value

1. Net section factor will be cal-
culated.
DANGLE 0.0 This parameter indicates how the

pair of angles are connected to
each other. This is required to find
whether the angle is in single or
double shear and the net section
factor.
0. Double angle placed back-to-

back and connected to each
side of a gusset plate
1. Pair of angle placed back-to-
back connected by only one
leg of each angle to the same
side of a gusset plate
DBL 12 mm Diameter of bolt for calculation of

number of bolts and net section
factor.
DMAX 100.0 cm. Maximum allowable depth.
DMIN 0.0 cm. Minimum allowable depth.
ELA 1.0 This parameter indicates what type
578 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
of end conditions is to be used.

Refer Section 9C.3.
FVB 218 MPA Allowable shear stress in bolt
FYB 436 MPA Allowable bearing stress in bolt
FYLD 250 MPA Yield Strength of steel
GUSSET 5 mm Thickness of gusset plate.
Minimum of the thicknesses of the

gusset plate and the leg is used for
calculation of the capacity of bolt in
bearing

is minor axis.

is major axis.
LEG 1.0 This parameter is meant for plain

angles.
0. The angle is connected by

shorter leg
1. The angle is connected by
longer leg
LY Member Unbraced length in local z-axis to

Length calculate slenderness ratio.
LZ Member Unbraced length in local z-axis to

Length calculate slenderness ratio.
MAIN 1.0 Type of member to find allowable

Kl/r for slenderness calculations for
members.
1. Leg, Ground wire peak and

lower members of cross arms


Name Value
in compression (KL/r = 120)

2. Members carrying computed
stress (KL/r = 200)
3. Redundant members and
members carrying nominal
stresses (KL/r = 250)
4. Tension members (KL/r =
400)
10. Do not perform KL/r check
Any value greater than 10.0

indicates user defined allowable
KL/r ratio. For this case KY and KZ
values are must to find actual KL/r
ratio of the member.

members
NHL 0.0 mm Deduction for holes.
Default value is one bolt width plus

1.5 mm. If the area of holes cut by
any straight, diagonal or zigzag
line across the member is different
from the default value, this
parameter is to be defined.
TRACK 0.0 Level of output detail:
0. Suppress critical member

stresses
1. Print all critical member
stresses
2. Print expanded output.
9. Print design calculations

along with expanded output
580 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
(not available in GUI input).
9C.10 Calculation of Net Section Factor

The procedure for calculating the net section factor for an angle section is as
follows:
l For a channel section, net section factor is taken to be 1.0.
l For an angle section, it is the ratio of the net effective area, A , to the gross
net
area, where:
a. Single angle connected by only one leg
A =A +A ·K
net 1 2 1
Where:
A = net cross-sectional area of the connected leg

1
A = gross cross-sectional area of the unconnected leg
2
K = 3·A /(3·A + A )
1 1 1 2
The area of a leg of an angle = Thickness of angle x (length of leg –
0.5x thickness of leg)
b. Pair of angles placed back-to-back connected by only one leg of each

angle to the same side of a gusset plate
A =A +A ·K
net 1 2 1
Where:
A = net cross-sectional area of the connected leg

1
A = gross cross-sectional area of the unconnected leg
2
K = 5·A /(5·A + A )
1 1 1 2
The area of a leg of an angle = Thickness of angle x (length of leg –
0.5x thickness of leg)

c. Double angles placed back-to-back and connected to each side of a

gusset plate
A = gross area minus the deduction for holes

net
9C.11 Example Problem No. 28

A transmission line tower is subjected to different loading conditions. Design some
members as per IS-802 and show detailed calculation steps for the critical loading
condition.
Given
End Condition = Members with normal framing eccentricities at both ends of the
unsupported panel for values of L/r up to and including 120
Diameter of the bolt = 16 mm
582 — STAAD.Pro
Thickness of the gusset plate = 8 mm
Net Section Factor is to be calculated.
STAAD Input File
This input file is included with the program as

C:\SPROV8I\STAAD\EXAMP\IND\EXAMP28.STD.
STAAD TRUSS
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 3 0 3; 2 1.2 27 1.2; 3 2.8 3 2.8; 4 2.6 6 2.6; 5 2.4 9 2.4;
6 2.2 12 2.2; 7 2 15 2; 8 1.8 18 1.8; 9 1.6 21 1.6; 10 1.4 24 1.4;
11 -3 0 3; 12 -1.2 27 1.2; 13 -2.8 3 2.8; 14 -2.6 6 2.6; 15 -2.4 9 2.4;
16 -2.2 12 2.2; 17 -2 15 2; 18 -1.8 18 1.8; 19 -1.6 21 1.6; 20 -1.4 24
1.4;
21 3 0 -3; 22 1.2 27 -1.2; 23 2.8 3 -2.8; 24 2.6 6 -2.6; 25 2.4 9 -2.4;
26 2.2 12 -2.2; 27 2 15 -2; 28 1.8 18 -1.8; 29 1.6 21 -1.6; 30 1.4 24 -
1.4;
31 -3 0 -3; 32 -1.2 27 -1.2; 33 -2.8 3 -2.8; 34 -2.6 6 -2.6; 35 -2.4 9 -
2.4;
36 -2.2 12 -2.2; 37 -2 15 -2; 38 -1.8 18 -1.8; 39 -1.6 21 -1.6;
40 -1.4 24 -1.4; 41 1.2 30 1.2; 42 -1.2 30 1.2; 43 1.2 30 -1.2;
44 -1.2 30 -1.2; 45 4.2 27 1.2; 46 7.2 27 1.2; 47 4.2 30 1.2; 48 4.2 27
-1.2;
49 7.2 27 -1.2; 50 4.2 30 -1.2; 51 -4.2 27 1.2; 52 -7.2 27 1.2;
53 -4.2 30 1.2; 54 -4.2 27 -1.2; 55 -7.2 27 -1.2; 56 -4.2 30 -1.2;
57 1.2 33 1.2; 58 -1.2 33 1.2; 59 1.2 33 -1.2; 60 -1.2 33 -1.2; 61 0 35
0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 3; 2 3 4; 3 4 5; 4 5 6; 5 6 7; 6 7 8; 7 8 9; 8 9 10; 9 10 2; 10 11 13;

11 13 14; 12 14 15; 13 15 16; 14 16 17; 15 17 18; 16 18 19; 17 19

20; 18 20 12;
19 13 3; 20 14 4; 21 15 5; 22 16 6; 23 17 7; 24 18 8; 25 19 9; 26 20
10;
27 12 2; 28 11 3; 29 1 13; 30 13 4; 31 3 14; 32 14 5; 33 15 4; 34 15
6;
35 16 5; 36 16 7; 37 17 6; 38 17 8; 39 18 7; 40 18 9; 41 19 8; 42 19
10;
43 20 9; 44 20 2; 45 12 10; 46 21 23; 47 23 24; 48 24 25; 49 25 26;
50 26 27;
51 27 28; 52 28 29; 53 29 30; 54 30 22; 55 3 23; 56 4 24; 57 5 25;
58 6 26;
59 7 27; 60 8 28; 61 9 29; 62 10 30; 63 2 22; 64 1 23; 65 21 3; 66 3
24;
67 23 4; 68 4 25; 69 5 24; 70 5 26; 71 6 25; 72 6 27; 73 7 26; 74 7
28;
75 8 27; 76 8 29; 77 9 28; 78 9 30; 79 10 29; 80 10 22; 81 2 30; 82
31 33;
83 33 34; 84 34 35; 85 35 36; 86 36 37; 87 37 38; 88 38 39; 89 39
40; 90 40 32;
91 23 33; 92 24 34; 93 25 35; 94 26 36; 95 27 37; 96 28 38; 97 29
39; 98 30 40;
99 22 32; 100 21 33; 101 31 23; 102 23 34; 103 33 24; 104 24 35;
105 25 34;
106 25 36; 107 26 35; 108 26 37; 109 27 36; 110 27 38; 111 28 37;
112 28 39;
113 29 38; 114 29 40; 115 30 39; 116 30 32; 117 22 40; 118 33 13;
119 34 14;
120 35 15; 121 36 16; 122 37 17; 123 38 18; 124 39 19; 125 40 20;
126 32 12;
127 31 13; 128 11 33; 129 33 14; 130 13 34; 131 34 15; 132 35 14;
133 35 16;
134 36 15; 135 36 17; 136 37 16; 137 37 18; 138 38 17; 139 38 19;
140 39 18;
141 39 20; 142 40 19; 143 40 12; 144 32 20; 145 32 44; 146 12 42;
147 2 41;
584 — STAAD.Pro
148 22 43; 149 42 41; 150 41 43; 151 43 44; 152 44 42; 153 12 41;
154 42 2;
155 22 41; 156 43 2; 157 43 32; 158 44 22; 159 12 44; 160 32 42;
161 41 47;
162 47 45; 163 45 2; 164 47 46; 165 46 45; 166 41 45; 167 43 50;
168 50 48;
169 48 22; 170 50 49; 171 49 48; 172 43 48; 173 47 50; 174 46 49;
175 45 48;
176 41 50; 177 50 46; 178 43 47; 179 47 49; 180 22 50; 181 2 47;
182 22 45;
183 2 48; 184 47 48; 185 50 45; 186 45 49; 187 48 46; 188 42 53;
189 53 51;
190 51 12; 191 53 52; 192 52 51; 193 42 51; 194 44 56; 195 56 54;
196 54 32;
197 56 55; 198 55 54; 199 44 54; 200 53 56; 201 52 55; 202 51 54;
203 42 56;
204 56 52; 205 44 53; 206 53 55; 207 32 56; 208 12 53; 209 32 51;
210 12 54;
211 53 54; 212 56 51; 213 51 55; 214 54 52; 215 44 60; 216 42 58;
217 41 57;
218 43 59; 219 60 59; 220 59 57; 221 57 58; 222 58 60; 223 44 58;
224 42 60;
225 42 57; 226 41 58; 227 44 59; 228 43 60; 229 43 57; 230 41 59;
231 60 57;
232 59 58; 235 33 3; 236 13 23; 237 34 4; 238 14 24; 239 35 5; 240
15 25;
241 36 6; 242 16 26; 243 37 7; 244 17 27; 245 38 8; 246 18 28; 247
39 9;
248 19 29; 249 40 10; 250 20 30; 251 32 2; 252 22 12; 253 44 41;
254 43 42;
255 60 61; 256 58 61; 257 57 61; 258 59 61;
MEMBER PROPERTY INDIAN
1 TO 18 46 TO 54 82 TO 90 145 TO 148 215 TO 218 TA LD
ISA200X150X18 SP 0.01
19 TO 26 28 TO 45 55 TO 62 64 TO 81 91 TO 98 100 TO 125 127 TO
144 155 156 -
159 160 223 224 229 230 235 TO 250 TA ST ISA150X150X10

27 63 99 126 149 TO 154 157 158 161 TO 214 219 TO 222 225 TO
228 231 232 251 -
252 TO 258 TA ST ISA80X50X6
CONSTANTS
E 2.05E+008 ALL
POISSON 0.3 ALL
DENSITY 76.8195 ALL
ALPHA 6.5E-006 ALL
SUPPORTS
1 11 21 31 FIXED
UNIT METER KG
LOAD 1 VERT
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 732
46 49 52 55 FX 153
61 FX 1280 FY -1016 FZ 160
46 49 52 55 FX 9006 FY -7844 FZ 1968
2 12 22 32 FX 4503 FY -3937 FZ 1968
LOAD 2 GWBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 515 FY -762 FZ 2342
46 49 52 55 FX 6755 FY -5906
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
LOAD 3 LEFT PCBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
586 — STAAD.Pro
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 960 FY -762
46 49 FX 6755 FY -5906
52 55 FX 4211 FY -4551 FZ 13293
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
LOAD 4 RIGHT PCBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 960 FY -762
52 55 FX 6755 FY -5906
46 49 FX 4211 FY -4551 FZ 13293
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
PERFORM ANALYSIS
UNIT NEW MMS
PARAMETER
CODE IS802
LY 2800 MEMB 28
LZ 2800 MEMB 28
MAIN 1.0 MEMB 1
ELA 4 MEMB 1
CNSF 1.0 MEMB 28
DBL 16 ALL
GUSSET 8 ALL
TRACK 9 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 1 28
FINISH

Output
A portion of the output for the TRACK 9.0 member code check follows:
v1.0
********************************************
|-------------------------------------------------------------------
-------|
| Y PROP-
ERTIES |
|************* | IN CM
UNIT |
| * |=============================| ==||== ------
------ |
|MEMBER 1 * | INDIAN SECTIONS | || AX =
120.0 |
| * | LD ISA200X150X18 | || --Z AY =
48.0 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | || AZ =
36.0 |
| IS-802 * |-----------------------------| || SY =
297.3 |
| * SZ =
350.6 |
| * |<---LENGTH (ME= 3.01 --->| RY =
6.2 |
|************* RZ =
6.3 |
|
|
|
|
|PARAMETER BOLTING
STRESSES |
|IN NEWT MM IN
NEWT MM|
|--------------- ------------- ------
-------|
| L/R-Y = 48.6 BOLT DIA = 16 MM FA =
195.1 |
| L/R-Z = 47.7 BOLT CAP = 55.81 KN fa =
145.2 |
| KL/R = 84.3 # BOLT = 32 FYB =
436.0 |
| FYLD = 250.0 FVB =
218.0 |
| GALVA = 0.0
|
| C = 1.0
|
588 — STAAD.Pro
| LEG = 1.0
|
| ELA = 4.0
|
| NSF = 1.0
|
|
|
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
*|
|* --------------
*|
|*
*|
*|
| FX MY MZ LOCATION
|
| ======================================================
|
| PASS COMPRESSION 0.744 1
|
| 1742.26 C 0.0 0.0 0.00
|
|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
|
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------
------|
STAAD TRUSS -- PAGE
NO. 5
----------------------
---------------------------
TYPE : PAINTED
RESULT : PASS
---------------------------
EQN. USED TO FIND KL/r : 60.0 + 0.5*L/r

RESULT : PASS
---------------------------------
CRITICAL CONDITION : COMPRESSION
Cc : sqrt(2*3.14159265*3.14159265*E : 127.24
b : LENGTH OF LEG - WEB THICKNESS - ROOT RADIUS
: 200.0 - 18.0 - 15.0 : 167.0 MM
(b/t)lim : 210/sqrt(fy) : 13.28
(b/t)cal : 9.28
(b/t)cal <= (b/t)lim AND KL/r <= Cc
ALLOWABLE AXIAL COMP. STRESS : (1-0.5*(KL/r/Cc)*(KL/r/Cc))*fy :
195.07 MPA
--------------------------------
LOAD NO. : 1
ACTUAL AXIAL COMP. STRESS :1742259.75 / 12000.0 : 145.19 MPA
RESULT : PASS
STAAD TRUSS -- PAGE
NO. 6
BOLTING
-------
BOLT DIA : 16 MM
BOLT CAP : 55.81 KN
STAAD TRUSS -- PAGE
NO. 7
v1.0
********************************************
|-------------------------------------------------------------------
-------|
| Y PROP-
ERTIES |
|************* | IN CM
UNIT |
| * |=============================| ==| |== ------
------ |
|MEMBER 28 * | INDIAN SECTIONS | | | AX =
29.2 |
| * | ST ISA150X150X10 | | | --Z AY =
10.0 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | | AZ =
10.0 |
| IS-802 * =============================== ==| |== SY =
95.7 |
| * SZ =
44.8 |
590 — STAAD.Pro
| * |<---LENGTH (ME= 6.53 --->| RY =
5.9 |
|************* RZ =
3.0 |
|
|
|
|
|PARAMETER BOLTING
STRESSES |
|IN NEWT MM IN
NEWT MM|
|--------------- ------------- -------
------|
| L/R-Y = 47.5 BOLT DIA = 16 MM FA =
249.9 |
| L/R-Z = 94.0 BOLT CAP = 43.83 KN fa =
48.5 |
| KL/R = 94.0 # BOLT = 3 FYB =
436.0 |
| FYLD = 250.0 FVB =
218.0 |
| GALVA = 0.0
|
| C = 1.0
|
| LEG = 1.0
|
| ELA = 1.0
|
| NSF = 0.8
|
|
|
|**************************************************************************|
|*
*|
*|
|* --------------
*|
|*
*|
*|
| FX MY MZ LOCATION
|
| ======================================================
|
| PASS TENSION 0.194 3
|
| 112.86 T 0.0 0.0 6.53
|

|*
*|
|**************************************************************************|
|
|
|-------------------------------------------------------------------
-------|
STAAD TRUSS -- PAGE
NO. 8
----------------------
---------------------------
TYPE : PAINTED
RESULT : PASS
---------------------------
EQN. USED TO FIND KL/r : K*L/r
RESULT : PASS
---------------------------------
CRITICAL CONDITION : TENSION
ALLOWABLE AXIAL TENSILE STRESS : 249.94 MPA
--------------------------------
LOAD NO. : 3
ACTUAL AXIAL TENSILE STRESS : 112855.91 / ( 2920.0*0.797 ) :
48.51 MPA
RESULT : PASS
BOLTING
-------
BOLT DIA : 16 MM
BOLT CAP : 43.83 KN
STAAD TRUSS -- PAGE
NO. 9
************** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN **************
592 — STAAD.Pro
Indian Codes - Design per Indian Cold Formed
Steel Code
9D.1 General
Provisions of IS:801-1975, including revisions dated May, 1988, have been
implemented. The program allows design of single (non-composite) members in
tension, compression, bending, shear, as well as their combinations. Cold work of
forming strengthening effects has been included as an option.
9D.2 Cross-Sectional Properties

shape designations from the Gross Section Property Tables from IS:811-1987
(Specification for cold formed light gauge structural steel sections).
l Channel with Lips
l Angle without Lips
l Z with Lips
l Hat
Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of the graphical
file.
9D.3 Design Procedure

The program calculates effective section properties in accordance with Clause
5.2.1.1. Cross-sectional properties and overall slenderness of members are
checked for compliance with

Indian Codes - Design per Indian Cold Formed Steel Code
l Clause 6.6.3, Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio for members in

Compression
l Clause 5.2.3, Maximum Flat Width Ratios for Elements in Compression
l Clause 5.2.4, Maximum Section Depths.
The program will check member strength in accordance with Clause 6 of the
Standard as follows:
Members in tension
Resistance is calculated in accordance with Clauses 6.1
Members in bending and shear
l Clause 6.4.1 Shear stress in webs,

l Clause 6.4.2 Bending stress in webs
l Clause 6.4.3 Combined Bending and Shear in Webs.
Members in compression
l Clause 6.2 Compression on flat unstiffened element,

l Clause 6.6.1.1 Shapes not subject to torsional-flexural buckling,
l Clause 6.6.1.2 Singly-symmetric sections and nonsymmetrical shapes of
open cross section or intermittently fastened singly-symmetrical components
of built-up shapes having Q = 1.0 which may be subject to torsional-flexural
buckling,
l Clause 6.6.1.3 Singly-symmetric sections and nonsymmetrical shapes or
intermittently fastened singly-symmetrical components of built-up shapes
having Q < 1.0 which may be subject to torsional-flexural buckling,
l Clause 6.8 Cylindrical Tubular Sections.
Members in compression and bending
594 — STAAD.Pro
l All clauses for members in compression
l Clause 6.3 Laterally Unsupported Members,
l Clause 6.7.1 Doubly-symmetric shapes or Shapes not subjected to torsional
or torsional-flexural buckling
l Clause 6.7.2. Singly-symmetric shapes or Intermittently fastened singly-sym-
metric components of built-up shapes having Q=1.0 which may be subjected
to torsional-flexural buckling
l Clause 6.7.3. Singly-symmetric shapes or Intermittently fastened singly-sym-
metric components of built-up shapes having Q<1.0 which may be subjected
to torsional-flexural buckling.
9D.4 Code Checking and Member Selection

Code Checking
The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load effects, in
accordance with IS:801-1975. Code checking is carried out for locations specified
by the user via the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter. The results are
presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a RATIO of load effect to
resistance for each member checked. The user may choose the degree of detail in
the output data by setting the TRACK parameter.
Member Selection
The user may request that the program search the cold formed steel shapes
database (IS standard sections) for alternative members that pass the code check
and meet the least weight criterion. In addition, a minimum and/or maximum
acceptable depth of the member may be specified. The program will then evaluate
all database sections of the type initially specified (i.e., channel, angle, etc.) and, if
a suitable replacement is found, presents design results for that section. If no
section satisfying the depth restrictions or lighter than the initial one can be found,
the program leaves the member unchanged, regardless of whether it passes the
code check or not.


Input for the coefficients of uniform bending must be specified.
The following table contains the input parameters for specifying values of design
variables and selection of design options.
Table 9D.1 - Indian cold formed steel design parameters

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as IS801

Reference Manual.
1.0 When this parameter is set to
BEAM 0. the 13 location check is not

checking is done only at the
locations specified by the
SECTION command (See
STAAD manual for details.
For TRUSS members only
start and end locations are
designed.
1. the adequacy of the member
is determined by checking a
total of 13 equally spaced
locations along the length of
the member.
596 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
CMY 0.85 Coefficient of equivalent uniform

bending Ω . See IS:801-1975, 6.7.
y
0.4 to 1.0.
CMZ 1.0 Coefficient of equivalent uniform

bending Ω . See IS:801-1975, 6.7.
z
0.4 to 1.0.
CWY 0.85 Specifies whether the cold work of

forming strengthening effect
should be included in resistance
computation. See IS:801-1975,
6.1.1
0. effect should not be included

1. effect should be included
FLX 1 Specifies whether torsional-

flexural buckling restraint is
provided or is not necessary for
the member. See IS:801-1975,
6.6.1
0. Section not subject to tor-

sional flexural buckling
1. Section subject to torsional
flexural buckling
FU 450 MPa Ultimate tensile strength of steel in

current units.
(4588.72
kg/cm2)
FYLD 353.04 MPa Yield strength of steel in current

units.
(3600.0


Name Value
kg/cm2)
KX 1.0 Effective length factor for torsional

buckling. It is a fraction and is
unit-less. Values can range from
0.01 (for a column completely
prevented from buckling) to any
user specified large value. It is
used to compute the KL/R ratio for
twisting for determining the
KY 1.0 Effective length factor for overall

buckling about the local Y-axis. It
is a fraction and is unit-less. Values
can range from 0.01 (for a column
completely prevented from
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor for overall

buckling in the local Z-axis. It is a
fraction and is unit-less. Values can
range from 0.01 (for a member
completely prevented from
LX Member Unbraced length for twisting. It is

length input in the current units of length.
member completely prevented
from torsional buckling) to any
user specified large value. It is
used to compute the KL/R ratio for
598 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
twisting for determining the

LY Member Effective length for overall

length buckling in the local Y-axis. It is
from buckling) to any user
compute the KL/R ratio for
determining the capacity in axial
compression.
LZ Member Effective length for overall

length buckling in the local Z-axis. It is
from buckling) to any user
compute the KL/R ratio for
determining the capacity in axial
compression.
MAIN 0 0 – Check slenderness ratio
0 – Do not check slenderness ratio

members
DMAX 2540.0 Maximum allowable depth, in the

current units.
cm.

allowable stresses
STIFF Member Spacing of shear stiffeners for stiff-

Length ened flat webs, in current units.


Name Value
TRACK 0 This parameter is used to control

the level of detail in which the
design output is reported in the
output file. The allowable values
are:
0. Prints only the member

number, section name, ratio,
and PASS/FAIL status.
1. Prints the design summary in
addition to that printed by
TRACK 0
2. Prints member and material
properties in addition to that
printed by TRACK 1.
TSA 1 Specifies whether webs of flexural

members are adequately stiffened
to satisfy the requirements of
IS:801-1975, 5.2.4.
0. Do not comply with 5.2.4

1. Comply with 5.2.4
600 — STAAD.Pro
Section 10
Japanese Codes

602 — STAAD.Pro
Japanese Codes - Concrete Design Per 1991 AIJ
STAAD has the capabilities of performing concrete design based on the AIJ
standard for structural calculation of Reinforced Concrete Structures (1991
edition). Design for a member involves calculation of the amount of reinforcement
required for the member. Calculations are based on the user specified properties
and the member forces obtained from the analysis. In addition, the details
regarding placement of the reinforcement on the cross section are also reported in
the output.

The following types of cross sections for concrete members can be designed:
l For Beams — Prismatic (Rectangular and Square)

section properties input under the MEMBER PROPERTY command. These are the D
(YD) and b (ZD) dimensions for rectangular or square cross sections and the D (YD)
for circular cross sections.
The following is an example the required input:
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
provided, will be assumed to be circular with a 350 mm diameter.

Warning: It is absolutely imperative that you do not provide the cross section
area (AX) as an input.

siderations
Slenderness effects result in additional forces being exerted on the column over
and above those obtained from the elastic analysis. There are two options by
which the slenderness effects can be accommodated.
The first option is to compute the secondary moments through an exact analysis.
Secondary moments are caused by the interaction of the axial loads and the
relative end displacements of a member. The axial loads and joint displacements
are first determined from an elastic stiffness analysis and the secondary moments
are then evaluated.
The second option is to approximately magnify the moments from the elastic
analysis and design the column for the magnified moment. It is assumed that the
magnified moment is equivalent to the total moment comprised of the sum of
primary and secondary moments.
STAAD provides facilities to design according to both of the above methods. To

utilize the first method, the command PDELTA ANALYSIS must be used instead of
PERFORM ANALYSIS in the input file. The user must note that to take advantage of
this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be provided as primary load
cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that load combinations
are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments, whereas a primary load
case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Also, note that
the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be provided by the
user. STAAD does not factor the loads automatically. The second method
mentioned above is utilized by providing the magnification factor as a concrete
design parameter (See the parameter MMAG in Table 10A.1). The column is
designed for the axial load and total of primary and secondary biaxial moments if
the first method is used and for the axial load and magnified biaxial moments if the
second method is used.
604 — STAAD.Pro
10A.5 Beam Design
Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. The program considers 12
equally spaced divisions of the beam member. However this number can be
redefined by NSECTION parameter. All these sections are designed for flexure,
shear and torsion for all load cases. The results include design results for most
critical load case.
Example
UNIT KG CM
CODE JAPAN
FYMAIN SRR295 ALL
FYSEC SRR295 ALL
FC 350 ALL
CLEAR 2.5 MEM 2 TO 6
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
10A.5.1 Design for Flexure
Reinforcement for positive and negative moments are calculated on the basis of
section properties provided by the user. Program first try to design the section for g
= 0 and pt = balanced reinforcement ratio. If allowable moment is lower than the
actual moment program increases g value for same pt and checks the satisfactory
conditions. If conditions are not satisfied this procedure continues until g reaches
to 1.0 and then pt value is increased keeping g = 1.0. This procedure continues
until pt reaches to its maximum value( 2 % ). But if the allowable moment for pt =
maximum value and g = 1.0 is lower than the actual moment the program gives
message that the section fails.
This program automatically calculates the Bar size and no. of bars needed to design
the section. It arranges the bar in layers as per the requirements and recalculate the
effective depth and redesign the sections for this effective depth.
Notes:

a. Beams are designed for MZ only. The moment MY is not considered in

flexure design
b. MMAG parameter can be used to increase design moment
c. 1.4 cm. is added to the clear cover to take stirrup size into consideration for
flexure design.
d. STAAD beam design procedure is based on the local practice and

considering the fact that Japan is a high seismic zone area.
10A.5.2 Design for Shear
The Design Shear value, Q , is evaluated for the beam. The update effective depth
D
is used to then calculate the allowable shear stress. The allowable shear stress of
concrete, f , is automatically calculated from design load type (permanent or
s
temporary) and given density of concrete. The program then calculates the
required bar size, aw, and spacing of stirrups. The reinforcement ratio for the
stirrup, p , is calculated for design Bar size and stirrup pitch and all the necessary
w
checking is done.
For seismic loading it is needed to increase shear force ≥ 1.5 times the actual value
and this can be done utilizing the Design Shear Modification factor, k (SMAG
parameter) without changing the Design Moment.
Notes:
a. Stirrups are always assumed to be 2-legged
b. Governing density to determine Light weight or Normal Weight Concrete is

2.3 kg/sq. cm
10A.5.4 Design for Torsion
Torsion design for beam is optional. If the TORSION parameter value is 1.0, the
program will design the assigned beam(s) for torsion. The program first checks
whether extra reinforcement is needed for torsion or not. If additional
reinforcement is needed, this additional pt is added to flexure pt and additional Pw
is added to shear design Pw.
606 — STAAD.Pro
10A.6 Column Design
Columns are designed for axial force, MZ moment, MY moment, and shear force.
Both the ends of the members are designed for all the load cases and the loading
which produces largest amount of reinforcement is called as critical load. If Track 0
or Track 1 is used, design results will be printed for critical load only. But if Track 2
is used, you can get detailed design results of that member. The value of Pt needed
for minimum axial force, maximum axial force, maximum MZ, maximum MY among
all the load cases for both the ends will be printed. If the MMAG parameter is used,
the column moments will be multiplied by that value. If the SMAG parameter is used,
column shear force will be multiplied by that value.
Column design is done for Rectangular, Square and Circular sections. For
rectangular and square sections Pt value is calculated separately for MZ and MY,
while for circular sections Pg value is calculated for MZ and MY separately.
Column design for biaxial moments is optional. If the BIAXIAL parameter value is
1.0, the program will design the column for biaxial moments. Otherwise column
design is always uniaxial.
Steps involved:
1. Depending on the axial force zone is determined for Pt = 0.0 .
2. If the column is in "zone A", design is performed by increasing Pt and

checking allowable load for that known Pt and known actual eccentricity of
the column.
3. If the column is in "zone B" or in "zone C", xn is calculated for given P and Pt
and checking is done for allowable moment, if allowable moment is less than
the actual moment, program increases Pt and this procedure continues until
the column design conditions are satisfied or the column fails as the required
Pt is higher than Pt maximum value.
4. If the column is in tension, design is done by considering allowable tensile

stress of steel only.
5. If biaxial design is requested program solve the following interaction

equation
6. where, a = 1.0+1.66666666 ´ (ratio-0.2), ratio = P/Pcap & 1.0 £ a £ 2.0,

Mycap, Mzcap & Pcap represents section capacity
7. If the interaction equation is not satisfied program increases Pt and calculates

Pcap, Mycap and Mzcap and solve the interaction equation again and this
process continues until the eqn. is satisfied or the column fails as Pt exceeds
its maximum limit.
8. If biaxial design is not requested program assumes that interaction equation

is satisfied (if uniaxial design is performed successfully).
9. If the interaction equation is satisfied program determines bar size and

calculates no. of bars and details output is written.
Example
UNIT KGS CMS

CODE JAPAN
FYMAIN SRR295 ALL
FC 210 ALL
CLEAR 2.5 MEMB 2 TO 6
END CONCRETE DESIGN

To design a slab or a wall, it must first be modeled using finite elements and
analyzed. The command specifications are in accordance with Chapter 2 and
Chapter 6 of the Technical Reference Manual.
from the element force output (see Chapter 2 of the Technical Reference Manual).
The reinforcement required to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal
reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist the My moment is denoted
as transverse reinforcement.
The longitudinal bar is the layer closest to the exterior face of the slab or wall. The
following parameters are those applicable to slab and wall design:
1. FYMAIN — Yield stress for reinforcing steel - transverse and longitudinal.
2. FC— Concrete grade
3. CLEAR — Distance from the outer surface of the element to the edge of the
608 — STAAD.Pro
bar. This is considered the same on both top and bottom surfaces of the
element.
4. MINMAIN — Minimum required size of longitudinal/transverse reinforcing bar
The other parameters shown in Table 10A.1 are not applicable to slab or wall
design.

to suit the particular design being performed. Table 10A.1 contains a complete list
of the available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare
length and force units as centimeters and Kilograms before performing the concrete
design.
Table 10A.1 - Japanese Concrete Design Parameters

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as JAPAN.

Manual.
BIAXIAL 0.0 Value to define biaxial or uniaxial

design type for Column
0. uniaxial design only

1. design for biaxial moments
CLEAR 3.0 cm Clear cover for Beam or clear side

(beam) cover for column.
4.0 cm
(Column)


Name Value
DEPTH YD Depth of concrete member. This

value defaults to YD as provided

beam. (Note: Both SFACE & EFACE
are input as positive numbers).
FC 210 Kg/cm2 Compressive Strength of Concrete.
FYMAIN SR235 Steel grade. Acceptable values for

steel grade and their associated
yield stress values are shown in the
following table. Program
automatically calculates yield stress
value depending on design load
type (permanent or temporary).
FYSEC SR235 Same as FYMAIN except this is for

secondary steel.
LONG 0.0 Value to define design load type
0. Permanent Loading
1. Temporary Loading
MAXMAIN 41.0 cm Maximum main reinforcement bar

size
MAXSEC 41.0 cm Maximum secondary reinforcement

bar size.

size.

bar size.
MMAG 1.0 Design moment magnification

factor
610 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value

moments for beam design.
REINF 0.0 Tied Column. A value of 1.0 will

mean spiral.

beam.
SMAG 1.0 Design shear magnification factor
TORSION 0.0 Value to request for torsion design

for beam
0. torsion design not needed

1. torsion design needed
0. Critical section design results.

1. Five section design results &
design forces.
2. 12 section design results &
design forces.
Column Design:
1. Detail design results for crit-

ical load case only.
2. Design results for minimum
P, maximum P, maximum MZ
and maximum MY among all
load cases for both ends.
WIDTH ZD Width of concrete member. This


Table 10A.2 - Table of permissible Steel Grades and associated Yield Stresses for
FYMAIN and FYSEC parameters
Steel Long Term Loading Short Term Loading
Grade
Tension Shear Rein- Tension Shear Rein-
& Compression forcement & Compression forcement
SR235 1600 1600 2400 2400

SRR235
SDR235
SR295 1600 2000 3000 3000

SRR295
SD295A 2000 2000 3000 3000

SD295B
SDR295
SDR345 2200 (2000) 2000 3500 3500

SD345
SD390 2200 (2000) 2000 4000 4000
612 — STAAD.Pro
Japanese Codes - Steel Design Per 2005 AIJ
10B.(A) Japanese Codes - Steel Design Per
2002 AIJ
10B.1(A) General
“Architectural Institute of Japan” (AIJ) specifications for structural steel design
(1986 and 2002 editions) in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural
logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis and allowable stress design.
Facilities are available for member selection as well as code checking. Two major
failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability
considerations. The following sections describe the salient features of the design
approach.
the slenderness requirements and the stability criteria. Users are recommended to
adopt the following steps in performing the steel design:
l Specify the geometry and loads and perform the analysis.
l Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.
10B.2(A) Analysis Methodology
and in using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading situations.

10B.3(A) Member Property Specifications
For specification of member properties of standard Japanese steel shapes, the

steel section library available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes
the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel table.
Members properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more
information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference
Manual.
10B.4(A) Built-in Japanese Steel Section Library
database file. If called for, these properties are also used for member design. Since
for these members during the analysis. An example of member property
be obtained using the tools of the graphical user interface.
I shapes
I shapes are specified in the following way:
Note: While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the decimal point
should be excluded.
1 TO 9 TA ST I300X150X11
12 TO 15 TA ST I350X150X9
614 — STAAD.Pro
H shapes
H shapes are specified as follows:
should be excluded.
1 TO 8 TA ST H200X100X4
13 TO 17 TA ST H350X350X12
T shapes
T shapes are specified as follows:
should be excluded.
20 TO 25 TA ST T250X19
Channels
Channel sections are specified as follows.

25 TO 34 TA ST C125X65X6
46 TO 49 TA ST C200X90X8
Double Channels
Back to back double channels, with or without a spacing in between them, are
available. The letter D in front of the section name is used to specify a double
channel.
17 TO 27 TA D C300X90X10
45 TO 76 TA D C250X90X11 SP 2.0
In the above commands, members 17 to 27 are a back-to-back double channel

C300X90X10 with no spacing in between. Members 45 to 76 are a double channel
C250X90X11 with a spacing of 2 length units.
Angles
specification is as follows.
The letter L (signifying that the section is an angle) is followed by the length of the
legs and then the thickness of the leg, all in millimetres. The word ST signifies that
the section is a STandard angle meaning that the major principal axis coincides
with the local YY axis specified in Chapter 1 of Section 1.5.2 of the User's Manual.
616 — STAAD.Pro
1 4 TA ST L150X90X9
If the minor principal axis coincides with the local YY axis specified in Chapter 2 of
the User's Manual, the word RA (Reverse Angle) should be used instead of ST as
shown below.
7 TO 23 TA RA L90X75X9
Double angles
Short leg back-to-back and long leg back-to-back double angles may be specified
by using the words SD or LD in front of the angle size. In the case of an equal
angle, either SD or LD will serve the purpose. The spacing between the angles may
be specified by using the word SP after the angle size followed by the value of the
spacing.
8 TO 25 TA SD L100X65X7 SP 2.0
36 TO 45 TA LD L300X90X11 SP 3.0
The first example indicates a short legs back-to-back double angle comprised of
100X65X7 angles separated by 2 length units. The latter is a long legs back-to-back
double angle comprised of 300X90X11 angles separated by 3 length units.
Tubes
Tube names are input by their dimensions. For example,
is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length units and a wall
thickness of 0.5 length units. Only code checking, no member selection can be
performed on TUBE sections.
Pipes (Circular Hollow sections)

Circular hollow sections may be provided by specifying the word PIPE followed by
the outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,

specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 25 length units and an inside diameter of
20 length units. Only code checking, no member selection, can be performed on
PIPE sections.
Sample Input file containing Japanese shapes
STAAD SPACE
UNIT KIP FEET
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 12 11 0 0
MEMB INCIDENCE
1 1 2 11
UNIT INCH
MEMBER PROPERTY JAPANESE
* H-SHAPE
1 TA ST H200X100X4
* I SHAPE
2 TA ST I250X125X10
* T SHAPE
3 TA ST T200X19
* CHANNEL
4 TA ST C125X65X6
* DOUBLE CHANNEL
5 TA D C200X90X8
* REGULAR ANGLE
6 TA ST L100X75X7
* REVERSE ANGLE
7 TA RA L90X75X9
* DOUBLE ANGLE - LONG LEG BACK TO BACK
8 TA LD L125X75X7 SP 2.0
* DOUBLE ANGLE - SHORT LEG BACK TO BACK
9 TA SD L300X90X11 SP 1.5
618 — STAAD.Pro
* TUBE
* PIPE
FINISH
10B.5(A) Member Capacities
Member design and code checking per AIJ 2002 are based upon the allowable
stress design method. It is a method for proportioning structural members using
design loads and forces, allowable stresses, and design limitations for the
appropriate material under service conditions. The basic measure of member
capacities are the allowable stresses on the member under various conditions of
applied loading such as allowable tensile stress, allowable compressive stress etc.
These depend on several factors such as cross sectional properties, slenderness
factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on. Explained here is the
procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such capacities.
Design Capabilities
All types of available shapes like H-Shape, I-Shape, L-Shapes, CHANNEL, PIPE,
TUBE, Prismatic section etc. can be used as member property and STAAD will
automatically adopt the design procedure for that particular shape if Steel Design is
requested. STEEL TABLE available within STAAD or UPTABLE facility can be used
for member property.
Methodology
For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as
required by AIJ specifications. The design procedure consist of following three
steps.
1. Calculation of sectional properties
The program extract sectional properties like sectional area ( A ), Moment of

Inertia about Y axis and Z axis ( Iyy, Izz) from in-built Japanese Steel Table

and calculates Zz, Zy, iy, iz using appropriate formula. For calculation of i (
radius of gyration needed for bending ), program calculates moment of
inertia ( Ii )and sectional area ( Ai ) for 1/6th section and then uses following
formula:
i = √(I /A )
i i
Note: The above mentioned procedure for calculation of i is applicable

for I shape, H shape and Channel sections.
2. Calculation of actual and allowable stresses
Allowable stresses for structural steel under permanent loading shall be

determined on the basis of the values of F given in the following table.
Table 10B.1 - Table: Values of F (N/mm2)
Steel for Con- Steel for General Structures Steel for Welded
struction Struc-
tures
Thickness SN400 SN490 SN490 SS400 SS490 SS540 SM400 SM
SNR400 SNR490 SNR490 STK400 SMA400
STKN400 STKN490 STKN490 STKR400
SSC400
t≤ 40 235 325 235 275 375 235 325 3
40< t ≤ 215 295 215 255 - 215 295 3

100
Note: In checking members for temporary loading be the combination

of stresses described in Chap.3, allowable stresses specified in this
chapter may be increases by 50%
Program calculates actual and allowable stresses by following methods:
620 — STAAD.Pro
i. Axial Stress:
Actual tensile stresses ( F ) = Force / ( A x NSF ),

T
NSF = Net Section Factor for tension
Actual compressive stress ( F ) = Force / A

C
Allowable tensile stress ( f )
t
= F / 1.5 (For Permanent Case)
= F ( For Temporary Case )
Allowable compressive stress
(f ) = {1 - 0.4x(λ/Δ2)} x F/v when λ ≤ Δ

c
= 2.77 x F/ (λ/Δ2) when λ > Δ
= f x 1.5 (for Temporary case)

c
where:
Δ = √(π2E/(.6 x F))
Δ=F
v = 3/2 + 2/3x(λ/Δ2)
ii. Bending Stress:
Actual bending stress for My for compression
(F )=M /Z
bcy y cy
Actual bending stress for Mz for compression
(F )=M /Z
bcz z cz
Actual bending stress for My for tension
(F )=M /Z
bty y ty
Actual bending stress for Mz for tension
(F )=M /Z
btz z tz
Where:

Z ,Z are section modulus for compression

cy cz
Z , Z are section modulus for tension
ty tz
Allowable bending stress for M
y
(f )=f
bcy t
Allowable bending stress for Mz
(f ) = { 1 - .4 x (lb / i)2 / (C λ2)} ft max

bcz
= 900/ (lb x h / A )
f
For Temporary case, f = 1.5 x (f for Permanent case)
bcz bcz
Where:
C = 1.75 - 1.05 (M2 / M1) + 0.3 (M2 / M1)2
Allowable bending stress for M , f =f

y bty t
z btz bcz
Note: The parameter CB can be used to specify a value for C

directly.
iii. Shear Stress
Actual shear stresses are calculated by the following formula:
q =Q /A
y y ww
Where:
A = web shear area = product of depth and web

ww
thickness
q =Q /A
z z ff
Where:
A = flange shear area = 2/3 times total flange area

ff
Allowable shear stress, f = F / 1.5, F = F / √(3)
s s s
3. Checking design requirements:
622 — STAAD.Pro
User provided RATIO value (default 1.0) is used for checking design
requirements
The following conditions are checked to meet the AIJ specifications. For all
the conditions calculated value should not be more than the value of RATIO.
If for any condition value exceeds RATIO , program gives the message that
the section fails.
requirements
The following conditions are checked to meet the AIJ specifications. For
all the conditions calculated value should not be more than the value of
RATIO. If for any condition value exceeds RATIO, program gives the
message that the section fails.
Conditions:
i. Axial tensile stress ratio = F / f
T t
ii. Axial compressive stress ratio = F / f
C c
iii. Combined compression & bending ratio = F /
C
f +F /f +F /f
c bcz bcz bcy bcy
iv. Combined compression & bending ratio = (F +F -F ) / f
btz bty C t
v. Combined tension & bending ratio = (F +F +F )/f
T btz bty t
vi. Combined tension & bending ratio = F /f +F /f - F /f
bcz bcz bcy bcy T t
vii. Shear stress ratio for q = q / f
y y s
viii. Shear stress ratio for q = q / f
z z s
ix. von Mises stress ratio (if the von Mises stresses were set to be
checked) = f /(k f )
m t
Output Format ( TRACK 3 )

One new output format has been introduced which provides details step by step
information of Steel Design for guiding load case only. If Section command is used
before Parameter command this output will provide details information for all the
sections specified by Section Command.

Note: This output format is available only when the BEAM parameter value is 0
and the TRACK parameter value is 3. If section command is not used design
information will be printed for two ends only. If Member Truss option is used
no Shear Design information will be printed.
Example:
SECTION 0.0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.0 ALL

PARAMETER
CODE JAPANESE 2002
BEAM 0.0 ALL
TMP 0.0 MEMB 1 TO 4
TMP 1.0 MEMB 5 TO 8
TRACK 3 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Allowable stress for Axial Tension
Allowable axial stress in tension is calculated per section 5.1 (1) of the AIJ code. In
members with axial tension, the tensile load must not exceed the tension capacity
of the member. The tension capacity of the member is calculated on the basis of
the member area. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member based
on a user supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present but may
be altered by changing the input value, see Table 8B.1) and proceeds with
Allowable stress for Axial Compression
The allowable stress for members in compression is determined according to the

procedure of section 5.1 (3). Compressive resistance is a function of the
slenderness of the cross-section (Kl/r ratio) and the user may control the
slenderness value by modifying parameters such as KY, LY, KZ and LZ. In the
absence of user provided values for effective length, the actual member length will
be used. The slenderness ratios are checked against the permissible values
specified in Chapter 11 of the AIJ code.
624 — STAAD.Pro
Allowable stress for Bending
The permissible bending compressive and tensile stresses are dependent on such
factors as length of outstanding legs, thickness of flanges, unsupported length of
the compression flange (UNL, defaults to member length) etc. The allowable
stresses in bending (compressive and tensile) are calculated as per the criteria of
Clause 5.1 (4) of the code.
Allowable stress for Shear
Shear capacities are a function of web depth, web thickness etc. The allowable
stresses in shear are computed according to Clause 5.1 (2) of the code.
10B.6(A) Combined Loading
all modeled loading situations. Members subjected to axial tension and bending are
checked using the criteria of clause 6.2. For members with axial compression and
bending, the criteria of clause 6.1 is used.
10B.7(A) Design Parameters
parameters mentioned in Table 9B.1 of this chapter. These parameters
communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program. The default
parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements of the
situation, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly
Table 10B.2 - Japanese Steel Design Parameters

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as JAPANESE


Name Value
2002 to invoke the AIJ 2002.

Manual.
BEAM 0.0 Locations of design:
0. Design only for end moments

or those at locations specified
by the SECTION command.
1. Calculate moments at twelfth
points along the beam, and
use the maximum Mz location
for design.
CB 0 C value from the AIJ code. See

"10B.5(A) Member Capacities" on
page 619 Bending Stress for how C
is calculated and applied.
Use 0.0 to direct the program to

calculated Cb.
Any other value be used in lieu of

the program calculated value.

for
deflection
check)

Length" (See Note a)
DJ2 End Joint of Joint No. denoting end point for

member calculation of "Deflection Length"
(See Note a)
626 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
DMAX 100 cm Maximum allowable depth for

member.
DMIN 0.0 cm Minimum allowable depth for

member.

is the minor axis.

is the major axis.

LZ Member Same as above except in z-axis

Length
FYLD 235 MPA Yield strength of steel in

Megapascal.
MAIN 0.0 Check for slenderness:
0. Perform check for slen-

derness
1. Suppress slenderness check
MISES 0 Option to include check for von

Mises stresses
0. Do not include check.

1. Perform Von Mises stress
check.

members.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual to

allowable stresses.
SSY 0.0 Sidesway:
0. Sidesway in local y-axis.


Name Value
1. No sidesway
SSZ 0.0 Same as above except in local z-

axis.
TMAIN 400 Allowable Slenderness Limit for

Tension Member
1.0 = suppress slenderness check .
Any value greater than 1 =

Allowable KL/r in tension.
TMP 0 Loading condition:
0. Permanent Loading
1. Temporary Loading
0. = Suppress critical member

stresses
1. = Print all critical member
stresses
2. = Print expanded output
3. = Print maximum details.
Note: Only produces

results when BEAM 0 is
used.
4. = Perform and print deflec-

tion check.
UNL Member Unsupported length for calculating

Length allowable bending stress.

fraction of actual member length.
628 — STAAD.Pro
Notes
a. "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of local
deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the
joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections
are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using
four joints and three members. The “Deflection Length” for all three members
will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1
and DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members
here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should be 4.
PARAMETERS
DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL
10B.8 Code Checking
of the members are adequate to carry the forces transmitted to it by the loads on
the structure. The adequacy is checked per the AIJ requirements.

(default), design will be based on the forces at the start and end joints of the
member. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In
addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from start
joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed.
moments obtained from the most recent analysis. The section selected will be of
the same type as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially
as a channel will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose
properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in
the user table.
Note: Member selection cannot be performed on TUBES, PIPES, or members

listed as PRISMATIC.
Sample Input data for Steel Design
UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE JAPANESE 2002
NSF 0.85 ALL
UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
630 — STAAD.Pro
CHECK CODE ALL
SELECT ALL
10B.10(A) Von Mises Stresses Check

higher.
The von Mises stress equation shown below, which is modified for beam elements
based on the corresponding equation in AIJ steel design code (both 2002 and 2005
editions of AIJ), indicates that the left-hand side in the equation should be less than
unity. These checks are performed at locations indicated by the BEAM parameter.
The default is set that this check is not performed. The MISES parameter must be
set to 1 to initiate the checks.
Note: As with other design checks, the unity check value can be modified by
use of the RATIO parameter.
The von Mises stresses are evaluated and checked as follows:
Where:
Longitudinal stress in beam element:
F = Axial force
x
M = Bending moment about y-axis
y
M = Bending moment about z-axis
z
A = Cross-sectional area,
x
Z = Section modulus about y-axis
y
Z = Section modulus about z-axis
z

M = Torsional moment
x
F = shear stress in y direction
y
F = shear stress in z direction
z
Z = Torsional section modulus = 2I /D
x x x
D = Depth of the member
x
I = Torsional constant
x
A = Effective shear area in the y direction
y
A = Effective shear area in the z direction
z
f = Allowable tensile stress
t
k = Loading duration factor, as specified by the TMP parameter (1.0 for
permanent and 1.5 for temporary).
In the STRESSES output category, stress value of (numerator of the von Mises
stress equation) is output as the value of fm. Along with slenderness ratios,
stresses, and deflections, von Mises stress equation is checked. When its left-hand
side yields the maximum ratio value, it is printed as RATIO and “VON MISES” is
printed as CRITICAL COND.
Japanese Codes - Steel Design Per 2005

AIJ
10B.1(B) General

the “Architectural Institute of Japan” (AIJ) specifications for structural steel design
(2005 edition) in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics are
based on the principles of elastic analysis and allowable stress design. Facilities are
available for member selection as well as code checking. Two major failure modes
are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability considerations. The
following sections describe the salient features of the design approach.
632 — STAAD.Pro
the slenderness requirements and the stability criteria. Users are recommended to
adopt the following steps in performing the steel design:
l Specify the geometry and loads and perform the analysis.
l Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.
The method for calculating allowable bending stress was updated for the AIJ 2005
from the AIJ 2002 code. All other allowable limit states, analysis and design
methods, etc., remain unchanged. Refer to the AIJ 2002 documentation for
additional details.
10B.2(B) Member Capacities

Member design and code checking per AIJ 2005 are based upon the allowable
stress design method. It is a method for proportioning structural members using
design loads and forces, allowable stresses, and design limitations for the
appropriate material under service conditions. The basic measure of member
capacities are the allowable stresses on the member under various conditions of
applied loading such as allowable tensile stress, allowable compressive stress etc.
These depend on several factors such as cross sectional properties, slenderness
factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on. Explained here is the
procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such capacities.
Design Capabilities
All types of available shapes like H-Shape, I-Shape, L-Shapes, CHANNEL, PIPE,
TUBE, Prismatic section etc. can be used as member property and STAAD will
automatically adopt the design procedure for that particular shape if Steel Design is
requested. STEEL TABLE available within STAAD or UPTABLE facility can be used
for member property.
Methodology
required by AIJ specifications. The design procedure consist of following three

steps.
1. Calculation of sectional properties
The program extract sectional properties like sectional area ( A ), Moment of

Inertia about Y axis and Z axis ( I , I ) from in-built Japanese Steel Table
yy zz
and calculates Z , Z , i , i using appropriate formula. For calculation of i (
z y y z
radius of gyration needed for bending ), program calculates moment of
inertia ( I )and sectional area ( A ) for 1/6th section and then uses following
i i
formula:
i = √(I /A )
i i
Note: The above mentioned procedure for calculation of i is applicable

for I shape, H shape and Channel sections.
2. Calculation of actual and allowable stresses
Program calculates actual and allowable stresses by following methods:
i. Axial Stress:
Actual tensile stresses ( F ) = Force / ( A x NSF ),

T
NSF = Net Section Factor for tension
Actual compressive stress ( F ) = Force / A

C
Allowable tensile stress ( f )
t
= F / 1.5 (For Permanent Case)
= F ( For Temporary Case )
Allowable compressive stress
(f ) = {1 - .4x(λ/Δ2)} x F/v when λ ≤ Δ

c
= 2.77 x F/ (
= f x 1.5 (for Temporary case)

c
Where:
Δ = √(π2E/(.6 x F))
Δ=F
634 — STAAD.Pro
v = 3/2 + 2/3x(λ/Δ2)
ii. Bending Stress:
Actual bending stress for My for compression:
(F )=M /Z
bcy y cy
Actual bending stress for Mz for compression
(F )=M /Z
bcz z cz
Actual bending stress for My for tension
(F )=M /Z
bty y ty
Actual bending stress for Mz for tension
(F )=M /Z
btz z tz
Where:
Z ,Z are section modulus for compression

cy cz
Z , Z are section modulus for tension
ty tz
y
(f )=f
bcy t
z
When λ ≤ λ , f = F/ν
b p b b
When λ < λ ≤ λ ,
p b b e b
When λ < λ ,
e b b
Where:

For Temporary case, f = 1.5 x (f for Permanent case)

bcz bcz
Where:
C = 1.75 - 1.05 (M2 / M1) + 0.3 (M2 / M1)2

y bty t
z btz bcz
Note: The parameter CB can be used to specify a value for C

directly.
iii. Shear Stress
Actual shear stresses are calculated by the following formula:
q =Q /A
y y ww
Where:
A = web shear area = product of depth and web

ww
thickness
q =Q /A
z z ff
Where:
A = flange shear area = 2/3 times total flange area

ff
Allowable shear stress, f = F / 1.5, F = F / √(3)
s s s
requirements:
The following conditions are checked to meet the AIJ specifications. For all
the conditions calculated value should not be more than the value of RATIO.
If for any condition value exceeds RATIO, program gives the message that
the section fails.
Conditions:
636 — STAAD.Pro
i. Axial tensile stress ratio = F / f
T t
ii. Axial compressive stress ratio = F / f
C c
iii. Combined compression & bending ratio = F / f +F /f +F /f
C c bcz bcz bcy bcy
iv. Combined compression & bending ratio = (F +F -F ) / f
btz bty C t
v. Combined tension & bending ratio = (F +F +F )/f
T btz bty t
vi. Combined tension & bending ratio = F /f +F /f - F /f
bcz bcz bcy bcy T t
vii. Shear stress ratio for q = q / f
y y s
viii. Shear stress ratio for q = q / f
z z s
ix. von Mises stress ratio (if the von Mises stresses were set to be
checked) = f /(k f )
m t
Note: All other member capacities (axial tension, axial compression, and shear)
are calculated as for AIJ 2002. See "10B.5(A) Member Capacities" on page 619
10B.3(B) Design Parameters
You are allowed complete control over the design process through the use of
parameters mentioned in Table 10B.3 of this chapter. These parameters
communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program. The default
parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers
for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements of the
situation, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly

Table 10B.3 - Japanese Steel Design Parameters

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as JAPANESE

2005 to invoke the AIJ 2005.

Reference Manual.

moments or those at locations
specified by the SECTION
command.
1.0 = calculate moments at twelfth

points along the beam, and use the
maximum Mz location for design.
CB 0 C value from the AIJ code. See

"10B.5(A) Member Capacities" on
page 619 Bending Stress for how C
is calculated and applied.
Use 0.0 to direct the program to

calculated Cb.
Any other value be used in lieu of

the program calculated value.

for
deflection
check)

Length" (See Note a)
638 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value

(See Note a)
DMAX 100 cm Maximum allowable depth for

member.
DMIN 0.0 cm Minimum allowable depth for

member.
FYLD 235 MPA Yield strength of steel in

Megapascal.

is the minor axis.

is the major axis.


Length
MAIN 0.0 0.0 = check for slenderness
1.0 = suppress slenderness check
MISES 0 Option to include check for von

Mises stresses
0 = Do not include check.
1 = Perform Von Mises stress

check.

members.

allowable stresses.
SSY 0.0 0.0 = Sidesway in local y-axis.


Name Value
1.0 = No sidesway

axis.
TMAIN 400 Allowable Slenderness Limit for

Tension Member
1.0 = suppress slenderness check .
Any value greater than 1 =

Allowable KL/r in tension.
TMP 0 0 = Permanent Loading
1 = Temporary Loading
0. = Suppress critical member

stresses
1. = Print all critical member
stresses
2. = Print expanded output
3. = Print maximum details.
Note: Only produces

results when BEAM 0 is
used.
4. = Perform and print deflec-

tion check.

fraction of actual member length.
UNL Member Unsupported length for calculating

Length allowable bending stress.
640 — STAAD.Pro
Notes
a. "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of local
deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the
joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections
are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using
four joints and three members. The “Deflection Length” for all three members
will be equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1
and DJ2 should be used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members
here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should be 4.
PARAMETERS
DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL
10B.4(B) Von Mises Stresses Check

higher.
The von Mises stress equation shown below, which is modified for beam elements
based on the corresponding equation in AIJ steel design code (both 2002 and 2005

editions of AIJ), indicates that the left-hand side in the equation should be less
than unity. These checks are performed at locations indicated by the
BEAM parameter. The default is set that this check is not performed. The
MISES parameter must be set to 1 to initiate the checks.
Note: As with other design checks, the unity check value can be modified by
use of the RATIO parameter.
The von Mises stresses are evaluated and checked as follows:
Where:
Longitudinal stress in beam element:
F = Axial force
x
M = Bending moment about y-axis
y
M = Bending moment about z-axis
z
A = Cross-sectional area,
x
Z = Section modulus about y-axis
y
Z = Section modulus about z-axis
z
M = Torsional moment
x
F = shear stress in y direction
y
F = shear stress in z direction
z
Z = Torsional section modulus = 2I /D
x x x
D = Depth of the member
x
I = Torsional constant
x
642 — STAAD.Pro
A = Effective shear area in the y direction
y
A = Effective shear area in the z direction
z
f = Allowable tensile stress
t
k = Loading duration factor, as specified by the TMP parameter (1.0 for
permanent and 1.5 for temporary).
In the STRESSES output category, stress value of (numerator of the von Mises
stress equation) is output as the value of fm. Along with slenderness ratios,
stresses, and deflections, von Mises stress equation is checked. When its left-hand
side yields the maximum ratio value, it is printed as RATIO and “VON MISES” is
printed as CRITICAL COND.
10B.5(B) Verification Problems
In the next few pages are included verification examples for reference purposes.
Title
A slender, cantilever beam subjected to a load at the end
Type
Reference
Problem
A cantilever beam of length 2 meter is subjected to a permanent joint load of 3 kN

in the Y direction and 2 kN in the Z direction as well as a 0.008 kN·m torque applied
at the end. Axial tension of 10 kN is also applied to the member. An H100x50x5
section is used from the Japanese steel tables.

Given
Section properties
D = 100 mm
x
I = 15,000 mm4
x
A = 1185 mm2, A = 500 mm2, A = 467 mm2
x y z
Z = 2I /D = 2·15000/100 = 300 mm3, Z = 5920 mm3, Z = 37400
x x x y z
mm3
The maximum of the left hand side of the von Mises stress equation apparently
occurs at the fixed end of the beam. Section forces at the fixed end are ass follow:
10.0 kN (Tension)
6.0 kN·m (Bending-Y)
6.0 kN·m (Bending-Z)
3.0 kN (Shear-Y)
2.0 kN (Shear-Z)
-0.008 kN·m (Torsion
Member Length L = 2 m, Unbraced length = 100mm.
Material
FYLD = 300 MPa
E = 2.05E+05 MPa
G = E/2.6 MPa
Solution
From these section forces, σ and τ at the section of the fixed end are calculated
x xy
as follows:
= 8.44 + 101.35 +
24.06 = 133.85 N/mm2
644 — STAAD.Pro
= 26.67 + √(62 +
4.282) = 33.04 N/mm2
From σ and τ , f is calculated:

x xy m
f =√( σ +3·τ 2)
2 = √[(133.85)2+3·(33.04)2] = 146.26 N/mm2
m x xy
Since f = FYLD/1.5 = 300.0 MPa/15 = 200.0 N/mm2 and k = 1 for permanent
t
loading,
Ratio = 146.26/(200.0 · 1) = 0.731 < 1, So OK.
Comparison
Table 10B.4 - Comparison of results for a AIJ 2005 verification

problem
Hand Cal- STAAD.Pro Comments
culation Result
von Mises Stress 146.26 N/mm2 146.3 N/mm2 None

(f )
m
STAAD Input File
STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION EXAMPLE NO.1

ENGINEER DATE 18-AUG-10
END JOB INFORMATION
* VERIFICATION FOR VON MISES STRESSES IN AIJ 2005
UNIT MMS KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 300 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
112
UNIT METER KN


ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05E+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY JAPANESE
1 TABLE ST H100X50X5
UNIT MMS KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
UNIT METER KN
LOAD 1 LC1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX 10 FY 3 FZ 2 MX 0.008
PERFORM ANALYSIS
LOAD LIST 1
PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 1
PARAMETER 1
CODE JAPANESE 2005
TMP 0 ALL
UNL 0.002 ALL
MISES 1 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
646 — STAAD.Pro
FINISH
Output
The TRACK 2.0 output portion is as follows:

STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( AIJ 2005)
********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Y PROPERTIES |
|************* | IN CM UNIT |
| * |=============================| ===|=== ------------ |
|MEMBER 1 * | JAPANESE SECTIONS | | AX = 11.85 |
| * | ST H100X50X5 | | --Z AY = 5.00 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ = 4.67 |
| AIJ-2005 * =============================== ===|=== ZY = 5.92 |
| * ZZ = 37.40 |
| * |<---LENGTH (ME= 0.30 --->| iY = 1.12 |
|************* iZ = 3.97 |
| ZX = 0.30 |
| 0.90(KN-MET) |
|PARAMETER |L1 STRESSES |
|IN N MM | L1 L1 IN N MM|
|--------------- + L1 L1 -------------|
| KL/R-Y= 26.8 | L1 FA = 189.5 |
| KL/R-Z= 7.6 + L1 fa = 8.4 |
| UNL = 2.5 | L1 L1 FCZ = 200.0 |
| CB = 1.75 + FTZ = 200.0 |
| CMY = 0.85 | L1 L1 FCY = 200.0 |
| CMZ = 0.85 + L1 L1 FTY = 200.0 |
| FYLD = 300.0 | L0 fbz = 24.1 |
| NSF = 1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 101.4 |
| DFF = 0.0 -0.05 FV = 115.5 |
| dff = 0.0 ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE fv = 6.0 |
| (WITH LOAD NO.) FT = 200.0 |
| fm = 146.3 |
| MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KN-MET) Sx = 133.9 |
| ------------------------- Tou = 34.0 |
| |
| AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z MOMENT-Y MOMENT-Z |
| |
| VALUE -10.00 3.00 2.00 0.60 0.90 |
| LOCATION 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 |
| LOADING 1 1 1 1 1 |
| |
|**************************************************************************|
|* *|
|* DESIGN SUMMARY (KN-MET) *|
|* -------------- *|
|* *|

|* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ *|

| FX MY MZ LOCATION |
| ====================================================== |
| PASS VON MISES 0.731 1 |
| 10.00 T 0.60 -0.90 0.000 |
|* *|
|**************************************************************************|
| |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
648 — STAAD.Pro
Section 11
Mexican Codes

650 — STAAD.Pro
Mexican Codes - Concrete Design Per MEX NTC
1987
STAAD has the capabilities for performing concrete design. It will calculate the
reinforcement needed for the specified concrete section. All the concrete design
calculations are based on the current: Complementary Technical Standards for the
Design and Construction of Concrete Structures – Nov. 1987. (Normas Técnicas
Complementarias para Diseño y construcción de Estructuras de Concreto) of the
Mexican Construction Code for the Federal District –Aug. 1993 (Reglamento de
Construcciones para el Distrito Federal).

The following types of cross sections can be defined for concrete design.
l Columns — Prismatic (Rectangular, Square, and Circular)

l Beams — Prismatic (Rectangular & Square), Trapezoidal, and T-shapes
l Walls — Finite element with a specified thickness
Figure 11.1 - Concrete shape nomenclature for beams and columns

UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTY

Mexican Codes - Concrete Design Per MEX NTC 1987
13 TO 79 PRISM YD 40. ZD 20. IZ 53333 IY 13333

11 13 PR YD 20.
14 TO 16 PRIS YD 24. ZD 48. YB 18. ZB 12.
17 TO 19 PR YD 24. ZD 18. ZB 12.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (40 cm depth and 20
cm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided,
will be assumed to be circular with 20 cm diameter. Note that no area (AX) is
provided for these members. For concrete design, this property must not be
provided. If shear areas and moments of inertias are not provided, the program
calculates these values from YD and ZD. Notice that in the above example the IZ
and IY values provided are actually 50% of the values calculated using YD and ZD.
This is a conventional practice which takes into consideration revised section
parameters due to cracking of section.
Note that the third and the fourth set of members in the above example represent
a T-shape and a TRAPEZOIDAL shape respectively. Depending on the properties
(YD, ZD, YB, ZB, etc.) provided, the program will determine whether the section is
rectangular, trapezoidal or T-shaped and the BEAM design will be done
accordingly.

design by the Mexican code. Default parameter values have been selected such
that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design requirements.
These values may be changed to suit the particular design being performed. Table
3.1 is a complete list of the available parameters and their default values.
The manual describes the commands required to provide these parameters in the
input file. For example, the values of SFACE and EFACE (parameters that are used
in shear design), the distances of the face of supports from the end nodes of a
beam, are assigned values of zero by default but may be changed depending on
the actual situation. Similarly, beams and columns are designed for moments
directly obtained from the analyses without any magnification. The factors MMY
and MMZ may be used for magnification of column moments. For beams, the user
may generate load cases which contain loads magnified by the appropriate load
factors.
652 — STAAD.Pro
Table 11A.1 - Mexican Concrete Design Parameters

Parameter Default Parameters
Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as MEXICAN.

Reference Manual.
BTP 2 Bar type to use:
0. IMPERIAL (No 3 to 18)

1. METRIC (4.2 to 60mm)
2. MEXICAN (No 2 to 18)
CCL 1 Concrete class according to 1.4.1d)

to define Modulus of Elasticity
1. Class 1 Concrete
2. Class 2 Concrete
CFB FALSE Cold formed Bar classification to

define development multipliers
according to table 3.1 NTC
l FALSE - Not cold formed bar

l TRUE - Cold formed bar
CLB 3 cm Clear cover for bottom

reinforcement
CLS 3 cm Clear cover for side reinforcement
CLT 3 cm Clear cover for top reinforcement
DAG 2 cm Maximum diameter of aggregate, in

current units.


Name Value
DCP TRUE Beam Loads and reactions in direct

compression Cl-2.1.5.a.I 2nd
paragraph
l FALSE - Loads applied indi-

rectly
l TRUE - Direct compression
DEPTH YD Depth of concrete member, in

current units. This value defaults to
YD as provided under MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
DIM TRUE l FALSE: Not precautions taken

- Section reduction to section
1.5 NTC Concrete
l TRUE: Precautions are taken
to assure dimensions
DSD TRUE Ductile frames in accordance with

Section 5 of the code. Some design
conditions are considered (not
including, for the time being,
geometric or confinement ones)
l FALSE - Non-Ductile frames

l TRUE - Ductile Frames
EFACE 0 Face to support location of end of

beam. If specified, for shear force
at start is computed at a distance of
EFACE+d from the start joint of the
member. Positive number.
654 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
EXP FALSE Exposition to soil or weather to

define cover and min Steel
reinforcement
l FALSE - Not exposed to soil

or weather
l TRUE - Exposed to soil or
weather
FC 200 Kg/cm2 Compressive Strength of Concrete
FYMAIN 4,200 Yield Stress for main reinforcing

Kg/cm2 steel
FYSEC 4,200 Yield Stress for secondary (stirrup)

Kg/cm2 reinforcing steel
LSS 0 Part of the longitudinal steel

considered to reduce shear. 0
(zero) is conservative. Value
between 1 and 0.
LTC FALSE Light Concrete to define

development multipliers according
to table 3.1 NTC
l FALSE - Regular concrete

l TRUE - Lightweight concrete
MAXMAIN 12 Maximum main reinforcement bar

size (Number 2 -18)
MINMAIN 2.5 Minimum main reinforcement bar

size (Number 2 -18)
MINSEC 2.5 Minimum secondary reinforcement

bar size (Number 2 -18)
MMY 1.0 Moment magnification factor for col-

umns, about My.


Name Value
MMZ 1.0 Moment magnification factor for col-

umns, about Mz.
MOE 198,000 Concrete modulus of elasticiy.

Kg/cm2

moments for beam design
PHI 90 degrees Stirrups angle with the axis of the

element
PSS TRUE Slab beared perimeter. To calculate

min steel required according to
2.1.2
REINF 0 Tied Column. A value of 1 will

mean spiral.
SFACE 0 Face to support location of start of

beam. If specified, for shear force
at start is computed at a distance of
SFACE+d from the start joint of the
member. Positive number
TEQ FALSE Beam needed for torsional

equilibrium Cl.2.1.6a) 2nd
paragraph
l FALSE - No
l TRUE - Yes
656 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
TRACK 0 Beam Design

printed out with beam design
report.
1. Will mean a print out.
2. Will print out required steel
areas for all intermediate sec-
tions specified by NSECTION.
Column Design
0. Will print out detailed design

results.
1. Will mean a print out column
interation analysis results in
addition to TRACK 0 output.
2. will print out a schematic inter-
action diagram and inter-
mediate interaction values in
addition to all of the above.
WIDTH ZD Width of concrete member, in

current units. This value defaults to
ZD as provided under MEMBER
PROPERTIES
* These values must be provided in the current unit system being used.
Note: When using metric bars for design, provide values for these parameters
in actual ‘mm‘ units instead of the bar number. The following metric bar sizes
are available: 4.2mm, 6 mm, 8 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 16 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 32
mm, 40 mm, 50 mm and 60 mm.

11A.5 Beam Design

beam loadings are prescanned to locate the possible critical sections. The total
number of sections considered is 12 (twelve) unless this number is redefined with
an NSECTION parameter. All of these equally spaced sections are scanned to
determine moment and shear envelopes.
Design for Flexure
Reinforcement for positive and negative moments are calculated on the basis of
the section properties provided by the user. If the section dimensions are
inadequate to carry the applied load, that is if the required reinforcement is greater
than the maximum allowable for the cross section, the program reports that beam
fails in maximum reinforcement. Rectangular sections are also designed with
compression reinforcement.
Effective depth is chosen as Total depth - (Clear cover + diameter of stirrup + half
the dia. of main reinforcement), and a trial value is obtained by adopting proper
bar sizes for the stirrups and main reinforcements. The relevant clauses in Sections
1.5, 1.6, 2.1.1-2-5, 3.10 and 5.2.2 of NTC Concrete are utilized to obtain the
actual amount of steel required as well as the maximum allowable and minimum
required steel. These values are reported as ROW, ROWMX and ROWMN in the
output and can be printed using the parameter TRACK 1.0 (see Table 11A.1). In
addition, the maximum, minimum and actual bar spacing are also printed.
It is important to note that beams are designed for flexural moment MZ only. The
moment MY is not considered in the flexural design.
Design for Shear

moments. Shear forces are calculated at a distance (d+SFACE) and (d+EFACE)
away from the end nodes of the beam. SFACE and EFACE have default values of
zero unless provided under parameters (see Table 11A.1). Note that the value of
the effective depth "d" used for this purpose is the update value and accounts for
the actual c.g. of the main reinforcement calculated under flexural design. Clauses
2.1.5-6 and 5.2.4 of NTC Concrete are used to calculate the reinforcement for
shear forces and torsional moments. Based on the total stirrup reinforcement
required, the size of bars, the spacing, the number of bars and the distance over
658 — STAAD.Pro
which they are provided are calculated. Stirrups due to geometric conditions are
assumed to be 2-legged, due to design conditions could be 2 or 4-legged.
Design for Anchorage
In the output for flexural design, the anchorage details are also provided. At any
particular level, the START and END coordinates of the layout of the main
reinforcement is described along with the information whether anchorage in the
form of a hook or continuation is required or not at these START and END points.
Note that the coordinates of these START and END points are obtained after taking
into account the anchorage requirements. Anchorage length is calculated on the
basis of the Clauses described in Section 3.1 of NTC concrete. In case the program
selects 2 different diameters for the main or compression reinforcement, only the
anchorage for the largest diameter is analyzed.
Output
Level
Serial number of bar level which may contain one or more bar group
Height
Height of bar level from the bottom of the beam
Bar Info
Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars and bar size
From
Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the reinforcement bar
To
Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the reinforcement bar
Anchor (STA/END)
States whether anchorage, either hook or continuation, is needed at the
start (STA) or at the end (END).
Row
Actually required flexural reinforcement (As/bd) where b = width of cross
section (ZD for a rectangular or square section) and d = effective depth of
cross section (YD minus the distance from extreme tension fiber to the cen-
troid of main reinforcement).
ROWMN
Minimum required flexural reinforcement (Amin/bd)
ROWMX

Maximum required flexural reinforcement (Amax/bd)

Spacing
Distance between centers of adjacent bars of main reinforcement
Vu
Factored shear force at section
Vc
Nominal shear strength provided by concrete
Vs
Nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement
Tu
Factored torsional moment at section
Tc
Nominal torsional moment strength provided by concrete
Ts
Nominal torsional moment strength provided by torsion reinforcement
ACTUAL OUTPUT FROM DESIGN
==========================================-
===========================
BEAM NO. 1 DESIGN RESULTS - FLEXURE
PER CODE NTC FOR THE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF

CONCRETE STRUCTURES,DDF
LEN - 525.00(cm) FY - 4200. FC - 250. SIZE - 30.00 X 80.00(cm)
LEVEL HEIGHT BAR INFO FROM TO ANCHOR
(cm) (cm) (cm) STA END
____________________________________________________
_________________
1 4. 8 - -NUM, 5 0. 39. YES NO
1 4. 1 - -NUM, 4 0. 39.
2 8. 3 - -NUM, 5 0. 39. YES NO
660 — STAAD.Pro
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
| CRITICAL MOMENT=5978000.50 Kg cm AT 0.00 (cm)LOAD 1|
| REQD STEEL= 24.41 (cm2)ROW=0.0109 ROWMX=0.0190

ROWMN=0.0026 |
| REQD COMP STEEL= 0.00 (cm2) |
| MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 24.14/ 3.18/ 3.45 (cm) |
| COMP MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 0.00/ 0.00/ 0.00 (cm) |
| BASIC/REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 40.07/ 39.08(cm) |
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location = 1015658.4

cm^4
3 77. 10 - -NUM, 4 0. 45. YES NO
4 73. 9 - -NUM, 4 0. 45. YES NO
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
| CRITICAL MOMENT=5978000.50 Kg cm AT 0.00 (cm)LOAD 1|
| REQD STEEL= 24.17 (cm2)ROW=0.0107 ROWMX=0.0190

ROWMN=0.0026 |
| REQD COMP STEEL= 0.00 (cm2) |
| MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 24.46/ 2.54/ 2.72 (cm) |
| COMP MAX/MIN/ACTUAL BAR SPACING= 0.00/ 0.00/ 0.00 (cm) |
| BASIC/REQD. DEVELOPMENT LENGTH = 32.00/ 44.81(cm) |
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
Cracked Moment of Inertia Iz at above location = 1008728.7 cm^4
REQUIRED REINF. STEEL SUMMARY :

-------------------------------
SECTION REINF STEEL(+VE/-VE) MOMENTS(+VE/-VE) LOAD(+VE/-

VE)
( CM ) (SQ. CM ) (KG -CM )
0.00 24.67/ 24.67 5978000./ 5978000.50 0/ 0
525.00 24.67/ 24.67 5978000./ 5978000.50 0/ 0
B E A M N O. 1 D E S I G N R E S U L T S – SHEAR
AT START SUPPORT - Vu=41850.00 Kg Vc= 6074.49 Kg Vs=44719.39

Kg
Tu= 0.00 Kg cm Tc= 0.00 Kg cm Ts= 0.00 Kg cm LOAD 0
NO STIRRUPS ARE REQUIRED FOR TORSION.
REINFORCEMENT IS REQUIRED FOR SHEAR.
PROVIDE NUM. 2.5 2-LEGGED STIRRUPS AT 7.(cm) C/C FOR 176.(cm)
ADDITIONAL LONGITUDINAL STEEL REQD. FOR TORSIONAL

RESISTANCE = 0.00 (cm2)
AT END SUPPORT - Vu=37450.00 Kg Vc= 6074.49 Kg Vs=39219.39 Kg
Tu= 0.00 Kg cm Tc= 0.00 Kg cm Ts= 0.00 Kg cm LOAD 0
NO STIRRUPS ARE REQUIRED FOR TORSION.
REINFORCEMENT IS REQUIRED FOR SHEAR.
PROVIDE NUM. 2.5 2-LEGGED STIRRUPS AT 8.(cm) C/C FOR 176.(cm)
ADDITIONAL LONGITUDINAL STEEL REQD. FOR TORSIONAL

RESISTANCE = 0.00 (cm2)
662 — STAAD.Pro
11A.6 Column Design
Columns design in STAAD per the Mexican code is performed for axial force and
uniaxial as well as biaxial moments. All active loadings are checked to compute
reinforcement. The loading which produces the largest amount of reinforcement is
called the critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular
sections. For rectangular and circular sections, reinforcement is always assumed to
be equally distributed on all faces. This means that the total number of bars for
these sections will always be a multiple of four (4). If the MMAGx & -MMAGy
parameters are specified, the column moments are multiplied by the corresponding
MMAG value to arrive at the ultimate moments on the column. Minimum eccentricity
conditions to be satisfied according to section 2.1.3.a are checked.
Method used: Bresler Load Contour Method
Known Values: Pu, Muy, Muz, B, D, Clear cover, Fc, Fy
Ultimate Strain for concrete : 0.003
Steps involved:
1. Assume some reinforcement. Minimum reinforcement (1% for ductile design

or according to section 4.2.2 ) is a good amount to start with.
2. Find an approximate arrangement of bars for the assumed reinforcement.
3. Calculate PNMAX = Po, where Po is the maximum axial load capacity of the
section. Ensure that the actual nominal load on the column does not exceed
PNMAX. If PNMAX is less than the axial force Pu/FR, (FR is the strength
reduction factor) increase the reinforcement and repeat steps 2 and 3. If the
reinforcement exceeds 6% (or 4% for ductile design), the column cannot be
designed with its current dimensions.
4. For the assumed reinforcement, bar arrangement and axial load, find the
uniaxial moment capacities of the column for the Y and the Z axes,
independently. These values are referred to as MYCAP and MZCAP
respectively.
5. Solve the Interaction Bresler equation:
(M /M )α + (M /M )α
ny ycap nz zcap
Where α = 1.24. If the column is subjected to uniaxial moment: α = 1
6. If the Interaction equation is satisfied, find an arrangement with available bar

sizes, find the uniaxial capacities and solve the interaction equation again. If
the equation is satisfied now, the reinforcement details are written to the
output file.
7. If the interaction equation is not satisfied, the assumed reinforcement is

increased (ensuring that it is under 6% or 4% respectively) and steps 2 to 6
are repeated.
By the moment to check shear and torsion for columns the sections have to be
checked as beams and the most strict of both shear and torsion reinforcement
adopted.
11A.7 Column Interaction

The column interaction values may be obtained by using the design parameter
TRACK 1.0 or TRACK 2.0 for the column member. If a value of 2.0 is used for the
TRACK parameter, 12 different Pn-Mn pairs, each representing a different point on
the Pn-Mn curve are printed. Each of these points represents one of the several
Pn-Mn combinations that this column is capable of carrying about the given axis,
for the actual reinforcement that the column has been designed for. In the case of
circular columns, the values are for any of the radial axes. The values printed for
the TRACK 1.0 output are:
l P0 = Maximum allowable pure axial load on the column (moment

zero).
l Pnmax = Maximum allowable axial load on the column.
l P_bal = Axial load capacity of balanced strain condition.
l M_bal = Uniaxial moment capacity of balanced strain condition.
l E_bal = M_bal / P_bal = Eccentricity of balanced strain condition.
l M0 = Moment capacity at zero axial load.
l P_tens = Maximum permissible tensile load on the column.
l Des. Pn = Pu/FR where FR is the Strength Reduction Factor and Pu is the
axial load for the critical load case.
l Des.Mnx = Mux*MMAGx/FR where FR is the Strength Reduction Factor and
Mu is the bending moment for the appropriate axis for the critical load
case.
l Mu = Ö (Mux.Mmagx)²+ (Muy.Mmagy)²
l e/h = (Mn/Pn)/h where h is the length of the column
664 — STAAD.Pro
11A.8 Column Design Output
The next table illustrates different levels of the column design output.
The output is generated without any TRACK specification:
==================================================
COLUMN NO. 1 DESIGN PER - AXIAL + BENDING
FY -4200.0 FC - 294.1 Kg/cm2 CIRC SIZE 100.0(cm)DIAMETER
AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 128.506
BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATION PHI
----------------------------------------------------------
46 - NUMBER 6 1.669 1 END 0.700
(EQUALLY SPACED)
TRACK=1 generates the following additional output:
COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Z/Y -AXIS (Kg-cm )
--------------------------------------------------------
P0 Pn max P-bal. M-bal. e-bal.(cm)
2095196.38 2095196.38 727411.12 29235398.00 40.2
M0 P-tens. Des.Pn 'Des.Mn e/h
20606994.00 -550620.00 0.00 20000000.00 NaN
--------------------------------------------------------
TRACK=2 generates the following output in addition to all the above:
Pn Mn Pn Mn
| 1934027.38 5373253.50 967013.69 27278232.00

P0 |* 1772858.50 11408365.00 805844.75 28658428.00
| * 1611689.50 16296947.00 644675.81 29473708.00
Pn,max|__* 1450520.62 20083028.00 483506.84 28901764.00
| * 1289351.62 23117562.00 322337.91 27205616.00
Pn | * 1128182.62 25462606.00 161168.95 24433192.00
NOMINAL| *
AXIAL| *
COMPRESSION| *
Pb|-------*Mb
| *
___________|____*_______
| * M0 Mn,
| * BENDING
P-tens|* MOMENT
11A.9 Slab Design

Slabs are designed per Mexican NTC specifications. To design a slab, it must be
modeled using finite elements.
Element design will be performed only for the moments MX and MY at the center of
the element. Design will not be performed for FX, FY, FXY, MXY. Also, design is
not performed at any other point on the surface of the element. Shear is checked
with Q.
A typical example of element design output is shown below. The reinforcement

required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the
reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as transverse
reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, CLB, CLS, CLT, DIM, and EXP listed in
Table 11A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned are not used
in slab design.
666 — STAAD.Pro
ELEMENT DESIGN SUMMARY
----------------------
ELEMENT LONG. REINF MOM-X /LOAD TRANS. REINF MOM-Y

/LOAD
(SQ.CM/M ) (T -M /M ) (SQ.CM/M ) (T -M /M )
1 TOP : Longitudinal direction - Only minimum steel required.
1 BOTT: Transverse direction - Only minimum steel required.
1 TOP : 2.239 0.00 / 0 3.252 983.00 / 1
BOTT: 3.758 983.00 / 1 1.684 0.00 / 0
1 SHEAR CAPACITY 3794.73 Kg ***PASS***

668 — STAAD.Pro
Mexican Codes - Steel Design Per Mexican
Code
11B.1 General
The program is based in: Complementary Technical Standards for the Design and
Construction of Steel Structures – Dec. 1987. (Normas Técnicas Complementarias
para Diseño y construcción de Estructuras Metálicas) of the Mexican Construction
Code for the Federal District –Aug. 1993 (Reglamento de Construcciones para el
Distrito Federal) (hereafter referred to as NTC 1987).
The design philosophy considered is that of the Load Cases and Resistance
Method or Limit States Design usually known as Load and Resistance Factor Design
(LRFD).
Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states
at which they would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of
limit-state are recognized--ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations
in ultimate limit state design are strength and stability, while that in serviceability is
deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that a uniform
reliability is achieved for all steel structures under various loading conditions and at
the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation of the Mexican Standards for steel structures,

members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit
states of strength, and stability. It allows to check deformation to verify
serviceability.
program checks that main code requirements for each selected section are met and
The following sections describe the salient features of the Mexican specifications as
implemented in STAAD steel design. A brief description of the fundamental
concepts is presented here.

Mexican Codes - Steel Design Per Mexican Code
11B.2 Limit States Design Fundamentals

The primary objective of the Limit States Design Specification is to provide a
uniform reliability for all steel structures under various loading conditions.
The Limit States Design Method uses separate factors for each load and resistance.
Because the different factors reflect the degree of uncertainty of different loads
and combinations of loads and of the accuracy of predicted strength, a more
uniform reliability is possible.
The method may be summarized by the inequality
Y Q ≤ R FR
i i n
On the left side of the inequality, the required strength is the summation of the
various load effects, Q , multiplied by their respective load factors, Y . The design
i i
strength, on the right side, is the nominal strength or resistance, R , multiplied by
n
a resistance factor, FR.
In the STAAD implementation of the Mexican Standards, it is assumed that the

user will use appropriate load factors and create the load combinations necessary
for analysis. The design portion of the program will take into consideration the
load effects (forces and moments) obtained from analysis. In calculation of
resistances of various elements (beams, columns etc.), resistance (nominal
strength) and applicable resistance factor will be automatically considered.
11B.3 Member End Forces and Moments

Member end forces and moments in the member result from loads applied to the
structure. These forces are in the local member coordinate system. the following
figures show the member end actions with their directions. Refer to Section 1.19
of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details.

The Limit States Design specification allows inelastic deformation of section
elements. Thus local buckling becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are
classified as compact (type 2), noncompact (type 3), or slender element (type 4),
sections depending upon their local buckling characteristics, besides sections type
1 are able for plastic design. This classification is a function of the geometric
670 — STAAD.Pro
section class. STAAD is capable of determining the section classification for the
standard shapes and design accordingly.
11B.5 Member in Axial Tension

The criteria governing the capacity of tension members is based on two limit states.
The limit state of yielding in the gross section is intended to prevent excessive
elongation of the member. The second limit state involves fracture at the section
with the minimum effective net area. The net section area may be specified by the
user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 11B.1), that always refers to
the gross section. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member based
on these two limit states and proceeds with member selection or code check
accordingly.
In addition to the tension resistance criterion, the user defines if tension members
are required to satisfy slenderness limitations which are a function of the nature of
use of the member (main load resisting component, bracing member, etc.). In both
the member selection and code checking process, STAAD immediately does a
slenderness check on appropriate members before continuing with other
procedures for determining the adequacy of a given member.
11B.6 Axial Compression

The column strength equations take into account inelastic deformation and other
recent research in column behavior. Two equations governing column strength are
available, one for inelastic buckling and the other for elastic or Euler buckling. Both
equations include the effects of residual stresses and initial out-of-straightness.
Compression strength for a particular member is calculated by STAAD according to
the procedure outlined in Section 3.2 of the NTC. For slender elements, the
procedure described in Section 2.3.6.NTC is also used.
The procedures of Section 3.2 of the Commentaries, design helps and examples of
the Complementary Technical Standards for the Design and Construction of Steel
Structures (de los Comentarios, ayudas de diseño y ejemplos de las Normas
Técnicas Complementarias para el Diseño y Construcción de Estructuras Metálicas,
DDF (Comentarios - Julio 1993) were implemented for the determination of design
strength for these limit states.
Effective length for calculation of compression resistance may be provided through

the use of the parameters KY, KZ and/or LY, LZ. If not provided, the entire member
length will be taken into consideration.

In addition to the compression resistance criterion, compression members are

required to satisfy slenderness limitations which are a function of the nature of use
of the member (main load resisting component, bracing member, etc.). In both the
member selection and code checking process, STAAD immediately does a
slenderness check on appropriate members before continuing with other
procedures for determining the adequacy of a given member.
11B.7 Flexural Design Strength

In the Limit States Design Method, the flexural design strength of a member is
determined mainly by the limit state of lateral torsional buckling. Inelastic bending
is allowed and the basic measure of flexural capacity is the plastic moment capacity
of the section.
The flexural resistance is a function of plastic moment capacity, actual laterally

unbraced length, limiting laterally unbraced length, buckling moment and the
bending coefficient. The limiting laterally unbraced length Lu and flexural
resistance Mr are functions of the section geometry and are calculated as per the
procedure of Section 3.3.2 of the NTC.
The purpose of bending coefficient Cb is to account for the influence of the

moment gradient on lateral-torsional buckling. This coefficient can be specified by
the user through the use of parameter CB or CBy (see Table 11B.1) or may be
calculated by the program (according to LRDF USA specification) if CB is specified
as 0.0. In the absence of the parameter CB, a default value of 1.0 will be used.
To specify laterally unsupported length, either of the parameters UNL and UNF
(see Table 10B.1) can be used.
It is taken into account the reduction of flexural resistance due to slender web
according to section 4.5.8 of the NTC
For the sections where the web and flange are slender the LRDF USA specification
was used.
Stress areas due to bending about y axis (MY)
672 — STAAD.Pro
Note: The local X axis goes into the page; the Global Y axis is vertical upwards;
the shaded area indicates area under compression; the area not shaded
indicates area under tension.
Stress areas due to bending about Z axis (MZ)
11B.8 Design for Shear

The procedure of Sect. 3.3.3 of the NTC is used in STAAD to design for shear forces
in members. Besides combined bending and shear is checked according to section
3.3.4 of the NTC, considering also the limits for stiffeners of the web according to
sections 4.5.6/7 of the NTC. Shear in wide flanges and channel sections is resisted
by the area of the web/s..

11B.9 Combined Compression Axial Force and

Bending
The interaction of flexure and axial forces in singly and doubly symmetric shapes is
governed by formulas of the Section 3.4 of the NTC. These interaction formulas
cover the general case of biaxial bending combined with axial force. They are also
valid for uniaxial bending and axial force.
It is considered that the frames are part of structures that have shear walls or rigid
elements so that the lateral displacements of a floor could be disregarded. The
program has included formulas to include structures with lateral displacements in
the future considering for B2 the columns individually and not the complete floor
analysis.
It is taken into account if the elements have transverse loads and if the ends are
angularly restrained.
11B.10 Combined Tension Axial Force and Bending

Based on Section 3.5 4 of the NTC.

Design per Mexican Standards is requested by using the CODE. Other applicable
parameters are summarized in Table 11B.1 below. These parameters communicate
design decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allow the engineer to
control the design process to suit an application's specific needs.
The parameters DMAX and DMIN may only be used for member selection only.
Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number till it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
674 — STAAD.Pro
Table 11B.1 - Design Parameters According to Mexican NTC Stand-
ards - Steel
Name
CODE - Must be specified as MEXICAN.

KX 1.0 K value for flexural-torsional

buckling
KY 1.0 K value in local Y axis- Usually

minor axis
KZ 1.0 K value in local Z axis- Usually

major axis
LX Member length Length for flexural-torsional

buckling
LY Member length Length to calculate

slenderness ratio for buckling
about local Y axis.
LZ Member length Length to calculate

about local Z axis.
FYLD 2530 kg/cm2 Minimum Yield strength of

steel
FU 4230 Kg/cm2 Ultimate tensile strength of

steel
NSF 1 Net section factor for tension

members
UNT Member length Unsupported length (L) of the

top* flange for calculating
flexural strength . Will be used
only if compression is in the
top flange.


Name
UNB Member length Unsupported length (L) of the

bottom* flange for calculating
bottom flange.
STIFF Member length Spacing of stiffeners for beams

for shear design
Cb y Cby 1 Coefficient C defined per

section 3.3.2.2. If Cb is set to
0.0 it will be calculated by the
program according to LRFD
USA (CbMex=1/CbUSA). Any
other value will be directly
used in the design.
TRACK 0 0 = Suppress all design

strengths
1 = Print all design strengths
2 = Print expanded design

output
DMAX 114 cm Maximum allowable depth
DMIN 0.0 cm Minimum allowable depth

effect and design strength
BEAM 0 0: Design at ends and those

locations specified by
SECTION command.
1: Design at ends and at

every y cada 1/12th point
along member length
Rigid_to_ TRUE Defines if the structure has

H_Loads elements to bear the wind load
676 — STAAD.Pro
Name
( shear walls, wind trusses or

bracing rigid elements ) that
restrict lateral displacements
and allow to disregard
slenderness effects.
IRREG 0 Variable defined for the whole

structure indicating if it is
regular or irregular according
to section 3.4 of the NTC.
IRREG=1 for columns being

part of irregular structures.
I_NO_OXIG 0 Defined for I shapes or tubes
Curve Definition according to

NTC.3.2.2.1a)
I_NO_OXIG.= 0 implies
n=1.4
laminated I shapes, tubes or

built up with 3 or 4 welded
plates obtained from wider
plates cuts with oxygen.
I_NO_OXIG.= 1 implies n=1
I shapes, tubes or built up with

3 or 4 welded plates
n is defined by the program
IMAIN_MEM 0 IMAIN_MEM=0 MAIN

MEMBER
IMAIN_MEM=1 Secondary
and wind trusses
Ccomb 1 Cfactor for combined forces

when there are transverse


Name
loads in the members. Section

3.4.3.3.ii NTC
Ccomb=1 If members ends are

restricted angularly.
Ccomb=0.85 If members ends

are not restricted angularly.
DUCTILE_ TRUE DUCTILE FRAMES
SEISMIC _ ACCORDING TO SECTION 11.
DESIGN Main design conditions are
considered (not including, at
the moment, geometric ones)
KX 1.0 K value for flexural-torsional

buckling
KY 1.0 K value in local Y axis- Usually

minor axis
KZ 1.0 K value in local Z axis- Usually

major axis
LX Member length Length for flexural-torsional

buckling
LY Member length Length to calculate

about local Y axis.
LZ Member length Length to calculate

about local Z axis.
FYLD 2530 kg/cm2 Minimum Yield strength of

steel
FU 4230 Kg/cm2 Ultimate tensile strength of

steel
678 — STAAD.Pro
Name
NSF 1 Net section factor for tension

members
UNT Member length Unsupported length (L) of the

top flange.
UNB Member length Unsupported length (L) of the

bottom flange.
STIFF Member length Spacing of stiffeners for beams

for shear design
Cb y Cby 1 Coefficient C defined per

section 3.3.2.2. If Cb is set to
0.0 it will be calculated by the
program according to LRFD
USA (CbMex=1/CbUSA). Any
other value will be directly
TRACK 0 0 = Supress all design

strengths
used in the design.
1 = Print all design strengths
2 = Print expanded design

output
DMAX 114 cm Maximum allowable depth

effect and design strength
BEAM 0 0: Design at ends and those

locations specified by


Name
SECTION command.
1: Design at ends and at

every y cada 1/12th point
along member length
Rigid_to_ TRUE Defines if the structure has

H_Loads elements to bear the wind load
( shear walls, wind trusses or
bracing rigid elements ) that
restrict lateral displacements
and allow to disregard
slenderness effects.
IRREG 0 Variable defined for the whole

structure indicating if it is
regular or irregular according
to section 3.4 of the NTC.
IRREG=1 for columns being

part of irregular structures.
I_NO_OXIG 0 Defined for I shapes or tubes
Curve Definition according to

NTC.3.2.2.1a)
I_NO_OXIG.= 0 implies
n=1.4
laminated I shapes, tubes or

built up with 3 or 4 welded
plates obtained from wider
plates cuts with oxygen.
I shapes, tubes or built up with
I_NO_OXIG.= 1 implies n=1
680 — STAAD.Pro
Name
3 or 4 welded plates
n is defined by the program
IMAIN_MEM 0 IMAIN_MEM=0 MAIN

MEMBER
IMAIN_MEM=1 Secondary
and wind trusses
Ccomb 1 Cfactor for combined forces

when there are transverse
loads in the members. Section
3.4.3.3.ii NTC
Ccomb=1 If members ends are

restricted angularly.
Ccomb=0.85 If members ends

are not restricted angularly.
DUCTILE_ TRUE DUCTILE FRAMES
SEISMIC _ ACCORDING TO SECTION 11.
DESIGN Main design conditions are
considered (not including, at
the moment, geometric ones)
* Top and Bottom represent the positive and negative side of the local Y axis (local
Z axis if SET Z UP is used.
For deflection check, parameters DFF, DJ1 and DJ2 from Table 2.1 may be used. All
requirements remain the same.

Both code checking and member selection options are available in STAAD Mexican
Standards implementation.


CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the Mexican NTC which governed the
design.
If the TRACK is set to 1.0, member design strengths will be printed out.
682 — STAAD.Pro
Section 12
Russian Codes

684 — STAAD.Pro
Russian Codes - Concrete Design Per Russian
Code (SNiP 2.03.01-84*)
12A.1 General
Russian Code SNiP 2.03.01–84* “Plain concrete and concrete structures” is based
on the method of limit states. Code SNiP 2.03.01–84* defines two groups of limit
states.
Analysis according to the first group of limit states is performed to avoid the
following phenomena:
l brittle, plastic or other type of failure,
l loss by structure of stable form or position,
l fatigue failure,
l failure due to the action of load actions and unfavorable environmental

effects.
Analysis according to the second group of limit states is performed to avoid the
following phenomena:
l excessive and long-term opening of cracks if they are allowed according to

service conditions,
l excessive displacements.
Analysis of structures for the first group of limit states is performed with the use of
the maximum (design) loads and actions. Analysis of structures for the second
group of limit states is made in accordance with the operational (normative) loads
and actions. Ratio between design and normative loads is called reliability
coefficient for loads which is determined according to SNiP 2.01.07.-85 “Loads and
actions”.
Reliability coefficient γ for destination according to SNiP 2.01.07.-85 shall be

n
considered in determination of loads and their combinations.
Program STAAD.Pro makes it possible to calculate reinforcement for concrete

members according to codes of many countries round the World and Russian Code
SNiP 2.03.01-84* inclusive. Algorithms for calculation of reinforcement of concrete
linear (beams, columns) and 2D (two dimensional) (slabs, walls, shells) members

Russian Codes - Concrete Design Per Russian Code (SNiP 2.03.01-84*)
are incorporated in program STAAD.Pro. Not only Code SNiP 2.03.01-84* but
also the “Guide for design of plain concrete and reinforced concrete structures
from normal weight and lightweight concrete (to SNiP 2.03.01-84)” have been
used in creation of these algorithms.
It is possible using program STAAD.Pro to calculate reinforcement for beams of

rectangular or T section and for columns of rectangular or circular section (Fig.1).
Figure 12A.1 - Notation of dimensions for rectangular, circular and T sections
Flange of T-shape beams may be situated at the top zone of the section if the angle
BETA=0°, or at the bottom zone of the section, if BETA=180°.
12A.2 Design Parameters and Input Data

Entry of data of cross-sections of beams and columns is made by the use of
MEMBER PROPERTIES command, and thicknesses of 2D members are entered
by ELEMENT PROPERTY command.
Example:
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
* COLUMNS OF RECTANGULAR CROSS-SECTION
1 TO 16 PRI YD 350. ZD 350.
* COLUMNS OF CIRCULAR CROSS-SECTION
17 TO 22 PRI YD 350.
* BEAMS OF T CROSS-SECTION
23 TO 40 PRI YD 450. ZD 550. YB 230. ZB 200.
UNIT METER
ELEMENT PROPERTY
686 — STAAD.Pro
41 TO 100 THICKNESS 0.14
101 TO 252 THICKNESS 0.16
* FLANGE OF T BEAMS IS LOCATED AT THE BOTTOM ZONE OF
CROSS-SECTION
BETA 180. MEMB 23 TO 40
COMMANDS FOR CALCULATION OF REINFORCEMENT ARE
LOCATED IN THE INPUT DATA FILE AFTER THE COMMAND OF
ANALYSIS AND AS A RULE, AFTER OUTPUT COMMANDS TO PRINT
RESULTS OF CALCULATION.
Example:
* COMMAND OF ANALYSIS
PERFORM ANALYSIS
.
.* OUTPUT COMMAND TO PRINT RESULTS OF CALCULATION
(ACCORDING TO USER’S JUDGMENT)
.
* COMMAND OF LOADING AND THEIR COMBINATIONS
CONSIDERED IN DESIGN
LOAD LIST 1 5 TO 9
* COMMAND TO START REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION
PROCEDURE
CODE RUSSIAN
.* LIST OF PARAMETERS BEING USED IN REINFORCEMENT
CALCULATION
.
.
BCL 20. MEMB 17 TO 22
CL1 0.04 MEMB 1 TO 40
DD2 10. MEMB 23 TO 40
CRA 0.036 MEMB 41 TO 252
.

.
.
* COMMAND OF BEAM REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION
DESIGN BEAM 23 TO 40
* COMMAND OF COLUMN REINFORCEMENT CALCULATION
* COMMAND OF CALCULATION 2D ELEMENTS (SLABS, WALLS,
SHELLS)
* COMMAND OF INTERRUPTION REINFORCEMENT
CALCULATION
END CONCRETE DESIGN
In tables 1, 2 and 3 information about parameters used for calculation of

reinforcement for beams, columns and 2D (two dimensional) members is
presented. Values of parameters do not depend on UNIT command. In the file of
input data only such parameters have to be taken, the values of which differ from
determined in the program.
Table 12A.1 - Names of parameters for Concrete design according

to Russian Code -СНиП 2.03.01-84* for beams.
No. Parameter Default Description
name Value
1 NLT 1 Number of long-term loading case
2 RCL 3 Class of longitudinal

reinforcement:
l RCL = 1, if class of
reinforcement is A-I;
reinforcement is A-II;
688 — STAAD.Pro
name Value
reinforcement is A-III;

reinforcement is A-IIIb;
reinforcement is A-IV;
reinforcement is A-V;
reinforcement is A-VI;
reinforcement is A-VII;

reinforcement is K-7;
reinforcement is B-II;
reinforcement is Bp-II;

reinforcement is Bp-I;

reinforcement is K-19

reinforcement: Russian Grade:
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;


name Value
European Grade:
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;
3 USM 1. Total product of service conditions

coefficients for longitudinal
reinforcement (g )
s
4 UB2 0.9 Specific service conditions
coefficient for concrete (g )
b2
5 DD1 16. Diameter of longitudinal
reinforcement bars in beam tension
zone
6 DD2 16. Diameter of shear reinforcement

bars for beam;
7 BCL 15. Compression class of concrete
7 BCL 15. Compression Class of concrete.
l 10 = B10;
l 15 = B15
l 20 = B20;
l 25 = B25;
l 30 = B30;
l 35 = B35;
l 40 = B40;
l 45 = B45;
l 50 = B50;
l 55 = B55;
l 60 = B60;
l 8.10 = C8/10
690 — STAAD.Pro
name Value
l 12.15 = C12/15;
l 16.20 = C16/20
l 25.30 = C25/30
l 30.37 = C30/37
l 35.45 = C35/45
l 40.50 = C50/50
l 45.55 = C45/55
l 50.60 = C50/60
l 60.75 = C60/75
l 70.85 = C70/85
l 80.95 = C80/95
l 90.105 = C90/105
8 UBM 1. Product of service conditions

coefficients for concrete, except
UB2 (g )
b
9 TEM 0. Parameter of concrete hardening
conditions:
l TEM=0, for natural

hardening conditions;
l TEM=1, for steam hardening

conditions
10 CL1 0.05 Distance from top/bottom fiber of

beam cross section to the center of
longitudinal reinforcement bar;
11 CL2 0.05 Distance from left/right side of

beam cross section to the center of
longitudinal reinforcement bar
12 WST 0.4 Ultimate width of short-term crack
13 WLT 0.3 Ultimate width of long-term crack


name Value
14 SSE 0 Limit state parameter for beam

design
l SSE=0, if calculation of
reinforcement amount must
be carried out according to
the requirements of load
carrying capacity (the first
limit state);
l SSE=1, if calculation of
reinforcement amount must
be carried out according to
the cracking requirements
(the second limit state)
15 RSH 1 Class of shear reinforcement:
l RSH = 1, if class of
reinforcement is A-I;
reinforcement is A-II;
reinforcement is A-III;

reinforcement is A-IIIb;
reinforcement is A-IV;
reinforcement is A-V;
reinforcement is A-VI;
reinforcement is A-VII;
692 — STAAD.Pro
name Value

reinforcement is K-7;
reinforcement is B-II;
reinforcement is Bp-II;

reinforcement is Bp-I;

reinforcement is K-19
15 RSH 1 Class of shear reinforcement:
Russian Grade:
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European grade:
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;
16 FWT ZD Design width of beam top flange.

Use for beam design only with
default value provided as ZD in
member properties.
17 FWB ZB Design width of beam bottom

flange. Use for beam design only
with default value provided as ZB


name Value
in member properties.
18 DEP YD Design depth of beam section. Use

for beam design only with default
value provided as YD in member
properties.
19 SFA 0. Face of support location at the start

of the beam. Use for beam design
only.
20 EFA 0. Face of support location at the end

of the beam. Use for beam design
only.
21 NSE 13 Number of equally-spaced sections

for beam design. Use for beam
design only. Upper limit is equal to
20.

to Russian Code СНиП 2.03.01-84* for columns
Name Value

reinforcement:
Russian Grade:
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European Grade:
694 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;

reinforcement (g )
s
b2
5 DD1 16. Minimum diameter of longitudinal
reinforcement bars for column
6 DD2 16. Maximum diameter of longitudinal

reinforcement bars for column
7 BCL 15. Compression class of concrete:
l 10 = B10;
l 15 = B15
l 20 = B20;
l 25 = B25;
l 30 = B30;
l 35 = B35;
l 40 = B40;
l 45 = B45;
l 50 = B50;
l 55 = B55;
l 60 = B60;
l 8.10 = C8/10
l 12.15 = C12/15;
l 16.20 = C16/20
l 25.30 = C25/30


Name Value
l 30.37 = C30/37
l 35.45 = C35/45
l 40.50 = C50/50
l 45.55 = C45/55
l 50.60 = C50/60
l 60.75 = C60/75
l 70.85 = C70/85
l 80.95 = C80/95
l 90.105 = C90/105

UB2 (g )
b
conditions:
l TEM=0, for natural

hardening conditions;

conditions
10 CL1 0.05 Distance from edge of column

cross section to the center of
longitudinal reinforcement bar
11 ELY 1. Column's length coefficient to

evaluate slenderness effect in local
Y axis
12 ELZ 1. Column's length coefficient to

Z axis
13 RSH 1. Class of shear reinforcement:
Russian Grade:
696 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European grade:
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;

to Russian Code (SNiP 2.03.01-84*) for slabs and/or walls
Name Value
2 RCL 3 Class of longitudinal reinforcement:
Russian Grade:
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European Grade:
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;


Name Value
l 13 = S500;

reinforcement (g )
s
b2
5 SDX 16. Diameter of reinforcing bars located
in the first local (X) direction of
slab/wall
6 SDY 16. Diameter of reinforcing bars located

in the second local (Y) direction of
slab/wall
7 BCL 15. Compression class of concrete:
l 10 = B10;
l 15 = B15
l 20 = B20;
l 25 = B25;
l 30 = B30;
l 35 = B35;
l 40 = B40;
l 45 = B45;
l 50 = B50;
l 55 = B55;
l 60 = B60;
l 8.10 = C8/10
l 12.15 = C12/15;
l 16.20 = C16/20
l 25.30 = C25/30
l 30.37 = C30/37
698 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
l 35.45 = C35/45
l 40.50 = C50/50
l 45.55 = C45/55
l 50.60 = C50/60
l 60.75 = C60/75
l 70.85 = C70/85
l 80.95 = C80/95
l 90.105 = C90/105

UB2 (g )
b
conditions:
l TEM=0, for natural hardening

conditions;

conditions
10 CL 0.05 Distance from top/bottom face of

slab/wall element to the center of
longitudinal reinforcing bars
located in first local (X) direction.
(Main thickness of top/bottom
concrete cover for slab/wall
element)
11 CRA 0.05 Distance from top/bottom face of

slab/wall element to the center of
transverse reinforcing bars located
in second local (Y) direction
(Secondary thickness of top/bottom
concrete cover for slab/wall)


Name Value
12 WST 0.4 Ultimate width of short-term crack
13 WLT 0.3 Ultimate width of long-term crack
14 STA 0 Parameter of limit state for

slab/wall design:
l STA=0, if calculation of
nonsymmetrical
reinforcement must be carried
out according to the
requirements of load carrying
capacity (the first limit state);
symmetrical reinforcement
must be carried out according
to the requirements of load
carrying capacity (the first
limit state);
nonsymmetrical
reinforcement must be carried
according to the cracking
requirements (the second
limit state);
symmetrical reinforcement
must be carried according to
the cracking requirements
(the second limit state)
15 SELX 0. Design length of wall member to

X axis
700 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
16 SELY 0. Design length of wall member to

Y axis
17 MMA 0 Design parameter of slab/wall

reinforcement:
l MMA=0, if reinforcement
calculation must be applied by
stresses in local axis;
l MMA=1, if reinforcement
calculation must be applied by
principal stresses
18 MMB 1 Design parameter of slab/wall

reinforcement:
l MMB=0, if the effect of

additional eccentricity is not
taken into account;
l MMB=1, if the effect of

additional eccentricity is taken
into account
19 RSH 1. Class of shear reinforcement:
Russian Grade:
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European grade:
l 11 = S240;


Name Value
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;
12A.3 Beams
Reinforcement for beams of rectangular and T cross-section can be calculated. In
calculation of longitudinal reinforcement bending moment about local axis
and torsional moments are considered, but influence of longitudinal forces and
bending moments in relation to local axis is ignored. In calculation of
transverse reinforcement shear forces parallel to local axis and torsional
moments are taken into account.
Reinforcement for beams can be calculated either from conditions of strength or

from conditions of open crack width limitation (see parameter SSE).
Parameters SFA and ЕFA are considered only in calculation of transverse

reinforcement.
In general case calculation of reinforcement for beams is carried out two times –
according to strength conditions and according to conditions of open crack width
limitation. In reinforcement calculations from conditions of strength design values
of load have to be taken and in calculations from conditions of crack width
limitation – characteristic (normative) load values are used. Both calculations can
be carried out in one session with the use multiple analysis possibility of the
program STAAD.Pro.
In most cases calculation of reinforcement is carried out with account only of a

part of loadings. In such cases command LOAD LIST is used, in which numbers
of loads considered in calculation are indicated. Number of permanent and long-
term loads equal to parameter NLT must be included into the list of considered
loads.
It has to be noted, that values of parameters DD1 and DD2 have influence not
only on the width of opened crack but also in some cases, on design and
normative reinforcement resistances.
Parameter BCL can be equal to any value of concrete compression strength class
given in SNiP 2.03.01-84* and to any intermediate value as well.
702 — STAAD.Pro
It should be remembered, that accuracy of results of calculation of transverse
reinforcement increases with the value of parameter NSE.
Parameters SFA and ЕFA are considered only in calculations of transverse

reinforcement. Beam 1 is shown in Figure 2 with rigid intervals the lengths of which
are: at the start of the beam 0.3m and at the end – 0.2m. In modeling of the beam
the following command can be used.
MEMBER OFFSET
1 START 0.3 0 0
1 END -0.2 0 0
Figure 12A.2 - Diagram of a beam with rigid intervals
When command MEMBER OFFSET is used forces corresponding to the beam the
length of which is equal to the distance between points a and b are calculated and
then used in calculation of reinforcement. In such case it is necessary to take into
account default values of parameters SFA and ЕFA equal to zero.
When command MEMBER OFFSET is not used forces corresponding to the beam
the length of which is equal to the distance between points 10 and 11 are calculated
and then used in calculation of reinforcement. In this case it is necessary to
consider values of parameters SFA=0.3 and ЕFA=0,2 in reinforcement
calculation.
In both cases calculated quantity of transverse reinforcement will be the same.

Calculated quantity of longitudinal reinforcement in the second case will be greater.
For beam the following output is generated:

l beam number;

lmethod of calculation (according to conditions of strength or limitations of

opened crack width);
l length and cross-sectional dimensions;
ldistance from resultant of forces acting in bottom/top reinforcement to
bottom/top edge of the section;
l distance from the side edge of cross-section of the beam web to the
centroid of longitudinal bars located at this edge;
l concrete class;
l class of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement;
l assumed in calculations bar diameters of longitudinal and transverse
reinforcement;
l calculation results of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement (in two
tables).
In nine columns of the first table the following results are presented:
Table 12A.4 - Beam design output 1
Result Description
Section distance of the section from the “start” of the beam, мм
As- cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement in the bottom zone of
cross-section of the beam, if angle BETA=0°, or in the top zone, if
BETA=180° , sq.cm
As+ cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement in the top zone of
cross-section of the beam , if angle BETA=0°, or in the top zone, if
BETA=180° , sq.cm
Moments (-/+) values of bending moments, determining cross-sectional areas of
longitudinal reinforcement As- and As+ , kNm
Load. N. (-/+) numbers of loading versions, determining cross-sectional areas of
longitudinal reinforcement
Acrc1 short-term opened crack width*, mm
Acrc2 long-term opened crack width*, mm
704 — STAAD.Pro
* Opened crack width is presented only in the case when calculation is performed
according to conditions limiting opened crack width.
In ten columns of second table the following results are presented:

Table 12A.5 - Beam design output 2
Result Description
Section distance of the section from the “start” of the beam, mm
Qsw intensity of transverse reinforcement, kN/m
Asw cross-sectional area of transverse bars, sq.cm, if their step is 10, 15, 20,
25 or 30 cm
Q value of shear force parallel to the local axis, kN
T value of torsional moment, kNm
Load N. number of loading version, determining intensity of transverse
reinforcement
An example of output of calculation results is presented below.
BEAM NO. 23 DESIGN RESULTS
(by limitation of crack width)
Length - 6000 mm.
Section: BF1= 550 mm, B= 200 mm, HF1=220 mm, H=450 mm.
Distance from top/bottom surface of beam to center of longitudinal
reinforcement - 40 mm.
Distance from side surface of beam to center of longitudinal
reinforcement - 30 mm.
Concrete class - В25.0 (Rb=13.05 MPa; Rbt=0.94 MPa; Gb2=0.9).
Class of longitudinal reinforcement - А-III (Rs=365.0 MPa; Rsc=365.0 MPa).
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars D=16 mm.
Class of shear reinforcement - А-I (Rsw=175.0 MPa).
Diameter of shear reinforcement bars Dw=10 mm.
L O N G I T U D I N A L R E I N F O R C E M E N T

Section As-As+ Moments(-/+) Load.N.(-/+) Acrc1 Acrc2
mm sq.cm kNm mm mm
---------------------------------------------------------------------
0. 10.92 0.41 -152. / 2. 6 / 4 0.237 0.121

500. 4.74 0.41 -60. / 0. 5 / 0 0.294 0.157
1000. 1.13 1.13 -5. / 17. 4 / 6 0.000 0.000
1500. 1.13 6.41 -8. / 75. 4 / 6 0.295 0.147
2000. 1.13 9.24 -11. / 115. 4 / 6 0.298 0.149
2500. 1.13 11.53 -14. / 139. 4 / 6 0.271 0.134
3000. 1.19 12.16 -18. / 144. 4 / 6 0.263 0.127
3500. 1.41 10.86 -21. / 132. 4 / 6 0.277 0.130
4000. 1.63 8.28 -24. / 103. 4 / 6 0.296 0.129
4500. 1.95 4.54 -27. / 56. 4 / 6 0.299 0.093
5000. 3.23 0.58 -39. / 9. 5 / 3 0.293 0.157
5500. 0.74 0.41 - / 0. 5 / 0 0.271 0.142
124.
6000. 16.89 0.41 - / 0. 5 / 0 0.155 0.078
226.
S H E A R R E I N F O R C E M E N T
Section Qsw Asw, cm^2, if Sw= Q T Load
mm kN/m 10cm 15cm 20cm 25cm 30cm kN kNm N.
2.15 2.87 -
0. 251.3 1.44 3.59 4.31 203.9 0.0 6
2.15 2.87 -
500. 251.3 1.44 3.59 4.31 168.9 0.0 6
1.50 1.99 -
1000. 174.5 1.00 2.49 2.99 133.9 0.0 6
0.55 0.73 -
1500. 63.9 0.36 0.91 1.09 98.9 0.0 6
Minimum detailing -
706 — STAAD.Pro
2000. requirements ! 63.9 0.0 6
Minimum detailing -
2500. requirements ! 28.9 0.0 6
Minimum detailing
3000. requirements ! 12.7 0.0 5
Minimum detailing
3500. requirements ! 47.7 0.0 5
Minimum detailing
4000. requirements ! 82.7 0.0 5
95.0 0.82 1.09 1.37 1.64
4500. 0.55 117.7 0.0 5
2.08 2.77 3.46 4.16
5000. 242.5 1.39 152.7 0.0 5
2.59 3.46 4.32 5.19
5500. 302.5 1.73 187.7 0.0 5
2.59 3.46 4.32 5.19
6000. 302.5 1.73 216.1 0.0 5
Here Minimum detailing requirements! means that reinforcement is not required

according to calculation.
12A.4 Columns
Reinforcement for columns of rectangular or circular cross-section can be
calculated. Flexibility of columns can be evaluated in two ways. In the case of usual
analysis (command PERFORM ANALYSIS) flexibility is assessed by parameters
ELY and ELZ, values of which should conform with recommendation of the Code
SNiP 2.03.01-84*. If P-DELTA (analysis according to deformed diagram) or
NONLINEAR (nonlinear geometry) analysis is performed, values of parameters
ELY and ELZ should be close to zero, for example ELY = ELZ=0.01.
Longitudinal reinforcement for columns is calculated only from condition of

strength. Longitudinal forces and bending moments in relation to local axes
and are taken into account in longitudinal reinforcement calculations.
For rectangular columns the following output is generated:

l column number;
l column length and cross-sectional dimensions;
l distance of centroid of each longitudinal bar from the nearest edge of the
cross-section;
l concrete class;
l longitudinal reinforcement class;
l range of longitudinal reinforcement bar diameters assumed in calculation;
l diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars obtained in calculation;
l total quantity of longitudinal bars;
l quantity of longitudinal bars at each cross-section edge, directed parallel to
the local axis ;
l quantity of longitudinal bars at each cross-section edge, directed parallel to
the local axis .
In nine columns of the table under the heading LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT

the following output is presented:
Table 12A.6 - Column design output 1
Result
Section distance of the section from the “start” of the column, mm
Astot total cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement, sq.cm
Asy cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement bars at each edge of section,
directed parallel to the local axis , sq.cm
Asz cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement bars at each edge of section,
directed parallel to the local axis , sq.cm
Percent reinforcement percentage in the section
Nx, Mz, My respective values of longitudinal force and bending moments in relation to the
local axes and , determining cross-sectional area of longitudinal
reinforcement
Load.N. number of loading version, determining cross-sectional area of longitudinal
reinforcement
An example of output of calculation results is presented below.
708 — STAAD.Pro
COLUMN NO. 97 DESIGN RESULTS
(rectangular section)
Length - 4000 mm.
Section: B= 350 mm, H=350 mm.
Distance from edge of column cross section to center of each longitudinal
reinforcement bar - 40 mm.
Concrete class - В25.0 (Rb=13.05 МPa; Gb2=0.9).
Class of longitudinal reinforcement - А-III (Rs=365.0 МPa; Rsc=365.0 МPa).
Diameter range of longitudinal reinforcement bars:
Dmin=16 mm . . . Dmax=32 mm
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars from calculation d=20 mm.
Total number of reinforcement bars Ntot=6.
Number of longitudinal bars at each section edge parallel to the
local Y axis Nyy =2.
Number of longitudinal bars at each section edge parallel to the
local Z axis Nzz =3.
Section Astot Asy Asz Percent Nx Mz My Load
m sq.cm sq.cm sq.cm % kN kNm kNm N

0. 16.42 3.01 6.20 1.34 285.5 81.9 0.0 6
4000. 15.35 3.01 5.67 1.25 397.3 95.3 0.0 5
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars, total quantity of longitudinal bars as

well as quantity of longitudinal bars at each edge of the section obtained from
calculation should be considered as recommendation. In this case arrangement of
reinforcement in the section depends on the orientation of the local axes and is as
follows:

Calculated values of reinforcement cross-sectional areas are presented in the table

and they may differ from recommended on the lower side.
When it is not possible according to detailing provisions to arrange in the column

longitudinal reinforcement determined from calculation additional message is
derived.
For columns of circular section the following output is generated:

l column number;
l column length and diameter of cross-section;
l distance of centroid of each longitudinal bar to the edge of cross-section;
l longitudinal reinforcement class;
lassumed in calculation range of diameters of longitudinal reinforcement
bars;
l diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars obtained from calculation;
l quantity of longitudinal bars.
In seven columns of the table under the heading LONGITUDINAL

REINFORCEMENT the following results are presented:
Section distance of the section from the “start” of the column, mm

Astot total cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement, sq.cm
Per percentage of longitudinal reinforcement
cent
Nx, respective values of longitudinal force and bending moments in
Mz, My relation to local axis and , determining cross-sectional area
of longitudinal reinforcement
Load. number of loading version, determining cross-sectional area of
N. longitudinal reinforcement
710 — STAAD.Pro
An example of output of calculation results for a column of circular section is
presented below.
COLUMN NO. 80 DESIGN RESULTS
(circular section)
Length - 4000 mm.
Diameter: Dс= 350 mm.
Distance from edge of column cross section to center of each longitudinal
reinforcement bar - 50 mm.
Concrete class - В20.0 (Rb=10.35 МPa; Gb2=0.9).
Class of longitudinal reinforcement - А-III (Rs=365.0 МPa; Rsc=365.0 МPa).
Diameter range of longitudinal reinforcement bars:
Dmin=16 mm . . . Dmax=32 mm
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars from calculation D=20 mm.
Total number of reinforcement bars Ntot =7.
Section Astot Percent Nx Mz My Load
m sq.cm % kN kNm kNm N

0. 17.96 1.87 195.1 59.8 0.0 5
4000. 21.86 2.27 195.1 80.2 0.0 5
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars, total quantity of longitudinal bars as

well as quantity of longitudinal bars at each edge of the section should be
considered as recommendation.
Arrangement of reinforcement in section in this case is shown below:
Calculated cross-sectional areas of reinforcement presented in the table may differ

from recommended on the lower side.

When according to detailing provisions it is not possible to arrange in the column

longitudinal reinforcement obtained from calculation additional message is
derived.
12A.5 Two DimensionalElement (slabs, walls,

shells)
In general case calculation of reinforcement for 2D members is carried out two
times – according to conditions of strength and conditions of limiting opened
width of cracks. If reinforcement is calculated according to conditions of strength,
design values of loads have to be used, and for conditions of limiting crack width –
characteristic (normative) loads are employed. Both calculations can be made in
one session taking advantage of multiple analysis possibility of the program
STAAD.Pro.
Symmetric or nonsymmetrical reinforcement of 2D members is calculated

according to conditions of strength or according to conditions of limiting opened
crack width (see for example STA).
In reinforcement calculation for 2D members it is necessary to pay attention to

arrangement of local axes of member and direction of reinforcement (see for
example CL and CRA).
An example of output of calculation results is presented bellow.
SLAB/WALL DESIGN RESULTS
(by stresses in local axes for limitation of crack width)

Element Asx Mx Nx Load.N. Asy My Ny Load
N.
sq.cm/m kNm/m kN/m (X) sq.cm/m kNm/m kN/m
(Y)
712 — STAAD.Pro
60 TOP 0.00 - 4.9 0.00 1 0.00 - 4.5 0.00 1
BOT 3.53 - 9.9 0.00 3 3.46 - 8.9 0.00 3
61 TOP 0.00 - 5.3 0.00 1 0.00 - 4.7 0.00 1
BOT 3.87 - 10.7 0.00 3 3.65 - 9.4 0.00 3
62 TOP 0.00 - 5.6 0.00 1 0.00 - 4.8 0.00 1
BOT 4.10 - 11.2 0.00 3 3.77 - 9.6 0.00 3
Here:
Table 12A.7 - Slab design output
Result Description
Element number of finite element, TOP - “top” zone of member, BOT -
“bottom” zone of member (“top” zone of member is determined by
positive direction of local axis -see Fig.2)
Asx intensity of reinforcing in the first direction (parallel to the local
axis ), sq.cm/m
Mx distributed bending moment in respect to the local axis ,
kNm/m
Nx distributed longitudinal force directed parallel to the axis ,
kNm/m
Load N.(X) number of loading version, determining intensity of reinforcing in
the first direction
Asy intensity of reinforcing in the second direction (parallel to the local
axis ), sq.cm/m
My distributed bending moment in respect to the local axis
kNm/m
Ny distributed longitudinal force directed parallel to the local axis
kN/m
Load N.(Y) number of loading version, determining intensity of reinforcing in
the second direction

Figure 2 - Local coordinate system of 2D member and notation of forces
714 — STAAD.Pro
Russian Codes - Steel Design Per Russian Code
SNiP 2.23-81* (Edition 1999)
12B.1 General
Design Code SNiP “Steel Structures” as majority of modern codes is based on the
method of limit states. The following groups of limit states are defined in the Code.
l The first group is concerned with losses of general shape and stability,
failure, qualitative changes in configuration of structure. Appearance of non-
allowable residual deformations, displacements, yielding of materials or
opening of cracks.
lThe second group is concerned with states of structures making worse
normal their service or reducing durability due to not allowable deflections,
deviations, settlements, vibrations, etc.
Analysis of structures for the first limit state is performed using the maximum
(design) loads and actions, which can cause failure of structures.
Analysis of structures for the second limit state is performed using service
(normative) loads and actions. Relation between design and normative loads is
referred to as coefficient of load reliability, which is defined in SNiP 2.01.07.- 85
“Loads and Actions”.
Coefficient of reliability for destination GAMA n according to SNiP 2.01.07.- 85

shall be taken in to account determining loads or their combinations.
In this version of the program only members from rolled, tube and roll-formed
assortment sections and also from compound such as double angles of T-type
sections, double channels are presented. Design of other members of compound
section will be presented in other versions of the program.
Economy of selected section is indicated by ratio (RATIO) σ/R y presented in

y c
calculation results. A section is economical when said ratio equals to 0,9 – 0,95.
12B.2 Built-in Russian Steel Section Library

Typical sections of members being checked and selected according to SNiP
2.01.07.- 81* are presented in the following tables.

Russian Codes - Steel Design Per Russian Code SNiP 2.23-81* (Edition 1999)
Table 12B.1 - Typical Sections for Russian Steel Design

Section Section Designation form
Type
I-beam (GOST 8239-89) ST I12
Regular I-beam (GOST ST B1-10

26020-83)
Broad-flanged I-beam ST SH1-23

(GOST 26020-83)
Column I-beam (GOST ST K1-20

26020-83)
Channel (GOST 8240-89) ST C14
Equal legs angle (GOST ST L100x100x7

8509-89)
RA L100x100x7
Unequal legs angle (GOST ST L125x80x10

8510-89)
RA L125x80x10
Pipes (welded and for gas ST PIP102x5.5

piping)
or
ST PIPE OD 0.102 ID
0.055
Roll-formed square and ST TUB160x120x3

rectangular tubes
or
716 — STAAD.Pro
Section Section Designation form
Type
ST TUBE TH 0.003
WT 0.12 DT 0.16
Table 12B.2 - Compound Sections for Russian Steel Design

Section Section Designation
Type form
Double channels D C14 SP

0.01
(SP – clear
distance
between
channel
walls)
Double equal legs angles LD

L100x100x7
SP 0.01
(SP – clear
distance
between
angle walls)
Double unequal legs angles with long LD

legs back to back L125x80x10
SP 0.01
(SP – clear
distance
between
angle walls)
Double unequal legs angles with SD

short legs back to back L125x80x10
SP 0.01
(SP – clear

Section Section Designation

Type form
distance
between
angle walls)
Tee with flange at the top T I12
T B1-10
Note: Flange of Tee beam is at
the top part of cross-section if T SH1-23
beta angle = 0°, or at the bottom
T K1-20
part if beta angle = 180°.
For entry of cross-sectional dimensions command MEMBER PROPERTIES RUSSIAN

is used.
Example
UNITS METER
MEMBER PROPERTY RUSSIAN
* I-BEAM
1 TO 6 TABLE ST B1-10
* CHANNEL
7 TO 11 TABLE ST C14
* UNEQUAL LEGS ANGLE
12 TO 30 TABLE RA L125X80X10
* ROUND ASSORTMENT PIPE
31 TO 46 TABLE ST PIP102X5.5
* ROUND PIPE OF CROSS-SECTIONAL DIMENSIONS DEFINED BY
CLIENT
47 TO 60 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.102 ID 0.055
* SQUARE TUBE FROM ASSORTMENT
61 TO 68 TABLE ST TUB120X120X3
718 — STAAD.Pro
* RECTANGULAR TUBE OF CROSS-SECTIONAL DIMENSION
DEFINED BY CLIENT
69 TO 95 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.003 WT 0.12 DT 0.16
* DOUBLE CHANNEL (DISTANCE BETWEEN WALLS 10 ММ)
96 TO 103 TABLE D C14 SP 0.01
* DOUBLE UNEQUAL LEGS ANGLES WITH SHORT LEGS BACK-TO-
BACK (DISTANCE BETWEEN WALLS 10 ММ)
104 TO 105 TABLE SD L125X80X10 SP 0.01
* MEMBER OF TEE SECTION
106 TO 126 TABLE T SH1-23
* FLANGE OF T-BEAMS AT THE BOTTOM OF CROSS-SECTION
BETA 180. MEMB 116 TO 126
* ORIENTATION OF THE LOCAL ANGLE AXES IN RELATION TO THE
GLOBAL AXES OF THE STRUCTURE
BETA RANGLE MEMB 12 TO 30
COMMANDS OF OUTPUT DATA FOR CHECK AND SELECTION OF
SECTIONS ARE LOCATED AFTER COMMANDS OF ANALYSIS AND,
AS A RULE, AFTER OUTPUT COMMAND TO PRINT RESULTS OF
CALCULATION.

Algorithms for selection and review of sections for steel members according to
assortments and databases of the main rolled steel producers from given countries
and according to international standards as well are included in STAAD.Pro
program. In this program version only assortment sections can be utilized.
Example
* COMMAND OF ANALYSIS
PERFORM ANALYSIS
* COMMAND OF LOADINGS AND THEIR COMBINATIONS
CONSIDERED IN DESIGN
LOAD LIST 1 5 TO 9

* COMMAND TO START DESIGN ACCORDING TO RUSSIAN CODE

PARAMETER
CODE RUSSIAN
* LIST OF PARAMETERS USED IN CHECKING AND SELECTING
BEAM 1. ALL
Obligatory parameter
LY 4. MEMB 1 TO 4
LZ 4. MEM 1 TO 4
MAIN 1. ALL
SGR 3. ALL
SBLT 0 ALL
* PARAMETER OF OUTPUT AMOUNT OF INFORMATION ON
CALCULATION RESULTS
TRACK 2. ALL
.
* COMMAND TO START SECTION CHECK PROCEDURE
CHECK CODE ALL
* COMMAND TO START SECTION SELECTION PROCEDURE
SELECT ALL
.
* COMMAND OF OUTPUT TO PRINT CONTENT OF ASSORTMENT
TABLES
PRINT ENTIRE TABLE
* COMMAND OF OUTPUT TO PRINT SUMMARY OF STEEL
ACCORDING TO SECTIONS
STEEL TAKE OFF
* COMMAND OF OUTPUT TO PRINT SUMMARY OF STEEL
ACCORDING TO MEMBERS AND SECTIONS
STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF
720 — STAAD.Pro
12B.3.1 Axial tension members
Stress in a section of axial tension member shall not exceed design strength R of
y
selected steel multiplied by coefficient of service conditions γ (KY and KZ), table 6
c
of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*. Slenderness of tension member (CMM) shall not exceed
slenderness limit indicated in table 20 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* (default value λ =
u
200, but another value can be defined). Net section factor (ratio A /A (NSF))
net gross
is used for tension member to allow for reduction of design cross-section area.
12B.3.2 Axial compression members
All axial compression members are calculated as long bars, i.e., with allowance for
slenderness (λ = l /i ). The calculation is performed in accordance with the
0 min
clause 5.3 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*, buckling coefficient φ is determined by formula
8-10. Effective bar lengths (within and out of plane) taking in to account role and
location of the bar in the structure, as well as fixation of ends (l = μl), are
0
determined according to requirements of chapter 6 or addition 6 to SNiP 2.01.07.-
81* and are set by specification of members. Slenderness of compression members
(CMN) shall not exceed limit values given in table 19 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*. Value of
coefficient α being used in table 19 is taken within limits from 0,5 to 1,0. Limit
slenderness value depends on stress acting in the member, section area, buckling
coefficient and design resistance of steel.
Since slenderness can be different in various planes the greatest slenderness is

assumed in calculations.
12B.3.3 Flexural members
Members subjected to the action of bending moments and shear forces are called
flexural members.
Calculation of flexural members consists of verification of strength, stability and

deflection.
Normal and tangential stresses are verified by strength calculation of members.

Normal stresses are calculated in the outermost section fibres. Tangential stresses
are verified in the neutral axis zone of the same section. If normal stresses do not
exceed design steel strength and tangential stresses do not exceed design value of
steel shear strength R γ then according to clause 5.14 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*
s s
principal stresses are checked.

General stability of member subjected to bending in one plane are calculated in

accordance with clause 5.15 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*, and subjected to bending in
two planes – in accordance with “Guide to design of steel structures” (to SNiP
2.01.07.- 81*). Coefficient φ value is determined according to appendix 7 of
b
SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*. Additional data about load (concentrated or distributed),
numbers of bracing restrains of compression flanges, location of applied load are
required. For closed sections it is assumed that coefficient φ = 1.0.
b
Simply supported (non-continuous) beams can be calculated in elastic as well as in
elastic-plastic state according to requirements of clause 5.18 of SNiP 2.01.07.-
81*. Calculation can be selected by specification of structure in input data.
Stiffness of flexural members is verified comparing input value of deflection limit

(through parameter DFF) with maximum displacement of a section of flexural
member allowing for load reliability coefficient, which is specified, in input data.
Limit values of deflection are determined in accordance with SNiP 2.01.07.- 85
“Loads and Actions. Addition chapter 10. Deflections and displacements”.
Verification of deflection is performed only in the case of review (CHECK) problem.
12B.3.4 Eccentric compression/tension members
Eccentric compression or tension members are subjected to simultaneous action of

axial force and bending moment. Bending moment appears due to eccentric
application of longitudinal force or due to transverse force.
Stress in eccentric compression/tension members is obtained as a sum of stresses

due to axial force and bending.
Following the requirements of clause 5.25 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* resistance of

eccentric compression/tension member taking into consideration condition R <
y
530 MPa, τ < 0.5R and N/(A R ) > 0.1 is calculated by formula 49, and in other
s n y
cases-by formula 50. Calculations of stability verification are performed according
to requirements of clauses 5.27, 5.30, 5.32 or 5.34.
Calculation for strength of eccentric tension members is made according to

formula 50 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*.
When reduced relative eccentricity m > 20 eccentric compression members are

ef
calculated as flexural members (N = 0), when m < 20 strength by formula 49 is
ef
not verified (clause 5.24).
722 — STAAD.Pro
Information on parameters, data used for check and selection of sections in design
of steel structures according to Russian Code is presented in the following table.
In this version of calculation according to requirements of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* there

is common database of equal legs angles and unequal legs angles, therefore
solution of section selection problem may give equal legs angle as well as unequal
legs angle irrespective of set at the beginning. The same is and with rectangular
and square tubes.
Values of parameters do not depend on command UNIT. Only these values of

parameters, which differ from, defined in the program need to be included in the
input data file.
Review of sections (command CHECK) can be performed according to the first and
the second group of limit states. Selection of section (command SELECT) can be
performed only according to the first group of limit states with subsequent
recalculation and verification of selected section with allowance for deflection.
Calculation for the first group of limit states involves selection of members
according to strength and stability. Parameters CMN and CMM give opportunity to set
slenderness limit for compression and tension members respectively for their
stability calculation, or refuse consideration of slenderness by setting default
parameters. In this case selection of sections will be performed with consideration
only of strength check.
Check for deflection performed by setting parameter DFF (maximum allowable

relative deflection value) different from set in the program.
In the case of application of steel not defined by SNiP and/or GOST it is necessary
to set their design strength by parameters UNL and PY.
In determination of steel parameters SBLT and MAIN shall be approved (see Table
12B.4).

Table 12B.3 - Parameters for Steel design according to Russian

Code (SNiP II – 23 – 81*, edition 1990)
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Member design parameter:
l BEAM = 0, Design members for

forces at their ends or at the
sections defined by SECTION
command;
l BEAM = 1, Calculate the major axis

moment Mz at 13 points along the
beam and design beam at the
BEAM 1
location of maximum Mz;
l BEAM = 2, Same as BEAM=1, but

additional checks are carried out at
beam ends and at critical inter
mediate section;
l BEAM = 3, Calculate forces at 13

points and perform design checks
at all locations including the ends
Place of loading on beam:
l CB = 1, for loading on top flange;

CB 1
l CB = 2, for loading on bottom
flange
724 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Slenderness limit value for tension

members:
l СMM = 0, if slenderness is
suppressed;
l СMM = 2, if ultimate slenderness

value is "150";

value is "200";

СMM 0 value is "250";

value is "300";

value is "350";

value is "400
Set slenderness limit value not equal to

"0" for design with evaluation of
buckling effect

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Slenderness limit value for compression

members:
l СMN = 0, if slenderness is
suppressed;
l СMN = 1, if slenderness limit value

is "120";

is "210-60a";

is "220-40a";

is "220";
CMN 0 l СMN = 5, if slenderness limit value
is "180-60a";

is "210-60a";

is "210-60a";

is "200";

is "150";
Set slenderness limit value not equal to

"0" for design with evaluation of
buckling effect
726 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Allowable limit of relative local deflection

(Member length/Deflection Ratio):
DFF 0. Default value 0 is valid if design is

applied without deflection limitation.
Set for deflection check only
DMAX
1. Maximum allowable section depth
[m]
DMIN
0. Minimum allowable section depth
[m]
Specific service condition coefficient for

GAMC1 1.0
buckling design
Specific service condition coefficient for

GAMC2 1.0
strength design
Coefficient of effective length in respect

KY 1.0
to local axis Y (in plane XZ)
Coefficient of effective length in respect

KZ 1.0
to local axis Z (in plane XY)
Type and position of loading on beam:
l LEG = 1, for loading concentrated

in the middle span;
l LEG = 2, for loading concentrated

in the quarter of the span;
LEG 4 l LEG = 3, for loading concentrated
at the end of bracket;
l LEG = 4, for loading uniformly

distributed on beam;
l LEG = 5, for loading uniformly

distributed on bracket

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Effective length in respect to local axis Y

LY Member (in plane XZ)
[m] length
Default is selected member's length
Effective length in respect to local axis Z

LZ Member (in plane XY)
[m] length
Default is selected member's length
Standard of steel grade (GOST):
l MAIN = 1, if Standard of steel

grade is GOST27772-88;

MAIN 1 l MAIN = 3, if Standard of steel


grade is TY14-3-567-76
Net section factor for tension members

NSF 1.0 or web section area weakening factor for
bending members
Design steel strength (yield strength):

PY If parameters MAIN according to
0 Standard of steel grade (GOST) and by
[MPa]
SGR according to Steel grade (STAL) are
not defined
Ratio between design and characteristic

RATIO 1.0
loads values
728 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Number of lateral bracing restraints

along the span:
l SBLT = 0, if beam not fixed;
SBLT 0 l SBLT = 1, one restraint in the

middle of the span;
l SBLT = 2, 3, etc. number of

uniformly spaced lateral supports
along the span
Steel grade (STAL). Refer to Table 12B.4

SGR 1
below.
Indication of elastic or elastic-plastic

calculation:
l TB = 0, for elastic calculation

TB 0 l TB = 1, for elastic-plastic
calculation
Set for members under bending or non-

axial compression/tension only.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Output parameter:
l TRACK = 0, for suppressed output

information;
TRACK 0 l TRACK = 1, for extended output
information;
l TRACK = 2, for advanced output

information
Design steel strength (ultimate

strength):
UNL
0 If parameters MAIN according to
[MPa] Standard of steel grade (GOST) and by
SGR according to Steel grade (STAL) are
not defined
Table 12B.4 - Steel types for design of steel structures according

to SNiP 2.01.07.-81* (table 51 and 51a)
SGR Parameter For
Steel GOST
Value MAIN members*
GOST
1 C235 1 GT, F
27772-88
2 C245 1 “ GT, F
3 C255 1 “ GT, F
4 C275 1 “ GT, F
5 C285 1 “ GT, F
6 C345 1 “ GT, F
7 C345K 1 “ GT, F
8 C375 1 “ GT, F
9 C390 1 “ F
730 — STAAD.Pro
SGR Parameter For
Steel GOST
Value MAIN members*
10 C390K 1 “ F
11 C440 1 “ F
12 C590 1 “ F
13 C590К 1 “ F
GOST
14 BSt3kp 2 Tube
10705-80*
GOST
2 10705-80*
15 BSt3ps Tube
3 GOST
10706-76*
GOST
2 10705-80*
16 BSt3sp Tube
3 GOST
10706-76*
GOST 8731-
17 20 4 Tube
87
TY 14-3-567-
18 16G2АF 5 Tube
76
*GT – members from sheet and roll-formed tubes
F – rolled section steel
12B.5 Member Selection and Code Check

Both code checking and member selection options are available in SNiP 2.23-81*.

Output of selection and check results are given in suppressed, extended and
advanced forms. Form of output results depends on value of parameter TRACK.
Results are presented in tables. Three versions of output results are possible:
suppressed – results according the critical strength condition (TRACK=0),
extended - results according to all check conditions (TRACK=1) and advanced –
complete information on results of member design (TRACK=2).
In tables of results common data for all TRACKs are indicated:
(TRACK=2).
In tables of results common data for all TRACKs are indicated:
number of member;
type and number of cross-section;
result obtained (ACCEPTED – requirements are met, FAILURE – are not met);
abbreviated name of normative document (code, standard) (SNiP);
number of check clause;
safety of strength (ratio between design and normative values);
number of the most unfavorable loading;
value of longitudinal force acting in the member with subscript indicating its
direction (“C” – compression, “P” – tension);
bending moments in relation to local member axes Z and Y;
distance to section, in which the most unfavorable combination of forces acts.
Example of TRACK 0 output
In suppressed form (TRACK 0) results are presented according to the critical check
for given member with indication of SNiP clause number, according to which
strength safety of the member is minimum.
========================================================================
MEMBER CROSS RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
SECTION NO. FX MZ MY LOCATION
732 — STAAD.Pro
========================================================================
1 I60 PASS SNiP- 5.18 0.68 1
0.000E+00 -4.650E+02 0.000E+00 3.000E+00
Example of TRACK 1 output
In extended form (TRACK 1) results are presented on the basis of all required by
SNiP checks for given stress state.
========================================================================
========================================================================
1 I60 PASS SNiP- 5.18 0.68 1
0.000E+00 -4.650E+02 0.000E+00 3.000E+00
1 I60 PASS SNiP- DISPL 0.36 1
0.000E+00 -4.650E+02 0.000E+00 3.000E+00
Example of a TRACK 2 output
In advanced form (TRACK=2) in addition to tabled results supplementary

information is presented.
l Material characteristics:
l Steel;
l Design resistance;
l Elasticity modulus;
l Section characteristics:
l Length of member;
l Section area;
l Net area;
l Inertia moment (second moment of area) (I);
l Section modulus (W);
l First moment of area (S);
l Radius of gyration;
l Effective length;
l Slenderness;
l Results are presented in two columns, Z and Y respectively.
l Design forces:

l Longitudinal force;
l Moments;
l Shear force.
Signs “+” and “-“ indicate direction of acting longitudinal force, bending moments
and shear forces in accordance with sign rules assumed in program STAAD.
Check results in advanced form are presented with values of intermediate

parameters by formulas in analytical and numerical expression with indication of
SNiP clause.
========================================================================
========================================================================
1 I60 PASS SNiP- 5.18 0.68 1
0.000E+00 -4.650E+02 0.000E+00 3.000E+00
1 I60 PASS SNiP- DISPL 0.36 1
0.000E+00 -4.650E+02 0.000E+00 3.000E+00
MATERIAL DATA
Steel =C245
Modulus of elasticity = 206.E+06 KPA
Design Strength (Ry) = 240.E+03 KPA
SECTION PROPERTIES (units - m)
Member Length = 6.00E+00
Gross Area = 1.38E-02
Net Area = 1.38E-02
z-axis y-axis
Moment of inertia (I) : 768.E-06 173.E-07
Section modulus (W) : 256.E-05 182.E-06
First moment of area (S) : 149.E-05 156.E-06
Radius of gyration (i) : 236.E-03 354.E-04
Effective Length : 600.E-02 600.E-02
Slenderness : 0.00E+00 0.00E+00
DESIGN DATA (units -kN,m)SNiP II-23-81*/1998
Axial force : 0.00E+00
z-axis y-axis
Moments : -465.E+00 0.00E+00
Shear force : 0.00E+00 500.E-02
CRITICAL CONDITIONS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK
F.(39) M/(C1*Wmin)=-465.0E+00/ 1.12E+00* 2.56E-03= 162.1E+03
F.(41) Q/(H*T)= 500.0E-02/ 6.00E-01* 1.20E-02= 694.E+00
RY*GAMAC= 240.0E+03
ACTUAL SECTION DISPLACEMENT = 1.094E-02 M
MAXIMUM MEMBER DEFLECTION = 1.094E-02 M Loading No. 1
ULTIMATE ALLOWABLE DEFLECTION VALUE = 3.000E-02 M
Conventional notations assumed in presentation of results: “+”, “-“, “/”, “*”,”**”,

“SQRT”, their respective meanings (i.e., addition, subtraction, division,
734 — STAAD.Pro
multiplication, raising to the second power (squared), and square root).
Conventional notations of stresses, coefficients and characteristics of steel
resistance comply with accepted in the SNiP standard. Only Greek letters are
changed by their names (e.g., , γ -GAMAC; α-ALPHA; β-BETA, η-ETA, φ-PHI, etc.).
c

736 — STAAD.Pro
Section 13
South African Codes

738 — STAAD.Pro
South African Codes - Concrete Design Per
SABS-0100-1
STAAD has the capability for performing design of concrete beams and columns
according to the South African code SABS 0100-1. The 2000 revision of the code is
currently implemented. Design can be performed for beams (flexure, shear and
torsion) and columns (axial load + biaxial bending). Given the width and depth (or
diameter for circular columns) of a section, STAAD will calculate the required
reinforcement.

control the design to SABS 0100-1. These parameters not only act as a method to
input required data for code calculations but give the engineer control over the
actual design process. Default values of commonly used parameters for
conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 13A.1 contains a
complete list of available parameters with their default values.
Table 13A.1 - South African Concrete Design SABS 0100-1 Param-

eters
Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as SABS0100.

Reference Manual.
BRACE 0.0 Column bracing:
0. Column braced in both direc-

tions.

South African Codes - Concrete Design Per SABS-0100-1

Name Value
1. Column braced about local Y

direction only
2. Column unbraced about local
Z direction only
3. Column unbraced in both Y
and Z directions
CLB 20mm Clear Cover for outermost bottom

reinforcement
CLS 20mm Clear Cover for outermost side

reinforcement
CLT 20mm Clear Cover for outermost top

reinforcement
DEPTH YD Depth of concrete member, in

current units. This value default is
as provided as YD in MEMBER
PROPERTIES.


FC 30N/mm2 Concrete Yield Stress / cube

strength, in current units.
FYMAIN 450 N/mm2 Yield Stress for main reinforcement,

in current units.
FYSEC 450N/mm2 Yield Stress for secondary

reinforcement a, in current units.
Applicable to shear bars in beams
MAXMAIN 50mm Maximum required reinforcement

bar size Acceptable bars are per
MINMAIN above.
740 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
MINMAIN 8mm Minimum main reinforcement bar

size Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10 12
16 20 25 28 32 36 40 50 60

Applicable to shear reinforcement
in beams
TRACK 0.0 Output detail

printed with beam design
report. Column design gives
no detailed results.
1. For beam gives min/max steel
% and spacing. For columns
gives a detailed table of out-
put with additional moments
calculated.
2. Output of TRACK 1.0 List of
design sag/hog moments and
corresponding required steel
area at each section of
member
WIDTH ZD Width of concrete member, in

current units. This value default is
as provided as ZD in MEMBER
PROPERTIES.

properties input under the MEMBER PROPERTIES command. The following example
demonstrates the required input:
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES

*RECTANGULAR COLUMN 300MM WIDE X 450MM DEEP

1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300.
*CIRCULAR COLUMN 300MM DIAMETER
11 13 PR YD 300.
* T-SECTION - FLANGE 1000.X 200.(YD-YB)
* - STEM 250(THICK) X 350.(DEEP)
14 PRISM YD 550. ZD 1000. YB 350. ZB 250.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth x
provided, will be assumed to be circular with 300mm diameter. Note that area
(AX) is not provided for these members. If shear area areas (AY & AZ ) are to be
considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with YD and ZD. Also
note that if moments of inertias are not provided, the program will calculate them
from YD and ZD. Finally a T section can be considered by using the third definition
above.
13A.4 Beam Design

Beam design includes flexure, shear and torsion. For all types of beam action, all
active beam loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes and
locate the critical sections. The total number of sections considered is thirteen.
From the critical moment values, the required positive and negative bar pattern is
developed. Design for flexure is carried out as per clause no. 4.3.3.4.
Shear design as per SABS 0100 clause 4.3.4 has been followed and the procedure
includes computation of critical shear values. From these values, stirrup sizes are
calculated with proper spacing. If torsion is present, the program will also
consider the provisions of SABS 0100 clause 4.3.5. Torsional reinforcement is
separately reported.
A TRACK 2 design output is presented below.

25.0 mm
742 — STAAD.Pro
--------------------------------------------------------------------
(in mm) | MZ Load Case MX Load Case | VY P Load Case
--------------------------------------------------------------------
0.0 | 135.75 5 -3.44 5 | 152.06 50.62 4
| -295.92 4 |
625.0 | 189.16 5 -3.43 5 | 133.95 48.87 4
| -236.52 4 |
1250.0 | 231.25 5 -3.41 5 | 115.84 47.12 4
| -188.44 4 |
1875.0 | 262.01 5 -3.40 5 | 97.73 45.37 4
| -151.68 4 |
2500.0 | 281.46 5 -3.39 5 | 79.61 43.63 4
| -126.24 4 |
3125.0 | 289.59 5 -3.37 5 | 61.50 41.88 4
| -112.12 4 |
3750.0 | 286.39 5 -3.36 4 | -62.13 40.13 5
| -109.32 4 |
4375.0 | 271.88 5 -3.37 4 | -80.25 41.88 5
| -117.84 4 |
5000.0 | 246.05 5 -3.39 4 | -98.36 43.63 5
| -137.68 4 |
5625.0 | 208.89 5 -3.40 4 | -116.47 45.37 5
| -168.84 4 |
6250.0 | 160.42 5 -3.41 4 | -134.58 47.12 5
| -211.33 4 |

6875.0 | 100.62 5 -3.43 4 | -152.70 48.87 5
| -265.13 4 |
7500.0 | 29.50 4 -3.44 4 | -170.81 29.63 4
| -330.25 5 |
SUMMARY OF REINF. AREA FOR FLEXURE DESIGN (Sq.mm)
--------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION | TOP | BOTTOM | STIRRUPS
(in mm) | Reqd./Provided reinf. | Reqd./Provided reinf. | (2 legged)
--------------------------------------------------------------------
0.0 | 1232.70/1256.64( 4-20í )| 543.40/ 565.50( 5-12í )| 8í @ 425
mm
625.0 | 960.90/ 981.74( 2-25í )| 754.32/ 791.70( 7-12í )| 8í @ 510
mm
1250.0 | 751.24/ 791.70( 7-12í )| 937.49/ 942.48( 3-20í )| 8í @
510 mm
1875.0 | 596.52/ 603.18( 3-16í )| 1075.72/1206.36( 6-16í )| 8í @

510 mm
2500.0 | 543.40/ 565.50( 5-12í )| 1165.13/1206.36( 6-16í )| 8í @

510 mm
3125.0 | 543.40/ 565.50( 5-12í )| 1203.00/1206.36( 6-16í )| 8í @

220 mm
3750.0 | 543.40/ 565.50( 5-12í )| 1188.08/1206.36( 6-16í )| 8í @

220 mm
4375.0 | 543.40/ 565.50( 5-12í )| 1120.87/1206.36( 6-16í )| 8í @

220 mm
5000.0 | 543.40/ 565.50( 5-12í )| 1003.50/1005.30( 5-16í )| 8í @

220 mm
5625.0 | 668.18/ 678.60( 6-12í )| 839.38/ 904.80( 8-12í )| 8í @
220 mm
744 — STAAD.Pro
6250.0 | 849.99/ 904.80( 8-12í )| 632.84/ 678.60( 6-12í )| 8í @ 220
mm
6875.0 | 1089.94/1206.36( 6-16í )| 543.40/ 565.50( 5-12í )| 8í @

220 mm
7500.0 | 1397.16/1407.42( 7-16í )| 543.40/ 565.50( 5-12í )| 8í @

220 mm
--------------------------------------------------------------------
TORSION REINFORCEMENT: Not required
13A.5 Column Design

requirements of SABS 0100-1 clause 4.7 are followed, with the user having control
on the effective length in each direction by using the ELZ and ELY parameters as
described in table 12A.1. Bracing conditions are controlled by using the BRACE
parameter. The program will then decide whether or not the column is short or
slender and whether it requires additional moment calculations. For biaxial
bending, the recommendations of 4.7.4.4 of the code are considered.
Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. For
rectangular and square sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be
arranged symmetrically. This causes slightly conservative results in certain cases.
Table 12A.3 shows typical column design results.
Using parameter TRACK 1.0, the detailed output below is obtained. TRACK 0.0
would merely give the bar configuration, required steel area and percentage,
column size and critical load case.
TABLE 12A.3 -COLUMN DESIGN OUTPUT
================================================-
=======================

LENGTH: 3660.0 mm CROSS SECTION: 750.0 mm X 460.0 mm

COVER:40.0mm
** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 4 END JOINT: 1 SHORT COLUMN
-----------------------
About Z About Y
SLENDERNESS RATIOS : 7.96 4.88
ADDITION MOMENTS (Maddz and Maddy) : 0.00 0.00
REQD. CONCRETE AREA: 114451.62 Sq.mm.
MAIN REINFORCEMENT : Provide 32 - 12 dia. (1.05%, 3619.20 Sq.mm.)
(Equally Distributed)
TIE REINFORCEMENT : Provide 8 mm dia. rectangular ties @ 140 mm c/c
SECTION CAPACITY BASED ON REINFORCEMENT REQUIRED (KNS-MET)
----------------------------------------------------------
Puz : 2160.42 Muz1 : 570.23 Muy1 : 563.74
746 — STAAD.Pro
South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB
Standard SAB0162-1:1993
13B.1 General
The South African Steel Design facility in STAAD is based on the SAB Standard
SAB0162-1: 1993, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. A steel section library
consisting of South African Standards shapes is available for member property
specification.

use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate and
structures under various loading conditions and at the same time the chances of
limits being surpassed are acceptably remote.
The next few sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of
SAB0162-1: 1993. A detailed description of the design process along with its
underlying concepts and assumptions is available in the specification document.


South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard SAB0162-1:1993
Refer to Section 5.37 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional

information.

using the User Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to
Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.

Refer to Section 1.7.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional

information.
I Shapes
The following example illustrates the specification of I- shapes.
1 TO 15 TABLE ST IPE-AA100
H shapes
Designation of H shapes in STAAD is as follows.
For example,
18 TO 20 TABLE ST 152X37UC
748 — STAAD.Pro
PG shapes
Designation of PG shapes in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST 720X200PG
Channel Sections (C & MC shapes)
C and MC shapes are designated as shown in the following example.
3 TABLE ST 127X64X15C
Double Channels
Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are specified
by preceding the section designation by the letter D. For example, a back to back
double channel section PFC140X60 without spacing in between should be specified
as:
100 TO 150 TABLE D PFC140X60
A back-to-back double channel section 140X60X16C with spacing 0.01unitlength in

between should be specified as:
100 TO 150 TABLE D 140X60X16C SP 0.01
Note: The specification SP after the section designation is used for providing
the spacing. The spacing should always be provided in the current length unit.
Angles
To specify angles, the letter L succeeds the angle name. Thus, a 70X70 angle with a
25mm thickness is designated as 70X70X8L. The following examples illustrate
angle specifications.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST 70X70X8L

Note that the above specification is for “standard” angles. In this specification, the
local z-axis (see Fig. 2.6 in the Technical Reference Manual) corresponds to the Y’-
Y’ axis shown in the CSA table. Another common practice of specifying angles
assumes the local y-axis to correspond to the Y’-Y’ axis. To specify angles in
accordance with this convention, the reverse angle designation facility has been
provided. A reverse angle may be specified by substituting the word ST with the
word RA. Refer to the following example for details.
100 TO 150 TABLE RA 45X45X3L
The local axis systems for STANDARD and REVERSE angles are shown in Fig. 2.6
of the STAAD Technical Reference manual.
Double Angles
To specify double angles, the specification ST should be substituted with LD (for

long leg back-to-back) or SD (short leg back-to-back). For equal angles, either SD
or LD will serve the purpose. Spacing between angles may be provided by using
the word SP followed by the value of spacing (in current length unit) after section
designation.
100 TO 150 TABLE LD 50X50X3L

3 TABLE LD 40X40X5L SP 0.01
The second example above describes a double angle section consisting of

40X40X5 angles with a spacing of 0.01 length units.
Tees
Tee sections obtained by cutting W sections may be specified by using the T

specification instead of ST before the name of the W shape. For example:
100 TO 150 TABLE T IPE-AA180
will describe a T section cut from a IPE-AA180 section.
750 — STAAD.Pro
Rectangular Hollow Sections
These sections may be specified in two possible ways. Those sections listed in the
SAB tables may be specified as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST TUB60X30X2.5
In addition, any tube section may be specified by using the DT(for depth), WT(for
width), and TH(for thickness) specifications. For example:
100 TO 150 TABLE ST TUBE TH 3 WT 100 DT 50
will describe a tube with a depth of 50mm, width of 100mm. and a wall thickness of
3mm. Note that the values of depth, width and thickness must be provided in
current length unit.
Circular Hollow Sections
Sections listed in the SAB tables may be provided as follows:
100 TO 150 TABLE ST PIP34X3.0CHS
In addition to sections listed in the SAB tables, circular hollow sections may be
specified by using the OD (outside diameter) and ID (inside diameter)
specifications.
For example:
100 TO 150 TABLE ST PIPE OD 50 ID 48

will describe a pipe with an outside diameter of 50 length units and inside
diameter of 48 length units. Note that the values of outside and inside diameters
must be provided in terms of current length unit.
Sample input file to demonstrate usage of South African shapes is shown below.
STAAD PLANE
ENGINEER DATE 30-MAR-05
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 9 0 0; 3 0 6 0; 4 3 6 0; 5 6 6 0; 6 9 6 0; 7 0 10.5 0;
8 9 10.5 0; 9 2.25 10.5 0; 10 6.75 10.5 0; 11 4.5 10.5 0; 12 1.5 11.4
0;
13 7.5 11.4 0; 14 3 12.3 0; 15 6 12.3 0; 16 4.5 13.2 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 3; 2 3 7; 3 2 6; 4 6 8; 5 3 4; 6 4 5; 7 5 6; 8 7 12; 9 12 14;
10 14 16; 11 15 16; 12 13 15; 13 8 13; 14 9 12; 15 9 14; 16 11 14;
17 11 15; 18 10 15; 19 10 13; 20 7 9; 21 9 11; 22 10 11; 23 8 10;
MEMBER PROPERTY SAFRICAN
1 TABLE ST IPE-AA100
2 TABLE T IPE120
3 TABLE ST 152X23UC
4 TABLE T 152X23UC
5 TABLE ST 812X200PG
6 TABLE T 812X200PG
7 TABLE ST 178X54X15C
8 TABLE D 178X54X15C
9 TABLE D 178X54X15C SP 0.1
10 TABLE ST 25X25X5L
11 TABLE RA 25X25X5L
752 — STAAD.Pro
12 TABLE LD 25X25X5L
13 TABLE SD 25X25X5L
14 TABLE LD 25X25X5L SP 0.1
15 TABLE SD 25X25X5L SP 0.1
16 TABLE ST TUB40X2.5SHS
17 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0 WT 0 DT 50
18 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.02 WT 100 DT 50
20 TABLE ST PIP48X2.0CHS
21 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.5 ID 0.48
FINISH

The SAB specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus, local
buckling becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are classified as plastic
(Class 1), compact (Class 2), noncompact (Class 3), or slender element (Class 4)
sections depending upon their local buckling characteristics (See Clause 11.2 and
Table 1 of SAB0162-1:1993). This classification is a function of the geometric
section class. STAAD determines the section classification for the standard shapes
and user specified shapes. Design is performed for sections that fall into the
category of Class 1,2, or 3 sections only. Class 4 sections are not designed by
STAAD.

The member resistances are calculated in STAAD according to the procedures
outlined in section 13 of the specification. These depend on several factors such as
members’ unsupported lengths, cross-sectional properties, slenderness factors,
unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on. Note that the program
automatically takes into consideration appropriate resistance factors to calculate
member resistances. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for
calculating the member resistances.
All the members are checked against allowable slenderness ratio as per Cl.10.2 of
SAB0162-1: 1993.

Axial Tension
The criterion governing the capacity of tension members is based on two limit
states. The limit state of yielding in the gross section is intended to prevent
excessive elongation of the member. The second limit state involves fracture at the
section with the minimum effective net area. The net section area may be specified
by the user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 13B.1). STAAD
calculates the tension capacity of a member based on these two limits states per
Cl.13.2 of SAB0162-1: 1993. Parameters FYLD, FU, and NSF are applicable for
these calculations.
Axial Compression
The compressive resistance of columns is determined based on Clause 13.3 of the

code. The equations presented in this section of the code assume that the
compressive resistance is a function of the compressive strength of the gross
section (Gross section Area times the Yield Strength) as well as the slenderness
factor (KL/r ratios). The effective length for the calculation of compression
resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KX, KY, KZ, LX, LY,
and LZ (see Table 13B.1). Some of the aspects of the axial compression capacity
calculations are:
1. For frame members not subjected to any bending, and for truss members,
the axial compression capacity in general column flexural buckling is
calculated from Cl.13.3.1 using the slenderness ratios for the local Y-Y and
Z-Z axis. The parameters KY, LY, KZ, and LZ are applicable for this.
2. For single angles, asymmetric or cruciform sections are checked as to

whether torsional-flexural buckling is critical. But for KL/r ratio exceeding
50,as torsional flexural buckling is not critical, the axial compression
capacities are calculated by using Cl.13.3. The reason for this is that the
South African code doesn’t provide any clear guidelines for calculating this
value. The parameters KY, LY, KZ, and LZ are applicable for this.
3. The axial compression capacity is also calculated by taking flexural-torsional

buckling into account. Parameters KX and LX may be used to provide the
effective length factor and effective length value for flexural-torsional
buckling. Flexural-torsional buckling capacity is computed for single
channels, single angles, Tees and Double angles.
754 — STAAD.Pro
4. While computing the general column flexural buckling capacity of sections
with axial compression + bending, the special provisions of 13.8.1(a),
13.8.1(b) and 13.8.1(c) are applied. For example, Lambda = 0 for 13.8.1(a),
K=1 for 13.8.1(b), etc.)
Bending
The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange for the purpose of
computing the factored moment resistance is specified in STAAD with the help of
the parameter UNL. If UNL is less than one tenth the member length (member
length is the distance between the joints of the member), the member is treated as
being continuously laterally supported. In this case, the moment resistance is
computed from Clause 13.5 of the code. If UNL is greater than or equal to one-
tenth the member length, its value is used as the laterally unsupported length. The
equations of Clause 13.6 of the code are used to arrive at the moment of resistance
of laterally unsupported members. Some of the aspects of the bending capacity
calculations are:
1. The weak axis bending capacity of all sections except single angles is
calculated as:
For Class 1 & 2 sections
Phi*Py*Fy
For Class 3 sections
Phi*Sy*Fy
Where:
Phi = Resistance factor = 0.9
Py = Plastic section modulus about the local Y axis
Sy = Elastic section modulus about the local Y axis
Fy = Yield stress of steel
2. Single angles sections are not designed by STAAD, as the South African code
doesn’t provide any clear guidelines for calculating this value.
3. For calculating the bending capacity about the Z-Z axis of singly symmetric

shapes such as Tees and Double angles, SAB0162-1: 1993 stipulates in

Clause 13.6(b), page 31, that a rational method.
biaxial bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. In these
equations, the additional bending caused by the action of the axial load is
accounted for by using amplification factors. Clause 13.8 of the code provides the
equations for this purpose. If the summation of the left hand side of these
equations exceeds 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter
(see Table 13B.1), the member is considered to have FAILed under the loading
condition.
Members subjected to axial tension and bending are also designed using
interaction equations. Clause 13.9 of the code is used to perform these checks.
The actual RATIO is determined as the value of the left hand side of the critical
equation.
Shear
Clause 13.4 of the code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting
on the cross section to the shear resistance of the section is calculated. If any of
the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided
using the RATIO parameter (see Table 13B.1), the section is considered to have
failed under shear. The code also requires that the slenderness ratio of the web be
within a certain limit (See Cl.13.4.1.3, page 29 of SABS 0162-1:1993). Checks for
safety in shear are performed only if this value is within the allowable limit. Users
may by-pass this limitation by specifying a value of 2.0 for the MAIN parameter.

The design parameters outlined in table below may be used to control the design
756 — STAAD.Pro
numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design
Table 13B.1 - South African Steel Design Parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified SAB0162.
See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manu
BEAM 0 0 - Perform design at ends and those locations spec
1 - Perform design at ends and 1/12th section locati
CB 1.0 Greater than 0.0 and less than 2.5,Value of Omega_

calculation
Equal to 0.0: Calculate Omega_2
CMY 1.0 1 - Do not calculate Omega-1 for local Y axis.
2 - Calculate Omega-1 for local Y axis
CMZ 1.0 1 - Do not calculate Omega-1 for local Z axis.
2 - Calculate Omega-1 for local Z axis
DFF 0 Default is 0 indicating that deflection check is not pe
DJ1 0 Start node of physical member for determining defle

and should be set along with DFF parameter
DJ2 0 End node of physical member for determining deflec

and should be set along with DFF parameter
DMAX 1000 Maximum allowable depth
DMIN 0 Minimum required depth


Name
FYLD 300Mpa Yield strength of steel
FU 345Mpa Ultimate strength of steel
KT 1.0 K value for flexural torsional buckling
KY 1.0 K value in local Y-axis, usually minor axis
KZ 1.0 K value in local Z-axis, usually major axis
LT Member length Length for flexural torsional buckling
LY Member length Length in local Y axis for slenderness value KL/r
LZ Member length Length in local Z axis for slenderness value KL/r
MAIN 0 Flag for controlling slenderness check
0 - For Check for slenderness.
1 - For Do not check for slenderness
NSF 1.0 Net section factor for tension members
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of applied load to section capacity
Used in altering the RHS of critical interaction equat
SSY 0 Sidesway parameter
0 - Sideway about local Y-axis.
1 - No sideway about local Y-axis.
SSZ 0 Sidesway parameter
0 - Sideway about local Z-axis.
1 - No sideway about local Z-axis.
TRACK 0 Track parameter
0. Print the design output at the minimum detail

1. Print the design output at the intermediate de
2. Print the design output at maximum detail lev
758 — STAAD.Pro
Name
UNB Member Length Unsupported length in bending compression of bott

resistance
UNT Member Length Unsupported length in bending compression of top

resistance
13B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to determine whether the current section
properties of the members are adequate to carry the forces obtained from the most
recent analysis. The adequacy is checked as per the SAB0162-1: 1993
requirements.
members. If the BEAM parameter for a member is set to 1 (which is also its default
value), moments are calculated at every twelfth point along the beam. When no
section locations are specified and the BEAM parameter is set to zero, design will be
based on member start and end forces only. The code checking output labels the
members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load
case, location (distance from the start joint) and magnitudes of the governing
forces and moments are also printed. Using the TRACK parameter can control the
extent of detail of the output.
Example
Sample input data for South African Code Design
PARAMETER
CODE SAB0162
MAIN 1 ALL
LY 4 MEMB 1
LZ 4 MEMB 1
UNL 4 MEMB 1

CB 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
CMZ MEMB 2 1 TO 23
CMY MEMB 2 1 TO 23
SSY 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
SSZ 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
FU 450000 MEMB 1 TO 23
BEAM 1 ALL
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 1.0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
FYLD 300000 1 TO 23
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

The member selection process involves determination of the least weight member
that PASSes the code checking procedure based on the forces and moments of the
most recent analysis. The section selected will be of the same type as that specified
initially.
For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected
for it. Selection of members whose properties are originally provided from a user
table will be limited to sections in the user table. Member selection cannot be
performed on members listed as PRISMATIC.

The term CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the SAB0162-1: 1993
specification, which governed the design.
760 — STAAD.Pro
If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, the output will be displayed as follows:
**************************************
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING
(SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SAB-0162-01(1993))
**************************************
ING/
FX MY MZ LOCA-
TION
=======================================================================
1 ST 406X67UB (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
PASS SAB-13.8 0.543 1
0.00 0.00 -191.90
4.08
|---------------------------------------------------------------------
|
| FACTORED RESISTANCES FOR MEMBER- 1 UNIT - KN,M PHI = 0.90
|
| MRZ= 353.27 MRY= 63.99
|
| CR= 453.21 TR= 2308.50 VR= 642.00
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------
|
Factored member resistances will be printed out. Following is a description of some

of the items printed out.
Output Term Description

MRZ Factored moment of resistance in z direction
MRY Factored moment of resistance in y direction
CR Factored compressive resistance for column
TR Factored tensile capacity
VR Factored shear resistance
Further details can be obtained by setting TRACK to 2.0. A typical output of track
2.0 parameter is as follows.
**************************************
**************************************


ING/
FX MY MZ LOCA-
TION
=======================================================================
PASS SAB-13.8 0.543 1
0.00 0.00 -191.90
4.08
-----------------------------
CROSS SECTION AREA = 8.55E+01 MEMBER LENGTH = 7.00E+02
IZ = 2.43E+04 SZ = 1.19E+03 PZ = 1.35E+03
IY = 1.36E+03 SY = 1.52E+02 PY = 2.37E+02
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
---------------------------------
CRY = 4.532E+02 CRZ = 2.016E+03
CTORFLX = 4.532E+02
TENSILE CAPACITY = 2.308E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY =
4.532E+02
FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 6.399E+01 MRZ = 3.533E+02
FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 6.420E+02 VRZ = 6.075E+02
--------------------------
KL/RY = 175.514 KL/RZ = 41.522 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 300.000
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 = 1.75
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = -6.305E+01 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
Following is a description of some of the items printed out.

CRY Factored compressive resistance for column buckling about the local y
axis
CRZ Factored compressive resistance for column buckling about the local z
axis
CTORFLX Factored compressive resistance against torsional flexural buckling
TENSILE CAPACITY Factored tensile capacity
762 — STAAD.Pro
COMPRESSIVE Factored compressive capacity
CAPACITY
FACTORED MOMENT MRY = Factored moment of resistance in y direction
RESISTANCE
MRZ = Factored moment of resistance in z direction
FACTORED SHEAR VRY = Factored shear resistance in y direction
RESISTANCE
VRZ = Factored shear resistance in z direction
13B.11 Verification Problems

In the next few pages are included three verification examples for reference
purposes.
13B.11 Verification Problem No. 1
Determine the capacity of a South African I-section column in axial compression per
South African steel design code (SAB:0162-1(1993)) . Column is braced at its ends
for both axes.
Reference
Example 4.3.4.1, page 4.18, Structural Steel Design to SAB:0162-1(1993)(Limit

state Design) by Greg Parrott, 1st edition, Shades Technical publication
Given
FYLD = 300 Mpa
Length = 6000 mm

Comparison
Table 13B.2 - SAB0162-1:1993 Verification Prob-

lem 1
Source Axial Compressive Strength
(kN)
Reference 1516
STAAD.Pro 1516
Difference None
Input File
STAAD PLANE
ENGINEER DATE
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 6 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
1 TABLE ST 356X67UB
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 1.99947E+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8191
ALPHA 6E-006
DAMP 0.03
764 — STAAD.Pro
TYPE STEEL
STRENGTH FY 248210 FU 399894 RY 1.5 RT 1.2
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT MMS KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
UNIT METER KN
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
JOINT LOAD
2 FY -1500
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER 1
CODE SABS0162
LZ 6 ALL
LY 3 ALL
FU 450000 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
NSF 0.85 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
**************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================


PASS COMPRESSION 0.989 1
1500.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
-----------------------------
IZ = 1.95E+04 SZ = 1.07E+03 PZ = 1.21E+03
IY = 1.36E+03 SY = 1.57E+02 PY = 2.43E+02
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
---------------------------------
CRY = 1.516E+03 CRZ = 2.038E+03
CTORFLX = 1.516E+03
TENSILE CAPACITY = 1.918E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 1.516E+03
--------------------------
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
Determine the capacity of a South African I-section beam in bending per South
African steel design code (SAB:0162-1(1993)). The beam has torsional and simple
lateral rotational restraint at the supports, and the applied point load provides
effective lateral restraint at the point of application is braced at its ends for both
axes.
Reference
Example 4.5, page 4.37, Structural Steel Design to SAB:0162-1(1993)(Limit state

Design) by Greg Parrott, 1st edition, Shades Technical publication
Given
FYLD = 300 Mpa
766 — STAAD.Pro
Comparison

lem 2
Source Major Axis Bending Resistance
(kN)
Reference 353.4
STAAD.Pro 353.3
Difference Negligible
Input File
STAAD PLANE
ENGINEER DATE
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 10 0 0; 3 7 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 3; 2 3 2
1 2 TABLE ST 406X67UB
ISOTROPIC MATERIAL1
E 2.00E+008
POISSON 3
DENSITY 977
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.00E+008

POISSON 3
DENSITY 8195
ALPHA 2E-005
DAMP 03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT MMS KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1 2
UNIT METER KN
SUPPORTS
1 3 PINNED
MEMBER LOAD
1 CON GY -104 4
1 UNI GY -4
2 UNI GY -2
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE SABS0162
CB 0 ALL
UNL 4 MEMB 1
FU 450000 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
NSF 85 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
FINISH
768 — STAAD.Pro
Output
**************************************
**************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
PASS SAB-13.8 0.543 1
0.00 0.00 -191.90 4.08
-----------------------------
IZ = 2.43E+04 SZ = 1.19E+03 PZ = 1.35E+03
IY = 1.36E+03 SY = 1.52E+02 PY = 2.37E+02
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
---------------------------------
CRY = 4.532E+02 CRZ = 2.016E+03
CTORFLX = 4.532E+02
--------------------------
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = -6.305E+01 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
Determine the elastic shear capacity per South African steel design code
(SAB:0162-1(1993)) of a South African I-section which is simply supported over
the span of 8 m.

Reference
Example 4.6.5, page 4.54, Structural Steel Design to SAB:0162-1(1993)(Limit

state Design) by Greg Parrott, 1st edition, Shades Technical publication
Given
FYLD = 300 Mpa
Comparison

lem 3
Source Shear Capacity (kN)
Reference 687.1
STAAD.Pro 687.1
Difference None
Input File
STAAD PLANE
ENGINEER DATE
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 8 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
112
1 TABLE ST 457X67UB
770 — STAAD.Pro
ISOTROPIC MATERIAL1
E 2E+008
POISSON 3
DENSITY 977
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2E+008
POISSON 3
DENSITY 8195
ALPHA 2E-005
DAMP 03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT MMS KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1
UNIT METER KN
SUPPORTS
1 2 PINNED
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -70
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE SABS0162
FU 450000 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

Output
**************************************
**************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
* 1 ST 457X67UB (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
FAIL SAB-13.8 4.134 1
0.00 0.00 -560.00 4.00
-----------------------------
IZ = 2.94E+04 SZ = 1.30E+03 PZ = 1.47E+03
IY = 1.45E+03 SY = 1.53E+02 PY = 2.37E+02
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
---------------------------------
CRY = 3.738E+02 CRZ = 1.996E+03
CTORFLX = 3.738E+02
--------------------------
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
772 — STAAD.Pro
Section 14
American Aluminum Code
14.1 General
STAAD is equipped with the facilities to perform design based on the specifications
for Aluminum Structures. The requirements of the Allowable Stress Design, Sixth
edition, October 1994, have been implemented.
The various issues related to the implementation of this code in STAAD are
explained in the next few sections.
14.2 Member Properties

In order to do this design in STAAD, the members in the structure must have their
properties specified from Section VI of the above-mentioned manual. The section
names are mentioned in Tables 5 through 28 of that manual. All of those tables
except Table 10 (Wing Channels) and Table 20 (Bulb Angles) are available in
STAAD.
Described below is the command specification for various sections:

Standard single section
MEMB-LIST TA ST SECTION-NAME
Example:
1 TO 5 TA ST CS12X11.8
9 TA ST I8.00X13.1
11 33 45 67 TA ST LS8.00X8.00X0.625
18 TA ST 1.50PIPEX160
15 TA ST T(A-N)6.00X8.00X11.2
23 25 29 TA ST 20X12RECTX.500WALL
Double channel back-to-back
MEMB-LIST TA BACK SECTION-NAME SPACING VALUE
Example
3 TA BACK C(A-N)7X3.61 SPACING 1.5

5 TA BACK C15X17.33 SP 0.75
Double channel front-to-front
MEMB-LIST TA FRONT SECTION-NAME SPACING VALUE
Example
2 TA FRONT CS12X10.3 SP 1.0

4 TA FR CS10X10.1 SP 0.5
Double angle long leg back-to-back
MEMB-LIST TA LD SECTION-NAME SPACING VALUE
Example
774 — STAAD.Pro
14 TA LD LS4.00X3.00X0.375 SP 1.5
Double angle short leg back-to-back
MEMB-LIST TA SD SECTION-NAME SPACING VALUE
Example
12 TA SD L3.5X3X0.5 SP 0.25
13 TA SD L8X6X0.75 SP 1.0
14.3 Design Procedure

The design is done according to the rules specified in Sections 4.1, 4.2 and 4.4 on
pages I-A-41 and I-A-42 of the Aluminum code. The allowable stresses for the
various sections are computed according to the equations shown in Section 3.4.1
through 3.4.21 on pages I-A-27 through I-A-40. The adequacy of the member is
checked by calculating the value of the left-hand side of equations 4.1.1-1, 4.1.1-2,
4.1.1-3, 4.1.2-1, 4.4-1 and 4.4-2. This left-hand side value is termed as RATIO. If
the highest RATIO among these equations turns out to be less than or equal to 1.0,
the member is declared as having PASSed. If it exceeds 1.0, the member has
FAILed the design requirements.
Note: The check for torsion per Clause 4.3 for open sections is currently not
14.4 Design Parameters

The following are the parameters for specifying the values for variables associated
with the design.

Table 14A.1 - Aluminum Design Parameters
Parameter Name Default Description
Value

ALUMINUM

Technical Reference
Manual.
ALCLAD 0 This variable can take on

a value of either 0 or 1.
0 - Material
used in the
section is not
an Alclad.
1 - Material
used in the
section is an
Alclad.
ALLOY 34 This variable can take on

a value from 1 through
40. The default value
represents the alloy
6061-T6.
See Table 14A.2 below

for a list of values for this
parameter and the alloy
they represent. Table
3.3-1 in Section I-B of
the Aluminum
specifications provides
information on the
properties of the various
alloys.
776 — STAAD.Pro
Value
BEAM 0.0 If this parameter is set to

1.0, the adequacy of the
member is determined by
checking a total of 13
equally spaced locations
along the length of the
member. If the BEAM
value is 0.0, the 13
location check is not
checking is done only at
the locations specified by
the SECTION command
(See STAAD manual for
details). If neither the
BEAM parameter nor any
SECTION command is
specified, STAAD will
terminate the run and ask
the user to provide one
of those 2 commands.
This rule is not enforced
for TRUSS members.
DMAX 1000 in. Maximum depth

permissible for the
section during member
selection. This value must
be provided in the
current units.
DMIN 0.0 in Minimum depth required

for the section during
member selection. This
value must be provided
in the current units.

Value
KT 1.0 Effective length factor for

torsional buckling. It is a
0.01 (for a column
for twisting for
determining the
allowable stress in axial
compression.
See Equation 3.4.7.2-6

on page I-A-28 of the
Aluminum specifications
for details.
KY 1.0 Effective length factor for

overall column buckling
in the local Y-axis. It is a
0.01 (for a column
for determining the
compression.
778 — STAAD.Pro
Value
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor for

overall column buckling
in the local Z-axis. It is a
0.01 (for a column
for determining the
compression.
LT Member Unbraced length for

length twisting. It is input in the
0.01 (for a column
for twisting for
determining the
compression. See
Equation 3.4.7.2-6 on
page I-A-28 of the
Aluminum specifications
for details.

Value
LY Member Effective length for

length overall column buckling
in the local Y-axis. It is
input in the current units
of length. Values can
range from 0.01 (for a
column completely
prevented from buckling)
for determining the
compression.
LZ Member Effective length for

length overall column buckling
in the local Z-axis. It is
of length. Values can
range from 0.01 (for a
column completely
prevented from buckling)
for determining the
compression.
780 — STAAD.Pro
Value
PRODUCT 1 This variable can take on

a value from 1 through 4.
They represent:
1 - All
2 -
Extrusions
3 - Drawn
Tube
4 - Pipe
The default value stands

for All. The PRODUCT
parameter finds mention
in Table 3.3-1 in Section
I-B of the Aluminum
specifications.

Value
SSY 0.0 Factor that indicates

whether or not the
structure is subjected to
sidesway along the local
Y axis of the member.
The values are:
0 - Sidesway
is present
along the
local Y-axis of
the member
1 - There is
no sidesway
along the
local Y-axis of
the member.
The sidesway condition is

used to determine the
value of Cm explained in
Section 4.1.1, page I-A-
41 of the Aluminum
specifications.
782 — STAAD.Pro
Value
SSZ 0.0 Factor that indicates

whether or not the
structure is subjected to
sidesway along the local
Z axis of the member.
The values are:
0 - Sidesway
is present
along the
local Z-axis of
the member
1 - There is
no sidesway
along the
local Z-axis of
the member.
The sidesway condition is

used to determine the
value of Cm explained in
Section 4.1.1, page I-A-
41 of the Aluminum
specifications.
STIFF Member Spacing in the

length longitudinal direction of
shear stiffeners for
stiffened flat webs. It is
of length. See section
3.4.21 on page I-A-40 of
the Aluminum
specifications for
information regarding
this parameter.

Value
STRUCTURE 1 In Table 3.4-1 in Section

I-A of the Aluminum
specifications, it is
mentioned that the value
of coefficients nu, ny and
na are dependent upon
whether the structure
being designed is a
building or a bridge.
Users may convey this
information to STAAD
using the parameter
STRUCTURE. The values
that can be assigned to
this parameter are:
1 - Buildings
and similar
type
structures
2 - Bridges
and similar
type
structures
784 — STAAD.Pro
Value
TRACK 2 This parameter is used to

control the level of detail
in which the design
output is reported in the
output file. The allowable
values are:
1 - Prints only the

member number, section
name, ratio, and
PASS/FAIL status.
2 - Prints the design

summary in addition to
that printed by TRACK 1
3 - Prints the member

properties and alloy
properties in addition to
that printed byTRACK 2.
4 - Prints the values of

variables used in design
in addition to that printed
by TRACK 3.
UNL Member Distance between points

length where the compression
flange is braced against
buckling or twisting. This
value must be provided
in the current units. This
value is used to compute
the allowable stress in
bending compression.

Value
WELD 0 In Table 3.4-2 in Section

I-A of the Aluminum
specifications, it is
mentioned that the value
of coefficients Kt and Kc
are dependent upon
whether or not, the
location of the section
where design is done is
within 1.0 inch of a weld.
The WELD parameter is
used in STAAD for this
purpose. The values that
can be assigned to this
parameter are:
0 - Region is
farther than
1.0in from a
weld
1 - Region is
within 1.0in
from a weld
Aluminum Alloys available in STAAD

Table 14A.2 - Alloy Parameters
Value Name
1 1100-H12
2 1100-H14
3 2014-T6
4 2014-T6510
5 2014-T6511
6 2014-T651
786 — STAAD.Pro
Value Name
7 3003-H12
8 3003-H14
9 3003-H16
10 3003-H18
11 3004-H32
12 3004-H34
13 3004-H36
14 3004-H38
15 5005-H12
16 5005-H14
17 5005-H32
18 5005-H34
19 5050-H32
20 5050-H34
21 5052-H32
22 5052-H34
23 5083-H111
24 5086-H111
25 5086-H116
26 5086-H32
27 5086-H34
28 5454-H111
29 5454-H112
30 5456-H111

Value Name
31 5456-H112
32 6005-T5
33 6105-T5
34 6061-T6
35 6061-T6510
36 6061-T6511
37 6061-T651
38 6063-T5
39 6063-T6
40 6351-T5
14.5 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to determine whether the initially specified
member properties are adequate to carry the forces transmitted to the member
due to the loads on the structure. Code checking is done at the locations specified
by either the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter described above.
Example Problem 1 in the Getting Started and Tutorials Manual for STAAD
provides an example on the usage of the CHECK CODE command.
Example
Sample input data for Aluminum Design
PARAMETER
CODE ALUMINUM
BEAM 1 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
788 — STAAD.Pro
ALLOY 35 ALL
PRODUCT 2 ALL
TRACK 3 ALL
SELECT ALL
ALCLAD 1 ALL
STRUCT 1 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
14.6 Member Selection

The member selection process involves the determination of the least weight
as that specified initially. For example, a member specified initially as a channel will
have a channel selected for it.
Example Problem 1 in the Getting Started and Tutorials Manual for STAAD provides
an example on the usage of the SELECT MEMBER command.

790 — STAAD.Pro
Section 15
American Transmission
Tower Code

792 — STAAD.Pro
American Transmission Tower Code - Steel
Design per ASCE 10-97
15A.1 General Comments
The design of structural steel members in accordance with the specifications of
ASCE Standard 10-97 – Design of Latticed Steel Transmission Structures is now
implemented. This code is meant to supercede the older edition of the code,
available under the name ASCE Publication 52. However, in the interests of
backward compatibility, both codes are currently accessible in STAAD.Pro.
To access the ASCE 52 code, use the commands
PARAMETER
CODE ASCE 52
To access the ASCE 10-97 code, use the commands
PARAMETER
CODE ASCE
In general, the concepts followed in MEMBER SELECTION and CODE CHECKING

procedures are similar to that of the AISC based design. It is assumed that the user
is familiar with the basic concepts of steel design facilities available in STAAD.
Please refer to Section 2 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for detailed
information on this topic. This section specifically addresses the implementation of
steel design based on ASCE 10-97.
Design is available for all standard sections listed in the AISC ASD 9th edition
manual, namely, Wide Flanges, S, M, HP, Tees, Channels, Single Angles, Double
Angles, Tubes and Pipes. Design of HSS sections (those listed in the 3rd edition
AISC LRFD manual) and Composite beams (I shapes with concrete slab on top) is
not supported.
15A.2 Allowable Stresses per ASCE 10 - 97

Member selection and code checking operations in the STAAD implementation of
ASCE 10-97 are done to resist loads at stresses approaching yielding, buckling,
fracture and other limiting conditions specified in the standard. Those stresses are

American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE 10-97
referred to in the standard as Design Stresses. The appropriate sections of the

ASCE standard where the procedure for calculating the design stresses is
explained are as follows.
Design Axial Tensile Stress
Design tensile stresses are calculated on the basis of the procedure described in
section 3.10. The NSF parameter (see the Parameters table shown later in this
section) may be used if the section area needs to be reduced to account for bolt
holes.
Design Axial Compressive Stress
Design compressive stress calculation is based on the procedures of section 3.6

through 3.9. For angle members under compression, the procedures of sections
3.7 and 3.8 have been implemented. Capacity of the section is computed for
column buckling and wherever applicable, torsional buckling. The user may
control the effective lengths for buckling using the LT, LY, LZ and/or KT, KY, KZ
parameters (see the Parameters table shown later in this section).
Design Bending Compressive Stress
Calculations for design bending compressive stress about the major axis and
minor axis are based on the procedures of section 3.14. Procedures outlined in
sections 3.14.1 through 3.14.6 have been implemented.
Design Bending Tensile Stress
Calculations for design bending tensile stress about the major and minor axis are
based on the procedures of section 3.14.2.
Design Shear Stress
Calculation of the design shear stress is based on the procedure outlined in section
3.15 of the ASCE 10-97. The procedure of section 3.15.2 is followed for angles
and the procedure of section 3.15.1 is followed for all other sections.
794 — STAAD.Pro
15A.3 Critical Conditions used as criteria to deter-
mine Pass/Fail status
These are Clause 3.4 for slenderness limits, Clause 3.12 for Axial Compression and
Bending, Clause 3.13 for Axial Tension and Bending, Clause 3.9.2 for Maximum w/t
ratios and Clause 3.15 for Shear.

Design per ASCE (10-97) must be initiated by using the command CODE ASCE. This
command should be the first command after the PARAMETER statement. Other
applicable parameters are summarized in the table shown later in this section.
These parameters may be used to control the design process to suit specific
modeling needs. The default parameter values have been selected such that they
are frequently used numbers for conventional design.
Table 15A.1 - Steel Design Parameters for ASCE 10-97

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as ASCE to design

per ASCE 10-97.

Reference Manual.
BEAM 1.0 0 = Perform design at beam ends

and section locations specified
according to the SECTION
command
1 = Perform design at the ends

and eleven intermediate sections of
the beam


Name Value
CMY 0.85 for Cm value in local y and z axes as

sidesway defined in equation 3.12-1 on p.10
CMZ
and of ASCE 10-97.
calculated
for no
sidesway
DMAX 45.0 in. Maximum allowable depth for

member selection
DBL 0.75 in. Diameter of bolt for calculation of

number of bolts required and the
net section factor.
DMIN 0.0 in. Minimum allowable depth for

member selection
ELA 4 Indicates what type of end

conditions are to be used from
among Equations 3.7-4 thru 3.7-7
to determine the KL/R ratio.
1. EQN.3.7-4, Page 4 (VALID

FOR LEG MEMBERS ONLY)
2. EQN.3.7-5, Page 4
3. EQN.3.7-6, Page 4
4. EQN.3.7-7, Page 5
ELB 1 Indicates what type of end

conditions are to be used from
among Equations. 3.7-8 thru 3.7-
10 and 3.7-12 thru 3.7-14 to
determine the KL/R ratio.
1. EQN.3.7-8, Page 5, EQN.3.7-

12, Page 5
2. EQN.3.7-9, Page 5, EQN.3.7-
13, Page 5
796 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
3. EQN.3.7-10, Page 5,
EQN.3.7-14,Page 5
FVB 30 KSI Shear strength of bolt.
FYB 36 KSI Yield strength of bolt.
FYLD 36.0 KSI Yield Strength of steel
KT 1.0 Effective length coefficient for

warping restraint (clause 3.14.4,
pg 11)
KY 1.0 Effective length factor (K) for

compression buckling about the Y-
axis (minor axis)
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor (K) for

compression buckling about the Z-
axis (major axis)
LEG 0.0 This parameter is meant for plain

angles.
0. indicates that the angle is con-

nected by both legs and allow-
able stress in axial tension is
1.0FYLD.
nected only by the shorter leg
and allowable tensile stress is
computed per clause 3.10.2
as 0.9FYLD.
nected by the longer leg.
LT Member Effective length for warping.

Length

Length ratio for buckling about the Y-axis


Name Value
(minor axis)
LZ Member Length to calculate slenderness

Length ratio for buckling about the Z-axis
(major axis)
MAIN 2 Parameter that indicates the

member type for the purpose of
calculating the KL/R ratio (SEE
CLAUSE 3.4, PAGE 3, ASCE 10-97)
1. Leg member, KL/R <= 150

2. Compression member, KL/R
<= 200
3. Tension member, KL/R <=
500
4. Hanger member, KL/R <=
375 (Clause 4C.4, page 43)
5. Redundant member, KL/R <=
250
10. Do not perform the KL/R

Check
NHL 0 Number of bolt holes on the cross

section that should be used to
determine the net section factor for
tension capacity.

members
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio that determines

the cut off point for pass/fail status.
A value below this quantity
indicates PASS while a value
greater than this quantity indicates
FAILURE.
798 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
SSY 0.0 0.0 = Sidesway in local y-axis
1.0 = No sidesway

axis
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppresses printing of

allowable stresses
1.0 = Prints all allowable stresses
UNB Member Unsupported length of the bottom

Length flange for calculating flexural
strength. Will be used only if flex-
ural compression is on the bottom
flange.
UNF 1.0 Same as UNL, but provided as a

fraction of the member length
UNL Member Unsupported length of member for

Length calculation of
allowable bending stress
UNT Member Unsupported length of the top

Length flange for calculating flexural
strength. Will be used only if flex-
ural compression is on the top
flange.
Note: All values must be provided in the current unit system.
15A.5 Code Checking and Member Selection

Both code checking and member selection options are available in the ASCE 10-97
implementation.

800 — STAAD.Pro
American Transmission Tower Code - Steel
Design per ASCE Manuals and Reports
This document presents some general statements regarding the implementation of
the Steel Design per ASCE Manuals and Reports on Engineering Practice No. 52 –
Guide for Design of Steel Transmission Towers, Second Edition. The design
philosophy and procedural logistics for member selection and code checking is
based upon the principles of allowable stress design. Two major failure modes are
recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability considerations.
The following sections describe the salient features regarding the process of
calculation of the relevant allowable stresses and the stability criteria being used.
allowable stresses and the most economical section is selected based on the least
weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness
requirements, the minimum metal thickness requirements and the width-thickness
requirements. It is generally assumed that the user will take care of the detailing
requirements like provision of stiffeners and check the local effects like flange
buckling, web crippling, etc. It general, it may be noted that the concepts followed
in MEMBER SELECTION and CODE CHECKING procedures are similar to that of the
AISC based design. It is assumed that the user is familiar with the basic concepts of
Steel Design facilities available in STAAD. Please refer to Section 3 of the STAAD
Technical Reference Manual for detailed information on this topic. This document
specifically addresses the implementation of steel design based on ASCE Pub. 52.
15B.2 Allowable Stresses per ASCE (Pub. 52)

The member design and code checking in the STAAD implementation of ASCE
(Pub. 52) is based upon the allowable stress design method. Appropriate sections
of this publication are referenced below.
Allowable Axial Tensile Stress
Allowable tensile stresses are calculated on the basis of the procedure described in
section 4.10. The NSF parameter (Table 1.1) may be used if the net section area
needs to be used.

American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE Manuals and Reports
Allowable Axial Compressive Stress
Allowable compressive stress calculation is based on the procedures of section 4.6

through 4.9. For angle members under compression, the procedures of sections
4.7 and 4.8 have been implemented. Capacity of the section is computed for
column buckling and wherever applicable, torsional buckling. The user may
control the effective lengths for buckling using the LX, LY, LZ and/or KX, KY, KZ
parameters (Table 1.1).
Allowable Bending Compressive Stress
Calculations for allowable bending compressive stress about the major axis and
minor axis are based on the procedures of section 4.14. Procedures outlined in
sections 4.14.1 through 4.14.6 have been implemented.
Allowable Bending Tensile Stress
Calculations for allowable bending tensile stress about the major and minor axis
are based on the procedures of Section 4.14.2.
Allowable Shear Stress
Calculation of the allowable shear stress is based on the procedure outlined in

section 4.15 of the ASCE Pub. 52. The procedure of section 4.15.2 is followed for
angles and the procedure of section 4.15.1 is followed for all other sections.
Critical Conditions used as criteria to determine Pass/Fail status
These are Clause 4.4 for slenderness limits, Equation 4.12-1 for Axial
Compression and Bending, Equation 4.13-1 for Axial Tension and Bending, Clause
4.9.2 for Maximum w/t ratios and Clause 4.15 for Shear.

Design per ASCE (Pub. 52) must be initiated by using the command CODE ASCE
52. This command should be the first command after the PARAMETER statement.
Other applicable parameters are summarized in Table 15A.1. These parameters
may be used to control the design process to suit specific modeling needs. The
802 — STAAD.Pro
default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used
numbers for conventional design.

Both code checking and member selection options are available in the ASCE Pub.
52 implementation.
15B.5 Parameter Definition Table

Table 15B.1 - Steel Design Parameters for ASCE (Pub. 52) Based
Design
Name Value
KY 1.0 Effective length factor (K) for compression
buckling about the Y-axis (minor axis)
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor (K) for compression
buckling about the Z-axis (major axis)
KT 1.0 Effective length coefficient for warping
restraint (clause 4.14.4, pg 36)
LY Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio for
Length buckling about the Y-axis (minor axis)
LZ Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio for
Length buckling about the Z-axis (major axis)
LT Member Effective length for warping.
Length
FYLD 36.0 KSI Yield Strength of steel
NSF 1.0 Net section factor for tension members
UNL Member Unsupported length of member for
Length calculation of
allowable bending stress


Name Value
UNF 1.0 Same as UNL, but provided as a fraction of
the member length
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppresses printing of allowable
stresses
1.0 = Prints all allowable stresses

DMAX 45.0 in. Maximum allowable depth for member
selection
DMIN 0.0 in. Minimum allowable depth for member
selection
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio that determines the cut
off point for
pass/fail status. A value below this

quantity
indicates PASS while a value greater than

this
quantity indicates FAILURE.

BEAM 0.0 2.0 = Perform design using the section
locations specified according to the SECTION
command
3.0 = Perform design at the ends and

eleven intermediate sections of the beam
804 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
MAIN 2 Parameter that indicates the member type
for the purpose of calculating the KL/R
ratio
(SEE CLAUSE 4.4, PAGE 25)
= 10 : DO NOT PERFORM THE KL/R

CHECK
= 1 : LEG MEMBER KL/R <= 150
= 2 : COMPRESSION MEMBER KL/R <=

200
= 3 : TENSION MEMBER KL/R <= 500
= 4 : HANGAR MEMBERS KL/R <=

375
(Clause 4C.4, page 43)
= 5 : REDUNDANT MEMBERS KL/R <=

250
ELA 4 Indicates what type of end conditions are
to be used
From among Equations 4.7-4 thru 4.7-7

to determine the
the KL/R ratio.
ELA=1 : EQN.4.7-4, Page 26
(VALID FOR LEG MEMBERS ONLY)
ELA=2 : EQN.4.7-5, Page 27
ELA=3 : EQN.4.7-6, Page 27
ELA=4 : EQN.4.7-7, Page 27


Name Value
ELB 1 Indicates what type of end conditions are
to be used from among Equations. 4.7-8
thru 4.7-10 to determine the KL/R ratio.
ELB=1 : EQN.4.7-8, Page 27, EQN.4.7-

12, Page 28
ELB=2 : EQN.4.7-9, Page 27, EQN.4.7-

13, Page 28
ELB=3 : EQN.4.7-10, Page 27, EQN.4.7-

14,Page28
LEG 0.0 This parameter is meant for plain angles.
3.0 = indicates that the angle is

connected by both legs and allowable stress in
axial tension is 1.0 FYLD.

connected only by the shorter leg and allowable
tensile stress is computed per clause 4.10.2 as
0.9FYLD.

connected by the longer leg.
DBL 0.75 in. Diameter of bolt for calculation of number
of bolts required and the net section factor.
FYB 36 KSI Yield strength of bolt.
FVB 30 KSI Shear strength of bolt.
NHL 0 Number of bolt holes on the cross section
that should be used to determine the net section
factor for tension capacity.
Notes:
l All values must be provided in the current unit system.

l Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number till it is
specified again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.
806 — STAAD.Pro
Section 16
Steel Design per American
Petroleum Institute Code
The API Steel Design facility in STAAD is based on the API 2A-WSD standard, titled
"Recommended Practice for Planning, Design and Constructing Fixed Offshore
Platforms-Working Stress Design," 21st Edition.
16.1 Design Operations

STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for the design of structural members as
l Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design;
l Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection;

l Specify design parameter values, if different from the default values; and
l Specify design parameters to carry out punching shear checks.
upon the design requirements, but care should be taken when coupled with
manipulation of the punching shear LEG parameter.
The basic process is as follows:
1. Define the STAAD model geometry, loading and analysis.
2. Define the API code parameters with LEG 1.0.
3. Run the analysis and API design which creates the Geometry file and give
preliminary design results.
4. Check and modify the Geometry file as necessary.
5. Reset the LEG parameter to 2.0 and re-run the analysis to read the modified
Geometry file for the final design results.
16.2 Allowables per API Code

For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses
as defined by the American Petroleum Institute (API-RP2A) Code. The 21st
edition of API Code, as published in 2007, is used as the basis of this design
(except for tension stress).
16.2.1 Tension Stress
Allowable tension stresses, as calculated in STAAD, are based on the API Code,
clause (3.2.1-1).
Allowable tension stress on the net section
F = 0.60·F
t y
16.2.2 Shear Stress
Beam Shear Stress
Allowable beam shear stress on the gross section must conform to Clause 3.2.4-2
of the API code:
808 — STAAD.Pro
F = 0.4·F
v y
The maximum applied beam shear stress is per Eqn 3.2.4-1:
f = V / 0.5 A
v
Torsional Shear Stress
Allowable torsional shear stress per Eqn. 3.2.4-4:
F = 0.4·F
vt y
F is the maximum torsional shear stress per Clause 3.2.4-3 of the API code.
vt
16.2.3 Stress Due to Compression

The allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially loaded
compression members is calculated based on the formula 3.2.2-1 in the API Code
when the largest effective slenderness ratio, Kl/r is less than or equal to C . If Kl/r
c
exceeds C , then the allowable compressive stress is increased as per formula
c
(3.2.2-2) of the Code.
Where:
For D/t > 60, the lesser of F or F is substituted for F .

xe xc xy
Where:
F = the elastic local buckling stress calculated with C, the critical

xe
elastic buckling coefficient = 0.3 (3.2.2-3)
F = the inelastic local buckling stress. (3.2.2-4)

xc
16.2.4 Bending Stress

The allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a symmetrical
member loaded in the plane of its minor axis, as given in Clause 3.2.3 of the API
code, is:
a. When D/t ≤ 1,500/F (Imperial Units),

y
F = 0.75F
b y

b. When 1,500/F < D/t ≤ 3,000/F (Imperial Units),
y y
F = [0.84 - 1.74 F D/(Et)]F
b y y
c. When 3,000/F < D/t ≤ 300 (Imperial Units),
y
F = [0.72 - 0.58 F D/(Et)]F
b y y
16.2.5 Combined Compression and Bending
Members subjected to both axial compression and bending stresses are

proportioned to satisfy API formula 3.3.1-1 and 3.3.1-2 when f /F > 0.15,
a a
otherwise formula 3.3.1-3 applies. It should be noted that during code checking
or member selection, if f /F > 1.0, the program does not compute the second
a a
3.3.1-1/2.

The program contains a large number of parameter names which are required to
perform design and code checks. These parameter names, with their default
values, are listed in Table 16.1. These parameters communicate design decisions
from the engineer to the program.
requirements for an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be
changed to exactly model the physical structure. For example, by default the KZ
value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, wile in the real structure it
may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be changed to 1.5, as
shown in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member
is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed.
Table 16C.1 - American (API) Steel Design Parameters

Name

API
810 — STAAD.Pro
Name
See section 5.48.1 of

the Technical Reference
Manual.
BEAM 1.0 0.0 = design only for

end moments or
those at locations
specified by the
SECTION command.
1.0 = calculate
moments at twelfth
points along the beam,
and use the maximum
Mz location for design.
2.0 = Same for

BEAM 1.0, but
additional check is
made at each end.
CB 1.0 Cb value as used in

Section 1.5 of AISC
0.0 = Cb value to be
calculated
Any other value will

mean the value to be
used in design
CMY 0.85 for sidesway Cm value in local y & z

and calculated for axes
CMZ
no sidesway
DMAX 0.0 Maximum allowable

depth
DMIN 0.0 Minimum allowable

Name
depth
FYLD 36 KSI Yield strength of steel.
Usually, this is minor

axis.
Usually, this is major

axis.
LEG 1.0 To write out external

parameters file.
2.0
To read in the external
parameters file.
LY Member Length Length in local Y-axis to

ratio.
LZ Member Length Length in local Z-axis to

ratio.
MAIN 0.0 1.0 = Main member
2.0 = Secondary
member

tension members.

actual to allowable
stresses
812 — STAAD.Pro
Name
SSY 0.0 0.0 = Sidesway in local

y-axis
1.0 = No sidesway
SSZ 0.0 Same as above except

in local z-axis
TRACK 0.0 1.0 = Print all critical

member
stresses
100.0 = Suppress all

checks except punching
shear
UNL Member Length Unsupported length for

bending stress
UNF 1.0 Same as above

provided as a fraction
of actual member
length
WELD 1 for closed sections Weld type, as explained

in section 3.1.1.
2 for open sections
1. = Welding is one
side only except
for wide flange or
tee sections,
where the web is
always assumed
to be welded on
both sides.
2. = Welding is
both sides. For
closed sections
like pipe or tube,

Name
the welding will

be only on one
side.
WSTR 0.4 X FLYD Allowable welding

stress
WMIN 1.16 in. Minimum thickness
Note: The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used for member selection.
16.7 Code Checking

properties of the members are adequate as per API. Code checking is done using
the forces and moments at specific sections of the members. If no sections are
specified, the program uses the start and end forces for code checking.
members have passed or failed the checks, the critical condition of API code (like
any of the API specifications for compression, tension, shear, etc.), the value of
the ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any
other specified RATIO value), the governing load case, and the location (distance
from the start of the number of forces in the member) where the critical condition
occurs.
Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2.2,
American Steel Design, of the Technical Reference manual.
16.8 Member Selection

STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once
an analysis has been performed, the program can select the most economical
section, i.e., the lightest section which fulfills the code requirements for the
specified member. The section selected will be of the same type section as
814 — STAAD.Pro
originally designated for the member being designed. Member selection can also
be constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN which limits the maximum and
Member selection can be performed with all types of hollow steel sections.
Selection of members whose properties are originally input from a user created

input as prismatic.
16.9 Truss Members

A truss member is capable of carrying only axial force. So in design, no time is
wasted calculating the allowable bending or shear stresses, thus reducing design
time considerably. Therefore, if there is any truss member in an analysis (like
bracing or strut, etc.), it is wise to declare it as a truss member rather than as a
regular frame member with both ends pinned.
16.10 Punching Shear

For tubular members, punching shear may be checked in accordance with the
American Petroleum Institute (API) RP 2A – 20th Edition Section 4. The parameter
PUNCH is used to identify joint types for each end of the member where the
punching shear check is required. The PUNCH parameter is only read in from the
external geometry file. The external geometry file is described in section 16.13. The
PUNCH parameter is not specified within the STAAD input file ( .STD file extension).
Table 16C.2 - Joint identification for punch-
ing shear check
Type of Joint and Req. Value of
Geometry Parameter
PUNCH
K (overlap) 1.0
K (gap) 2.0

Type of Joint and Req. Value of
Geometry Parameter
PUNCH
T&Y 3.0
CROSS 4.0
CROSS 5.0
(with/diaphragms)
Note: A value representing joint type and geometry must be provided for
parameter PUNCH, in the external file. On the first run where no external table
is present, LEG must equal 1.0.
16.11 Generation of the Geometry File

Automatic selection of the chord and brace members is performed with the
parameter LEG 1.0.
Two tubular members are used by the program to identify the chord member. The
chord members must be collinear (5 degree tolerance).
The chord member must have a greater diameter and thickness than the brace
member being considered.
The punching shear check is performed on the joint treating it as a T/Y joint. The
yield stress of the brace is used. In the 50% strength check the brace and chord
yield are assumed to be the same.
The major moment axis Mz is taken as In Plane Bending (IPB). To change this, the
parameter SWAP 1 should be used in the external geometry file.
Note: The in-plane/out-of-plane correspondence can be set by using the BETA

angle.
If the punching shear cannot be performed at the joint for the member being
considered, a message is written to the output file <filename>.ANL.
If a punching shear check is performed with the parameter LEG 1.0 used, then
the geometry data used to perform the check is written to the default external
output file APIPUN.
816 — STAAD.Pro
The default external output/input file name can be changed by using the command
line:
CODE API <filename>.
This external output data file can be edited and used as an external input file to re-
perform the check using the parameter PUNCH 1.0 to 5.0.
This external input file allows can/stub geometry data to be specified and chords to
be assigned geometry where they could not be identified in the Automatic
selection.
The parameter LEG 2.0 must be used to read an external input file where the
default name is APIPUN.
The yield strength of the brace is used in the punching shear check. This can be
changed in the external geometry file. The user should ensure that the correct cord
member has been selected for the check.
16.12 Chord Selection and Q Param-

f
eter
Q is a factor to account for the presence of nominal longitudinal stress in the
f
chord. When calculating Q for the joints, the moments used in the chord stress
f
calculation will be from the computer node results and not the representative
moments underneath the brace. If the moment varies significantly along the chord,
it is more accurate to use the actual chord moment in the middle of the brace foot
print. The tests reported in Reference I[1] were performed with a constant moment
along the chord. Thus for a local joint check, the local chord moment (under the
brace) should be used.
STAAD calculates Q based on the moment at the chord member. The chord
f
member can be selected automatically by initial screening by the program (based
on geometry and independent of loading) or specified in the External file.
In the automatic selection of the chord two collinear members (5 degree tolerance)
are used to identify the chord. The chord is then selected from one of the two
members based on the larger diameter then thickness or then by the minimum
framing angle; for T joints the first member modeled will be selected as the chord.
You should confirm that the chord either be assigned by the program or the user is
representative of the local chord moment for the brace in question.

Reference
1 Ref I: Boone, TJ. Yura, JA. and Hoadley, PW. Ultimate Strength if Tubular Joints
– Chord Stress Effects, OTC 4828, 1984
16.13 External Geometry File

An example of the external geometry file is shown below:
BRACE CHORD PUNCH D T D T GAP FYLD THETA
209 211 3 17.992 0.984 12.752 0.787 0.000 50.00 0.00
209 210 3 17.992 0.984 12.752 0.787 0.000 50.00 0.00
212 202 3 17.992 0.787 12.752 0.787 0.000 50.00 0.00
The parameters used in the external file are defined as follows:

Table 16C.3 - External File
Parameter Name Description
PUNCH Parameter for punching shear (See Section 12.10)
BRACE Member number of brace
CHORD Member number of chord
D Chord Diameter in inches
T Chord Thickness in inches
d Brace Diameter in inches
T Brace Thickness in inches
GAP Gap in inches (must be negative for overlap K-joint)
818 — STAAD.Pro
Parameter Name Description
FYLD Local yield strength used for joint in KIPS
THETAT Angle of through brace in overlap K-joint in Degrees
TW Used in overlap K-joint, taken as the lesser of the weld throat thickn
thinner brace in inches
SWAP If parameter SWAP 0 is used then major moment Mz is taken for In

SWAP 1 uses the minor moment My as the IPB.
Notes:
l For overlap K-joints, the through brace is assumed to be the same diameter
as the brace being checked.
l If any of the parameters for diameter and thickness specified in the external
file are less than that for members being checked, then the member
properties specified in the STAAD file shall be used.
l The member diameter and thickness should be used in API equation (4.1-1);
in this check it has been assumed that the yield strength of the chord and
brace members are the same.
l The geometry file name is currently limited to eight characters (4 if an

extension as .TXT is used).
The overall process of performing punching shear checks consists of two steps.
These steps are explained in section 16.16.
16.14 Limitations
The parameter SELECT 1.0 should not be used while carrying out punching shear
checks. It can be used in initial runs for member selection.
No classification of the joint is performed using the loading.
No hydrostatic checks are performed.

16.15 Tabulated Results of Steel
Design
a. Member refers to the member number for which the design is performed.
b. TABLE refers to AISC steel section name which has been checked against the
steel code or has been selected.
c. RESULTS prints whether the member has PASSed or FAILed. If the RESULT
d. CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the AISC code which governs the
design.
e. RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the
critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has
passed.
f. LOADING provides the load case number which governed the design.
g. FX, MY, and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis, and the
moment in local Z-axis respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the
cases.
table and will print the allowable bending stressed in compression (FCY &
FCZ) and tension (FTY & FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA),
and allowable shear stress (FV).
16.16 The Two-Step Process

The overall procedure for performing the code check per the API code is as
follows:
820 — STAAD.Pro
Step 1
Creating the geometry data file. This is done by specifying the name of the
geometry data file alongside the command line CODE API. If a file name is not
specified, STAAD automatically assigns the file name APIPUN to the geometry data
file. The parameter instructions in the .STD file should contain the LEG parameter
and it should be assigned the value 1.0.
Example Reading External Geometry File
UNIT INCHES KIPS

PARAMETERS
* ALL JOINT DATA WILL BE WRITTEN TO EXTERNAL FILE GEOM1
FOR PUNCHING SHEAR.
CODE API GEOM1
LEG 1.0
* JOINTS TO BE CONSIDERED AS T AND Y, I.E., PUNCH IS SET TO
3.0.
FYLD 50.0 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
RATIO 1.0 ALL
BEAM 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
After ensuring that your STAAD input file contains the above data, run the analysis.
Once the analysis is completed, you will find that a file by the name GEOM1 has
been created and is located in the same folder as the one where your .std file is
located. (In case you did not specify a file name - GEOM1 shown in the earlier
example - STAAD will create the file named APIPUN.
Step 2
The geometry data file (GEOM 1 or otherwise) should be inspected and modified as
required such as changing the PUNCH values and local section properties for the
punching shear checks.
Modify the .STD file so it reruns the code check process by reading the instructions
of the GEOM file. This message is conveyed by changing the value of the LEG

parameter to 2.0. After making this change, a re-analysis will result in the program
using the information in the geometry data file (GEOM1, APIPUN, or otherwise) for
performing the code check.
Example Reading an existing Joint Geometry Data File, GEOM1
UNIT INCHES KIPS

PARAMETERS
* ALL JOINT DATA WILL BE READ FROM THE EXTERNAL FILE
GEOM1 FOR PUNCHING SHEAR.
CODE API GEOM1
LEG 2.0
FYLD 50.0 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
RATIO 1.0 ALL
BEAM 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
822 — STAAD.Pro
Section 17
ANSI/AISC N690 Design
Codes

824 — STAAD.Pro
ANSI/AISC N690-1994 Code
defined by ANSI/AISC N690-1994 and as amended by Supplement No. 2 to the
Specification of the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Steel Safety-Related
Structures for Nuclear Facilities (ANSI/AISC N690 1994(R2004)s2).
All the design steps are done as described in section 2.3 Allowable per AISC-ASD
(Ninth Edition) Code of Technical Reference manual except for allowable stress in
compression for AUSTENlTlC STAINLESS STEEL. Section Q1.5.9 is used to
calculate allowable compressive stress for Austenitic Stainless Steel. Correction
made in Supplementary s1 published in April 15, 2002 has been applied.
Note: By default, N690 code uses Stainless Steel material in the design. Care
should be taken to assign the proper Stainless Steel material properties to the
members for the analysis. There is a parameter – STYPE – to change material
type to either Stainless Steel (STYPE=1) or Carbon Steel (STYPE=0).
Design Process
proportioned to satisfy equation Q1.6-1a:
SFC·f /F + SMY·C f /[(1 - f /F' )F ] + SMZ·C f /[(1 - f /F' )F ] ≤ 1.0

a a my by a ey by mz bz a ez bz
and Q1.6-1b:
SFC·f /(0.6·F ) + SMY·f /F + SMZ·f /F ≤ 1.0

a y by by bz bz
when, f /F > 0.15, as per section Q1.6.1 of the code.
a a
Otherwise, equation Q1.6-2 must be satisfied:
SFC·f /F + SMY·f /F + SMZ·f /F ≤ 1.0

a a by by bz bz
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds
a a
unity, the program does not compute the second and third part of the formula,
because this would result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient
Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and [0.6 - 0.4·(M1/M2)], but not less than 0.4 for
no side-sway.

Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to
satisfy equation Q1.6-3:
SFT·f /(0.6·F ) + SMY·f /F + SMZ·f /F ≤ 1.0

a y by by bz bz
Where SFC, SFT, SMZ, and SMY are stress limit coefficient parameters used to
control the components of the interaction equations. Refer to Table 17A.1 for
details.

values, are listed in the following table.
changed to exactly model the physical structure
Table 17A.1 - Design Parameters for ANSI/AISC N690-1994

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as AISC N690

Reference Manual.
BEAM 1 Beam parameter
0. Perform design at ends and

those locations in the
SECTION command.
1. Perform design at ends and at
1/12th section locations along
the member length.
CAN 0 Used for Deflection Check only (i.e.,

when DFF is specified).
826 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
0. Deflection check based on the

principle that maximum deflec-
tion occurs within the span
1. Deflection check based on the
principle that maximum deflec-
tion is of the cantilever type
CB 1.0 Bending coefficient dependent upon

moment gradient, as specified in
Chapter F of AISC ASD.
0.0 = CB is calculated itself
Any other user-defined value is

accepted.
CMY 0.85 for Cm value in local y & z axes

sidesway
CMZ
and
calculated
for no
sidesway
COMPOSITE 0 Composite action with connectors

(CMP)
0. No composite action
1. Composite action
2. Ignore positive moments dur-
ing design
CONDIA 0.625 in Diameter of shear connectors (DIA),

in current units.
CONHEIGHT 2.5 in Height of shear connectors after

welding (HGT), in current units.
CYCLES 500,000 Cycles of maximum stress to which

the shear connector is


Name Value
subject (CYC).
DFF None "Deflection Length" / Maximum

for
deflection
check)
DJ1 Start Joint Joint No. denoting starting point for

of member calculation of "Deflection Length"

DLR2 0.4 Ratio of moment due to dead load

applied after the concrete hardens
to the total moment (DR2).
DLRATIO 0.4 Ratio of moment due to dead load

applied before the concrete hardens
to the total moment (DR1).
DMAX 45 inch Maximum allowable depth
DMIN 0.0 inch Minimum allowable depth
EFFWIDTH 1/4 Effective width of concrete slab

Member (WID).
Length
FYLD 36 KSI Yield strength of steel in current

units.
FPC 3 KSI Compressive strength of concrete at

28 days, in current units.
FSS 1 Full section shear for welding.
0. False
1. True
828 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
FU 60 KSI Ultimate tensile strength of steel, in

current units.
FYLD 46 KSI Yield strength of steel, in current

units.
KX 1.0 Effective length factor for flexural

torsional buckling.
KY 1.0 Effective Length Factor for Com-

pression in local y-axis. Usually, this
is minor axis.
KZ 1.0 Effective Length Factor for Com-

pression in local z-axis. Usually, this
is major axis.
LX Member Length for flexural torsional buck-

Length ling.

Length ratio (KL/r) for buckling about local
Y axis.

Length (major).
MAIN 0.0 Design for slenderness:
0. check for slenderness

1. suppress slenderness check
NSF 1.0 Net section Factor for tension

members
OVR 1.0 Factor by which all allowable

stresses/capacities should be mul-
tiplied. Default of 1.0 indicates that
no overstressing is allowed.
PLTHICK 0 Thickness of the cover plate welded

to the bottom flange of the com-


Name Value
posite beam (PLT), in current units.
PLTWIDTH 0 Width of the cover plate welded to

the bottom flange of the composite
beam (PLT), in current units.
PROFILE None Used to search for the lightest

section for the profile(s) specified
for member selection. See Section
Manual for details.

allowable stresses.
RIBHEIGHT 0 Height of ribs of form steel deck

(RBH), in current units.
RIBWIDTH 0 Width of ribs of form steel deck

(RBW), in current units.
SFC 1.0 Stress limit coefficient for com-

pression (SLC) as found in Table Q
1.5.7.1.
SFT 1.0 Stress limit coefficient for tension

(SLC) as found in Table Q 1.5.7.1.
SHE 0 Shear stress calculation option
0. Computes the actual shear

stress using VQ/It
1. Computes the actual shear
stress using V(Ay or Az)
SHORING 0 Temporary shoring during

construction
0. Without shoring
1. With shoring
SLABTHICK 4 in Thickness of concrete slab or thick-
830 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
ness of concrete slab above the

form steel deck (THK), in current
units.
SMY 1.0 Stress limit coefficient for minor axis

bending (SLC) as found in Table Q
1.5.7.1.
SMZ 1.0 Stress limit coefficient for major axis

1.5.7.1.
SSY 0 Design for sidesway in the local y

axis.
0. Sidesway
1. No sidesway
SSZ 0 Design for sidesway in the local z

axis.
0. Sidesway
1. No sidesway
STIFF Member Spacing of stiffeners for plate girder

length or design, in current units.
depth
whichever
is greater
STYPE 0.0 Type of steel material
0. Normal Steel
1. Austenitic Stainless Steel
TAPER 1 Design for tapered member.
0. Design for tapered I-section

based on rules in Chapter F
and Appendix B.
1. Design for tapered section


Name Value
based on Appendix F.
TMAIN 240 for Slenderness limit under tension

main
member
300 for
“Truss”
member
TORSION 0 Design for torsion.
0. Do not design for torsion.

1. Design for torsion.
TRACK 0.0 Controls the levels of detail to which

results are reported.
0. Minimum detail
1. Intermediate detail level
2. Maximum detail
UNB Member Unsupported length of the bottom*

Length flange for calculating allowable
bending compressive stress. Will be
used only if flexural compression on
the bottom flange.
UNT Member Unsupported length of the top*

the top flange.
WELD 1 Design for weld.
0. Closed sections.
1. Open sections.
832 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
WMAX 1 in Maximum weld thickness, in current

units.
WMIN 0.625 in Minimum weld thickness, in current

units.
WSTR 0.4·Fyld Allowable welding stress, in current

units.
Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units

2. parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION com-
mand
17B.3 Examples
These example problems are included for the verification of design results.
17.3.1 Example 1
Solution
Allowable Compressive Stress:
Maximum Slenderness Ratio, (Kl/r) = 171.31

max
Yield Stress of Steel, F = 36 ksi
y
C = [(2π2E)/F ]1/2 = 127.68
c y
Allowable Compressive Stress for Austentic Stainless Steel, As,
(Kl/r) > C
max c
F = (12π2E)/[23(Kl/r) ] = 5.21 ksi
a max

Comparison
Table 17A.2 - ANSI-AISC N690-1994 Code Ver-

ification Problem 1
Value Reference STAAD.Pro Difference
of
F (ks) 5.21 5.22 Negligible

a
Input File
This example is included as C:\SPROV8I\STAAD\EXAMP\N690\N690_CASE1.STD
STAAD SPACE
ENGINEER DATE 30-NOV-07
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 4 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05E+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
834 — STAAD.Pro
1 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
2 FIXED BUT FX MY MZ
MEMBER LOAD
1 CON GY -10 2
UNIT METER KIP
UNIT METER KN
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -1
LOAD COMB 3 COMBINATION LOAD CASE 3
1 1.0 2 9.5
PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS
UNIT METER KIP
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The corresponding TRACK 2 output is shown below:

STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( ANSI N690-1994) v1.0
********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Y PROPERTIES |

|************* | IN INCH UNIT |

| * |=============================| ===|=== ------------ |
|MEMBER 1 * | AISC SECTIONS | | AX = 3.55 |
| * | ST W6X12 | | --Z AY = 1.25 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ = 1.50 |
|ANSI N690-94* =============================== ===|=== SY = 1.50 |
| * SZ = 7.33 |
| * |<---LENGTH (FT)= 13.12 --->| RY = 0.92 |
|************* RZ = 2.50 |
| |
| 7.4 (KIP-FEET) |
|PARAMETER | L1 STRESSES |
|IN KIP INCH | IN KIP INCH |
|--------------- + L1 L1 -------------|
| KL/R-Y= 171.31 | FA = 5.22 |
| KL/R-Z= 63.12 + L1 L1 fa = 0.60 |
| UNL = 157.48 | FCZ = 14.15 |
| CB = 1.00 + L1 L1 FTZ = 21.60 |
| CMY = 0.85 | L1 L1 FCY = 27.00 |
| CMZ = 0.85 + FTY = 27.00 |
| FYLD = 36.00 |L0 L0 fbz = 12.07 |
| NSF = 1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 0.00 |
| DFF = 0.00 -0.4 Fey = 4.65 |
| dff= 0.00 ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE Fez = 34.26 |
| (KL/R)max = 171.31 (WITH LOAD NO.) FV = 14.40 |
| fv = 0.90 |
| |
| MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KIP-FEET) |
| ------------------------- |
| |
| |
| VALUE 2.1 1.1 0.0 0.0 7.4 |
| LOCATION 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 6.6 |
| LOADING 3 1 0 0 1 |
| |
|**************************************************************************|
|* *|
|* DESIGN SUMMARY (KIP-FEET) *|
|* -------------- *|
|* *|
| ====================================================== |
| PASS ANSI Q1.6-2 0.968 3 |
| 2.14 C 0.00 -7.38 6.56 |
|* *|
|**************************************************************************|
| |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
836 — STAAD.Pro
17.3.2 Example 2
Solution

max
y
C = [(2π2E)/F ]1/2 = 127.68
c y
(Kl/r) < 120.0

max
F = (F /2.15) - {[(F /2.15) - 6.0]/120.0}x(Kl/r) = 9.07 ksi
a y y max
Comparison

ification Problem 2
of
F (ks) 9.07 9.08 Negligible

a
Input File
STAAD SPACE
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES

3 0 0 1; 4 2 0 1;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
2 3 4;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05E+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
2 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
3 PINNED
MEMBER LOAD
UNIT METER KIP
2 CON GY -2.24809 1
UNIT METER KN
JOINT LOAD
4 FX -1
1 1.0 2 9.5
838 — STAAD.Pro
UNIT METER KIP
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output

********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Y PROPERTIES |
|************* | IN INCH UNIT |
| * |=============================| ===|=== ------------ |
| * | ST W6X12 | | --Z AY = 1.25 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ = 1.50 |
|ANSI N690-94* =============================== ===|=== SY = 1.50 |
| * SZ = 7.33 |
| * |<---LENGTH (FT)= 6.56 --->| RY = 0.92 |
|************* RZ = 2.50 |
| |
| 3.7 (KIP-FEET) |
|IN KIP INCH | IN KIP INCH |
|--------------- + L1 L1 -------------|
| KL/R-Y= 85.65 | FA = 9.08 |
| KL/R-Z= 31.56 + L1 fa = 0.60 |
| UNL = 78.74 | L1 FCZ = 21.60 |
| CB = 1.00 + L1 L1 FTZ = 21.60 |
| CMY = 0.85 | L1 FCY = 27.00 |
| CMZ = 0.85 + L1 FTY = 27.00 |
| FYLD = 36.00 |L0 L0 fbz = 6.04 |
| NSF = 1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 0.00 |
| DFF = 0.00 -0.2 Fey = 18.60 |
| fv = 0.90 |
| |
| ------------------------- |
| |
| |

| VALUE 2.1 1.1 0.0 0.0 3.7 |

| LOCATION 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 3.3 |
| LOADING 3 1 0 0 1 |
| |
|**************************************************************************|
|* *|
|* -------------- *|
|* *|
| ====================================================== |
| PASS ANSI Q1.6-2 0.346 3 |
| 2.14 C 0.00 -3.69 3.28 |
|* *|
|**************************************************************************|
| |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
17.3.3 Example 3
Solution

max
y
C = [(2π2E)/F ]1/2 = 127.68
c y
120.0 < (Kl/r) <C

max c
F = F [0.4 - (1/600)x(Kl/r) ] = 7.08 ksi
a y max
Comparison

ification Problem 3
of
F (ks) 7.08 7.08 None

a
840 — STAAD.Pro
Input File
STAAD SPACE
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 2.85 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05E+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
1 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED

MEMBER LOAD
1 CON GY -10 2
UNIT METER KIP
UNIT METER KN
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -1
1 1.0 2 9.5
UNIT METER KIP
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output

********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Y PROPERTIES |
|************* | IN INCH UNIT |
| * |=============================| ===|=== ------------ |
| * | ST W6X12 | | --Z AY = 1.25 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ = 1.50 |
|ANSI N690-94* =============================== ===|=== SY = 1.50 |
| * SZ = 7.33 |
| * |<---LENGTH (FT)= 9.35 --->| RY = 0.92 |
|************* RZ = 2.50 |
| |
| 4.2 (KIP-FEET) |
|IN KIP INCH | L1 IN KIP INCH |
842 — STAAD.Pro
|--------------- + L1 -------------|
| KL/R-Y= 122.06 | L1 FA = 7.08 |
| KL/R-Z= 44.97 + L1 fa = 0.60 |
| UNL = 112.20 | FCZ = 19.86 |
| CB = 1.00 + L1 L1 FTZ = 21.60 |
| CMY = 0.85 | L1 FCY = 27.00 |
| CMZ = 0.85 + L1 FTY = 27.00 |
| FYLD = 36.00 |L0 L0 fbz = 6.84 |
| NSF = 1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 0.00 |
| DFF = 0.00 -0.2 Fey = 9.16 |
| fv = 0.54 |
| |
| ------------------------- |
| |
| |
| VALUE 2.1 1.6 0.0 0.0 4.2 |
| LOCATION 0.0 7.0 0.0 0.0 6.2 |
| LOADING 3 1 0 0 1 |
| |
|**************************************************************************|
|* *|
|* -------------- *|
|* *|
| ====================================================== |
| PASS ANSI Q1.6-2 0.429 3 |
| 2.14 C 0.00 -4.18 6.23 |
|* *|
|**************************************************************************|
| |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

844 — STAAD.Pro
For code checking of steel members, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the
allowable stresses as defined by the "ANSI/AISC N690-1984: Nuclear Facilities -
Steel Safety-Related Structures for Design, Fabrication, and Erection."
A brief description of some of the major allowable stresses is described herein.
17B.2 Design Process

The following Checks are to be performed on a Steel Member as per this AISC N690
– 1984 Code. When a design is performed, the output file the reports the maximum
utilization from all of the checks.
17B.2.1. Slenderness
The maximum allowable slenderness ratio in Compression (K·L/r_min), as per

clause Q1.8.4 of the code shall not exceed 200. And the maximum allowable
slenderness ratio in Tension (L/r_min) shall not exceed 240 for main members and
300 for bracing members and other secondary members.
This can be controlled by using the existing MAIN and TMAIN parameters
respectively.
The default value of MAIN is 200 and for TMAIN is 240.
17B.2.2. Check for Element Slenderness and Stress Reduction Fac-

tors
The permissible Width-to-Thickness Ratio of “Un-stiffened Elements under

Compression” is determined as per section Q1.9.1 and that of “Stiffened Elements
under Compression” is determined as per section Q1.9.2 of the code.
The permissible Width–Thickness Ratio of web is determined as per section

Q1.10.2.
17B.2.3. Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as 0.60·F , but not more
y

than 0.5·F on the Effective Net area, as per section Q1.5.1.1.

u
The Net Area (An) shall be determined in accordance with Q1.14, and the NSF
parameter can be utilized for that.
The Effective Net Area (Ae) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is
transmitted by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of
the member, shall be computed from the formula (ref. Q1.14),
A = C ·A
e t n
Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75.
The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section Q1.14.
The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not
implemented in STAAD.
17B.2.4. Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns which meet the provisions of section
Q1.9, except those fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by
Q1.5.1.3. The allowable compressive stress for columns fabricated from austenitic
stainless steel shall be in accordance to section Q1.5.9.
A. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless

steel:
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r)

≤C,
c
F = [1 - (Kl/r)2/(2·C 2)]F / {5/3 + [3(Kl/r)/(8·C )] -
a c y c
[(Kl/r)3/(8·C 3)]}
c
Where:
C = [(2·π2E)/F ] 1/2
c y
2. When (Kl/r) > C ,
c
F = 12·π E/[23(kL/r)2]
2
a
B. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel:
846 — STAAD.Pro
1. When (Kl/r) ≤ 120,
F = F /2.15 - [(F /2.16 - 6)/120](kL/r)

a y y
2. When (Kl/r) > 120,
F = F [12 - (KL/r)/20]
a y
If the provisions of the section Q1.9 are not satisfied,
A. For un-stiffened compression element, a reduction factor Q is introduced.

s
Detailed values of Qs for different shapes are given in Section QC2.
B. For stiffened compression element, a reduced effective width b is

e
introduced.
1. For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform thickness:
b = 253·t/√F {1 - (50.3/[(b/t)√F ]} ≤ b
e y y
2. For other uniformly compressed elements:
b = 253·t/√F {1 - (44.3/[(b/t)√F ]} ≤ b
e y y
Consequently, a reduction factor Q is introduced and is equal to the
a
effective area divided by the actual area. Combining both these factors,
allowable stress for axially loaded compression members containing
stiffened or unstiffened elements shall not exceed
F = Q Q [1 - (Kl/r)2/(2·C 2)]F / {5/3 + [3(Kl/r)/(8·C )] -

a s a c y c
[(Kl/r)3/(8·C 3)]}
c
Where:
C' = [(2·π2E)/(Q Q F )] 1/2

c s a y
17B.2.5.Bending Stress
Allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a structural member, as
given in section Q1.5.1.4 is:

A. Along Major Axis:
1. Tension and compression on extreme fibers of compact hot rolled or

built-up members symmetrical about and loaded in the plane of their
minor axes and meeting the requirements of Subsection Q1.5.1.4.1.1
to 7, shall result in a maximum bending stress:
F = 0.66·F
b y
If meeting the requirements of this member of:
a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the
compression flange shall not exceed 65/√F .
y
b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression
flange shall not exceed 190/√F .
y
c. The depth-thickness ratio of the web shall not exceed
d/t = (640/√F )[1 – 3.74(f /F )] when f /F ≤0.16

y a y a y
d/t = 257/√F when f /F > 0.16
y a y
d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of
members other than box-shaped members shall not exceed the
value of 76b /√F nor 20000/(d/A )F .
f y f y
2. For noncompact and slender elements, section Q1.5.1.4.2 is followed.
3. For box-type flexural members, maximum bending stress is:
F = 0.60·F
b y
B. Along Minor Axis:
1. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements

of section Q1.5.1.4.1, maximum tensile and compressive bending
stress shall not exceed the following value as per section Q1.5.1.4.3:
F = 0.75·F
b y
of section Q1.5.1.4.1, except where b /2t > 65/√F but is less than
f f y
95/√F , maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not
y
exceed:
F = F [0.79 – 0.002(b /2t )√F ]

b y f f y
848 — STAAD.Pro
17B.2.6. Combined Interaction Check

proportioned to satisfy equation Q1.6-1a:
SFC·f /F + SMY·C f /[(1 - f /F' )F ] + SMZ·C f /[(1 - f /F' )F ] ≤ 1.0

a a my by a ey by mz bz a ez bz
and Q1.6-1b
SFC·f /(0.6·F ) + SMY·f /F + SMZ·f /F ≤ 1.0

a y by by bz bz
when, f /F > 0.15, as per section Q1.6.1 of the code.
a a
Otherwise, equation Q1.6-2 must be satisfied:
SFC·f /F + SMY·f /F + SMZ·f /F ≤ 1.0

a a by by bz bz
a a
Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and [0.6 - 0.4·(M1/M2)], but not less than 0.4 for
no side-sway.
satisfy equation Q 1.6-1b:
SFT·f /(0.6·F ) + SMY·f /F + SMZ·f /F ≤ 1.0

a y by by bz bz
Where SFC, SFT, SMZ, and SMY are stress limit coefficient parameters used to
control the components of the interaction equations. Refer to Table 17B.1 for
details.
17B.2.7. Shear Stress
Allowable shear stress on the gross section [ref. section Q1.10.5.2] is calculated as
F = (F /2.89)C ≤ 0.4·F
v y v y
Where:
C = (45,000·k)/[F (h/t)2], when h/t ≤ 0.8

v y
C = [190/(h/t)]√(k/F ), when h/t > 0.8
v y
k = 4.00 + [5.34/(a/h)2], when a/h ≤ 1.0

k = 5.34 + [4.00/(a/h)2], when a/h > 1.0
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total
depth and the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken
as the total flange areas.
17B.4 Member Property Specification

For specification of member properties, the specified steel section available in
Steel Section Library of STAAD may be used, namely: I-shaped section, Channel,
Tee, HSS Tube, HSS Pipe, Angle, Double Angle, and Double Channel sections.
Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility except for
the General and Prismatic member.
For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical
Reference Manual.

changed to exactly model the physical structure
Table 17B.1 - Design Parameters for ANSI/AISC N690-1984

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as AISC N690

1984 to use the ANSI/AISC N690-
1984 code for checking purposes.

Reference Manual.
CAN 0 Used for Deflection Check only.
850 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
0 = Deflection check
based on the principle
that maximum deflection
occurs within the span
1 = Deflection check
based on the principle
that maximum deflection
is of the cantilever type

moment gradient

accepted.

sidesway
CMZ
and
calculated
for no
sidesway
CT 0.75 Reduction Coefficient in computing

net effective net area of an axially
loaded tension member.

for
deflection
check)




Name Value
FU 60 KSI Ultimate tensile strength of steel in

current units.

units.
KY 1.0 Effective Length Factor for Com-

pression in local y-axis. Usually, this
is minor axis.
KZ 1.0 Effective Length Factor for Com-

pression in local z-axis. Usually, this
is major axis.
LY Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio

Length for buckling about local Y axis.

Length (major).
MAIN 0.0 Design for slenderness.
0. Check for slenderness

1. Suppress slenderness check
NSF 1.0 Net section Factor for tension

members
PROFILE None Used to search for the lightest section

for the profile(s) specified for
member selection. See Section 5.48.1
of the Technical Reference Manual for
details.

allowable stresses.
SFC 1.0 Stress limit coefficient for com-
852 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
pression (SLC) as found in Table Q

1.5.7.1.
SFT 1.0 Stress limit coefficient for tension

(SLC) as found in Table Q 1.5.7.1.
SMY 1.0 Stress limit coefficient for minor axis

1.5.7.1.
SMZ 1.0 Stress limit coefficient for major axis

1.5.7.1.

length or design
depth
whichever
is greater
STYPE 0.0 0.0 = Normal Steel
1.0 = Austenitic Stainless Steel

main
member
300 for
“Truss”
member

0 = Minimum detail
1 = Intermediate detail level
2 = Maximum detail



Name Value

the bottom flange.

the top flange.
Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units

2. parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION com-
mand

Both code checking and member selection options are available with the AISC
N690 1984 code.
17B.6 Examples
These example problems are included for the verification of design results.
17B.6.1 Example 1 - Pipe Section
This example is included as C:\SPROV8I\STAAD\EXAMP\NUCLEAR CODE

SAMPLES\N690_1984_PIPE_SECTION.STD
854 — STAAD.Pro
Problem
A 10 ft long simply supported beam subject to axial (+/- 10 kip) and bending loads
(3 kip/ft) in both the local y and z axis. The beam is a 5" diameter, Schedule 40 Pipe
section made from Grade 36 steel.
Solution
Section Properties:
A = 4.30 in.2
x
I = I = 15.20 in.4
y z
r = (15.20/4.30)1/2 = 1.88 in.
O.D. = 5.56 in., t = 0.26 in.
S = S = 15.20 in.4·2/5.56 in. = 5.468 in.3

x y
Load Case 1: Tension-only

Allowable Tensile Stress:
F = min(0.6·F , 0.5·F ) = 0.6(36 ksi) = 21.60 ksi

t y u
Actual Tensile Stress:
f = P/A
t e
Where:
A = C ·A = 0.75(4.30 in.2) = 3.23 in.2

e t n
f = 10 kip/ 3.23 in.2 = 3.10 ksi
t
Stress Ratio = 3.10 ksi/21.60 ksi = 0.144 < 1.0, OK.
Load Case 2: Compression-only

Maximum Slenderness Ratio, (Kl/r) = 1.0(10 ft)(12 ft/in.)/1.88in. =

max
63.83 < 200, OK.

y

C = [(2π2E)/F ]1/2 = 127.68

c y
(Kl/r) <C
max c
F = F [1.0 - (Kl/r)2/(2·C 2]/[5/3 + 3(Kl/r)/(8·C ) - (Kl/r)3/(2·C 3)] =
a y c c c
36.0 ksi{1.0 - (63.83) /[2(127.68)2]/{5/3
2 + 3(63.83)/[8(127.68)] -
(63.83)3/[8(127.68)3]} = 36.0 ksi (0.875/1.835) = 17.06 ksi
Actual Compressive Stress:
f = 10 kip/4.30 in.2 = 2.33 ksi

a
Stress Ratio = 2.33 ksi/17.06 ksi = 0.136 < 1.0, OK.
Load Case 3: Tension + Bending

Allowable Bending Stress:
F =F = 0.66·F = 0.66(36 ksi) = 23.76 ksi

by bz y
Actual Bending Stress (include member selfweight in Y dir.):
M = 0.315 kip/ft (10 ft)2/8 (12 in./ft) = 47.2 in·kip

y
z
f = 47.2 in·kip/5.468 in.3 = 8.63 ksi
by
f = 45.0 in·kip/5.468 in.3 = 8.23 ksi
bz
Stress Ratio = 8.63 ksi/ 23.76 ksi = 0.363 < 1.0
Stress Ratio = 8.23 ksi/ 23.76 ksi = 0.346 < 1.0
Combined Stress Check:
f /(0.6·F ) + f /F + f /F = 3.10 ksi/[0.6(36 ksi)] + 0.363 + 0.346 =

a y by by bz bz
0.853
Load Case 4: Compression + Bending

Combined Stress Check:
f /F = 0.136 < 0.15

a a
f /F + f /F + f /F = 0.136 + 0.363 + 0.346 = 0.845 < 1.0, OK
a a by by bz bz
856 — STAAD.Pro
Comparison
Table 17B.2 - ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code Verification

Problem 1
Condition Reference STAAD.Pro Difference
Tension 0.144 0.108
(0.107, CT
= 1.0)
Compression 0.136 0.136 None
Tension 0.853 0.815 2.51%

+ Bending
(0.817, CT
= 1.0)
Compression 0.845 0.844 Negligible

+ Bending
Input File
STAAD SPACE
ENGINEER DATE 09-DEC-09
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT FEET KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 10 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 4.176E+006

POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 0.489024
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT INCHES KIP
1 TABLE ST PIPS50
UNIT FEET KIP
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
2 FIXED BUT FX
LOAD 1 TENSION ONLY
JOINT LOAD
2 FX 10
LOAD 2 COMPRESSION ONLY
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -10
LOAD 3 TENSION+BENDING
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -0.3
JOINT LOAD
2 FX 10
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GZ 0.3
LOAD 4 COMPRESSION+BENDING
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
858 — STAAD.Pro
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -0.3
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -10
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GZ 0.3
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES ALL
UNIT INCHES KIP
LOAD LIST 1
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL

** FOLLOWING TO CHECK IF THE NET AREA IS USED IN

CALCULATING TENSILE STRESS
PARAMETER 11
CODE AISC N690 1984
FU 40 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST 2
PARAMETER 2
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST 3
PARAMETER 3
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
860 — STAAD.Pro
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST 4
PARAMETER 4
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL

TMAIN 300 ALL

TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST ALL
PARAMETER 5
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The TRACK 2 output for the final parameter set is shown here:
862 — STAAD.Pro
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( AISC N690 1984)
v1.0
********************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KIP INCH (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
ING/
FX MY MZ LOCA-
TION
=======================================================================
1 ST PIPS50 (AISC SECTIONS)
PASS Q1.6-Eqn 2 0.844 4
10.00 C 44.84 47.02 120.00
|---------------------------------------------------------------------
--------|
| SLENDERNESS CHECK: ACTUAL RATIO: 63.83 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00
|
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 1.71E+01 FCZ: 2.38E+01 FCY: 2.38E+01 FTZ: 2.38E+01 FTY:
2.38E+01 |
| SHEAR: 1.44E+01
|
| ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| AXIAL: 2.33E+00 FBZ: 8.60E+00 FBY: 8.20E+00 SHEAR: 9.12E-01
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------
--------|
| SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH)
|
| AXX: 4.30 AYY: 2.27 AZZ: 2.27 RZZ: 1.88 RYY: 1.88
|
| SZZ: 5.46 SYY: 5.46
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------
--------|
| PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH)
|
| KL/R-Z: 63.83 KL/R-Y: 63.83 UNL: 30.0 CMZ: 0.60 CMY:
0.60 |
| CB: 1.00 FYLD: 36.00 FU: 58.00 NET SECTION FACTOR: 1.00
|
| CT: 0.75 STEEL TYPE: 0.0
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------
--------|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH)
|
| CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ
MY |
| TENSION 0.108 1 1.00E+01 - - -
- |

| COMPRESSION 0.136 2 1.00E+01 - - -

- |
| COMP&BEND 0.844 4 1.00E+01 - - 4.70E+01
4.48E+01 |
| TEN&BEND 0.815 3 1.00E+01 - - 4.70E+01
4.48E+01 |
| SHEAR-Y 0.063 3 - 1.96E+00 - -
- |
| SHEAR-Z 0.060 3 - - 1.87E+00 -
- |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------
---------|
17B.6.2 Example 2 - W-Section
This example is included as C:\SPROV8I\STAAD\EXAMP\NUCLEAR CODE

SAMPLES\N690_1984_W-SECTION.STD
Problem
A 12 ft long simply supported beam subject to uniform load (3 kip/ft). The beam is
a W6x12 section made from Grade 36 steel.
Solution
Section Properties:
A = 3.55 in.2
d = 6.03 in.
t = 0.230 in.
w
S = 7.31 in.3
z
Allowable Bending Stress:
F = 0.66·F = 0.66(36 ksi) = 23.76 ksi

bz y
Actual Bending Stress (include member selfweight in Y dir.):

z
f = 67.4 in·kip/7.31 in.3 = 9.22 ksi
bz
Stress Ratio = 9.22 ksi/ 23.76 ksi = 0.388 < 1.0, OK
Allowable Shear Stress:
864 — STAAD.Pro
F = 0.4·F = 0.4(36 ksi) = 14.40 ksi
v y
Actual Shear Stress:
V = 0.5(12 ft)(0.312 kip/ft) = 1.872 kip

z
f = 1.872 kip/(6.03 in. x 0.230 in.) = 1.35 ksi
vz
Stress Ratio = 1.35 ksi/ 14.40 ksi = 0.094 < 1.0, OK.
Comparison
Table 17B.3 - ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code Ver-

ification Problem 3
Condition Reference STAAD.Pro Difference
Bending 0.388 0.387 Negligible
Shear 0.094 0.094 None
Input File
STAAD SPACE
ENGINEER DATE 09-DEC-09
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT FEET KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 12 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 4.176E+006
POISSON 0.3

DENSITY 0.489024
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
1 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 2 PINNED
SELFWEIGHT Y -1 ALL
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -0.3
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES ALL
*UNIT KIP INCH
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
866 — STAAD.Pro
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 3 ALL
UNT 3 ALL
UNIT KIP INCH
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The TRACK 2 output for the final parameter set is shown here:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( AISC N690 1984)
v1.0
********************************************
ING/
FX MY MZ LOCA-
TION
=======================================================================
1 ST W6X12 (AISC SECTIONS)
PASS Q1.6-Eqn 2 0.387 1
0.00 T 0.00 -67.40 72.00
|---------------------------------------------------------------------
--------|
|
|
2.70E+01 |
| SHEAR: 1.44E+01
|
|
| AXIAL: 0.00E+00 FBZ: 9.20E+00 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 0.00E+00
|
|---------------------------------------------------------------------
--------|
|
|

| SZZ: 7.33 SYY: 1.50

|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------
---------|
|
| KL/R-Z: 57.71 KL/R-Y:156.64 UNL: 36.0 CMZ: 0.60 CMY:
0.60 |
|
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------
---------|
|
MY |
| TENSION 0.000 1 0.00E+00 - - -
- |
| COMPRESSION 0.000 1 0.00E+00 - - -
- |
| COMP&BEND 0.387 1 0.00E+00 - - 6.74E+01
0.00E+00 |
| TEN&BEND 0.000 1 0.00E+00 - - 6.74E+01
0.00E+00 |
| SHEAR-Y 0.094 1 - 1.87E+00 - -
- |
| SHEAR-Z 0.000 1 - - 0.00E+00 -
- |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------
---------|
868 — STAAD.Pro
Section 18
American Society of
Mechanical Engineers –
Nuclear Facility (ASME
NF) Codes

870 — STAAD.Pro
ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes
defined by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers – Nuclear Facility (ASME
NF) Code. The ASME NF-3000 1974 Code is used as the basis of this design.
From design point of view, there are no major differences between NF-3000 1974
and NF-3000 1977 version of codes.
18A.2 Design Process

The design process follows the following design checks
1. Slenderness
2. Tension
3. Compression
4. Bending Stress
5. Combined Interaction Check
6. Shear Stress
Each one of the checks are described in the following sections.
When a design is performed, the output file the reports the maximum utilization
from all of the checks.
18A.2.1 Slenderness
As per clause XVII-2223 of NF-3000 1974, the slenderness ratio KL/r of

compression members shall not exceed 200, and the slenderness ratio L/r of
tension members, preferably should not exceed 240 for main members and 300 for
lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default limit for TRUSS
members in Tension is set at 300.

ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes
18A.2.2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*F ), but not more
y
than (0.5*F ) on the Net area.
u
The Net Area (An) shall be determined in accordance with the clause XVII-2283 of
NF-3000 1974, and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
18A.2.3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns shall be as required by clause XVII-
2213 of NF-3000 1974.
a. Gross Sections of Columns:

<C,
c
Where:

c
3. When (Kl/r) > 120,
b. Member elements other than columns:
872 — STAAD.Pro
1. For Plate Girder Stiffeners, F = 0.60·F
a y
2. For webs of rolled shapes, F = 0.75·F
a y
The above clauses are applicable only when the width-thickness ratio of the
element satisfies all the sub-sections of clause XVII-2224 of NF-3000 1974.
If the above-mentioned clauses are not satisfied,
a. For un-stiffened compression element, a reduction factor, Q , is introduced.

s
Detailed values of Q for different shapes are given in the clause XVII-2225.2
s
of NF-3000 1974.
b. For stiffened compression element, a reduced effective width, b , is

e
introduced.
Consequently, a reduction factor, Q , equal to the effective area divided by

a
the actual area is introduced.
Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression
members containing stiffened or un-stiffened elements shall not exceed
Where:

ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes
18A.2.4 Bending Stress
given in XVII-2214 of NF-3000 1974 is:
a. Along Major Axis:
a. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibers of

compact hot rolled or built-up members symmetrical about and loaded in the
plane of their minor axes and meeting the requirements of Subsection NF
shall result in a maximum bending stress:
F = 0.66*F
b y
a. Width-thickness ratio of un-stiffened projecting elements of the compression

flange shall not exceed 52.2/√F .
y
b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression flange shall
not exceed 190/√F .
y
d/t = (412/√F )[1 – 2.33(F /F )]

y a y
except that it need not be less than 257/√F .
y
d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members
other than box-shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76b /√F nor
f y
20000/(d/A )F .
f y
b. For noncompact and slender elements, clause XVII-2214.2 and XVII-2214.5
of NF-3000 1974 are followed respectively.
c. For box-type flexural members, maximum bending stress is:
F = 0.60*F
b y
b. Along Minor Axis:
For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of XVII-

2214.1(a) and (b) of NF-3000 1974, maximum tensile and compressive bending
stress shall not exceed:
F = 0.75*F
b y
874 — STAAD.Pro
18A.2.5 Combined Interaction Check

proportioned to satisfy
and
when f /F > 0.15,

a a
otherwise

a a
Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and 0.6 - 0.4·(M1/M2), but not less than 0.4 for
no side-sway.
satisfy
18A.2.6 Shear Stress
Allowable shear stress on the gross section [ref. XVII-2263.2 of NF-3000 1974] is
calculated as
Where:

ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes
, when C < 0.8

v
, when C > 0.8

v
, when a/h < 1.0
, when a/h > 1.0
18A.3 Member Property Specification

For specification of member properties, the specified steel section available in
Steel Section Library of STAAD may be used namely – I-shaped section, Channel,
Tee, HSS Tube, HSS Pipe, Angle, Double Angle, Double Channel section.
Reference Manual.

value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, while in the real structure it
is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If
the allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0.
876 — STAAD.Pro
Table 18A.1 - ASME NF 3000 Design Parameters
Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as CODE NF3000

1974 or CODE NF3000 1977

Manual.
0 = Deflection check based on the

principle that maximum deflection
occurs within the span between
DJ1 and DJ2.
1 = Deflection check based on the

principle that maximum deflection
is of the cantilever type
CB 1.0 Bending coefficient dependent

upon moment gradient

accepted.

sidesway
CMZ
and
calculated
for no
sidesway

for
deflection
check)

of member

ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes

Name Value
for calculation of "Deflection

Length"

DMAX 45 inch Maximum allowable depth. Used

only with the MEMBER SELECTION
command.
DMIN 0.0 inch Minimum allowable depth. Used

only with the MEMBER SELECTION
command.

units.

current units.

is minor axis.

is major axis.

Length ratio for buckling about local Y axis.

Length (major).
NSF 1.0 Net Section Factor for tension

member.
PROFILE None Used in member selection. See

Section 5.48.1 of the Technical
Reference Manual for details.
878 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value

allowable stresses.
STIFF Member Spacing of stiffeners for plate

length or girder design
depth
whichever is
greater

main
member
300 for
“Truss”
member
TRACK 0.0 Controls the levels of detail to

which results are reported.
0. Minimum detail
2. Maximum detail

used only if flexural compression
on the bottom flange.

used only if flexural compression
on the top flange.
18A.5 Code Checking and Member Selection

Both code checking and member selection options are available with the ASME NF-
3000 1974 and ASME NF-3000 1977 codes.

ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes
18A.6 Example
A cantilever beam of length 30 inch is loaded at its free end with 5 kip compressive
load and 5 kip lateral load. The beam is assigned with W24X104 steel member and
is designed in accordance with ASME NF3000 1974.
The corresponding input of STAAD input editor file is shown as below:
STAAD SPACE
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT INCHES KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 30 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 29000
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
1 TABLE ST W24X104
880 — STAAD.Pro
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -5 FY -5
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PRINT SUPPORT REACTION
PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS
PRINT MEMBER FORCES
PARAMETER 1
CODE NF3000 1974
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 0.9 ALL
KZ 0.9 ALL
NSF 0.85 ALL
CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
The corresponding TRACK 2 output is as follows:

STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( ASME NF3000-74) v1.0
********************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST W24X104 (AISC SECTIONS)
PASS NF-74-EQN-21 0.032 1
5.00 C 0.00 150.00 0.00
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SLENDERNESS CHECK: ACTUAL RATIO: 9.28 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00 |

ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH) |

| AXIAL: 2.07E+01 FCZ: 2.38E+01 FCY: 2.70E+01 FTZ: 2.38E+01 FTY: 2.70E+01 |
| SHEAR: 1.44E+01 |
| ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH) |
| AXIAL: 1.63E-01 FBZ: 5.82E-01 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 4.16E-01 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH) |
| AXX: 30.60 AYY: 12.03 AZZ: 12.75 RZZ: 10.07 RYY: 2.91 |
| SZZ: 257.69 SYY: 40.63 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH) |
| KL/R-Z: 2.68 KL/R-Y: 9.28 UNL: 30.0 CMZ: 1.00 CMY: 1.00 |
| CB: 1.75 FYLD: 36.00 FU: 58.00 NET SECTION FACTOR: 0.85 |
| |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH) |
| CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY |
| TENSION 0.009 1 5.00E+00 - - - - |
| COMPRESSION 0.008 1 5.00E+00 - - - - |
| COMP&BEND 0.032 1 5.00E+00 - - 1.50E+02 0.00E+00 |
| TEN&BEND 0.000 1 5.00E+00 - - 1.50E+02 0.00E+00 |
| SHEAR-Y 0.029 1 - 5.00E+00 - - - |
| SHEAR-Z 0.000 1 - - 0.00E+00 - - |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
882 — STAAD.Pro
ASME NF 3000 - 1989 Code
18B.2 Design Process

The design process follows the following design checks.
1. Slenderness
2. Tension
3. Compression
4. Bending Stress
6. Shear Stress
18B.2.1 Slenderness
As per NF-3322.2(c), the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall not
exceed 200, and the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should
not exceed 240 for main members and 300 for lateral bracing members and other
secondary members. The default limit for TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
18B.2.2 Tension
y
than (0.5*F ) on the Effective Net area.
u

The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a),
n
(b) and (c), and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
The Effective Net Area (A ) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is
e
the member, shall be computed from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)),
A =C *A
e t n
The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section NF-

3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), (2) and (3).
18B.2.3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns, except those fabricated from
austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1). The allowable
compressive stress for columns fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as
required by NF-3322.1(c)(2). The allowable compressive stress for member
elements other than columns constructed by any material, including austenitic
stainless steel, shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(3).
a. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless

steel:

<C,
c
Where:

c
884 — STAAD.Pro
3. When (Kl/r) > 120,
b. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel:
1. When (Kl/r) ≤ 120,
2. When (Kl/r) > 120,
c. Member elements other than columns:

a y
a y
element satisfies all the sub-sections of NF-3322.2(d).

s
Detailed values of Q for different shapes are given in NF-3322.2(e)(2)(a) to
s
NF-3322.2(e)(2)(d).

e
introduced.


a
Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded

compression members containing stiffened or un-stiffened elements shall
not exceed
Where:
given in NF-3322.1(d) is:
1. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibres of

F = 0.66*F
b y
a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the compression

y
y
886 — STAAD.Pro
d/t = (640/√F )[1 – 3.74(f /F )] when f /F <=0.16
y a y a y
d/t = 257/√F when f /F > 0.16
y a y
d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other
than box-shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76b /√F nor
f y
20000/(d/A )F .
f y
2. For noncompact and slender elements, NF-3322.1(d)(5) and NF-
3322.1(d)(3) are followed respectively.
F = 0.60*F
b y
1. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF-

3322.1(d)(1)(a) and (b), maximum tensile and compressive bending stress
shall not exceed:
F = 0.75*F
b y
3322.1(d)(1)(a), except where b /2t exceeds 65/√F but is less than
f f y
95/√F , maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed:
y
F = F [1.075 – 0.005(b /2t )√F ]
b y f f y
18B.2.5 Combined Interaction Check

and
when f /F > 0.15,

a a
otherwise

a a
because this would result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the
coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and 0.6 - 0.4·(M1/M2), but not less
than 0.4 for no side-sway.
satisfy
18B.2.6 Shear Stress
Allowable shear stress on the gross section [ref. NF-3322.6(e)(2)] is calculated as
Where:
, when C < 0.8

v
, when C > 0.8

v
, when a/h < 1.0
, when a/h > 1.0
18B.3 Member Property Specification

For specification of member properties, the specified steel section available in Steel
Section Library of STAAD may be used namely – I-shaped section, Channel, Tee,
HSS Tube, HSS Pipe, Angle, Double Angle, Double Channel section.
888 — STAAD.Pro
Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility except for the
General and Prismatic member.
Reference Manual.

perform design and code checks. These parameter names, with their default values,
are listed in the following table.
for an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to
exactly model the physical structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value
in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, while in the real structure it may be 1.5. In
that case, the KZ value in the program can be changed to 1.5, as shown in the input
instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which
means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the allowable
stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0.
Table 18B.1 - ASME NF 3000 Design Parameters
Name
CODE - Must be specified as NF3000

1989.

0 = Deflection check based on

the principle that maximum
deflection occurs within the span
1 = Deflection check based on

the principle that maximum
deflection is of the cantilever

Name
type
CB 1.0 Bending coefficient dependent

upon moment gradient

accepted.
CT 0.75 Reduction Coefficient in

computing effective net area of
an axially loaded tension
member. [Refer NF-
3322.8(c)(1)(d)]

sidesway and
CMZ
calculated for
no sidesway

deflection
check)

Length"

DMAX 45 inch Maximum allowable depth, in

current units. Used only with the
MEMBER SELECTION command.
DMIN 0.0 inch Minimum allowable depth, in

current units. Used only with the
MEMBER SELECTION command.
890 — STAAD.Pro
Name
units.
FU 60 KSI Ultimate tensile strength of steel

in current units.
KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis. Usually,

this is minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis. Usually,

this is major axis.
LY Member Length Length to calculate slenderness

ratio for buckling about local Y
axis.
LZ Member Length Same as above except in z-axis

(major).
1.0 = suppress slenderness

check

member.
PROFILE None Used in member selection. See

Section 5.48.1 of the Technical
Reference Manual for details.

allowable stresses.
STIFF Member length Spacing of stiffeners for plate

or depth girder design
whichever is
greater
TMAIN 240 for main Slenderness limit under tension

Name
member
300 for “Truss”

member
TRACK 0.0 Controls the levels of detail to

which results are reported.
0 = Minimum detail
2 = Maximum detail
UNB Member Length Unsupported length of the

allowable bending compressive
stress. Will be used only if
flexural compression on the
bottom flange.
UNT Member Length Unsupported length of the top*

flange for calculating allowable
bending compressive stress. Will
be used only if flexural
compression on the top flange.

3000 1989 code.
892 — STAAD.Pro
18B.6 Example
A cantilever beam of length 100 inch is loaded at its free end with 5 kip
compressive load and a uniformly distributed load of 1 kip/inch over the whole
span. The beam is assigned with B571806 steel member and is designed in
accordance with ASME NF3000 1989.
STAAD SPACE
END JOB INFORMATION
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 360 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 29000
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
1 TABLE ST B571806
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1

JOINT LOAD
2 FX -5
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -1.0 0 100
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PRINT SUPPORT REACTION
PARAMETER 1
CODE NF3000 1989
STYPE 1 ALL
FYLD 36 ALL
KY 0.75 ALL
KZ 0.75 ALL
FU 58 ALL
NSF 0.9 ALL
CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

********************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST B571806 (AISC SECTIONS)
PASS SHEAR Y 0.770 1
5.00 C 0.00 5000.00 0.00
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SHEAR: 5.18E+00 |
| AXIAL: 1.06E-01 FBZ: 5.86E+00 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 3.99E+00 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
894 — STAAD.Pro
| SZZ: 853.77 SYY: 67.54 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CT: 0.75 STEEL TYPE: 1.0 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TENSION 0.005 1 5.00E+00 - - - - |
| COMPRESSION 0.009 1 5.00E+00 - - - - |
| COMP&BEND 0.290 1 5.00E+00 - - 5.00E+03 0.00E+00 |
| TEN&BEND 0.000 1 5.00E+00 - - 5.00E+03 0.00E+00 |
| SHEAR-Y 0.770 1 - 1.00E+02 - - - |
| SHEAR-Z 0.000 1 - - 0.00E+00 - - |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|

896 — STAAD.Pro
18C.2 Design Process

1. Slenderness
2. Tension
3. Compression
4. Bending Stress
6. Shear Stress
18C.2.1 Slenderness
18C.2.2 Tension
y
than (0.5*F ) on the Effective Net area.
u


n
e
the member, shall be computed from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)),
A =C *A
e t n

3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), (2) and (3).
18C.2.3 Compression
a. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless

steel:

<C,
c
Where:

c
898 — STAAD.Pro
3. When (Kl/r) > 120,
b. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel:
1. When (Kl/r) ≤ 120,
2. When (Kl/r) > 120,
c. Member elements other than columns:

a y
a y
element satisfies all the sub-sections of NF-3322.2(d).

s
Detailed values of Q for different shapes are given in NF-3322.2(e)(2)(a) to
s
NF-3322.2(e)(2)(d).
In the case for angles or plates projecting from compression members and for
projecting elements of compression flanges of girder,
When ,
When ,
Where:

when h/t > 70, otherwise, kc = 1.0.

e
introduced.
1. For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform

thickness:

a
Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded

compression members containing stiffened or un-stiffened elements shall
not exceed
Where:
18C.2.4 Bending Stress

900 — STAAD.Pro
F = 0.66*F
b y
a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the compression

y
y
d/t = (640/√F )[1 – 3.74(f /F )] when f /F <=0.16

y a y a y
d/t = 257/√F when f /F > 0.16
y a y
d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other
than box-shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76b /√F nor
f y
20000/(d/A )F .
f y
F = 0.60*F
b y

3322.1(d)(1)(a) and (b), maximum tensile and compressive bending stress
shall not exceed:
F = 0.75*F
b y
3322.1(d)(1)(a), except where b /2t exceeds 65/√F but is less than
f f y
95/√F , maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed:
y
F = F [1.075 – 0.005(b /2t )√F ]
b y f f y
18C.2.5 Combined Interaction Check

and
when f /F > 0.15,

a a
otherwise

a a
because this would result in a misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the
coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and 0.6 - 0.4·(M1/M2), but not less
than 0.4 for no side-sway.
satisfy
18C.2.6 Shear Stress
Where:
, when C < 0.8

v
, when C > 0.8

v
, when a/h < 1.0
902 — STAAD.Pro
, when a/h > 1.0
depth and the web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as
the total flange areas.
18C.3 Member Property Specification

Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility except for the
General and Prismatic member.
Reference Manual.

perform design and code checks. These parameter names, with their default values,
are listed in the following table.
for an analysis, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to
exactly model the physical structure. For example, by default the KZ value (k value
in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, while in the real structure it may be 1.5. In
that case, the KZ value in the program can be changed to 1.5, as shown in the input
instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which
means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the allowable
stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0.
Table 18C.1 - ASME NF 3000 1998 Design Parameters
Name
CODE - Must be specified as NF3000

1998.


Name
CAN 0 Used for Deflection Check

only.
0 = Deflection check based

maximum deflection occurs
within the span between
DJ1 and DJ2.
1 = Deflection check based

maximum deflection is of the
cantilever type
CB 1.0 Bending coefficient

dependent upon moment
gradient
Any other user-defined

value is accepted.
CMY 0.85 for sidesway Cm value in local y & z axes

and calculated for
CMZ
no sidesway
CT 0.75 Reduction Coefficient in

computing effective net area
of an axially loaded tension
member. [Refer NF-
3322.8(c)(1)(d)]

(Mandatory for Maximum allowable local
DJ1 Start Joint Joint No. denoting starting

of member point for calculation of
"Deflection Length"
904 — STAAD.Pro
Name
DJ2 End Joint of Joint No. denoting end point

member for calculation of "Deflection
Length"
DMAX 45 inch Maximum allowable depth,

in current units. Used only
with the MEMBER
SELECTION command.
DMIN 0.0 inch Minimum allowable depth,

in current units. Used only
with the MEMBER
SELECTION command.
FYLD 36 KSI Yield strength of steel in

current units.
FU 60 KSI Ultimate tensile strength of

steel in current units.

Usually, this is minor axis.

Usually, this is major axis.
LY Member Length Length to calculate

slenderness ratio for
buckling about local Y axis.
LZ Member Length Same as above except in z-

axis (major).
1.0 = suppress slenderness

check
NSF 1.0 Net Section Factor for

tension member.
PROFILE None Used in member selection.


Name
See Section 5.48.1 of the

Technical Reference Manual
for details.
STIFF Member length or Spacing of stiffeners for

depth whichever is plate girder design
greater
1.0 = Austenitic Stainless

Steel
TMAIN 240 for main Slenderness limit under

member tension
300 for “Truss”

member
TRACK 0.0 Controls the levels of detail

to which results are
reported.
0 = Minimum detail
2 = Maximum detail

actual to allowable stresses.
UNB Member Length Unsupported length of the

bottom* flange for
bending compressive stress.
Will be used only if flexural
compression on the bottom
flange.
UNT Member Length Unsupported length of the

906 — STAAD.Pro
Name
allowable bending
compressive stress. Will be
used only if flexural
compression on the top
flange.
Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units.
2. The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION
command.
18C.5 Code Checking and Member Selection

3000 1998 code.
18C.6 Example
STAAD SPACE
END JOB INFORMATION

UNIT INCHES KIP

JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 100 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 29000
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
1 TABLE ST B571806
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -5
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -1.0 0 100
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER 1
CODE NF3000 1998
STYPE 1 ALL
FYLD 36 ALL
KY 0.75 ALL
908 — STAAD.Pro
KZ 0.75 ALL
FU 58 ALL
NSF 0.9 ALL
CT 0.85 ALL
CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

********************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
PASS SHEAR Y 0.635 1
5.00 C 0.00 5000.00 0.00
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SHEAR: 6.28E+00 |
| AXIAL: 1.06E-01 FBZ: 5.86E+00 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 3.99E+00 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SZZ: 853.77 SYY: 67.54 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CT: 0.85 STEEL TYPE: 1.0 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TENSION 0.005 1 5.00E+00 - - - - |
| COMPRESSION 0.009 1 5.00E+00 - - - - |
| COMP&BEND 0.272 1 5.00E+00 - - 5.00E+03 0.00E+00 |
| TEN&BEND 0.000 1 5.00E+00 - - 5.00E+03 0.00E+00 |
| SHEAR-Y 0.635 1 - 1.00E+02 - - - |
| SHEAR-Z 0.000 1 - - 0.00E+00 - - |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|


For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses
as defined by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers – Nuclear Facility
(ASME NF) Code. The ASME NF-3000 2004 Code is used as the basis of this
design.
Note: This feature requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) NRC (build

20.07.07.30) or higher.
18D.2 Design Process

1. Slenderness
2. Tension
3. Compression
4. Bending Stress
6. Shear Stress
Each one of the checks is described in the following sections.
18D.2.1 Slenderness
910 — STAAD.Pro
18D.2.2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60·F ), but not more
y
than (0.5·F ) on the Effective Net area.
u
n
e
transmitted by bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the
member, shall be computed from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)),
A =C ·A
e t n

3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), (2) and (3).
18D.2.3 Compression
A. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless

steel:
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) ≤

C,
c
F = [1 - (Kl/r)2/(2·C 2)]F / {5/3 + [3(Kl/r)/(8·C )] -
a c y c
[(Kl/r)3/(8·C 3)]}
c
(Eq. A1)
Where:

C = [(2·π2E)/F ] 1/2
c y
c
F = 12·π E/[23(kL/r)2]
2
a
(Eq. A2)
3. When (Kl/r) > 120,
F = F [(Eq.A1) or (Eq. A2)]/{1.6 - [l/(200r)]}

as a
B. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel:
1. When (Kl/r) ≤ 120,
F = F [0.47 - (Kl/r)/444]
a y
2. When (Kl/r) > 120,
F = F [0.40 - (Kl/r)/600]
a y
C. Member elements other than columns:
1. For Plate Girder Stiffeners,
F = 0.60·F
a y
2. For webs of rolled shapes,
F = 0.75·F
a y
element satisfies all the sub-sections of NF-3322.2(d)..
a. For un-stiffened compression element,
A reduction factor Q is introduced. Detailed values of Q for different shapes

s s
are given in NF-3322.2(e)(2)(a) to NF-3322.2(e)(2)(d).
In the case for angles or plates projecting from compression members and
for projecting elements of compression flanges of girder,
When 95/(F /kc)1/2 < b/t < 195/(F /kc)1/2, Q = 1.293 -

y y s
0.00309·(b/t)·(F /kc)1/2
y
When b/t > 195/(F /kc)1/2, Q = 26,200·kc/[F (b/t)2)]
y s y
912 — STAAD.Pro
Where:
kc = 4.05/[(h/t)0.46] if h/t > 70, otherwise kc = 1.0.
b. For stiffened compression element,
A reduced effective width b is introduced.

e
1. For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform
thickness:
b = 253·t/√(f){1 - 50.3/[(b/t)√(f)]} ≤ b
e
b = 253·t/√(f){1 - 44.3/[(b/t)√(f)]} ≤ b
e
Consequently, a reduction factor Q is introduced and is equal to the
a
effective area divided by the actual area. Combining both these factors,
allowable stress for axially loaded compression members containing stiffened
or unstiffened elements shall not exceed
F = Q Q [1 - (Kl/r)2/(2·C 2)]F / {5/3 + [3(Kl/r)/(8·C )] -

a s a c y c
[(Kl/r)3/(8·C 3)]}
c
Where:
C' = [(2·π2E)/(Q Q F )] 1/2

c s a y
18D.2.4 Bending Stress
A. Along Major Axis:

compact hot rolled or built-up members symmetrical about and loaded
in the plane of their minor axes and meeting the requirements of
Subsection NF shall result in a maximum bending stress:
F = 0.66·F
b y

a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the

compression flange shall not exceed 65/√F .
y
b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression
y
d/t = (640/√F )[1 – 3.74(f /F )] when f /F ≤ 0.16

y a y a y
d/t = 257/√F when f /F > 0.16
y a y
d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of
members other than box-shaped members shall not exceed the
value of 76b /√F nor 20000/(d/A )F .
f y f y
F = 0.75·F
b y
B. Along Minor Axis:

of NF-3322.1(d)(1)(a) and (b), maximum tensile and compressive
bending stress shall not exceed:
F = 0.75·F
b y
of NF-3322.1(d)(1)(a), except where b /2t > 65/√F but is less than
f f y
95/√F , maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not
y
exceed:
F = F [1.075 – 0.005(b /2t )√F ]

b y f f y
18D.2.5 Combined Interaction Check

914 — STAAD.Pro
and
when f /F > 0.15,

a a
otherwise

a a
Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and 0.6 - 0.4·(M1/M2), but not less than 0.4 for
no side-sway.
satisfy
18D.2.6 Shear Stress
Where:
, when C < 0.8

v
, when C > 0.8

v
, when a/h < 1.0
, when a/h > 1.0

18D.3 Member Property Specification

Reference Manual.

value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, while in the real structure it
is set to 0.0, which means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If
the allowable stresses are to be printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0.
Table 18C.2 - ASME NF 3000 2004 Design Parameters
Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as NF3000 2004
Specified design code is followed for

code checking purpose.
916 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
Reference Manual.

moment gradient

accepted.

sidesway
CMZ
and cal-
culated for
no side-
sway
CT 0.75 Reduction Coefficient in computing

effective net area of an axially loaded
tension member. [Refer NF-
3322.8(c)(1)(d)]
DFF None "Deflection Length" / Maximum allow-

able local deflection
(Mandatory
for
deflection
check)

of the calculation of "Deflection Length"
member
DJ2 End Joint Joint No. denoting end point for cal-
of the culation of "Deflection Length"
member


Name Value

units.

current units.
KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is

minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is

major axis.
LY Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio

Length for buckling about local Y axis.

Length (major).

member.

allowable stresses.

length or design
depth
whichever
is greater

0. Minimum detail
918 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
2. Maximum detail

Length flange for calculating allowable bend-
ing compressive stress. Will be used
only if flexural compression on the
bottom flange.

Length flange for calculating allowable bend-
ing compressive stress. Will be used
only if flexural compression on the
top flange.
Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units.
2. The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION
command.
18D.5 Code Checking and Member Selection

3000 2004 code.
18D.6 Example

STAAD SPACE
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT INCHES KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 100 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 29000
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
1 TABLE ST B571806
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -5
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -1.0 0 100
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER 1
920 — STAAD.Pro
CODE NF3000 2004
STYPE 1 ALL
FYLD 36 ALL
KY 0.75 ALL
KZ 0.75 ALL
FU 58 ALL
NSF 0.9 ALL
CT 0.85 ALL
CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( ASME NF3000-04)
v1.0
********************************************
ING/
FX MY MZ LOCA-
TION
=======================================================================
PASS NF-3322.1(b) 0.635 1
5.00 C 0.00 5000.00 0.00
|---------------------------------------------------------------------
--------|
|
|
2.31E+01 |
| SHEAR: 6.28E+00
|
|
| AXIAL: 1.06E-01 FBZ: 5.86E+00 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 3.99E+00
|

|--------------------------------------------------------------------
---------|
|
|
| SZZ: 853.77 SYY: 67.54
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------
---------|
|
| KL/R-Z: 3.29 KL/R-Y: 20.85 UNL: 100.0 CMZ: 1.00 CMY:
1.00 |
|
|
|--------------------------------------------------------------------
---------|
|
MY |
| TENSION 0.005 1 5.00E+00 - - -
- |
| COMPRESSION 0.009 1 5.00E+00 - - -
- |
| COMP&BEND 0.272 1 5.00E+00 - - 5.00E+03
0.00E+00 |
| TEN&BEND 0.000 1 5.00E+00 - - 5.00E+03
0.00E+00 |
| SHEAR-Y 0.635 1 - 1.00E+02 - -
- |
| SHEAR-Z 0.000 1 - - 0.00E+00 -
- |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------
---------|
922 — STAAD.Pro
Section 19
Norwegian Codes

924 — STAAD.Pro
Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NS 3472 /
NPD
19A.1 - General Notes
This user manual presents a description of the design basis, parameters and theory
applied to STAAD.Pro for performing code checks according to NS 3472 ref. [1]
and NPD ref. [5]. The code checks include:
l stability check (buckling)

l lateral buckling check
l yield check (von Mises)
l stability check including local plate buckling of un-stiffened pipe walls accord-
ing to NPD
The code check is available for the following cross-section types:
l wide flange profiles (HEA, HEB, IPE etc.)

l pipe (OD xx ID xx)
l tube (RHS, HUP)
l channel
l angle type (only RA)
l rectangular massive box (prismatic)
l user table (wide flange, I-sections, tapered I, tube, channel and RA angle)
The code check is not available for the following cross-section types:
l Double angles
l Tapered tubes
l Prismatic sections with too few section parameters defined
l Other sections that are not in the ‘available’ list above
Please note the following:
l NS 3472 and NPD code checking covered in this document are available
through two separate STAAD.Pro Code check packages.

Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NS 3472 / NPD
l This document is not a lecture in use of NS 3472 or NPD. This document

explains how, and which parts of, the Norwegian steel codes that have been
l When L-sections are used, the Code Check requires RA angle definition.
l Weld design is not included in the Norwegian code checks.
l The prismatic section defined in the code check (rectangular massive box) is
not identical to the general prismatic profile defined in the STAAD.Pro anal-
ysis package.
EDR does not accept any liability for loss or damage from or in consequence for
use of the program.
Nomenclature
NS - refers to NS 3472 ref. [1]
NS2 - refers to NS 3472 ref. [6]
NPD - refers to NPD94 ref. [5]
References
1. NS 3472 3.utg. 2001
Prosjektering av stålkonstruksjoner
Beregning og dimensjonering
2. STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual, Release 2002
3. NS 3472 1.utg. 1973
4. Roark &Young`s 5th edition
5. NPD utg. 1994
Veiledning om utforming, beregning og dimensjonering av

stålkonstruksjoner. Sist
endret 1. oktober 1993.
926 — STAAD.Pro
6. NS 3472 2.utg.1984
19A.2 - Basis for Code Checking
19A.2.1 General
This section presents general information regarding the implementation of the

Norwegian codes of practice for structural steel design. This manual describes the
procedures and theory used for both NS and NPD.
In general NS is used for all cross sections and shapes listed in section 1 of this
manual. An exception is the treatment and check of pipe members in framed
structures. NS does not give specific details about the treatment of pipes. Section
3.4 explains how this is adopted when NS is selected for code checking.
The NPD however have a more thorough check of pipe members, and consider the
effect of local buckling of the pipe wall in conjunction with the stability check. In
addition, the NPD code gives joint capacity formulae for brace to chord connections
for pipe members.
The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of
elastic analysis and ultimate limit state design. Two major failure modes are
recognized:
l failure by overstressing
l failure by stability considerations
The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach.
characteristic stresses or capacities and the most economic section is selected on
the basis of the least weight criteria. It is generally assumed that the user will take
care of the detailing requirements like the provision of stiffeners and check the local
effects like flange buckling, web crippling, etc.
the parameters listed in Table 2.1. Default values of parameters will yield
reasonable results in most circumstances. However, the user should control the
design and verify results through the use of the design parameters.

19A.2.2 Calculation of Forces and Bending Moments
Analysis is done for the primary loading conditions and combinations provided by
the user. The user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading
specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary load
combinations.
19A.2.3 Members with Axial Forces
For tension only members, axial tension capacity is checked for the ultimate limit
stress. For compression members, axial compression capacity is checked in
addition to lateral buckling and ultimate limit stress. The largest slenderness ratio
(λ) shall not be greater than 250 according to NS 11.7 Stability is checked as per
the procedure of NS 12.3. The buckling curves of NS fig. 3 have been incorporated
into the STAAD.Pro code check. The coefficient α (as per NS Table 10) can be
specified in both directions through the use of parameters CY and CZ. In the
absence of parameters CY and /or CZ, default a- value will be according to NS
table 11.
19A.2.4 Members with Axial Force and Bending Moments
For compression members with bending, interaction formulae of NS table 12.3.4.2

are checked for appropriate loading situation. All compression capacities are
calculated per the procedure of NS 12.3.
The equivalent moment factor β is calculated using the procedure of NS table 12.
Two different approaches are used depending upon whether the members can
sway or not. Conditions for sidesway and transverse loading can be specified
through the use of parameters SSY and SSZ. For members that cannot sway,
without transverse loading, coefficients b are calculated and proper dimensioning
moments are used in the interaction formulae.
19A.2.5 Lateral Buckling
Lateral torsional buckling is checked as per the procedure of NS 12.3.4. The

procedure for calculation of ideal buckling moment for sections with two axis of
symmetry has been implemented. The coefficient can be provided by the user
through the use of parameter CB. In the absence of CB, a value of 1.0 will be used.
928 — STAAD.Pro
Torsional properties for cross sections (torsional constant and warping constant)
are calculated using formulae from NS 3472. This results in slightly conservative
estimates of torsional parameters. The program will automatically select the
maximum moment in cases where M is less than M .
vd zd
19A.2.6 Von Mises Yield Criterion
Combined effect of axial, bending, horizontal/vertical shear and torsional shear

stress is calculated at 13 sections on a member and up to 9 critical points at a
section. The worst stress value is checked against yield stress divided by
appropriate material factor. The von Mises calculates as:
19A.2.7 Material Factor and nominal stresses
The design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic material strength
by the material factor.
NS 3472
The material factor default value is 1.10. Other values may be input with the MF
parameter. The nominal stresses should satisfy
NPD
The general requirement is according to NPD 3.1.1. For stability the NPD 3.1.1 and
3.1.3 requires that the structural coefficient is considered.
Where:

S = reference stress or load effect resultant

d
f = characteristic capacity
k
f = design capacity
kd
γ = material coefficient
m
γ = structural coefficient
mk
γ is default set to 1.10.
m
γ shall be equal to 1.0 for frames. For pipe members γ is a function of the
mk mk
reduced slenderness. In the STAAD.Pro implemented NPD code this is calculated
automatically.
19A.2.8 Code checking according to NPD
The following parts of Chapter 3 in the NPD guidelines have been implemented.
a. Control of nominal stresses. (NPD 3.1.2).

b. Buckling of pipe members in braced frames, including interaction with local
shell buckling (NPD 3.2.2, 3.2.3).
c. Buckling of un-stiffened closed cylindrical shells, including interaction with
overall column buckling (NPD 3.4.4, 3.4.6, 3.4.7 and 3.4.9).
d. Joint capacity check for gap as well as for overlap joints (NPD 3.5.2).
Check b) provides the unity check based on the beam-column buckling interaction
formulae in NPD 3.2.2. The interaction between global and local buckling due to
axial load and hydrostatic pressure is accounted for through computation of an
axial characteristic capacity to replace the yield stress inn the beam-column
buckling formulae.
Note: Check b) handles members subjected to axial loads, bending moments

and hydrostatic pressure. In other words, check b) assumes that stresses
resulting from shear and torsion are of minor importance, e.g., in jacket
braces.
Check c) provides the unity check based on the stability requirement for un-
stiffened cylindrical shells subjected to axial compression or tension, bending,
circumferential compression or tension, torsion or shear. The unity check refers to
930 — STAAD.Pro
the interaction formulae in NPD 3.4.4.1. The stability requirement is given in NPD
3.4.7.
19A.2.9 Aluminum Check
STAAD.Pro performs a stability check on aluminum alloys according to buckling

curve in ECCS (European recommendation for aluminum ally structures 1978). It is
possible to select heat-treated or non heat-treated alloy from the parameter list in
the STAAD.Pro input file.
For heat-treated use CY = CZ = 0.1590, and for non heat-treated use CY = CZ =

0.2420.
Tracks 1.0 and 9.0 print buckling curve H for heat-treated, and buckling curve N for
non neat-treated. The yield check is the same as for steel.

Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the program. They are
set to default values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular
structure.
Table 19A.1 - Design Parameters for Norwegian Steel design code
Parameter Default Description Reference
Name Value
CODE none Must be secified as either

NS3472 for NS or NPD for
NPD (NOR may also be used
for both).

BEAM 0.0 Parameter BEAM 1.0 ALL Sec. NS

tells the program to calculate 12.2.2
von Mises at 13 sections
along each member, and up
to 8 points at each section.
(Depending on what kind of
shape is used.)


Name Value
Note: Must be set to 1.0
BY 1.0 Buckling length coefficient, β Fig. NS 3

for weak axis buckling (y-y) Sec. NS
(NOTE: BY > 0.0) 12.3
BZ 1.0 Buckling length coefficient, Fig. NS 3

β, for strong axis buckling Sec. NS
(z-z) (NOTE: BZ > 0.0) 12.3
CB 1.0 Lateral buckling coefficient, Sec. NS2

Y. Used to calculate the ideal A5.5.2
buckling moments, M Fig. NS2
vi
A5.5.2a)-
e)
CMY 1.0 Water depth in meters for Valid for

hydrostatic pressure cal- the NPD
culation for pipe members code only
CMZ 0.49 α for sections in con- Sec. NS

LT
nection with lateral buckling 12.3.4 Fig.
NS 6.
CY Default Buckling curve coefficient, a Fig. NS 3

see NS about local z-axis (strong Sec. NS
CZ
3472 axis). Represent the a, a0, b, 12.2 NS
c, d curve. Table 11
DMAX 100.0 Maximum allowable depth of

[cm] steel section.
DMIN 0.0 [cm] Minimum allowable depth of

steel section.
FYLD 235 Yield strength of steel, fy Tab. NS 3

(St37) [N/mm2 ]
MF 1.1 Material factor / Resistance Sec. NS

(NS3472) factor, γ 10.4.2
m
932 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
1.15 Sec. NPD

(NPD) 3.1
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the Sec. NS

actual to allowable stresses. 12.3.4.2
SSY 0.0 0.0 = No sidesway. β cal- Sec. NS

culated. > 0.0 = Sidesway in 12.3.4
local y-axis weak axis Tab. NS
β =SSY 12 Sec.
M
NPD
3.2.1.4
SSZ 0.0 0.0 = No sidesway. β cal- Sec. NS

culated. > 0.0 = Sidesway in 12.3.4
local y-axis weak axis β Tab. NS
M
12 Sec
NPD
3.2.1.4
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Supress critical

member stresses. 1.0 = Print
all critical member stresses,
i.e., DESIGN VALUES 2.0 =
Print von Mises stresses. 9.0
= Large output, 1 page for
each member. See section 7
and Appendix A for complete
list of available TRACKs and
print examples.
UNL Member Effective length for lateral Sec. NS

length buckling calculations (spec- 12.3
ify buckling length). Dis-
tance between fork supports
or between effective side sup-
ports for the beam

The parameter CMY will, when given with negative value, define an inside pressure
in pipe members. The pressure corresponds to given water depth in meters.
The parameter CB defines the φ value with respect to calculation of the ideal lateral
buckling moment for single symmetric wide flange profiles, ref. NS app. 5.2.2.
Example
Note: This is a partial example containing only the information pertaining to

the Norwegian steel design code; used at the end of the input file.
* CODE CHECK ACCORDING TO NS3472

PARAMETERS
CODE NS3472
BEAM 1.0 ALL
FYLD 340 ALL
MF 1.10 ALL
CY 0.49 MEMB 1
CZ 0.49 MEMB 1
BY 0.9 MEMB 1
BZ 0.7 MEMB 1
SSY 1.1 MEMB 1
SSZ 1.3 MEMB 1
CB 0.9 MEMB 1
RATIO 1.0 ALL
TRACK 9.0 ALL
UNIT KNS METER
LOAD LIST 1
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
FINISH
934 — STAAD.Pro
19A.4 - Stability Check According to NS 3472
19A.4.1 General Description
The stability check is based on the assumption that both ends of the member are
structural nodes. Buckling lengths and results for member with joints between the
structural nodes have to be evaluated in each separate case.
Effects from local buckling or external hydrostatic pressure on pipes and tubes are
not included.
The general stability criteria is: (ref. NS 12.3)
Buckling
n +k ×m +k ×m ≤1
max z z y y
Lateral Buckling
i = z,y

19A.4.2 Determination of β and β

z y
The equivalent moment factor β (for z and y) is calculated dependant on moment
distributions as shown in the following table:
936 — STAAD.Pro
Table 19A.2 - β for different moment distributions
Moment diagram β (β )
M LT
β = 1.8 - 0.7ψ
Mψ
β = 1.3
M0
β = 1.4
M0
The user can override the calculated factor with the following parameters:
β =SSY
y
β =SSZ
z
19A.4.3 Lateral buckling
The Ideal lateral buckling moment is calculated according to NS2 A5.5.2

concern double symmetric cross sections where y is given in NS fig. A5.5.2, (input
parameter CB), L = member length for lateral buckling (input parameter UNL), Cw
and Ix , see section 5.
For single symmetric cross sections, the ideal lateral buckling moment is
Where:
α = distance from profile CoG to point where the load is acting,

assumed to be on top flange.
The φ parameter (ref NS fig. A5.5.2.g) is controlled by the input parameter CB.
Fig A - ψ-koeffisienter for enkel bjelke
938 — STAAD.Pro
Fig B - ψ-koeffisienter for delvis innspent bjelke

Fig B - ψ-koeffisienter for tilnærmet fulltinnspente bjelke
940 — STAAD.Pro
Fig B - ψ-koeffisienter for utraget bjelke med enkel last og fordelt last. Stiplede
kurver gjelder last på overflens.
19A.4.4 Stability check of pipe members
The stability criteria applied for members with pipe cross section is:
Where:
and are given in NS 5.4.2.
For the print output option TRACK 9.0 K ≡ 1.0 and M ≡M

E vd d

19A.4.5 Angle profiles type RA (reverse angle)
The axial contribution to the total interaction ratio is checked according to the
modified EECS-method, see NS A5.4.
The stability criterion is:
Where:
N and N are found from NS 3472 fig. 5.4.la C-curve for y- and z-
kyd kzd
axis, respectively.
Possible lateral buckling effects and torsional buckling (NS A5.4.5) is not included
in the code check. This has to be evaluated by the user separately.
942 — STAAD.Pro
19A.4.6 Stability check of members with tapered section
Stability of members with tapered cross section is calculated as described in section

3.1. The cross section properties used in the formulae are calculated based on the
average profile height. (i.e., I , I values are taken from the middle of the member.)
z y
19A.4.7 Lateral buckling for tension members
When compressive stress caused by large bending moment about strong axis is
greater than tension stress from axial tension force, lateral buckling is considered
as defined below.
σ = N/A (+ tension, - compression)

a
σ = ± M /W
bz z z
M = | σ + σ | W for σ + σ < 0 (compression)
warp a b z a b
IR = M /M +M /M ≤ 1.0
warp vd y,max yd
19A.5 - Stability Check According to NPD
19A.5.1 Buckling of pipe members
Tubular beam-columns subjected to compression and lateral loading or end

moments shall be designed in accordance with NPD 3.2.2
Where:
σ = N/A = axial compressive stress

c
ν = structural coefficient
mk
B = bending amplification factor = 1/ (1 - μ), B is taken as the larger of
B and B
z y
B = bending amplification factor about the Z-axis
z
B = bending amplification factor about the Y-axis
y

l = kl
k
k = effective length factor
f = characteristic buckling capacity according to NS fig. 5.4.1a, curve

k
A.
19A.5.1.1 Interaction with local buckling, NPD 3.2.3
If the below conditions are not satisfied, the yield strength will be replaced with
characteristic buckling stress given in NPD 3.4.
a. members subjected to axial compression and external pressure
b. members subjected to axial compression only
19A.5.2 Calculation of buckling resistance of cylinders
The characteristic buckling resistance is defined in accordance with NPD 3.4.4
944 — STAAD.Pro
Where:
σ = design axial stress in the shell due to axial forces (tension positive)
a
σ = design bending stress in the shell due to global bending moment
b
(tension
positive)
σ = σ = design circumferential stress in the shell due to external

p Θ
pressure (tension positive)
τ = design shear stress in the shell due to torsional moments and shear
S
force.
f , f , f and f are the elastic buckling resistances of curved panels

ea eb ep eι
or circular cylindrical shells subjected to axial compression forces,
global bending moments, lateral pressure, and torsional moments
and/or shear forces respectively.

19A.5.3 Elastic buckling resistance for un-stiffened, closed cyl-

inders
The elastic buckling resistance for un-stiffened closed cylinders according to NPD
3.4.6 is:
where k is a buckling coefficient dependent on loading condition, aspect ratio,

curvature, boundary conditions, and geometrical imperfections. The buckling
coefficient is:
The values of ψ, ζ and p are given in Table 4.1 for the most important loading
cases.
Table 19A.3 - Table 4.1 Buckling coefficients for un-stiffened cylin-
drical shells
ψ ζ p
Axial stress 1 0.702 Z
Bending 1 0.702 Z
Torsion and shear force 5.34 0.856 Z0.75 0.6
Lateral pressure 4 1.04 Z0.5 0.6
Hyrdostatic pressure 2 1.04 Z0.5 0.6
The curvature parameter is defined by
946 — STAAD.Pro
For long shells the elastic buckling resistance against shear stresses is independent
of shell length. For cases with , the elastic buckling resistance may be
taken as:
19A.5.4 Stability requirements
The stability requirement for curved panels and un-stiffened cylindrical shells
subjected to axial compression or tension, bending, circumferential compression or
tension, torsion or shear is given by NPD 3.4.7:
σ <f
j kd
where the design buckling resistance is
19A.5.5 Column buckling, NPD 3.4.9
For long cylindrical shells it is possible that interaction between shell buckling and
overall column buckling may occur because second-order effects of axial
compression alter the stress distribution as compared to that calculated from linear
theory. It is necessary to take this effect into account in the shell buckling analysis
when the reduced slenderness of the cylinder as a column exceeds 0,2 according to
NPD 3.4.4.1.
σ shall be increased by an additional compressive stress which may be taken as:

b
Where:

λ = slenderness of the cylinder as a column.
B, σ ,σ and μ are calculated in accordance with NPD 3.2.2.

a b
19A.6 - Yield Check

The yield check is performed at member ends and at 11 equally spaced
intermediate sections along the member length.
At each section the following forces are applied:
F max. axial force along member

x
F actual shear in local y-direction at section
y
F actual shear in local z-direction at section
z
M max. torsional moment along member
x
M actual bending about local y-axis at section
y
M actual bending about local z-axis at section
z
For all profiles other than angle sections absolute values of the stresses are used.
For
double symmetric profiles there will always be one stresspoint.
The stresses are calculated in several stress points at each member section. At each
stress
point the von Mises stress is checked as follows:
948 — STAAD.Pro
Where:
σ =|σ +σ +σ |
tot x by bz
σ stress from hydrostatic pressure.
p
19A.6.1 Double symmetric wide flange profile
The von Mises stress is checked at 4 stress points as shown in figure below.
Section Properties
A , I , I and I are taken from STAAD.Pro database

x x y z
A = h × s Applied in STAAD.Pro print option PRINT MEMBER
y
STRESSES
A and A are not used in the code check

y z

ref. NS app. C3
T = dA × z
y
T = dA × y
z
General Stress calculation
Stress calculation at selected stress points
In general wide flange profiles are not suitable for large torsional moments. The
reported torsional stresses are indicative only. For members with major torsional
stresses a separate evaluation has to be carried out. Actual torsional stress
distribution is largely dependent on surface curvature at stress point and warping
resistance.
950 — STAAD.Pro
19A.6.2 Single symmetric wide flange profile and tapered section
The von Mises stress is checked at 9 stress points as shown in figure below.
Section properties
A , I , I and I are taken from STAAD.Pro database, except for

x x y z
tapered sections where these values are calculated for each section
checked. (i.e., Iz, Iy values are taken from the middle of the member.)
A = h × s Applied in STAAD.Pro print option PRINT MEMBER

y
STRESSES
A and A are not used in the code check

y z
ref. NS app. C3

T = dA × z
y
T = dA × y
z
General Stress calculation
952 — STAAD.Pro
In general wide flange profiles are not suitable for large torsional moments. The
reported torsional stresses are indicative only. For members with major torsional
stresses a separate evaluation has to be carried out. Actual torsional stress
distribution is largely dependent on surface curvature at stress point and warping
resistance.
19A.6.3 Pipe profile
The von Mises stress is checked in 3 stress points as shown in figure below.
Section properties
d = D - 2t
r = 0.5 ( D-t )

a = tan-1 M /M
z y
Ax = π/4 (D2 - d2)
A = A = 0.5A
y z x
I = 2I =π/32 (D4 - d4)
x z
I = I = π/64 (D4 - d4)
y z
Note: In the STAAD.Pro analysis package slightly different values

are used for A , A and I , however this has insignificant influence
y z x
on the force distribution.
A = A = 0.6A
Y z x
I = 2πR3t
x
19A.6.4 Tube profile
Tube sections are rectangular or quadratic hollow uniform profiles. Critical stress
is checked at 5 locations as shown in figure below.
954 — STAAD.Pro
Section Properties

The general stress formulation is given in sec. 5.2.
19A.6.5 Channel profile
For channel profiles the von Mises stress is checked at 6 locations as shown in the
figure below.
956 — STAAD.Pro
Cross section properties
Stress calculations at selected stress points
958 — STAAD.Pro
The general stress formulation is given in sec. 5.2.f
19A.6.6 Angle profile type RA (reverse angle)
For angle profiles the von Mises check is checked at 8 stress points as shown in
figure below.
Axes y and z are principal axes.
Axes u and w are local axes.

Cross section properties
Section forces
The section forces from the STAAD.Pro analysis are about the principle axis y and
z.
The second moment of area (Ty L TZ):
T =AZ
y
T =AY
z
960 — STAAD.Pro
An additional torsional moment is calculated based on:
M = F Z4
T y
M = F Y4
T z
This torsion moment is included in M if F and F exist.
x y Z
Beta-rotation of equal & unequal legged angles
Note: The order of the joint numbers in the member incidence command
specifies the direction of the local x-axis.

962 — STAAD.Pro
19A.6.7 Rectangular massive box (prismatic)
Code check of the general purpose prismatic cross section defined in the
STAAD.Pro analysis package is not available. The prismatic section is assumed to
be a rectangular massive box and the von Mises stress is checked at 3 locations as
shown in figure below.
Note: Note that ‘b’ may not be much greater than ‘h’. If that is the case, define
the member with h > b and Beta angle 90° instead.
Section Properties

General Stress Calculation
ref. [4] tab. 20, case 4 at midpoint the largest side i.e., point 2
19A.7 - Tubular Joint Check, NPD 3.5

For pipe members, punching shear capacity is checked in accordance with the NPD
sections 3.5.1 to 3.5.2, except 3.5.2.4. The chord is defined as the member with
the greater diameter in the joint. If the diameters are the same the program selects
the member with the greater thickness of the two. The chord members must be
collinear by 5 degrees.
The punching shear run sequence is performed in two steps. The program will first
identify all tubular joints and classify them as T type joints (TRACK99). The joints
to be checked will be listed in a file specified in the CODE NPD parameter list,
964 — STAAD.Pro
below called GEOM1. This file is used as input in the second run. The file is an
editable ACSII file saved under the file name given in the CODE NPD parameter.
The TRACK parameter is then set to 98 which directs the program to read from the
file GEOM1 file and use it as input to the second run, i.e., the joint capacity
checking. The program will check the capacity for both chord members entering the
joint. The local y and z moments will be transformed into the plane defined by the
joint itself and the far end joints of the brace and chord, defined as in- and out-of
plane moments.
The ASCII file should be edited to reflect the correct classification of the joints, gap,
can or stub dimensions, yield stress and other geometric options if required. The
program will not change the brace or chord definition if this is changed or modified
in the input file GEOM1. See Appendix A page xx for GEOM1 example file.
Joint classification parameters in the file GEOM1 are:
KO K joint overlapped
KG K joint with gap
TY T or Y joint
X X joint
Input example for the classification run.
*CLASSIFICATION OF JOINTS, TRACK 99

UNITS MM NEWTON
PARAMETER
CODE NPD GEOM1
FYLD 350 ALL
TRACK 99 ALL
BEAM 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
6.1 Static strength of tubular joints
The basic consideration is the chord strength. The required chord wall thickness
shall be
determined when the other dimensions are given.

The following symbols are used:
T = Cord wall thickness
t = Brace wall thickness
R = Outer radius of chord
r = Outer radius of brace
Θ = Angel between chord and considered brace
D = Outer diameter of chord
d = Outer diameter of brace
a = Gap (clear distance) between considered brace and nearest load-

carrying brace measured along chord outer surface
ß = r/R
g = R/T
g = a/D
f = Yield stress
y
Q = Factor
f
Q = See table 6.1
g
Q = See table 6.1
u
Q d = See table 6.1
ß
N = Design axial force in brace
M = Design in-plane bending moment in brace

IP
M = Design out-of plane bending moment in brace
OP
N = Characteristic axial load capacity of brace (as governed by the
k
chord strength)
M = Characteristic out-of-plane bending moment capacity of brace

OPk
(as governed by the chord strength)
σ = Design axial stress in chord

ax
σ = Design in-plane bending stress in chord
IP
966 — STAAD.Pro
σ = Design out-of-plane bending stress in chord
OP
This section gives design formulae for simple tubular joints without overlap and
without gussets, diaphragms or stiffeners. Tubular joints in a space frame structure
shall satisfy:
Q is given in Table 6.1. Qf is a factor to account for the nominal longitudinal stress
u
in the chord.
Table 19A.4 - Values for Q

u
Type of joint and Type of load in brace member
geometry
Axial In-plane Out-of-
bending plane bend-
ing
T and Y 2.5 + 19β 5.0√(γ)β 3.2/(1-0.81β)
X (2.7 + 13β)Q
β
K 0.90(2+21β)Q
β

but in no case shall Q be taken as less than 1.0.

g
When β ≥ 0.9, Q is set to 1.0. This is also applicable for moment loading. For
f
cases with tension in the chord, Qf is set to 1.0. This is also applicable for moment
loading.
The brace end moments shall be accounted for in the following cases:
a. Out-of-plane bending moment when β > 0.85

b. When the brace acts as a cantilever
c. When the rotational stiffness of the connection is considered in the deter-
mination of effective buckling length, and / or the structural coefficient γ
mk
= 1.00 for the beam-column design of the brace or chord. See Section 3.1.3.
The characteristic capacity of the brace subjected to in-plane bending moment

shall be determined by:
The characteristic capacity of the brace subjected to out-of-plane bending moment

shall be determined by:
968 — STAAD.Pro
For combined axial and bending loads in the brace, the following interaction
equation should be satisfied:
For overlapping tubular joints without gussets, diaphragms, or stiffeners, the total
load component normal to the chord, NN, shall not exceed
where (see NPD fig. 3.10)
l = circumference for that portion of the brace in contact with the chord
l
(actual length)
l = circumference of brace contact with chord, neglecting presence of

overlap
N = characteristic axial load capacity of brace

k
t = the lesser of the throat thickness of the overlapping weld or the
w
thickness t of the thinner brace
l = length as shown in NPD fig. 3.10

2
The above formula for the capacity of overlapping joints is valid only for K joints,
where compression in a brace is essentially balanced by tension in brace(s) in the
same side of the joint.
19A.8 - Tabulated Results/ TRACKs

This section presents a table with the various TRACKs available with respect to print
out from the code check. Example prints and explanation to the information /
heading given on the print out is given in Appendix A.

Table 19A.5 - Available TRACKs

TRACK Description
no.
0 Brief print of member utilizations (2 lines for each

member) sorted with highest utilized members first
1 Based on TRACK 3 with additional information regard-

ing stability factors and capacities
2 Simple print of stresses, incl von Mises stress
3 Brief print of member utilizations (2 lines for each

member)
9 Comprehensive print with detailed information about

member and member utilization(one page for each
member)
99 Used in connection with tubular joint check according

to NPD. This TRACK identifies tubular joints to be
checked and classifies all members entering the joint
as T connection
98 Used in connection with tubular joint check according

to NPD. This TRACK performs the joint capacity check
49 Prints member end forces for members entering each

joint (at the end of the member connected to the joint)
31 Prints maximum and minimum member end forces

(axial force defines max and min) at member end 1
32 Prints maximum and minimum member end forces

(axial force defines max and min) at member end 2
970 — STAAD.Pro
Tracks for member code checking
TRACK = 0.0

TRACK = 1.0
972 — STAAD.Pro
TRACK = 2.0

TRACK = 3.0
TRACK = 9.0
Member in tension:
974 — STAAD.Pro
Member in compression:

976 — STAAD.Pro
Member in compression (pipe - NPD):

978 — STAAD.Pro
Tracks for joint capacity code checking
TRACK = 99

TRACK = 98
980 — STAAD.Pro
Special prints (not code check)
TRACK = 49
TRACK = 31

TRACK = 32
982 — STAAD.Pro
Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NORSOK
N-004
19B.1 - General Notes
This section presents a description of the design basis, parameters, and theory
used in STAAD.Pro for performing code checks for tubular members according to
NORSOK N-004 Rev 2, October 2004 (hereafter referred to as N-004).
Please note the following:
l The code check is available for the pipe cross sections only.
l The design of conical transitions and joints with joint cans is not performed.

The implementation of the NORSOK N-004 code in STAAD.Pro considers sections
4, 5, 6 & 7 in of that document. The details of the various clauses implemented
from these sections is presented here for member checking and design.
General Provisions
The general safety check is per Section 4. Checks are made to ensure that the
design action effect (S ) is less than or equal to the design resistance (R ):
d d
S ≤R
d d
The design resistance is evaluated for each condition and this check is applied as
described in the following sections.
Steel selection and non destructive testing
Section 5 deals with the choice of “design class” for structural joints and
components. The choice of design class will determine the choice of steel grade &
quality and also the determination of inspection category for fatigue. The choice of
design class (as per Table 5-1 of the code) is left to you and does not have any
direct impact on how STAAD.Pro performs design checks.

Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NORSOK N-004
Ultimate Limit States
Clause 6.1 primarily deals with the section of material factors to be used in the
various conditions or checks. The material factors chosen are dependent on the
‘section class’ of a cross section. N-004 does not explicitly specify how to classify
various cross sections. Therefore, the section classification is made as given in
Section 5.5 of EN 1993-1-1:2005, except when specified explicitly along with
member checks (See Member Subject to Axial Compression).
Also, N-004 does not specify steel grades to be used. Therefore, this STAAD.Pro
uses the steel grades per EN 1993-1-1:2005 for designs per N-004.
Note: Ring stiffener design to CL. 6.3.6.2 is not included for this
implementation.
Tubular Members
Clause 6.3.1 deals with the general considerations while using tubular members.
Warning: Only tubular sections can be used with the N-004 code in
STAAD.Pro. A warning is presented for any other section type.
The dimensions of the tubular sections are limited as follows:
l The thickness t ≥ 6 mm.

l The thickness t <150 mm.
l The slenderness ratio of the cross section D/t < 120.
Where D is the diameter and t is the wall thickness of the section.

l The yield strength for tubular member ≤ 500 N/mm2.
If any of these conditions are not met for a member selected for design, a warning
will be issued by the engine and the design of that member is aborted.
Note: N-004 uses ‘Y’ to define the action effects that is in plane and ‘Z’ to
define out of plane effects. This is the opposite to what STAAD uses, where ‘Z’
defines the in plane effects and ‘Y’ the out of plane effects. This document will
follow the STAAD.Pro convention for the Z and Y axes.
984 — STAAD.Pro
The N-004 code also segregates members into those that are subject to hydrostatic
pressure and those that are not subject to hydrostatic pressure. The program
allows you to specify whether a member is subject to hydrostatic pressure or not
and, if so, to specify the hydrostatic pressure for the element. By default the
program will assume that all members are not subject to any hydrostatic pressure.
The design parameter HYD is used to specify the maximum water level with respect
to the origin.
If the HYD parameter is specified, the program will take that to be the water level
and will evaluate the pressure distribution on each element assuming a linear
increase in pressure with depth (The density of water is assumed to be 9.8 KN/m3).
Also, if the HYD parameter is specified, the program will assume that the hydrostatic
loads have not been included in the analysis. For members that are subject to a
combination of loads (i.e., bending plus compression) along with a hydrostatic
pressure, the design will be done according to Clause 6.3.9 of the code. In the
absence of any hydrostatic pressure on the member the design will be performed in
accordance with Clause 6.3.8 of the code.
19B.2.1 Ultimate Limit State
Axial Tension
Clause 6.3.2 states that tubular members subject to axial tension shall satisfy the
following condition:
N ≤N = A f /γ
Sd t,Rd y m
Where:
N = Design axial force (tension positive)

Sd
f = Characteristic yield strength
y
A = Cross section area
γ = Default material factor = 1.15

m
Axial Compression
Clause 6.3.3 states that tubular members subject to axial compression shall satisfy
the following condition:

N ≤N = A f /γ
Sd c,Rd c m
Where:
N = Design axial force (compression positive)

Sd
f = Characteristic axial compressive strength
c
γ = Refer to clause 6.3.7
m
The design axial compressive strength for a member that is not subject to any
hydrostatic pressure will be taken as the smaller of in plane or out of plane
buckling strengths determined by the equations given below:
f = [1.0 - 028 λ2]f when λ ≤ 1.34

c y
f = 0.9/λ2 f when λ > 1.34
c y
λ = √(f /f ) = k l/(π i)√(f /E)
cl E cl
Where:
f = Characteristic local buckling strength

cl
λ = Column slenderness parameter
f = Smaller Euler buckling strength in y or z direction.

E
E = Young's modulus of elasticity = 2.1x105 MPa
k = Effective length factor, refer to Clause 6.3.8.2
l = Longer unbraced length in y or z direction
i = Radius of gyration.
The characteristic local buckling strength is determined from:
f = f when f /f ≤ 0.170 (Plastic yielding)

cl y y cle
f = [1.047 - 0.274 f /f ] f when 0.170 < f /f ≤ 1.911
cl y cle y y cle
(Elastic/Plastic)
f =f when f /f > 1.911 (Elastic buckling)

cl cle y cle
Where:
f = 2C E t/D (Characteristic elastic local buckling strength)

cle e
C = 0.3 (Critical elastic buckling coefficient)
e
986 — STAAD.Pro
D = Outside diameter
t = wall thickness
For a member that is subject to pure compression, if f /f > 0.170, the section will
y cle
be classed as a CLASS 4 (slender section). In such cases, the value of the material
factor (γ ) used in the above checks is increased according to equation 6.22 (Cl.
m
6.3.7) of the code.
Bending
Clause 6.3.4 states that tubular members subject to pure bending alone shall
satisfy:
M ≤M =f W/γ
Sd Rd m m
Where:
M = Design bending moment

Sd
f = Characteristic bending strength
m
W = Elastic section modulus

m
The bending strength f is calculated as:
m
f = Z/W f when f D/(E t) ≤ 0.0517
m y y
f = [1.13 - 2.58 f D/(E t)] Z/W f when 0.0517 < f D/(E t) ≤
m y y y
0.1034
f = [0.94 - 0.76 f D/(E t)] Z/W f when 0.1034 < f D/(E t) ≤

m y y y
120 f /E
y
Shear
Clause 6.3.5 states that tubular members subject to shear shall satisfy:
V ≤V = A f /(2√3 γ )
Sd Rd y m)
Where:
V = Design shear force

Sd

f = Yield strength
y
A = Cross section area
γ = Default material factor = 1.15

m
When torsional shear stresses are present, the following condition shall also be
satisfied:
M ≤M = 2 I f /(D√3 γ )
T,Sd T,Rd py m)
Where:
M = Design bending moment

T,Sd
I = Polar moment of inertia
p
Hydrostatic Pressure
Clause 6.3.6 states that tubular members subject to an external pressure shall
primarily be checked for hoop buckling. The condition to be satisfied is:
σ ≤f = f /γ
p,Sd h,Rd h m)
Where:
σ =p D/(2 t)
p,Sd Sd
p = Design hydrostatic pressure
Sd
f = Characteristic hoop buckling strength
h
m)
The characteristic hoop buckling strength f , will be calculated as follows:
h
f = f when f > 2.44 f
h y he y
f = 0.7 f (f /f 0.4
) when 2.44 f ≥ f > 0.55 f
h y he y y he y
f =f when f ≤ 0.55 f
h he he y
The elastic hoop buckling strength f will be worked out as follows:
he
f = 2C E t/D
he h
Where:
988 — STAAD.Pro
C = 0.44 t/D when μ ≥1.6 D/t
h
C = 0.44 t/D + 0.21 (D/t)3/μ4 when 0.825 D/t ≤ μ <1.6 D/t
h
C = 0.737/(μ - 0.579) when 1.5 ≤ μ < 0.825 D/t
h
C = 0.8 when μ <1.5
h
μ = Geometric Parameter = L/D√(2 D/t)
L = Length of tubular member between stiffening rings, diaphragms, or

end connections.
Combined Axial Tension and Bending (without Hydrostatic Pressure)
Clause 6.3.8.1 states that tubular members subject to axial tension and bending
shall be designed to satisfy the following condition:
Where:
M is the design bending moment about the y axis (out-of plane axis)
y,Sd
M is the design bending moment about the z axis (in plane axis)
z,Sd
N is the design axial force
Sd
M is the moment resistance (as determined by Clause 6.3.4)
Rd
N is the tension capacity of the section (as determined by Clause
t,Rd
6.3.2)
Combined Axial Compression and Bending (without Hydrostatic Pres-

sure)
Clause 6.3.8.2 states that tubular members subject to axial tension and bending
shall be designed to satisfy the following conditions:

and
Where:
N is the design axial compression

Sd
C and C are the reduction factors corresponding to the Y and Z
my mz
axes respectively. You may specify a value for these using the CMY and
CMZ design parameters, respectively (default is 0.85 for both).
N and N are the Euler buckling loads about y & z axes and are
ey ez
given by:
k is the effective length factor and is given in table 6-2 of the code.
N is the design axial local buckling resistance given by:

cl, Rd
f is the characteristic local buckling strength (as determined by Clause

cl
6.3.3)
The reduction factors used in this clause depend on the ‘structural element type’
and will be as given in Table 6-2 of N-004. This requires the member to be
classified under any one of the section types given in the table.
990 — STAAD.Pro
Combined Bending and Shear (without Hydrostatic Pressure)
Clauses 6.3.8.3 & 6.3.8.4 state that tubular members subject to beam shear force
(excluding shear due to torsion) and bending moments shall satisfy:
M /M ≤ √(1.4 - V /V ) when V /V ≥ 0.4

Sd Rd Sd Rd Sd Rd
M /M ≤ 1.0 when V /V < 0.4
Sd Rd Sd Rd
If the member is subject to shear forces due to torsion along with bending
moments, the condition to be satisfied is:
M /M ≤ √(1.4 - V /V ) when V /V ≥ 0.4

Sd Red,Rd Sd Rd Sd Rd
M /M ≤ 1.0 when V /V < 0.4
Sd Red,Rd Sd Rd
Where:
M =W f /γ
Red,Rd m,Red m
f = f √[1 - 3(τ /f )2]
m,Red m T,Sd d
τ =M /(2π R2 t)
T,Sd T,Sd
f = f /γ
d y m
R = Radius of the tubular member

m
Combined Loads with Hydrostatic Pressure
Clause 6.3.9 of NS-004 describes two methods to check for members subject to
combined forces in the presence of hydrostatic pressure: depending on whether
the hydrostatic forces were included as nodal forces in the analysis or not. If the
hydrostatic forces have not been included in the analysis as nodal forces, Method A
given in the code is used. If, however, the hydrostatic forces have been included in
the analysis, then Method B in the code is used. Prior to proceeding with the checks
described in the sections below, the section is verified for hoop stress limit per
clause 6.3.6 (see Hydrostatic Pressure above).
The choice of method for checking members subject to combined forces and
hydrostatic pressure used by STAAD.Pro will depend on the HYD parameter
specified as a design parameter. If the HYD parameter has been specified, then the

program will assume that the hydrostatic forces have not been included in the
analysis and will perform the necessary checks as per Method A in code. If, on the
other hand, the HYD parameter has not been specified, the program will use the
section forces and use Method B in the code.
Combined Axial Tension, Bending, and Hydrostatic Pressure
Checks per Clause 6.3.9.1:
A. When HYD is specified:
The following condition is to be satisfied:
a. For the net axial tension condition (σ ≥σ )

a,Sd q,Sd
Where:
σ is the design axial stress, excluding any axial

a,Sd
compression from hydrostatic pressure.
σ is the design axial compressive stress due to

q,Sd
hydrostatic pressure. (i.e., the axial load arising from the
hydrostatic pressure being applied as nodal loads).
σ is the out of plane bending stress

my,Sd
σ is the in plane bending stress
mz,Sd
f = f /γ [√(1 + 0.09 B2 - B2η) - 0.3B]
th,RD y m
f = f /γ [√(1 + 0.09 B2 - B2η) - 0.3B]
mh,RD m m
B=σ /f
psd h,Rd
η = 5 - 4 f /f
h y
b. For the net axial compression condition (σ <σ )
a,Sd q,Sd
992 — STAAD.Pro
Where:
f = f /γ
cl,Rd cl m
f is the characteristic local buckling strength (as
cl
determined by Clause 6.3.3)
Additionally, when:
σ > 0.5 f /γ
c,Sd he m
and
f > 0.5 f
cle he
the following condition shall be satisfied in addition to the above
check(s):
Where:
σ is the maximum compressive stress at that section.

c,Sd
B. When HYD has not been specified:
Where:
σ is the axial stress in the member

ac,Sd
Combined Axial Compression, Bending, and Hydrostatic Pressure
Checks per Clause 6.3.9.2:

A. Method used when HYD has been specified:
and
Where:
σ is the design axial stress that excludes the stress from

a,Sd
hydrostatic pressure
Additionally, when:
σ > 0.5 f /γ
c,Sd he m
and
f > 0.5 f
cle he
the following condition shall be satisfied in addition to the above check(s):
994 — STAAD.Pro
B. Method used when HYD has not been specified:
a. For the net axial tension condition (σ ≥σ )

ac,Sd q,Sd
and
(Refer to the previous section for an explanation of these terms).
b. For the net axial compression condition (σ <σ )

ac,Sd q,Sd
(Refer to the previous section for an explanation of these terms).
Additionally, when:
σ > 0.5 f /γ
c,Sd he m
and
f /γ > 0.5 f /γ
cle m he m
the following condition shall be satisfied in addition to the above
check(s):

Where:
σ is the maximum compressive stress at that section.

c,Sd

structure.
Table 19B.1 - Design Parameters for NORSOK N-004 design code
Name Value
CODE none Must be specified as NORSOK.
Note: Do not use the shortened

NOR, as this initiates an NS3472
design.
FYLD 235 [MPa] Yield strength of steel, f (St37)

y
Note: Note, if the SGR value is

specified, then the associated
value of f for that steel grade will
y
be used for a member in lieu of
the FYLD value.
KY 1.0 Effective length factor, k, in local Y-

axis, usually minor axis.
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor, k, in local Z-

axis, usually major axis.
LY Member Length in local Y axis for slenderness

Length value KL/r
996 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
LZ Member Length in local Z axis for slenderness

Length value KL/r
CMY 0.85 Reduction factor C corresponding

m
to the Y axis.
CMZ 0.85 Reduction factor C corresponding

m
to the Z axis.
LSR Length of Tubular between Stiffening

Rings. This value is required to cal-
culate Design Hoop Stress due to
Hydrostatic Pressure to check Hoop
Buckling as per clause 6.3.6.1.
HYD 0.0 The Y-coordinate, current units, of

the maximum water level with respect
to the origin.
Note: If SET Z UP command has

been specified, then yi will be the
Z co-ordinate of the max water
level.
For HYD > 0, the value of max.

hydrostatic pressure calculated is
reported for each member in a TRACK
2.0 output.
PSD 0.0 Water pressure at each section in

absence of HYD.
SGR 0.0 Steel Grade per EC3 (EN 1993-1-

1:2005):
0.0 = S 235 grade steel


Name Value
DMAX 100.0 [cm] Maximum allowable depth of steel sec-

tion.
DMIN 0.0 [cm] Minimum allowable depth of steel sec-

tion.
DFF None (Man- "Deflection length"/maximum allow-

datory for able local deflection.
deflection
check)
MAIN 0.0 Option to design for slenderness.
0.0 = Check for

slenderness
1.0 = Do not check for

slenderness
Any value greater than

1.0 is used as the limit for
slenderness in
compression.
TMAIN 180.0 Slenderness limit in tension. Slen-

derness limit is checked based the
MAIN parameter.
TRACK 0.0 Output detail:
0.0 = Only a summary of

the design checks
performed is printed.
2.0 = All the details of the

member checks and the
various clause checks
performed are printed.
998 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value

allowable stresses.
BEAM 0.0 Beam segment locations for design:
0.0 = design only for

end moments and those
at locations specified by
SECTION command.
1.0 = Perform design for

moments at twelfth
points along the beam.
DJ1 Start Joint Joint No. denoting start point for cal-
of member culation of “deflection length”
DJ2 End Joint Joint No. denoting end point for cal-
of member culation of “deflection length”
Notes
a. C1 and C2 Parameters
The default values of these coefficients are taken from Table 6-4 of N-004 and
depend on the joint and load type:
Table 19B.2 - Default values for C1 and C2
parameters
Joint Type C1 C2
T or Y joints under brace axial load 25 11
X joints under brace axial load 20 22
K joints under balanced axial load 20 22
All joints under brace moment load- 25 30

ing

Note: These values can be changed by setting the K, X, and Y values in

the external geometry file.
Example
Note: This is a partial example containing only the information pertaining to

the NORSOK N-004 steel design code; used at the end of the input file.
* CHECK TUBULAR MEMBERS ACCORDING NORSOK N-004

CODE NORSOK
HYD 3.0 MEMB 1 TO 3
PSD 10 MEMB 7 10
SGR 2 MEMB 1 TO 3 7 10
TRACK 2 MEMB 1 TO 3 7 10
CHECK CODE MEMB 1 TO 3 7 10
19B.5 Code Checking

properties of the members are adequate as per N-004. Code checking is done
using the forces and moments at specific sections of the members. If no sections
are specified, the program uses the start and end forces for code checking.
members have passed or failed the checks, the critical condition of NORSOK code,
the value of the ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0
or any other specified RATIO value), the governing load case, and the location
(distance from the start of the number of forces in the member) where the critical
condition occurs.

analysis has been performed, the program can select the most economical section
(i.e., the lightest section which fulfills the code requirements for the specified
member). The section selected will be of the same type section as originally
1000 — STAAD.Pro
constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN which limit the maximum and
Selection of members whose properties are originally input from a user created
19B.7 Tubular Joint Checking

The design of tubular joints for this implementation shall be based on section 6.4 of
N-004 and will be applicable to joints formed from a connection of two or more
members.
Figure - Typical Tubular Joint (Fig 6-1 in N004)
Prior to completing a joint design, the joint should be classified into one of the
three categories given by the code. Joint classification is the process whereby a
BRACE member connecting into a CHORD member is classified into one of these
categories based on the axial force components in the brace. The classification
normally considers all the members at a joint that lie in a plane. N-004 defines
three joint classification categories: K, X, or Y (or a combination of these).
Joint Clas- Description

sification
K The axial force in the brace

should be balanced by forces in
the other braces in the same

Joint Clas- Description

sification
plane and on the same side of

the joint. The code allows a
10% tolerance in the balancing
force.
X The axial force in the brace is

reacted as a beam shear in the
chord.
Y The axial force in the brace is

carried through the chord to
braces in the opposite side.
Note: Typical examples of these joint types are given in Figure 6-3 of the N-
004 code. It is worth noting that the joint class for each brace will be different
for each load case.
Note: STAAD.Pro does not perform an automatic classification of the joints.

This is left up to the engineer. All joints will initially be classified as Y in the
generation of the external geometry file. Joints should be re-classified as
necessary before performing the final joint capacity checks.
The checks for joint capacity are given in Cl. 6.4.3.2 to 6.4.3.6 and STAAD.Pro
performs the checks as per these clauses. However, the program does not deal
with conical joint transitions and joints with joint cans. The code also specifies
checks and limits for the gaps and eccentricity of joints. This implementation will
not perform such geometry checks.
The details of the checks done and the methodology will be discussed in the
following sections.
Identification and Classification of CHORD and BRACE Members
This is a two step process where the program automatically identifies the CHORD
and BRACE members at a joint and perform a default joint check. The input
variables used for the initial joint checks will be generated in an external text file.
1002 — STAAD.Pro
You can then use this text file to edit or modify the input variables and perform a
final check as necessary.
The following syntax is used to initiate the joint checking in the engine.
LOAD LIST load_list
PARAMETER 1
CHECK JOINT { node_list | ALL }
Where:
load_list = a list of load case numbers to be check against
node_list = the NODE numbers to be checked. Specifying the ALL

keyword option will cause the program to perform the joint check at all
the nodes.
For each node specified in the CHECK JOINT command, the program automatically
separates out all the members at the node into one CHORD member and one or
more BRACE members. The section with the biggest diameter is assumed to be the
CHORD and all the other members are assumed as BRACE members. If two or more
possible CHORD members have the same diameter, the member with the maximum
thickness is considered as the CHORD. The angle between the two members should
be within the range of 30° and 90° (inclusive).
Once all the CHORD and BRACE members are identified, the program considers
every CHORD to BRACE connection as a separate JOINT. The program the
automatically creates the joints and initially considers all the joints as joint class Y.
The program then performs all the necessary joint checks as detailed in the
following sections and produces the design output. The program will also produce
an output file called FILENAME_ JOINTS.TXT, where "filename" will be the name of
the .STD file. This format of this text file is explained in Section 19B.8.
You can then edit this text file to set up the necessary design parameters. Once the
program finds of the _JOINTS.TXT file, it will read in the necessary parameters
from this file and perform the subsequent design checks.
Note: This file will be produced only once (i.e., when this file does not exist). If
this file exists, it is assumed that you have already done a joint design check and
hence the program reads the values from this file and uses these for joint
checks.

19B.7 Tubular Joint Resistance
Basic Joint Resistances
The characteristic joint resistance between a chord and a brace is given by:
Where:
N is the joint design axial resistance

Rd
M is the joint design bending moment resistance.
Rd
f is the yield strength
y
γ = Default material resistance =1.15
m
θ is the angle between the chord and the brace (max θ = 90 degrees)
Q = Strength factor which varies with the joint type and the action
u
type in the brace. Refer to Table 6-3 and Clause 6.4.3.3 of N-004 for
these equations.
Q = 1.0 – λA2
f
σ is the design axial stress in the chord

p,Sd
σ is the design in-plane bending stress in the chord
my,Sd
σ is the design out-of-plane bending stress in the chord
mz,Sd
C1 is the coefficient used for the axial stress term in calculating the
joint resistance. C2 is the coefficient used for the bending stress term
in calculating the joint resistance. The default values of C1 and C2 are
as given in Table 6-4 of N-004. The actual values used are dependent
1004 — STAAD.Pro
on the values of K, X, and Y specified for the joint in the external
geometry file.
See also Figures 6-3 to 6-6 of N-004 for definition of the various terms
for various joint classes.
Strength Check for Joints
Each brace to chord joint to be checked will have to satisfy the following condition:
Where:
N is the design axial force in the brace,

Sd
N is the joint design axial resistance
Rd
M is the in plane bending moment in the brace
z,Sd
M is the out of plane bending moment in the brace
y,Sd
M is the in plane bending moment resistance
z,Rd
M is the out of plane bending moment resistance
y,Rd
19B.7 External Geometry File

The data contained in the FILENAME_JOINTS.NGO file should meet the following
format. The overall process of performing punching shear checks consists of two
steps which are explained in section 19B.7.
General Format
LOAD LIST load_list

JOINT NODE K X Y CHORD CLEN D T BRACE BLEN d t GAP
j# n# K% X% Y% C# CLEN D T B# BLEN d t gap
Where:
j# = the joint number

n# = the node number
K%, X%, and Y% = The fractional contributions of K-type, X type and

Y-type, respectively. Initially the joints will be classed as Y (i.e., K=0,
X=0 and Y=1).
C# = the member numbers of the CHORD
CLEN = the length of chord member
D, T = Diameter and thickness of CHORD
B# = the member number of the brace
BLEN = the length of chord member
d, t = Diameter and thickness of BRACE
gap = Distance required to calculate gap factor for K bracing. Initially,

the value of GAP is assumed as 0.
Example
LOAD LIST 1 2 4
JOINT NODE K X Y CHORD CLEN D T BRACE
BLEN D T GAP
1 3 0 0 1 2 5.0 0.168 0.10 1 4.0
0.140 0.010 0
2 3 0 0 1 2 5.0 0.168 0.10 16 6.043
0.075 0.005 0
19B.5 Tabulated Results

a. Member refers to the member number for which the design is performed.
b. TABLE refers to the steel section name which has been checked against the
N-004 code or has been selected.
c. RESULTS prints whether the member has PASSed or FAILed. If the RESULT
d. CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the N-004 code which governs the
1006 — STAAD.Pro
design.
e. RATIO prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the
critical condition. Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has
passed.
f. LOADING provides the load case number which governed the design.
g. FX, MY, and MZ provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis, and the
moment in local Z-axis respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the
member forces and moments (except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY
and MZ are printed since they are the ones which are of interest, in most
cases.
table and will print the allowable bending stressed in compression (FCY &
FCZ) and tension (FTY & FTZ), allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and
allowable shear stress (FV).
Sample TRACK 2.0 Output

STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - NORSOK-N004 (V1.0)
************************************************

FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST PIP13910.0 (BRITISH SECTIONS)
PASS Eq. 6.44 0.170 1
0.01 C 1.01 6.39 0.00
=======================================================================
MATERIAL DATA
Grade of steel = S 355
Modulus of elasticity = 204999.98 N/mm2
Design Strength (py) =355.00 N/mm2
SECTION PROPERTIES (units - cm)

Member Length = 400.00
Gross Area of cross section = 40.70
z-axis y-axis
Moment of inertia : 862.000 862.000
Plastic modulus : 168.554 168.554

Norwegian Codes - Concrete Design per NS 3473
Elastic modulus : 123.407 123.407

Radius of gyration : 4.602 4.602
Effective Length : 400.000 400.000
DESIGN PARAMETER (units - m) N004/2004

Height of water lavel : 3.000
CMZ : 0.85 CMY : 0.85
KZ : 1.00 KY : 1.00
SECTION CLASSIFICATION : Class 1
CAPACITIES (units - kN,m)

Tension Capacity : 1256.4
Compression Capacity : 790.1
Bending Capacity : 52.0
Shear Capacity : 362.7
Shear Capacity due to torsional moment: 44.0
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE CALCULATION (units - N,mm) - Cl.6.3.6

Max design hydrostatic pressure, (psd) : 0.000
Max design hoop stress, (sigma_psd)) : 0.000
CRITICAL LOAD FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (units - kN,m):

CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY
Cl:6.3.2 0.000 1 0.0 - - - -
Cl:6.3.3 0.000 1 0.0 - - - -
Cl:6.3.4 0.102 1 - - - -5.3 0.0
Cl:6.3.5 0.031 1 - -11.2 0.5 - -
Cl:6.3.8.(1 & 2) 0.124 1 0.0 - - 6.4 1.0
Cl:6.3.8.(3 & 4) 0.102 1 - -0.5 0.5 -5.3 0.0
Cl:6.3.9 0.170 1 0.0 - - 6.4 1.0
=======================================================================
Norwegian Codes - Concrete Design per NS

3473
19C.1 - General Notes
This section presents a description of the parameters used by STAAD.Pro for
performing code checks members according to Norwegian Standard NS 3473
"Concrete Structures - Design and detailing rules" (hereafter referred to as NS
3473).

1008 — STAAD.Pro
structure.
Table 19B.3 - Design Parameters for NS 3473 design code
Name Value
CODE none Must be specified as NS3473

Reference Manual.
ACTAGE 70 Enter the actual age, in years.

years
BRACE 0 Column Brace Parameter
0. Beam/ Column braced in both direc-

tions.
1. One-way plate/ Column unbraced
about the local z axis only.
2. Column unbraced about the local y
axis only.
3. Column unbraced in both direc-
tions.
CLEAR 25 mm Clear cover to outermost reinforcing bar.
DRYCIR 100% Drying exposure, in percent.
EFACE 0 Distance from the end node of the beam

to face of support for shear design.
ELY 1 Member length factor about the local y

direction.
ELZ 1 Member length factor about the local z

direction
ENVIR 2 Environment class
1. LA — Least aggressive
2. NA — Aggressive

Norwegian Codes - Concrete Design per NS 3473

Name Value
3. MA — Very aggressive
FC 35 Compressive strength of concrete.

N/mm2
FYMAIN 500 Yield strength of main reinforcing steel.

N/mm2
LAGE 7 days Age when loaded, in days.
MAXMAIN 32 Maximum size permitted for main rein-

forcement bar.
MINMAIN 10 Minimum size permitted for main rein-

forcement bar.
MOY moy factor
MOZ moz factor
NMAG nmag factor
REIANG 0 Reinforcement angle, in degrees.
RELHUM 70% Relative humidity, in percent.
RFACE 1 Column bar arrangement
1. Four longitudinal bars.

2. Two faced distribution about minor
axis.
3. Two faced distribution about major
axis.
4. Faced symmetric distribution
SFACE 0 Distance from the start node of the beam

to face of support for shear design.
STIRANG 90 Stirrup angle, in degrees.
STIRDIA 10 mm Stirrup diameter
TORANG 45 Torsion angle, in degrees.
1010 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
TRACK 10 Track parameter to control output detail
10. Beam — Ultimate limit state and

Service limit state design & Slab —
Two-way plate design
Service limit state design with ten-
sion stiffening.
12. Beam — Ultimate limit state design
only
20. Slab — Plane stress design.
30. Slab — Simplified membrane

design.

1012 — STAAD.Pro
Section 20
Cypriot Codes
Cypriot Codes - Concrete Design in Cyprus

control the design to the concrete code of Cyprus. These parameters not only act as
a method to input required data for code calculations but give the Engineer control
over the actual design process. Default values of commonly used parameters for
conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 20A.1 contains a

Table 20C.1 - Cypriot Concrete Design Parameters
Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as CYPRUS.

Manual.
BRACE 0.0 Bracing parameter for column design:
0. Column braced in both directions

1. Column braced in only the local Y
direction.
2. Column braced in only the local Z
direction.
3. Column unbraced in either direc-
tion.






FC 4.0 ksi Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength,

in current units
1014 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
FYMAIN 60 ksi Yield Stress for main reinforcement, in

current units (For slabs, it is for
FYSEC 60 ksi Yield Stress for secondary

Applicable to shear bars in beams.
MAXMAIN 50 mm Maximum required reinforcement bar

above.
MINMAIN 8 mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size

25 32 40 50
MINSEC 8 mm Minimum secondary bar size a.

beams


limit is 23.
0. No serviceability check per-

formed.
1. Perform serviceability check for
beams as if they were con-
tinuous.
beams as if they were simply sup-
ported.
beams as if they were cantilever

Name Value
beams.

beam, in current units. (Only
applicable for shear - use MEMBER
OFFSET for bending )
SRA 0.0 Skew angle considered in Wood &

Armer equations where A is the angle
in degrees.
Two special values are also

considered:
0.0 = Orthogonal
reinforcement layout
without considering
torsional moment Mxy -
slabs only
-500 = Orthogonal
reinforcement layout with
Mxy used to calculate Wood
& Armer moments for
design.
TRACK 0.0 Controls level of detail in output:

results.
1. For beam gives min/max steel %
detailed table of output with addi-
tional moments calculated.
2. Beam design only. Details of rein-
forcement at sections defined by
the NSECTION parameter.
1016 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value


1018 — STAAD.Pro
Section 21
Danish Codes
Danish Codes - Steel Design per DS412

The design parameters outlined in Table 21.1 may be used to control the design
the program and thus allow you to control the design process to suit an
numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design

Table 21D.1 - Danish Steel Design DS412 Parameters
CODE - Must be specified

as DS412
Design Code to
follow.
See section
5.48.1 of the
Technical
Reference
Manual.
BEAM 1.0 1.0 =

Calculate von
Mises at twelfth
points along the
beam.
BY 1.0 Buckling length

coefficient, Beta,
about the local Y
axis.
BZ 1.0 Buckling length

coefficient, Beta,
about the local Z
axis.
CB 1.0 Lateral buckling

coefficient. Used
to calculate the
ideal buckling
moment.
CMY 1.0 Water depth, in

meters, for
hydrostatic pres-
sure calculation
for pipe
members.
1020 — STAAD.Pro
CMZ 0.21 AlphaT in con-

nection with lat-
eral buckling.
CY Buckling curve
coefficient,
Alpha, about
local Y-axis.
CZ Buckling curve
coefficient,
Alpha, about
local Z-axis.
DMAX 1,000 mm Maximum

allowable depth
(Applicable for
member
selection)
DMIN 0.0 mm Minimum

required depth
(Applicable for
member
selection)
FYLD 235 N/mm2 Yield strength of

steel.
MF 1.15 Ratio of material

factor to resist-
ance factor.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio

of actual load
effect to the
design strength.
SSY Equivalent
moment factor,
BetaM, for local
Y-axis. Valid

values between
0 and 2.5.
SSZ Equivalent
moment factor,
BetaM, for local
Z-axis. Valid
values between
0 and 2.5.
TRACK 0.0 Used to specify a

level of detail in
output:
0. Report
only mini-
mum
design
results.
1. Report
design
strengths
also.
2. Provide full
details of
design.
UNL Member Length Unsupported

length in
bending
compression of
the bottom
flange for
calculating
moment
resistance.
1022 — STAAD.Pro
Section 22
Dutch Codes
Dutch Codes - Steel Design per NEN 6770

Available design parameters to be used in conjunction with NEN 6770 are listed in
table 22.1 along with their default values.
Table 22E.1 - Dutch Steel Design NEN 6770 Parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified as DUTCH

Name
BEAM 3.0 Used to specify the number of
sections to be check along the
length of the beam:

forces only.
imum Mz along beam.
forces and forces at loca-
tion of BEAM = 1.0 check.
3. Check at every 1/13th
point of the beam and
report the maximum.
CMM 1.0 Loading type per Tables F.1.1
and F.1.2
1. Pin ended member with uni-

form loading
2. Fix ended member with uni-
form loading
3. Pin ended member with
central point load.
4. Fix ended member with cen-
tral point load.
5. Pin ended member with
point loads at third points.
6. Pin ended member with var-
ying end moments.
CMN 1.0 Used to describe the end
restraints:
1.0 = No fixity
1024 — STAAD.Pro
Name
0.7 = One end fixed,
the other free.
0.5 = Both ends

fixed.
deflection check,
See Note 1d in Section 2B.6.
TRACK 4.0)
Length" . See Note 1 below.
member calculation of "Deflection
Length". See Note 1 below.
DMAX 10,000 cm Maximum allowable depth
KY 1.0 K factor value in local y - axis.
KZ 1.0 K factor value in local z - axis.
LY Member Length Length in local y - axis (current
units) to calculate (KY)(LY)/Ryy
slenderness ratio.
LZ Member Length Length in local z - axis (current
units) to calculate (KZ)(LZ)/Rzz
slenderness ratio.
members.
PY Set according to Design strength of steel
steel grade (SGR)
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual
capacities.

Name
SAME 0.0 Controls the sections to try
during a SELECT process.
0. Try every section of the

same type as original
1. Try only those sections
with a similar name as orig-
inal (e.g., if the original is
an HEA 100, then only HEA
sections will be selected,
even if there are HEM’s in
the same table).
SBLT 0.0 Identify Section type for section
classification
0. Rolled Section
1. Built up Section
SGR 0.0 Steel Grade
0. Grade Fe 360
1. Grade Fe 430
2. Grade Fe 510
TRACK 0.0 Used to control the level output
detail:
0. Output summary of results.

with member capacities.
2. Output detailed results.
3. Deflection Check (separate
check to main select /
check code)
UNL Member Length Unrestrained member length in
lateral torsional buckling checks.
1026 — STAAD.Pro
Section 23
Finnish Codes
Finnish Codes - Concrete Design per B4

control the design to the B4 code. These parameters not only act as a method to
input required data for code calculations but give the Engineer control over the
conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 26B.1 contains a

Table 23F.1 - Finnish Concrete Design per B4 Parameters
Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as FINNISH.

Manual.
ACTAGE 70 Actual age of concrete, in years.
BRACE 0.0 Bracing parameter for design:
0. Beam or column braced in both

directions
1. One-way plate or column braced
in only the local Z direction.
2. Column braced in only the local
Y direction.
tion.

DRYCIR 100 Drying exposure, in percent.




1028 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value

N/mm2
FYMAIN 500 Yield strength of main reinforcing

N/mm2 steel.

forcement bar.

forcement bar.
MOY moy factor
MOZ moz factor
NMAG nmag factor
RELHUM 40 Relative humidity, in percent.

minor axis.
major axis.
SFACE 0 Distance from the start node of the

beam to face of support for shear
design.

Name Value

TRACK 10 Track parameter to control output

detail

Service limit state design & Slab
— Two-way plate design
Service limit state design with
tension stiffening.
12. Beam — Ultimate limit
state design only

design.
Finnish Codes - Steel Design per B7

structure.
Table 23F.2 - Design Parameters for Norwegian Steel design code
Name Value
CODE none Must be specified as either NS3472 for
1030 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
NS or NPD for NPD (NOR may also be

used for both).

Reference Manual.
BEAM 0.0 Parameter BEAM 1.0 ALL tells the

program to calculate von Mises at 13
sections along each member, and up to
8 points at each section. (Depending
on what kind of shape is used.)
Note: Must be set to 1.0
BY 1.0 Buckling length coefficient, β for weak

axis buckling (y-y) (NOTE: BY > 0.0)
BZ 1.0 Buckling length coefficient, β, for

strong axis buckling (z-z) (NOTE: BZ >
0.0)
CB 1.0 Lateral buckling coefficient, Y. Used to

calculate the ideal buckling moments,
M
vi
CMY 1.0 Water depth in meters for hydrostatic
pressure calculation for pipe members
CMZ 0.49 α for sections in connection with lat-

LT
eral buckling
CY Default Buckling curve coefficient, a about

see NS local z-axis (strong axis). Represent
CZ
3472 the a, a0, b, c, d curve.
DMAX 100.0 Maximum allowable depth of steel sec-

[cm] tion.

Name Value
DMIN 0.0 [cm] Minimum allowable depth of steel sec-

tion.
FYLD 235 Yield strength of steel, fy (St37)

[N/mm2 ]
MF 1.1 Material factor / Resistance factor, γ

m
(NS3472)
1.15
(NPD)
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual to allow-

able stresses.
SSY 0.0 0.0 = No sidesway. β calculated. > 0.0

= Sidesway in local y-axis weak axis
β =SSY
M
SSZ 0.0 0.0 = No sidesway. β calculated. > 0.0
= Sidesway in local y-axis weak axis
β
M
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Supress critical member stresses.
1.0 = Print all critical member
stresses, i.e., DESIGN VALUES 2.0 =
Print von Mises stresses. 9.0 = Large
output, 1 page for each member. See
section 7 and Appendix A for complete
list of available TRACKs and print exam-
ples.
UNL Member Effective length for lateral buckling cal-

length culations (specify buckling length). Dis-
tance between fork supports or
between effective side supports for the
beam
The parameter CMY will, when given with negative value, define an inside pressure
in pipe members. The pressure corresponds to given water depth in meters.
1032 — STAAD.Pro
The parameter CB defines the φ value with respect to calculation of the ideal lateral
buckling moment for single symmetric wide flange profiles, ref. NS app. 5.2.2.

1034 — STAAD.Pro
Section 24
Singaporian Codes
Singaporean Codes - Concrete Design per CP65

control the design per the CP65 code. These parameters not only act as a method
to input required data for code calculations but give the Engineer control over the
conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 24.1 contains a

Table 24G.1 - Singaporean Concrete Design CP65 Parameters
Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as CP65.

Manual.
BRACE 0.0 Bracing parameter for column design:
0. Column braced in both directions

1. Column braced in only the local Y
direction.
2. Column braced in only the local Z
direction.
tion.






FC 4.0 ksi Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength,

in current units
1036 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
FYMAIN 60 ksi Yield Stress for main reinforcement, in

current units (For slabs, it is for
FYSEC 60 ksi Yield Stress for secondary

Applicable to shear bars in beams.
MAXMAIN 50 mm Maximum required reinforcement bar

above.
MINMAIN 8 mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size

25 32 40 50
MINSEC 8 mm Minimum secondary bar size a.

beams


limit is 23.
0. No serviceability check per-

formed.
beams as if they were con-
tinuous.
beams as if they were simply sup-
ported.
beams as if they were cantilever

Name Value
beams.

beam, in current units. (Only
applicable for shear - use MEMBER
OFFSET for bending )
SRA 0.0 Skew angle considered in Wood &

Armer equations where A is the angle
in degrees.
Two special values are also

considered:
0.0 = Orthogonal
reinforcement layout
without considering
torsional moment Mxy -
slabs only
-500 = Orthogonal
reinforcement layout with
Mxy used to calculate Wood
& Armer moments for
design.
TRACK 0.0 Controls level of detail in output:

results.
1. For beam gives min/max steel %
detailed table of output with addi-
tional moments calculated.
2. Beam design only. Details of rein-
forcement at sections defined by
the NSECTION parameter.
1038 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value


1040 — STAAD.Pro
Section 25
Spanish Codes
Spanish Codes - Concrete Design per EHE

per the Española del Hormigón Estructural (EHE) code. These parameters not only
act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the engineer
control over the actual design process. Default values, which are commonly used
numbers in conventional design practice, have been used for simplicity. Table
25A.1 contains a list of available parameters and their default values.

Table 25H.1 - Spanish Concrete Design per EHE Parameters
Name Value
CLB 1.5 in Clear cover to reinforcing bar at bottom

of cross section.
CLS 1.5 in Clear cover to reinforcing bar along the

side of the cross section.
CLT 1.5 in Clear cover to reinforcing bar at top of

cross section.
DEPTH YD Depth of the concrete member. This

value defaults to YD as provided under
MEMBER PROPERTIES.
EFACE 0.0 Distance of face of support from end

Face of node of beam. Used for shear and
Support torsion calculation.

positive numbers.
FC 4.0 ksi Specified compressive strength of

concrete.
FYMAIN 60 ksi Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel.
FYSEC 60 ksi Yield Stress for secondary reinforcing

steel.
MAXMAIN Number Maximum main reinforcement bar size.

55 bar
MINMAIN Number Minimum main reinforcement bar size

10 bar
MINSEC Number Minimum secondary (stirrup)

10 bar reinforcement bar size.
MMAG 1.0 A factor by which the column design

moments will be magnified.
1042 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value
considered in finding critical moments

for beam design.
REINF 0.0 Used to specify type of column shear

reinforcement:
0. Tied Column.
1. Spiral Column.
SFACE 0.0 Distance of face of support from start

node of beam. Used for shear and
torsion calculation.

positive numbers.
TRACK 0.0 Used to specify detail of output:
0. Only minimum details are printed

for beam or column designs.
1. Beam Design: Intermediate level of

detail.
Column Design: TRACK 0 output

plus intermediate level of detail.
2. Beam Design: TRACK 1 detail plus

steel required at 1/12th secitons.
Column Design: detailed output.
WIDTH ZD Width of the concrete member. This

value defaults to ZD as provided under
MEMBER PROPERTIES.

1044 — STAAD.Pro
Section 26
Swedish Codes
Swedish Codes - Concrete Design per BBK 94

control the design to the BBK 94 code. These parameters not only act as a method
to input required data for code calculations but give the Engineer control over the
conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 26B.1 contains a

Table 26I.1 - Swedish Concrete Design per BBK 94 Parameters
Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as SWEDISH.

Manual.
ACTAGE 70 Actual age of concrete, in years.
BRACE 0.0 Bracing parameter for design:
0. Beam or column braced in both

directions
1. One-way plate or column braced
in only the local Z direction.
2. Column braced in only the local
Y direction.
tion.

DRYCIR 100 Drying exposure, in percent.




1046 — STAAD.Pro
Name Value

N/mm2
FYMAIN 500 Yield strength of main reinforcing

N/mm2 steel.

forcement bar.

forcement bar.
MOY moy factor
MOZ moz factor
NMAG nmag factor
RELHUM 40 Relative humidity, in percent.

minor axis.
major axis.
SFACE 0 Distance from the start node of the

beam to face of support for shear
design.

Name Value

TRACK 10 Track parameter to control output

detail

Service limit state design & Slab
— Two-way plate design
Service limit state design with
tension stiffening.
12. Beam — Ultimate limit
state design only

design.
1048 — STAAD.Pro
Technical Support
These resources are provided to help you answer support questions:
l Service Ticket Manager — http://www.bentley.com/serviceticketmanager —

Create and track a service ticket using Bentley Systems' online site for report-
ing problems or suggesting new features. You do not need to be a Bentley
SELECT member to use Service Ticket Manager, however you do need to reg-
ister as a user.
l Knowledge Base — http://appsnet.bentley.com/kbase/ — Search the Bentley
Systems knowledge base for solutions for common problems.
l FAQs and TechNotes — http://-
communities.bentley.com/Products/Structural/Structural_Analysis___
Design/w/Structural_Analysis_and_Design__Wiki/structural-product-tech-
notes-and-faqs.aspx — Here you can find detailed resolutions and answers to
the most common questions posted to us by you.
l Ask Your Peers — http://-
communities.bentley.com/forums/5932/ShowForum.aspx — Post questions
in the Be Community forums to receive help and advice from fellow users.

1050 — STAAD.Pro
Index Australian Codes 7, 9
Axial Compression 266, 795

A Axial Tension 266, 795
AIJ 1991 See Concrete Design, Clause 3.13 795
AIJ 1991
stress 266
AIJ 2002 See Steel Design, AIJ
2002 Axially Loaded Members 288, 305,
307, 309
AIJ 2005 See Steel Design, AIJ
2005 Design 288, 305, 307, 309
AISC 97 B
Alclad 776 British
Aluminum Design 773 Codes 57
American Transmission Tower Code795, National Annex See National

801, Annex, British
803 British Codes 81-82, 108
Analysis BS 5950-5 See Steel Design, BS
PDelta 14 5950-5
ANSI/AISC N690 Codes 823 BS EN 1993-1-1 337
AS 1170 21 BS4360 96
AS 3600 9 BS5400 See Steel Design,

BS5400
AS 3600 - 2001 See Concrete
Design, AS 3600 BS5950 See Steel Design,
BS5950
AS 4100 - 1998 See Steel Design,
AS 4100 BS8007 See Steel Design,
BS8007
ASCE 10 795
BS8110 See Concrete Design,
ASCE 10-97 See Steel Design, BS8110
ASCE 10-97
ASCE Manuals 801, 803
ASME NF Codes 869

Index: CAN/CSA-086-01 – Egyptian Codes
C NTC 1987 651
CAN/CSA-086-01 See Wood SABS-0100-1 739

Design,
CSA 156, 160
CAN/CSA-086-
01 CSA A23.3 See Concrete
Design, CSA A23.3
Canadian Codes 153
CSA CAN/CSA-S16-01 See Steel
Canadian Wood Design Manual227
Design, CSA
Changing 266 CAN/CSA-
S16-01
Chinese Codes 247, 261, 266-
267 D
Cold Formed Steel DD ENV 284
IS801 593 DD ENV 1993 283, 288
Combined Loading 267 Design 288, 305, 307, 309,

323
stress 266
Axially Loaded Members 288,
Concrete Design
305,
AIJ 1991 603 307,
309
AS 3600 9
Design Rules 459
BBK 94 1045
Structural Steelwork 459
BS8110 59, 62
Dutch
CP65 1035
National Annex See National
CSA A23.3 155 Annex, Dutch
DIN 1045 473 E
Egyptian Code 433 EC5 405
Eurocode EC2 275 ECCS205 433
GB50010 249 Egyptian
IS13920 521 Section 2.6.3 444
IS456 495 Egyptian Codes 431
1052 — STAAD.Pro
EN 1993 301 IS456
Equivalent slenderness 89 IS801 See Steel Design, IS801
Eurocode 283, 288, 303, 305, J

307, 309, 323
Japanese
Steel Design 288, 301, 305,
Codes 601
307, 309, 323
Concrete Design See Concrete
European Codes 273, 275, 303,
Design, AIJ
305, 307, 309,
1991
323
Steel Design See Steel Design,
Extrusions 781
AIJ 2005
F
M
Finnish
Modulus of Elasticity 29
N
Annex, Finnish
N690 Codes 823
French
National Annex 302, 332, 336,
Codes 451
343
Concrete Design 453
British 337
Dutch 337
Annex, French
Finnish 337
Steel Design 459
French 337
G
Norwegian 337
GB 1591 96
Polish 337
GBJ 50017-2003 See Steel
Design, GBJ National Application Documents 275,
50017 284
I NEN-EN 1993 337
IS13920 See Concrete Design, NF EN 1993-1-1 337
IS13920
Norwegian
IS456 See Concrete Design,
Codes 923

Index: NS-EN 1993 – Stress
National Annex See National ASCE 10-97 793

Annex, Nor-
BS 5950-5 123
wegian
BS5400 113
NS-EN 1993 337
BS5950 81, 108
NTC 1987 See Concrete Design,
NTC 1987 BS8007 119
P CSA CAN/CSA-S16-01 163
PN EN 1993-1-1 337 DIN 481
Polish DS412 1019
National Annex See National EC3 301
Annex, Polish
Egyptian Code 441
S
Eurocode 283, 288, 301,
S136-94 See Steel Design, 303, 305, 307,
S136-94 309, 323
SAB0162-1 1993 See Steel French Code 459
Design,
SAB0162-1 GBJ 50017 261
1993 IS801 593
SABS-0100-1 See Concrete NEN 6770 1023
Design, SABS-
0100-1 NTC 1987 669
SFS EN 1993-1-1 337 S136-94 207
SNiP 2.23-81 See Steel Design, SAB0162-1 1993 747

SNiP 2.23-81
SNiP 2.23-81 715
Steel Design 288, 305, 307,
Stress 266
309, 323, 795,
801, 803 Axial Compression 266
AIJ 2002 613 Axial Tension 266
AIJ 2005 613, 632 Bending 267
ANSI/AISC N690-1994 825 Combined Loading 267
AS 4100 19
1054 — STAAD.Pro
Structural Steelwork 459 Wood Design
Design Rules 459 CAN/CSA-086-01 215
T Y
Timber Design Yield Strength 803
EC5 405 Young's Modulus See Modulus of

Elasticity
U
UK

Annex, British
Verification Problem
AIJ 2005 643
ASME NF 3000 1974 880
ASME NF 3000 1989 893
ASME NF 3000 1998 907
ASME NF 3000 2004 919
British Cold Formed Steel 137
CSA 185, 189, 193, 197
CSA Wood 227
EC5 420, 425
SAB0162-1 763, 766, 769
Weld Type 97
Wood and Armer Moments 62, 121,

1016,
1038

International Codes V8i

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

International Codes V8i

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

STAAD.

International Design Codes Manual

International Design Codes Manual — i

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENTS

Technical Reference Manual 4

International Design Codes 5

Section 1 Australian Codes 7

Australian Codes - Steel Design per AS 4100 - 1998 19

Section 2 British Codes 57

British Codes - Steel Design per BS5950:2000 81

British Codes - Design per BS5400 113

British Codes - Design per BS8007 119

International Design Codes Manual — iii

Canadian Codes - Concrete Design per CSA Standard A23.3-94

Canadian Codes - Steel Design per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-

Canadian Codes - Design Per Canadian Cold Formed Steel

Canadian Codes - Wood Design Per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-

Section 4 Chinese Codes 247

Chinese Codes - Steel Design Per GBJ 50017-2003 261

Section 5 European Codes 273

European Codes - Steel Design Per Eurocode 3 283

5B.5(B).4.1 Basic stress check 313

5B.5(B).4.2 Detailed stress check 316

European Codes - Timber Design Per EC 5: Part 1-1 405

Section 6 Egyptian Codes 431

Egyptian Codes - Steel Design Per Egyptian Code # 205 441

Section 7 French Codes 451

French Codes - Steel Design per the French Code 459

Section 8 German Codes 471

Section 9 Indian Codes 493

Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS13920 521

Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS800:1984 547

Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS802 569

Section 10 Japanese Codes 601

Japanese Codes - Steel Design Per 2005 AIJ 613

Section 11 Mexican Codes 649

Mexican Codes - Steel Design Per Mexican Code 669

Section 12 Russian Codes 683

Russian Codes - Steel Design Per Russian Code SNiP 2.23-81*

Section 13 South African Codes 737

South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard SAB0162-

Section 14 American Aluminum Code 773

International Design Codes Manual — v

Section 16 Steel Design per American Petroleum Insti-

ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code 845

Section 18 American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASME NF 3000 - 1989 Code 883

ASME NF 3000 - 2004 Code 897

ASME NF 3000 - 2004 Code 910

Section 19 Norwegian Codes 923

Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NORSOK N-004 983

Norwegian Codes - Concrete Design per NS 3473 1008

Section 20 Cypriot Codes 1013

Section 21 Danish Codes 1019

Section 22 Dutch Codes 1023

Section 23 Finnish Codes 1027

Finnish Codes - Steel Design per B7 1030

Section 25 Spanish Codes 1041

Section 26 Swedish Codes 1045

Technical Support 1049

International Design Codes Manual — vii

This document is to be used in conjunction with the STAAD Technical Reference

International Design Codes Manual — 1